NVA100X-D

THE COMPREHENSIVE SOLUTION FOR DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION

OF GENERATORS/MOTORS/TRANSFORMERS

MANUAL

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

 TA BL E OF CON T EN T S
— 1 INTRODUCTION 6
Scope and liability ...........................................................................................................................................................................................6
Applicability ......................................................................................................................................................................................................6
Conformity ........................................................................................................................................................................................................6
Service support ...............................................................................................................................................................................................6
Copyright...........................................................................................................................................................................................................6
Warranty ...........................................................................................................................................................................................................6
Safety recommendations ...............................................................................................................................................................................6
Insulation tests ................................................................................................................................................................................................6
Product identification .....................................................................................................................................................................................7
Environment .....................................................................................................................................................................................................7
Graphical conventions ...................................................................................................................................................................................7
Glossary/definitions ........................................................................................................................................................................................7
— 2 GENERAL 11
Preface............................................................................................................................................................................................................11
Photo ...............................................................................................................................................................................................................11
Main features.................................................................................................................................................................................................12
— 3 TECHNICAL DATA 13
3.1 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 13
Measuring relays and protection equipment .......................................................................................................................................... 13
Mechanical data .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 13
Insulation test ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 13
Voltage dip and interruption ....................................................................................................................................................................... 13
EMC tests for interference immunity ........................................................................................................................................................ 13
Emission ..........................................................................................................................................................................................................14
Mechanical tests...........................................................................................................................................................................................14
Climatic tests..................................................................................................................................................................................................14
Safety ..............................................................................................................................................................................................................14
Certifications .................................................................................................................................................................................................14
3.2 INPUT CIRCUITS ...............................................................................................................................................................................................15
Auxiliary power supply Uaux ......................................................................................................................................................................15
Phase current inputs - side H and side L ..................................................................................................................................................15
Residual current inputs - side 1 and side 2 ...............................................................................................................................................15
Phase voltage inputs ....................................................................................................................................................................................15
Residual voltage input ..................................................................................................................................................................................15
Binary inputs ..................................................................................................................................................................................................15
Block input (Logic selectivity) .....................................................................................................................................................................15
3.3 OUTPUT CIRCUITS ............................................................................................................................................................................................16
Relays ..............................................................................................................................................................................................................16
Block output (Logic selectivity)...................................................................................................................................................................16
3.4 MMI (Man Machine Interface) ......................................................................................................................................................................16
3.5 COMMUNICATION INTERFACES ...................................................................................................................................................................16
Local port ........................................................................................................................................................................................................16
Remote ports ..................................................................................................................................................................................................16
3.6 RATED VALUES AND GENERAL SETTINGS ..................................................................................................................................................17
Rated values...................................................................................................................................................................................................17
Transformer data (87T element) ..................................................................................................................................................................17
Binary inputs ..................................................................................................................................................................................................17
Output relays ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 18
Input sequence ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 18
Polarity ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 18
Starting control set ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 18
3.7 PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS .............................................................................................................................................................................. 18
Base current - IB .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 18
Underimpedance - 21 .................................................................................................................................................................................. 18
Thermometric probes - 26 ........................................................................................................................................................................... 19
Undervoltage - 27 ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 19
Positive sequence undervoltage - 27V1 ................................................................................................................................................... 19
Directional active overpower 32P ............................................................................................................................................................. 19
Undercurrent - 37 ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 20
Directional active underpower 37P........................................................................................................................................................... 20
Loss of field - 40 ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 20
Negative sequence overcurrent for Generator protection - 46G .........................................................................................................21
Negative sequence overcurrent for Motor protection - 46M ...............................................................................................................21
Phase rotation direction check - 47 ..........................................................................................................................................................22
Thermal image for Motor/generator protection - 49MG .........................................................................................................................22
2 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016
 Phase overcurrent - 50/51 side H .............................................................................................................................................................. 23
Phase overcurrent - 50/51 side L ................................................................................................................................................................24
Locked rotor - 51LR(48)/14 ...........................................................................................................................................................................25
Voltage-controlled / restraint overcurrent - 51V ......................................................................................................................................26
Residual overcurrent - 50N.1/51N .1 or High impedance restricted earth fault - 87NHIZ.1 - side 1 ...............................................26
Residual overcurrent - 50N.2/51N .2 or High impedance restricted earth fault - 87NHIZ.2 - side 2 .............................................. 28
Calculated residual overcurrent - 50N(Comp)/51N(Comp).................................................................................................................... 29
Minimum power factor - 55 ........................................................................................................................................................................ 30
Overvoltage - 59 ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 30
Residual overvoltage - 59N..........................................................................................................................................................................31
Negative sequence overvoltage - 59V2.....................................................................................................................................................31
High impedance restricted earth fault - 64REF ........................................................................................................................................32
Maximum number of startings (Restart inhibition) - 66...........................................................................................................................32
Directional earth fault overcurrent- 67N ...................................................................................................................................................32
Directional earth fault overcurrent with calculated residual current- 67N(Comp)............................................................................34
Overfrequency - 81O .....................................................................................................................................................................................36
Underfrequency - 81U ..................................................................................................................................................................................37
Differential - 87G-87M-87T...........................................................................................................................................................................37
Breaker failure - BF.......................................................................................................................................................................................37
3.8 CONTROL AND MONITORING ....................................................................................................................................................................... 38
Second harmonic restraint - 2ndh-REST.................................................................................................................................................. 38
Trip Circuit Supervision - 74TCS ................................................................................................................................................................. 38
Selective block - BLOCK2 ........................................................................................................................................................................... 38
Internal selective block - BLOCK4 ............................................................................................................................................................. 38
Circuit Breaker supervision ........................................................................................................................................................................ 38
VT supervision - 74VT .................................................................................................................................................................................. 38
CT supervision - 74CT side H ...................................................................................................................................................................... 38
CT supervision - 74CT side L....................................................................................................................................................................... 39
Pilot wire diagnostic .................................................................................................................................................................................... 39
Demand measures ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 39
Oscillography (DFR) ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 39
3.9 METERING......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 40
Accuracy (type test)..................................................................................................................................................................................... 40
Measures....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 40
— 4 FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS 42
4.1 HARDWARE .......................................................................................................................................................................................................42
Power supply board ......................................................................................................................................................................................42
CPU module ....................................................................................................................................................................................................42
Input board .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 43
MMI (keyboard, LED and display) ............................................................................................................................................................. 43
4.2 FIRMWARE.........................................................................................................................................................................................................44
Base software................................................................................................................................................................................................44
Real-time operating system.........................................................................................................................................................................44
Task ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................44
Drivers .............................................................................................................................................................................................................45
Application Software ....................................................................................................................................................................................45
Data Base .......................................................................................................................................................................................................45
Self test (Application) ...................................................................................................................................................................................45
Development tool (Builder) ..........................................................................................................................................................................45
4.3 I/0 .........................................................................................................................................................................................................................46
Metering inputs .............................................................................................................................................................................................46
Signal processing ..........................................................................................................................................................................................46
Conventions....................................................................................................................................................................................................52
Polarity reversing ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 53
Use of measured signals..............................................................................................................................................................................56
Binary inputs ..................................................................................................................................................................................................57
Output relays ..................................................................................................................................................................................................64
LED indicators ................................................................................................................................................................................................67
Communication interfaces.......................................................................................................................................................................... 70
4.4 PROTECTIVE ELEMENTS .................................................................................................................................................................................71
Rated values...................................................................................................................................................................................................71
Transformer menu .........................................................................................................................................................................................76
Underimpedance - 21 ...................................................................................................................................................................................77
Thermal protection with RTD thermometric probes - 26 ....................................................................................................................... 83
Undervoltage - 27 ..........................................................................................................................................................................................85
Positive sequence undervoltage - 27V1 ................................................................................................................................................... 89
Directional active overpower - 32P............................................................................................................................................................91
Undercurrent - 37 ..........................................................................................................................................................................................94
Directional active underpower - 37P .........................................................................................................................................................96
NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 3
 Loss of field - 40 ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 99
Negative sequence overcurrent for Generator protection - 46G........................................................................................................105
Negative sequence overcurrent for motor protection - 46M ............................................................................................................. 110
Phase rotation direction check - 47 .........................................................................................................................................................117
Thermal image - 49MG for motor or generator protection .................................................................................................................. 118
Phase overcurrent - 50/51 side H and side L ......................................................................................................................................... 129
Locked rotor- 50S/51LR(48)/14 .................................................................................................................................................................. 139
Voltage controlled/restraint overcurrent - 51V ......................................................................................................................................145
Residual overcurrent - 50N.1/51N.1, 50N.2/51N.2 or high impedance restricted earth fault - 87NHIZ.1, 87NHIZ.2 side 1,2 ....152
Residual overcurrent - 50N(Comp)/51N(Comp) side H or side L ........................................................................................................ 163
Minimum power factor - 55 ..................................................................................................................................................................... 173
Overvoltage - 59 ...........................................................................................................................................................................................177
Residual overvoltage - 59N........................................................................................................................................................................181
Negative sequence overvoltage - 59V2...................................................................................................................................................185
Low impedance restricted ground fault- 64REF .....................................................................................................................................187
Ground directional overcurrent - 67N......................................................................................................................................................192
Ground directional overcurrent with calculated residual current - 67N(Comp) ..............................................................................215
Overfrequency - 81O ...................................................................................................................................................................................227
Underfrequency - 81U ............................................................................................................................................................................... 229
Breaker failure - BF.....................................................................................................................................................................................246
Logical block - BLOCK1 ............................................................................................................................................................................. 248
Selective block -BLOCK2 .......................................................................................................................................................................... 250
Internal selective block -BLOCK4 .............................................................................................................................................................255
Logical block summary.............................................................................................................................................................................. 258
Remote tripping .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 260
Frequency tracking .....................................................................................................................................................................................261
Second Harmonic Restraint - 2ndh-REST ...............................................................................................................................................262
Cold Load Pickup - CLP ............................................................................................................................................................................. 263
Cold Load Pickup - CLP for motor-generator protection ......................................................................................................................264
Summary of elements where second harmonic restraint and Cold Load Pickup functions may be enabled .............................266
CT supervision - 74CT .................................................................................................................................................................................267
VT supervision - 74VT ................................................................................................................................................................................ 268
Trip circuit supervision - 74TCS................................................................................................................................................................ 270
Circuit breaker supervision ...................................................................................................................................................................... 273
Virtual I/O ......................................................................................................................................................................................................275
Demand measures ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 279
Oscillography ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 279
— 5 MEASURES, LOGIC STATES AND COUNTERS 280
Measures..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 280
Protection states .........................................................................................................................................................................................282
Delayed inputs .............................................................................................................................................................................................282
Internal states ..............................................................................................................................................................................................282
Relays ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 283
Counters....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 283
Self test ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 283
Pilot wire diagnostic ...................................................................................................................................................................................284
Selective Block - BLOCK2 ..........................................................................................................................................................................284
Fault recording - SFR ..................................................................................................................................................................................284
Event recording - SER.................................................................................................................................................................................285
Oscillography - DFR ....................................................................................................................................................................................285
— 6 INSTALLATION 288
6.1 PACKAGING .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 288
6.2 MOUNTING ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 288
6.3 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS ........................................................................................................................................................................291
6.4 RATED In AND Ien SETTINGS ..................................................................................................................................................................... 299
6.5 LED COMMISSIONING ................................................................................................................................................................................. 299
6.6 FINAL OPERATIONS ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 299
— 7 PROGRAMMING AND SETTINGS 300
7.1 SW ThySetter.................................................................................................................................................................................................. 300
ThySetter use .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 300
7.2 MMI (Man Machine Interface) ....................................................................................................................................................................301
Reading variables (READ) ..........................................................................................................................................................................301
Setting modifying (SET) ..............................................................................................................................................................................302
TEST .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 303
COMMUNICATION ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 303
Circuit breaker commands ....................................................................................................................................................................... 303
Enable / block changes via keyboard - Password.................................................................................................................................304

4 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

 7.3 MENU TREE......................................................................................................................................................................................................306
7.4 MAINTENANCE ...............................................................................................................................................................................................321
7.5 REPAIR ..............................................................................................................................................................................................................321
7.6 PACKAGING .....................................................................................................................................................................................................321
— 8 APPENDIX 322
8.1 APPENDIX A1 - Inverse time curves ...........................................................................................................................................................322
8.2 APPENDIX A1 - Inverse time IEC curves .................................................................................................................................................. 323
Mathematical formula ............................................................................................................................................................................... 323
46M - First element - Standard inverse time curve (type A) ................................................................................................................324
46M - First element - Very inverse time curve (IEC 60255-3/BS142 type B).......................................................................................325
46M - First element - Extremely inverse time curve (IEC 60255-3/BS142 type C) ............................................................................326
Phase overcurrent 50/51 side H and side L - Standard inverse time curve (IEC 60255-3/BS142 type A) ....................................327
Phase overcurrent 50/51 side H and side L - Very inverse time curve (IEC 60255-3/BS142 type B) ............................................ 328
Phase overcurrent 50/51 side H and side L - Long Time Inverse curve (IEC 60255-3/BS142 type B) .......................................... 329
Phase overcurrent 50/51 side H and side L - Extremely inverse time curve (IEC 60255-3/BS142 type C) .................................. 330
Residual overcurrent 50N.1/51N.1, 50N.2/51N.2 and 50N(Comp)/51N(Comp) - Standard inverse time curve
(IEC 60255-3/BS142 type A) ..................................................................................................................................................................331
Residual overcurrent 50N.1/51N.1, 50N.2/51N.2 and 50N(Comp)/51N(Comp) -Very inverse time curve
(IEC 60255-3/BS142 type B) ..................................................................................................................................................................332
Residual overcurrent 50N.1/51N.1, 50N.2/51N.2 and 50N(Comp)/51N(Comp) - Long Time Inverse curve
(IEC 60255-3/BS142 type B) ................................................................................................................................................................. 333
Residual overcurrent 50N.1/51N.1, 50N.2/51N.2 and 50N(Comp)/51N(Comp) - Extremely inverse time curve
(IEC 60255-3/BS142 type C) ..................................................................................................................................................................334
Ground directional overcurrent - 67N - Standard inverse time curve (IEC 60255-3/BS142 type A) ............................................335
Ground directional overcurrent - 67N - Very inverse time curve (IEC 60255-3/BS142 type B) ......................................................336
Ground directional overcurrent - 67N - Extremely inverse time curve (IEC 60255-3/BS142 type C) ............................................337
Ground directional overcurrent 67N(Comp) - Standard inverse time curve (IEC 60255-3/BS142 type A) .................................. 338
Ground directional overcurrent 67N(Comp) - Very inverse time curve (IEC 60255-3/BS142 type B) .......................................... 339
Ground directional overcurrent 67N(Comp) - Extremely inverse time curve (IEC 60255-3/BS142 type C) ................................. 340
8.3 APPENDIX A3 - Inverse time ANSI/IEEE curves .......................................................................................................................................341
Mathematical formula ................................................................................................................................................................................341
Negative sequence overcurrent 46M - Moderately inverse time curve (ANSI/IEEE type MI) .....................................................342
Negative sequence overcurrent 46M - Very inverse time curve (ANSI/IEEE type VI) .................................................................. 343
Negative sequence overcurrent 46M - Extremely inverse time curve (ANSI/IEEE type EI) ..........................................................344
Phase overcurrent 50/51 side H and side L - Moderately inverse time curve (ANSI/IEEE type MI) ............................................345
Phase overcurrent 50/51 side H and side L - Very inverse time curve (ANSI/IEEE type VI) ..........................................................346
Phase overcurrent 50/51 side H and side L - Extremely inverse time curve (ANSI/IEEE type EI).................................................347
Residual overcurrent 50N.1/51N.1, 50N.2/51N.2 e 50N(Comp)/51N(Comp) - Moderately inverse time curve
(ANSI/IEEE type MI) ............................................................................................................................................................................. 348
Residual overcurrent 50N.1/51N.1, 50N.2/51N.2 and 50N(Comp)/51N(Comp) - Very inverse time curve (ANSI/IEEE type VI) 349
Residual overcurrent 50N.1/51N.1, 50N.2/51N.2 and 50N(Comp)/51N(Comp) - Extremely inverse time curve (EI) .................. 350
Directional ground overcurrent 67N - Moderately inverse time curve (ANSI/IEEE type MI) .......................................................351
Directional ground overcurrent 67N - Very inverse time curve (ANSI/IEEE type VI) .....................................................................352
Directional ground overcurrent 67N - Extremely inverse time curve (ANSI/IEEE type EI) ........................................................... 353
Directional ground overcurrent 67N(Comp) - Moderately inverse time curve (ANSI/IEEE type MI) ...........................................354
Directional ground overcurrent 67N(Comp) - Very inverse time curve (ANSI/IEEE type VI).........................................................355
Directional ground overcurrent 67N(Comp) - Extremely inverse time curve (ANSI/IEEE type EI) ...............................................356
8.4 APPENDIX A3 - Inverse time - RECTIFIER, I2t and EM curves...............................................................................................................357
Mathematical formula ................................................................................................................................................................................357
Phase overcurrent 50/51 side H and side L - Rectifier curves............................................................................................................ 358
Negative sequence overcurrent 46M - I2t inverse curves (I2t=K) .................................................................................................... 359
Phase overcurrent 50/51 side H and side L - I2t inverse curves (I2t=K) ............................................................................................ 360
Phase overcurrent 50/51 side H and side L - I2t inverse curves (I2t=K) ............................................................................................361
Negative sequence overcurrent 46M - Electromechanical inverse curves (EM)............................................................................362
Phase overcurrent 50/51 side H and side L - Electromechanical inverse curves (EM) ................................................................. 363
Residual overcurrent 50N.1/51N.1, 50N.2/51N.2 and 50N(Comp)/51N(Comp) - Electromechanical inverse curves (EM) .........364
Ground directional overcurrent 67N - Electromechanical inverse curves (EM) ..............................................................................365
Ground directional overcurrent 67N(Comp) - Electromechanical inverse curves (EM) .................................................................366
8.5 APPENDIX B1 - I/O Diagram .........................................................................................................................................................................367
8.6 APPENDIX B2 - Interfaces ........................................................................................................................................................................... 368
8.7 APPENDIX B3 - Protective elements .......................................................................................................................................................... 369
8.8 APPENDIX B4 - Connection diagrams ....................................................................................................................................................... 370
8.9 APPENDIX C1 - Pro-NX Dimensions ............................................................................................................................................................374
8.10 APPENDIX E - Revisions history ...................................................................................................................................................................375
8.11 APPENDIX F - EC Declaration of conformity ..............................................................................................................................................376

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 5

— Scope and liability
1 INTRODUCTION
The technical characteristics of NVA100X-D, protective relays instructions for installation, adjust-
ment and commissioning are illustrated.
This manual has been checked out, however, deviations from the description cannot be completely
ruled out, so that no liability in a legal sense for correctness and completeness of the information or
from any damage that might result from its use is formally disclaimed.
The information given in this document is reviewed regularly; any corrections and integration will be
included in subsequent editions that are identified by the date of revision.
We appreciate any suggestions for improvement.
We reserve the right to make technical improvements without notice.

— Applicability
This manual is valid for NVA100X-D devices with firmware version 1.70 and following.
— Conformity
The product complies with the CEE directives:
• EMC Council Directives 2014/30/EC
• Low voltage Directives: 2014/35/EC
— Service support
Contact: Service tecnico THYTRONIC www.thytronic.it

— Copyright

All right reserved; It is forbidden to copy, modify or store material (document and sw) protected by
copyright without Thytronic consent.

— Warranty
Thytronic warrants devices against defects in materials and workmanship under normal use for a
period of ONE (1) year from the date of retail purchase by the original end-user purchaser (“Warranty
Period”).

— Safety recommendations
The warming contained in this document are all-important for safety; special attention must be paid
to the following symbols:

Death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage will result if proper precautions
DANGER are not taken

CAUTION Minor personal injury or property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken

Death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage can result if proper precautions
WARNING are not taken.

Installation and commissioning must be carried out by qualified person; Thytronic assumes no re-
sponsibility for damages caused from improper use that does not comply all warning and caution in
this manual.
In particular the following requirements must be met:
• Remove power before opening it.
• Verify the voltage absence by means suitable instrumentation on relay connections; attention must
be paid to all circuits supplied by external sources (binary input, CT, etc...)
• Care must be taken when handling metal parts.

Settings must be established on the basis of a coordination study.

CAUTION Numerical values inside examples have educational purpose only; they don’t be used, in no way,
for actual applications.

— Insulation tests
After insulation tests, hazardous voltages (capacitor charges,...) may be arise; it is advisable to grad-
ually reduce the test voltage avoiding to erase it abruptly.

6 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

INTRODUCTION
— Product identification
Each device is equipped with:
• Identification label installed on the front side with following informations: code number, phase and
residual nominal currents, auxiliary voltage range and CE mark[1]:

In 5A 1A 5A UEn 100V
IEn 1A 1A 5A Un 100V
UAUX 110-230 Vac/dc

NVA100X#0D2J0TE0

• Test label with following informations: data, serial number and test operator signature[2].

— Environment
The NVA100X-D device must be employed according to the environment conditions shown (see tech-
nical data).
In case of different environment conditions, appropriate provisions must be provided (conditioning
system, humidity control, etc...).
If contaminants are present (dust, corrosive substances, etc...), filters must be provided.
— Graphical conventions
The CEI/IEC and ANSI symbols is employed where possible:
e.g.: 51 = ANSI code concerning the overcurrent element.
Following text formats are used:
The ThySetter menu:
Phase overcurrent -50/51
The parameter description (measures, thresholds, operate time,...) and related value:
I> element
Definite time
I>def

The display messages (MMI) are shown as:

NVA100X

Notes are highlighted with cursive letters inside colored bar

Note: Useful description note

— Glossary/definitions
fn Rated frequency
I nH Relay phase rated current side H
I npH Phase CT primary rated current side H
I nL Relay phase rated current side L
I npL Phase CT primary rated current side L
I ng Protected device rated current
I En1 Relay residual rated current (input 1)
I Enp1 Residual CT primary rated current (input 1)
I En2 Relay residual nominal current (input 2)
I Enp2 Residual CT primary nominal current (input 2)
ANSI codes:
21 Underimpedance
26 Thermal with Pt100 probes
27 Undervoltage
27V1 Positive sequence undervoltage
32P Directional active overpower
37 Undercurrent
37P Directional active underpower
40 Loss of field
46M-46G Negative sequence overcurrent
47 Phase reversal
49MG Thermal image
50/51 Phase overcurrent side H and side L
51LR(48)/14 Locked rotor
51V Voltage restraint overcurrent
50N1-2/51N1-2/87NHIZ* Residual overcurrent (sides1-2)/
High impedance restricted earth fault
50N(Comp)/51N(Comp) Calculated residual overcurrent
55 Minimum power factor
Note 1 The rating data can be found on labels on the back and on the front (accessible after removing the left frame)
Note 2 The rating data can be found on labels on the front plate (accessible after removing the right frame)

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 7

INTRODUCTION
 59 Overvoltage
59N Residual overvoltage
59V2 Negative sequence overvoltage
64REF Low impedance restricted earth fault
66 Maximum number of startings (Restart inhibition)
67N Ground directional overcurrent
67N(Comp) Ground directional overcurrent with calculated
residual current
81O/81U Overfrequency and underfrequency
87G-87M/87T Double slope biased differential for generator/motor/transformer
BF Circuit breaker failure
74CT-74VT CT-VT supervision
74TCS Trip circuit supervision
52 o CB (Circuit Breaker) Circuit Breaker
52a Auxiliary contact in the breaker that is in the same position as the
breaker. It can be assigned to a binary input to locate the CB position
(Breaker failure and/or CB diagnostic functions).
52b Auxiliary contact in the breaker that is in the opposite position as the
breaker (52b open = CB closed)
DFR Digital Fault Recorder (Oscillography)
SER Sequential Event Recorder
SFR Sequential Fault Recorder
ANSI American National Standard Institute
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
CENELEC Comité Européen de Normalisation Electrotechnique

K1...Kx Output relays

Pulse Output relay with pulse operation
tTR Output relay minimum pulse width
Latched Output relay with latched operation (manual reset) Output relay with
latched operation (automatic reset)
No-latched Output relay with no-latched operation (automatic reset)

CT Current Transformer
ThySensor Combo device
P1 IEC nomenclature for primary polarity mark of CTs (as an alternative to
a ANSI dot)
P2 IEC nomenclature for primary polarity mark of CTs (as an alternative to
a ANSI no-dot)
S1 IEC nomenclature for secondary polarity mark of CTs (as an alternative
to a ANSI dot)
S2 IEC nomenclature for secondary polarity mark of CTs (as an alternative
to a ANSI no-dot)
Self test Diagnostic
Start Leave an initial condition or reset condition (Pickup)
Trip Operation (with operate time)

Operating time Duration of time interval between the instant when the character-
istic quantity in reset condition is changed, under specified condi-
tions, and the instant when the relay operates
Dropout ratio The ratio of a reset value to an operate value in well-specified con-
ditions. The dropout ratio may be lower or greater than 1 according
as an over or under element is considered
Reset time Duration of the time interval between the instant when the charac-
teristic quantity in operate condition is changed, under specified
conditions, and the instant when the relay operates.
The stated reset time is related to a step variation of characteristic
quantity in operate condition to the reset condition.
Overshoot time The critical impulse time for a relay which is in its reset condition, is
the longest duration a specified change in the input energizing quan-
tities (characteristic quantity), which will cause the relay to change
to operate condition, can be applied without the relay switches. The
overshoot time is the difference from the operate time and the criti-
cal impulse time. The declared values for the overshoot time are ap-
plicable with the lower setting value of the operation time.
MMI (Man Machine Interface) Operator front panel
ThySetter Setting and monitoring software
Subnet Mask (Ethernet nomenclature)
Sw Software
Fw Firmware
Upgrade Firmware upgrade
XML eXtensible Markup LanguageXML
EXtensible Markup Language
Upgrade Firmware upgrade

8 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

INTRODUCTION
 Symbols

I>> Threshold setting (e.g. pickup I>>).

The value is available for reading and is adjustable by means ThySetter + MMI.

I Limit block (I>> threshold).

I ≥ I>>
I L1
I L2 Ma x [I L1 ,I L2 ,I L3 ] Computation block (Max phase current)
I L3

Curve type (definite/inverse time)

T 0

Logic internal signal (output); may be a logical state (e.g.I>> Start) or a numerical value
I>> Start
It is available for reading (ThySetter + communication interface)

Logic external signal (intput); may be a command coming from a binary input or a sw command
IPh Block2
It is available for reading (ThySetter + communication interface)

Internal signal (e.g. Breaker Failure output state concerning to the 2nd threshold of the 50 element)
I>> BF_OUT It is not available for reading (missing arrow)

Switch

& & AND and NAND logic gates

≥1 ≥1 OR and NOR logic gates

=1 EXOR logic gate

INPUT

t ON t ON t ON t ON t ON

T 0 ON delay timer with reset (t ON delay)

RESET OUTPUT

RESET
t

INPUT
t ON
ON delay timer without reset (t ON delay) t ON t ON t ON
T 0

OUTPUT
t

INPUT
t OFF
OFF delay timer (dropout) without reset (t OFF delay) t OFF t OFF
0 T

OUTPUT
t

Symbols.ai

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 9

INTRODUCTION
 INPUT

t OFF t OFF t OFF

0 T OFF delay timer (dropout) with reset (t OFF delay)

RESET OUTPUT

RESET t OFF
t

INPUT
t TR
Minimum pulse width operation for output relays (t TR) t TR t TR
0 T

OUTPUT
t

INPUT

Latched Latched operating mode for output relays and LEDs

OUTPUT
t

INPUT

t TR t TR
Pulse operating mode for output relays
t TR
OUTPUT
t

Symbols1 .ai

10 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

INTRODUCTION
 2 GENERAL
— Preface
The relay can be typically used in radial or meshed MV and LV networks as differential protection of
power generator/motor or transformer.
The phase and amplitude adaptation of the current for differential protection can be achieved can be
done either either by internal compensation or through external adapters.
Following input circuits are available:
• Three phase current side H and three phase current side L with rated currents independently se-
lectable at 1 A or 5 A by means of sw settings
• Two residual current side 1 and side 2 with rated currents independently selectable at 1 A or 5 A
by means of sw settings
• Three phase voltages (line-to-ground) with rated voltages programmable in the range 50...130 V
(UR=100V) or 200...520 V (UR = 400V) and one residual voltage input with nominal voltage program-
mable in the range 50...130 V (UER=100V)
In addition to the main protection element, the breaker failure (BF), CT monitoring (74CT), VT monitor-
ing (74VT)and Trip Circuit Supervision (TCS), are also provided.
Setting, programming and reading operations must be effected by means of Personal Computer with
ThySetter software or by means of remote communication interface (RS485 bus and Ethernet net-
work); all operations must be performed through MMI.

— Photo

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 11

GENERAL
— Main features
• Metallic case.
• Backlight LCD graphic Display.
• Sixteen LEDs that may be joined with matrix criteria to many and various functions.
• RESET key to clear LED indications and latched output relays.
• Sixteen or thirty-two free settable binary inputs.
• Independently settable for start, trip, self-test and control eight, sixteen output relay. Each output
relay may be set with normally energized or normally de-energized operating mode and manual or
automatic reset (latched/no-latched).
• Rear Ethernet communication port, with MODBUS TCP/IP® or IEC61850 protocol, with RJ45 (cop-
per wires) and FX (optical fiber) connection.
• Rear RS485 port, with ModBus protocol.
• Ethernet front serial port (local communication for ThySetter).
• IRIG-B syinchronizing input port (optional)
• Real time clock with super capacitor.

The most significant constructive features are:

• Galvanically insulated input and output circuits (communication and binary circuits included).
• Optimum filtering of input signals through combined use of analog and digital filters.
• Traditional electromechanical-type final output contacts with continuous monitoring of control coil
continuity.
• Auxiliary supply comprising a switching-type voltage stabilizing circuit having a very wide working
range and a very small power dissipation
• Nominal frequency: 50 or 60 Hz.

The most significant operating features are:

• Programming of operating modes and parameters by means of the front keys and alphanumeric
display, with a programming procedure based on carrying out guided selections and on explicit and
immediate signalling of the operations being performed, so that such procedure can be carried out
without coding tables or mnemonic informations.
• The feature modification operations do not interrupt the normal functions of the relay.
• Impossibility of programming unacceptable parameter values, thanks to the automatic limitation of
top and bottom scale values for the relative setting ranges.
• Currents are sampled 64 times per period and measured in the effective value (RMS) of the funda-
mental component using the DFT (Discrete Fourier Transform) algorithm and digital filters.
• The fault recorder (SFR) runs continuously capturing in circular mode the last twenty events upon
trigger of binary input/output and/or element pickup (start-trip).
• The event recorder (SER) runs continuously capturing in circular mode the last three hundred
events upon trigger of binary input/output.
• Recording of the last setting changes (Logger).
• Digital fault recorder (DFR) in COMTRADE format (oscillography).
• All settings and data recordings (faults, events, meterings and oscillography records) are stored in
non-volatile memory and then are retained even when the auxiliary power supply goes down.

12 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

GENERAL
 3 T ECHNICA L DATA
3.1 GENERAL
— Measuring relays and protection equipment
Reference standards IEC 60255-1
Part 1: Common requirements
— Mechanical data
Mounting:
• Flush.
• Rack.
External dimensions (Flush mounting) 177 x 252 x 245 (high x width x depth)
Terminals screw connections
Mass (Flush mounting) 4.5 kg

Reference standards EN 60529, EN 60529/A1

Protection degree
• Front IP52
• Terminals IP20
— Insulation test
Reference standards EN 60255-5, IEC 60255-27
High voltage test (50 Hz 60 s)
• Auxiliary power supply 2 kV
• Input circuits 2 kV
• Output circuits 2 kV
• Output circuits (between open contacts) 1 kV
• RS232/RS485 communication interfaces 500 V
Impulse voltage withstand test (1.2/50 μs):
• Auxiliary power supply 5 kV
• Input circuits 5 kV
• Output circuits 5 kV
• Output circuits (between open contacts) 1 kV
Insulation resistance >100 MΩ

— Voltage dip and interruption

Reference standards EN 61000-4-29, IEC 60255-22-11
Voltage dips, short interruptions and voltage variations on dc input power port immunity tests
• Interruption (UT=40%) 100 ms
• Interruption (UT=0%) 50 ms
• Voltage variations (UT=80...120%) 10 s

— EMC tests for interference immunity

Reference standards IEC 60255-26, EN 60255-26
Electromagnetic compatibility requirements for measuring relays and protection equipment
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - Generic standards EN 61000-6-2
Apparati di automazione e controllo per centrali e stazioni elettriche (ENEL utility standard)
• Compatibilità elettromagnetica - Immunità ENEL REMC 02
• Normativa di compatibilità elettromeccanica per apparati e sistemi ENEL REMC 01

Reference standards EN 60255-22-1 IEC 60255-22-1

EN 61000-4-12 EN 61000-4-12
Damped oscillatory wave
• 0.1 MHz and 1 MHz common mode 2.5 kV
• 0.1 MHz and 1 MHz differential mode 1.0 kV
• Ring wave common mode 2.0 kV
• Ring wave differential mode 1.0 kV
Reference standards EN 60255-22-2 IEC 60255-22-2
EN 61000-4-2 IEC 61000-4-2
Electrostatic discharge
• Contact discharge 6 kV
• Air discharge 8 kV

Reference standards EN 60255-22-3 IEC 60255-22-3

EN 61000-4-3 IEC 61000-4-3
Radiated radio-frequency fields
• 80...1000 MHz AM 80% 10 V/m
• 900 MHz Pulse modulated 10 V/m

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 13

TECHNICAL DATA
 Reference standards EN 60255-22-4 IEC 60255-22-4
EN 61000-4-4 IEC 61000-4-4
Fast transient burst (5/50 ns)
• Auxiliary power supply 2 kV
• Input circuits 4 kV

Reference standards EN 60255-22-5 IEC 60255-22-5

EN 61000-4-5 IEC 61000-4-5
High energy pulse
• Uaux (line-to-ground 10 ohm, 9 μF) 2 kV
• Uaux (line-to-line 0 ohm, 18 μF) 1 kV
• I/O ports (line-to-ground 40 ohm, 0.5 μF) 2 kV
• I/O ports (line-to-line 40 ohm, 0.5 μF) 1 kV

Reference standards EN 60255-22-6 IEC 60255-22-6

EN 61000-4-6 IEC 61000-4-6
Conducted radio-frequency fields
• 0.15...80 MHz AM 80% 1kHz 10 V

Reference standards EN 60255-22-7 IEC 60255-22-7

EN 61000-4-16 IEC 61000-4-16
Power frequency
• Dc voltage 30 V
• 50 Hz continuously 30 V
• 50 Hz 1 s 300 V
• 0.015...150 kHz 30 V

Reference standards EN 61000-4-8 IEC 61000-4-8

Magnetic field 50 Hz
• 50 Hz continuously 100 A/m
• 50 Hz 1 s 1 kA/m

Reference standards EN 61000-4-10 IEC 61000-4-10

Damped oscillatory magnetic field
• Damped oscillatory wave 0.1 MHz 30 A/m
• Damped oscillatory wave 1 MHz 30 A/m

— Emission
Reference standards EN 60255-25 IEC 60255-25
EN 61000-6-4 IEC 61000-6-4
EN 55011 CISPR 11
Electromagnetic emission tests
• Conducted emission auxiliary power supply 0.15...0.5 MHz 79 dB μV
• Conducted emission auxiliary power supply 0.5...30 MHz 73 dB μV
• Radiated emission 30...230 MHz 40 dB μV/m
• Radiated emission 230...1000 MHz 47 dB μV/m

— Mechanical tests
Reference standards EN 60255-21-1 EN 60255-21-2 RMEC01
Vibration, shock, bump and seismic tests on measuring relays and protection equipment
• EN 60255-21-1 Vibration tests (sinusoidal) Class 1
• EN 60255-21-2 Shock and bump test Class 1

— Climatic tests
Reference standards IEC 60068-x ENEL R CLI 01 CEI 50
Environmental testing
Ambient temperature -25...+70 °C
Storage temperature -40...+85 °C
Relative humidity 10...95 %
Atmospheric pressure 70...110 kPa

— Safety
Reference standards IEC 60255-27
Pollution degree 3
Reference voltage 250 V
Overvoltage category III

— Certifications
Product standards EN 50263
CE Conformity
• EMC Directive 2014/30/EC
• Low Voltage Directive 2014/35/EC
Type tests IEC 60255-1

14 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

TECHNICAL DATA
3.2 INPUT CIRCUITS
— Auxiliary power supply Uaux
Voltage
Nominal value (range)[1] 24...48 V~/-
115...230 V~/110...220 V-
Operative range (each one of the above nominal values) 19...60 V~/-
85...265 V~/75...300 V-
Inrush current (max)
• 24 V- 6 A, 5 ms
• 48 V- 14 A, 5 ms
• 110 V- 20 A, 1 ms
• 230 V~ 50 A, 1 ms
Frequency (for alternate voltage supply) 45...66 Hz
Max distortion factor ( for alternating voltage supply) 15%
Max alternating component (for dc voltage supply):
• Full wave rectified sine wave 100 %
• Sine wave 80 %
Power consumption:
• 1 energized relay, MMI ON, Ethernet active (24V, 48V, 110V-) 10 W
• 1 energized relay, MMI ON, Ethernet active (230 V~) 22 VA

— Phase current inputs - side H and side L

Relay nominal phase current I nH and InL 1 A or 5 A selectable by sw
Permanent overload 25 A
Thermal overload (1 s) 500 A
Dynamic overload (half cycle) 1250 A
Rated consumption (for any phase) ≤ 0.002 VA with I n =1 A
≤ 0.04 VA with I n =5 A

— Residual current inputs - side 1 and side 2

Relay nominal residual current I En1 and I En2 1 A or 5 A selectable by sw or dip-switch
Permanent overload 25 A
Thermal overload (1 s) 500 A
Dynamic overload (half cycle) 1250 A
Rated consumption ≤ 0.006 VA with I En =1 A
≤ 0.12 VA with I En =5 A
— Phase voltage inputs
Relay phase to phase nominal voltage U n [2] 50...130 V (U R = 100 V)
200...520 V (U R = 400 V)
Relay phase nominal voltage E n = U n / √3 -
Permanent overload 1.3 U n
Thermal overload (1 s) 2 Un
Rated consumption (for any phase) ≤ 0.5 VA

— Residual voltage input

Relay residual nominal voltage U En 50...130 V
Permanent overload 1.3 U En
Thermal overload (1 s) 2 U En
Rated consumption ≤ 0.5 VA

— Binary inputs
Quantity 16 o 32[1]
Type optocoupler
Operative range 24...265 V~/-
Min activation voltage UDIGmin 18 V[3]
Max consumption, energized 3 mA
Timers
• Acquisition delay OFF/ON (IN1 tON, IN2 tON) 0.00...100.0 s
• Acquisition delay ON/OFF (IN1 tOFF, IN2 tOFF) 0.00...100.0 s
Logic DIRECT/INVERSE

— Block input (Logic selectivity)

Quantity 1
Type polarized wet input (powered by internal isolated supply)
Max consumption, energized 5 mA

Note 1 Version must be selected at ordering

Note 2 U R = 100 V or U R = 400 V version must be selected at ordering
Note 3 Through external module AUX-IN the activation threshold can be selected:
- 24V (20 Vdc/15 Vac)
- 110V (82...84 Vdc/61...63 Vac),
- 230V (200...204 Vdc/144...147 Vac),

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 15

TECHNICAL DATA
3.3 OUTPUT CIRCUITS
— Relays
Quantity 8 or 16 [1]
Type
• KC1-1, KC1-2, KC1-7, KC1-8, KC2-1, KC2-2, KC2-7, KC2-8 changeover (SPDT, type C)
• KC1-3, KC1-4, KC1-5, KC1-6, KC2-3, KC2-4, KC2-5, KC2-6 make (SPST-NO, type A)
Rated current 8A
Short duration current (0,5 s) 30 A
Rated voltage/max switching voltage 250 V~/400 V~
Make 1000 W/VA
Minimum switching load 300 mW (5 V/ 5 mA)
Life
• Mechanical 106
• Electrical 105
Breaking capacity:
• Direct current (L/R = 40 ms) 50 W
• Alternating current (λ = 0,4) 1250 VA
Minimum pulse width 0....500 ms (step 5 ms)

— Block output (Logic selectivity)

Quantity 1
Type optocoupler

3.4 MMI (MAN MACHINE INTERFACE)

Display 128 x 64 graphic LCD

LEDs
Numero 16
• ON/fail (verde) 1
• Start (giallo) 1
• Trip (rosso) 1
• Programmabili (rosso) 13

Keyboard 8 keys

3.5 COMMUNICATION INTERFACES

— Local port
Ethernet 100 Base TX
• Baud rate 230400 bps
• Protocol ModBus®TCP/IP
• Connector RJ45

— Remote ports
RS485
• Connection screw terminals
• Baud rate 1200...57600 bps
• Protocol[2] ModBus®RTU
IEC 60870-5-103
DNP3

Ethernet 100BaseT
• Connection[3] Optical fiber 1300 nm, ST
100 Base TX, RJ45
• Baud rate 100 Mbps
• Protocol ModBus®TCP/IP, IEC51850 Level A

• Enable Delayed Trip[4] ON/OFF

• Delayed Trip delay time 0.00...10.00 s (step 0.01 s)

Note 1 The quantity of binary inputs and output relays (8+8 relè di comando o 8 relè di comando +16 relè di segnalazione) depend on the version that
must be specified at ordering
Note 2 Different version must be selected at ordering
Note 3 Different version must be selected at ordering; two redundant port selectable with TX (RJ45) or FX (fiber) connections or two ports with TX
(RJ45) connections. The secondary port is activated in the event of failure of the primary port or by means of hw-sw switching command
Note 4 Parameters concern the IEC61850 protocol. Settings are available inside the Set \ Base menu.

16 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

TECHNICAL DATA
3.6 RATED VALUES AND GENERAL SETTINGS
— Rated values
Relay nominal frequency (fn) 50, 60 Hz
Relay phase rated current - side H and L (InH and InL ) 1 A or 5 A [1]
Phase CT primary rated current side H and L (InpH and InpL ) 1 A...20 kA
1...499 A (step 1 A)
500...4990 A (step 10 A)
5000...20000 A (step 100 A)
Relay residual rated current - side 1 and 2 (IEn1 and IEn2 ) 1 A or 5 A [1]
Residual CT primary rated current - side 1 and 2(IEnp1 e IEnp2 )1 A...20.0 kA
1...499 A (step 1 A)
500...4990 A (step 10 A)
5000...20000 A (step 100 A)
Relay phase to phase rated voltage (Un) [2] 50...130 V (step 1 V)
200...520 V (step 1 V)
Relay residual rated voltage (measured) (UEn) 50...130 V
Residual primary rated voltage (phase-to-phase) ∙√3 (UEnp) 50 V...500 kV
50 V...500 kV
50...499 V (step 1 V)
500...4990 V (step 10 V)
5000...49900 V (step 100 V)
50000...500000 V (step 1000 V)
Relay calculated residual rated voltage (UECn) UECn = Un · √3 = 3 · En
Relay phase to ground rated voltage (En) En = Un / √3
Line VT primary rated voltage (phase-to-phase) (Unp) 50 V...500 kV
50...499 V (step 1 V)
500...4990 V (step 10 V)
5000...49900 V (step 100 V)
50000...500000 V (step 1000 V)
Relay rated active power (Pn) Pn = √3 ∙ Un ∙ In = 3 ∙ En ∙ In
Relay rated reactive power (Qn) Qn = √3 ∙ Un ∙ In = 3 ∙ En ∙ In
Relay rated apparent power (Sn) Sn = √3 ∙ Un ∙ In = 3 ∙ En ∙ In
Relay rated impedance (Zn) Zn= Un/InL
Relay rated phase impedance (Znf) Znf= En/InL
Rated current of the protected object (Ing) 1 A...20 kA
1...499 A (step 1 A)
500...4990 A (step 10 A)
5000...20000 A (step 100 A)

Primary nominal current chosen as reference (Inref )[3] - (set by device)

Side reference for compensation (Refsize)[2] - (set by device)
Current matching type (MatchType) INTERNAL/EXTERNAL
Protected object by differential protection (ProtObj) Motor-Generator-Transformer

— Transformer data (87T element)

Transformer rated power (Snt ) 0.01...1000.00 MVA (step 0.01 MVA)
Transformer rated voltage side H and L (VntH, VntL ) 0.200...500.00 kV
0.200...0.999 kV (step 0.001 kV)
1.00...500.00 kV (step 0.01 kV)
Transformer rated current side H (IntH) [3] - (set by device)
Transformer mismatching factor side H (mH)[3] - (set by device)
Transformer base current side H (IBH)[3] - InH
Transformer grounding side H (GndH) In/Out
Transformer connection side H (ConnH) Y/D/Z
Transformer vector group side H (VectGroupH) 0
Transformer rated current side L (IntL ) [3] - (set by device)
Transformer mismatching factor side L (mL )[3] - (set by device)
Transformer base current side L (IBL )[3] - InL
Transformer grounding side L (GndL ) In/Out
Transformer connection side L (ConnL ) y/d/z
Transformer vector group side L (VectGroupL ) 0-1-2-...11
— Binary inputs
OFF/ON delay time (IN1 tON, INx tON) 0.10...100.0 s
0.10...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
ON/OFF delay time (IN1 tOFF, INx tOFF) 0.10...100.0 s
0.10...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Logic Active-ON/Active-OFF

Note 1 The nominal current settings doesn’t concern the protection elements; they must agree setting (1 A or 5 A)
Note 2 The setting ranges of the relay rated voltage UR are dependent on the purchased version (100 V or 400 V)
Nota 3 Calculated by relay

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 17

TECHNICAL DATA
— Output relays
Minimum pulse width 0.000...0.500 s (step 0.005 s)
Logic De-energized/Energized
Operating mode Latched/No latched

— Input sequence
Side H phase current sequence (I-SequenceH) IL1-IL2-IL3, IL1-IL3-IL2....
Side L phase current sequence (I-SequenceL) IL1-IL2-IL3, IL1-IL3-IL2....
Phase voltage sequence (U-Sequence) UL1-UL2-UL3, UL1-UL3-UL2,....

— Polarity
A1-A2 Terminals polarity (A1-A2 POL) NORMAL/REVERSE
A3-A4 Terminals polarity (A3-A4 POL) NORMAL/REVERSE
A5-A6 Terminals polarity (A5-A6 POL) NORMAL/REVERSE
A7-A8 Terminals polarity (A7-A8 POL) NORMAL/REVERSE
B3-B4 Terminals polarity (B3-B4 POL) NORMAL/REVERSE
B5-B6 Terminals polarity (B5-B6 POL) NORMAL/REVERSE
B7-B8 Terminals polarity (B7-B8 POL) NORMAL/REVERSE
B9-B10 Terminals polarity (B9-B10 POL) NORMAL/REVERSE
C1-C2 Terminals polarity (C1-C POL) NORMAL/REVERSE
C3-C4 Terminals polarity (C3-C POL) NORMAL/REVERSE
C5-C6 Terminals polarity (C5-C6 POL) NORMAL/REVERSE
C7-C8 Terminals polarity (C7-C8 POL) NORMAL/REVERSE

— Starting control set

CLP input source (CLP Source) IRUN/CB
IRUN Threshold (IRUN) 0.10 IB

3.7 PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS

— Base current - IB
Base current (IB)[1] 0.10...2.50 In (step 0.01 In)
— Underimpedance - 21
Z< Element
Definite time
First threshold definite time (Z<def) 0.02...3.00 Z n [2] (step 0.01 Zn)
Operate time (t Zdef<) 0.07...100.0 s
0.07...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Reset time delay (t Z<RES) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Z<< Element
Definite time
Second threshold definite time (Z<<def) 0.02...3.00 Z n [2] (step 0.01 Zn)
Operate time (t Zdef<<) 0.07...100.0 s
0.07...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Reset time delay (t Z<<RES) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Pickup time ≤ 0.04 s
Dropout ratio 1.03...1.05
Dropout time ≤ 0.05 s
Overshoot time 0.03 s
Reference values rest: 1.5 I T
trip: 0.5 I T [3]
Pickup accuracy ± 4% ± 0.5% Zn
Operate time accuracy 5% or ± 10 ms

Nota 1 The base current IB represents the rated current of the line or transformer, referred to the nominal current of the CT’s for thermal image protection.
Note 2 Zn is the impedance given by the ratio between the relay rated voltage relay (Un) and the rated current of the relay (In) Zn= Un/In
Nota 3 I T is the value of input current required to trip for a given threshold setting and for a given input voltage (eg with setting Z<= 1.00 Zn and input
voltage 1.00 Un, the reference value I T is 1.00 In)

18 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

TECHNICAL DATA
— Thermometric probes - 26 [1]
Alarm ThAL1...8:
Alarm threshold (ThAL1...8) 0...200 °C
Operate time (tThAL1...8) 0....100 s
Trip Th>1...8:
Trip threshold (Th>1...8) 0...200 °C
Operate time (tTh>1...8) 0....100 s
— Undervoltage - 27
Common configuration:
Voltage measurement type (Utype27)[2] U ph-ph /U ph-n
Operating logic (Logic27) AND/OR
U< Element
Curve type (U<Curve) DEFINITE/INVERSE[3]
Definite time
First threshold definite time (U <def) 0.05...1.10 U n /E n (step 0.01 Un/En)
Operating time (t U<def ) 0.03...100.0 s
0.03...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Inverse time
First threshold inverse time (U <inv) 0.05...1.10 U n /E n (step 0.01 Un/En)
Operating time (t U<inv) 0.10...100.0 s
0.10...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
U<< Element
Definite time
Second threshold definite time (U<<def) 0.05...1.10 U n /E n (step 0.01 Un/En)
Operating time (t U<<def ) 0.03...100.0 s
0.03...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Pickup time ≤ 0.04 s
Dropout ratio 1.03...1.05
Dropout time ≤ 0.05 s
Overshoot time 0.04 s
Pickup accuracy ± 0.5% with Un/En - ± 0.2% with 1Un/En
Operate time accuracy 5% or ± 10 ms
— Positive sequence undervoltage - 27V1
U1< Element
Definite time
First threshold definite time (U1<def) 0.05...1.10 E n (step 0.01 En)
Operating time (t U1<def ) 0.07...100.0 s
0.07...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Pickup time ≤ 0.04 s
Dropout ratio 1.03...1.05
Dropout time ≤ 0.05 s
Overshoot time 0.04 s
Pickup accuracy ± 4% with 0.01Un, ± 0.3% with 0.15Un
Operate time accuracy 5% or ± 10 ms
— Directional active overpower 32P
P1> Element
Setpoints
Tripping direction (P1> DIR) P Forward/P Reverse/P Forward-Reverse
Reset time delay (t P1> RES) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Definite time
First threshold definite time (P1>def) 0.01...1.50 Pn
Operating time (t P1>def) 0.07...100.0 s
P2> Element
Setpoints
Tripping direction (P 2> DIR) P Forward/P Reverse/P Forward-Reverse
Reset time delay (t P2> RES) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)

Nota 1 Optional function

Note 2 With U ph-ph setting all thresholds are in p.u. Un, with U ph-n setting all thresholds are in p.u En
Note 3 The mathematical formula for INVERSE curve is: t= (0.75 ∙ t U< inv) / [1 - (U/U< inv)], where:
t : operating time (in seconds), tU<inv : operating time setting (referred to U/U< inv = 0.25 ), U : input voltage, U<inv: threshold setting

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 19

TECHNICAL DATA
 Definite time
Second threshold definite time (P2>def) 0.01...1.50 Pn
Operating time (t P2>>def) 0.07...100.0 s
0.07...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Pickup time ≤ 0.04 s
Dropout ratio 0.95...0.98
Dropout time ≤ 0.05 s
Overshoot time 0.04 s
Pickup accuracy ± 3% con 0.01 Pn, ± 0.5% con 0.1 Pn
Operate time accuracy 5% or ± 10 ms

— Undercurrent - 37
Operating logic (Logic37) AND/OR
Definite time
First threshold definite time (I<def ) 0.10...1.00 In (step 0.01 In)
Operating time (t<def ) 0.04...200 s
0.04...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...99.9 s (step 0.1 s)
100...200 s (step 1 s)
Pickup time ≤ 0.04 s
Dropout ratio 1.03...1.05
Dropout time ≤ 0.05 s
Overshoot time 0.04 s
Pickup accuracy ± 0.5% with 0.1In,
± 0.2% with 1In
Operate time accuracy 5% or ± 10 ms

— Directional active underpower 37P

Common configuration:
Enable (CB-37P) ON/OFF
Delay (tARM-P< ) 0.07...300 s
0.07...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...99.9 s (step 0.1 s)
100...300 s (step 1 s)
P1< Element
Setpoints
Tripping direction (P1< DIR) P Forward/P Reverse/P Forward-Reverse
Definite time
First threshold definite time (P1<def) 0.01...1.50 Pn
Operating time (t P1<def) 0.07...100.0 s
0.07...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
P2< Element
Setpoints
Tripping direction (P 2< DIR) P Forward/P Reverse/P Forward-Reverse
Definite time
Second threshold definite time (P2<def) 0.01...1.50 Pn (step 0.01 Pn)
Operating time (t P2 <def) 0.07...100.0 s
0.07...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Pickup time ≤ 0.04 s
Dropout ratio 1.03...1.05
Dropout time ≤ 0.05 s
Overshoot time 0.04 s
Pickup accuracy ± 3% with 0.01 Pn, ± 0.5% with 0.1 Pn
Operate time accuracy 5% or ± 10 ms

— Loss of field - 40
Common configurations:
Operating mode (Mode 40 ) Motor/Generator
Undervoltage threshold (U SUP<) 0.50...1.00 Un (step 0.01 Un)

40AL Alarm
Inclination angle (ALPHA40AL ) 10...75° (step 1°)
Operating time (t40AL ) 0.07...100.0 s
0.07...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
XC1-XD1 Element
Absolute center coordinate (XC1) 0.00...4.50 Z nf (step 0.01 Z nf)
Diameter (XD1) 0.20...5.00 Znf (step 0.01 Z nf)
Operating time (t XC1XD1) 0.07...100.0 s
0.07...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Reset time delay (t XC1XD1-RES) 0.0...10.0 s (step 0.1 s)

20 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

TECHNICAL DATA
 XC2-XD2 Element
Absolute center coordinate (XC2 ) 0.00...4.50 Z nf (step 0.01 Z nf)
Diameter (XD2 ) 0.20...5.00 Znf (step 0.01 Z nf)
Operating time (t XC2XD2 ) 0.07...100.0 s
0.07...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Reset time delay (t XC2XD2-RES) 0.0...10.0 s
Pickup time ≤ 0.04 s
Dropout ratio 0.95...0.98
Dropout time ≤ 0.05 s
Overshoot time 0.04 s
Pickup accuracy ± 0.5% on current measures
± 0.5% on voltage measures
Operate time accuracy 5% or ± 10 ms

— Negative sequence overcurrent for Generator protection - 46G

I2AL> Element
Alarm threshold definite time (I2AL > def ) 0.03...0.50 IB (step 0.01 IB)
Operating time (t I2AL > def ) 0.07...100.0 s
0.07...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
I2 >> Element
Inverse time[1]
Trip threshold inverse time (I2 >>inv) 0.05...0.50 IB (step 0.01 IB)
Heating thermal time constant (Kheat ) 0.1...40.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Cooling thermal time constant (Kcool) 0.1...40.0 s (step 0.1 s)

Minimum operating time (t 2MIN) 0.07...100.0 s

0.07...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Maximum operating time (t 2MAX ) 500...2000 s (step 1 s)
Pickup time ≤ 0.04 s
Dropout ratio 0.95...0.98
Dropout time ≤ 0.05 s
Overshoot time 0.04 s
Pickup accuracy ± 1% with I2≥ 0.5 In
Operate time accuracy 5% or ± 10 ms

— Negative sequence overcurrent for Motor protection - 46M

I2> Element
Curve type (I>Curve) DEFINITE,
IEC/BS A, B, C, ANSI/IEEE MI, VI, EI
I2t or EM
CLP mode (I2CLP > Mode) OFF/ON-Element blocking/ON-Change setting
CLP activation time (t 2CLP>) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Reset time delay (t 2 > RES) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Definite time
First threshold definite time (I2 > def ) 0.03...1.00 IB (step 0.01 IB)
First threshold within CLP (I2CLP>def ) 0.03...5.00 IB (step 0.01 IB)
Operating time (t 2 > def ) 0.03...200 s
0.03...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...99.9 s (step 0.1 s)
100...200 s (step 1 s)

Note 1 Inverse time with I2 ≥ I2 >> inv: t = Kheat /(I2/IB)2

Inverse time with I2 ≤ I2 >> inv: t = Kcool /(I2 >>/IB)2
t: operate time
I2: negative sequence current
IB: base current
Kheat : heating thermal time constant (operate time with negative sequence current = IB)
Kcool : cooling thermal time constant
Minimum operate time: t 2MIN
Maximum operate time: t 2MAX
Range: 1 ≤ I2/IB ≤ 100
Upper metering limit: 30 I n

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 21

TECHNICAL DATA
 Inverse time[1]
First threshold inverse time (I2 >inv) 0.03...1.00 IB (step 0.01 IB)
First threshold within CLP (I2CLP>inv) 0.03...5.00 IB (step 0.01 IB)
Operating time (t 2 >inv) 0.02...60.0 s
0.02...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...60.0 s (step 0.1 s)
I2 >> Element
CLP mode (I2CLP >> Mode) OFF/ON-Element blocking/ON-Change setting
CLP activation time (t 2CLP >>) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
Reset time delay (t 2 >> RES) 0.00...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Definite time
Second threshold definite time (I2 >> def ) 0.10...1.00 IB (step 0.01 IB)
Second threshold within CLP (I2CLP>>def ) 0.10...5.00 IB (step 0.01 IB)
Operating time (t 2 >> def ) 0.03...10.00 s (step 0.01 s)
Pickup time ≤ 0.04 s
Dropout ratio 0.95...0.98
Dropout time ≤ 0.05 s
Overshoot time 0.04 s
Pickup accuracy 1% with I2 ≥ 0.5 In
Operate time accuracy 5% or ± 10 ms

— Phase rotation direction check - 47

47 Element
Definite time
Threshold (Us1<) 0.05...0.30 E n
Threshold (Us>) 0.70...1.00 U n
Pickup time ≤ 0.04 s
Dropout ratio 0.95...0.98
Dropout time ≤ 0.05 s
Overshoot time 0.04 s
Pickup accuracy ± 0.5% on current measures
± 0.5% on voltage measures
Operate time accuracy 5% or ± 10 ms

— Thermal image for Motor/generator protection - 49MG

Common configuration:
Initial thermal image (Dth IN ) 0.0...1.0 ΔθB (step 0.1 ΔθB)[2]
Starting overload coefficient (KST) 1.0...3.0 (step 0.1)
Negative sequence current heating coefficient (K2) 0...10 (step 1)
Heating time constant (T+) 1...200 min (step 1 min)
Cooling time constant (T-) 1.0...6.0 τ+ (step 0.1 τ+)
CLP operating mode (Dth CLP Mode) OFF/Blocking/Change setting
CLP activation time (t DthCLP) 0.00...200 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...99.9 s (step 0.1 s)
100...200 s (step 1 s)
DthAL1 Element
First alarm threshold (Dth AL1) 0.3...1.0 ΔθB (step 0.1 ΔθB)
DthAL2 Element
Second alarm threshold (Dth AL 2 ) 0.5...1.2 ΔθB (step 0.1 ΔθB)
Dth> Element
Trip threshold (Dth>) 0.800...1.500 ΔθB (step 0.001 ΔθB)
Pickup accuracy ± 0.5% with 0.1 In, ± 0.2% with 1 In
Operate time accuracy 5% or ± 10 ms
Note 1 Standard Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type A or SIT): t = 0.14 · t 2>inv / [(I2/I2>inv)0.02 - 1]
Very Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type B or VIT): t = 13.5 · t 2>inv / [(I2/I2>inv) - 1]
Extremely Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type C or EIT): t = 80 · t 2>inv / [(I2/I2>inv)2 - 1]
Moderately Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type MI): t = t 2>inv · {0.01 / [(I2/I2>inv)0.02 - 1] + 0.023}
Very Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type VI): t = t 2>inv · {3.922 / [(I2/I2>inv)2 - 1] + 0.098}
Extremely Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type EI): t = t 2>inv · {5.64 / [(I2/I2>inv)2 - 1] + 0.024}
I-squared-t (I 2t = K): t = 16 · t 2>inv / (I2/I2>inv)2
Electromechanical (EM): t = 0.28 · t 2>inv / [-0.236 · (I2/I2>inv)-1+ 0.339]
RECTIFIER (RI): t = 2351 · t 2>inv / [(I2/I2>inv)5.6- 1]
t: operate time, minimum operate time: 0.1 s
I 2> inv : pickup value
t 2>inv : operate time setting
Asymptotic reference value: 1.1 I 2> inv
Equation is valid for 1.1 ≤ I2/I2>inv ≤ 20, the upper limit is 50 I n
Note 2 Δθ is the thermal image (p.u. of the basic over temperature corresponding to the basic current IB).
Assuming that the secondary rated current of the line CT’s equals the rated current of the relay, as usually happens, the I B value is the ratio
between the rated current of the protected element and the CT’s primary rated current

22 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

TECHNICAL DATA
— Phase overcurrent - 50/51 side H
I(H)> Element
I(H) > Curve type (I(H)>Curve) DEFINITE,
IEC/BS A, B, C, LIT, ANSI/IEEE MI, VI, EI
RECTIFIER, I2t or EM
CLP operating mode (I(H)CLP> Mode) OFF/ON-Element blocking/ON-Change setting
CLP activation time (t (H)CLP>) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Reset time delay (t (H) > RES) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Definite time
First threshold definite time (I(H) > def ) 0.100...40.0 InH
0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 InH)
1.00...9.99 In (step 0.01 InH)
10.0...40.0 In (step 0.1 InH)
First threshold within CLP (I(H)CLP>def ) 0.100...40.0 InH
0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 InH)
1.00...9.99 In (step 0.01 InH)
10.0...40.0 In (step 0.1 InH)
Operating time (t (H) > def ) 0.04...200.00 s
0.04...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...99.9 s (step 0.1 s)
100...200 s (step 1 s)
Inverse time[1]
First threshold inverse time (I(H) >inv) 0.100...20.00 InH
0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 InH)
1.00...20.00 In (step 0.01 InH)
First threshold within CLP (I(H)CLP>inv) 0.100...20.00 InH
0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 InH)
1.00...20.00 In (step 0.01 InH)
Operating time (t (H) >inv) 0.02...60.0 s
0.02...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...60.0 s (step 0.1 s)
I(H)>> Element
Curve type (I>>Curve) DEFINITE or I2t
CLP operating mode (I(H)CLP >> Mode) OFF/ON-Element blocking/ON-Change setting
CLP activation time (t (H)CLP>>) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Reset time delay (t (H) >> RES) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Definite time
Second threshold definite time (I(H) >> def ) 0.100...40.0 InH
0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 InH)
1.00...9.99 In (step 0.01 InH)
10.0...40.0 In (step 0.1 InH)
Second threshold within CLP (I(H)CLP>>def ) 0.100...40.00 InH
0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 InH)
1.00...9.99 In (step 0.01 InH)
10.0...40.0 In (step 0.1 InH)
Operating time (t (H) >> def ) 0.03...10.00 s (step 0.01 s)
Inverse time
Second threshold inverse time (I(H) >>inv) 0.100...20.00 InH
0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 InH)
1.00...20.00 In (step 0.01 InH)

Note 1 Standard Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type A or SIT): t = 0.14 · t (H)>inv / [(I/I(H)>inv)0.02 - 1]
Very Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type B or VIT): t = 13.5 · t (H)>inv / [(I/I(H)>inv) - 1]
Extremely Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type C or EIT): t = 80 · t (H)>inv / [(I/I(H)>inv)2 - 1]
Very Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type B or LIT): t = 120 · t (H)>inv / [(I/I(H)>inv) - 1]
Moderately Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type MI): t = t (H)>inv · {0.01 / [(I/I(H)>inv)0.02 - 1] + 0.023}
Very Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type VI): t = t (H)>inv · {3.922 / [(I/I(H)>inv)2 - 1] + 0.098}
Extremely Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type EI): t = t (H)>inv · {5.64 / [(I/I(H)>inv)2 - 1] + 0.024}
I-squared-t (I 2t = K): t = 16 · t (H)>inv / (I/I(H)>inv)2
Electromechanical (EM): t = 0.28 · t (H)>inv / [-0.236 · (I/I(H)>inv)-1+ 0.339]
RECTIFIER (RI): t = 2351 · t (H)>inv / [(I/I(H)>inv)5.6- 1]
t: operate time, minimum operate time: 0.1 s
I (H)> inv : pickup value
t (H)>inv : operate time setting
Asymptotic reference value: 1.1 I (H) > inv
Equation is valid for 1.1 ≤ I/I(H)>inv ≤ 20; the upper limit is 50 I nH

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 23

TECHNICAL DATA
 Second threshold within CLP (I(H)CLP>>inv) 0.100...20.00 InH
0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 InH)
1.00...20.00 In (step 0.01 InH)
Operating time (t (H) >>inv) 0.02...10.00 s (step 0.01 s)
I(H)>>> Element
CLP operating mode (I(H)CLP >>> Mode) OFF/ON-Element blocking/ON-Change setting
CLP activation time (t (H)CLP>>>) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Reset time delay (t (H) >>> RES) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Definite time
Third threshold definite time (I(H) >>> def ) 0.100...40.0 InH
0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 InH)
1.00...9.99 In (step 0.01 InH)
10.0...40.0 In (step 0.1 InH)
Third threshold within CLP (I(H)CLP>>>def ) 0.100...40.0 InH
0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 InH)
1.00...9.99 In (step 0.01 InH)
10.0...40.0 In (step 0.1 InH)
Operating time (t (H) >>> def ) 0.03...10.00 s (step 0.01 s)
Pickup time ≤ 0.04 s
Dropout ratio 0.95...0.98
Dropout time ≤ 0.05 s
Overshoot time 0.04 s
Pickup accuracy ± 0.5% with 0.1 InH, ± 0.2% with 1 InH
Operate time accuracy 5% or ± 10 ms

— Phase overcurrent - 50/51 side L

I(L)> Element
I(L) > Curve type (I(L)>Curve) DEFINITE,
IEC/BS A, B, C, LIT, ANSI/IEEE MI, VI, EI
RECTIFIER, I2t or EM
CLP operating mode (I(L)CLP> Mode) OFF/ON-Element blocking/ON-Change setting
CLP activation time (t (L)CLP>) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Reset time delay (t (L) > RES) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Definite time
First threshold definite time (I(L) > def ) 0.100...40.0 InL
0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 InL )
1.00...9.99 In (step 0.01 InL )
10.0...40.0 In (step 0.1 InL )
First threshold within CLP (I(L)CLP>def ) 0.100...40.0 InL
0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 InL )
1.00...9.99 In (step 0.01 InL )
10.0...40.0 In (step 0.1 InL )
Operating time (t (L) > def ) 0.04...200.00 s
0.04...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...99.9 s (step 0.1 s)
100...200 s (step 1 s)
Inverse time[1]
First threshold inverse time (I(L) >inv) 0.100...20.00 InL
0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 InL )
1.00...20.00 In (step 0.01 InL )

Note 1 Standard Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type A or SIT): t = 0.14 · t (L)>inv / [(I/I(L)>inv)0.02 - 1]
Very Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type B or VIT): t = 13.5 · t (L)>inv / [(I/I(L)>inv) - 1]
Extremely Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type C or EIT): t = 80 · t (L)>inv / [(I/I(L)>inv)2 - 1]
Very Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type B or LIT): t = 120 · t (L)>inv / [(I/I(L)>inv) - 1]
Moderately Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type MI): t = t (L)>inv · {0.01 / [(I/I(L)>inv)0.02 - 1] + 0.023}
Very Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type VI): t = t (L)>inv · {3.922 / [(I/I(L)>inv)2 - 1] + 0.098}
Extremely Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type EI): t = t (L)>inv · {5.64 / [(I/I(L)>inv)2 - 1] + 0.024}
I-squared-t (I 2t = K): t = 16 · t (L)>inv / (I/I(L)>inv)2
Electromechanical (EM): t = 0.28 · t (L)>inv / [-0.236 · (I/I(L)>inv)-1+ 0.339]
RECTIFIER (RI): t = 2351 · t (L)>inv / [(I/I(L)>inv)5.6- 1]
t: operate time, minimum operate time: 0.1 s
I (L)> inv : pickup value
t (L)>inv : operate time setting
Asymptotic reference value: 1.1 I (L) > inv
Equation is valid for 1.1 ≤ I/I(L)>inv ≤ 20; the upper limit is 50 I nL

24 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

TECHNICAL DATA
 First threshold within CLP (I(L)CLP>inv) 0.100...20.00 InL
0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 InL )
1.00...20.00 In (step 0.01 InL )
Operating time (t (L) >inv) 0.02...60.0 s
0.02...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...60.0 s (step 0.1 s)
I(L)>> Element
Curve type (I>>Curve) DEFINITE or I2t
CLP operating mode (I(L)CLP >> Mode) OFF/ON-Element blocking/ON-Change setting
CLP activation time (t (L)CLP>>) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Reset time delay (t (L) >> RES) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Definite time
Second threshold definite time (I(L) >> def ) 0.100...40.0 InL
0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 InL )
1.00...9.99 In (step 0.01 InL )
10.0...40.0 In (step 0.1 InL )
Second threshold within CLP (I(L)CLP>>def ) 0.100...40.00 InL
0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 InL )
1.00...9.99 In (step 0.01 InL )
10.0...40.0 In (step 0.1 InL )
Operating time (t (L) >> def ) 0.03...10.00 s (step 0.01 s)

Inverse time
Second threshold inverse time (I(L) >>inv) 0.100...20.00 InL
0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 InL )
1.00...20.00 In (step 0.01 InL )

Second threshold within CLP (I(L)CLP>>inv) 0.100...20.00 InL

0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 InL )
1.00...20.00 In (step 0.01 InL )
Operating time (t (L) >>inv) 0.02...10.00 s (step 0.01 s)
I(L)>>> Element
CLP operating mode (I(L)CLP >>> Mode) OFF/ON-Element blocking/ON-Change setting
CLP activation time (t (L)CLP>>>) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Reset time delay (t (L) >>> RES) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Definite time
Third threshold definite time (I(L) >>> def ) 0.100...40.0 InL
0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 InL )
1.00...9.99 In (step 0.01 InL )
10.0...40.0 In (step 0.1 InL )
Third threshold within CLP (I(L)CLP>>>def ) 0.100...40.0 InL
0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 InL )
1.00...9.99 In (step 0.01 InL )
10.0...40.0 In (step 0.1 InL )
Operating time (t (L) >>> def ) 0.03...10.00 s (step 0.01 s)
Pickup time ≤ 0.04 s
Dropout ratio 0.95...0.98
Dropout time ≤ 0.05 s
Overshoot time 0.04 s
Pickup accuracy ± 0.5% with 0.1 In, ± 0.2% with 1 InL
Operate time accuracy 5% or ± 10 ms

— Locked rotor - 51LR(48)/14

ILR> Element
ILRCLP > Operating mode (Mode 51LR) With / without speed control
Inverse time[1]
51LR(48)/14 First threshold inverse time (ILR >inv) 0.80...8.00 IB (step 0.01 IB)
IMOT-ST Motor starting current (IMOT-ST ) 0.80...15.00 IB (step 0.01 IB)
ILR >inv operating time (t LR >inv) 1.0...200.0 s (step 0.1 s)

Note 1 the operate time characteristic is calculated according the general formula::
t = tLR>inv (IMOT-ST / I) 2, where:
t = operate time
tLR>inv= operate time setting
IMOT-ST = motor starting current with nominal voltage.
I = the maximum fundamental component of the phase currents,

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 25

TECHNICAL DATA
 ILR>> Element
CLP operating mode (Mode 51LR>>) With/without speed control
CLP activation time (t LRCLP>>)[1] 0.00...200 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...99.9 s (step 0.1 s)
100...200 s (step 1 s)
Definite time
51LR(48)/14 Second threshold definite time (ILR >> def ) 0.90...8.00 IB (step 0.01 IB)
ILR >> def operating time (t LR >> def ) 0.10...200 s
0.10...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...99.9 s (step 0.1 s)
100...200 s (step 1 s)
Pickup time ≤ 0.04 s
Dropout ratio 0.95...0.98
Dropout time ≤ 0.05 s
Overshoot time 0.04 s
Pickup accuracy ± 0.5% with 0.1 In
± 0.2% with 1 In
Operate time accuracy 5% or ± 10 ms

— Voltage-controlled / restraint overcurrent - 51V

Common configuration:
51V Operating mode (Mode51V ) Voltage controlled
Voltage restraint
Voltage restraint threshold 51V (U-I/U <) 0.10...1.00 Un (step 0.01 Un)
Voltage controlled first threshold 51V (U-I/U-1 <) 0.10...1.00 Un (step 0.01 Un)
Voltage controlled second threshold 51V (U-I/U-2 <) 0.10...1.00 Un (step 0.01 Un)
K Reduction factor (K) 0.10...1.00 (step 0.01)
I-I/U> Element
I-I/U> Reset time delay (t- I/U>RES) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Definite time
51V First threshold definite time (I - I/U>def) 0.20...10.00 I n (step 0.01 In)
I - I/U >def Operating time (t-I/U>def) 0.07...100.0 s
0.07...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
I-I/U>> Element
I-I/U>> Reset time delay (t- I/U>>RES) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Definite time
51V Second threshold definite time (I - I/U>>def) 0.20...20.00 I n (step 0.01 In)
I - I/U >>def Operating time (t-I/U>>def) 0.07...100.0 s
0.07...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Pickup time ≤ 0.04 s
Dropout ratio 0.95...0.98
Dropout time ≤ 0.05 s
Overshoot time 0.04 s
Pickup accuracy ± 0.5% on current measures
± 0.5% on voltage measures
Operate time accuracy 5% or ± 10 ms

— Residual overcurrent - 50N.1/51N .1 or High impedance restricted earth fault - 87NHIZ.1 - side 1
IE1> Element
IE1> Curve type (IE1> Curve) DEFINITE, IEC/BS A, B, C,
ANSI/IEEE MI, VI, EI, LIT, EM
CLP operating mode (IE1CLP > Mode) OFF/ON-Element blocking/ON-Change setting
CLP activation time (t E1CLP>) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
IE1> Reset time delay (t E1> RES) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Definite time
50N.1/51N.1 First threshold definite time (IE1> def ) 0.002...10.00 IEn1
0.002...0.999 IEn1 (step 0.001 IEn1)
1.00...10.00 IEn1 (step 0.01 IEn1)
IE1> def within CLP (IE1CLP>def ) 0.002...10.00 IEn1
0.002...0.999 IEn1 (step 0.001 IEn1)
1.00...10.00 IEn1 (step 0.01 IEn1)

Note 1 The element is blocked for the t LRCLP time (an adjustable threshold active during CLP does not exist)

26 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

TECHNICAL DATA
 IE1> def Operating time (t E1> def ) 0.04...200 s
0.04...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...99.9 s (step 0.1 s)
100...200 s (step 1 s)
Inverse time[1]
50N.1/51N.1 First threshold inverse time (IE1>inv) 0.002...2.00 IEn1
0.002...0.999 IEn1 (step 0.001 IEn1)
1.00...2.00 IEn1 (step 0.01 IEn1)
IE1>inv within CLP (IE1CLP>inv) 0.002...2.00 IEn1
0.002...0.999 IEn1 (step 0.001 IEn1)
1.00...2.00 IEn1 (step 0.01 IEn1)
IE1>inv Operating time (t E1>inv) 0.02...60.0 s
0.02...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...60.0 s (step 0.1 s)
IE1>> Element
CLP operating mode (IE1CLP >> Mode) OFF/ON-Element blocking/ON-Change setting
CLP activation time (t E1CLP>>) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
IE1>> Reset time delay (t E1>> RES) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Definite time
50N.1/51N.1 Second threshold definite time (IE1>> def 0.002...10.00 IEn1
0.002...0.999 IEn1 (step 0.001 IEn1)
1.00...10.00 IEn1 (step 0.01 IEn1)
IE1>> def within CLP (IE1CLP>>def ) 0.002...10.00 IEn1
0.002...0.999 IEn1 (step 0.001 IEn1)
1.00...10.00 IEn1 (step 0.01 IEn1)
IE1>> def Operating time (t E1>> def ) 0.03...10.00 s (step 0.01 s)

IE1>>> Element
CLP operating mode (IE1CLP >>> Mode) OFF/ON-Element blocking/ON-Change setting
CLP activation time (t E1CLP>>>) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
IE1>>> Reset time delay (t E1>>> RES) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Definite time
50N.1/51N.1 Third threshold definite time (IE1>>> def ) 0.002...10.00 IEn1
0.002...0.999 IEn1 (step 0.001 IEn1)
1.00...10.00 IEn1 (step 0.01 IEn1)
IE1>>> def within CLP (IE1CLP>>>def ) 0.002...10.00 IEn1
0.002...0.999 IEn1 (step 0.001 IEn1)
1.00...10.00 IEn1 (step 0.01 IEn1)
IE1>>> def Operating time (t E1>>> def ) 0.03...10.00 s (step 0.01 s)
Pickup time ≤ 0.04 s
Dropout ratio 0.95...0.98
Dropout time ≤ 0.05 s
Overshoot time 0.04 s
Pickup accuracy ± 1% with 0.01 IEn1, ± 0.3% with 1 IEn1
Operate time accuracy 5% or ± 10 ms

Note 1 Standard Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type A or SIT): t = 0.14 · t E1>inv / [(IE1/IE1>inv)0.02 - 1]
Very Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type B or VIT): t = 13.5 · t E1> inv / [(I E1/I E1> inv) - 1]
Extremely Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type C or EIT): t = 80 · t E1> inv / [(I E1/I E1> inv)2 - 1]
Very Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type B or LIT): t = 120 · t E1> inv / [(I E1/I E>1 inv) - 1]
Moderately Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type MI): t = t E1> inv · {0.01 / [(I E1/I E1> inv)0.02 - 1] + 0.023}
Very Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type VI): t = t E1> inv · {3.922 / [(I E1/I E1> inv)2 - 1] + 0.098}
Extremely Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type EI): t = t E1> inv · {5.64 / [(I E1/I E1> inv)2 - 1] + 0.024}
Electromechanical (EM): t = 0.28 · t E1> inv / [-0.236 · (I E1/I E1> inv)-1+ 0.339]
I E1: residual current input
t: operate time, minimum operate time: 0.1 s
I E1> inv : pickup value
t E1> inv : operate time setting
Asymptotic reference value: 1.1 I E1> inv
Equation is valid for 1.1 ≤ I E1/ I E1> inv ≤ 20, with I E1> inv pickup ≥ 0.5 I En1, the upper limit is 10 I En1

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 27

TECHNICAL DATA
— Residual overcurrent - 50N.2/51N .2 or High impedance restricted earth fault - 87NHIZ.2 - side 2
IE2> Element
IE2 > Curve type (IE2 > Curve) DEFINITE, IEC/BS A, B, C,
ANSI/IEEE MI, VI, EI, LIT, EM
CLP operating mode (IE2CLP > Mode) OFF/ON-Element blocking/ON-Change setting
CLP activation time (t E2CLP>) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
IE2 > Reset time delay (t E2 > RES) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Definite time
50N.2/51N.2 First threshold definite time (IE2 > def ) 0.002...10.00 IEn2
0.002...0.999 IEn2 (step 0.001 IEn2)
1.00...10.00 IEn2 (step 0.01 IEn2 )
IE2 > def within CLP (IE2CLP>def ) 0.002...10.00 IEn2
0.002...0.999 IEn2 (step 0.001 IEn2)
1.00...10.00 IEn2 (step 0.01 IEn2 )
IE2 > def Operating time (t E2 > def ) 0.04...200 s
0.04...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...99.9 s (step 0.1 s)
100...200 s (step 1 s)
Inverse time[1]
50N.2/51N.2 First threshold inverse time (IE2 >inv) 0.002...2.00 IEn2
0.002...0.999 IEn2 (step 0.001 IEn2)
1.00...2.00 IEn2 (step 0.01 IEn2 )
IE2 >inv within CLP (IE2CLP>inv) 0.002...2.00 IEn2
0.002...0.999 IEn2 (step 0.001 IEn2)
1.00...2.00 IEn2 (step 0.01 IEn2 )
IE2 >inv Operating time (t E2 >inv) 0.02...60.0 s
0.02...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...60.0 s (step 0.1 s)
IE2>> Element
CLP operating mode (IE2CLP >> Mode) OFF/ON-Element blocking/ON-Change setting
CLP activation time (t E2CLP>>) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
IE2 >> Reset time delay (t E2 >> RES) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Definite time
50N.2/51N.2 Second threshold definite time (IE2 >> def 0.002...10.00 IEn2
0.002...0.999 IEn2 (step 0.001 IEn2)
1.00...10.00 IEn2 (step 0.01 IEn2 )
IE2 >> def within CLP (IE2CLP>>def ) 0.002...10.00 IEn2
0.002...0.999 IEn2 (step 0.001 IEn2)
1.00...10.00 IEn2 (step 0.01 IEn2 )
IE2 >> def Operating time (t E2 >> def ) 0.03...10.00 s (step 0.01 s)
IE2>>> Element
CLP operating mode (IE2CLP >>> Mode) OFF/ON-Element blocking/ON-Change setting
CLP activation time (t E2CLP>>>) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
IE2 >>> Reset time delay (t E2 >>> RES) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Definite time
50N.2/51N.2 Third threshold definite time (IE2 >>> def ) 0.002...10.00 IEn2
0.002...0.999 IEn2 (step 0.001 IEn2)
1.00...10.00 IEn2 (step 0.01 IEn2 )
Note 1 Standard Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type A or SIT): t = 0.14 · t E2>inv / [(IE2/IE2>inv)0.02 - 1]
Very Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type B or VIT): t = 13.5 · t E2 > inv / [(IE2/IE2>inv) - 1]
Extremely Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type C or EIT): t = 80 · t E2 > inv / [(IE2/IE2>inv)2 - 1]
Very Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type B or LIT): t = 120 · t E2 > inv / [(IE2/IE2>inv) - 1]
Moderately Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type MI): t = t E2 > inv · {0.01 / [(IE2/IE2>inv)0.02 - 1] + 0.023}
Very Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type VI): t = t E2 > inv · {3.922 / [(IE2/IE2>inv)2 - 1] + 0.098}
Extremely Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type EI): t = t E2 > inv · {5.64 / [(IE2/IE2>inv)2 - 1] + 0.024}
Electromechanical (EM): t = 0.28 · t E2 > inv / [-0.236 · (IE2/IE2>inv)-1+ 0.339]
I E2 : residual current input
t: operate time
I E2> inv : pickup value
t E2 > inv : operate time setting
Asymptotic reference value: 1.1 I E2 >inv
Minimum operate time: 0.1 s
Equation is valid for 1.1 ≤ I E2/ I E2> inv ≤ 20, with I E2> inv pickup ≥ 0.5 I En2, the upper limit is 10 I En2

28 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

TECHNICAL DATA
 IE2 >>> def within CLP (IE2CLP>>>def ) 0.002...10.00 IEn2
0.002...0.999 IEn2 (step 0.001 IEn2)
1.00...10.00 IEn2 (step 0.01 IEn2 )
IE2 >>> def Operating time (t E2 >>> def ) 0.03...10.00 s (step 0.01 s)
Pickup time ≤ 0.04 s
Dropout ratio 0.95...0.98
Dropout time ≤ 0.05 s
Overshoot time 0.04 s
Pickup accuracy ± 1% with 0.01 IEn2 , ± 0.3% with 1 IEn2
Operate time accuracy 5% or ± 10 ms

— Calculated residual overcurrent - 50N(Comp)/51N(Comp)

Common configuration:
Current measure (IECtype51NC) IECL /IECH
IEC> Element
IEC > Curve type (IEC > Curve) DEFINITE,
IEC/BS A, B, C,ANSI/IEEE MI, VI, EI, LIT, EM
CLP operating mode (IECCLP > Mode) OFF/ON-Element blocking/ON-Change setting
CLP activation time (t ECCLP>) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)

IEC > Reset time delay (t EC > RES) 0.00...100.0 s

0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Definite time
First threshold definite time (IEC > def ) 0.100...40.0 In
0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 In)
1.00...9.99 In (step 0.01 In)
10.0...40.0 In (step 0.1 In)
IEC > def within CLP (IECCLP>def ) 0.100...40.0 In
0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 In)
1.00...9.99 In (step 0.01 In)
10.0...40.0 In (step 0.1 In)
IEC > def Operating time (t EC > def ) 0.04...200 s
0.04...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...99.9 s (step 0.1 s)
100...200 s (step 1 s)
Inverse time[1]
First threshold inverse time (IEC >inv) 0.100...20.00 In
0.100...0.999 IE (step 0.001 In)
1.00...20.00 In (step 0.01 In)
IEC >inv within CLP (IECCLP>inv) 0.100...20.00 In
0.100...0.999 IE (step 0.001 In)
1.00...20.00 In (step 0.01 In)
IEC >inv Operating time (t EC >inv) 0.02...60.0 s
0.02...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...60.0 s (step 0.1 s)
IEC>> Element
CLP operating mode (IECCLP >> Mode) OFF/ON-Element blocking/ON-Change setting
CLP activation time (t ECCLP>>) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
IEC >> Reset time delay (t EC >> RES) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Definite time
Second threshold definite time (IEC >> def 0.100...40.0 In
0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 In)
1.00...9.99 In (step 0.01 In)
10.00...40.00 In (step 0.1 In)

Note 1 Standard Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type A or SIT): t = 0.14 · t EC>inv / [(IEC/IEC>inv)0.02 - 1]
Very Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type B or VIT): t = 13.5 · t EC > inv / [(IEC/IEC>inv) - 1]
Very Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type B or LIT): t = 120 · t EC > inv / [(IEC/IEC>inv) - 1]
Extremely Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type C or EIT): t = 80 · t EC > inv / [(IEC/IEC>inv)2 - 1]
Moderately Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type MI): t = t EC > inv · {0.01 / [(IEC/IEC>inv)0.02 - 1] + 0.023}
Very Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type VI): t = t EC > inv · {3.922 / [(IEC/IEC>inv)2 - 1] + 0.098}
Extremely Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type EI): t = t EC > inv · {5.64 / [(IEC/IEC>inv)2 - 1] + 0.024}
Electromechanical (EM): t = 0.28 · t EC > inv / [-0.236 · (IEC/IEC>inv)-1+ 0.339]
I E: residual current input
t: operate time, minimum operate time: 0.1 s
I E> inv : pickup value, asymptotic reference value: 1.1 IEC>inv
t E > inv : operate time setting
Equation is valid for 1.1 ≤ I EC/ I EC> inv ≤ 20, with I EC> inv pickup ≥ 2.5 I n, the upper limit is 50 I n

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 29

TECHNICAL DATA
 IEC >> def within CLP (IECCLP>>def ) 0.100...40.0 In
0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 In)
1.00...9.99 In (step 0.01 In)
10.00...40.00 In (step 0.1 In)
IEC >> def Operating time (t EC >> def ) 0.03...10.00 s (step 0.01 s)
IEC>>> Element
CLP mode (IECCLP >>> Mode) OFF/ON-Element blocking/ON-Change setting
CLP activation time (t ECCLP>>>) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
IEC >>> Reset time delay (t EC >>> RES) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Definite time
Third threshold definite time (IEC >>> def ) 0.100...40.0 In
0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 In)
1.00...9.99 In (step 0.01 In)
10.00...40.00 In (step 0.1 In)
IEC >>> def within CLP (IECCLP>>>def ) 0.100...40.0 In
0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 In)
1.00...9.99 In (step 0.01 In)
10.00...40.00 In (step 0.1 In)
IEC >>> def Operating time (t EC >>> def ) 0.03...10.00 s (step 0.01 s)
Pickup time ≤ 0.04 s
Dropout ratio 0.95...0.98
Dropout time ≤ 0.05 s
Overshoot time 0.04 s
Pickup accuracy ± 4% with 0.1 In,
± 1% with 1 In
Operate time accuracy 5% or ± 10 ms

— Minimum power factor - 55

Common configuration
CB-55 Delay (tARM-CPhi<) 0.07...300 s
0.07...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...99.9 s (step 0.1 s)
100...300 s (step 0.1 s)
CPhi1< Element
Setpoints
CPhi1<Tripping direction (CPhi1<DIR) CosPhi Lag, CosPhi Lead,
CosPhi Lag/Lead
Definite time
55 First threshold definite time (CPhi1<def ) 0.10...0.99 (step 0.01)
CPhi1<def Operating time (t CPhi1<def ) 0.04...100.0 s
0.04...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
CPhi2< Element
CPhi2<Tripping direction (CPhi2<DIR) CosPhi Lag, CosPhi Lead,
CosPhi Lag/Lead
55 Second threshold definite time (CPhi2<def ) 0.10...0.99 (step 0.01)
CPhi2<def Operating time (t CPhi2<def ) 0.04...100.0 s
0.04...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
— Overvoltage - 59
Common configuration:
Voltage measurement type for 59 - phase-to phase/phase to neutral (Utype59)[1] U ph-ph /U ph-n
59 Operating logic (Logic59) AND/OR
U> Element
U> Curve type (U>Curve) DEFINITE/INVERSE[2]
Definite time
59 First threshold definite time (U >def) 0.50...1.50 U n /E n (step 0.01 Un/En)
U>def Operating time (t U> def ) 0.03...100.0 s
0.03...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Note 1 With U ph-ph setting all thresholds are in p.u. Un; with U ph-n setting all thresholds are in p.u En
Note 2 The mathematical formula for INVERSE curve is: t = (0.5 ∙ t U> inv) / [(U/U> inv) - 1 ]
t: operating time (in seconds)
tU>inv: operating time setting (referred to U/U> inv = 1.5 )
U: input voltage
U>inv: threshold setting
Asymptotic reference value: 1.1 U>inv
Minimum operate time: 0.1 s
Equation is valid for 1.1 ≤ U/U> inv ≤ 4
With U>inv pickup ≥ 0.5 Un, the upper limit is 2 Un

30 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

TECHNICAL DATA
 Inverse time
59 First threshold inverse time (U >inv) 0.50...1.50 U n /E n (step 0.01 Un/En)
U>inv Operating time (t U>inv) 0.10...100.0 s
0.10...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
U>> Element
Definite time
59 Second threshold definite time (U>>def) 0.50...1.50 U n /E n (step 0.01 Un/En)
U>>def Operating time (t U>> def ) 0.03...100.0 s
0.03...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Pickup time ≤ 0.04 s
Dropout ratio 0.95...0.98
Dropout time ≤ 0.05 s
Overshoot time 0.04 s
Pickup accuracy ± 0.5% with 0.1Un /En
± 0.2% with 1Un /En
Operate time accuracy 5% or ± 10 ms

— Residual overvoltage - 59N

Common configuration
Residual voltage measurement type for 59N - direct/calculated (3 VoType59N) U E /U EC
59N operation from 74VT internal (74VTint59N) OFF/Block
59N operation from 74VT external (74VText59N) OFF/Block
U E > Element
U> Curve type (U>Curve) DEFINITE/INVERSE[1]
U E> Reset time delay (t UE>RES) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Definite time
59N First threshold definite time (U E >def) 0.01...0.70 U En (step 0.01 U En)
U E>def Operating time (t UE >def) 0.07...100.0 s
0.07...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Inverse time
59N First threshold inverse time (U E >inv) 0.01...0.50 U En (step 0.01 U En)
U E>inv Operating time (t UE >inv) 0.10...100.0 s
0.10...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
U E >> Element
U E>> Reset time delay (t UE>>RES) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Definite time
59N Second threshold definite time (UE>>def) 0.01...0.70 U En (step 0.01 U En)
U E>>def Operating time (t UE >>def) 0.07...100.0 s
0.07...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Pickup time ≤ 0.04 s
Dropout ratio 0.95...0.98
Dropout time ≤ 0.05 s
Overshoot time 0.04 s
Pickup accuracy with measured residual voltage (UE) ± 0.2%
Pickup accuracy with calculated residual voltage(UEC) ± 1% with 0.01UECn
± 0.5% with 0.1UECn
Operate time accuracy 5% or ± 10 ms

— Negative sequence overvoltage - 59V2

U2> Element
Definite time
59V2 First threshold definite time (U2>def) 0.01...0.50 E n (step 0.01 En)
U2>def Operating time (t U2 > def ) 0.07...100.0 s
0.07...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Pickup time ≤ 0.04 s
Dropout ratio 0.95...0.98
Dropout time ≤ 0.05 s
Note 1 The mathematical formula for INVERSE curve is t= (0.5 ∙ t UE> inv) / [(UE/UE> inv) - 1]
t: operating time (in seconds)
tUE>inv: operating time setting (referred to UE/UE> inv = 1.5)
UE: residual input voltage (direct or calculated)
UE>inv: threshold setting
Asymptotic reference value: 1.1 UE> inv
Minimum operate time: 0.1 s
Equation is valid for 1.1 ≤ UE/UE> inv ≤ 4

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 31

TECHNICAL DATA
 Overshoot time 0.04 s
Pickup accuracy ± 5% con 0.01 Un
± 0.3% con 0.15 Un
Operate time accuracy 5% ± 10 ms
— High impedance restricted earth fault - 64REF
Minimum threshold 64REF (IREF >) 0.05...2.00 IEn1 (step 0.01 IEn1)
Intentional delay 64REF (t REF>) 0.03...60.00 s (step 0.01 s)

— Maximum number of startings (Restart inhibition) - 66

Type of control for 66 (Type66)[1] NST-TST
Control window (t C) 1...60 min (step 1 min)
NST (Starts inside t C) 1...30 (step 1)
TST (Cumulative start time inside t C) 1...600 s (step 1 s)
66 Inhibition time (t IN) 0...60 min (step 1 min)

— Directional earth fault overcurrent- 67N

Common configuration:
67N Operating mode (Mode67N) I /I ∙cos
Residual voltage measurement type for 67N - direct/calculated (3VoType67N) U E / U EC
67N Multiplier of threshold for insensitive zone (M) 1.5...10.0 (step 0.1)
67N Operation from 74VT internal (74VTint67N) OFF/Block/Not directional
67N Operation from 74VT external (74VText67N) OFF/Block/Not directional
IED> Element
IED> Curve type (IED>Curve)
DEFINITE
IEC/BS A, B, C, ANSI/IEEE MI, VI, EI, EM
CLP operating mode (IEDCLP > Mode) OFF/ON-Element blocking/ON-Change setting
CLP activation time (t EDCLP>) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
IED> Reset time delay (t ED > RES) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Definite time
67N First threshold definite time (IED>def - UED>def )
Residual current pickup value 0.002...10.00 IEn2
0.002...0.999 IEn2 (step 0.001 IEn2)
1.00...10.00 IEn2 (step 0.01 IEn2 )
Residual voltage pickup value 0.004...0.500 UEn (step 0.001 UEn)
Characteristic angle 0...359° (step 1°)
Half operating sector 1...180° (step 1°)
IED > def within CLP (IEDCLP>def ) 0.002...10.00 IEn2
0.002...0.999 IEn2 (step 0.001 IEn2)
1.00...10.00 IEn2 (step 0.01 IEn2 )
IED > def Operating time (t ED > def ) 0.05...200 s
0.05...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...99.9 s (step 0.1 s)
100...200 s (step 1 s)
Inverse time[2]
67N First threshold inverse time (IED>inv - UED>inv)
Residual current pickup value 0.002...2.00 IEn2
0.002...0.999 IEn2 (step 0.001 IEn2)
1.00...2.00 IEn2 (step 0.01 IEn2 )
Residual voltage pickup value 0.004...0.500 UEn (step 0.001 UEn)
Characteristic angle 0...359° (step 1°)
Half operating sector 1...180° (step 1°)
IED >inv within CLP (IEDCLP >inv) 0.002...2.00 IEn2
0.002...0.999 IEn2 (step 0.001 IEn2)
1.00...2.00 IEn2 (step 0.01 IEn2 )
Note 1 With NST setting the number of starting is computed; with TST setting the cumulative time of starting is computed
Note 2
Standard Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type A or SIT): t = 0.14 · t ED>inv / [(IE2/IED>inv)0.02 - 1]
Very Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type B or VIT): t = 13.5 · t ED> inv / [(IE2/IED>inv) - 1]
Extremely Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type C or EIT): t = 80 · t ED>inv / [(IE2/IED>inv)2 - 1]
Moderately Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type MI): t = t ED>inv · {0.01 / [(IE2/IED>inv)0.02 - 1] + 0.023}
Very Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type VI): t = t ED>inv · {3.922 / [(IE2/IED>inv)2 - 1] + 0.098}
Extremely Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type EI): t = t ED>inv · {5.64 / [(IE2/IED>inv)2 - 1] + 0.024}
Electromechanical (EM): t = 0.28 · t ED>inv / [-0.236 · (IE2/IED>inv)-1+ 0.339]
t: operate time
I ED> inv : pickup value
t ED>inv : operate time setting
Asymptotic reference value: 1.1 I ED > inv
Minimum operate time: 0.1 s
Equation is valid for 1.1 ≤ IE2/IED>inv ≤ 20; with I ED> inv pickup ≥ 0.5 I E n2 , the upper limit is 10 I En2

32 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

TECHNICAL DATA
 IED >inv Operating time (t ED >inv) 0.02...60.0 s
0.02...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...60.0 s (step 0.1 s)
IED>> Element
IED>> Curve type (IED>>Curve) DEFINITE
IEC/BS A, B, C
ANSI/IEEE MI, VI, EI, EM
CLP operating mode (IEDCLP >> Mode) OFF/ON-Element blocking/ON-Change setting
CLP activation time (t EDCLP>>) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
IED>> Reset time delay (t ED >> RES) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Definite time
67N Second threshold definite time (IED >> def - UED >> def )
Residual current pickup value 0.002...10.00 IEn2
0.002...0.999 IEn2 (step 0.001 IEn2)
1.00...10.00 IEn2 (step 0.01 IEn2 )
Residual voltage pickup value 0.004...0.500 UEn (step 0.001 UEn)
Characteristic angle 0...359° (step 1°)
Half operating sector 1...180° (step 1°)
IED >> def within CLP (IEDCLP >> def ) 0.002...10.00 IEn2
0.002...0.999 IEn2 (step 0.001 IEn2)
1.00...10.00 IEn2 (step 0.01 IEn2 )
IED >> def Operating time (t ED >> def ) 0.05...10.00 s (step 0.01 s)
Inverse time[1]
67N Second threshold inverse time (IED >>inv - UED >>inv)
Residual current pickup value 0.002...2.00 IEn2
0.002...0.999 IEn2 (step 0.001 IEn2)
1.00...2.00 IEn2 (step 0.01 IEn2 )
Residual voltage pickup value 0.004...0.500 UEn (step 0.001 UEn)
Characteristic angle 0...359° (step 1°)
Half operating sector 1...180° (step 1°)
IED >inv within CLP (IEDCLP>>inv) 0.002...2.00 IEn2
0.002...0.999 IEn2 (step 0.001 IEn2)
1.00...2.00 IEn2 (step 0.01 IEn2 )
IED >>inv Operating time (t ED >>inv) 0.02...60.0 s
0.02...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...60.0 s (step 0.1 s)
IED>>> Element
CLP operating mode (IEDCLP >>> Mode) OFF/ON-Element blocking/ON-Change setting
CLP activation time (t EDCLP>>>) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
IED>>> Reset time delay (t ED >>> RES) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Definite time
67N Third threshold definite time (IED >>> def - UED >>> def )
Residual current pickup value 0.002...10.00 IEn2
0.002...0.999 IEn2 (step 0.001 IEn2)
1.00...10.00 IEn2 (step 0.01 IEn2 )
Residual voltage pickup value 0.004...0.500 UEn (step 0.001 UEn)
Characteristic angle 0...359° (step 1°)
Half operating sector 1...180° (step 1°)
IED >>> def within CLP (IEDCLP >>> def ) 0.002...10.00 IEn2
0.002...0.999 IEn2 (step 0.001 IEn2)
1.00...10.00 IEn2 (step 0.01 IEn2 )
IED >>> def Operating time (t ED >>> def ) 0.05...10.00 s (step 0.01 s)
Note 1
Standard Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type A or SIT): t = 0.14 · t ED>>inv / [(IE2/IED>>inv)0.02 - 1]
Very Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type B or VIT): t = 13.5 · t ED>> inv / [(IE2/IED>>inv) - 1]
Extremely Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type C or EIT): t = 80 · t ED>>inv / [(IE2/IED>>inv)2 - 1]
Moderately Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type MI): t = t ED>>inv · {0.01 / [(IE2/IED>>inv)0.02 - 1] + 0.023}
Very Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type VI): t = t ED>>inv · {3.922 / [(IE2/IED>>inv)2 - 1] + 0.098}
Extremely Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type EI): t = t ED>>inv · {5.64 / [(IE2/IED>>inv)2 - 1] + 0.024}
Electromechanical (EM): t = 0.28 · t ED>>inv / [-0.236 · (IE2/IED>>inv)-1+ 0.339]
t: operate time
I E2 : Residual current measured on side 2
I ED>> inv : pickup value
t ED>>inv : operate time setting
Asymptotic reference value: 1.1 I ED >> inv
Minimum operate time: 0.1 s
Equation is valid for 1.1 ≤ IE2/IED>>inv ≤ 20, With I ED>> inv pickup ≥ 0.5 I En2 , the upper limit is 10 I En2

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 33

TECHNICAL DATA
 IED>>>> Element
CLP operating mode (IEDCLP >>>> Mode) OFF/ON-Element blocking/ON-Change setting
CLP activation time (t EDCLP>>>>) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
IED>>>> Reset time delay (t ED >>>> RES) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Definite time
67N Fourth threshold definite time (IED >>>> def - UED >>>> def )
Residual current pickup value 0.002...10.00 IEn2
0.002...0.999 IEn2 (step 0.001 IEn2)
1.00...10.00 IEn2 (step 0.01 IEn2 )
Residual voltage pickup value 0.004...0.500 UEn (step 0.001 UEn)
Characteristic angle 0...359° (step 1°)
Half operating sector 1...180° (step 1°)

IED >>>> def within CLP (IEDCLP >>>> def ) 0.002...10.00 IEn2
0.002...0.999 IEn2 (step 0.001 IEn2)
1.00...10.00 IEn2 (step 0.01 IEn2 )
IED >>>> def Operating time (t ED >>>> def ) 0.05...10.00 s (step 0.01 s)
Pickup time ≤ 0.04 s
Dropout ratio 0.95...0.98
Dropout time ≤ 0.05 s
Overshoot time 0.04 s
Pickup accuracy with measured residual voltage (UE) ± 0.2%
Pickup accuracy with calculated residual voltage (UEC) ± 1% with 0.01UECn
± 0.5% with 0.1UECn
Pickup accuracy (residual current) ± 1% with 0.01 IEn2
± 0.3% with 1 IEn2
Pickup accuracy (phase) ± 2° with 0.002 IEn2 - 0.004 UEn
± 0.2° with 0.005 IEn2 - 0.01 UEn
± 0.2° with 0.1 IEn2 - 0.5 UEn
± 0.3% with 1 IEn2
Operate time accuracy 5% or ± 10 ms

— Directional earth fault overcurrent with calculated residual current- 67N(Comp)

Common configuration:
67N(Comp) Operating mode (Mode67NC) I /I ∙cos
Residual voltage measurement type for 67NC - direct/calculated (3VoType67NC) U E / U EC
Residual current measurement type for 67NC - dir./calcolata (IECType67NC) I ECL / I ECH
67N Multiplier of threshold for insensitive zone (M) 1.5...10.0 (step 0.1)
67N Operation from 74VT internal (74VTint67N) OFF/Block/Not directional
67N Operation from 74VT external (74VText67N) OFF/Block/Not directional
IEDC> Element
IEDC> Curve type (IEDC>Curve)
DEFINITE
IEC/BS A, B, C, ANSI/IEEE MI, VI, EI, EM
CLP operating mode (IEDCCLP > Mode) OFF/ON-Element blocking/ON-Change setting
CLP activation time (t EDCCLP>) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
IED> Reset time delay (t EDC > RES) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Definite time
67N(Comp) First threshold definite time (IED>def - UED>def )
Residual current pickup value 0.100...40.0 In
0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 In)
1.00...9.99 In (step 0.01 In)
10.0...40.0 In (step 0.1 In)
Residual voltage pickup value 0.004...0.500 UEn (step 0.001 UEn)
Characteristic angle 0...359° (step 1°)
Half operating sector 1...180° (step 1°)
IEDC > def within CLP (IEDCCLP>def ) 0.100...40.0 In
0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 In)
1.00...9.99 In (step 0.01 In)
10.0...40.0 In (step 0.1 In)
IED > def Operating time (t EDC > def ) 0.05...200 s
0.05...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...99.9 s (step 0.1 s)
100...200 s (step 1 s)

34 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

TECHNICAL DATA
 Inverse time[1]
67N(Comp) First threshold inverse time (IEDC>inv - UED>inv)
Residual current pickup value 0.100...20.00 In
0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 In)
1.00...20.00 In (step 0.01 In)
Residual voltage pickup value 0.004...0.500 UEn (step 0.001 UEn)
Characteristic angle 0...359° (step 1°)
Half operating sector 1...180° (step 1°)
IEDC >inv within CLP (IEDCCLP >inv) 0.100...20.00 In
0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 In)
1.00...20.00 In (step 0.01 In)
IEDC >inv Operating time (t ED >inv) 0.02...60.0 s
0.02...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...60.0 s (step 0.1 s)
IEDC>> Element
IEDC>> Curve type (IEDC>>Curve) DEFINITE,
IEC/BS A, B, C, ANSI/IEEE MI, VI, EI, EM
CLP operating mode (IEDCCLP >> Mode) OFF/ON-Element blocking/ON-Change setting
CLP activation time (t EDCCLP >>) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
IEDC>> Reset time delay (t EDC >> RES) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Definite time
67N(Comp) Second threshold definite time (IEDC >> def - UED >> def )
Residual current pickup value 0.100...40.0 In
0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 In)
1.00...9.99 In (step 0.01 In)
10.0...40.0 In (step 0.1 In)
Residual voltage pickup value 0.004...0.500 UEn (step 0.001 UEn)
Characteristic angle 0...359° (step 1°)
Half operating sector 1...180° (step 1°)
IEDC >> def within CLP (IEDCCLP >> def ) 0.100...40.0 In
0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 In)
1.00...9.99 In (step 0.01 In)
10.0...40.0 In (step 0.1 In)
IEDC >> def Operating time (t EDC >> def ) 0.05...10.00 s (step 0.01 s)
Inverse time[2]
67N(Comp) Second threshold inverse time (IEDC >>inv - UED >>inv)
Residual current pickup value 0.100...20.00 In
0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 In)
1.00...20.00 In (step 0.01 In)
Residual voltage pickup value 0.004...0.500 UEn (step 0.001 UEn)
Characteristic angle 0...359° (step 1°)
Half operating sector 1...180° (step 1°)
Note 1 All the formulas for IECH (residual current calculated on side H): the same for IECL (residual current calculated on side L)
Standard Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type A or SIT): t = 0.14 · t EDC>inv / [(I ECH/IEDC>inv)0.02 - 1]
Very Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type B or VIT): t = 13.5 · t EDC > inv / [(IECH/IED>inv) - 1]
Extremely Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type C or EIT): t = 80 · t EDC > inv / [(IECH/IEDC>inv)2 - 1]
Moderately Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type MI): t = t EDC > inv · {0.01 / [(IECH/IEDC>inv)0.02 - 1] + 0.023}
Very Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type VI): t = t EDC > inv · {3.922 / [(IECH/IEDC>inv)2 - 1] + 0.098}
Extremely Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type EI): t = t EDC > inv · {5.64 / [(IECH/IEDC>inv)2 - 1] + 0.024}
Electromechanical (EM): t = 0.28 · t EDC > inv / [-0.236 · (IECH/IEDC>inv)-1+ 0.339]
t: operate time
I EDC> inv : pickup value
t EDC>inv : operate time setting
Asymptotic reference value: 1.1 I EDC > inv
Minimum operate time: 0.1 s
Equation is valid for 1.1 ≤ IECH/IEDC>inv ≤ 20, Wwth I EDC> inv pickup ≥ 0.5 I E CH , the upper limit is 50 I n
Note 2 All the formulas for IECH (residual current calculated on side H): the same for IECL (residual current calculated on side L)
Standard Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type A or SIT): t = 0.14 · t EDC>>inv / [(I ECH/IEDC>>inv)0.02 - 1]
Very Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type B or VIT): t = 13.5 · t EDC >> inv / [(IECH/IED>>inv) - 1]
Extremely Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type C or EIT): t = 80 · t EDC >> inv / [(IECH/IEDC>>inv)2 - 1]
Moderately Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type MI): t = t EDC >> inv · {0.01 / [(IECH/IEDC>>inv)0.02 - 1] + 0.023}
Very Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type VI): t = t EDC >> inv · {3.922 / [(IECH/IEDC>>inv)2 - 1] + 0.098}
Extremely Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type EI): t = t EDC >> inv · {5.64 / [(IECH/IEDC>>inv)2 - 1] + 0.024}
Electromechanical (EM): t = 0.28 · t EDC >> inv / [-0.236 · (IECH/IEDC>>inv)-1+ 0.339]
t: operate time
I EDC>> inv : pickup value
t EDC>>inv : operate time setting
Asymptotic reference value: 1.1 I EDC >> inv
Minimum operate time: 0.1 s
Equation is valid for 1.1 ≤ IECH/IEDC>>inv ≤ 20
With I EDC>> inv pickup ≥ 0.5 I E CH , the upper limit is 50 I n

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 35

TECHNICAL DATA
 IED >inv within CLP (IEDCLP >>inv) 0.100...20.00 In
0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 In)
1.00...20.00 In (step 0.01 In)
IED >>inv Operating time (t ED >>inv) 0.02...60.0 s
0.02...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...60.0 s (step 0.1 s)
IEDC>>> Element
CLP operating mode (IEDCCLP >>> Mode) OFF/ON-Element blocking/ON-Change setting
CLP activation time (t EDCCLP >>>) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
IEDC>>> Reset time delay (t EDC >> RES) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)

Definite time
67N(Comp) Third threshold definite time (IEDC>>> def - UED >>> def )
Residual current pickup value 0.100...40.0 In
0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 In)
1.00...9.99 In (step 0.01 In)
10.0...40.0 In (step 0.1 In)
Residual voltage pickup value 0.004...0.500 UEn (step 0.001 UEn)
Characteristic angle 0...359° (step 1°)
Half operating sector 1...180° (step 1°)
IEDC >>> def within CLP (IEDCCLP >>> def ) 0.100...40.0 In
0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 In)
1.00...9.99 In (step 0.01 In)
10.0...40.0 In (step 0.1 In)
IEDC >>> def Operating time (t EDC >>> def ) 0.05...10.00 s (step 0.01 s)
IEDC>>>> Element
CLP operating mode (IEDCCLP >>>> Mode) OFF/ON-Element blocking/ON-Change setting
CLP activation time (t EDCCLP>>>>) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
IEDC>>>> Reset time delay (t EDC>>>>RES) 0.00...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)

Pickup time ≤ 0.04 s

Dropout ratio 0.95...0.98
Dropout time ≤ 0.05 s
Overshoot time 0.04 s
Pickup accuracy with measured residual voltage (UE) ± 0.2%
Pickup accuracy with calculated residual voltage (UEC) ± 1% with 0.01UECn
± 0.5% with 0.1UECn
Pickup accuracy (calculated residual current) ± 0.5% con 0.1 In, ± 0.2% con 1 In
Phase accuracy ± 2% with 0.1 In,
± 0.3% with 1 In
± 2° with 0.1 In - 0.004 UEn
± 0.3° with 1 In - 0.01 UEn
Operate time accuracy 5% or ± 10 ms

— Overfrequency - 81O
f> Element
Definite time
81O First threshold definite time (f>def) 1.000....1.200 fn (step 0.001 fn)
f>def Operating time (t f> def ) 0.05...100.00 s
0.05...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
f>> Element
Definite time
81O Second threshold definite time (f>>def) 1.000....1.200 fn (step 0.001 fn)
f>>def Operating time (t f>> def ) 0.05...100.00 s
0.05...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Pickup time ≤ 0.04 s
Dropout ratio ≥ 0.998
Dropout time ≤ 0.05 s
Overshoot time 0.04 s
Reference values rest: setting value - 0.2 Hz
trip: setting value + 0.2 Hz
Pickup accuracy ±5 mHz with 0.02 Un, ± 2 mHz with 1Un
Operate time accuracy 5% ± 10 ms

36 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

TECHNICAL DATA
— Underfrequency - 81U
f< Element
Definite time
81U First threshold definite time (f<def) 0.800...1.000 fn (step 0.001 fn)
f<def Operating time (t f<def ) 0.05...100.0 s
0.05...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
f<< Element
Definite time
81U Second threshold definite time (f<<def) 0.800...1.000 fn (step 0.001 fn)
f<<def Operating time (t f<<def ) 0.05...100.0 s
0.05...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
f<<< Element
Definite time
81U Third threshold definite time (f<<<def) 0.800...1.000 fn (step 0.001 fn)
f<<<def Operating time (t f<<<def ) 0.05...100.0 s
0.05...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
f<<<< Element
Definite time
81U Fourth threshold definite time (f<<<<def) 0.800...1.000 fn (step 0.001 fn)
f<def Operating time (t f<def ) 0.05...100.0 s
0.05...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Pickup time ≤ 0.04 s
Dropout ratio ≤ 1.002
Dropout time ≤ 0.05 s
Overshoot time 0.04 s
Reference values rest: setting value + 0.2 Hz
trip: setting value - 0.2 Hz
Pickup accuracy ±5 mHz with 0.02 Un, ± 2 mHz with 1Un
Operate time accuracy 5% or ± 10 ms

— Differential - 87G-87M-87T
Harmonic restraint (87T)
87T Second harmonic restraint threshold (2nd-REST>) 10...80% Id (step 1% Id)
87T Fifth harmonic restraint threshold (5th-REST>) 10...80% Id (step 1% Id)
87T Harmonic restraint intentional reset time delay (t H-RES) 0.00...10.00 s (step 0.01 s)
87T Cross phase harmonic restraint enable (CROSS H-RES) ON/OFF
CT saturation detector (87M-87G-87T)
Saturation detector enable (Sat-Det) ON/OFF
Saturation detector intentional reset time delay (tSat-Det-RES) 0.00...0.50 s (step 0.01 s)
Id > Element (87M-87G-87T)
First threshold (Id>) 0.05...2.00 Inref (step 0.01 Inref)
First stretch slope percentage (K1) 10...50% (step 1 %)
Second branch slope percentage (K2) 25...100% (step 1 %)
Second branch intersection with vertical axis (Q) 0.00...3.00 Inref (step 0.01 Inref)
First threshold operating time Id> (td>) 0.04 s
Id >> Element (87M-87G-87T)
Second threshold (Id>>) 0.50...30.00 Inref (step 1.00 Inref)
Second threshold operating time Id>> (td>>) 0.03 s
— Breaker failure - BF
BF Phase current threshold (IBF >) 0.05...1.00 I n (step 0.01 I n )
BF Residual current threshold (IEBF >) 0.01...2.00 I n (step 0.01 I En )
BF Time delay(tBF) 0.06...10.00 s (step 0.01 s)
Dropout ratio 0.95...0.98
Dropout time ≤ 0.05 s
Pickup accuracy (IBF >) ± 0.5% with 0.1 InL
± 0.2% with 1 InL
Pickup accuracy (IEBF >) ± 0.3% with 0.01 IEn
± 0.03% with 1 IEn
Operate time accuracy 5% or ± 10 ms

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 37

TECHNICAL DATA
3.8 CONTROL AND MONITORING
— Second harmonic restraint - 2ndh-REST
Second harmonic restraint threshold (I 2ndh >) 10...50 % (step 1 %)
I 2ndh > reset time delay (t 2ndh>RES) 0...100.0 s
0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Pickup time ≤ 0.04 s
Dropout ratio 0.95...0.98
Dropout time ≤ 0.05 s
Overshoot time 0.04 s
Pickup accuracy I 2ndh > ± 1% with 0.1 In, ± 0.5% with 1 In
Operate time accuracy 5% ± 10 ms
— Trip Circuit Supervision - 74TCS
Operate time:
• One binary input supervision 40 s
• Two binary inputs supervision 2s
Reset time delay:
• One binary input supervision 6s
• Two binary inputs supervision 0.6 s

— Selective block - BLOCK2

Selective block IN
BLIN1 Selective block operating mode (ModeBLIN1) OFF-ON IPh/IE-ON IPh-ON IE
BLIN maximum activation time for phase protections (t B-IPh) 0.10...10.00 s (step 0.01 s)
BLIN maximum activation time for ground protections (t B-IE) 0.10...10.00 s (step 0.01 s)
Selective block OUT
BLOUT1 Selective block operating mode (ModeBLOUT1) OFF-ON IPh/IE-ON IPh-ON IE
BLOUT Dropout time for phase protections (t F -IPh ) 0.00...1.00 s (step 0.01 s)
BLOUT Dropout time for ground protections (t F -IE ) 0.00...1.00 s (step 0.01 s)
BLOUT Dropout time for ground and phase protections (tF-IPh/IE) 0.00...1.00 s (step 0.01 s)

— Internal selective block - BLOCK4

Output internal selective block dropout time for phase protections (t F I-IPh )
0.00...10.00 s (step 0.01 s)
Output internal selective block dropout time for ground protections (t F I-IE )
0.00...10.00 s (step 0.01 s)
— Circuit Breaker supervision
Circuit breaker diagnostic
Number of CB trips threshold (N.Open) 0...10000 (step 1)
Cumulative CB tripping currents threshold (SumI) 0....5000 I n (step 1 I n )
Cumulative CB tripping I2t threshold (SumI^2t) 0....5000 (I n )2∙s (step 1 I n 2∙s)
Circuit Breaker opening time for I^2t calculation (t break ) 0.05...1.00 s (step 0.01 s)
Circuit Breaker maximum allowed opening time (tbreak>) 0.05...1.00 s (step 0.01 s)

— VT supervision - 74VT
74VT Negative sequence overvoltage threshold (U 2 V T> ) 0.05...0.50 E n (step 0.01 E n )
74VT Negative sequence overcurrent threshold (I 2 V T> ) 0.05...0.50 I n (step 0.01 In)
74VT Phase undervoltage threshold (U V T< ) 0.05...0.50 E n (step 0.01 E n )
74VT Minimum change of current threshold (D I V T< ) 0.05...0.50 I n (step 0.01 In)
74VT Alarm time delay (t V T-A L ) 0.0...10.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Undercurrent inhibition threshold (I V T< ) 0.100...40.0 In
0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 In)
1.00...9.99 In (step 0.01 In)
10.0...40.0 In (step 0.1 In)
Pickup accuracy for negative sequence voltage thresholds ± 5% con 0.01 Un
± 0.5% with 0.15 Un
Pickup accuracy for negative sequence current thresholds ± 1% with I2 = 0.5 In
± 1% with I2 = 1 In
Operate time accuracy 5% or ± 10 ms

— CT supervision - 74CT side H

74CT Threshold (S (H) <) 0.10...0.95 (step 0.01)
74CT(H) Overcurrent threshold (I (H) * ) 0.10...1.00 I nH (step 0.01 InH)
Operating time delay (t S(H) <) 0.03...200 s
0.03...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...99.9 s (step 0.1 s)
100...200 s (step 1 s)
Dropout ratio for the I (H) * pickup 0.95...0.98
Dropout time ≤ 0.05 s
Pickup accuracy I (H) * ± 0.5% with 0.1 InH, ± 0.2% with 1 InH
Pickup accuracy I * ± 0.5% with 0.1 InH , ± 0.2% with 1 InH
Operate time accuracy 5% ± 10 ms

38 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

TECHNICAL DATA
— CT supervision - 74CT side L
74CT Threshold (S (L ) <) 0.10...0.95 (step 0.01)
74CT(L) Overcurrent threshold (I (L ) * ) 0.10...1.00 I nL (step 0.01 InL )
Operating time delay (t S (L ) <) 0.03...200 s
0.03...9.99 s (step 0.01 s)
10.0...99.9 s (step 0.1 s)
100...200 s (step 1 s)
Dropout ratio for the I (L ) * pickup 0.95...0.98
Dropout time ≤ 0.05 s
Pickup accuracy I (L ) * ± 0.5% with 0.1 InL
± 0.2% with 1 InL
Operate time accuracy 5% or ± 10 ms

— Pilot wire diagnostic

BLOUT1 Diagnostic pulse period (PulseBLOUT1) OFF-0.1-1-5-10-60-120 s
BLIN1 Diagnostic pulse control time interval (PulseBLIN1) OFF-0.1-1-5-10-60-120 s

— Demand measures
Fix on demand period (t F I X ) 1...60 min (step 1 min)
Rolling on demand period (t ROL ) 1...60 min (step 1 min)
Number of cycles for rolling on demand (N. ROL ) 1...24 (step 1)

— Oscillography (DFR)[1]
Format COMTRADE
Recording mode circular
Sampling rate 32 samples / cycle
Trigger setup:
Pre-trigger time 0.05...1.00 s (step 0.01 s)
Post-trigger time 0.05...60.00 s (step 0.05 s)

Set sample channels:

i L1-H, i L2-H, i L3-H, i L1-L, i L2-L, i L3-L, i E1,
i E2, u L1, u L2, u L3, u E, i L1cH , i L 2cH ,
i L 3cH , i L1cL , i L 2cL , i L 3cL , i SL1, i SL 2 ,
i SL 3 , i DL1, i DL 2 , i DL 3
Set analog channels:
Analog 1...Analog 12 f U12 , f U23 , f U31,I L1-H, I L2-H, I L3-H, IL1L ,
IL2L , IL3L , IE1, IE2, IECH, IECL, I DL1, I DL 2 , I DL 3 , UL1, UL2 , UL3 , U12 , U23 , U31, UE,UEC, DTheta, PhiL1, PhiL2 ,
PhiL3 , PhiE , PhiEC, I1, I2/I1, U1, U2, P, Q, S, CosPhi, P L1, P L 2 , P L 3 , Q L1, Q L 2 , Q L 3 , CosPhiL1, CosPhiL2 ,
CosPhiL3 , I L1-2nd , I L 2-I 2nd , I L 3-2nd , I -2nd /I L , T1...T8
Set digital channels:
Binary 1...Binary 16 digital channels KC1-1... KC1-8, KC2-1... KC2-8,
IN1-1...IN1-16, IN2-1...IN2-16 [2]
Binary 17...Binary 32 digital channels (87T states)
ST Id>_L1, ST Id>_L2, ST Id>_L3,
TR Id>_L1, TR Id>_L2, TR Id>_L3, ST Id>>_L1, ST Id>>_L2, ST Id>>_L3, TR Id>>_L1, TR Id>>_L2,
TR Id>>_L3, ST 2nd-REST, ST 5th-REST, ST H-REST-L1, ST H-REST-L2, ST H-REST-L3, ST SatDet

Note 1 For the DFR function a licence is required; call Thytronic for purchasing.
Note 2 Output relay and binary input states are available only when the concerning I/O circuits are implemented

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 39

TECHNICAL DATA
3.9 METERING
— Accuracy (type test)

MEASURE Reference values Accuracy Reference values Accuracy

Phase current 0.1 In 0.2% 1 In 0.03%
Measured residual current 0.01 IEn 0.3% 1 IEn 0.02%
Calculated residual current 0.1...1 In 2% 1 In 0.3%
Phase voltage 0.1 Un 0.2% 1 Un 0.03%
Measured residual voltage 0.01 UEn 0.02% 0.1 UEn 0.02%
Calculated residual voltage 0.01 UECn 0.5% 0.1 UECn 0.3%
Power - Energy 0.01 Pn 2% 0.1...1 Pn 0.3%
Frequency 0.02 Un 3 mHz 1 Un 2 mHz
0.005 IEn - 0.01 UEn
Phase 0.002 IEn - 0.004 UEn 1.5° 0.2°
0.1 IEn - 0.5 UEn
Positive/Negative sequence current I1 or I2 = 0.5 In 0.5% I1 or I2 = 1 In 0.5%
Positive/Negative sequence voltage 0.01 Un 4% 0.15 Un 0.3%
Pickup and operate time 1.5 x setting for fist element 5% ± 10 ms 2.5 x setting for other elements 5% ± 10 ms

— Measures
Measure Symbol
Locked frequency fl
U 12 frequency f U12
U 23 frequency f U23
U 31 frequency f U31
RMS value of fundamental comp. for phase currents side H I L1H , I L 2H , I L 3H
RMS value of fundamental comp. for phase currents side L I L1L , I L 2L , I L 3L
RMS value of phase currents side L I L1L...3Lrms
RMS value of fundamental component for phase voltages U L1, U L 2 , U L 3
RMS value of fundamental com. for residual current side 1 I E1
RMS value of fundamental com. for residual current side 2 I E2
RMS value of fundamental com. for residual voltage UE
Compensated currents side H I L1cH , I L 2cH , I L 3cH
Compensated currents sid L I L1cL , I L 2cL , I L 3cL
Stabilization currents I SL1, I SL 2 , I SL 3
Differential currents I DL1, I DL 2 , I DL 3
Second harmonic of differential currents I DL1-2nd, I DL2-2nd, I DL3-2nd
Fifth harmonic of differential currents I DL1-5th, I DL2-5th, I DL3-5th
Thermal image DTheta
Phase-to-phase voltages U 12 , U 23 , U 31
Calculated residual voltage U EC
Calculated residual current side H and side L I ECH , I ECL
Maximum current between I L1-I L 2 -I L 3 I Lmax
Maximum RMS current between I L1-I L 2 -I L 3 I Lmax-rms
Minimum current between I L1-I L 2 -I L 3 I Lmin
Minimum RMS current between I L1-I L 2 -I L 3 I Lmin-rms
Average current between I L1-I L2-I L3 I LL
Average RMS current between I L1-I L2-I L3 I L-rms
Average voltage between U L1-U L 2 -U L 3 UL
Maximum voltage between U L1-U L 2 -U L 3 U Lmax
Minimum voltage between U L1-U L 2 -U L 3 U Lmin
Average voltage between U 12-U 23-U 31 U
Maximum voltage between U 12-U 23-U 31 U max
Minimum voltage between U 12-U 23-U 31 U min
Displacement angle of I L1 respect to U L1 PhiL1
Displacement angle of I L 2 respect to U L 2 PhiL2

40 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

TECHNICAL DATA
 Measure Symbol
Displacement angle of I L 3 respect to U L 3 PhiL3
Displacement angle of U E respect to I E PhiE
Displacement angle of U EC respect to I E PhiEC
Displacement angle of U E respect to I EC PhiE-IEC
Displacement angle of U EC respect to I EC PhiEC-IEC
Positive sequence current side L I 1L
Negative sequence current side L I 2L
Negative sequence/positive sequence current ratio I 2L /I 1L
Positive sequence voltage U1
Negative sequence voltage U2
Total active power P
Total reactive power Q
Total apparent power S
Power factor CosPhi
Phase active powers P L1, P L 2 , P L 3
Phase reactive powers Q L1, Q L 2 , Q L 3
L1 Phase power factor CosPhiL1
L2 Phase power factor CosPhiL2
L3 Phase power factor CosPhiL3
L1 phase impedance Z L1
L1 resistive component R L1
L1 reactive component X L1
Phase impedance side L Z12, Z23, Z31
Second harmonic of phase currents I L1...3-2nd
Max of the 2nd harmonic phase currents/
I -2nd /I L
Fundamental component percentage ratio I-2nd /IL
Third harmonic of phase currents I L1-3rd , I L 2-3rd , I L 3-3rd
Third harmonic of residual current I E-3rd
Third harmonic of residual voltage U E-3rd
Fourth harmonic of phase currents I L1...3-4th
Fifth harmonic of phase currents I L1...3-5th
Motor starts counter N Start
Motor starts cumulative time TStart
Phase fixed currents demand I L1...3FIX
Phase rolling currents demand I L1...3ROL
Phase peak currents demand I L1...3MA X
Phase minimum currents demand I L1...3MIN
Fixed active power demand P FIX
Fixed reactive power demand Q FIX
Rolling active power demand P ROL
Rolling reactive power demand Q ROL
Maximum active power demand P MA X
Maximum reactive power demand Q MA X
Minimum active power demand P MIN
Minimum reactive power demand Q MIN
Positive active energy EA+
Negative active energy EA-
Total active energy EA
Positive reactive energy EQ+
Negative reactive energy EQ-
Total reactive energy EQ
Temperature Pt1...Pt8 T1...T8
Operation time of motor P-RMT
Total operation time of motor T-RMT
Starting state IRUN Start-IRUN

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 41

TECHNICAL DATA
 4 FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
4.1 HARDWARE
Device layout

ETHERNET

1A/5A
INPUT MODULE
CPU
EEprom Flash SRam
≈
≈ CTs - VTs
CPU FPGA DSP ADC
≈
≈
RS485 Thybus
RTC
RS232-Ethernet ≈

OUTPUT RELAYS

KC1-1...KC1-8
KC2-1...KC2-8

BINARY INPUTS
IN1-1

IN1-16
+3ю3 V

+10 V

+24 V
-10 V

IN2-1
+5 V

0V
IN2-16

POWER SUPPLY
Pt100
PT1
T1 MPT1

PT8
T8 MPT8

Uaux

Analog outputs
-
MIS-1 #/∩ +

#/∩ -
MIS-4
+

hw.ai

— Power supply board

All the components necessary for conversion and stabilization functions are present.
Two versions are envisaged suited to the input ranges 24...48 V and 115...230 V.
The circuit provides stabilized voltages of +10 V and -10 V, required for the analogue measurement,
+24 V for relays and +5 V for supplying the digital circuits.
— CPU module
This circuit board contains all the circuits necessary for performing the analogue and digital pro-
cessing of the signals.

42 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 Analog processing
The following are envisaged:
• Anti aliasing filter circuits,
• Amplifier circuits for conditioning the input signals,
• Reference voltage adjustment circuits for the measurement A/D converter.
The Pro-n relays use a DSP processor operating at 40 MHz; it performs all the processing on the
analogue signals and furthermore coordinates management of the TX-RX signals to the CPU.
The input currents are sampled at a frequency of 24 samples per period by means of a dual conver-
sion system which allows the attainment of information pertaining to polarity and amplitude with high
resolution. The measurement criterion allows precise measurement of even those signals having a
unidirectional component, such as transient currents with overlapping exponential, which typically
appear during faults.
The circuit board also houses the output relays with the corresponding command and control cir-
cuits, communication circuits, buttons, LCD display, LEDs and the key switch.
CPU
A 32 bit CPU is provided.
The following are envisaged:
• Real Time Clock circuits with oscillator and super capacitor,
• RS232 communication port,
• RS485 communication port,
• Thybus communication circuits for external modules and MMI board,
• Network communication circuits (optional Ethernet).
Memories:
• SRam: high speed static memory, used for data and cache,
• Flash memory: used for fw storage and upgrade,
• EEprom memory: used for calibration data storage,
• FPGA for data transfer between CPU and DSP.

— Input board
Depending on the version (inductive CT and VT inputs or ThySensor) respectively the module in-
cludes:
• Three CTs committed for phase currents acquisition
• One CT committed for residual current acquisition
The input circuits are suitable for 1 A or 5 A external CTs[1]
• Three VTs committed for phase voltages acquisition
• One VT committed for residual voltage acquisition.
or:
• Six voltage inputs for the measurement of the three currents and three phase voltages
• One CT committed for residual current acquisition

— MMI (keyboard, LED and display)

The MMI module (Man Machine Interface) includes:
• An eight keys 8 keyboard,
• a backlight graphic LCD display,
• Sixteen signalling LEDs.
• An Ethernet port for local interface

Note 1 The phase and residual nominal currents must be adjusted by means dip-switch.

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 43

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
4.2 FIRMWARE
The firmware which handles operation of the Pro-N relays is made up of three fundamental elements
shown in the following block diagram.

Ethernet RS485 RS232

TIMER I/O boards

RTOS timer KEYS

PC com
Sync +
RTOS timer RTC refresh
Messages
EEPROM Binary inputs
RTOS timer update

Output relays
RAM/EPROM Diagnostic
memory check
LEDs
I/O
Data Base DATA BASE Thybus
Fast devices
Counters
EEPROM
Events
MMI Slow devices
sampling Measures
DSP
RTOS timer
Oscillography
KEYS
SIMBOLOGIA

task Processo (task)

Drivers Libreria funzionale (Drivers)

RTOS timer Timer del sistema operativo

Interrupt sw.ai

— Base software
Single modules are application independent with modular and scalable structure.
The system can be assimilated to the PC BIOS (Basic Input-Output System); three main function are
provided:
• Start-up test execution;
• RAM loading of the operating system;
• Provide a suitable interface to access the relay hardware

— Real-time operating system

An embedded operative system is employed suitable for real-time applications (RTOS).
A multithread preemptive structure is able to menage several task with multiple priority levels .
The kernel represents the nucleus of the system: it includes the processing functions closest to the
electronic circuits.
In addition, the kernel manages a service communication protocol known as Basic Protocol (BP).

— Task
The task (process e thread) are the base components.
Example are:
• Keyboard management
• RTC (Real Time Clock) updating
• RAM/EEPROM updating
• Diagnostic
• Input acquisition
• Output relay management
• MMI
• I/O updating
• DSP data processing

44 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 DSP Firmware
By means of Discrete Fourier Transform calculation, based on 24 samples/period, information is de-
duced in relation to the amplitude and phase of all the current measurements; these are constantly
updated and at the disposal of all the protection and control application algorithms.
— Drivers
Inside the driver library, all the specialized module for protection and control function are provided.
They are the link from kernel and application layer. Examples are:
• Data base management
• PC messages management
• TCP/IP messages management
• Basic Protocol management
• Counter management
• Event and fault management
• Measuring management
• Oscillography management

— Application Software
The software acts the specialization of the base system; all protective and control elements are
inside it.
The main modules ate:
• Diagnostic function for application layer,
• Input management (binary inputs),
• Protective functions,
• Event recording,
• Output management (LEDs and relays)
Each element (Kernel, Drivers and Application) may, in turn, be split into modules:

Base protocol (kernel)

The module known as the Basic Protocol (BP) manages the service communication between the
kernel and the other modules through the communication buses with the following services:
• Data and information exchange,
• Calibration,
• Upgrade fw DSP,
• Upgrade application sw

Communication (drivers)
The ModBus TCP/IP protocol, with ethernet interface, the ModBus RTU, IEC 60870-5-103 and DNP3
protocol over RS485 interface and the ModBus RTU RS232 for ThySetter are provided.

MMI (drivers)
The drivers deal with the menu management (MMi and/or communication messages).

— Data Base
The data base is split into three main sections:
• RAM for volatile data,
• REE and PAR for non volatile data.

— Self test (Application)

The main hw and sw function are permanently verified in background; no additional delay are intro-
duced.
In particular the following function are tested:
• Reference voltages;
• Output relays;
• Sw flow with execution time monitoring;
• REE and PAR data congruence.

— Development tool (Builder)

For the development of the project, a CASE instrument has been developed, responsible for the opti-
mized production of software code for the management of collaboration, the database and the MMI
data and the Xml files used for communication. The automatic code generation criteria ensures the
quality of the result in terms of the reusability, verifiability and maintainability of the software life
cycle.

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 45

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
4.3 I/0
— Metering inputs
The following inputs are provided:
• Six phase current inputs
• Two residual current input
• The rated currents are independently adjustable at 1 A or 5 A through sw setting
• Three phase voltage inputs with programmable nominal voltages within range 50...130 V (UR=100 V)
or 200...520 V (UR=400 V) to be select on order. The nominal voltages is user adjustable inside a
wide setting range, so the relays can be employed on plants with TV different secondary voltages
(50...130 V for versions with U R =100 V and 200...520 V for versions with U R = 400 V). The version with
U R =400V allows a direct measure without interposing VTs for low voltage applications (200...520 V
nominal voltage). The voltage inputs must be connected for measuring phase-to-neutral voltages.
From the U L1 , U L2 , U L3 measures the phase-to-phase voltages U L12 , U L23 , U L31 are calculated.
• One residual voltage input, with programmable nominal voltage within range 50...130 V (UER =100 V )

NVA100X-D
Three phase current inputs side H

One residual current input side 1

One residual voltage input

Three phase voltage inputs

G
Three phase current inputs side L

One residual current input side 2

sensori.ai

— Signal processing
Various processing levels are involved:
• Acquisition (base level).
• Direct measures of physical channels (first level).
• Calculated measures (second level).
• Derived (third level).
The measures concerning a level are based on data worked out in the previous level.
For each level the required resources concerning the priority for tasks (conditioning circuits, DSP
and CPU) are on hand.

ACQUISITION (base level)

The input signals are sampled 64 times per period:

ACQUISITION

≈ instantaneous measures

acquisizione.ai

- iL1H...iL3H Phase current instantaneous values - side H

- iL1L...iL3L Phase current instantaneous values - side L
- iE1 Residual current instantaneous value - side 1
- iE2 Residual current instantaneous value - side 2
- uL1...uL3 Phase voltage instantaneous values
- uE Residual voltage instantaneous value (traditional VT inputs only)
From the sampled quantities, several measures are computed for protection, monitoring and meter-
ing purposes.

• Direct
• Calculated
• Phase
• Sequence
• Power
• Harmonic
• Impedance
• Demand
• Energy.

46 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 Direct
Samples are processed by means DFT (Discrete Fourier Transform) algorithm and the phase and
amplitude of fundamental are computed:

• Phase currents - side H and side L IL1H, IL2H, IL3H, IL1L, IL2L, IL3L

ACQUISITION

i L1H, i L2H, i L3H IL1H, IL2H, IL3H

≈ i L1L , i L2L , i L3L
DFT (InH, InL )
IL1L , IL2L, IL3L

IL1.ai

• Phase voltages UL1, UL2, UL3

ACQUISITION
VTs
u L1, u L2 , u L3 U L1, U L2 , U L3
≈ DFT (En)

UL 1 . a i

• Residual current IE1 and IE2

ACQUISITION

i E1, i E2 IE1, IE2

≈ DFT (IEn1, IEn2)

IE.ai

• Residual voltage UE

ACQUISITION UE
VT DFT (fundamental) (UEn)
uE
≈
U E3H
DFT (3rd harmonic) (UEn)
UE . a i

Calculated
• Frequency. The measure of period is taken preferably from phase voltage inputs[1]; when all volt-
age are missing the input current are employed.

ACQUISITION

UL1 ≈ uL1 uL12

f
UL2 ≈ uL2 uL23 (Hz)
T

UL3 ≈ uL3 uL31

IL1H, IL1L ≈ i L1H, i L1L

f
IL2H, IL2L ≈ i L2H, i L2L (Hz)
T

IL3H, IL3L ≈ i L3H, i L3L

F. a i

Note 1 The frequency can also be measured on the three phase-to-phase voltages (calculated vectorially)

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 47

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 By means vector addition of direct measures the following are calculated (RMS value of fundamen-
tal components):
• Phase-to-phase voltages: U12, U23, U31

UL1
U12
UL2 U12 = UL1 - UL2 (Un)

UL2
U23 U31 UL1 U12
UL3 U23 = UL2 - UL3 (Un)
UL3 UL2
UL1
U 31
UL3 U 31 = UL3 - UL1 (Un)
U23
U1 2 . a i

• Fundamental component of the calculated residual voltage UEC[1]

UL1
UL2 UEC
UEC = UL1 + UL2 + UL3 (UEn)
UL3
UE C . a i

• Fundamental component of the calculated residual currents IECH and IECL [2]

IECH
IL1H, IL2H, IL3H IECH = IL1H + IL2H + IL3H (InH)

IECL
IL1L , IL2L, IL3L IECH = IL1H + IL2H + IL3H (InL )
IEC.ai

• Thermal image Δθ

IL1L
I1
I1 = (IL1L + e+j120°IL 2 L + e-j120°IL 3 L ) It h 2
IL2L
I2
It h = √(I1 2 + K2 2 ∙I2 2 ) dΔθ Δθ IB
+ =
( ) Δθ
(ΔθB )
-j120° +j120° dt T+ T+
IL3L I2 = (IL1L + e IL 2 L + e IL 3 L )
Theta.ai

Phase[3]
• Displacement angle of any phase current respect the corresponding phase-to-neutral voltage:
PhiL1, PhiL2, PhiL3,
• Displacement angle of the measured residual current respect the measured residual voltage (posi-
tive with current in lagging direction in respect to voltage): PhiE,
• Displacement angle of the measured residual current respect the calculated residual voltage (pos-
itive with current in lagging direction in respect to voltage): PhiEC
• Displacement angle of the calculated residual current respect the measured residual voltage (pos-
itive with current in lagging direction in respect to voltage): PhiE_IEC
• Displacement angle of the calculated residual current respect the calculated residual voltage
(positive with current in lagging direction in respect to voltage): PhiEC_IEC

UL1
ϕL1 = IL1 - U L1
UL2 Phi L1 , Phi L 2 ,Phi L 3
ϕL 2 = IL 2 - U L 2 (° )
UL2
ϕL 3 = IL 3 - U L 3
IL1L
IL2L
IL3L ϕE = U E - IE Phi E
(° )
UE ϕEC = U EC - IE Phi EC
(° )
UEC
ϕE_IEC = U E - IEC Phi E_IEC
(° )
IE
ϕEC_IEC = U EC - IEC Phi EC_IEC
(° )
IEC
Fase.ai

Note 1 The residual voltage is available as a direct measure UE and computed measure UEC,
Note 2 The residual currents are available with either direct measurement (IE1 and IE2) and as calculated measure (IECH and IECL)
Note 3 The adjustment and display range of displacements are 0°... 359°

48 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 Sequence
• Fundamental RMS positive sequence current - side L: I1
• Fundamental RMS negative sequence current - side L: I2

IL1L I 1 -I 2 . a i
+j120° -j120°
IL2L I1 = (IL1 + e IL 2 + e IL 3 ) / 3 I1 , I 2
(In)
IL3 L -j120° +j120°
I2 = (IL1 + e IL 2 + e IL 3 ) / 3
1 √3 1 √3
e-j120°= - -j e
+j120°
=- +j
2 2 2 2

• Fundamental RMS positive sequence voltage: U1

• Fundamental RMS negative sequence voltage: U2
U2 . a i
UL1
UL2 U1 = (U L1 + e+j120°U L 2 + e-j120°U L 3 ) / 3 U1 , U 2
(un)
-j120° +j120°
UL3 U 2 = (U L1 + e UL 2 + e UL 3 ) / 3
1 √3 1 √3
e-j120°= - +j120°
-j e =- +j
2 2 2 2

Demand
• Fixed demand (IL1FIX, IL2FIX, IL3FIX, ±P FIX, ±Q FIX)
Inside an adjustable time interval t FIX, an average magnitude is calculated for phase currents IL1,
IL2, IL3, active power ±P and reactive power ±Q of measures taken every second. The average val-
ues are stored at the end of the same time interval.

IL1L tF I X ∙ 60
1
IL2L
IL x F I X
tF I X ∙ 60
¥ IL x n IL1F I X, IL 2 F I X,IL 3 F I X
(In )
n=1
IL3L tF I X ∙ 60
±PF I X = 1 ¥ ±Pn ±PF I X
(Pn )
tF I X ∙ 60
n=1
1s
tF I X tF I X tF I X tF I X tF I X ∙ 60
±P ±Q F I X = 1 ¥ ±Q n
±Q F I X
(Qn )
tF I X ∙ 60
±Q n=1
F i x -De m a n d . a i

• Rolling demand (IL1ROL, IL2ROL, IL3ROL, ±P ROL, ±Q ROL)

Inside an adjustable time interval NROL∙t ROL , an average magnitude is calculated for phase cur-
rents IL1, IL2, IL3, active power ±P and reactive power ±Q of measures taken every second, where
t ROL is the length of any time subinterval and NROL is the number of the time intervals. The average
values are stored at the end of the same time subinterval.

IL1ROL
Rolling demand example with N ROL=4 N R OL t R OL∙60
IL 2 ROL
IL1L Average inside time interval t ROL IL x ROL = 1 ¥
1
¥ IL x k IL 3 ROL
NROL tROL∙60 (In )
IL2L n=1 k=1 n

IL3L N R OL t R OL∙60
1 1 ±PROL
±PROL =
NROL
¥ tROL∙60
¥ ±Pk (Pn )
n=1 k=1 n
1s N R OL t R OL∙60
±P ±Q ROL
tROL tROL tROL tROL tROL tROL ±Q ROL = 1 ¥
1
¥ ±Q k (Qn )
±Q NROL tROL∙60
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 n=1 k=1 n
NROL
Rol-Demand.ai

• Peak (IL1MAX, IL2MAX, IL3MAX, ±PMAX, ±QMAX)

Inside an adjustable time interval t ROL, the maximum magnitude is calculated for phase currents
IL1, IL2, IL3, active power ±P and reactive power ±Q of measures taken every second. The average
values are stored at the end of the same time interval t ROL (Rolling demand common parameter).

IL1MA X
Maximum value of averages inside time interval t ROL t R OL∙60
IL1L 1 IL 2 MA X
Average inside time interval t ROL IL x MA X= MAX
tROL∙60
¥ IL x n IL 3 MA X
IL2L n=1 (In )
IL3L t R OL∙60
1 ±PMA X
±PMA X= MAX
tROL∙60
¥ ±Pn (Pn )
n=1
±P 1s
t R OL∙60
tROL tROL tROL tROL tROL tROL 1 ±Q MA X
±Q ±Q MA X= MAX
tROL∙60
¥ ±Q n (Qn )
n=1
Max-Demand.ai

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 49

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 • Minimum (IL1MIN, IL2MIN, IL3MIN, ±PMIN, ±QMIN)
Inside an adjustable time interval t ROL, the minimum magnitude is calculated for phase currents
IL1, IL2, IL3, active power ±P and reactive power ±Q of measures taken every second. The average
values are stored at the end of the same time interval t ROL (Rolling demand common parameter).

IL1MIN
Minimum value of averaged inside time intervalt ROL t R OL∙60
IL1L Average inside time intervalt ROL 1 IL 2 MIN
IL x MIN = MIN
tROL∙60
¥ IL x n IL 3 MIN
IL2L n=1 (In )
IL3L
t R OL∙60
1 ±PMIN
±PMIN = MIN
tROL∙60
¥ ±Pn (Pn )
1s n=1
Reset
±P t R OL∙60
tROL tROL tROL tROL tROL tROL 1 ±Q MIN
±Q ±Q MIN = MIN
tROL∙60
¥ ±Qn (Qn )
n=1
Min-Demand.ai

Impedance
- impedance (21 element): Z12, Z23, Z31,
- impedance (L1 phase): ZL1
- resistive component impedance L1: RL1
- reactive component impedance L1: XL1

UL1
Z12 = U12 /IL1
UL2 Z12 , Z2 3 , Z3 1
Z2 3 = U 2 3 /IL 2 (Zn)
UL2 Z3 1 = U 3 1 /IL 3
IL1L ZL1 , RL1 , XL1
ZL1 = U L1 /IL1 (ZnF)
IL2L
RL1 = ZL1 ∙ cos ϕ-Z L1
IL3L XL1 = ZL1 ∙ sinϕ-Z L1 Zn = U n /In Znf = En /In
Z.ai

Power
• Phase active power: ±PL1, ±PL2, ±PL3,
• Total active power: ±P

UL1
UL2 ±PL1 = U L1∙ IL1L∙ cos ϕL1
±PL1 , ±PL 2 ,±PL 2 ,±P
UL3 ±PL 2 = U L 2∙ IL 2 L∙ cos ϕL 2 (Pn )
IL1L
±PL 3 = U L 3 ∙ IL 3 L∙ cos ϕL 3 cosPhi L1 , cosPhi L 2 ,cosPhi L 3
IL2L (p.u.)
±P = PL1+ PL 2+ PL 3
IL3L
P. a i

• Phase reactive power: ±Q L1, ±Q L2, ±Q L3,

• Total reactive power: ±Q

UL1
UL2 ±Q L1 = U L1∙ IL1L∙ sinϕL1
UL2 ±Q L 2 = U L 2∙ IL 2 L∙ sinϕL 2 ±Q L1 , ±Q L 2 ,±Q L 2 ,±Q
IL1L (Qn )
±Q L 3 = U L 3 ∙ IL 3 L∙ sinϕL 3
IL2L
±Q = Q L1+ Q L 2+ Q L 3
IL3L
Q. a i

• Total apparent power: S

±P
S
S = P2 + Q2 (Sn )
±Q

S.ai

50 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 Energy
• Positive and negative active energy (one second refresh): +EA, -EA,
• Total active energy (one second refresh): EA,
• Positive and negative reactive energy (one second refresh): +EQ, -EQ,
• Total reactive energy (one second refresh): EQ

+P
EA +, EA -,EA
-P EA + = ∫(+Pdt) EA - = ∫(-Pdt) EA = ∫(Pdt) (Wh)

+Q
EQ + = ∫(+Q dt) EQ - = ∫(-Q dt) EQ = ∫(Q dt) EQ +, EQ -,EQ
-Q (varh)

E.ai

Use of over-described measures is shown in the following tables.

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 51

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
— Conventions
Cyclic phase sequence order
For three phase rotating currents, a direct cyclic sequence is defined when the three phases are
L1, L2, L3 ordered, while an inverse cyclic sequence is defined when the three phases are L1, L3, L2
ordered. Operating with ThySetter at level 1, one of the six combinations of cyclical succession for
the phasor current of H side, the current phasors of side L and voltage phasors may be select. This
function allows errors corrections for cyclic inversion.
IL1H IL1L

IL3H IL2H IL3L IL2L

Direct sequence cyclic order Direct sequence cyclic order
for side H currents (Base) for side L currents (Base)

IL1H IL1L

IL1H-IL3H-IL2H IL1L-IL3L-IL2L

IL2H IL3H IL2L IL3L

IL2H IL2L

IL2H-IL1H-IL3H IL2L-IL1L-IL3L

IL3H IL1H IL3L IL1L

IL2H IL2L

IL2H-IL3H-IL1H IL2L-IL3L-IL1L

IL1H IL3H IL1L IL3L

IL3H IL3L

IL3H-IL1H-IL2H IL3L-IL1L-IL2L

IL2H IL1H IL2L IL1L

IL3H IL3L

IL3H-IL2H-IL1H IL3L-IL2L-IL1L

IL1H IL2H IL1L IL2L

fasori1.ai

L1 L2 L3 NVA100X-D

IL1-> IL1

IL2-> IL2 Sequence = IL1-IL2-IL3 Base

IL3-> IL3

Proper connections -> no software correction of cyclic sequence required

L1 L2 L3 NVA100X-D

IL1-> IL1

IL2-> IL3 Sequence = IL1-IL3-IL2

IL3-> IL2

Wrong connections -> software correction of cyclic sequence required cyclic.ai

52 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
— Polarity reversing
For each inputs of each phase current and residual current input, the polarity “NORMAL” or “RE-
VERSE” can be select.
With “NORMAL” selection the input polarity from this input is not inverted, with “REVERSE” selec-
tion the input polarity is reversed. This function allows you to correct any connection errors due to
reverse polarity.

NVA100X-D

side H CTs C1-C3-C5-C7 terminals

Phase current inputs side H Polarity = NORMAL

C2-C4-C6-C8 terminals

Protected object
(Motor/Generator/ NO CORRECTION
Transformer) REQUIRED
side L CTs A1-A3-A5-A7 terminals

Phase current inputs side L Polarity = NORMAL

A2-A4-A6-A8 terminals

Proper connections -> none polarity correction required

NVA100X-D

C1-C3-C5-C7 terminals
side H CTs
Phase current inputs side H Polarity = NORMAL

C2-C4-C6-C8 terminals

Protected object REQUIRED POLARITY

(Motor/Generator/
Transformer) CORRECTION ON SIDE L
A1-A3-A5-A7 terminals
side L CTs

Phase current inputs side L Polarity = INVERSE

A2-A4-A6-A8 terminals

Wrong connections -> polarity correction required

NVA100X-D

C1-C3-C5-C7 terminals
TA lato H

Phase current inputs side H Polarity = INVERSE

C2-C4-C6-C8 terminals
Protected object
(Motor/Generator/
REQUIRED POLARITY
Transformer) CORRECTION ON SIDE L
A1-A3-A5-A7 terminals

Phase current inputs side L Polarity = NORMAL

A2-A4-A6-A8 terminals

Wrong connections -> polarity correction required

polarity.ai

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 53

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 Convention for measuring
active power, reactive power
and power factor.
• Resistive-inductive load.

NVA100X-D

A1-A3-A5 UL3
IL1 IL3
IL2 CURRENT INPUTS
IL3

B3-B5-B7 UL1

IL1
UL1 VOLTAGE INPUTS IL2
UL2
UL3

SYSTEM UL2

II° +Q, +Q L1 , +Q L 2 , +Q L 3 I°

-cos ϕ, -cos ϕL1 , -cos ϕL 2 , -cos ϕL 3 +cos ϕ, +cos ϕL1 , +cos ϕL 2 , +cos ϕL 3

Resistive-inductive
S,SL1 ,SL 2 ,SL 3 load
SYSTEM

-P, -PL1 , -PL 2 , -PL 3 +P, +PL1 , +PL 2 , +PL 3

-cos ϕ, -cos ϕL1 , -cos ϕL 2 , -cos ϕL 3 +cos ϕ, +cos ϕL1 , +cos ϕL 2 , +cos ϕL 3

-Q, -Q L1 , -Q L 2 , -Q L 3
III° IV°
Resistive-inductive load convenzioni.ai

• Resistive-capacitive load.

NVA100X-D

A1-A3-A5 UL3
IL1
IL2 CURRENT INPUTS IL3
IL3
IL1

B3-B5-B7 UL1

UL1 VOLTAGE INPUTS

UL2
UL3
IL2
SYSTEM UL2

II° +Q, +Q L1 , +Q L 2 , +Q L 3 I°

-cos ϕ, -cos ϕL1 , -cos ϕL 2 , -cos ϕL 3 +cos ϕ, +cos ϕL1 , +cos ϕL 2 , +cos ϕL 3

-P, -PL1 , -PL 2 , -PL 3 +P, +PL1 , +PL 2 , +PL 3

Resistive-capacitive
S,SL1 ,SL 2 ,SL 3 SYSTEM load

-cos ϕ, -cos ϕL1 , -cos ϕL 2 , -cos ϕL 3 +cos ϕ, +cos ϕL1 , +cos ϕL 2 , +cos ϕL 3

-Q, -Q L1 , -Q L 2 , -Q L 3
III° IV°
Resistive-capacitive load convenzioni2.ai

54 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 • Resistive-inductive load.

SYSTEM NVA100X-D
UL3
A1-A3-A5
IL1
IL1
IL2 CURRENT INPUTS IL2
IL3
UL1
B3-B5-B7

UL1 VOLTAGE INPUTS

UL2
UL3 IL3
UL2

II° +Q, +Q L1 , +Q L 2 , +Q L 3 I°

-cos ϕ, -cos ϕL1 , -cos ϕL 2 , -cos ϕL 3 +cos ϕ, +cos ϕL1 , +cos ϕL 2 , +cos ϕL 3

-P, -PL1 , -PL 2 , -PL 3 +P, +PL1 , +PL 2 , +PL 3

Resistive-inductive
load S,SL1 ,SL 2 ,SL 3
SYSTEM

-cos ϕ, -cos ϕL1 , -cos ϕL 2 , -cos ϕL 3 +cos ϕ, +cos ϕL1 , +cos ϕL 2 , +cos ϕL 3

-Q, -Q L1 , -Q L 2 , -Q L 3
III° IV°
Resistive-inductive load convenzioni3.ai

Resistive-capacitive load.

SYSTEM NVA100X-D
UL3
A1-A3-A5 IL2
IL1
IL2 CURRENT INPUTS
IL3
UL1
B3-B5-B7 IL3

UL1 VOLTAGE INPUTS IL1

UL2
UL3
UL2

II° +Q, +Q L1 , +Q L 2 , +Q L 3 I°

-cos ϕ, -cos ϕL1 , -cos ϕL 2 , -cos ϕL 3 +cos ϕ, +cos ϕL1 , +cos ϕL 2 , +cos ϕL 3

Resistive-capacitive S,SL1 ,SL 2 ,SL 3

SYSTEM load

-P, -PL1 , -PL 2 , -PL 3 +P, +PL1 , +PL 2 , +PL 3

-cos ϕ, -cos ϕL1 , -cos ϕL 2 , -cos ϕL 3 +cos ϕ, +cos ϕL1 , +cos ϕL 2 , +cos ϕL 3

-Q, -Q L1 , -Q L 2 , -Q L 3
III° IV°
Resistive-capacitive load convenzioni4.ai

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 55

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
— Use of measured signals

START LEDs L1...L5,L1-1...L1-8

Selective block input BLIN1

START Relays KC1-1...KC2-8

TRIP LEDs L1...L5,L1-1...L1-8

Second harmonic restraint

Binary inputs IN1-1... IN2-16

TRIP Relays KC1-1...KC2-8

Selective block - BLOCK2

Cold Load Pickup (CLP)
Selective block output

Logic block - BLOCK1

IL1-2nd, IL2-2nd, IL3-2nd
IL1(H), IL2(H) , IL3(H)
IL1(L), IL2(L) , IL3(L)
i L1(L), i L2(L) , i L3(L)

UL1, UL2 , UL3

U12, U23 , U 31
uL1, uL2 , uL3
IECH, IECL
IE1, IE2
i E1, i E2

P, Q, S
UEC
UE
U1
U2
uE
I1
I2

E
f
PROTECTIVE ELEMENTS
Underimpedance (21) g g g g g g g
Undervoltage (27) g g g g g g g
Positive sequence undervoltage (27V1) g g g g g g
Directional active overpower (32P) g g g g g g
Undercurrent (37) g g g g g g
Directional active underpower (37P) g g g g g g
Loss of field (40) g g g g g g g
Negative sequence overcurrent (46M-G) g g g g g g g g
Thermal image (49MG) g g g g g g g g g g g g g
Phase overcurrent (50/51) g g g g g g g g g g g
Voltage restrained overcurrent (51V) g g g g g g g g g g
Residual overcurrent (50N.1/51N.1, 50N.2/51N.2) g g g g g g g g g g g
Residual overcurrent (50N/51NComp) g g g g g g g g g g g g
Minimum power factor (55) g g g g g g
Overvoltage (59) g g g g g g g g g
Residual overvoltage (59N) g g g g g g g g
Negative sequence overvoltage (59V2) g
Low impedance restricted earth fault (64REF) g g g g g g g g g g g g
Directional earth fault overcurrent (67N) g g g g g g g g g g g g
Directional earth fault overcurrent (67NComp) g g g g g g g g g
Under/overfrequency (81U/81O) g g g g g g
Compensated differential (87G-87M-87T) g g g g g g g g
Breaker failure (BF) g g g g g g g g
CONTROL and MONITORING
Maximum number of startings (66) g g g g g g
Automatic reclosure g g g g g
CT Monitoring (74CT) g g
VT Monitoring(74VT) g g g g g g
Trip Circuit Supervision (TCS) g
Second harmonic restraint (2NDH-REST) g
MEASURES
Frequency g g
Phase currents g g
Measured residual current g
Positive sequence current g
Negative sequence current g
Thermal image g
Phase voltages g
Phase-to-phase voltages g
Residual voltage g
Negative sequence voltage g
Active power g
Reactive power g
Apparent power g
Phase current /phase voltage displacement g g
Power factor g g
Reactive energy g
EVENT RECORDER
Event 0 g g g g g
Event ...299 g g g g g
FAULT RECORDER
Fault 0 g g g g g g g g g g g
Fault ... g g g g g g g g g g g
Fault 19 g g g g g g g g g g g
OSCILLOGRAPHY
Record 1 g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g
Record ... g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g

Note: the acquired measurements on the L side are used for all protective elements with the exception of differential (87) and phase overcurrent (50/51)
protections that also employ current measurements acquired on the H

56 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
— Binary inputs
Sixteen or thirty-two binary inputs are available (one or two input boards).
The dry inputs must be powered with an external voltage, (usually the auxiliary power supply).
The connections are shown in the schematic diagrams.
The following settings can be used to configure each input inside the Set \ Board 1(2) inputs \ Binary
input IN1-1...(IN1-x):
• Logic Active-ON (activated when powered), or Active-OFF (activated when power is turned off).
• ON Timer (OFF-to-ON time delay) and OFF Timer (ON-to-OFF time delay).
• Binary input allocation.
Adjustable debounce timer allows any transient to decay avoiding false activation of the input; the
positive transition is acquired if the input is permanently high for a time interval longer than the t ON
setting delay; similarly for the negative transitions, the negative transition is acquired if the input is
permanently high for a time interval longer than the t OFF setting delay.

BINARY INPUT

t ON t ON t OFF t OFF

INTERNAL STATE

t
binary-timers.ai

In the diagram, INTERNAL STATE represents the logical state of the binary input used in the following
processing. Each binary input may be matched to one of the following default functions.
Binary inputs
ELEMENTS
IN1-1 IN1-x IN1-16 IN2-1 IN2-x IN2-16
Reset LEDs g g g g g g
Set profile (switching setting A and B) g g g g g g
Fault trigger (fault recording) g g g g g g
Block2 IPh/IE (selective block from phase and/or ground elements) g g g g g g
Block2 IPh (selective block from phase elements) g g g g g g
Block2 IE (selective block from ground elements) g g g g g g
Block1 (logic block) side H-L g g g g g g
Block1 (logic block) side H g g g g g g
Block1 (logic block) side L g g g g g g
Block1 (logic block) 87GMT g g g g g g
TCS1 (Trip Circuit Supervision) g g g g g g
TCS2 (Trip Circuit Supervision) g g g g g g
Trip ProtExt (trip from external protection relays) g g g g g g
Reset counters g g g g g g
Reset CB Monitor (clear CB monitoring data) g g g g g g
52a (CB auxiliary contact) g g g g g g
52b (CB auxiliary contact) g g g g g g
Open CB g g g g g g
Close CB g g g g g g
Preset DTheta (thermal image preset) g g g g g g
Remote trip g g g g g g
MCB VT OPEN (MCB auxiliary contact or fuse) g g g g g g
MCB VT2 OPEN (MCB V2 auxiliary contact or fuse) g g g g g g
Reset on demand measures g g g g g g
Reset energy measures g g g g g g
74VT ext. (74VT from external protection relays) g g g g g g
I(L)>Bk (Logic block of I> element-side L, active through virtual I/O) g g g g g g
I(L)>>Bk (Logic block of I>> element-side L, active through virtual I/O) g g g g g g
I(L)>>>Bk (Logic block of I>>> element-side L, active through virtual I/O) g g g g g g
I(H)>Bk (Logic block of I> element-side H, active through virtual I/O) g g g g g g
I(H)>>Bk (Logic block of I>> element-side H, active through virtual I/O) g g g g g g
I(H)>>>Bk (Logic block of I>>> element-side H, active through virtual I/O) g g g g g g
IE1>Bk (Logic block of IE1> element, active through virtual I/O) g g g g g g
IE1>>Bk (Logic block of IE1>> element, active through virtual I/O) g g g g g g

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 57

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 Binary inputs
ELEMENTS
IN1-1 IN1-x IN1-16 IN2-1 IN2-x IN2-16
IE1>>>Bk (Logic block of IE1>>> element, active through virtual I/O) g g g g g g
IE2>Bk (Logic block of IE2> element, active through virtual I/O) g g g g g g
IE2>>Bk (Logic block of IE2>> element, active through virtual I/O) g g g g g g
IE2>>>Bk (Logic block of IE2>>> element, active through virtual I/O) g g g g g g
IEC>Bk (Logic block of IEC> element, active through virtual I/O) g g g g g g
IEC>>Bk (Logic block of IEC>> element, active through virtual I/O) g g g g g g
IEC>>>Bk (Logic block of IEC>>> element, active through virtual I/O) g g g g g g
IED>Bk (Logic block of IED> element, active through virtual I/O) g g g g g g
IED>>Bk (Logic block of IED>> element, active through virtual I/O) g g g g g g
IED>>>Bk (Logic block of IED>>> element, active through virtual I/O) g g g g g g
IED>>>>Bk (Logic block of IED>>>> element, active through virtual I/O) g g g g g g
IEDC>Bk (Logic block of IEDC> element, active through virtual I/O) g g g g g g
IEDC>>Bk (Logic block of IEDC>> element, active through virtual I/O) g g g g g g
IEDC>>>Bk (Logic block of IEDC>>> element, active through virtual I/O) g g g g g g
IEDC>>>>Bk (Logic block of IEDC>>>> element, active through virtual I/O) g g g g g g
Speed Control (acquire the rotor state - running or not running) g g g g g g
Reset N/T starts (Number of starts and start cumulative time for 66 element) g g g g g g
Motor restart (restart timers when the binary input become active) g g g g g g
Reset P RMT (The operation time of motor is cleared - Partial counter) g g g g g g
Reset T RMT (The operation time of motor is cleared - Total counter) g g g g g g
Reset LEDs
If the element tripped have gone back to rest condition, the latched LEDs and/or relays may be
reset.

Set-Reset latch

TRIPPING M ATRIX
(LED+REL AYS)
S
Set (ON≡turn on LED/relay)
≥

Reset LEDs Logic INx t O N INx t O F F

&
R ≥
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF Reset (ON≡turn off LED/relay) &
n.o. T 0 0 T
Binary input INx

Binary input allocation for reset signalling (LEDs) Reset-led.ai

Set profile
Inside Pro-N devices, two independent setting profiles (A and B) are available. Whereas different
settings are required, they are made in the setting profiles and stored in the non volatile memory of
relay. Applicable setting profile is activated usually via a binary input; when the programmed input is
activated, the profile B becomes operative as a replacement for the default profile A.[1]

Profile B Profile A Profile selection

Profile B Profile A (A, B, from binary input)

Set profile Logic INx t O N INx t O F F

n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF OFF≡Profile A, ON≡Profile B

n.o. T 0 0 T
Binary input INx

Binary input allocation for switching of setting profiles Switch-profile.ai

Note 1 To enable the profile switching the “Input-selected” parameter must be set inside the “Profile selection” submenu.
If multiple setting groups are not required, Group A is the default selection

58 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 Fault trigger
When the programmed input is activated, a trigger is issued for fault record SFR). Data storing takes
place with the same procedure resulting from a trip of any protective elements.

Fault recording

IL1->IL1r
Logic INx t O N INx t O F F IL2 ->IL2r
Fault trigger Protection
.....
element
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 DTheta->DTheta-r
n.o. T 0 0 T Inputs
Outputs
Binary input INx
Fault cause info

Binary input allocation for fault recorder trigger Trigger-faults.ai

Block2 IPh/IE
A change in status of a binary input effects a block[1] common for the following phase and ground
protective elements:
• I2>, I2>> (46M)
• DthAL1, DthAL2, Dth (49MG),
• I>, I>>, I>>> (50/51)
• ILR>, ILR>> (51LR)
• I-I/U>, I-I/U>> (51V)
and ground fault:
• IE1>, IE1>>, IE1>>> (50N.1/51N.1)
• IE2 >, IE2 >>, IE2 >>> (50N.2/51N.2)
• IEC >, IEC >>, IEC >>> (50NComp/51NComp)
• IED >, IED >>, IED >>> e IED >>>> (67N)
• IEDC >, IEDC >>, IEDC >>>, IED >>>> (67NComp)
The application of the binary inputs for the acquisition of Block2 (selective block) coming from exter-
nal protection relays is shown in the following figure.

towards reset timer

Block2 input enable (ON≡Enable)
Block2 IN
& xxxxx Trip Block2

t B-Iph

FROM OVERCURRENT PROTECTIONS t B-Iph

≥1 IPh Block2 input
0 T
FROM ANY PROTECTIONS

Logic IN2 t ON IN2 t OFF IPh/IE Block2

Block2IPh/IE
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 Block2 IN diagnostic
n.o. T 0 0 T t B-IE
Binary input INx
t B-IE
≥1 IE Block2 input
FROM EARTH FAULT PROTECTIONS 0 T
Block2 input
Binary input allocation for logic selectivity (Block2) BlockIph-Ie.ai

Block2 IPh
A change in status of a binary input effects a block[2] for the following phase protective elements:
• I2>, I2>> (46M), DthAL1, DthAL2, Dth> (49), I>, I>>, I>>> (50/51), ILR>, ILR>> (51LR), I-I/U>, I-I/U>> (51V).
Block2 IE
A change in status of a binary input effects a block[1] for the following earth protective elements:
• IE1>, IE1>> e IE1>>> (50N.1/51N.1), IE2 >, IE2 >> e IE2 >>> (50N.2/51N.2) IED >, IEC >, IEC >> e IEC >>>
(50NComp/51NComp), IED >>, IED >>>, IED >>>> (67N), IEDC >, IEDC >>, IEDC >>> e IED >>>> (67NComp).
Block1
A change in status of a binary input effects a block for a length of time equal to the activation of the
input[3]; the element pickup that wish be blocked must be enabled (the Block1 parameter must be

Note 1 The exhaustive treatment of the Block 2 function is described in the “Logic selectivity” paragraph.
Note 2 The exhaustive treatment of the Block 2 function is described in the “Logic selectivity” paragraph.
The application of the inputs for the acquisition of Block2 (selective block) for Phase (Block2 Iph) and earth protective functions (Block2 IE) is
similar to that illustrated in the scheme concerning the Block2 IphIIE
Note 3 Unlike the Block2 (selective block), that houses a safety logic founded on programmable timers, the Block1 (logic block) keeps block of the
protection for the whole time when the input is active.

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 59

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 set to ON in the concerning menu).[1]
The application of the IN1 binary input for the acquisition of the Block1 (logic block) coming from
external signal is shown in the following figure; in the example the block signal is ORed with Block2
(selective block) to block the generic (xxx) element.

from Block2 (ON≡Block)

Enable (ON≡Enable) ≥1 Blocking
Block1
& xxxx Block1

Logic IN1 t O N IN1 t O F F

Block1
n.c. IN1 t ON IN1 t OFF Block1 input (ON≡Block)
Block1
n.o. T 0 0 T
Binary input INx
Binary input allocation for logic selectivity (Block1) Block1.ai

TCS1 and TCS2

Trip Circuit Supervision.
Supervision with one or two binary input can be performed.
The exhaustive treatment of the TCS function is described in the concerning paragraph.

+UAUX
Logic IN1 t O N IN1 t O F F
TCS1
n.c. IN1 t ON IN1 t OFF
n.o. 74TCS logic
T 0 0
TRIP Binary input INx

TCS2
Logic IN1 t O N IN1 t O F F
52
n.c. IN1 t ON IN1 t OFF
52a 52b 74TCS logic
n.o. T 0 0 T
Binary input INx

-UAUX
Trip Circuit Supervision - 74TCS with two binary inputs TCS2.ai

Trip ProtExt
The binary input detects a trip coming from an external protective relay: the information is available
for the breaker failure function (BF).

Trip ProtExt Logic IN1 t O N IN1 t O F F

+UAUX n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF

n.o. Breaker failure (BF)
-UAUX T 0 0 T
Binary input INx

Binary input allocation for trip acquisition from external protection device ExtProt.ai

Reset counters
A change in status of a binary input effects a reset of all start/trip partial counters.[2]
Reset CB Monitor
A change in status of a binary input effects a reset of all counters concerning the circuit breaker
diagnostic:
• Breaking Sum phase IL1, IL2 , IL3
• Breaking SumI2t phase IL1, IL2 , IL3
• CB Open counter
52a and 52b
The CB position can be acquired by means of binary inputs connected to the auxiliary contacts: the
information is used in the following functions:
• CB position (open-closed)
• CB diagnostic (N. of operations, trip time)
• Breaker Failure (BF)
• VT monitoring (74TV)
Note 1 The activation of one binary input produces indiscriminately a block of all protective elements programmed for being blocked from Block1
Note 2 The reset of the total counters is practicable by means ThySetter command with Session Level 1 (available with password)

60 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 +UAUX
52a Logic INx t O N INx t O F F
IN+
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF
IN- n.o. T 0 0 T
52 Binary input INx CB position
52a 52b
CB diagnostic
Logic INx t O N INx t O F F
Breaker failure (BF)
52b 74VT
IN+
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF
IN- n.o. T 0 0 T
Binary input INx
-UAUX
Binary input allocation for CB state acquisition CB-pos.ai

Open CB
Close CB
The external acquisition of remote commands allows to drive CB remotely.

UAUX OPEN +UAUX

Command Open CB Logic INx t O N INx t O F F

n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF

INx
n.o. T 0 0 T

TRIPPING M ATRIX
52a O -UAUX

(LED+REL AYS)
Binary input INx 52 52b

CLOSE
Command Close CB Logic INx t O N INx t O F F -UAUX I

INx n.c. IN2 t ON IN2 t OFF

n.o. T 0 0 T
UAUX Binary input INx

Binary input allocation for CB remote command CB-com.ai

Preset DTheta
The input activation presets the thermal image (49).
The preset value can be adjusted by means the DθIN setting. The thermal image is initialized at the
DθIN value when the device is powered or when the binary input become active.

UAUX
PresetDTheta Logic
PresetDTheta INx t ON INx t OFF

n.c. IN1 t ON IN1 t OFF

INx DθP = DθIN t = T+·ln{[(Ith/IB)2-DθP/DθB]/[(Ith/IB)2-1.2]
n.o. T 0 0
Binary input INx
UAUX
Binary input allocation for thernal image preset (49) inhit-theta.ai

Remote trip
The input activation drives an expressly programmed output relay.

+UAUX
Remote trip
TRIPPING M ATRIX

Remote trip Logic INx t O N INx t O F F

(LED+REL AYS)

n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF

n.o. T 0 0 T
Binary input INx

-UAUX
Assegnazione ingresso logico alla acquisizione del segnale d’ingresso di telescatto Remote-trip.ai

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 61

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 MCB VT OPEN
MCB VT2 OPEN
The external acquisition of MCB auxiliary contact allows to detect a failure on the secondary circuit
of the voltage transformer (VTs); the information is available for the VT monitoring function (74VT).

LINE

VT
UAUX

MCB
MCB VT OPEN Logic INx t ON INx t OFF

n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF

INx
n.o.
VT Monitoring (74VT)
TO VOLTAGE INPUTS T 0 0 T
Binary input INx
UAUX
Binary input allocation for state acquisition of the MCB auxiliary contact MCB-open.ai

74TV ext
The external acquisition of 74TV allows to block or to change the operating mode of protective el-
ements where the residual voltage is employed; the information is available for residual voltage
protective elements (59N and 67N protections) that may operate inadvertently when an event cause
a loss of one or more voltages.
Reset demand measures
The input activation make a reset of all demand measures.

Reset energy
The input activation make a reset of all energy measures.

I(L)>Bk (Logic block of I> ele-

ment)
The input activation make a block of the I>, side L element through virtual I/O.

I(L)>>Bk (Logic block of I>> ele-

ment)
The input activation make a block of the I>, side L element through virtual I/O.

xBk (Logic block of Ix element)

The input activation make a block of the xx element through virtual I/O:
• I(L)>>>Bk
• I(H)>Bk
• I(H)>>Bk
• I(H)>>>Bk
• IE1>Bk
• IE1>>Bk
• IE1>>>Bk
• IE2>Bk
• IE2>>Bk
• IE2>>>Bk
• IEC>Bk
• IEC>>Bk
• IEC>>>Bk
• IED>Bk
• IED>>Bk
• IED>>>Bk
• IED>>>>Bk
• IEDC>Bk
• IEDC>>Bk
• IEDC>>>Bk
• IEDC>>>>Bk

62 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 Speed control
The input allows to acquire the rotor state (running or not running).

UAUX
Speed control
Speed control Logic INx t O N INx t O F F

n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF

INx n.o. 51LR
T 0 0 T
M Binary input INx
3~ UAUX
Speed switch Speed-switch

Motor restart
During the time that the motor starts, the current is near the blocked rotor value, but the condition is
not managed because the measured current goes never off (or however down to IRUN=0.1 IB).
If a binary input is set as “Motor restart” and the parameter of the timers reset is enabled for all
protection elements inside CLP (MR Enable ON)[1] inside the Starting control set menu), the timers
restart when the binary input become active.

Starting control
I R UN = 0.1IB C L P source

CB-State S t ar t ing de t ec t ion

IL1...IL3
+UAUX M a x[ IL1...IL3] ≥ IRUN

M R E nable
Motor restart Logic INx t ON INx t OFF
Rese t C L P t imer
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF &
-UAUX n.o. T 0 0
Binary input INx Motor restart

IRUN M a x [ IL1...IL3] ≥ IRUN M a x [ IL1...IL3] < IRUN M a x[ IL1...IL3] ≥ IRUN

S t ar t ing
con t r ol
CB State CB OPEN CB CLOSED CB OPEN CB CLOSED

t CLP 0.1 s t CLP

Output t CLP

Restart
t

HIGH THRESHOLD/ LOW THRESHOLD/ HIGH THRESHOLD/ LOW TH. HIGH THRESHOLD/ LOW TH.
BLOCK UNBLOCK BLOCK UNBLOCK BLOCK UNBLOCK

Timers restarting (CLP thresholds on speedup) riaccelerazione.ai

Reset N/T start

The input activation make a reset of the number of starts and the start of cumulative time (Motor start
inhibit element - 66).

Reset P-RMT
The operation time of motor is cleared when the binary input become active (Partial counter).

Reset T-RMT
The operation time of motor is cleared when the binary input become active (Total counter).

Note 1 For generator protection the MR Enable parameter must be disabled (OFF)

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 63

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
— Output relays
Eight or sixteen (one or two output boards) output relays are available (KC1-1...KC1-8, KC2-1...
KC2-8):[1]
• KC1-1, KC1-2, KC1-7, KC1-8, KC2-1, KC2-2, KC2-7, KC2-8 with two changeover contacts (SPDT, type C)
• KC1-3, KC1-4, KC1-5, KC1-6, KC2-3, KC2-4, KC2-5, KC2-6 with one make contact (SPST-NO, type A).
Each output relay may be programmed with following operating mode:
• Operation MODE (No latched, Pulse, Latched).
• Logic (Energized/De-energized).
To each output relay a programmable timer is matched (Minimum pulse width parameter).
All parameters are available inside the Set \ Board 1(2) outputs menu.

Input

No-latched operation

t TR Minimum pulse width

Latched operation

Pulse operation
t
t TR Minimum pulse width
Output relay operation Relay-operation-timers.ai

Any change to the settings can be affected at any time, also with the relay on duty, separately for
each relay.
Notes:
• When de-energized operating mode is set, the relay remains in rest condition if no trip command
is in progress.
• When energized operating mode is set, the relay remains in operating condition if no trip command
is in progress and the auxiliary supply is powered on.
• When no-latched operating mode is set (Operation MODE No latched), the output relay reset
at the end of the trip condition. To each output relay a programmable timer is matched (minimum
pulse width operation).
• When latched operating mode is set (Operation MODE Latched), the output relay doesn’t reset
at the end of the trip condition; it stays ON until a reset command is issued (RESET key, ThySetter
or communication command).
• When pulse operating mode is set (Operation MODE Pulse), the output relay reset after a tTR
programmable delay regardless of the trip condition.
• It is advisable to make sure that the output contact technical data are suitable for load (Nominal
current, breaking capacity, make current, switching voltage,...).

Matching every output relay to any protective element is freely programmable inside the Setpoints
submenus according a tripping matrix structure.[2]

Note 1 Schematic diagram are shown inside APPENDIX B1.

Note 2 All features are listed; functions effectively present depend on the version
Matching of the output relay to the protective and control functions can be defined so that any collision from other function is avoided.
All output relay are unassigned in the default setting.

64 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 RELAYS
ELEMENTS
KC1-1 KC1-2 KC1-... KC2-1 KC2-2 KC2-...
Self test g g g g g g
21 First element start relays (Z<-ST-K) g g g g g g
21 First element trip relays (Z<-TR-K) g g g g g g
21 Second element start relays (Z<<ST-K) g g g g g g
21 Second element trip relays (Z<<TR-K) g g g g g g
27 First element start relays (U< ST-K) g g g g g g
27 First element trip relays (U< TR-K) g g g g g g
27 Second element start relays (U<< ST-K) g g g g g g
27 Second element trip relays (U<< TR-K) g g g g g g
27V1 First element start relays (U1<ST-K) g g g g g g
27V1 First element trip relays (U1<TR-K) g g g g g g
32P First element start relays (P1>ST-K) g g g g g g
32P First element trip relays (P1>TR-K) g g g g g g
32P Second element start relays (P2>ST-K) g g g g g g
32P Second element trip relays (P2>TR-K) g g g g g g
37 First element start relays (I<ST-K) g g g g g g
37 First element trip relays (I<TR-K) g g g g g g
37P First element start relays (P1<ST-K) g g g g g g
37P First element trip relays (P1<TR-K) g g g g g g
37P Second element start relays (P2<ST-K) g g g g g g
37P Second element trip relays (P2<TR-K) g g g g g g
40 Alarm element start relays (40ALST-K) g g g g g g
40 Alarm element trip relays (40ALTR-K) g g g g g g
40 First element start relays (XC1-XD1ST-K) g g g g g g
40 First element trip relays (XC1-XD1TR-K) g g g g g g
40 Second element start relays (XC2-XD2ST-K) g g g g g g
40 Second element trip relays (XC2-XD2TR-K) g g g g g g
46M First element start relays (I2M>ST-K) g g g g g g
46M First element trip relays (I2M>TR-K) g g g g g g
46M Second element start relays (I2M>>ST-K) g g g g g g
46M Second element trip relays (I2M>>TR-K) g g g g g g
46G First element start relays (I2G>ST-K) g g g g g g
46G First element trip relays (I2G>TR-K) g g g g g g
46G Second element start relays (I2G>>ST-K) g g g g g g
46G Second element trip relays (I2G>>TR-K) g g g g g g
47 First element trip relays (47TR-K) g g g g g g
49MG Alarm element relays (DthMGAL1-K) g g g g g g
49MG Second element alarm relays (DthMGAL2-K) g g g g g g
49MG Element trip relays (DthMG>-K) g g g g g g
50/51 First element start relays (I>ST-K) g g g g g g
50/51 First element trip relays (I>TR-K) g g g g g g
50/51 Second element start relays (I>>ST-K) g g g g g g
50/51 Second element trip relays 50/51 (I>>TR-K) g g g g g g
50/51 Third element start relays (I>>>ST-K) g g g g g g
50/51 Third element trip relays (I>>>TR-K) g g g g g g
51LR First element start relays (ILR>ST-K) g g g g g g
51LR First element trip relays (ILR>TR-K) g g g g g g
51LR Second element start relays (ILR>>ST-K) g g g g g g
51LR Second element trip relays ILR>> (ILR>>TR-K) g g g g g g
51V First element start relays (I-I/U>ST-K) g g g g g g
51V First element trip relays (I-I/U>TR-K) g g g g g g
51V Second element start relays (I-I/U>>ST-K) g g g g g g
51V Second element start relays (I-I/U>>TR-K) g g g g g g
50N.1/51N.1-87NHIZ.1 First element start relays (IE1>ST-K) g g g g g g
50N.1/51N.1-87NHIZ.1 First element trip relays (IE1>TR-K) g g g g g g
50N.1/51N.1-87NHIZ.1 Scond element start relays (IE1>>ST-K) g g g g g g
50N.1/51N.1-87NHIZ.1 Second element trip relays (IE1>>TR-K) g g g g g g
50N.1/51N.1-87NHIZ.1 Third element start relays (IE1>>>ST-K) g g g g g g
50N.1/51N.1-87NHIZ.1 Third element trip relays (IE1>>>TR-K) g g g g g g
50N.2/52N.2-87NHIZ.2 First element start relays (IE2>ST-K) g g g g g g
50N.2/52N.2-87NHIZ.2 First element trip relays (IE2>TR-K) g g g g g g
50N.2/52N.2-87NHIZ.2 Scond element start relays (IE2>>ST-K) g g g g g g
50N.2/52N.2-87NHIZ.2 Second element trip relays (IE2>>TR-K) g g g g g g
50N.2/52N.2-87NHIZ.2 Third element start relays (IE2>>>ST-K) g g g g g g
50N.2/52N.2-87NHIZ.2 Third element trip relays (IE2>>>TR-K) g g g g g g
50N(Comp)/51N(Comp) First element start relays (IEC>ST-K) g g g g g g
50N(Comp)/51N(Comp) First element trip relays (IEC>TR-K) g g g g g g
50N(Comp)/51N(Comp) Second element start relays (IEC>>ST-K) g g g g g g
50N(Comp)/51N(Comp) Second element trip relays (IEC>>TR-K) g g g g g g
50N(Comp)/51N(Comp) Third element start relays (IEC>>>ST-K) g g g g g g
50N(Comp)/51N(Comp) Third element trip relays (IEC>>>TR-K) g g g g g g

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 65

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 RELE’
ELEMENTS
KC1-1 KC1-2 KC1-... KC2-1 KC2-2 KC2-...
55 First element start relays (CPhi1>ST-K) g g g g g g
55 First element trip relays (CPhi1>TR-K) g g g g g g
55 Second element start relays (CPhi2> ST-K) g g g g g g
55 Second element trip relays (CPhi2>TR-K) g g g g g g
59 First element start relays (U>ST-K) g g g g g g
59 First element trip relays (U> TR-K) g g g g g g
59 Second element start relays (U>>ST-K) g g g g g g
59 Second element trip relays (U>>TR-K) g g g g g g
59N First element start relays (UE>ST-K) g g g g g g
59N First element trip relays (UE>TR-K) g g g g g g
59N Second element start relays (UE>>ST-K) g g g g g g
59N Second element trip relays (UE>>TR-K) g g g g g g
59V2 First element start relays (U2>ST-K) g g g g g g
59V2 First element trip relays (U2>TR-K) g g g g g g
64REF First element start relays (64REF-ST-K) g g g g g g
64REF First element trip relays (64REF-TR-K) g g g g g g
66 Trip relays (66TR-K) g g g g g g
67N First element start relays (IED>ST-K) g g g g g g
67N First element trip relays (IED>TR-K) g g g g g g
67N Second element start relays (IED>>ST-K) g g g g g g
67N Second element trip relays (IED>>TR-K) g g g g g g
67N Third element start relays (IED>>>ST-K) g g g g g g
67N Third element trip relays (IED>>>TR-K) g g g g g g
67N Forth element start relays (IED>>>>ST-K) g g g g g g
67N Forth element trip relays (IED>>>>TR-K) g g g g g g
67N(Comp) First element start relays (IEDC>ST-K) g g g g g g
67N(Comp) First element trip relays (IEDV>TR-K) g g g g g g
67N(Comp) Second element start relays (IEDC>>ST-K) g g g g g g
67N(Comp) Second element trip relays (IEDC>>TR-K) g g g g g g
67N(Comp) Third element start relays (IEDC>>>ST-K) g g g g g g
67N(Comp) Third element trip relays(Comp) (IEDC>>>TR-K) g g g g g g
67N(Comp) Fourth element start relays (IEDC>>>>ST-K) g g g g g g
67N(Comp) Fourth element trip relays (IEDCs>>>>TR-K) g g g g g g
81O First element start relays (f>ST-K) g g g g g g
81O First element trip relays (f>TR-K) g g g g g g
81O Second element start relays (f>>ST-K) g g g g g g
81O Second element trip relays (f>>TR-K) g g g g g g
81U First element start relays (f<ST-K) g g g g g g
81U First element trip relays (f<TR-K) g g g g g g
81U Second element start relays (f<<ST-K) g g g g g g
81U Second element trip relays (f<<TR-K) g g g g g g
81U Third element start relays (f<<<ST-K) g g g g g g
81U Third element trip relays (f<<<TR-K) g g g g g g
81U Forth element start relays (f<<<<ST-K) g g g g g g
81U Forth element trip relays (f<<<<TR-K) g g g g g g
87 First element start relays (Id> ST-K) g g g g g g
87 First element trip relays (Id>TR-K) g g g g g g
87 Second element start relays (Id>> ST-K) g g g g g g
87 Second element trip relays (Id>>TR-K) g g g g g g
87 Second harmonic restraint start relays (ST2nd-REST-K) g g g g g g
87 Fifth harmonic restraint start relays (ST5th-REST-K) g g g g g g
87 Saturation detector start relays (STSatDet-K) g g g g g g
VT monitoring block relays (74VT-BK-K) g g g g g g
VT monitoring alarm relays (74VT-AL-K) g g g g g g
CT monitoring trip relays (S<TR-K) g g g g g g
Second harmonic restraint start relays (I2ndh>ST-K) g g g g g g
Second harmonic restraint trip relays (I2ndh>TR-K) g g g g g g
VTs monitoring block(74VT-BK-K) g g g g g g
VTs monitoring alarm (74VT-AL-K) g g g g g g
CTs monitoring alarm (S<TR-K) g g g g g g
Circuit supervision start (74TCS-ST-K) g g g g g g
Circuit supervision trip (74TCS-TR-K) g g g g g g
tB-IPh/IE Elapsed signalling relays (tB-K) g g g g g g
Phase protection output selective block relays (BLK2OUT-Iph-K) g g g g g g
Ground protection output selective block relays (BLK2OUT-IE-K) g g g g g g
Phase and ground protection output selective block relays (BLK2OUT-Iph/IE-K) g g g g g g
Breaker Failure Start relays (BF-ST-K) g g g g g g
Breaker Failure Trip relays (BF-TR-K) g g g g g g
PLC (PLC-K) g g g g g g
Number of CB trips diagnostic relays (N.Open-K) g g g g g g
Cumulative CB tripping currents diagnostic relays (SumI-K) g g g g g g
Cumulative CB tripping I^2t diagnostic relays (SumI^2t-K) g g g g g g
Circuit breaker opening time diagnostic relays (tbreak-K) g g g g g g
CB open command (CBopen-K) g g g g g g
CB close command (CBclose-K) g g g g g g
Remote trip (RemTrip-K) g g g g g g
Not received pulses at BLIN signalling relays (PulseBLIN-K) g g g g g g

66 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
— LED indicators
Sixteen LEDs are available.

• One green LED “ON”: if turned on it means that the device is properly working, if flashing the inter-
nal self-test function has detected an anomaly.
• One yellow LED “START” tagged for START of one or more protective elements.[1]
• One red LED “TRIP” tagged for TRIP of one or more protective elements.[1]
• Thirteen red LEDs “1...13” for highlight the activation of one or more user defined function.

Each LED may be programmed with following operating mode:

• No-latched: the LED reset at the end of the trip condition.
• Latched: the LED doesn’t reset at the end of the trip condition; it stays ON until a manual reset com-
mand is issued (RESET key, ThySetter or communication command).
Any change to the settings can be affected at any time, also with the relay on duty, separately for
each LED inside the Set \ MMI board LEDs and Set \ Inputs board 1 LEDs menu.

LEDs input board 1

LEDs MMI

Free allocation of each LED may be set according to the matrix structure shown in the following
page.[2]

Note 1 The START and the TRIP LED are user assignable to any function; other than starting and tripping information can be assigned to them too, just
the same for L1...L5
Note 2 All features are listed; functions effectively present depend on the version
All LEDs are unassigned in the default setting.

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 67

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 LEDs
ELEMENTS
START TRIP 1 2 3 4 5 L1-1 L1-.. L1-8
21 First element start LEDs (Z<ST-L) g g g g g g g g g g
21 First element trip LEDs (Z<TR-L) g g g g g g g g g g
21 Second element start LEDs (Z<<ST-L) g g g g g g g g g g
21 Second element trip LEDs (Z<<TR-L) g g g g g g g g g g
27 First element start LEDs (U<ST-L) g g g g g g g g g g
27 First element trip LEDs (U<TR-L) g g g g g g g g g g
27 Second element start LEDs (U<<ST-L) g g g g g g g g g g
27 Second element trip LEDs (U<<TR-L) g g g g g g g g g g
27V1 First element start LEDs (U1<ST-L) g g g g g g g g g g
27V1 First element trip LEDs (U1<TR-L) g g g g g g g g g g
32P First element start LEDs (P1>ST-L) g g g g g g g g g g
32P First element trip LEDs (P1>TR-L) g g g g g g g g g g
32P Second element start LEDs (P2>ST-L) g g g g g g g g g g
32P Second element trip LEDs (P2>TR-L) g g g g g g g g g g
37 First element start LEDs (I<ST-L) g g g g g g g g g g
37 First element trip LEDs (I<TR-L) g g g g g g g g g g
37P First element Start LEDs (P1<ST-L) g g g g g g g g g g
37P First element Trip LEDs (P1<TR-L) g g g g g g g g g g
37P Second element Start LEDs (P2<ST-L) g g g g g g g g g g
37P Second element Trip LEDs (P2<TR-L) g g g g g g g g g g
40AL Alarm element Start LEDs (40ALST-L) g g g g g g g g g g
40AL Alarm element Trip LEDs (40ALTR-L) g g g g g g g g g g
40 First element Start LEDs (XC1-XD1ST-L) g g g g g g g g g g
40 First element Trip LEDs (XC1-XD1TR-L) g g g g g g g g g g
40 Second element Start LEDs (XC2-XD2ST-L) g g g g g g g g g g
40 Second element Trip LEDs (XC2-XD2TR-L) g g g g g g g g g g
46M First element Start LEDs (I2M>ST-L) g g g g g g g g g g
46M First element Trip LEDs (I2M>TR-L) g g g g g g g g g g
46M Second element Start LEDs (I2M>>ST-L) g g g g g g g g g g
46M Second element Trip LEDs (I2M>>TR-L) g g g g g g g g g g
46G First element Start LEDs (I2GAL>ST-L) g g g g g g g g g g
46G First element Trip LEDs (I2GAL>TR-L) g g g g g g g g g g
46G Second element Start LEDs (I2G>>ST-L) g g g g g g g g g g
46G Second element Trip LEDs (I2G>>TR-L) g g g g g g g g g g
47 First element Trip LEDs (47TR-L) g g g g g g g g g g
49MG First alarm element Trip LEDs (DthMGAL1-L) g g g g g g g g g g
49MG Second alarm element Trip LEDs (DthMGAL2-L) g g g g g g g g g g
49MG First alarm element Trip LEDs (DthMG>-L) g g g g g g g g g g
50/51 First element Start LEDs (I>ST-L) g g g g g g g g g g
50/51 First element Trip LEDs (I>TR-L) g g g g g g g g g g
50/51 Second element Start LEDs (I>>ST-L) g g g g g g g g g g
50/51 Second element Trip LEDs (I>>TR-L) g g g g g g g g g g
50/51 Third element Start LEDs (I>>>ST-L) g g g g g g g g g g
50/51 Third element Trip LEDs (I>>>TR-L) g g g g g g g g g g
ILR>First element Start LEDs (ILR>ST-L) g g g g g g g g g g
ILR>First element Trip LEDs (ILR>TR-L) g g g g g g g g g g
ILR>> Second element Start LEDs (ILR>>ST-L) g g g g g g g g g g
ILR>> Second element Trip LEDs (ILR>>TR-L) g g g g g g g g g g
51V First element Start LEDs (I-I/U>ST-L) g g g g g g g g g g
51V First element Trip LEDs (I-I/U>TR-L) g g g g g g g g g g
51V Second element Start LEDs (I-I/U>ST-L) g g g g g g g g g g
51V Second element Trip LEDs (I-I/U>TR-L) g g g g g g g g g g
50N.1/51N.1 First element Start LEDs (IE1>ST-L) g g g g g g g g g g
50N.1/51N.1 First element Trip LEDs (IE1>TR-L) g g g g g g g g g g
50N.1/51N.1 Second element Start LEDs (IE1>>ST-L) g g g g g g g g g g
50N.1/51N.1 Second element Trip LEDs (IE1>>TR-L) g g g g g g g g g g
50N.1/51N.1 Third element Start LEDs (IE1>>>ST-L) g g g g g g g g g g
50N.1/51N.1 Third element Trip LEDs (IE1>>>TR-L) g g g g g g g g g g
50N.2/51N.2 First element Start LEDs (IE2>ST-L) g g g g g g g g g g
50N.2/51N.2 First element Trip LEDs (IE2>TR-L) g g g g g g g g g g
50N.2/51N.2 Second element Start LEDs (IE2>>ST-L) g g g g g g g g g g
50N.2/51N.2 Second element Trip LEDs (IE2>>TR-L) g g g g g g g g g g
50N.2/51N.2 Third element Start LEDs (IE2>>>ST-L) g g g g g g g g g g
50N.2/51N.2 Third element Trip LEDs (IE2>>>TR-L) g g g g g g g g g g
50N(Comp)/51N(Comp) First element Start LEDs (IEC>ST-L) g g g g g g g g g g
50N(Comp)/51N(Comp) First element Trip LEDs (IEC>TR-L) g g g g g g g g g g
50N(Comp)/51N(Comp) Second element Start LEDs (IEC>>ST-L) g g g g g g g g g g
50N(Comp)/51N(Comp) Second element Trip LEDs (IEC>>TR-L) g g g g g g g g g g
50N(Comp)/51N(Comp) Third element Start LEDs (IEC>>>ST-L) g g g g g g g g g g
50N(Comp)/51N(Comp) Third element Trip LEDs (IEC>>>TR-L) g g g g g g g g g g
55 First element Start LEDs (CPhi1>ST-L) g g g g g g g g g g
55 First element Trip LEDs (CPhi1>TR-L) g g g g g g g g g g
55 Second element Start LEDs (CPhi2> ST-L) g g g g g g g g g g
55 Second element Trip LEDs (CPhi2>TR-L) g g g g g g g g g g

68 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 LEDs
ELEMENTS
START TRIP 1 2 3 4 5 L1-1 L1-... L1-8
59 First element Start LEDs (U>ST-L) g g g g g g g g g g
59 First element Trip LEDs (U> TR-L) g g g g g g g g g g
59 Second element Start LEDs (U>>ST-L) g g g g g g g g g g
59 Second element Trip LEDs (U>>TR-L) g g g g g g g g g g
59N First element Start LEDs (UE>ST-L) g g g g g g g g g g
59N First element Trip LEDs (UE>TR-L) g g g g g g g g g g
59N Second element Start LEDs (UE>>ST-L) g g g g g g g g g g
59N Second element Trip LEDs (UE>>TR-L) g g g g g g g g g g
59V2 First element Start LEDs (U2>ST-L) g g g g g g g g g g
59V2 First element Trip LEDs (U2>TR-L) g g g g g g g g g g
64REF First element Start LEDs (64REF(H)-ST-L) g g g g g g g g g g
64REF First element Trip LEDs (64REF(H)-TR-L) g g g g g g g g g g
66 Intervento protezione (66TR-L) g g g g g g g g g g
67N First element Start LEDs (IED>ST-L) g g g g g g g g g g
67N First element Trip LEDs (IED>TR-L) g g g g g g g g g g
67N Second element Start LEDs (IED>>ST-L) g g g g g g g g g g
67N Second element Trip LEDs (IED>>TR-L) g g g g g g g g g g
67N Third element Start LEDs (IED>>>ST-L) g g g g g g g g g g
67N Third element Trip LEDs (IED>>>TR-L) g g g g g g g g g g
67N Forth element Start LEDs (IED>>>>ST-L) g g g g g g g g g g
67N Forth element Trip LEDs (IED>>>>TR-L) g g g g g g g g g g
67N(Comp) First element Start LEDs (IEDC>ST-L) g g g g g g g g g g
67N(Comp) First element Trip LEDs (IEDC>TR-L) g g g g g g g g g g
67N(Comp) Second element Start LEDs (IEDC>>ST-L) g g g g g g g g g g
67N(Comp) Second element Trip LEDs (IEDC>>TR-L) g g g g g g g g g g
67N(Comp) Third element Start LEDs (IEDC>>>ST-L) g g g g g g g g g g
67N(Comp) Third element Trip LEDs (IEDC>>>TR-L) g g g g g g g g g g
67N(Comp) Fourth element Start LEDs (IEDC>>>>ST-L) g g g g g g g g g g
67N(Comp) Fourth element Trip LEDs (IEDC>>>>TR-L) g g g g g g g g g g
81O First element Start LEDs (f>ST-L) g g g g g g g g g g
81O First element Trip LEDs (f>TR-L) g g g g g g g g g g
81O Second element Start LEDs (f>>ST-L) g g g g g g g g g g
81O Second element Trip LEDs (f>>TR-L) g g g g g g g g g g
81U First element Start LEDs (f<ST-L) g g g g g g g g g g
81U First element Trip LEDs (f<TR-L) g g g g g g g g g g
81U Second element Start LEDs (f<<ST-L) g g g g g g g g g g
81U Second element Trip LEDs (f<<TR-L) g g g g g g g g g g
81U Third element Start LEDs (f<<<ST-L) g g g g g g g g g g
81U Third element Trip LEDs (f<<<TR-L) g g g g g g g g g g
81U Forth element Start LEDs (f<<<<ST-L) g g g g g g g g g g
81U Forth element Trip LEDs (f<<<<TR-L) g g g g g g g g g g
87 First element start LEDs (Id> ST-L) g g g g g g g g g g
87 First element trip LEDs (Id>TR-L) g g g g g g g g g g
87 Second element start LEDs (Id>> ST-L) g g g g g g g g g g
87 Second element trip LEDs (Id>>TR-L) g g g g g g g g g g
87 Second harmonic restraint start LEDs (ST2nd-REST-L) g g g g g g g g g g
87 Fifth harmonic restraint start LEDs (ST5th-REST-L) g g g g g g g g g g
87 Saturation detector start LEDs (STSatDet-L) g g g g g g g g g g
VT monitoring block LEDs (74VT-BK-L) g g g g g g g g g g
VT monitoring alarm LEDs (74VT-AL-L) g g g g g g g g g g
CT monitoring trip LEDs (S<TR-L) g g g g g g g g g g
Second harmonic restraint start LEDs (I2ndh>ST-L) g g g g g g g g g g
Second harmonic restraint trip LEDs (I2ndh>TR-L) g g g g g g g g g g
tB-IPh/IE Elapsed signalling LEDs (tB-L) g g g g g g g g g g
Phase protection output selective block LEDs (BLK2OUT-Iph-L) g g g g g g g g g g
Ground protection output selective block LEDs (BLK2OUT-IE-L) g g g g g g g g g g
Phase and ground protection output selective block LEDs (BLK2OUT-Iph/IE-L) g g g g g g g g g g
Breaker Failure Start LEDs (BF-ST-L) g g g g g g g g g g
Breaker Failure Trip LEDs (BF-TR-L) g g g g g g g g g g
PLC (PLC-L) g g g g g g g g g g
Number of CB trips diagnostic LEDs (N.Open-L) g g g g g g g g g g
Cumulative CB tripping currents diagnostic LEDs (SumI-L) g g g g g g g g g g
Cumulative CB tripping I^2t diagnostic LEDs (SumI^2t-L) g g g g g g g g g g
Circuit breaker opening time diagnostic LEDs (tbreak-L) g g g g g g g g g g
CB open command LEDs (CBopen-L) g g g g g g g g g g
CB close command LEDs (CBclose-L) g g g g g g g g g g
Remote LEDs (RemTrip-L) g g g g g g g g g g
Not received pulses at BLIN signalling LEDs (PulseBLIN-L) g g g g g g g g g g

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 69

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
— Communication interfaces
Several communication ports are provided:
• Two Ethernet/RS232 port on the front side for local communication (ThySetter).
• One RS485 port on the rear side for bus communication.
• Two Ethernet ports on the rear side for bus communication.

Local port
The local port has high priority compared with the remote Ethernet and RS485 ports.

RJ45 plug

serial-sch.ai

The local port is the simplest access for setting by means the ThySetter software.
RS485
Several protocol are implemented:
• ModBus RTU. Modbus is a serial communications protocol. It is a de facto standard communica-
tions protocol in industry, and is now the most commonly available means of connecting industrial
electronic devices also inside electric utilities and substation.
• IEC 60870-5. The IEC 60870-5 suite of protocol is used for communications from master station to
substation, as well within the substation; the IEC 60870-5-103 (Protection equipment) is available
together the Modbus protocol on some version of Pro-n devices (code NAxx#xxxxC x).
Ethernet
It is provided a communication board useful for Ethernet communication with ModBus TCP/IP[1] or
IEC61850 protocol
When ordering the types of network board may be selected:[2]
• Two ports module with multiplexed operation mode[3], with one TX port (RJ45 copper network) and
one FX port (fiber-optic network).
• Two TX ports module (RJ45 copper network) with multiplexed operation mode.
• Two FX ports module (optical fiber network) with multiplexed operation mode.
• Two FX ports module (optical fiber network) + RSTP [4]
Modbus/TCP basically embeds a Modbus frame into a TCP frame in a simple manner. This is a con-
nection-oriented transaction which means every query expects a response.
This query/response technique fits well with the master/slave nature of ModBus, adding to the de-
terministic advantage that Switched Ethernet offers industrial users.
In the same way as the RS485 base Modbus, every device is identified by a personal address and the
communication goes in “client-server” mode with answering request from the recipient.
The protective relay can be directly connect to the Ethernet network (no gateway, protocol converter
are needed).
For both modules no hw preset are required.

Ethernet
TX connector (RJ45 copper)

RX
FX connector (optical fiber)
TX

RS485
B-
5
RS485

B-

A+
A+
6

ethernet-sch.ai

Three LEDs are on board:

• 3V3 - (verde): The LED lights up if the board supply is active
• LINK1 - (green): The LED lights up if the TX connection is active
• LINK2 - (green): The LED lights up if the FX connection is active
Note 1 Information about the ModBus map may be find inside the “Remote programming manual”
Note 2 Under normal conditions, the primary port is active, while the secondary port is activated automatically in the event of failure of the primary port
or with hw-sw switching command
Note 3 The two ports share the same IP address
Nota 4 Two FX ports are simultaneously active (with the same IP address)

70 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
4.4 PROTECTIVE ELEMENTS

— Rated values
Inside the Base menu the following parameters can be set:
• Relay reference name
• The the reference for the settings of relay rated currents (phase and residual)
• Primary nominal values, employed for to return measures in the primary values
• Measurements reading mode (primary or relative values)
• Reset delay for Cold Load Pickup[1]
Information for settings:
• Relay reference name.
Alphanumeric mnemonic string (max 16 characters) useful for identification of protected plant.
• Relay nominal frequency fn
This nominal value must be set same as the frequency of the grid.
Example: grid frequency fn = 50 Hz
Relay nominal frequency fn = 50 Hz
• Relay phase rated current for side H and side L InH, InL
This rated value must be set to 1 A or 5 A[2], same as the secondary CTs rated current.
• Rated primary phase current chosen as reference (Inref)
CT’s primary current chosen by relay for amplitude compensation.
• Rated primary phase current chosen as reference (RefSide)
Choice of the reference side for the phase compensation currents
• Number of sides for differential protection (NumSides)
Setting the number of sides on which the differential protection operates (fixed to 2)
• Current matching type (MatchType)
Setting the current compensation type (INT-internal, EXT-external CTs)
• Protected object (ProtObj)
Setting the type of protecting object (fixed to TRANSF)
• Relay residual current - side 1 and side 2 (IEn1 and IEn2)
This rated values must be set by means dip-switch to 1 A or 5 A[3], same as the secondary residual
CT rated current.
• Relay phase-to-phase voltage Un
Two reference voltage are available: UR =100 V and UR =400V
For the first instance the Un relay nominal voltage must be set to the phase-to-phase voltage of the
secondary VTs voltages at grid nominal voltage.
The Un value must calculated as:
Grid nominal voltage Ung where the VTs are included [V]
Un =
Voltage transformer ratio KVT
If VTs with primary rated voltage is equal to the grid voltage divided by √3, the following streamlined
calculus may be used:
Un = VTs secondary rated voltage [V] x √3
Example 1

Ung = 6.9 kV

52 10000 / 3 V NVA100X-D
KVT = = 100
100 / 3 V
Un

Grid rated voltage Ung= 6.9 kV

10000 / 3 V
VTs ratio KVT = = 100
100 / 3 V Es1-Un.ai

The relay rated voltage may be set to:

Un = Ung /KVT = 6900 / 100 = 69 V

Note 1 Parameter available at level 1 only

Nota 2 Per rendere attiva la modifica della regolazione, dopo il comando “Fine tarature“ è necessario RIAVVIARE IL DISPOSITIVO
Nota 3 Per rendere attiva la modifica della regolazione, dopo il comando “Fine tarature“ è necessario RIAVVIARE IL DISPOSITIVO

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 71

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 Example 2
Ung = 6 kV

NVA100X-D
52 6000 / 3 V
KVT = = 60
100 / 3 V
Un

Grid rated voltage Ung = 6 kV

6000 / 3 V
VTs ratio KVT = Ung /Uns = = 60
100 / 3 V Es2-Un.ai

The relay rated voltage Un may be defined as: Un = Ung /KVT = 6000 / 60 = 100 V
or with the formula: Un = √3 · Uns = √3 ·100 / √3 = 100 V
For the UR = 400 V versions, the relay rated voltage must be set to the grid nominal voltage (direct
measure of the line voltage without VTs).
Example 3
Ung = 400 V

NVA100X-D
52

Un = 400 V

Es3-Un.ai

The rated voltage Un must be set as: Un = Ung = 400 V

• Relay residual rated voltage UEn

Three instances are expected:
A) residual voltage acquired with open delta VT.
B) residual voltage measure by means VT connected from star-point and earth.
C) residual voltage measure by vector calculus.
Case A
The residual nominal voltage UEn may be estimated by means of the following general formula (ef-
fective for insulated neutral or impedance-ground connected grids):
Grid nominal voltage Ung where the VTs [V] x √3 are connected
UEn =
VT ratio KVT /

If open delta VT with primary nominal voltage balances to the grid voltage divided by √3, the follow-
ing streamlined calculus may be used:
UEn = 3 · VT open delta secondary nominal voltage [V] for insulated or impedance-ground neutral
grids.
Example A1
Ung = 6.9 kV Insulated or impedance-ground neutral

52 NVA100X-D
10000 / 3 V
KVT = = 100 · 3
100 / 3 V
UEn

Grid rated voltage Ung = 6.9 kV

/ VT ratio: 10000 / 3 V
KVT = = 100 · 3
100 / 3 V Es1-UEn.ai

The relay residual nominal voltage UEn must be estimated by means of the general formula:
UEn = √3 · Ung /KVT = √3 · 6900 / (√3 · 100) = 69 V

Example A2
Unp = 6 kV Insulated or impedance-ground neutral

6000 / 3 V NVA100X-D
52 KVT = = 60 · 3
100 / 3 V
UEn

Grid rated voltage Ung = 6 kV

/ VT ratio: 6000 / 3 V
KVT = = 60 · 3
100 / 3 V Es2-UEn.ai

72 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 The relay residual rated voltage UEn must be indifferently estimated by means of the following gen-
eral formula:
UEn = √3 · Ung /KVT = √3 · 6000 / (√3 · 60) = 100 V
or by means the following streamlined formula:
UEn = 3 · Uns = 3 · 100 / 3 = 100 V
Case B
The relay residual rated voltage UEn must be estimated by means of the following general formula:
Grid nominal voltage Ung where the VTs [V] / √3 are connected
UEn =
VT ratio KVT

If a VT with primary rated voltage equal to the grid voltage divided by √3 is connected from star neu-
tral to ground, the following streamlined calculus may be used:
UEn = VT secondary rated voltage [V]
Example B1
Ung = 10 kV EsB1-UEn.ai

NVA100X-D

11000 / 3 V
KVT = = 110 / 3 UEn
100 V

Grid nominal voltage Ung = 10 kV

11000 / 3 V
Ratio of VT connected from star neutral to ground: KVT = = 110 / 3
100 V

The relay residual rated voltage UEn may be estimated by means of the following formula:
UEn = (Ung /√3) /KVT = (10000 /√3) / (110/ √3) = 91 V

Example B2

Ung = 6 kV

NVA100X-D
6000 / 3 V
KVT = = 60 / 3
100 V UEn

Grid rated voltage Ung = 6kV

6000 / 3 V
Ratio of VT connected from star neutral to ground: KVT = = 60 / 3
100 V EsB2-UEn.ai

The relay residual rated voltage UEn may be estimated by means of the following general formula:
UEn = (Ung /√3) /KVT = (6000 /√3) / (60/ √3) = 100 V

Case C
The relay residual calculated rated voltage UECn is estimated automatically by means of the formula:
UECn = √3∙ Un
Example C1

Ung = 6 kV

NVA100X-D
52 6000 / 3 V
KVT = = 60
100 / 3 V
Un = 100 V
UECn = 173 V

Grid rated voltage Ung = 6 kV

6000 / 3 V
Ratio of line VTs KVT = Unp /Uns = = 60
100 / 3 V Es4-UEn.ai

For the example 2 Un = 100 V. UECn is estimated automatically by means of the formula:
UECn = Un ∙ √3 = 100 ∙ √3 = 173 V

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 73

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 • Phase CT primary current for sides H and L InpH, InpL
This parameter affects the measure of the phase currents when the primary measurement reading
mode is selected. It must be programmed to the same value of the phase CT primary rated cur-
rent.
Example

NVA100X-D
KTA = 500A/5A=100
InH = 5 A

side H
side L

KTA = 500A/5A=100
InL = 5 A
Es-In.ai

The phase CT primary currents InpH and InpH must be set as: InpH = InpL = 500 A

• Residual CT primary current IEn1p, IEn2p

This parameter affects the measure of the residual current when the primary measurement reading
mode is selected. It must be programmed to the same value of the residual CT(s) primary nominal
current.
Example 1

52

NVA100X-D

KTA = 100 A /1 A IEn1= 1 A

1x
KTA = 100 A /1 A IEn2 = 1 A
1x
Es1-IEn.ai

The residual CT primary current IEn1p and IEn2p must be set as: IEn1p = IEn2p = 100 A
Example 2

52

NVA100X-D

KTA = 100A / 5A
3x IEn = 5 A
KTA = 100A / 5A
3x IEn = 5 A
Es2-IEn.ai

The residual CT primary current IEn1p and IEn2p must be set as: IEn1p = IEn2p = 100 A

74 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 • VTs Phase primary voltage Unp
This parameter affects the measure of the phase voltages when the primary measurement reading
mode is selected for phase-to-phase, calculated residual voltages, power and energy.
If the formerly indications concerning the relay nominal voltage Un are complied, then the Unp set-
ting must be adjusted to Unp = grid nominal voltage [V].
Example 1

Ung = 6.9 kV

52
10000 / 3 V NVA100-D
KTV = = 100
100 / 3 V

Un = 69 V

Grid rated voltage Ung = 6.9 kV

10000 / 3 V
VTs ratio: KTV = = 100
Relay rated voltage Un = 69 V 100 / 3 V
Es1-Ung.ai

The Unp setting must be adjusted to: Unp = Ung = 6.9 kV

Example 2

Ung = 6 kV

6000 / 3 V NVA100X-D
52
KTV = = 60
100 / 3 V

Un = 100 V
Grid rated voltage Ung = 6 kV
Relay rated voltage Un = 100 V
6000 / 3 V
VTs ratio: KTV = = 60
100 / 3 V Es2-Ung.ai

The Unp setting must be adjusted to: Unp = Ung = 6 kV

Example 3
Ung = 400 V

NVA100X-D
52

Un = 400 V

Es3-Un.ai

The Unp setting must be adjusted to: Unp = Ung = 400 V

• Residual primary voltage UEnp

This parameter affects the measure of the direct residual voltage when the primary measurement
reading mode is selected.
If the formerly indications concerning the relay nominal residual voltage UEn are complied, then the
UEnp setting must be adjusted to (effective for insulated neutral or impedance-ground connected
grids):
UEnp = √3 ∙ grid nominal voltage [V].

Example 1
Ung = 6.9 kV Insulated or impedance-ground neutral

10000 / 3 V NVA100X-D
52 KVT = = 100 · 3
100 / 3 V

UEn = 69 V

Grid rated voltage Ung = 6.9 kV

10000 / 3 V
/ VT ratio: KVT = = 100 · 3
Relay residual rated voltage UEn = 69 V 100 / 3 V
Es-UEnp.ai

The UEnp setting must be adjusted to: UEnp = √3 · Ung = √3 · 6900 V = 11900 V
NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 75
FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 Example 2
Ung = 10 kV Es3-UEn.ai

NVA100X-D
11000 / 3 V
KVT = = 110 / 3
100 V UEn = 91 V

Grid rated voltage Ung = 10 kV

11000 / 3 V
Ratio of voltage transformer connected from star neutral to ground: KVT = = 110 / 3
100 V
The UEnp setting must be adjusted to: UEnp = √3 · Ung = √3 · 10000 V = 17300 V

• Measurement reading mode

Measures may be displayed according the following operating modes:
- With RELATIVE setting all measures are related to the nominal value,
- With PRIMARY setting all measures are related to the primary value.

— Transformer menu
Transformer nominal power (Snt )
Transformer nominal voltage side H (VntH)
Transformer nominal current side H (IntH) [1]
Transformer mismatching factor side H (mH)[3]
Transformer base current side H (IBH)[3]
Transformer grounding side H (GndH)
Transformer connection side H (ConnH)
Transformer vector group side H (VectGroupH)
Transformer nominal voltage side L (VntL )
Transformer nominal current side L (IntL ) [3]
Transformer mismatching factor side L (mL )[3]
Transformer base current side L (IBL )[3]
Transformer grounding side L (GndL )
Transformer connection side L (ConnL )
Transformer vector group side L (VectGroupL )

Nota 1 Calculated by relay

76 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
— Underimpedance - 21
Preface
Underimpedance protection is typically used to protect the generator against short-circuit between
phases outwith the differential protection area 87G and as a backup to the latter.
It is frequently used in place of voltage-dependent Overcurrent protection 51V when coordination
with distance measuring protective devices is required on the HV step-up transformer side.
In this way, the protection coordination of impedance protection generator with distance network
protections is simplified, given that both protections are adjusted in p.u. impedance.
The impedance protection, as well as overcurrent voltage restraint protection (51V), allows for the
trip even though the short circuit current of the generator was reduced to values near or below the
rated current (so with a traditional overcurrent protection, there would be shooting in the group
when operating at full load or with little overloads).
The transient (Xd’) and subtransient reactance (Xd”) has a significant impact on the magnitude of the
fault currents generated within the machine during an event such as a 3 phase short-circuit with the
time constant Td’ and Td”.
At the end of the transient the short-circuit current stabilizes at a value that depends primarily on:

• The type of excitation system. If powered by the generator terminal the permanent current van-
ishes because the terminals short circuit cancels the terminal voltages and the excitation system
can not therefore produce the field. For short-circuiting terminals most distant from terminals the
voltages does not vanish completely, but in any case the permanent short circuit current is less
than rated value. If the excitation is powered by a separate source or compound type (the short-
circuit current providing energy required to sustain), the permanent current may be some multiple
of rated current (ie: 2 ... 4 In)

• From the generator synchronous reactance Xd. Even with excitation system capable of forcing the
short circuit current, if the action of an automatic voltage regulator AVR is excluded (manual ad-
justment), or the regulator itself is faulty, the permanent current is limited to the value correspond-
ing to the generator synchronous reactance (values near or below the rated current).

Symmetrical value of three-phase short

circuit current at the generator terminals

Separate excitation
or compound (AVR activated)
2...4 Ing
Separate excitation
or compound (AVR excluded)
Ing

Derived excitation

t
Icc-gen.ai

Typical values:
Xd”=10...30% Td”=20...50 ms
Xd’=20...45% Td’=0.5...3 s
Xd=80...250%

To ensure the generator protection even with the circuit breaker open, the phase CTs are placed on
the star center and the VTs are positioned between the generator terminals and the CB.
Operation and settings
The impedance measurement is made for each phase on the basis of calculation:
Z12=U12 /I L1L
Z23=U23 /I L2L
Z31=U31 /I L3L
where U12, U23 e U31 are the fundamental components of the phase-to-phase voltages and I L1L, I L2L
I L3L are the fundamental components of the phase currents on side L.
Two thresholds, independently adjustable with adjustable delay (.
The second threshold typically used to protect the generator and the first part of the MV transformer
windings, while the first threshold also the HV transformer winding; it must be properly delayed to
obtain time selectivity with distance protections.
A start is issued when at least one of the three impedances goes down the adjustable threshold;
after expiry of the associated operate time ( a trip command is issued; if instead the impedances
increases beyond the threshold, the element it is restored.

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 77

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 Both thresholds have a operating characteristic circular in plan R, X with definite time curve.

TRIP
t Z <<

t Z<

Z<< Z< Z
General operation time characteristic curve for the underimpedance element - 21 t-int-F21.ai

The operating characteristic is a circle with its center located in the source impedance of the plan.
The element trips when the representative point of the calculated impedance is inside the circle
corresponding to the threshold set.

X (p.u. ZN)

NO TRIP

0.5 1.0 2.0 3.0

R (p.u. ZN)

TRIP

TRIP Z <<

Z<
R,X operatingcharacteristic of the impedance protection - 21 F21_char.ai

Both underimpedance elements may be enabled or disabled by setting ON or OFF the State param-
eter inside the Set \ Profile A(o B) \ Underimpedance-21 \ Z< (Z<<) Element \Definite time).
The first threshold trip may be inhibited by start of the second threshold by setting ON the Z<disby
Z<< parameter available inside the Set \ Profile A(o B) \ Underimpedance-21 \ Z< (Z<<) Element \
Setpoints menu.

State Z<< def t Z<< def t Z<<RES State Z< def t Z< def t Z<RES

2nd Pickup Element 1st Pickup Element

Z Z<< Trip Z Z< Trip
Z<< Start Z< Start
Z< disbyZ<< Z<< Start ON=inhibit
& Z< inhibi t ion
Block1 Block1 Block1 Block1
Block 2 Block 2 Block 2 Block 2
Block 3 BF Block 3 BF

General logic diagram of the underimpedance elements - 21 all-F21.ai

The elements are enabled in the 20 Hz ... 70 frequency range for each phase, if the corresponding
phase voltage is greater than 1% U n and the current is greater than 5% In.
Since the impedance calculation for the three independent phases, a possible inhibition on stage
has no effect on the rest.

78 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 For each threshold a reset time can be set (t Z<RES e t Z<<RES) used for coordination with electrome-
chanical relays, in order to protect sensitive to swings between the generator and the network or
clearing time for intermittent faults.

INPUT

t Z<RES t Z<RES t Z<RES

Start Z<

t Z< t Z<

Trip Z<

RESET

t
First element underimpedance timers - 21 Timers-F21.ai

VT monitoring (74VT)
The protection elements are blocked off whenever the VT supervision function are active, so that no
unwanted trip can arise if any fault on the VTs secondary circuits (break, fuse trip, etc) are detect;[1]
the 74VT block enabled parameter is available inside the Set \ VT supervision -74VT \ Setpoints
menu.

Breaker failure (BF)

Each element can produce the Breaker Failure output if the BF element parameters are set to
ON available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Underimpedance - 21 \ Z< Element (Z<< Element ) \
Setpoints menus.[2]

Logical block (Block1)

If the Z<BLK1, Z<<BLK1 enabling parameters are set to ON and a binary input is designed
for logical block (Block1), the concerning element is blocked off whenever the given input is ac-
tive.[3] The enabling parameters are available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Underimpedance-
21 \ Z< Element (Z<< Element) \ Setpoints menus, while the Block1 function must be assigned to the
selected binary input inside the Set \ Board1(2) inputs \ Binary input IN1-1...INx-x menus.

Selective block (Block2)

All along the protective elements the selective block may be set.
The logic selectivity function may be performed by means any combination of the following I/O:
• One committed pilot wire input (BLIN1).
• One or more binary inputs designed for input selective block.
• One committed pilot wire output (BLOUT1).
• One or more output relays designed for output selective block.
Only when the committed pilot wire are used the continuity check of the pilot wire link is active.

Use of committed pilot wire input BLIN1:

• The protection is blocked off according the selectivity block criteria when the input BLIN1 is active.
The information about phase or phase+earth block may be select programming the ModeBLIN1
parameter inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Selective block-BLOCK2 \ Selective block IN menus.

Use of binary inputs:

• If the Z<BLK2IN and/or Z<<BLK2IN parameters are set to ON and a binary input is designed
for selective block (Block2), the protection is blocked off by phase elements (Block2 Iph) or by
any protection element (Block2 Iph/IE) according the selectivity block criteria.[4] The enable
Z<BLK2IN, Z<BLK2IN parameters are available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Underimped-
ance-21 \ Z< Element (Z<< Element) \ Setpoints menus, while the Block2 Iph and Block2 Iph/IE
functions must be assigned to the selected binary inputs inside the Set \ Board1(2) inputs \ Binary
input IN1-1...INx-x menus.

Use of committed pilot wire output BLOUT1:

• The information about phase or phase+earth block may be select programming the ModeBLOUT1
parameter (OFF - ON IPh - ON IPh/IE - ON IE) inside Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Selective block-
BLOCK2 \ Selective block OUT menus.

Note 1 The exhaustive treatment of the VT and CT supervision function may be found inside the CONTROL AND MONITORING section.
Note 2 The common settings concerning the Breaker failure protection are adjustable inside the Breaker Failure - BF menu.
Note 3 The exhaustive treatment of the logical block (Block 1) function may be found in the “Logic Block” paragraph inside CONTROL AND MONITOR-
ING section
Note 4 The exhaustive treatment of the selective block (Block 2) function may be found in the “Selective Block” paragraph inside CONTROL AND
MONITORING section

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 79

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 Use of output relay:
• If the Z<BLK2OUT and/or Z<<BLK2OUT enable parameters are set to ON and a output re-
lay is designed for selective block (Block2), the protection issues a block output by phase ele-
ments (BLK2OUT-Iph) or by any protection element (BLK2OUT-Iph/IE), whenever the given ele-
ment (Start I(H)>, Start I(H)>> e/o Start I(H)>>>) becomes active. The enable Z<BLK2OUT
and/or Z<<BLK2OUT parameters (ON or OFF) are available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \
Underimpedance-21 \ Z< Element (Z<< Element) \ Setpoints menus, while the BLK2OUT-Iph-K,
BLK2OUT-Iph/IE-K and/or BLK2OUT-IE-K output relays and LEDs (BLK2OUT-Iph-L, BLK-
2OUT-Iph/IE-L e/o BLK2OUT-IE-L) must be select inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Selective
block-BLOCK2 \ Selective block OUT menu.

80 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 Z<
U 12
I L1L Z 12 =U 12/I L 1L Z< Start
Z 12 ≤ Z <
U 12 ≥1%U n Z< Start
&
I L1L ≥ 5%I nL

TRIPPING M ATRIX
Iph block2 Start

(LED+REL AYS)
Z< Iph block2 output
U 23
Iph/IE block2 output
I L2L Z 23 =U 12/I L 1L t Z<RES
Z 23 ≤ Z < t Z< Block2 IN diagnostic
U 23 ≥1%U n t Z<RES
& ≥1 t Z<
0 T Z< Trip
I L2L ≥ 5%I nL T 0
RESET
Z< Z< Trip
U 31
I L3L Z 31 =U 12/I L 1L
Z 31 ≤ Z <
U 31 ≥1%U n
&
I L3L ≥ 5%I nL
from Z<< element (ON≡Inhibit)
Z< inhibition
≥1
=0 if 20≤f≤70 Hz
IF Start
VT fault (74VT) ≥1 F21S1 Block3
74VT Block
(=0 without fault)
Z< Start
Enable (ON≡Enable) &
Block1 Z< Trip & Z< Block1
&
≥1
Block1 Logic INx t ON INx t OFF & Z< Block2
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF Block1 input (ON≡Block)
n.o. Block1
T 0 0 T
Binary input INx (x=1...8-16)

Block2 input enable (ON≡Enable)

Block2 IN
&

Z< Start IPh Block2 input

Z< Block2 OUT
Block2 output enable (ON≡Enable) &
Block2 OUT
IPh Block2 Iph Block2 Start
FROM OVERCURRENT PROTECTIONS Z< Block2 OUT

Logic INx t ON INx t OFF t F-Iph

IPh Block2 t B-Iph
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF
t B-Iph ≥1 t F-Iph
n.o. T 0 0 T ≥1 All other BLK2OUT Iph block2 output
T 0 outputs T 0
Binary input INx (x=1...8-16)
of phase elements
FROM ANY PROTECTIONS (BLK2OUT chapter) t F-all

Logic INx t ON INx t OFF t F-all

IPh/IE Block2 ≥1 Iph/IE block2 output
n.c. INx t ON ≥1 T 0
INx t OFF
n.o. T 0 0 T
Binary input INx (x=1...8-16) t F-IE
All other BLK2OUT
FROM EARTH FAULT PROTECTIONS
outputs t F-IE
t B-IE ≥1 IE block2 output
of ground elements T 0
Logic INx t ON INx t OFF (BLK2OUT chapter)
IE Block2 t B-IE Block2 output
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1
T 0
n.o. T 0 0 T Block2 IN diagnostic
Block2 input
Binary input INx (x=1...8-16) IE Block2 input
IPh/IE Block2
Z< Trip
IE Block2 & Z< BF_OUT towards BF logic
BF Enable (ON≡Enable)
BF Element

Underimpedance logic diagram (21) - First element Fun-21_S1.ai

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 81

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 (ON≡Inhibit)
Z<< Z< inhibition
U 12 & Z< inhibition
I L 1L Z 12 =U 12/I L1L
Z 12 ≤ Z < Z<< Start
U 12 ≥1%U n
& Z<< Start
I L1L ≥ 5%I n L

TRIPPING M ATRIX
Iph block2 Start

(LED+REL AYS)
Z<<
Iph block2 output
U 23
I L 2L Z 23 =U 12/I L1L t Z<<RES Iph/IE block2 output
Z 23 ≤ Z < t Z<<
Block2 IN diagnostic
U 23 ≥1%U n t Z<<RES
& ≥1 t Z<<
0 T Z<< Trip
I L2L ≥ 5%I n L T 0
RESET
Z<<
U 31 Z<< Trip
I L 3L Z 31 =U 12/I L1L
Z 31 ≤ Z <
U 31 ≥1%U n
&
I L3L ≥ 5%I n L

=0 if 20≤f≤70 Hz
IF Start
VT fault (74VT) ≥1 F21S2 Block3
74VT Block
(=0 without fault)
Z<< Start
Enable (ON≡Enable) &
Block1 Z<< Trip & Z<< Block1
≥1
≥1
Block1 Logic INx t ON INx t OFF & Z<< Block2
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF Block1 input (ON≡Block)
n.o. Block1
T 0 0 T
Binary input INx (x=1...8-16)

Block2 input enable (ON≡Enable)

Block2 IN
&

Z<< Start IPh Block2 input

Z<< Block2 OUT
Block2 output enable (ON≡Enable) &
Block2 OUT
IPh Block2 Iph Block2 Start
FROM OVERCURRENT PROTECTIONS Z< Block2 OUT
Z<< Block2 OUT
Logic INx t ON INx t OFF t F-Iph
IPh Block2 t B-Iph
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF
t B-Iph t F-Iph
n.o. T 0 0 T ≥1 All other BLK2OUT ≥1 Iph block2 output
T 0 T 0
Binary input INx (x=1...8-16) outputs
of phase elements
FROM ANY PROTECTIONS (BLK2OUT chapter) t F-all

Logic INx t ON INx t OFF t F-all

IPh/IE Block2 ≥1 Iph/IE block2 output
n.c. INx t ON ≥1 T 0
INx t OFF
n.o. T 0 0 T
Binary input INx (x=1...8-16) t F-IE
All other BLK2OUT
FROM EARTH FAULT PROTECTIONS outputs t F-IE
≥1 IE block2 output
t B-IE of ground elements T 0
Logic INx t ON INx t OFF (BLK2OUT chapter)
IE Block2 t B-IE Block2 output
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1
T 0
n.o. T 0 0 T Block2 IN diagnostic
Block2 input
Binary input INx (x=1...8-16) IE Block2 input
IPh/IE Block2
Z<< Trip
IE Block2 & Z<< BF_OUT towards BF logic
BF Enable (ON≡Enable)
BF Element
Fun-21_S2.ai
Underimpedance logic diagram (21) - Second element

82 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
— Thermal protection with RTD thermometric probes - 26
Preface
The protection is optionally available in all versions.
The measure of temperature is acquired by means of Pt100 (RTD Resistive Temperature sensing
Devices) probed, connected to the MPT module.[1]
A direct thermal protection element with eight PT100 thermometric probes (RTD Resistive Thermal
Device) provides protection against premature ageing or breakdown of the insulating materials
through overheating.
Thermal protection using thermometric probes offers greater reliability than Thermal overload-based
indirect protection, since it is not influenced by inaccuracies in the time constant for the thermal
model of the machinery and by variations in the surrounding temperature.

TRIP

t ThALx

t Th> x

Th > x T (°C)
t-int-F26.ai
General operation time characteristic for thermal protection with RTD thermometric probes (26)

For each thermometric probe an alarm (ThALx , where x=1...8 points one of the eight probes) and one
trip adjustable threshold is provided (Th>x ), with adjustable operating time (t ThALx and t Th>x >);if the
measured temperature overcomes the threshold, the relative alarm and/or trip is issued when the
timer expires.
The adjustments are operable in °C.

ThAL x enable Th ALx t ThALx Th> x enable Th> x t Th> x

P t 10 0
Alarm Element Trip Element
T hy bus AL ARM T R IP
MP T
Th>xBF
Th>xBF
&
Trip Th>x

General logic diagram of the thermal elements - (26) all-F26.ai

The probes should be placed in strategic points around the machinery susceptible to the greatest
overheating, such as for example:
- near the generator stator windings, near the step-up transformer windings and/or in the oil, with the
aim of detecting overheating produced by the overload currents,
- near the generator bearings, with the aim of detecting localised overheating due to worn or non-
lubricated bearings.

The Pt100 probes detect the temperature in the range -50 °C...+250 °C (at 0 °C its resistance is 100
ohm); an alarm indicates any interruption or short-circuiting of the probe or related connections to
the MPT module; the information is available inside the Read \ PT100 menu:

• Ptx probe ON to point a measure inside the range

• Ptx probe LOW to point a measure lower the range (short circuit of probe and/or wires)
• Ptx probe HIGH ao point a measure higher the range (breaking of probe and/or wires).
Self reset is performed when faults are cleared.

The measure of each probe is updated at 2 s time intervals.

2.0s

Pt1 Pt2 Pt3 Pt4 Pt5 Pt6 Pt7 Pt8 Pt1

0.25s 0.25s 0.25s 0.25s 0.25s 0.25s 0.25s 0.25s t

Pt1...8 update t-refresh-F26.ai

Note 1 The 26 menu is available when the MPT module is enabled

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 83

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 Pt10 0 -xAlarm
Th ALx t ThALx

t ThALx ThALx-K

TRIPPING M ATRIX
T° > Th ALx T 0 ThALx-L

(LED+REL AYS)
Th> x t Th> x

Pt100 OK t Th> x Th>x-K

T° ≤ +2 4 5 . 0 ° C &
T° > Pt x > T 0 Th>x-L
Pt1 Pt x Pt10 0 -x Trip
Pt2 Pt100 FAULT
Pt3 & Pt x > Diagnostic TOWARDS DIAGNOSTIC
Pt4
Pt5 T° ≥ - 4 9 . 0 ° C
Pt6
Pt7 TRIP
Pt8 BF Enable (ON≡Enable) & Th>x BF_OUT TOWARDS BF LOGIC
Th>xBF

Logic diagram for thermal protection with RTD thermometric probes (26) Fun-F26.ai

All alarm and/or trip elements can be enabled or disabled by setting ON or OFF the ThALx Enable
e Th>x Enable parameters inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Thermal protection with RTD thermo-
metric probes - 26 \ PTx Probe \ ThALx Alarm (ThALx Trip) where x = 1...8.

Breaker failure (BF)

Each trip threshold (Th>x) may be associated with the breaker failure (BF) function by setting ON
the Th>xBF parameters inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Thermal protection with RTD thermometric
probes - 26 \ PTx Probe \ ThALx Trip where x = 1...8.[1]

NVA100X
Pt100 BOARD
A B PT1
Example 1 MPT1
Pt100 T1
GND1

A B
PT2
Example 2 Pt100 MPT2 T2

T3...T7

PT8
Example 3 Pt100 MPT8 T8

In order to compensate the additional resistance introduced by the cables, three wires connection is
recommended (example 1); with only two terminals, probes you must use a shielded cable with three
conductors carrying the schematic example 2 (Pt100 connected to T2 in the figure).
However it is essential that the link between Terminal A and Terminal B is made with cables of the
same type (same link resistance).
For very short connections, two wires (Pt100 connected to T8 example 3) are permitted; the non-
compensated resistance connections resulting in an error proportional to the value of introduced
resistance.
The connection to the probes must be made with three conductors shielded cables and the screen
should be earthed only at one end, preferably on the relay; multiple connections may result in current
circulation on the screen resulting noise on the measure and are therefore to avoid.
It is recommended to position connections to the probe away from power lines to avoid interfer-
ence.

Note 1 The common settings concerning the Breaker failure protection are adjustable inside the Breaker Failure - BF menu.

84 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
— Undervoltage - 27
Preface
Two operation thresholds, independently adjustable with adjustable delay.
The first one may be programmed with definite or inverse time, while the second threshold operates
with definite time characteristic.

Each threshold may be separately enabled or disabled.

The first threshold trip may be inhibited by start of the second threshold.

Operation and settings

The fundamental frequency of a selectable voltages, phase to ground (UL1, UL2 , UL3) or phase-to-
phase voltages (U12 , U23 , U31) are utilized:

U12 =|UL1-UL2|
U23 =|UL2 -UL3|
U31=|UL2 -UL1|

Each of three voltages compared with the setting values. The start and trip logic may be selected
OR or AND.
With OR selection, a start is issued when at least one of the three voltages goes down the adjust-
able threshold (START); with AND selection, a start is issued when all the three voltages go down
the adjustable threshold.
After expiry of the associated operate time a trip command is issued; if instead the voltages exceed
the threshold, the element is restored.
The first threshold may be programmed with definite or inverse time according the following char-
acteristic curve:
t=0.75 t U<inv / [1-(U/U<inv)]
Where:
t: operate time
U<inv: threshold setting
t U<inv: operate time setting

For the inverse time characteristic, following data applies:

• The operate time setting is referred to an input voltage equal to 1/4 of the pickup value.
• Asymptotic reference value (minimum pickup value): 0.9 U<
• Minimum operate time: 0.1 s
• Range where the equation is valid: 0 ≤ U/U<inv ≤ 0.9
The first undervoltage element can be programmed with definite or inverse time characteristic by
setting the U<Curve parameter (DEFINITE, INVERSE) available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \
Undervoltage-27 \ U< Element \ Setpoints menu.

Each element can be enabled or disabled by setting ON or OFF the U< Enable parameter inside
the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Undervoltage-27 \ U< Element \ Setpoints menu and/or the State parameter
inside the Set\Profile A(or B) \ Undervoltage-27 \ U<< Element \ Definite time.

TRIP
tU<

t U <<

0.9U<
U<< U< U
General operation time characteristic curve for the undervoltage elements - 27

The voltage measurement type (Phase-to-phase or phase-to-neutral) and the operating logic (AND
or OR), is adjustable inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Undervoltage-27 \ Common configuration menu
by means the Utype27 parameter; the allowed setting are Uph-ph (phase-to-phase) or Uph-n
(phase-to-neutral).
The corresponding unit are p.u. Un for Uph-ph setting and p.u. En for Uph-n setting.

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 85

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 The first threshold trip (U<) may be inhibited by start of the second threshold (U<<) by setting ON
the U< Disabling by U<< start (U<disbyU<<) parameter available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \
Undervoltage-27 \ U<< Element \ Setpoints menu.

Utype27 Logic27

U12 ,U23,U31 AND

U
UL1,UL2 ,UL3 OR
MMI
Common configuration
Disable 27-37-81 functions by operator

State U<<def tU<< def U< Enable U< Curve U<def tU< def U< inv tU< inv

U<< Element Start U<< U< Element Start U<

Trip U<< Trip U<
U & U &
74VT 74VT
U<<BF U<BF
U<<BF U<BF
U< disbyU<< & &
Trip U<< Trip U<
& U< inhibition
Start U<<
U<<BLK1 U<BLK1 Start U<
Start U<< BLK1U<< BLK1U<
& &
& &
Block1 Block1

General logic diagram of the undervoltage elements - 27 all-F27.ai

User can disable both 27 protection thresholds from the keyboard. During this command, the trip
output relay (U <and / or U << thresholds) are forced to reset state, the message “27 Disabled” is
displayed and all LEDs blink until the end of the command.

Breaker failure (BF)

All undervoltage elements can produce the Breaker Failure output if the U< BF and U<< BF pa-
rameters are set to ON. The parameters are available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Undervoltage
- 27 \ U< Element (U<< Element) \ Setpoints menus.[1]

VT monitoring (74VT)
Both the protection elements are blocked off whenever the VT supervision function is active, so
that no unwanted trip can arise if any fault on the VTs secondary circuits (break, fuse trip, etc)
are detect;[2]the Block functions enable from 74VT parameter 74VT-BK-EN is available inside the
Set \ VT supervision -74VT.
For every of the two elements the logic block is available:

Logical block (Block1)

If the U<BLK1 and/or U<<BLK1 enabling parameters are set to ON and a binary input is designed
for logical block (Block1), the protection is blocked off whenever the given input is active.
The trip timer is held in reset condition, so the operate time counting starts when the input block goes
down.[3] The enabling parameters are available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Undervoltage - 27 \
U< Element (U<< Element) \ Setpoints menus, while the Block1 function must be assigned to the
selected binary input inside the Set \ Board1(2) inputs \ Binary input IN1-1...INx-x menus.

All parameters can be set separately for A and B setting profiles

Note 1 The common settings concerning the Breaker failure protection are adjustable inside the Breaker Failure - BF menu.
Note 2 The exhaustive treatment of the VT supervision function may be found in the “VT supervision - 74VT” paragraph inside CONTROL AND MONI-
TORING section.
Note 3 The exhaustive treatment of the logical block (Block 1) function may be found in the “Logic Block” paragraph inside CONTROL AND MONITOR-
ING section.

86 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 Disable 27 function by operator
ON≡Enable U< undervoltage element (ON≡Inhibit)
U< Enable
U< def State

&
Utype27 U ≤ U<def
Start U<
UL1 ≥1
U12 U< inv State
U<ST-K

TRIPPING M ATRIX
& U<ST-L

(LED+REL AYS)
U ≤ U< inv
U< Curve
t U<def t U<inv
UL2 Logic27
U23 ≥1
& t U<
T 0 U<TR-K
T 0
& U<TR-L
UL3 RESET
U31
Trip U<
(ON≡Inhibit)
U< Inhibition
VT fault (74VT) ≥1
Block 74VT
(=0 without fault) Start U<
Enable (ON≡Enable) &
U<BLK1 Trip U< & BLK1U<
&

Block1 Logic INx t ON INx t OFF

n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF Block1 input (ON≡Block)
n.o. Block1
T 0 0 T
Binary input INx
Trip U<
BF Enable (ON≡Enable) & U< BF towards BF logic
U<BF

Logic diagram concerning the first threshold (U<) of the undervoltage element - 27 Fun-F27_S1.ai

Disable 27 function by operator

(ON≡Inhibit)
(ON≡Inhibit)
ON≡Enable U<< element U<disbyU<<
U<< Enable & U< Inhibition

Start U<<
U<< def State
Utype27
U<<ST-K
UL1 &
TRIPPING M ATRIX

U<<ST-L
(LED+REL AYS)

U12 U ≤ U<<def

t U<<def
UL2 Logic27
U23 ≥1
& t U<<
U<<TR-K
T 0
& U<<TR-L
UL3 RESET
U31
Trip U<<
VT fault (74VT) (=0 without fault)
Block 74VT

Start U<<
Enable (ON≡Enable) &
U<<BLK1 Trip U<< & BLK1U<<
&

Block1 Logic INx t ON INx t OFF

n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF Block1 input (ON≡Block)
n.o. Block1
T 0 0 T
Binary input INx
Trip U<<
BF Enable (ON≡Enable) & U<< BF towards BF logic
U<<BF

Logic diagram concerning the second threshold (U<<) of the undervoltage element - 27 Fun-F27_S2.ai

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 87

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 t [s]
10000 0.75
t =t U<inv ·
[1 - (U/U< inv)]

1000

t U <inv = 100 s

100

t U <inv = 10 s

10

t U <inv = 1 s

t U <inv = 0.1 s

0.1

0.01 U /U<inv
0.01 0.1 0.25 1
0.9

Note: match of operating and setting time takes place when U/U<inv = 0.25

Inverse time operating characteristic concerning the first threshold (U<) of the undervoltage element - 27 F_27-Char.ai

88 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
— Positive sequence undervoltage - 27V1
Preface
The element has an adjustable threshold with time definite delay.
Enabling or disabling may be performed through ThySetter: it can be temporarily blocked by key-
board command.
Operation and settings
The positive sequence voltage is calculated as:
U1=(UL1+e+j120°·UL2+e-j120°·UL3)/3

where e-j120°=-1/2-j√3/2, ej120°=-1/2+j√3/2.

The positive sequence voltage is compared with the setting value (U1<def). Voltages under the as-
sociated pickup value are detected and a start is issued. After expiry of the associated operate
time (t U1<def) a trip command is issued; if instead the voltage exceed the threshold, the element is
restored.
The element can be enabled or disabled by setting ON or OFF the State parameter inside the Set \
Profile A(or B) \ Positive sequence undervoltage-27V1 \ U1< Element \ Setpoints menu.

TRIP

t U1 <

U 1< U1
General operation time characteristic for the positive undervoltage element - 27V1 t-int-F27V1.ai

User can disable the 27V1 protection threshold from the keyboard. During this command, the trip
output relay (U <and / or U << thresholds) are forced to reset state, the message “Disabled 27-27V1-
37P-37Q” is displayed and all LEDs blink until the end of the command.

MMI

Disable 27-37-81 functions by operator State U1<def tU1< def

U1< Element Start U1<

Trip U1<
U1 &
74VT
U1<BF
U1<BF
&
Trip U1<
U1<BLK1
Start U1< BLK1U<
&
&
Block1

General logic diagram of the phase positive sequence undervoltage elements - 27V1 all-F27V1.ai

Breaker failure (BF)

The 27V1 element can produce the Breaker Failure output if the U1<BF parameter is set to ON.
The parameters are available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \Positive sequence undervoltage-27V1
\ U1< Element \ Setpoints menu.[1]

VT supervision (74VT)
The element may be blocked whenever the VT supervision function is active, so that no unwanted trip
can arise if any fault on the VTs secondary circuits (break, fuse trip, etc) are detect;[2]the Block func-
tions enable from 74VT parameter 74VT-BK-EN is available inside the Set \ VT supervision -74VT.

Note 1 The common settings concerning the Breaker failure protection are adjustable inside the Breaker Failure - BF menu.
Note 2 The exhaustive treatment of the VT supervision function may be found in the “VT supervision - 74VT” paragraph inside CONTROL AND MONI-
TORING section.

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 89

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 Logical block (Block1)
If the U1<BLK1 enabling parameters is set to ON and a binary input is designed for logical block
(Block1), the protection is blocked whenever the given input is active.
The trip timer is held in reset condition, so the operate time counting starts when the input block goes
down.[1] The enabling parameters are available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Positive sequence
undervoltage - 27V1 \ U1< Element \ Setpoints menu, while the Block1 function must be assigned to
the selected binary input inside the Set \ Board1(2) inputs \ Binary input IN1-1...INx-x menus.

All parameters can be set separately for A and B setting profiles.

Disable 27 function by operator Start U1<

(ON≡Inhibit)
U1< def State U1<ST-K

TRIPPING M ATRIX
U1<ST-L

(LED+REL AYS)
&
U1
U 1≤ U1<def t U1<def

VT fault (74VT) (=0 without fault) & t U1<def

Block 74VT U1<TR-K
T 0
U1<TR-L
RESET
MMI
Enable (ON≡Enable)
Disable 27-37-81 functions by operator Trip U1<

Start U1<
&
Enable (ON≡Enable) Trip U1< & BLK1U1<
U1<BLK1
&
Block1 Logic INx t ON INx t OFF
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF Block1 input (ON≡Block)
n.o. Block1
T 0 0 T
Binary input INx
Trip U1<
BF Enable (ON≡Enable) & U1< BF towards BF logic
U1<BF

Logic diagram concerning the positive sequence undervoltage element - 27V1 Fun-F27V1_S1.ai

Note 1 The exhaustive treatment of the logical block (Block 1) function may be found in the “Logic Block” paragraph inside CONTROL AND MONITOR-
ING section.

90 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
— Directional active overpower - 32P

Preface
The active power is calculated as:
P=UL1IL1cosφL1+ UL2IL2cosφL2+UL3IL3 cosφL3
where:
• UL1, UL2 , UL3 are the fundamental components of the phase-to-neutral voltages
• IL1, IL2 , IL3 are the fundamental components of the phase currents
• cosφL1, cosφL2 , cosφL3 are the phase power factors
φL1, φL2 , φL3 , are the displacement angles of phase currents IL1, IL2 , IL3 respect to the phase voltages
UL1, UL2 , UL3 , (positive when lag currents compared the phase voltages).

Operation and settings

The element is enabled for start and trip on the base of the direction setting for the two indepen-
dently programmable thresholds.
P1> Tripping direction: P Forward:

P1> Tripping direction: P Forward:

Q

TRIP

P 1> P

General operation time characteristic for the directional active overpower element - 32P

P1> Tripping direction: P Reverse:

Impostazione Direzione d’intervento: P Inversa

Q

TRIP

P 1> P

Caratteristica d’intervento relativa alla soglia P1> della funzione di Massima potenza attiva
direzionale (32P)

P1> Tripping direction: P Forwaed/Reverse:

P1> Tripping direction: P Forward/Reverse:

Q

TRIP TRIP

P 1> P 1> P

General operation time characteristic for the directional active overpower element - 32P

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 91

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 The element has two adjustable thresholds with time definite delay.

TRIP TRIP

t P1 >

P 1> P 1> P
General operation time characteristic for the directional active power element - 32P

The active power is compared with the setting value (P1>def, P2>def) powers above the associated
pickup value are detected and a start is issued. After expiry of the associated operate time (t P1> def,
t P2 > def) a trip command is issued; if instead the power drops below the threshold, the element is
restored.
The elements can be enabled or disabled by setting ON or OFF the State parameter inside the
Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Directional active overpower-32P \ P1> Element (P2> Element) \ Definite time
menu.

P1>DIR P1>def t P1>RES t P1>def P2>DIR P2>def t P2>RES t P2>def

1st Pickup Element 2nd Pickup Element

P P
P 1> Start P 2 > Start
P 1> Trip P 2 > Trip

Block1 Block1 Block1 Block1

BF BF

General operation time characteristic for the directional active elements - 32P
An adjustable reset time delay is provided for every threshold (t P1>RES, t P2>RES).

INPUT

t P1>RES t P1>RES t P1>RES

P1> Start
t P1>def t P1>def

P1> Trip

RESET

t
P1> element directional active power timers - 32P

Logical block (Block1)

If the P1>BLK1 and/or P2>BLK1 enabling parameters is set to ON and a binary input is designed
for logical block (Block1), the protection is blocked whenever the given input is active.
The trip timer is held in reset condition, so the operate time counting starts when the input block goes
down.[1] The enabling parameters are available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Directional active
overpower - 32P \ P1 Element (P2 > Element) \ Setpoints menu, while the Block1 function must be
assigned to the selected binary input inside the Set \ Board1(2) inputs \ Binary input IN1-1...INx-x
menus.

Breaker failure (BF)

The 32P element can produce the Breaker Failure output if the P1>BF, P2>BF parameters are set
to ON. The parameters are available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Directional active overpower
- 32P \ P1> Element (P2 > Element) \ Setpoints menu.[2]

All parameters can be set separately for A and B setting profiles.

Note 1 The exhaustive treatment of the logical block (Block 1) function may be found in the “Logic Block” paragraph inside CONTROL AND MONITOR-
ING section.
Note 2 The common settings concerning the Breaker failure protection are adjustable inside the Breaker Failure - BF menu.

92 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 P 1> Start

P 1> Start

TRIPPING M ATRIX
(LED+REL AYS)
P1>DIR P1>def t P1>RES
t P1>def
t P1>RES
P t P1>def
P ≥ P 1> def 0 T P 1> Trip
T 0
RESET

P1> Trip
P 1> Start
Enable (ON≡Enable) &
Block1 P 1> Trip & P 1> Block1
&

Block1 Logic INx t ON INx t OFF

n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF Block1 input (ON≡Block)
n.o. Block1
T 0 0 T
Binary input INx
P 1> Trip
BF Enable (ON≡Enable) & P 1> BF_OUT towards BF logic
BF Element

Directional active overpower (32P) - First element logic diagram (P1>) Fun_32-P1.ai

P 2 > Start

P 2 > Start

TRIPPING M ATRIX
(LED+REL AYS)
P2>DIR P2>def t P2>RES
t P2 >def
t P2>RES
P t P2>def
P ≥ P 2 > def 0 T P 2 > Trip
T 0
RESET

P 2 > Trip
P 2 > Start
Enable (ON≡Enable) &
Block1 P 2 > Trip & P 2 > Block1
&

Block1 Logic INx t ON INx t OFF

n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF Block1 input (ON≡Block)
n.o. Block1
T 0 0 T
Binary input INx
P 2 > Trip
BF Enable (ON≡Enable) & P 2 > BF_OUT towards BF logic
BF Element

Directional active overpower (32P) - Second element logic diagram (P2>) Fun_32-P2.ai

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 93

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
— Undercurrent - 37
Preface
One operation threshold, adjustable (I<def) with adjustable delay (t<def).
The threshold operates with definite time characteristic.

Operation and settings

Each of three side L currents are compared with the setting value (I<def). The start and trip logic may
be selected OR or AND.
With OR selection, a start is issued when at least one of the three currents goes down the adjust-
able threshold (START); with AND selection, a start is issued when all the three currents go down
the adjustable threshold.
After expiry of the associated operate time (t<def), a trip command is issued; if instead the currents
exceed the threshold, the element is restored.

The element can be enabled or disabled by setting ON or OFF the State parameter inside the Set
\ Profile A(or B) \ Undecurrent-37 \ I< Element \ Definite time menu.

TRIP

t< def

I< def I
General operation time characteristic curve for the undercurrent element - 37

The undecurrent element may be disabled by means MMI. During the command, the trip output
relays I<TR-K (with latched or no-latched operation mode and, de-energized or energized logic) are
forced in the rest state, the“37 DISABLED” message is displayed and all the LEDs flash until the
command is ended.

State I< def t< def

I< Element
Start I<
Logic37
Trip I<
AND
IL1L, IL2L, IL3L
OR
I<BLK1 Start I<
BLK1I<
&
Block1 &

General logic diagram of the undercurrent element - 37 all-F37.ai

The following block criteria is available:

Logical block (Block1)

If the I<BLK1 enabling parameter are set to ON and a binary input is designed for logical block
(Block1), the protection is blocked off whenever the given input is active.
The trip timer is held in reset condition, so the operate time counting starts when the input block
goes down.[1] The enabling parameter is available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Undercurrent - 37
\ I< Element \ Setpoints menu, while the Block1 function must be assigned to the selected binary
input inside the Set \ Board1(2) inputs \ Binary input IN1-1...INx-x menus.

The parameter may be adjusted independently for both profiles A or B.

Note 1 The description of the logical block (Block 1) function may be found in the “Logic Block” paragraph inside CONTROL AND MONITORING sec-
tion.

94 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 I< def State Start I<

& I<ST-K

TRIPPING M ATRIX
IL1L I<ST-L

(LED+REL AYS)
I ≤ I<def

Logic37 t<def
IL2L ≥1
t<def
I<TR-K
& T 0
I<TR-L
IL3L RESET
Start I< Trip I<
Enable (ON≡Enable) &
I<BLK1 Trip I< & BLK1I<
&

Block1 Logic INx t ON INx t OFF

n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF Block1 input (ON≡Block)
n.o. Block1
T 0 0 T
Binary input INx (x=1...8-16)

Logic diagram concerning the threshold (I<) of the undercurrent element - 37 Fun-F37_S1.ai

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 95

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
— Directional active underpower - 37P

Preface
The active power is calculated as:
P=UL1IL1L cosφL1+ UL2IL2L cosφL2+UL3IL3L cosφL3
where:
• UL1, UL2 , UL3 are the fundamental components of the phase-to-neutral voltages
• IIL1L , IL2L , IL3L are the fundamental components of the side L phase currents
• cosφL1, cosφL2 , cosφL3 are the phase power factors
φL1, φL2 , φL3 , are the displacement angles of phase currents IL1, IL2 , IL3 respect to the phase voltages
UL1, UL2 , UL3 , (positive when lag currents compared the phase voltages).
For the conventions on the active power sign please refer to the wiring diagram.

Operation and settings

The element is enabled for start and trip on the base of the direction setting for the two indepen-
dently programmable thresholds.
User can disable the 37P protection threshold from the keyboard. During this command, the trip
output relay (U <and / or U << thresholds) are forced to reset state, the message “Disabled 27-27V1-
37P-37Q” is displayed and all LEDs blink until the end of the command.
P1< Tripping direction: P Forward:

P1< Tripping direction: P Forward:

Q

TRIP

P 1< P

General operation time characteristic for the directional active underpower element - 37P

P1< Tripping direction: P Reverse:

P1< Tripping direction: P Reverse:

Q

TRIP

P 1< P

General operation time characteristic for the directional active underpower element - 37P

P1< Tripping direction: P Forward/Reverse:

P1< Tripping direction: P Forward/Reverse:

Q

TRIP

P 1< P 1< P

General operation time characteristic for the directional active underpower element - 37P

96 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 The element has two adjustable thresholds with time definite delay.
The active power is compared with the setting value (P1<def, P2<def) powers above the associated
pickup value are detected and a start is issued when the following conditions are met:
• The circuit breaker is closed (if the control is enabled)
• The tARM-P< adjustable timer has expired started from the CB closure
If all conditions are still met, after expiry of the associated operate time (t P1<def, t P2<def) a trip com-
mand is issued; if instead the power exceed the threshold, the element is restored.
The elements can be enabled or disabled by setting ON or OFF the State parameter inside the Set
\ Profile A(or B) \ Directional active underpower-37P \ P1< Element (P2< Element) \ Definite time
menu.

TRIP TRIP

t P1 <

P 1< P 1< P
General operation time characteristic for the directional active power element - 37P (first element)
Enabling of the CB state control (ON or OFF of the CB-37P parameter) and adjustment of the wait-
ing time following the CB closing (tARM-P< parameter) maj be adjusted inside the Set \ Profile A(or
B) \ Directional active underpower-37P \ P1< Element (P2< Element) \ Common configuration menu.

The elements can be enabled or disabled by setting ON or OFF the State parameter inside the Set
\ Profile A(or B) \ Directional active underpower-37P \ P1< Element (P2< Element) \ Definite time
menu.

Common
P1<DIR P1<def t P1<def P2<DIR P2<def t P2<def
CB-37P t ARM-P<
1st Pickup Element 2nd Pickup Element

P P 1< Start P P 2 < Start

P 1< Trip P 2 < Trip
P1<BF P2<BF
P 1< BF P 2 < BF
& &
P 1< Trip P 2 < Trip
Block1 Block1 Block1 Block1

General operation time characteristic for the directional active underpower elements - 37P

Breaker failure (BF)

The 37P elements can produce the Breaker Failure output if the P1<BF, P2<BF parameters are set
to ON. The parameters are available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Directional active underpower
- 37P \ P1< Element P2< Element) \ Setpoints menu.[1]

VT supervision (74VT)
The protection element is blocked off whenever the VT or/and CT supervision func-
tion are active, so that no unwanted trip can arise if any fault on the VTs or/and CTs sec-
ondary circuits (break, fuse trip, etc) are detect;[2]the Block functions enable from
74VT and 74CT parameter (74VT-BK-EN and 74CT-BK-EN) are available inside the
Set \ VT supervision -74VT, and Set \ CT supervision -74CT menus

Logical block (Block1)

If the P1<BLK1 and/or P1<BLK1 enabling parameters is set to ON and a binary input is designed
for logical block (Block1), the protection is blocked whenever the given input is active.
The trip timer is held in reset condition, so the operate time counting starts when the input block
goes down.[3] The enabling parameters are available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Directional
active underpower - 37P \ P1< Element P2< Element) \ Setpoints menu, while the Block1 function
must be assigned to the selected binary input inside the Set \ Board1(2) inputs \ Binary input IN1-1...
INx-x menus.

All parameters can be set separately for A and B setting profiles.

Note 1 The common settings concerning the Breaker failure protection are adjustable inside the Breaker Failure - BF menu.
Note 2 The exhaustive treatment of the VT and CT supervision function may be found inside the CONTROL AND MONITORING section.
Note 3 The exhaustive treatment of the logical block (Block 1) function may be found in the “Logic Block” paragraph inside CONTROL AND MONITOR-
ING section.

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 97

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 Disable 27 function by operator P1< Start
(ON≡Inhibit)
ON≡Enable P1< element P1<ST-K

TRIPPING M ATRIX
State

(LED+REL AYS)
P1<ST-L
P1<DIR P1<def t P1<def

t P1<def
P & P1<TR-K
P≤ P 1< def T 0
P1<TR-L
tARM-P< RESET
(ON enable control)
C B - 37P
ON≡CB closed tARM-P< ≥
P1< Trip
CB CLOSED
T 0
CT fault (74CT)
74CT Block
(=0 without fault)
≥
VT fault (74VT)
74VT Block
(=0 without fault) P1< Start
Enable (ON≡Enable) &
Block1 P1< Trip & P1< Block1
&

Block1 Logic INx t ON INx t OFF

n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF Block1 input (ON≡Block)
n.o. Block1
T 0 0 T
Binary input INx
P1< Trip
BF Enable (ON≡Enable) & P1< BF towards BF logic
P1<BF
Directional active underpower (37P) - First element logic diagram (P1<) Fun-F37P_S1.ai

Disable 27 function by operator P2< Start

(ON≡Inhibit)
ON≡Enable P2< element
State
P2<ST-K

TRIPPING M ATRIX
(LED+REL AYS)
P2<ST-L
P2<DIR P2<def
t P2<def

P & t P2<def
P≤ P 2 < def P2<TR-K
T 0
C B - 37P (ON enable control) P2<TR-L
tARM-P< RESET

ON≡CB closed tARM-P< ≥

CB CLOSED P2< Trip
T 0
CT fault (74CT)
74CT Block
(=0 without fault)
≥
VT fault (74VT)
74VT Block
(=0 without fault) P2< Start
Enable (ON≡Enable) &
Block1 P2< Trip & P2< Block1
&

Block1 Logic INx t ON INx t OFF

n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF Block1 input (ON≡Block)
n.o. Block1
T 0 0 T
Binary input INx
P2< Trip
BF Enable (ON≡Enable) & P2< BF towards BF logic
P2<BF

Directional active underpower (37P) - Second element logic diagram (P2<) Fun-F37P_S2.ai

98 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
— Loss of field - 40
Application
Protection of synchronous generators and motors.
Preface
The loss of field for a synchronous motor or generator can have several causes: excitation faults,
power faults, field breaker open, brush fault, short-circuits or interruption of field winding.

Generator
Various causes might result in a synchronous generator losing excitation: faults with the exciter or
its supply system, unwanted opening of the field breaker, interruption or short-circuiting of the field
winding, brush faults.
Under such conditions, the generator’s EMF is annulled consequently reducing the active power
supplied, the speed of the unit increases and the machine then operates as an asynchronous gen-
erator absorbing reactive power from the grid. At speeds exceeding the synchronism value, flow is
established which induces low frequency currents in the rotor magnetic circuit, in the field windings
and dampers, thus resulting in an increase in temperature.
With generators with salient poles, the flow reached in a stable operating state is modest, whereby
the generator can remain in such a state for long periods of time without becoming damaged. In-
stead, with smooth rotor generators, the level of flow can reach such values that the reactive current
provided by the grid to the generator assumes values even twice that of the nominal current, with
values proportional to the load initially applied to the generator prior to the loss of excitation.
If the grid to which the generator is connected is not capable of making up the power required by
the generator operating asynchronously (the case for large generators connected to a modest short
circuit power grid), there is a significant reduction in voltage and the system becomes unstable.
Under such conditions, the generator must be quickly disconnected from the grid.
Protection against loss of excitation is obtained using a Underimpedance function with an adjustable
alarm threshold (Alpha40AL angle in the clockwise direction with respect to the axis R) and adjust-
able operating time (tAL) and two definite time trip thresholds, having circular trip characteristics in
the R-X plane where the diameter (XD1, XD2 ), the absolute coordinate of center on the X axis (XC1,
XC2 ) and the operating time (t XC1XD1, t XC2XD2 ) are adjustable.
The alarm threshold is used to indicate loss of excitation with low flow (e.g. generators with salient
poles), at which the generator remains stably with low levels of active power distributed and reac-
tive power absorbed and which can be tolerated for sufficiently long periods of time. This threshold
must be adjusted so as not to trip any alarms during regular operation of the generator.
The first trip threshold, relating to the outer ring, is used to disconnect the generator when loss of
excitation occurs with modest initial load; the diameter of the ring and the concerning operating time
must be adjusted so as to avoid the risk of tripping during stable power swings resulting from the
elimination of grid faults or the synchronisation of the machine.
Instead, when the loss of excitation occurs with a high initial load, whereby the system becomes
highly unstable, the generator is quickly disconnected by means of the second trip threshold.
A minimum consensus voltage may be selected for all three thresholds, having the adjustable thresh-
old USUP<: the consensus has the purpose of avoiding any undesired alarms or tripping of the device
when the machine is operating as a synchronous compensator in over-excitation (as with genera-
tors with hydraulic turbines), or when the generator absorbs reactive power from the capacity of the
transmission lines left connected to the generator without any load.
The Undervoltage consensus enables the three protective device thresholds when all three volt-
ages together drop below the threshold USUP<, otherwise the three thresholds are inhibited.

Motor
When the excitation of a synchronous motor fails not enough synchronizing torque is provided to
keep the rotor locked in step with the stator rotating magnetic field. The machine would then be
excited from the power system and hence be operating as an induction motor.
This results in an increasing level of reactive power being drawn from the power system at a highly
lagging power factor. If the field excitation is too low to meet the load requirements the synchronous
motor can pole slip. An out-of-step (pole slip) condition will subject the motor to undesirable overcur-
rent and pulsating torque, leading to eventual stalling.
Operation as an induction motor under field failure conditions relies upon the ability of the rest of
the system being able to supply the required reactive power to the machine. If the system cannot
supply enough reactive power the system voltage will drop and the system may become unstable.
This could occur if a large motor running at high power suffers a loss of field when connected to a
relatively weak system. To ensure fast tripping under this condition one of the impedance elements
can be used with a short time delay. This can trip the machine quickly to preserve system stability.
This element should have a small diameter to prevent tripping under power swinging conditions. The
second impedance element, set with a larger diameter, can provide detection of field failure under
lightly loaded conditions.
This second element should be time delayed to prevent operation during power swing conditions.

If the OPERATING MODE parameter inside the 40 element menu is set as GENERATOR (with
connection diagram according the fig. 1 and 2), RL1 and XL1 are considered conventionally positive
when active and reactive power are delivered.
If the OPERATING MODE parameter inside the 40 element menu is set as MOTOR (with connec-
tion diagram according the fig. 3), RL1 and XL1 are considered conventionally positive when active
and reactive power are absorbed.
All the convention are applied by the user by means the right connection diagram (see fig. 1-2 and fig.
3) respectively and on the grounds of the OPERATING MODE parameter setting.

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 99

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 Operation and settings
The resistive RL1 and reactive XL1 components and the cosϕZL1 power factor, concerning the Z L1
impedance (phase voltage UL1 phase current I L1 ratio) are calculated:
Z L1 = UL1 /I L1
RL1 = Z L1cosϕZL1
XL1 = Z L1 sinϕZL1
where Z L1 and ϕZL1 are the impedance module and displacement Z L1, UL1 is the L1 phase-to neutral
voltage, I L1 is the L1 phase current phasor.
Convention: ϕZL1 positive with current I L1 lagging the voltage U L1.

CTs star side CTs line side

SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM
NVA100X-D NVA100X-D NVA100X-D
VOLTAGE VOLTAGE VOLTAGE
UL1 UL1 UL1
INPUTS INPUTS INPUTS
UL2 UL2 UL2
UL3 UL3 UL3
40 40 40
IL1L
IL1L IL1L IL2L CURRENT
IL2L CURRENT IL2L CURRENT
INPUTS IL3L INPUTS
IL3L INPUTS IL3L

Fig. 1 Fig. 2 Fig. 3

Loss of field (40) protection for a synchronous machine normally working as generator (fig.1 and 2) or motor (fig. 3)

Setting for GENERATOR mode

Reference: connection diagram shown in fig. 1 and 2.
The start of the alarm element is issued when both the following conditions are filled:
• XL1 ≤ KRL1
• R L1 ≤ 0
or when both the following conditions are filled:
• XL1 ≤ -KRL1
• R L1 > 0
where K is the adjustable angular coefficient (10° ≤ α ≤ 75°, K = tanα).
After expiry of the associated operate time (t40AL ) a trip command is issued.

XL1 (p.u. Znf)

NO TRIP

NO TRIP α α NO TRIP RL1 (p.u. Znf)

XC2
XC1

TRIP
XD2
XD1

TRIP

ALARM

General operation R-X characteristic for the loss of field element - 40 in the RL1-XL1 plane with
Mode40 = GENERATOR setting

The start of the first element is issued when both the conditions concerning the alarm element are
filled and the R L1 and XL1 computed values are placed inside the circle with equation:

R L1 2+(XL1 + XC1)2 ≤ (XD1/2)2 1)

where the absolute coordinate of the center is XC1 and the diameter XD1 are adjustable.
After expiry of the associated operate time (t XC1XD1) a trip command is issued.

100 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 Likewise, the start of the second threshold is issued when both the conditions concerning the alarm
element are filled and the RL1 and XL1 computed values are placed inside the circle with equation:

R L1 2+(XL1 + XC2 )2 ≤ (XD2 /2)2 2)

where the absolute coordinate of the center is XC2 and the diameter XD2 are adjustable.
After expiry of the associated operate time (t XC2XD2 ) a trip command is issued.[1]

Setting for MOTOR mode

Reference: connection diagram shown in fig. 3
The start of the alarm element is issued when both the following conditions are filled:
XL1 ≤ -KRL1
RL1 ≤ 0
or when both the following conditions are filled:
XL1 ≤ KRL1
RL1 > 0
where K is the adjustable angular coefficient (10° ≤ α ≤ 75°, K = tanα).
After expiry of the associated operate time (t40AL ) a trip command is issued.

XL1 (p.u. Znf)

ALARM

TRIP
XD1

XD2
TRIP
XC1

XC2
NO TRIP α α NO TRIP

RL1 (p.u. Znf)

NO TRIP

General operation R-X characteristic for the loss of field element - 40 in the RL1-XL1 plane with
Mode40 = MOTOR setting

The start of the first element is issued when both the conditions concerning the alarm element are
filled and the R L1 and XL1 computed values are placed inside the circle with equation:

R L1 2+(XL1 - XC1)2 ≤ (XD1/2)2 3)

where the absolute coordinate of the center is XC1 and the diameter XD1 are adjustable.
After expiry of the associated operate time (t XC1XD1) a trip command is issued.

Likewise, the start of the second threshold s issued when both the conditions concerning the alarm
element are filled and the R L1 and XL1 computed values are placed inside the circle with equation:

R L1 2+(XL1 - XC2 )2 ≤ (XD2 /2)2 4)

where the absolute coordinate of the center is XC2 and the diameter XD2 are adjustable.
After expiry of the associated operate time (t XC2XD2 ) a trip command is issued[2]

Operating logic
For both operating modes (Motor or Generator):
• A undervoltage consensus may be selected for all three thresholds, having the adjustable thresh-
old USUP<: the consensus has the purpose of avoiding any undesired alarms or tripping of the de-
vice when the machine is operating as a synchronous compensator. The Undervoltage consensus
enables the three protective device thresholds when all three voltages together drop below the
threshold USUP<, otherwise the three thresholds are inhibited.

Note 1 Since the center coordinates XC1 and XC2 are adjustable inside positive range, the center of circle with equations 1) and 2) are always located
along the negative axis XL1
Note 1 Since the center coordinates XC1 and XC2 are adjustable inside positive range, the center of circle with equations 3) and 4) are always located
along the negative axis XL1

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 101

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 (ON≡Enable)
State Undervoltage enable

USUP <

U12
U12 ≤USUP <

U23 & Start undervoltage

U23 ≤USUP <

U 31
U 31≤USUP < Undervoltage F40.ai

Logic diagram concerning the undervoltage consent for the loss of field element - 40

In order to set the undervoltage consent, the minimum voltage threshold may be set (STATE ON)
for the USUPU< inside the Set \ Profile A (or B) \ Loss of field-40 \ Common configuration menu.
• Every threshold may be enabled or disabled by setting ON or OFF the 40AL Enable, XC1XD1
Enable, XC2XD2 Enable parameters inside the Set \ Profile A (or B) \ Loss of field-40 \ 40AL Ele-
ment, XC1-XD1 Element , XC2-XD2 Element menus.
• The trip of the 40AL element may be inhibited by the start of the first and/or the second element
by setting ON the Disabling 40AL by XC1-XD1 start, Disabling 40AL by XC2-XD2 start,
parameters available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Loss of field-40 \ XC1-XD1 Element ( XC2-XD2
Element) menus.

Mode USUP <

U12 Start undervoltage

U23 Common configuration Undervoltage enable
U 31
Operating Mode

XC2 XD2 Enable t XC2XD2 XC1 XD1 Enable t XC1XD1 40 AL Enable

XC2 XD2 t XC2XD2-RES XC1 XD1 t XC1XD1-RES Alpha40AL t40AL

XC2 XD2 Start XC1 XD1 Start Alpha Start

XC2 XD2 Trip XC1 XD1 Trip Alpha Trip
ZL1 ZL1 ZL1
Start undervoltage Start undervoltage Start undervoltage

40ALdisbyXC2XD2 40ALdisbyXC1XD1

& &
XC2 XD2 Start XC1 XD1 Start ≥ Alarm inhibition

Block1 Block1 Block1 Block1 Block1 Block1

Block3 BF Block3 BF
XC2 XD2 Element XC1 XD1 Element Alarm Element

Logic diagram concerning the loss of field element - 40 all-F40.ai

• The protection elements are blocked off whenever the VT supervision function are active, so that
no unwanted trip can arise if any fault on the VTs secondary circuits (break, fuse trip, etc) are
detect;[1]the Block functions enable from 74VT parameter (74VT-BK-EN) is available inside the
Set \ VT supervision - 74VT menus.

Note 1 The exhaustive treatment of the VT and CT supervision function may be found inside the CONTROL AND MONITORING section.

102 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 • For both trip thresholds (t XC1XD1RES, t XC2XD2RES) a reset time delay may be adjusted in order to pro-
tect against the out of step of low size generators connect to high short circuit impedance grids.

INPUT

t XC1XD1RES t XC1XD1RES t XC1XD1RES

XO1-XD1 Start
t XC1XD1 t XC1XD1

XO1-XD1 Trip

RESET
t
Timers concerning the first threshold of the loss of field element -40 Timers-F40.ai

Alpha Start
Alpha
UL1 Alpha Start
X ≤ tanAlpha · R & R ≤ 0

TRIPPING M ATRIX
(LED+REL AYS)
IL1L Z 1, R , X or
X ≤ -tanAlpha · R & R > 0
UL1 ≥ 10%Un tAL<

IL1 ≥ 5%InL & tAL<

Alpha Trip
(ON≡Enable) T 0
Undervoltage enable ≥1
RESET
&
Start undervoltage Alpha Trip
from (X O1 -X D1 ) and/or (X O2 -X D2 ) element (ON≡Inhibit)
Alpha inhibition
≥1
=0 if 20≤f≤70 Hz
Block3
VT fault (74VT) ≥1
74VT Block
(=0 without fault)
Alpha Start
Enable (ON≡Enable) &
Block1 Alpha Trip & Alpha Block1
&

Block1 Logic INx t ON INx t OFF

n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF Block1 input (ON≡Block)
n.o. Block1
T 0 0 T
Binary input INx

Logic diagram concerning the Alarm threshold of the loss of field element - 40 Fun-40_AL.ai

Breaker failure (BF)

Both the trip elements may produce the Breaker Failure output if the XC1-XD1-BF and/or XC2-
XD2-BF parameters are set to ON. The parameter is available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Loss
of field - 40 \ XC1-XD1, XC2-XD2 Element menus.[1]
Logical block (Block1)
If the XC1XD1-BLK1 and/or XC12XD2-BLK1) enabling parameters are set to ON and a binary in-
put is designed for logical block (Block1), the concerning element is blocked off whenever the given
input is active.[2] The enabling parameter is available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Loss of field - 40
\ XC1-XD1, XC2-XD2 Element menus, while the Block1 function must be assigned to the selected
binary input inside the Set \ Board1(2) inputs \ Binary input IN1-1...INx-x menus.
All the named parameters can be set separately for Profile A and Profile B.
Block3
The 40 element is disabled when:
• the phase voltages UL1 is lower than 10% En or
• the phase currents IL1 is lower than 5% In or
• the measured frequency becomes lower than 20 Hz or higher than 70 Hz or
• all the phase voltages UL1, UL2 , UL3 are lower than 1% En or
• all the phase currents IL1, IL2 , IL3 are lower than 15% In.

Note 1 The common settings concerning the Breaker failure protection are adjustable inside the Breaker Failure - BF menu.
Note 2 The exhaustive treatment of the logical block (Block 1) function may be found in the “Logic Block” paragraph inside CONTROL AND MONITOR-
ING section

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 103

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 Mode = GENERATOR
Alpha40AL Mode

XL1 ≤ tanAlpha40AL · R L1& RL1 ≤ 0

or Mode = MOTOR
XL1 ≤ -tanAlpha40AL · RL1 & RL1 > 0
(ON≡Inhibit)
XL1 ≤ -tanAlpha40AL · R L1& RL1 ≤ 0 4 0 A L disbyX C 1X D1
or & AL40 inhibition
XL1 ≤ tanAlpha40Al · RL1 & RL1 > 0

X C1 -X D1 Start
XC1 XD1
t XC1XD1-RES
UL1
Z L1, R L1, X L1 R L12 +(XL1 + XC1) 2≤ (XD1/ 2) 2
IL1L t XC1XD1-RES X C1 -X D1 ST-K
&

TRIPPING M ATRIX
0 T X C1 -X D1 ST-L

(LED+REL AYS)
R L12 +(XL1 - XC1) 2≤ (XD1/ 2) 2

UL1 ≥ 10%En t XC1XD1

IL1L ≥ 5%InL t XC1XD1

X C1 -X D1 TR-K
(ON≡Enable) T 0
Undervoltage enable ≥1 X C1 -X D1 TR-L
& RESET
Start undervoltage X C1 -X D1 Trip

=0 if 20≤f≤70 Hz
Block3
VT fault (74VT) ≥1
74VT Block
(=0 without fault)
X C1 -X D1 Start
Enable (ON≡Enable) &
Block1 X C1 -X D1 Trip & X C1 -X D1 Block1
&

Block1 Logic INx t ON INx t OFF

n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF Block1 input (ON≡Block)
n.o. Block1
T 0 0 T
Binary input INx
X C1 -X D1 Trip
BF Enable (ON≡Enable) & X C1 X D1 -BF towards BF logic
XC1XD1-BF
Logic diagram concerning the first threshold of the loss of field element - 40 Fun-40_S1.ai

104 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
— Negative sequence overcurrent for Generator protection - 46G

Preface
The machine may operate with an unbalanced load due to single-phase or non-linear loads, the trip-
ping of fuses, line interruption in one phase, asymmetric faults, tripping and unipolar reclosing on the
transmission lines.
Application
Protection of synchronous generators and motors. The unbalanced load creates a stator magnetic
field rotating contrariwise to the direction of rotation, which hence corresponds to a magnetic field
rotating at twice the speed with respect to the rotor. Hence, currents are induced at twice the fre-
quency in the rotor magnetic circuit (parasitic currents), the field windings and the damper windings,
responsible for increased loss of iron and copper and hence overheating of the machine.
The unbalanced load protective device estimates the inverse sequence current I2 from the phase
current readings on side L: it makes use of an a adjustable (I2AL>) and delayed (t 2AL >) time indepen-
dent alarm threshold and a thermal trip threshold with constant I2 2 t characteristics, developed so
as to optimally coordinate with the inverse sequence current limits which may be tolerated perma-
nently and for brief periods for each type of machine.
The thermal characteristic of the protective device is: t =Kheat /(I2 /IB) 2 where t is the trip time, mea-
sured from the point of exceeding the adjustable threshold I2 >>, Kheat is the machine thermal time
constant at the inverse sequence current and IB is the base current.
When the inverse sequence current I2 drops below the threshold I2 >>, the protective element resets
after an adjustable time delay Kcool /(I2 >>/IB)2 wherw Kcool is the cooling time constant of the pro-
tected machine at the inverse sequence current.

Operation and settings

The negative sequence current is computed as:

I2 =(IL1L+e-j120°·IL2L+e+j120°·IL3L )/3

where e-j120°=-1/2-j√3/2, ej120°=-1/2+j√3/2.

The negative sequence current is compared with the alarm setting value (I2AL>); currents above the
associated pickup value are detected and a start is issued and after expiry of the associated operate
time (t 2AL >, definite time) a trip command is issued; if instead the current drops below the threshold,
the element it restored.
The second threshold (I2 >>) inverse time according the I2 2 t characteristic curve:
• I-squared-t (I 2 t = K): t =Kheat /(I2 /IB) 2 (with I2 ≥ I2 >>)
Where:
t: operate time (t 2min ≤ t ≤ t 2max )
Kheat thermal time constant
IB base current[1]

t2AL>
TRIP

t 2 max

t 2 min

I2 AL > I 2 >> I 2 /I B
General operation characteristic for the negative sequence overcurrent element - 46G t-int-F46.ai

Note 1 Assuming that the secondary rated current of the line CT’s equals the rated current of the NG20 relay, as usually happens, the IB value is the
ratio between the rated current of the protected component (motor or generator) and the primary rated current of the CT’s Inp

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 105

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 The alarm threshold has a definite time characteristic.
If the inverse sequence current drops below the threshold, the element it is restored after a delay
time t = Kcool /(I2 >>/IB)2; in this way, the device makes use of a memory which allows the integration
of subsequent periods of excess and relapse of the trip threshold prior to reaching the trip time.

t START
I2 IB

I2 >>

Start I2 >>

Trip I2 >>

t 2MAX
Kheat

Conteggio
temporizzatore

Kcool Kcool Kcool Kcool

RESET

Operating time for the negative sequence overcurrent element - 46G

The maximum (t 2max ) and minimum (t 2min) operating time are adjustable; the counter may be cleared
by means an external command (serial communication, MMI or binary input).
The Reset timerI2 function must be assigned to the selected binary inputs inside the Set \ Board
1(2) inputs \ Binary input IN1-1...(IN1-x) menus.

All overcurrent elements can be enabled or disabled by setting ON or OFF the I2AL> Enable
and/or I2>> Enable parameters inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Negative sequence overcurrent
- 46G \ I2> Element (I2>> Element) menus.

The trip of I2AL > element may be inhibited by the start of the second element (I2 >>) by set-
ting ON the Disabling I2> by start I2>> (I2>disbyI2>>) parameter available inside the
Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Negative sequence overcurrent-46G \ I2>> Element menu.

I2 >> Enable I2 >> inv Kheat Kcool t 2MIN t 2MAX I2AL > Enable I2AL>def t 2AL>def

I2 >> Element I2AL Element

I2 I2 >> Start I2 I2AL > Start
I2 >> Trip I2AL > Trip

I2 >> Trip I2AL > inhibi t ion

Block1 Block1 Block1 Block1

Block3 I2 >>BF Block3

Logic diagram concerning the negative sequence overcurrent element - 46G all-F21.ai

All the parameters can be set separately for Profile A and Profile B menus.
Breaker failure (BF)
The trip element can produce the Breaker Failure output if the I2>> BF parameters are set to ON.
The parameters are available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ negative sequence overcurrent - 46G
\ I2>> Element menu.[1]

CT supervision (74CT
The protection element is blocked off whenever the CT supervision function is active, so
that no unwanted trip can arise if any fault on the CTs secondary circuits are detect;[2]
the Block functions enable from 74CT parameter (74CT-BK-EN) is available inside the
Set \ VT supervision - 74VT, and Set \ CT supervision - 74CT menus.
Note 1 The common settings concerning the Breaker failure protection are adjustable inside the Breaker Failure - BF menu.
Note 2 The exhaustive treatment of the VT and CT supervision function may be found inside the CONTROL AND MONITORING section.

106 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 I2AL> Start
ON≡Enable IAL > element
I 2AL > Enable
I 2AL >ST-K

TRIPPING M ATRIX
(LED+REL AYS)
I 2AL >ST-L
I 2AL>def
t 2AL>def

I2 & t 2AL>def
I2 >≥ IAL > (ON≡Inhibit) I 2AL >TR-K
I2>> Trip T 0
I 2AL >>TR-L
=0 if 20≤f≤70 Hz ≥1 RESET
Block3 I2AL> Trip
I 2AL > Start
Enable (ON≡Enable) &
Block1 I 2AL > Trip & I2AL> Block1
&

Block1 Logic INx t ON INx t OFF

n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF Block1 input (ON≡Block)
n.o. Block1
T 0 0 T
Binary input INx

Logic diagram concerning the Alarm threshold of the negative sequence overcurrent element - 46G Fun-F46G_AL.ai

Logical block (Block1)

If the I2AL>BLK1 and/or I2>>BLK1 enabling parameters are set to ON and a binary input is
designed for logical block (Block1), the concerning element is blocked off whenever the given input
is active.[1] The enabling parameters are available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Negative se-
quence overcurrent - 46G \ I2AL> Element (I2>> Element) menus, while the Block1 function must
be assigned to the selected binary input inside the Set \ Board1(2) inputs \ Binary input IN1-1...INx-x
menus.
I>>ST-K

TRIPPING M ATRIX
(LED+REL AYS)
I>>ST-L
ON≡Enable I 2 >> element IB K heat t 2max t 2min K cool
I 2 >> Enable I2>> Start=OFF I2 >> inv

I2 I>>TR-K
T 0 0 T
I2 >> inv I2>> Start=ON I>>TR-L
RESET

I2>> Start I2>> Trip

I2 &
I2 ≥ I2 >> inv
=0 if 20≤f≤70 Hz
Block3
I2>> Start

Reset LEDs Logic INx t ON INx t OFF

n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF
n.o. T 0 0 T ≥1
Binary input INx

Enable (ON≡Enable)
I2>>BLK1
&
I2>> Start & I2>> Block1
&
Block1 Logic INx t ON INx t OFF I2>> Trip

n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF

n.o. Block1
T 0 0 T
Binary input INx
Block1
I2>> Trip
BF Enable (ON≡Enable) & I2>> BF towards BF logic
I2>>BF

Logic diagram concerning the trip threshold of the negative sequence overcurrent element - 46G Fun-F46G_S1.ai

All the parameters can be set separately for Profile A and Profile B.
Block3
The 46G element is disabled (with start of cooling timer) when:
• the measured frequency becomes lower than 20 Hz or higher than 70 Hz or
• all the phase voltages UL1, UL2 , UL3 are lower than 1% En or
• all the phase currents IL1, IL2 , IL3 are lower than 15% In.

Note 1 The exhaustive treatment of the logical block (Block 1) function may be found in the “Logic Block” paragraph inside CONTROL AND MONITOR-
ING section

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 107

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 t [s]
10000

I2>> = 0.05 IB

1000

t 2MAX = 500 s

100

Kheat = 40.0 s
10

Kheat = 10.0 s

Kheat = 5.0 s

Kheat = 1.0 s

1 Kheat = 0.5 s

Kheat = 0.1 s

0.1
t 2MIN = 0.07 s

0.01
0.01 0.02 0.03 0.05 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 1 2 3 4 5 10 20 30 50 100
I2 /IB
Operating characteristic concerning the negative sequence element (46G) - with following settings>
- Trip threshold: I2 >> = 0.05 IB
- Minimum operating time: t 2 MIN = 0.07 s
- Maximum operating time: t 2 MAX = 500 s
F_46G-I2t005-Char.ai
- Heating time constant: Kheat = 0.1...40.0 s

108 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 t [s]
10000

I2>> = 0.50 IB

1000

Kheat = 40.0 s

t 2MIN = 100 s
100

Kheat = 10.0 s

Kheat = 5.0 s

10 Kheat = 1.0 s

Kheat = 0.5 s

Kheat = 0.1 s

0.1

0.01
0.01 0.02 0.03 0.05 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 1 2 3 4 5 10 20 30 50 100
I2 /IB
Operating characteristic concerning the negative sequence element (46G) - with following settings>
- Trip threshold: I2 >> = 0.50 IB
- Minimum operating time: t 2 MIN = 100 s
- Heating time constant: Kheat = 0.1...40.0 s
The maximum operating time is unmeaningful F_46G-I2t05-Char.ai

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 109

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
— Negative sequence overcurrent for motor protection - 46M
Preface
The motor may operate with an unbalanced load due to single-phase or non-linear loads, the trip-
ping of fuses, line interruption in one phase, asymmetric faults, tripping and unipolar reclosing on the
transmission lines.
The unbalanced load creates a stator magnetic field rotating contrariwise to the direction of rotation,
which hence corresponds to a magnetic field rotating at twice the speed with respect to the rotor.
Hence, currents are induced at twice the frequency in the rotor magnetic circuit (parasitic currents),
the field windings and the damper windings, responsible for increased loss of iron and copper and
hence overheating of the machine.
The unbalanced load protective device estimates the inverse sequence current I2 from the
phase current readings on side L; two operation thresholds, independently adjustable (I2 >,
I2 >>) with adjustable delay (t 2 >, t 2 >>) are available.
The first one may be programmed with definite or inverse time according the IEC and ANSI/IEEE
standard, as well as with I2t or EM curve.
The second threshold has a definite time characteristic.
For each threshold a reset time can be set (t 2>RES, t 2>>RES) useful to reduce the clearing time for
intermittent faults.
The first threshold trip may be inhibited by start of the second threshold (I2 >>).

Operation and settings

The negative sequence current is computed as:

I2 =(IL1L+e-j120°·IL2L+e+j120°·IL3L )/3

where e-j120°=-1/2-j√3/2, ej120°=-1/2+j√3/2.

The negative sequence current is compared with the setting values. Currents above the associated
pickup value are detected and a start is issued. After expiry of the associated operate time (t 2 >, t 2 >>)
a trip command is issued; if instead the current drops below the threshold, the element is restored.
The first threshold (I2 >) may be programmed with definite or inverse time according the following
characteristic curves:
• Standard Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type A or SIT): t = 0.14 · t 2 >inv / [(I2 /I2 >inv)0.02 - 1
• Very Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type B or VIT): t = 13.5 · t 2 >inv / [(I2 /I2 >inv) - 1]
• Extremely Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type C or EIT): t = 80 · t 2 >inv / [(I2 /I2 >inv)2 - 1]
• Moderately Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type MI): t = t 2 >inv · {0.01 / [(I2 /I2 >inv)0.02 - 1] + 0.023}
• Very Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type VI): t = t 2 >inv · {3.922 / [(I2 /I2 >inv)2 - 1] + 0.098}
• Extremely Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type EI): t = t 2 >inv · {5.64 / [(I2 /I2 >inv)2 - 1] + 0.024}
• I-squared-t (I 2 t = K): t = 16 · t 2 >inv / (I2 /I2 >inv)2
• Electromechanical (EM): t = t 2 >inv · {0.28 / [-0236 · (I2 /I2 >inv)-1 + 0.339]}
Where:
t: operate time
I2 >inv : threshold setting
t 2 >inv : operate time setting

The second threshold has a definite time characteristic.

t t-int-F46.ai

t2> TRIP

t 2 >>

I2> I 2 >> I2
General operation time characteristic curve for the negative sequence overcurrent element - 46M
For all inverse time characteristics, following data applies:
• Asymptotic reference value (minimum pickup value): 1.1 I2 >inv
• Minimum operate time: 0.1 s
• Range where the equation is valid:[1] 1.1 ≤ I2 /I2 >inv ≤ 20

For all definite time elements the upper limit for measuring is 50 In.

All overcurrent elements can be enabled or disabled by setting ON or OFF the I2> Enable and/or
I2>> Enable parameters inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Negative sequence overcurrent - 46 \
I2> Element (I2>> Element) \ Setpoints menus.

Note 1 When the input value is more than 20 times the set point , the operate time is limited to the value corresponding to 20 times the set point

110 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 The first overcurrent element can be programmed with definite or inverse time characteristic by
setting the I2>Curve parameter (DEFINITE, IEC/BS A, IEC/BS B, IEC/BS C, ANSI/IEE MI,
ANSI/IEE VI, ANSI/IEE EI, I2t, EM) available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Negative sequence
overcurrent - 46 \ I2> Element \ Setpoints menu.
The trip of I2 > element may be inhibited by the start of the second element (I2 >>) by set-
ting ON the Disable I2> by start I2>> (I2>disbyI2>>) parameter available inside the
Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Negative sequence overcurrent-46 \ I2>> Element \ Setpoints menu.
All the parameters can be set separately for Profile A and Profile B (Set \ Profile
A(or B) \ Negative sequence overcurrent - 46 \ I2> Element (I2>> Element) \ Setpoints menus).
An adjustable reset time delay is provided for every threshold (t 2 > RES, t 2 >> RES).

INPUT

t 2 > RES t 2 > RES t 2 > RES

I2> Start
t2> t2>

I2> Trip

RESET
t
I2> element timers - 46M Timers-F46M.ai

Each element can produce the Breaker Failure output if the I2> BF and/or I2>> BF parameters
are set to ON. The parameters are available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ negative sequence
overcurrent - 46 \ I2> Element (I2>> Element) \ Setpoints menus.[1]

I2> Enable I2>Curve t2CLP> t2>RES I2> def I2CLP> def t2> def I2> inv I2CLP> inv t2> inv

I2> Element
Start I2>
I2 I2CLP>Mode Trip I2>

Change setting
OFF CLPI2>
Starting control set I2>BF
Element blocking
I2>BF
Trip I2> &
I2>BLK1 Start I2>
BLK1I2>
&
&
Block1
I2>BLK2IN Start I2>
BLK2INI2>
&
&
Block2
I2>BLK2OUT
I2> inhibition BLK2OUT
Start I2> &

I2>> Enable t2CLP>> t2>>RES I2>> def I2CLP>> def t2>> def

I2>> Element Start I2>>

I2 I2CLP>>Mode Trip I2>>
I2> disbyI>>
Change setting CLPI2>>
Starting control set OFF
&
Element blocking
I2>>BF Start I2>>

I2>> Trip I2>>BF

&
I2>>BLK1 Start I2>>
BLK1I2>>
Block1 &
&
I2>>BLK2IN Start I2>>
BLK2INI>>
&
Block2 &
I2>>BLK2OUT
BLK2OUT
Start I2>> &

General logic diagram of the negative sequence overcurrent elements - 46M all-F46M.ai

Note 1 The common settings concerning the Breaker failure protection are adjustable inside the Breaker Failure - BF menu.

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 111

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 If the CLP function (Cold Load Pick-up) is enabled for element blocking, the selected threshold may
be blocked for an adjustable time interval, starting from the starting control criterion (circuit breaker
closure or IRUN threshold).
This operating mode may be select by setting ON-Element blocking the I2CLP> Mode and/or
I2CLP>> Mode parameters.
If the CLP function (Cold Load Pick-up) is enabled for threshold change, the selected threshold may
be changed for an adjustable time interval, starting from the starting control criterion (circuit breaker
closure or IRUN threshold).
This operating mode may be select by setting ON-Change setting the I2CLP> Mode and/or
I2CLP>> Mode parameters, whereas the operating thresholds within the CLP may be adjust-
ed inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Negative sequence overcurrent - 46M \ I2> Element,(I2>> Ele-
ment) \ Definite time (Inverse time) menus.
For both operating modes the CLP Activation time parameters (t2CLP>, t2CLP>>) may be ad-
justed inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Negative sequence overcurrent - 46M \ I2> Element (I2>>
Element) \ Setpoints menus.
Starting control
If the CLP Source parameter is set to IRUN and the maximum value of phase currents is lower than
0.1 IB, the protection is blocked off or the threshold is changed depending on the I2CLP> Mode
and/or I2CLP>> Mode setting.
If the CLP Source parameter is set to CB and the circuit breaker is open, the protection is blocked
off or the threshold is changed depending on the I2CLP> Mode and/or I2CLP>> Mode setting.
The CLP Source parameter is common for profiles A and B.

For both thresholds the following block criteria are available:

Logical block (Block1)
If the I2>BLK1 and/or I2>>BLK1 enabling parameters are set to ON and a binary input is de-
signed for logical block (Block1), the concerning element is blocked off whenever the given input is
active.[1] The enabling parameters are available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Negative sequence
overcurrent - 46M \ I2> Element (I2>> Elemen) \ Setpoints menus, while the Block1 function must
be assigned to the selected binary input inside the Set \ Board1(2) inputs \ Binary input IN1-1...INx-x
menus.

Selective block (Block2)

All along the protective elements the selective block may be set.
The logic selectivity function may be performed by means any combination of the following I/O:
• One committed pilot wire input (BLIN1).
• One or more binary inputs designed for input selective block.
• One committed pilot wire output (BLOUT1).
• One or more output relays designed for output selective block.
Only when the committed pilot wire are used the continuity check of the pilot wire link is active.

Use of committed pilot wire input BLIN1:

• The protection is blocked off according the selectivity block criteria when the input BLIN1 is active.
The information about phase or phase+earth block may be select programming the ModeBLIN1
parameter inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Selective block-BLOCK2 \ Selective block IN menus.

Use of binary inputs:

• If the I2>BLK2IN and/or I2>>BLK2IN parameters are set to ON and a binary input is de-
signed for selective block (Block2), the protection is blocked off by phase elements (Block2 Iph)
or by any protection element (Block2 Iph/IE) according the selectivity block criteria.[2] The enable
I2>BLK2IN and/or I2>>BLK2IN parameters are available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \
Negative sequence overcurrent - 46M \ I2> Element (I2>> Element) \ Setpoints menus, while the
Block2 Iph and Block2 Iph/IE functions must be assigned to the selected binary inputs inside
the Set \ Board 1(2) inputs \ Binary input IN1-1...(IN1-x) menus.

Use of committed pilot wire output BLOUT1:

• The information about phase or phase+earth block may be select programming the ModeBLOUT1
parameter (OFF - ON IPh - ON IPh/IE - ON IE) inside Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Selective block-
BLOCK2 \ Selective block OUT menus.

Use of output relay:

• If the I2>BLK2OUT and/or I2>>BLK2OUT enable parameters are set to ON and a output relay
is designed for selective block (Block2), the protection issues a block output by phase elements
(BLK2OUT-Iph) or by any protection element (BLK2OUT-Iph/IE), whenever the given element (Start
I>, Start I>> e/o Start I>>>) becomes active. The enable I2>BLK2OUT and/or I2>>BLK2OUT
parameters (ON or OFF) are available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Negative sequence over-
current - 46M \ I2> Element (I2>> Element) \ Setpoints menus, while the BLK2OUT-Iph-K,
BLK2OUT-Iph/IE-K and/or BLK2OUT-IE-K output relays and LEDs (BLK2OUT-Iph-L, BLK-
2OUT-Iph/IE-L e/o BLK2OUT-IE-L) must be select inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Selective
block-BLOCK2 \ Selective block OUT menu.
Note 1 The exhaustive treatment of the logical block (Block 1) function may be found in the “Logic Block” paragraph inside CONTROL AND MONITOR-
ING section
Note 2 The exhaustive treatment of the selective block (Block 2) function may be found in the “Selective Block” paragraph inside CONTROL AND
MONITORING section

112 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 ON≡Enable I2> overcurrent element
I2> Enable
ON≡Inhibit (from I2>> element)
I2> inhibition

Start I2>
I 2 > def

I 2 ≥ I 2 > def I2>ST-K

I2>ST-L

TRIPPING M ATRIX
(LED+REL AYS)
(Pickup outside CLP)
I 2 > inv ≥1 t 2 >inv
I 2 > Curve t 2 >RES
I2 t 2 >def
I 2 ≥ I 2 > inv t 2 >RES
& t 2>
T 0 0 T I2>TR-K
I 2C L P >def I 2 C L P >inv T 0 I2>TR-L
RESET
(Pickup within CLP)
I 2 ≥ I 2C LP > def (inv )
Trip I2>
A
A = ON - Change setting
B
t2CLP> C

A A
t2CLP> Output t2CLP> B B B = OFF
Starting control set C C
T 0
A
B
C C = ON - Element blocking
A = ON - Change setting
B = OFF
C = ON - Element blocking ≥1 ≥1
I2CLP>Mode

I2> Negative sequence overcurrent element (46) block diagram

Block1, Block2

Trip I2>
BF Enable (ON≡Enable) & I2> BF towards BF logic
I2>BF

Starting control set

I R UN = 0.1IB C L P source

CB-State S t ar t ing de t ec t ion

IL1...IL3
M a x[ IL1...IL3] ≥ IRUN
+UAUX

M R E nable
Motor restart Logic INx t ON INx t OFF
Rese t C L P t imer
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF &
-UAUX n.o. T 0 0
Binary input INx Motor restart

IRUN M a x [ IL1...IL3] ≥ IRUN M a x [ IL1...IL3] < IRUN M a x[ IL1...IL3] ≥ IRUN

S t ar t ing
de t ec t ion
CB State CB OPEN CB CLOSED CB OPEN CB CLOSED

t CLP 0.1 s t CLP

Output t CLP

Restarting
t

HIGH THRESHOLD/ LOW THRESHOLD/ HIGH THRESHOLD/ LOW TH. HIGH THRESHOLD/ LOW TH.
BLOCK UNBLOCK BLOCK UNBLOCK BLOCK UNBLOCK

Negative sequence overcurrent (46M) - Logic diagram of the first threshold (I2>) Fun-F46_S1.ai

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 113

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 Start I 2 >
&
Enable (ON≡Enable)
I2>BLK1 Trip I 2 > & BLK1I2>
&

Block1 Logic INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 Block1, Block2

n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF
n.o. Block1
T 0 0 T
Binary input INx & BLK2IN I2>
Block1

Block2 input enable (ON≡Enable)

I2>BLK2IN
&
ModeBLIN1 BLK2IN-Iph
OFF
BLIN1 ON IPh
Pilot wire input ON IPh/IE

TRIPPING M ATRIX
(LED+REL AYS)
ON IE Iph Block2
FROM PHASE PROTECTIONS tB-K
tB-L
Logic t B-Iph
INx t ON INx t OFF
Block2 IPh
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 t B-Iph
≥1
n.o. T 0 0 T 0 T ≥1 tB timeout
Binary input INx

FROM ANY PROTECTIONS

Logic INx t ON INx t OFF t B-IE

Block2 IPh/IE
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 t B-IE
≥1 BLK2IN-IE
n.o. T 0 0 T 0 T
Binary input INx

FROM EARTH FAULT PROTECTIONS

Logic INx t ON INx t OFF

Block2 IE
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 IE Block2
n.o. T 0 0 T
Binary input INx
Block2 input

Start I2>
I2> Block2 OUT ST-Iph BLK2 BLK2OUT-Iph
Block2 output &
BLK2OUT-IPh-K
I2>BLK2OUT
TRIPPING M ATRIX

(ON≡Enable)
(LED+REL AYS)

t F-IPh BLK2OUT-IPh-L
BLK2OUT-IE
t F-IPh BLK2OUT-IE-K
All other BLK2OUT outputs ≥1 t F-IPh/IE
0 T BLK2OUT-IE-L
of phase elements BLK2OUT-Iph/IE
t F-IPh/IE BLK2OUT-IPh/IE-K
(see BLK2OUT chapter) ≥1
0 T BLK2OUT-IPh/IE-L
A = OFF
t F-IE B = ON IPh
ModeBLOUT1 C = ON IPh/IE
All BLK2OUT outputs D = ON IE
t F-IE A
of ground elements ≥1 B BLOUT1
0 T Pilot wire output
(see BLK2OUT chapter) C
ST-IE BLK2 D
Block2 output

46MS1_BL-diagram.ai

Negative sequence overcurrent (46M) - Logic diagram of the blocking signals concerning the first element (I2>)

114 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 ON≡Enable I2> overcurrent element
I2> Enable
ON≡Inhibit (from I2>> element)
I2> inhibition

Start I2>
I 2 > def

I 2 ≥ I 2 > def I2>ST-K

I2>ST-L

TRIPPING M ATRIX
(LED+REL AYS)
(Pickup outside CLP)
I 2 > inv ≥1 t 2 >inv
I 2 > Curve t 2 >RES
I2 t 2 >def
I 2 ≥ I 2 > inv t 2 >RES
& t 2>
T 0 0 T I2>TR-K
I 2C L P >def I 2 C L P >inv T 0 I2>TR-L
RESET
(Pickup within CLP)
I 2 ≥ I 2C LP > def (inv )
Trip I2>
A
A = ON - Change setting
B
t2CLP> C

A A
t2CLP> Output t2CLP> B B B = OFF
Starting control set C C
T 0
A
B
C C = ON - Element blocking
A = ON - Change setting
B = OFF
C = ON - Element blocking ≥1 ≥1
I2CLP>Mode

I2> Negative sequence overcurrent element (46) block diagram

Block1, Block2

Trip I2>
BF Enable (ON≡Enable) & I2> BF towards BF logic
I2>BF

Starting control set

I R UN = 0.1IB C L P source

CB-State S t ar t ing de t ec t ion

IL1...IL3
M a x[ IL1...IL3] ≥ IRUN
+UAUX

M R E nable
Motor restart Logic INx t ON INx t OFF
Rese t C L P t imer
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF &
-UAUX n.o. T 0 0
Binary input INx Motor restart

IRUN M a x [ IL1...IL3] ≥ IRUN M a x [ IL1...IL3] < IRUN M a x[ IL1...IL3] ≥ IRUN

S t ar t ing
de t ec t ion
CB State CB OPEN CB CLOSED CB OPEN CB CLOSED

t CLP 0.1 s t CLP

Output t CLP

Restarting
t

HIGH THRESHOLD/ LOW THRESHOLD/ HIGH THRESHOLD/ LOW TH. HIGH THRESHOLD/ LOW TH.
BLOCK UNBLOCK BLOCK UNBLOCK BLOCK UNBLOCK

Negative sequence overcurrent (46M) - Logic diagram of the second threshold (I2>>) Fun-F46M_S2.ai

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 115

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 Start I 2 >>
&
Enable (ON≡Enable)
I2>>BLK1 Trip I 2 >> & BLK1I2>>
&

Block1 Logic INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 Block1, Block2

n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF
n.o. Block1
T 0 0 T
Binary input INx & BLK2IN I2>>
Block1

Block2 input enable (ON≡Enable)

I2>>BLK2IN
&
ModeBLIN1 BLK2IN-Iph
OFF
BLIN1 ON IPh
Pilot wire input ON IPh/IE

TRIPPING M ATRIX
(LED+REL AYS)
ON IE Iph Block2
FROM PHASE PROTECTIONS tB-K
tB-L
Logic t B-Iph
INx t ON INx t OFF
Block2 IPh
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 t B-Iph
≥1
n.o. T 0 0 T 0 T ≥1 tB timeout
Binary input INx

FROM ANY PROTECTIONS

Logic INx t ON INx t OFF t B-IE

Block2 IPh/IE
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 t B-IE
≥1 BLK2IN-IE
n.o. T 0 0 T 0 T
Binary input INx

FROM EARTH FAULT PROTECTIONS

Logic INx t ON INx t OFF

Block2 IE
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 IE Block2
n.o. T 0 0 T
Binary input INx
Block2 input

Start I2>
I2>> Block2 OUT ST-Iph BLK2 BLK2OUT-Iph
Block2 output &
BLK2OUT-IPh-K
I2>>BLK2OUT
TRIPPING M ATRIX
(LED+REL AYS)

(ON≡Enable) t F-IPh BLK2OUT-IPh-L

BLK2OUT-IE
t F-IPh BLK2OUT-IE-K
All other BLK2OUT outputs ≥1 t F-IPh/IE
0 T BLK2OUT-IE-L
of phase elements BLK2OUT-Iph/IE
t F-IPh/IE BLK2OUT-IPh/IE-K
(see BLK2OUT chapter) ≥1
0 T BLK2OUT-IPh/IE-L
A = OFF
t F-IE B = ON IPh
ModeBLOUT1 C = ON IPh/IE
All BLK2OUT outputs D = ON IE
t F-IE A
of ground elements ≥1 B BLOUT1
0 T Pilot wire output
(see BLK2OUT chapter) C
ST-IE BLK2 D
Block2 output
46MS2_BL-diagram.ai

Negative sequence overcurrent (46M) - Logic diagram of the blocking signals concerning the second element (I2>>)

116 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
— Phase rotation direction check - 47
Preface
The starting of synchronous motors is inhibited when the 47 function becomes active.
The element can be enabled or disabled.

Operation and settings

The positive sequence voltage is computed as:
U1=(UL1+e+j120°·UL2+e-j120°·UL3)/3

with e-j120°=-1/2-j√3/2, ej120°=-1/2+j√3/2.

The positive sequence voltage is compared with the setting threshold (Us1<); voltages lower than
the associated pickup value are detected and a start is issued if all the phase-to-phase voltages are
larger than an adjustable threshold (Us >).
The element can be enabled or disabled by setting ON or OFF the 47Enable parameter inside the
Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Phase rotation direction check 47 \ 47 Element \ Setpoints menu.

ON≡Enable 47 element
47 Enable

US>

U12

TRIPPING M ATRIX
U12 ≥ U S >

(LED+REL AYS)
U23 & 47TR-K
&
47TR-L
U31

U S1<
Trip 47
U1
U 1≤ U S1<

Enable (ON≡Enable)
47BLK1
& BLK147

Block1 Logic INx t ON INx t OFF

n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF
n.o. Block1
T 0 0 T
Binary input INx

Phase rotation direction check - 47 Fun-F47_S1.ai

Logical block (Block1)

If the 47BLK1 enabling parameter is set to ON and a binary input is designed for logical block
(Block1), the element is blocked off whenever the given input is active.[1]
The enabling parameter is available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Phase rotation direction check
47 \ 47 Element \ Setpoints menu, while the Block1 function must be assigned to the selected binary
input inside the Set \ Board1(2) inputs \ Binary input IN1-1...INx-x menu.

Note 1 The exhaustive treatment of the logical block (Block 1) function may be found in the “Logic Block” paragraph inside CONTROL AND MONITOR-
ING section

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 117

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
— Thermal image - 49MG for motor or generator protection
Preface
The phase currents (true RMS) are used into an algorithm reproducing a thermal replica according
the IEC 60255-8 standard taking into account the Joule losses and the cooling effect due to the load
reduction; in this way the previous history and the overload are taken into account. The thermal pro-
tection keeps the information of the motor’s heating state due both to the variations of the load condi-
tions, which cause thermal accumulations, and to balanced and unbalanced overload currents.
The measurement of the thermal image by the total memory module therefore extends the protection
criterion in the various operating conditions that may thermally load the motor over the maximum
allowed temperature for continuous service:
• long-lasting overloads,
• too frequent starts and stops,
• running on a voltage below the rated value,
• too long starts,
• mechanic faults.
Since in case of unbalanced input the heating due to the negative sequence component exceeds
that due to the positive sequence, the thermal image unit computes as well the heating contribute of
the unbalanced input current with an adjustable weighting factor K2 . The thermal protection can be
adapted to the different features of motors by setting the thermal heating T+ and cooling T- constants
( the T+ constant refers to motor running condition, while the T- constant, always higher than T+,
refers to stopped condition). These values must be declared by the manufacturer.

Dθ [p.u.] Dθ [p.u.]
1 1

0.6 3 [p.u.] Cooling

Heating
0. 3 6 [p.u.]

T+ t T- t
Heating and cooling time constants for the thermal image elements - 49 heat-cool.ai

Furthermore an adjustable initial thermal image value may be preset (by means of ThySetter, binary
input or keyboard commands.
The trip element has an adjustable threshold; with 1.2 DθB setting (ie 1.2 times the overtemperature
corresponding to the nominal operation condition) the corresponding tripping current IB is 1.1 since
the temperature rise is proportional to the square of the current.
The 49 element is provided with two further thresholds DθAL1 and DθAL2, lower than the previous one.
These thresholds, both adjustable, provide an alarm signal to draw attention in the event of anoma-
lous heating, without switching off the motor. One of the above thresholds can be used to prevent
motor starting when heating approaches the trip conditions since the additional heating brought on
by the starting currents would cause the protection to operate.
Operation and settings
The thermal current used for thermal image calculation is:
Ith = √[(max (IL1rms, IL2rms, IL3rms))2+K2·I22]
where IL1rms, IL2rms, IL3rms are the true RMS value of the phase currents on side L, computed tack-
ing account the contribution of the harmonics up to eleventh order.
where the negative and positive sequence currents are computed as:
I1=(IL1L+ej120°·IL2L+e-j120°·IL3L )/3 and I2 =(IL1L+e-j120°·IL2L+e+j120°·IL3L )/3
with e-j120° = -1/2-j√3/2, ej120° = -1/2+j√3/2.
Over the start of the motor, the thermal equivalent current counted for the thermal image is:
Ith = {√[(max (IL1rms, IL2rms, IL3rms))2+K2·I22]} / KST
where KST is an adjustable parameter (1.0...3.0), that lowers the thermal equivalent current during the
start if the setting change mode is selected.
According to a single-body thermal model, the thermal image is based on the differential equation:
dDθ/dt + Dθ/T+ = (Ith /IB)2/T+
where Dθ is the system thermal state as a percentage of base thermal capacity DθB corresponding
to the base current IB[1] and T+ is the heating thermal time constant
During the time that the motor stops running, when the equivalent thermal current goes down the
threshold 0.1IB, the thermal image is computed as:
dDθ/dt + Dθ/T- = 0, where T- is the cooling constant.
The operating characteristic (IEC 60255-8) is:
t =T · ln{[(Ith /IB) 2 - Δθp /ΔθB)] / [(Ith /IB) 2 - Δθ>/ΔθB]}=T · ln{[(Ith /IB) 2 - (Ip /IB) 2] / [(Ith /IB) 2 - Δθ>/ΔθB] =
T · ln{[(Ith /IB) 2 - p2] / [(Ith /IB) 2 - Δθ>/ΔθB]} [1], where:
• t: operating time,
• ln: natural logarithm,
• Dθp and Ip are the thermal image and the corresponding equivalent thermal current before the
overload occurs,
• p=Ip /IB =√(Dθp /DθB: pre-load,
• Δθ>: threshold

Note 1 Assuming that the secondary rated current of the line CT’s equals the rated current of the relay, as usually happens, the IB value is the ratio
between the rated current of the protected component (line, transformer,...) and the primary rated current of the CT’s.

118 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 When the thermal image Dθ overcomes the threshold (e..g.Dθ> = 1.2 DθB corresponding to a thermal
equivalent current of 1.1IB), a trip is issued.

TRIP

p=0 (Hot curve)

p=1 (Cold curve)

Ith /IB
√(D th> / D thetaB)
General operation time characteristic for the thermal image elements - 49MG t-int-F49.ai

Following data applies for the [1]:

• Range where the equation is valid: 1.1IB ≤ Ith ≤ 10IB
• If 10IB ≤ Ith ≤ 20IB, the operating time is fixed to a value corresponding to the 10IB
• The upper limit is 20IB.
If the CLP function (Cold Load Pick-up) is enabled for element blocking, the element may be blocked
for an adjustable time interval, starting from the starting control criterion (circuit breaker closure or
IRUN threshold).
This operating mode may be select by setting ON-Element blocking the DThCLP Mode param-
eter inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Thermal image-49MG \ Common configuration menu.
If the CLP function (Cold Load Pick-up) is enabled for setting change, the equivalent thermal current
may be reduced by a KST starting overload coefficient for an adjustable time interval, starting from
the starting control criterion (circuit breaker closure or IRUN threshold).
This operating mode may be select by setting ON-Change setting the DThCLP Mode parameter
inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Thermal image-49MG \ Common configuration menu.
For both operating modes the DThCLP Activation time (tDThCLP) may be adjusted inside the Set \
Profile A(or B) \ Thermal image-49MG \ Common configuration menu.
Starting control
If the CLP Source parameter is set to IRUN and the maximum value of phase currents is lower than
0.1 IB, the protection is blocked off or the equivalent thermal current is decreased by a KST starting
overload coefficient depending on the DThCLP Mode setting.

KST K2 T+ T- DthCLP Mode tDthCLP DthIN

Common configuration

DTh> Enable DTh> DThAL1 Enable DThAL1 DThAL2 Enable DThAL2

Dth> Element DthAL1 Element DthAL2 Element

Ith Ith Ith
Trip DTh> DThAL1 DThAL2
Dth>disby50-51

&
50-51 inhibition DthAL1BLK1

Dth>BF & BLK1DthAL1

Block1 Dth>AL1 &
Dth>BF DthAL2BLK1
Trip DTh> &
Dth>BLK1 & BLK1DthAL2
Block1 Dth>AL2 &
& BLK1Dth>
Block1 Trip Dth> & DthAL1BLK2IN

& BLK2INDthAL1 DthAL2BLK2IN

Dth>BLK2IN Block2 &
DthAL1 & BLK2INDthAL2
& BLK2INDth> Block2 &
Block2 Trip Dth> & DthAL2

DthAL1BLK2OUT DthAL2BLK2OUT
Dth>BLK2OUT
BLK2OUT BLK2OUT
BLK2OUT DThAL1 & Dth>AL2 &
Trip Dth> &

General logic diagram of the thermal image elements - 49MG all-F49.ai

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 119

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 If the CLP Source parameter is set to CB and the circuit breaker is open, the protection is blocked
off or or the equivalent thermal current is decreased by a KST starting overload coefficient depend-
ing on the DThCLP Mode setting. The CLP Source parameter is common for profiles A and B
All elements can be enabled or disabled by setting ON or OFF the DThetaAL1 Enable, DTheta-
AL2 Enable and/or DTheta> Enable parameters inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Thermal image-
49MG \ DthAL1 Element (DthAL2 Element, Dth> Element) menus

The trip element (Dth>) may be inhibited when a start of at least one of the overcurrent element
(50/51) is active, if the Dth>disby50-51 parameter is set ON inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Ther-
mal image-49MG \ Dth> Element menu.

The DthIN parameter sets a minimum level of previous thermal image Dθp when the protection relay
is powered or when a remote (binary input) or local (keyboard or ThySetter) command is issued.
The DthIN parameter may be adjusted inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Thermal image-49MG \
Common configuration menu.
To active the DthIN preset value remotely, a binary input must be programmed as Init DTheta func-
tion inside the Set \ Board 1(2) inputs \ Binary input IN1-1...(IN1-x) menus.

The trip element can produce the Breaker Failure output if the Dth> BF parameters is set to ON. The
parameter is available inside the Set\Profile A(or B) \ Thermal image-49MG \ Dth> Element menu.[1]
The IB setting is adjustable inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Base current IB menu.

For every threshold the following block criteria are available:

Logical block (Block1)
If the DthAL1BLK1, DthAL2BLK1 and/or Dth>BLK1 enabling parameters are set to ON and a
binary input is designed for logical block (Block1), the concerning element is blocked off whenever
the given input is active.[2] The enabling parameters are available inside the Set\Profile A(or B)
\Thermal image-49MG \ DthAL1 Element (DthAL2 Element, Dth> Element) menus, while the Block1
function must be assigned to the selected binary input inside the Set \ Board1(2) inputs \ Binary input
IN1-1...INx-x menus.

Selective block (Block2)

All along the protective elements the selective block may be set.
The logic selectivity function may be performed by means any combination of the following I/O:
• One committed pilot wire input (BLIN1).
• One or more binary inputs designed for input selective block.
• One committed pilot wire output (BLOUT1).
• One or more output relays designed for output selective block.
Only when the committed pilot wire are used the continuity check of the pilot wire link is active.

Use of committed pilot wire input BLIN1:

• The protection is blocked off according the selectivity block criteria when the input BLIN1 is active.
The information about phase or phase+earth block may be select programming the ModeBLIN1
parameter inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Selective block-BLOCK2 \ Selective block IN menus.

Use of binary inputs:

• If the DthAL1BLK2IN, DthAL2BLK2IN and/or Dth>BLK2IN parameter are are set to ON and
a binary input is designed for selective block (Block2), the protection is blocked off by phase ele-
ments (Block2 Iph) or by any protection element (Block2 Iph/IE) according the selectivity block
criteria.[3] The enable DthAL1BLK2IN, DthAL2BLK2IN and/or Dth>BLK2IN parameters are
available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Thermal image-49MG \ DthAL1 Element, (DthAL2 Element,
Dth> Element) menus, while the Block2 Iph and Block2 Iph/IE functions must be assigned to the
selected binary inputs inside the Set \ Board1(2) inputs \ Binary input IN1-1...INx-x menus.

Use of committed pilot wire output BLOUT1:

• The information about phase or phase+earth block may be select programming the ModeBLOUT1
parameter inside Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Selective block-BLOCK2 \ Selective block OUT menus.

Use of output relay:

• If the DthAL1BLK2OUT, DthAL2BLK2OUT and/o Dth>BLK2OUT enable parameters are set
to ON and a output relay is designed for selective block (Block2), the protection issues a block
output by phase elements (BLK2OUT-Iph) or by any protection element (BLK2OUT-Iph/IE), when-
ever the given element (DthAL1, DthAL2 e/o Dth>) becomes active. The enable DthAL1BLK2OUT,
DthAL2BLK2OUT and/or Dth>BLK2OUT parameters are available inside the Set \ Profile A(or
B)\ Thermal image-49MG \ DthAL1 Element (DthAL2 Element, Dth> Element) menus, while the BLK-
2OUT-Iph-K, BLK2OUT-Iph/IE-K and/or BLK2OUT-IE-K output relays must be set inside the
Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Selective block-BLOCK2 \ Selective block OUT menus.

Note 1 The common settings concerning the Breaker failure protection are adjustable inside the Breaker Failure - BF menu.
Note 2 The exhaustive treatment of the logical block (Block 1) function may be found in the “Logic Block” paragraph inside CONTROL AND MONITOR-
ING section
Note 3 The exhaustive treatment of the selective block (Block 2) function may be found in the “Selective Block” paragraph inside CONTROL AND
MONITORING section

120 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 ON≡Enable element
DthAL1 Enable

Init DTheta Logic INx t ON INx t OFF

n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF
n.o. T 0 0 T
Binary input INx

Change Change Element DthAL1

setting setting blocking

T+ T- DthIN DthAL1

TRIPPING M ATRIX
(LED+REL AYS)
K2 A =“0” B or C
A =“1”
I1 I th dDθ/dt + Dθ/T+ = (Ith/IB)2/T+ DthAL1-K
(I th outside CLP) &
I2 I th = √I 1 2 +K 2 I 2 2 dDθ/dt + Dθ/T- = 0 DthAL1-L
Dθ ≥ DthAL1
K ST
(I th within CLP)
I th / K ST

A
A = ON - Change setting
B
t D t hC L P C
A A
t DthCLP Output t DthCLP B B B = OFF
Starting control set C C
T 0
A
B
C C = ON - Element blocking
A = ON - Change setting
B = OFF
C = ON - Element blocking ≥1 ≥1
DthCLPMode

DThAL1 thermal image (49) block diagram

Block1, Block2

Starting control set

I R UN = 0.1IB C L P source

CB-State S t ar t ing de t ec t ion

IL1...IL3
M a x[ IL1...IL3] ≥ IRUN
+UAUX

M R E nable
Motor restart Logic INx t ON INx t OFF
Rese t C L P t imer
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF &
-UAUX n.o. T 0 0
Binary input INx Motor restart

IRUN M a x [ IL1...IL3] ≥ IRUN M a x [ IL1...IL3] < IRUN M a x[ IL1...IL3] ≥ IRUN

Starting
control
CB State CB OPEN CB CLOSED CB OPEN CB CLOSED

t CLP 0.1 s t CLP

Output t CLP

Motor restart
t

HIGH THRESHOLD/ LOW THRESHOLD/ HIGH THRESHOLD/ LOW TH. HIGH THRESHOLD/ LOW TH.
BLOCK UNBLOCK BLOCK UNBLOCK BLOCK UNBLOCK

Thermal image (49MG) - Logic diagram of the first alarm threshold Fun_49_AL1.ai

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 121

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 Enable (ON≡Enable) DthAL1
DthAL1BLK1 & BLK1DthAL1
&

Block1 Logic INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 Block1, Block2

n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF
n.o. Block1
T 0 0 T
Binary input INx & BLK2IN DthAL1
Block1

Block2 input enable (ON≡Enable)

DThAL1BLK2IN
&
ModeBLIN1 BLK2IN-Iph
OFF
BLIN1 ON IPh
Pilot wire input ON IPh/IE

TRIPPING M ATRIX
(LED+REL AYS)
ON IE Iph Block2
FROM PHASE PROTECTIONS tB-K
tB-L
Logic t B-Iph
INx t ON INx t OFF
Block2 IPh
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 t B-Iph
≥1
n.o. T 0 0 T 0 T ≥1 tB timeout
Binary input INx

FROM ANY PROTECTIONS

Logic INx t ON INx t OFF t B-IE

Block2 IPh/IE
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 t B-IE
≥1 BLK2IN-IE
n.o. T 0 0 T 0 T
Binary input INx

FROM EARTH FAULT PROTECTIONS

Logic INx t ON INx t OFF

Block2 IE
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 IE Block2
n.o. T 0 0 T
Binary input INx
Block2 input

I2> Block2 OUT

I2>> Block2 OUT
ST-Iph BLK2 BLK2OUT-Iph
DthAL1 BLK2OUT-IPh-K
DthAL1 Block2 OUT
TRIPPING M ATRIX

Block2 output &

(LED+REL AYS)

DthAL2 Block2 OUT t F-IPh BLK2OUT-IPh-L

DthAL1BLK2OUT BLK2OUT-IE
(ON≡Enable) Dth Block2 OUT
≥1 t F-IPh BLK2OUT-IE-K
I> Block2 OUT t F-IPh/IE
I>> Block2 OUT 0 T BLK2OUT-IE-L
BLK2OUT-Iph/IE
I>>> Block2 OUT t F-IPh/IE BLK2OUT-IPh/IE-K
ILR > Block2 OUT ≥1
0 T BLK2OUT-IPh/IE-L
ILR >> Block2 OUT
IE > Block2 OUT A = OFF
IE >> Block2 OUT t F-IE B = ON IPh
ModeBLOUT1 C = ON IPh/IE
IE >>> Block2 OUT
t F-IE A D = ON IE
IED> Block2 OUT
≥1 B BLOUT1
IED>> Block2 OUT 0 T Pilot wire output
IED>>> Block2 OUT C
IED>>>> Block2 OUT ST-IE BLK2 D
Block2 output

Thermal image (49MG) - Logic diagram of the blocking signals concerning the first alarm element 49AL1_BL-diagram.ai

122 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 ON≡Enable element
DthAL2 Enable

Init DTheta Logic INx t ON INx t OFF

n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF
n.o. T 0 0 T
Binary input INx

Change Change Element DthAL2

setting setting blocking

T+ T- DthIN DthAL2

TRIPPING M ATRIX
(LED+REL AYS)
K2 A =“0” B or C
A =“1”
I1 dDθ/dt + Dθ/T+ = (Ith/IB)2/T+ DthAL2-K
I th (I th outside CLP) &
I2 I th = √I 1 2 +K 2 I 2 2 DthAL2-L
dDθ/dt + Dθ/T- = 0 Dθ ≥ DthAL2
K ST
(I th within CLP)
I th / K ST

A
A = ON - Change setting
B
t D t hC L P C
A A
t DthCLP Output t DthCLP B B B = OFF
Starting control set C C
T 0
A
B
C C = ON - Element blocking
A = ON - Change setting
B = OFF
C = ON - Element blocking ≥1 ≥1
DthCLPMode

DThAL2 thermal image (49) block diagram

Block1, Block2

Starting control set

I R UN = 0.1IB C L P source

CB-State S t ar t ing de t ec t ion

IL1...IL3
M a x[ IL1...IL3] ≥ IRUN
+UAUX

M R E nable
Motor restart Logic INx t ON INx t OFF
Rese t C L P t imer
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF &
-UAUX n.o. T 0 0
Binary input INx Motor restart

IRUN M a x [ IL1...IL3] ≥ IRUN M a x [ IL1...IL3] < IRUN M a x[ IL1...IL3] ≥ IRUN

Starting
control
CB State CB OPEN CB CLOSED CB OPEN CB CLOSED

t CLP 0.1 s t CLP

Output t CLP

Motor restart
t

HIGH THRESHOLD/ LOW THRESHOLD/ HIGH THRESHOLD/ LOW TH. HIGH THRESHOLD/ LOW TH.
BLOCK UNBLOCK BLOCK UNBLOCK BLOCK UNBLOCK

Thermal image (49) - Logic diagram of the second alarm threshold Fun_49_AL2.ai

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 123

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 Enable (ON≡Enable) DthAL2
DthAL2BLK1 & BLK1DthAL2
&

Block1 Logic INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 Block1, Block2

n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF
n.o. Block1
T 0 0 T
Binary input INx & BLK2IN DthAL2
Block1

Block2 input enable (ON≡Enable)

DThAL2BLK2IN
&
ModeBLIN1 BLK2IN-Iph
OFF
BLIN1 ON IPh
Pilot wire input ON IPh/IE

TRIPPING M ATRIX
(LED+REL AYS)
ON IE Iph Block2
FROM PHASE PROTECTIONS tB-K
tB-L
Logic t B-Iph
INx t ON INx t OFF
Block2 IPh
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 t B-Iph
≥1
n.o. T 0 0 T 0 T ≥1 tB timeout
Binary input INx

FROM ANY PROTECTIONS

Logic INx t ON INx t OFF t B-IE

Block2 IPh/IE
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 t B-IE
≥1 BLK2IN-IE
n.o. T 0 0 T 0 T
Binary input INx

FROM EARTH FAULT PROTECTIONS

Logic INx t ON INx t OFF

Block2 IE
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 IE Block2
n.o. T 0 0 T
Binary input INx
Block2 input

I2> Block2 OUT ST-Iph BLK2 BLK2OUT-Iph

I2>> Block2 OUT BLK2OUT-IPh-K
TRIPPING M ATRIX

DthAL1 Block2 OUT

(LED+REL AYS)

DthAL2 t F-IPh BLK2OUT-IPh-L

DthAL2 Block2 OUT BLK2OUT-IE
Block2 output & Dth Block2 OUT t F-IPh BLK2OUT-IE-K
DthAL2BLK2OUT ≥1
(ON≡Enable) I> Block2 OUT t F-IPh/IE
0 T BLK2OUT-IE-L
I>> Block2 OUT BLK2OUT-Iph/IE
I>>> Block2 OUT t F-IPh/IE BLK2OUT-IPh/IE-K
≥1
ILR > Block2 OUT 0 T BLK2OUT-IPh/IE-L
ILR >> Block2 OUT
IE > Block2 OUT A = OFF
IE >> Block2 OUT t F-IE B = ON IPh
ModeBLOUT1 C = ON IPh/IE
IE >>> Block2 OUT D = ON IE
t F-IE A
IED> Block2 OUT
≥1 B BLOUT1
IED>> Block2 OUT 0 T Pilot wire output
IED>>> Block2 OUT C
IED>>>> Block2 OUT ST-IE BLK2 D
Block2 output

Thermal image (49) - Logic diagram of the blocking signals concerning the second alarm element 49AL2_BL-diagram.ai

124 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 ON≡Enable element
Dth> Enable

Init DTheta Logic INx t ON INx t OFF

n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF
n.o. T 0 0 T
Binary input INx

Change Change Element Dth>

setting setting blocking

T+ T- DthIN Dth>

TRIPPING M ATRIX
(LED+REL AYS)
K2 A =“0” B or C
A =“1”
I1 dDθ/dt + Dθ/T+ = (Ith/IB)2/T+ Dth>-K
I th (I th outside CLP) &
I2 I th = √I 1 2 +K 2 I 2 2 Dth>-L
dDθ/dt + Dθ/T- = 0 Dθ ≥ Dth>
K ST
(I th within CLP)
I th / K ST

A
A = ON - Change setting
B
t D t hC L P C
A A
t DthCLP Output t DthCLP B B B = OFF
Starting control set C C
T 0
A
B
C C = ON - Element blocking
A = ON - Change setting
B = OFF
C = ON - Element blocking ≥1 ≥1
DthCLPMode

DTh> thermal image (49) block diagram

Block1, Block2

Trip Dth>
BF Enable (ON≡Enable) & Dth> BF towards BF logic
Dth>BF

Starting control set

I R UN = 0.1IB C L P source

CB-State S t ar t ing de t ec t ion

IL1...IL3
M a x[ IL1...IL3] ≥ IRUN
+UAUX

M R E nable
Motor restart Logic INx t ON INx t OFF
Rese t C L P t imer
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF &
-UAUX n.o. T 0 0
Binary input INx Motor restart

IRUN M a x [ IL1...IL3] ≥ IRUN M a x [ IL1...IL3] < IRUN M a x[ IL1...IL3] ≥ IRUN

Starting
control
CB State CB OPEN CB CLOSED CB OPEN CB CLOSED

t CLP 0.1 s t CLP

Output t CLP

Motor restart
t

HIGH THRESHOLD/ LOW THRESHOLD/ HIGH THRESHOLD/ LOW TH. HIGH THRESHOLD/ LOW TH.
BLOCK UNBLOCK BLOCK UNBLOCK BLOCK UNBLOCK

Thermal image (49MG) - Logic diagram of the trip threshold Fun_49MG_Dth.ai

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 125

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 Dth>
Enable (ON≡Enable)
Dth>BLK1 & BLK1Dth>
&

Block1 Logic INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 Block1, Block2

n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF
n.o. Block1
T 0 0 T
Binary input INx & BLK2IN Dth>
Block1

Block2 input enable (ON≡Enable)

DTh>BLK2IN
&
ModeBLIN1 BLK2IN-Iph
OFF
BLIN1 ON IPh
Pilot wire input ON IPh/IE

TRIPPING M ATRIX
(LED+REL AYS)
ON IE Iph Block2
FROM PHASE PROTECTIONS tB-K
tB-L
Logic t B-Iph
INx t ON INx t OFF
Block2 IPh
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 t B-Iph
≥1
n.o. T 0 0 T 0 T ≥1 tB timeout
Binary input INx

FROM ANY PROTECTIONS

Logic INx t ON INx t OFF t B-IE

Block2 IPh/IE
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 t B-IE
≥1 BLK2IN-IE
n.o. T 0 0 T 0 T
Binary input INx

FROM EARTH FAULT PROTECTIONS

Logic INx t ON INx t OFF

Block2 IE
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 IE Block2
n.o. T 0 0 T
Binary input INx
Block2 input

I2> Block2 OUT

I2>> Block2 OUT
ST-Iph BLK2 BLK2OUT-Iph
DthAL1 Block2 OUT
BLK2OUT-IPh-K
TRIPPING M ATRIX
(LED+REL AYS)

DthAL2 Block2 OUT t F-IPh BLK2OUT-IPh-L

Dth> BLK2OUT-IE
Dth Block2 OUT
t F-IPh BLK2OUT-IE-K
Block2 output & I> Block2 OUT ≥1
Dth>BLK2OUT 0 T t F-IPh/IE BLK2OUT-IE-L
(ON≡Enable) I>> Block2 OUT BLK2OUT-Iph/IE
I>>> Block2 OUT t F-IPh/IE BLK2OUT-IPh/IE-K
ILR > Block2 OUT ≥1
0 T BLK2OUT-IPh/IE-L
ILR >> Block2 OUT
IE > Block2 OUT A = OFF
IE >> Block2 OUT t F-IE B = ON IPh
ModeBLOUT1 C = ON IPh/IE
IE >>> Block2 OUT
t F-IE A D = ON IE
IED> Block2 OUT
≥1 B BLOUT1
IED>> Block2 OUT 0 T Pilot wire output
IED>>> Block2 OUT C
IED>>>> Block2 OUT ST-IE BLK2 D
Block2 output

Thermal image (49MG) - Logic diagram of the blocking signals concerning the trip element 49MG_BL-diagram.ai

126 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 t [s]
10000

1000

100

10

1 p=
0 .0

0 .6

0 .8

1 .0
0.1

0.01 Ith /IB

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20
1.1

Operating characteristic concerning the thermal image element (49MG) - T=1 min F_49-1min-Char.ai

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 127

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 t [s]

100000

10000

1000

p=
0 .0

100 0 .6

0 .8

1 .0

10

0.1 Ith /IB

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20
1.1

Operating characteristic concerning the thermal image element (49MG) - T = 200 min F_49-200min-Char.ai

128 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
— Phase overcurrent - 50/51 side H and side L
Preface
Three operation thresholds, independently adjustable with adjustable delay are provided on both the
H and L side of the protected device.
References used in this section are related to the protection of the H side: the elements on the L side
is similar (replace the H with L).
The first one may be programmed with definite or inverse time according the IEC and ANSI/IEEE
standard, as well as with rectifier, I2t or EM curve.
The second threshold may be programmable with independent or dependent time according to the
I2t curve and the third threshold with independent time.
For each threshold a reset time can be set useful to reduce the clearing time for intermittent faults.
The first threshold trip may be inhibited by start of the second and/or third threshold.
Similarly the second threshold trip may be inhibited by start of the third threshold.
Operation and settings
Each phase fundamental frequency current is compared with the setting value. Currents above the
associated pickup value are detected and a start is issued. After expiry of the associated operate
time a trip command is issued; if instead the current drops below the threshold, the element is re-
stored.
The first threshold (I>) may be programmed with definite or inverse time according the following
characteristic curves:
• Standard Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type A or SIT): t = 0.14 · t (H) >inv / [(I/I(H) >inv)0.02 - 1]
• Very Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type B or VIT): t = 13.5 · t (H) >inv / [(I/I(H) >inv) - 1]
• Very Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type B or LIT): t = 120 · t (H) >inv / [(I/I(H) >inv) - 1]
• Extremely Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type C or EIT): t = 80 · t (H) >inv / [(I/I(H) >inv)2 - 1]
• Moderately Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type MI): t = t (H) >inv · {0.01 / [(I/(H) >inv)0.02 - 1] + 0.023}
• Very Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type VI): t = t (H) >inv · {3.922 / [(I/I(H) >inv)2 - 1] + 0.098}
• Extremely Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type EI): t = t (H) >inv · {5.64 / [(I/I(H) >inv)2 - 1] + 0.024}
• Rectifier (RI): t = 2351 · t (H) >inv / [(I/I(H) >inv)5.6 - 1]
• I-squared-t (I 2 t = K): t = 16 · t (H) >inv / (I/I(H) >inv)2
• Electromechanical (EM): t = t(H) >inv · {0.28 / [-0236 · (I/I>inv)-1 + 0.339]}

where:
t: operate time
I(H) >inv : threshold setting
t (H) >inv : operate time setting
The second threshold (I>>) may be programmable with definite or inverse time according to the I2t
curve: t = 16 · t (H) >inv / (I/I>inv)2
The third threshold is definite time.

t>
TRIP

t >>

t >>>

I> I>> I>>> I t-int-F50-51.ai

General operation time characteristic for the phase overcurrent elements - 50/51

For all inverse time characteristics, following data applies:

• Asymptotic reference value (minimum pickup value): 1.1 I(H) >inv
• Minimum operate time: 0.1 s
• Range where the equation is valid:[1] 1.1 ≤ I/I(H) >invv ≤ 20
• If I>inv pickup ≥ 2.5 In, the upper limit is 50 InH
For all definite time elements the upper limit for measuring is 50 InH.

All overcurrent elements can be enabled or disabled by setting ON or OFF the I(H)> Enable,
I(H)>> Enable and/or II(H)>>> Enable parameters inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Phase
overcurrent-50/51 side H \ I(H)> Element (I(H)>> Element, I(H)>>> Element) \ Setpoints menus.
The first overcurrent element can be programmed with definite or inverse time characteristic by
setting the I(H)>Curve parameter (DEFINITE, IEC/BS A, IEC/BS B, IEC/BS C, ANSI/IEE
MI, ANSI/IEE VI, ANSI/IEE EI, RECTIFIER, I2t, EM) available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \
Phase overcurrent-50/51 side H \ I(H)> Element (I(H)>> Element, I(H)>>> Element) \ Setpoints menu.

Note 1 When the input value is more than 20 times the set point , the operate time is limited to the value corresponding to 20 times the set point

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 129

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 The second overcurrent element can be programmed with definite or inverse time characteris-
tic by setting the I> Time characteristic (I(H)>>Curve) parameter (DEFINITE, I2t) available
inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Phase overcurrent-50/51 side H \ I(H)> Element (I(H)>> Element,
I(H)>>> Element) \ Setpoints menu.
The trip of I(H)> element may be inhibited by the start of the second and/or third element
(I(H)>>, I(H)>>>) by setting ON the Disable I(H)> by start I(H)>>, Disable I(H)>> by start I(H)>>>
(I(H)>disbyI(H)>>, I(H)>disbyI(H)>>>) parameters available inside the Set \ Profile A(or
B) \ Phase overcurrent-50/51 side H \ I(H)> Element (I(H)>> Element, I(H)>>> Element) \ Setpoints
menus.
Similarly the trip of the I(H)>> element may be inhibited by start of the third element (I(H)>>>) by
setting ON the Disable I(H)>> by start I(H)>>> (I(H)>>disbyI(H)>>>) parameter available
inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Phase overcurrent-50/51 side H \ I(H)> Element (I(H)>> Element,
I(H)>>> Element) \ Setpoints menu.

All the named parameters can be set separately for Profile A and Profile B (Set \ Profile A(or B)
\ Phase overcurrent-50/51 side H \ I(H)> Element (I(H)>> Element, I(H)>>> Element) \ Setpoints
menus).

An adjustable reset time delay is provided for every threshold (t (H) > RES, t (H) >> RES, t (H) >>> RES).

Timers-F50-51.ai

INPUT

t (H) > RES t (H) > RES t (H) > RES

I(H)> Start
t (H) > t (H) >

I(H)> Trip

RESET

t
I> element phase overcurrent timers - 50/51 side H

Breaker failure (BF)

Each overcurrent element can produce the Breaker Failure output if the I(H)> BF, I(H)>> BF and/
or I(H)>>> BF parameters are set to ON. The parameters are available inside the Set \ Profile
A(or B) \ Phase overcurrent-50/51 side H \ I(H)> Element (I(H)>> Element, I(H)>>> Element) \ Set-
points menus.[1]
Second harmonic restraint
For all overcurrent elements, a block from the second harmonic restraint may be set by setting ON
the I>2ndh-REST, I>>2ndh-REST, I>>>2ndh-REST parameters inside the Set \ Profile A(or
B) \ Phase overcurrent-50/51 side H \ I(H)> Element (I(H)>> Element, I(H)>>> Element) \ Setpoints
menus.
Cold load pickup
If the CLP function (Cold Load Pick-up) is enabled for element blocking, the selected threshold may
be blocked for an adjustable time interval, starting from the circuit breaker closure.
This operating mode may be select by setting ON-Element blocking the I(H)CLP> Mode,
I(H)CLP>> Mode and/or I(H)CLP>>> Mode parameters.
If the CLP function (Cold Load Pick-up) is enabled for threshold change, the selected threshold may
be changed for an adjustable time interval, starting from the circuit breaker closure.
This operating mode may be select by setting ON-Change setting the I(H)CLP> Mode,
I(H)CLP>> Mode and/or I(H)CLP>>> Mode parameters, whereas the operating thresholds
within the CLP may be adjusted inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Phase overcurrent-50/51 side H \
I(H)> Element (I(H)>> Element, I(H)>>> Element) \ Definite time (Inverse time) menus.
For both operating modes the CLP Activation time parameters (tCLP>, tCLP>>, tCLP>>>) may
be adjusted inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Phase overcurrent-50/51 side H \ I(H)> Element (I(H)>>
Element, I(H)>>> Element) \ Setpoints menus.
For every of the three thresholds the following block criteria are available:
Logical block (Block1)
If the I(H)>BLK1, I(H)>>BLK1 and/or I(H)>>>BLK1 enabling parameters are set to ON and
a binary input is designed for logical block (Block1), the concerning element is blocked off whenever
the given input is active.[2] The enabling parameters are available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \
Phase overcurrent-50/51 side H \ I(H)> Element (I(H)>> Element, I(H)>>> Element) \ Setpoints menus,
while the Block1 function must be assigned to the selected binary input inside the Set \ Board1(2)
inputs \ Binary input IN1-1...INx-x menus.

Note 1 The common settings concerning the Breaker failure protection are adjustable inside the Breaker Failure - BF menu.
Note 2 The exhaustive treatment of the logical block (Block 1) function may be found in the “Logic Block” paragraph inside CONTROL AND MONITOR-
ING section

130 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 I(H)> Enable I(H)>Curve I(H)CLP>Mode t(H)CLP> tH)>RES I(H)>def I(H)CLP>def t(H)>def I(H)> inv I(H)CLP> inv t(H)>inv

IL1H I(H)> Element

IL2H Start I(H)>
IL3H Trip I(H)>

≥ I(H)> inhibition I(H)>2ndh-REST CLPI(H)>

I(H)>BF
& I(H)>BF
Start I2ndh>
&
Trip I(H)>
I(H)>BLK1
Start I(H)> BLK1I(H)>
&
&
Block1

I(H)>BLK2IN
Start I(H)> BLK2INI(H)>
&
&
Block2
I(H)>BLK2OUT
BLK2OUT
I(H)>BLK4 &
Start I(H)>
BLK4OUT
&
Start I>

I(H)>> Enable I(H)>>Curve I(H)CLP>>Mode t(H)CLP>> t(H)>>RES I(H)>> def I(H)CLP>> def t(H)>> def I(H)>> inv I(H)CLP>> inv t(H)>> inv

IL1H I(H)>> Element

Start I(H)>>
IL2H
Trip I(H)>>
IL3H
I(H)>>2ndh-REST I(H)> disbyI(H)>> CLPI(H)>>
I(H)>> inhibition
& I(H)>>BF &
Start I2ndh> Start I>>
I(H)>>BF
&
I(H)>> Trip
I(H)>>BLK1
Start I(H)>> BLK1I(H)>>
&
&
Block1

I(H)>>BLK2IN
Start I(H)>> BLK2INI(H)>>
&
Block2 &
I(H)>>BLK2OUT
BLK2OUT
I(H)>>BLK4 &
Start I>>
BLK4OUT
&
Start I>>

I(H)>>> Enable I(H)CLP>>>Mode t(H)CLP>>> t(H)>>>RES ST-I(H)>>>&ST-U<< I(H)>>> def I(H)CLP>>> def t(H)>>> def

IL1H I(H)>>> Element Start I(H)>>>

IL2H I(H)>>>2ndh-REST Trip I(H)>>>
IL3H I(H)> disbyI>>>
& CLPI(H)>>>
Start I2ndh> I(H)>> disbyI>>>
Start I(H)>>> &

Start I(H)>>> &

I(H)>>>BLK1
Start I(H)>>> BLK1I(H)>>>
&
&
Block1
I(H)>>>BF
I(H)>>>BF
&
Trip I(H)>>>
I(H)>>>BLK2IN
Start I(H)>>> BLK2INI(H)>>>
&
&
Block2
I(H)>>>BLK2OUT
BLK2OUT
I(H)>>>BLK4 &
Start I(H)>>>
BLK4OUT
Start I(H)>>> &

General logic diagram of the overcurrent elements - 50/51 side H all-F50-51.ai

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 131

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 Selective block (Block2)
All along the protective elements the selective block may be set.
The logic selectivity function may be performed by means any combination of the following I/O:
• One committed pilot wire input (BLIN1).
• One or more binary inputs designed for input selective block.
• One committed pilot wire output (BLOUT1).
• One or more output relays designed for output selective block.
Only when the committed pilot wire are used the continuity check of the pilot wire link is active.

Use of committed pilot wire input BLIN1:

• The protection is blocked off according the selectivity block criteria when the input BLIN1 is active.
The information about phase or phase+earth block may be select programming the ModeBLIN1
parameter inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Selective block-BLOCK2 \ Selective block IN menus.

Use of binary inputs:

• If the I(H)>BLK2IN, I(H)>>BLK2IN and/or I(H)>>>BLK2IN parameters are set to ON and
a binary input is designed for selective block (Block2), the protection is blocked off by phase ele-
ments (Block2 Iph) or by any protection element (Block2 Iph/IE) according the selectivity block
criteria.[1] The enable I(H)>BLK2IN, I(H)>>BLK2IN and/or I(H)>>>BLK2IN parameters
are available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Phase overcurrent-50/51 side H \ I(H)> Element (I(H)>>
Element, I(H)>>> Element) \ Setpoints menus, while the Block2 Iph and Block2 Iph/IE functions
must be assigned to the selected binary inputs inside the Set \ Board1(2) inputs \ Binary input IN1-
1...INx-x menus.

Use of committed pilot wire output BLOUT1:

• The information about phase or phase+earth block may be select programming the ModeBLOUT1
parameter (OFF - ON IPh - ON IPh/IE - ON IE) inside Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Selective block-
BLOCK2 \ Selective block OUT menus.

Use of output relay:

• If the I(H)>BLK2OUT, I(H)>>BLK2OUT and/or I(H)>>>BLK2OUT enable parameters are
set to ON and a output relay is designed for selective block (Block2), the protection issues a block
output by phase elements (BLK2OUT-Iph) or by any protection element (BLK2OUT-Iph/IE), when-
ever the given element (Start I(H)>, Start I(H)>> e/o Start I(H)>>>) becomes active. The enable
I(H)>BLK2OUT, I(H)>>BLK2OUT and/or I(H)>>>BLK2OUT parameters (ON or OFF) are
available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Phase overcurrent-50/51 side H \ I(H)> Element (I(H)>>
Element, I(H)>>> Element) \ Setpoints menus, while the BLK2OUT-Iph-K, BLK2OUT-Iph/IE-
K and/or BLK2OUT-IE-K output relays and LEDs (BLK2OUT-Iph-L, BLK2OUT-Iph/IE-L e/o
BLK2OUT-IE-L) must be select inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Selective block-BLOCK2 \ Selec-
tive block OUT menu.

Internal selective block (Block4)

As well as to send or transmit a selective block toward other protective relays, each protective
element may be enabled for receive or transmit a selective block from/to other internal protective
elements.[2]
The internal selective block of one or more element concerning the phase overcurrent function may
be enabled/disabled by means the I(H)>BLK4, I(H)>>BLK4, and/or I(H)>>>BLK4 parameters
(virtual input and output common to all protective thresholds); the following operating modes are
available:
• IN - the element is enabled to receive the selective block from an internal input.
• OUT - the element is enabled to send the selective block to an internal output.
• OFF - the element is disabled to send/receive the internal selective block.
Transmission and reception for the same element is not allowed, so any stall situation due to wrong
setting is avoided.
The internal selective block can work together with an external selective block from other protective
relays (Block2).

Note 1 The exhaustive treatment of the selective block (Block 2) function may be found in the “Selective Block” paragraph inside CONTROL AND
MONITORING section
Nota 2 The exhaustive treatment of the internal selective block (Block 4) function may be found in the “Internal selective block” paragraph inside
CONTROL AND MONITORING section.

132 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 ON≡Enable I(H)> overcurrent element
I(H)> Enable
ON≡Inhibit (from I(H)>> and/or I(H)>>> overcurrent element)
I(H)> inhibition

I (H) > def State

&
I L1H ≥ I (H) > def Start I (H) >
(Pickup outside CLP)
≥1
I (H) > inv State
I(H)>ST-K
I L 1H &
I(H)>ST-L

TRIPPING M ATRIX
(LED+REL AYS)
I L1H ≥ I (H) > inv
t (H) > inv

I (H)C L P > def I (H)C L P > inv I (H) > Curve t (H) > RES
t (H) > def
(Pickup within CLP) t (H) > RES
& t (H) >
I L1H ≥ I (H) > ≥1 T 0 0 T I(H)>TR-K
T 0 I(H)>TR-L
RESET
I L 2H

Trip I (H) >

I L 3H

A =“0 or OFF” A =“1” ≥1 CLP I (H) >

t (H)C L P >
A = ON - Change setting
A B = OFF
t (H)CLP> Output t (H)CLP> B
CB-State C = ON - Element blocking
T 0 C

≥1
I (H) CLP>Mode

2nd harmonic restraint enable (ON≡Enable)

I (H) >2ndh-REST
&
Start I2ndh>

I(H)> overcurrent element (50/51) block diagram

Block1, Block2, Block4

Trip I (H) >

BF Enable (ON≡Enable) & I (H) > BF towards BF logic
I (H) >BF

CB State CB OPEN CB CLOSED CB OPEN

tCLP> 0.1 s

Output tCLP>

t
HIGH THRESHOLD/ LOW THRESHOLD/ HIGH THRESHOLD/
BLOCK UNBLOCK BLOCK

Phase overcurrent (50/51) side H - First element logic diagram (I>) Fun_50-51S1.ai

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 133

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 Start I(H) >
&
Enable (ON≡Enable)
I (H) >BLK1 Trip I(H) > & BLK1I (H) >
&

& BLK4IN I (H) >

Block1 Logic INx t ON INx t OFF Block4

n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 Block1, Block2, Block4

n.o. Block1
T 0 0 T
Binary input INx & BLK2IN I (H) >
Block1

Block2 input enable (ON≡Enable)

I (H) >BLK2IN
&
ModeBLIN1
OFF BLK2IN-Iph
BLIN1 ON IPh

TRIPPING M ATRIX
Pilot wire input

(LED+REL AYS)
ON IPh/IE Iph Block2
ON IE
tB-K
tB-L
Logic t B-Iph
INx t ON INx t OFF
Block2 IPh
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 t B-Iph
≥1
n.o. T 0 0 T 0 T ≥1 tB timeout
Binary input INx
FROM ANY PROTECTIONS

Logic INx t ON INx t OFF t B-IE

Block2 IPh/IE
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 t B-IE
≥1 BLK2IN-IE
n.o. T 0 0 T 0 T
Binary input INx
FROM EARTH FAULT PROTECTIONS

Logic INx t ON INx t OFF

Block2 IE
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 IE Block2
n.o. T 0 0 T
Binary input INx Block2 input

Start I(H) >

I> Block2 OUT ST-Iph BLK2 BLK2OUT-Iph
Block2 output &
I (H) >BLK2OUT BLK2OUT-IPh-K
TRIPPING M ATRIX
(ON≡Enable)
(LED+REL AYS)
t F-IPh BLK2OUT-IPh-L
BLK2OUT-IE
t F-IPh BLK2OUT-IE-K
All other BLK2OUT outputs ≥1 t F-IPh/IE
0 T BLK2OUT-IE-L
of phase elements BLK2OUT-Iph/IE
t F-IPh/IE BLK2OUT-IPh/IE-K
(see BLK2OUT chapter) ≥1
0 T BLK2OUT-IPh/IE-L
A = OFF
t F-IE B = ON IPh
ModeBLOUT1 C = ON IPh/IE
All BLK2OUT outputs D = ON IE
t F-IE A
of ground elements ≥1 B BLOUT1
0 T Pilot wire output
(see BLK2OUT chapter) C
ST-IE BLK2 D
Block2 output

A = IN A = IN
I (H) >BLK4 B = OFF t FI-Iph B = OFF I (H) >BLK4
C = OUT ST-Iph BLK4 C = OUT
“0” A Block4
B I> Block4 I/O t FI-Iph I> Block4 OUT A
“0”
Start I(H) >
C 0 T “0” B
“0” C
Block4 enable
t FI-IE ≥1
50-51S1_BL-diagram.ai

Block4 OUT
All other BLK4 I/O ≥1 All BLK4 I/O
t FI-IE
of phase elements of ground elements ≥1
0 T
(see BLK4 chapter) (see BLK2OUT chapter) ST-IE BLK4
Block4
Phase overcurrent (50/51) side H - Logic diagram of the blocking signals concerning the first element (I(H)>)

134 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 ON≡Enable I>> overcurrent element
I(H)>> Enable
ON≡Inhibit (from I>>> overcurrent element)
I(H)>> inhibition

(ON≡Inhibit)
I (H) >> def State I (H) > disbyl>>
& I (H) > inhibition
& Start I (H) >>
I L1H ≥ I (H) >> def
(Pickup outside CLP)
≥1 Start I (H) >>
I (H) >> inv State
I (H) >>ST-K
I L 1H &
I (H) >>ST-L

TRIPPING M ATRIX
(LED+REL AYS)
I L1H ≥ I (H) >> inv
t (H) >> inv
I (H) >> Curve t (H) >> RES
I (H)C L P >>def I (H)C L P >>inv t (H) >> def
(Pickup within CLP) t (H) >> RES
& t (H) >>
I L1H ≥ I (H) > > ≥1 T 0 0 T I (H) >>TR-K
T 0 I (H) >>TR-L
RESET
I L2
Trip I (H) >>

I L3

A =“0 or OFF” A =“1”

≥1 CLP I (H) >>

t (H)C L P >> A = ON - Change setting

B = OFF
A C = ON - Element blocking
t (H)CLP>> Output t (H)CLP>> B
CB-State
T 0 C

≥1
ICLP>>Mode

2nd harmonic restraint enable (ON≡Enable)

I (H) >>2ndh-REST
&
Start I2ndh>

I(H)>> overcurrent element (50/51) Block diagram

Block1, Block2, Block4

Trip I (H) >>

BF Enable (ON≡Enable) & I (H) >> BF towards BF logic
I (H) >>BF

CB State CB OPEN CB CLOSED CB OPEN

tCLP>> 0.1 s

Output tCLP>>

t
HIGH THRESHOLD/ LOW THRESHOLD/ HIGH THRESHOLD/
BLOCK UNBLOCK BLOCK

Phase overcurrent (50/51) side H - Second element logic diagram (I(H)>>) Fun_50-51S2.ai

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 135

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 Start I(H) >>
&
Enable (ON≡Enable)
I (H) >>BLK1 Trip I(H) >> & BLK1I (H) >>
&

& BLK4IN I (H) >>

Block1 Logic INx t ON INx t OFF Block4

n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 Block1, Block2, Block4

n.o. Block1
T 0 0 T
Binary input INx & BLK2IN I (H) >>
Block1

Block2 input enable (ON≡Enable)

I>>BLK2IN
&
ModeBLIN1
OFF BLK2IN-Iph
BLIN1 ON IPh

TRIPPING M ATRIX
Pilot wire input

(LED+REL AYS)
ON IPh/IE Iph Block2
ON IE
tB-K
tB-L
Logic t B-Iph
INx t ON INx t OFF
Block2 IPh
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 t B-Iph
≥1
n.o. T 0 0 T 0 T ≥1 tB timeout
Binary input INx
FROM ANY PROTECTIONS

Logic INx t ON INx t OFF t B-IE

Block2 IPh/IE
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 t B-IE
≥1 BLK2IN-IE
n.o. T 0 0 T 0 T
Binary input INx
FROM EARTH FAULT PROTECTIONS

Logic INx t ON INx t OFF

Block2 IE
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 IE Block2
n.o. T 0 0 T
Binary input INx Block2 input

Start I>>
I>> Block2 OUT ST-Iph BLK2 BLK2OUT-Iph
Block2 output &
BLK2OUT-IPh-K
I>>BLK2OUT
TRIPPING M ATRIX
(LED+REL AYS)
(ON≡Enable) t F-IPh BLK2OUT-IPh-L
BLK2OUT-IE
t F-IPh BLK2OUT-IE-K
All other BLK2OUT outputs ≥1 t F-IPh/IE
0 T BLK2OUT-IE-L
of phase elements BLK2OUT-Iph/IE
t F-IPh/IE BLK2OUT-IPh/IE-K
(see BLK2OUT chapter) ≥1
0 T BLK2OUT-IPh/IE-L
A = OFF
t F-IE B = ON IPh
ModeBLOUT1 C = ON IPh/IE
All BLK2OUT outputs D = ON IE
t F-IE A
of ground elements ≥1 B BLOUT1
0 T Pilot wire output
(see BLK2OUT chapter) C
ST-IE BLK2 D
Block2 output

A = IN A = IN
I (H) >>BLK4 B = OFF t FI-Iph B = OFF I (H) >>BLK4
C = OUT ST-Iph BLK4 C = OUT
“0” A Block4
B I(H) >> Block4 I/O t FI-Iph I(H) >> Block4 OUT A
“0”
Start I(H) >> C 0 T “0” B
“0” C
Block4 enable
t FI-IE ≥1 Block4 OUT
All other BLK4 I/O ≥1 All BLK4 I/O
50-51S2_BL-diagram.ai

t FI-IE
of phase elements of ground elements ≥1
0 T
(see BLK4 chapter) (see BLK2OUT chapter) ST-IE BLK4
Block4
Phase overcurrent (50/51) side H - Logic diagram of the blocking signals concerning the second element (I(H)>>)

136 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 (ON≡Inhibit)
I (H) > disbyl (H) >>>
& I (H) > inhibition
Start I (H) >>>
ON≡Enable 3rd overcurrent element
I (H) >>> Enable
(ON≡Inhibit)
I (H) >> disbyl (H) >>>
& I (H) >> inhibition
Start I (H) >>>

I (H) >>> def State

(Pickup outside CLP) Start I (H) >>>
&
ST-I (H) >>>&ST-U<<
I L1H ≥ I (H) >>> def Start I (H) >>> I (H) >>>ST-K

TRIPPING M ATRIX
A  ST-I>>>&ST-U<< = OFF I (H) >>>ST-L

(LED+REL AYS)
I L 1H B  ST-I>>>&ST-U<< = ON
I (H)C L P >>def I (H)C L P >>inv t (H)>>>RES
t >>>def
A t (H)>>>RES
& ≥1 t >>>def
I L1H ≥ I (H) > > > (Pickup within CLP) ≥1 0 T I>>>TR-K
B
& RESET T 0 I>>>TR-L
RESET
I L 2H
A Trip I (H) >>>
Start U<<def
I L 3H B

A =“0 or OFF” A =“1”

≥1 CLP I (H) >>>

t (H)C L P >>>
A = ON - Change setting
A B = OFF
t (H)CLP>>> Output t CLP>>> B C = ON - Element blocking
CB-State
T 0 C

≥1
I (H) CLP>>>Mode

2nd harmonic restraint enable (ON≡Enable)

I (H) >>>2ndh-REST
&
Start I2ndh>

I(H)>>> overcurrent element (50/51) Block diagram

Block1, Block2, Block4

Trip I (H) >>>

BF Enable (ON≡Enable) & I (H) >>> BF towards BF logic
I (H) >>>BF

CB State CB OPEN CB CLOSED CB OPEN

tCLP>>> 0.1 s

Output tCLP>>>

t
HIGH THRESHOLD/ LOW THRESHOLD/ HIGH THRESHOLD/
BLOCK UNBLOCK BLOCK

Phase overcurrent (50/51) side H - Third element logic diagram (I(H)>>>)

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 137

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 Start I(H) >>>
&
Enable (ON≡Enable)
I (H) >>>BLK1 Trip I(H) >>> & BLK1I (H) >>>
&

& BLK4IN I (H) >>>

Block1 Logic INx t ON INx t OFF Block4

n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 Block1, Block2, Block4

n.o. Block1
T 0 0 T
Binary input INx & BLK2IN I (H) >>>
Block1

Block2 input enable (ON≡Enable)

I (H) >>>BLK2IN
&
ModeBLIN1
OFF BLK2IN-Iph
BLIN1 ON IPh

TRIPPING M ATRIX
Pilot wire input

(LED+REL AYS)
ON IPh/IE Iph Block2
ON IE
tB-K
tB-L
Logic t B-Iph
INx t ON INx t OFF
Block2 IPh
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 t B-Iph
≥1
n.o. T 0 0 T T 0 ≥1 tB timeout
Binary input INx
FROM ANY PROTECTIONS

Logic INx t ON INx t OFF t B-IE

Block2 IPh/IE
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 t B-IE
≥1 BLK2IN-IE
n.o. T 0 0 T T 0
Binary input INx
FROM EARTH FAULT PROTECTIONS

Logic INx t ON INx t OFF

Block2 IE
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 IE Block2
n.o. T 0 0 T
Binary input INx Block2 input

Start I(H) >>>

I(H) >>> Block2 OUT ST-Iph BLK2 BLK2OUT-Iph
Block2 output & BLK2OUT-IPh-K
I (H) >>>BLK2OUT
TRIPPING M ATRIX

(ON≡Enable)
(LED+REL AYS)
t F-IPh BLK2OUT-IPh-L
BLK2OUT-IE
t F-IPh BLK2OUT-IE-K
All other BLK2OUT outputs ≥1 t F-IPh/IE
0 T BLK2OUT-IE-L
of phase elements BLK2OUT-Iph/IE
t F-IPh/IE BLK2OUT-IPh/IE-K
(see BLK2OUT chapter) ≥1
0 T BLK2OUT-IPh/IE-L
A = OFF
t F-IE B = ON IPh
ModeBLOUT1 C = ON IPh/IE
All BLK2OUT outputs D = ON IE
t F-IE A
of ground elements ≥1 B BLOUT1
0 T Pilot wire output
(see BLK2OUT chapter) C
ST-IE BLK2 D
Block2 output

A = IN A = IN
I (H) >>>BLK4 B = OFF t FI-Iph B = OFF I (H) >>>BLK4
C = OUT ST-Iph BLK4 C = OUT
“0” A t FI-Iph I>>> Block4 OUT A
Block4
“0” B I(H) >>> Block4 I/O
Start I(H) >>> C 0 T “0” B
“0” C
Block4 enable
t FI-IE ≥1 Block4 OUT
All other BLK4 I/O ≥1 All BLK4 I/O
50-51S3_BL-diagram.ai

t FI-IE
of phase elements of ground elements ≥1
0 T
(see BLK4 chapter) (see BLK2OUT chapter) ST-IE BLK4
Block4
Phase overcurrent (50/51) side H - Logic diagram of the blocking signals concerning the third element (I(H)>>>)

138 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
— Locked rotor- 50S/51LR(48)/14
Preface
This function ensures protection against the destructive effects of thermal origin in the event of:
• too slow starting or locked rotor during starting - 51LR (48),
• rotor locking during normal operation (after starting) - 50S (stalling),
with eventual speed control - 14, the latter to be employed for motors where the blocked rotor al-
lowed maximum time is less than the starting time (eg. motors with high inertia loads).
Two adjustable operation thresholds, (ILR >inv, ILR >> def) with adjustable delay (t LR >inv, t LR >> def), the
first with inverse time and the second with definite time characteristic.
The full protection (locked rotor and too long starting following voltage drops during the start time) is
assured with inverse time characteristic.
Operation and settings
Each phase fundamental frequency current of side L (IL1L , IL2L , IL3L ) is compared with the setting
value. Currents above the associated pickup value are detected and a start is issued. After expiry of
the associated operate time a trip command is issued; if instead the current drops below the thresh-
old, the element is restored.
The start of the inverse time element becomes active (START) when the ILR >inv threshold is over-
come; the operate time characteristic is calculated according the general formula:
t = (IMOT-ST / I)2 ∙ t LR>inv with I larger than ILR >inv where:
• t: the operate time,
• I: the maximum fundamental component of the phase currents,
• t LR>inv: operate time setting. The operate time setting is related to the current I = IMOT-ST (must be
adjusted to the motor starting time with nominal voltage).
• IMOT-ST: motor starting current with nominal voltage.
• ILR >inv: operate threshold for the starting detection, (must be adjusted to a larger value than the
motor nominal current but lower than the starting current at reduced voltage).
The minimum operate time is 0.1 s.
During starting the function is inhibited for an adjustable t LRCLP >> time, slightly higher than the motor
starting time, to prevent operations caused by the high starting currents; when the motor is running
the protection operates within the t LR >> adjustable time.
In case of starting with locked rotor and motor near the critical overheating, the locked rotor protec-
tion is carried out by the thermal image because the temperature rise caused by the rotor lock adds
to the previous thermal load stored by the thermal image and operates quickly.

t L R > inv

TRIP

t L R >> def

I L R > inv I MOT-S T I L R >> def I

General operation time characteristic for the locked rotor element - 51LR t-int-51LR.ai

The upper limit for measuring is 50 InL .

The elements can be enabled or disabled by setting ON or OFF the ILR> Enable, ILR>> Enable
parameters inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Locked rotor - 51LR(48)/14 \ ILR> (ILR>>) Element \ Set-
points menu.

The operating mode may be set according the Speed control unit by setting the ILR>Mode (Mod-
e51LR>, Mode51LR>>) parameters available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Locked rotor -
51LR(48)/14 \ ILR> Element (ILR>> Element) \ Setpoints menu. With speed control selection (Mod-
e51LR = With speed control), the element is blocked when running is detected (Speed control
= ON acquired by binary input). Conversely, the protection is not locked when a too low speed is
detected (Speed control = OFF).
The Speed control functions must be assigned to the selected binary input inside the Set \ Board1(2)
inputs \ Binary input IN1-1...INx-x menus.

The overcurrent element can produce the Breaker Failure output if the ILR> BF and ILR>> BF
parameter are set to ON. The parameter is available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Locked rotor
- 51LR(48)/14\ ILR> Element (ILR>> Element) \ Setpoints menu.[1]

Note 1 The common settings concerning the Breaker failure protection are adjustable inside the Breaker Failure - BF menu.

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 139

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 The second element may be blocked by means of the Cold Load Pickup (CLP)[1] function.
If the CLP function is enabled the element is blocked for an adjustable time interval, starting from the
starting control criterion (circuit breaker closure or IRUN threshold).
The CLP Activation time parameter (tLRCLP>>) may be adjusted inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \
Locked rotor - 50S/ 51LR/14\ ILR>> Element \ Setpoints menu.
Starting control
If the CLP Source parameter is set to IRUN and the maximum value of phase currents is lower than
0.1 IB, the protection is blocked off.
If the CLP Source parameter is set to CB and the circuit breaker is open, the protection is blocked
off.
The CLP Source parameter, common for profiles A and B, is available inside the Set \ Starting
control set menu.

t [s] t = t LR> inv · (IMOT-ST/I)2

10 000

1000

250

tLR>inv = 200 s
100

tLR>inv = 100 s

10

tLR>inv = 10 s

1 tLR>inv = 1 s

0.1

0.01 I/ILR>inv
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 50
IMOT-ST
Setting example: IMOT-ST = 5ILR>inv With input current I = IMOT-ST and setting tLR>inv =10 s the operate time is t = 10 s

Operating characteristic concerning the locked rotor element (50S/51LR(48)/14) F_48-Char.ai

Note 1 The inverse time threshold, unlike the definite time, is not in any way conditioned by the CLP activation time

140 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 ON≡Enable ILR> element
ILR> Enable

Start ILR>
I L R > inv
ILR>ST-K

TRIPPING M ATRIX
I L1L

(LED+REL AYS)
I L1L ≥ I L R > inv
t L R > inv
I L R > inv
t L R > inv
& ILR>TR-K
I L2L T 0
≥1 ILR>TR-L
I L2L ≥ I L R > inv RESET

Trip ILR>
I L R > inv

I L3L
I L3L ≥ I L R > inv

STOP RUNNING

Mode51LR
Speed control
“0”
Mode51LR> without speed control
Speed control Logic INx t ON INx t OFF
“0” “0”
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF with speed control
n.o. T 0 0 T ≥1
Binary input INx
Speed control

ILR> overcurrent element (51LR) block diagram

Block1, Block2

Trip ILR>
BF Enable (ON≡Enable) & ILR> BF towards BF logic
ILR>BF

Locked rotor - First element logic diagram 51LR-diagram.ai

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 141

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 Start ILR>
&
Enable (ON≡Enable)
ILR>BLK1 Trip ILR> & BLK1ILR>
&

Block1 Logic INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 Block1, Block2

n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF
n.o. Block1
T 0 0 T
Binary input INx & BLK2IN ILR>
Block1

Block2 input enable (ON≡Enable)

ILR>BLK2IN
&
ModeBLIN1 BLK2IN-Iph
OFF
BLIN1 ON IPh
Pilot wire input ON IPh/IE

TRIPPING M ATRIX
(LED+REL AYS)
ON IE Iph Block2
FROM PHASE PROTECTIONS tB-K
tB-L
Logic t B-Iph
INx t ON INx t OFF
Block2 IPh
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 t B-Iph
≥1
n.o. T 0 0 T 0 T ≥1 tB timeout
Binary input INx

FROM ANY PROTECTIONS

Logic INx t ON INx t OFF t B-IE

Block2 IPh/IE
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 t B-IE
≥1 BLK2IN-IE
n.o. T 0 0 T 0 T
Binary input INx

FROM EARTH FAULT PROTECTIONS

Logic INx t ON INx t OFF

Block2 IE
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 IE Block2
n.o. T 0 0 T
Binary input INx
Block2 input

Start ILR >

ILR > Block2 OUT ST-Iph BLK2 BLK2OUT-Iph
Block2 output & BLK2OUT-IPh-K
ILR>BLK2OUT
TRIPPING M ATRIX
(LED+REL AYS)

(ON≡Enable) t F-IPh BLK2OUT-IPh-L

BLK2OUT-IE
t F-IPh BLK2OUT-IE-K
All other BLK2OUT outputs ≥1 t F-IPh/IE
0 T BLK2OUT-IE-L
of phase elements BLK2OUT-Iph/IE
t F-IPh/IE BLK2OUT-IPh/IE-K
(see BLK2OUT chapter) ≥1
0 T BLK2OUT-IPh/IE-L

A = OFF
t F-IE B = ON IPh
ModeBLOUT1 C = ON IPh/IE
All BLK2OUT outputs D = ON IE
t F-IE A
of ground elements ≥1 B BLOUT1
0 T Pilot wire output
(see BLK2OUT chapter) C
ST-IE BLK2 D
Block2 output

Locked rotor (first element) - Logic diagram of the blocking signals 51LR_BL-diagram.ai

142 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 ON≡Enable ILR>> overcurrent element Start ILR>>
I L R >> def ILR>> Enable
ILR>>ST-K

TRIPPING M ATRIX
I L1L

(LED+REL AYS)
I L1L ≥ I L R >> def
t L R >> def
I L R >> def
t L R >> def
& ILR>>TR-K
I L2L T 0
≥1 “0” ILR>>TR-L
I L2L ≥ I L R >> def RESET

Trip ILR>
I L R >> def
Mode51LR
“0”
I L3L
“0”
I L3L ≥ I L R >> def without speed control

“0” “1”
with speed control
STOP RUNNING

Speed control

Mode51LR>>
Speed control Logic INx t ON INx t OFF
“0”
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF
n.o. T 0 0 T ≥1
Binary input INx
Speed control

ILR>> overcurrent element (51LR) block diagram

Block1, Block2

Mode51LR>>
t LRCLP >> “0“ with speed control
“1“ without speed control
Starting t LRCLP >> Output tLRCLP>> &
Starting control set
0 T

Trip ILR>>
BF Enable (ON≡Enable) & ILR>> BF towards BF logic
ILR>>BF

Starting control set

I R UN = 0.1IB C L P source

CB-State S t ar t ing de t ec t ion

IL1...IL3
M a x[ IL1...IL3] ≥ IRUN
+UAUX

M R E nable
Motor restart Logic INx t ON INx t OFF
Rese t C L P t imer
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF &
-UAUX n.o. T 0 0
Binary input INx Motor restart

IRUN M a x [ IL1...IL3] ≥ IRUN M a x [ IL1...IL3] < IRUN M a x[ IL1...IL3] ≥ IRUN

Starting
control
CB State CB OPEN CB CLOSED CB OPEN CB CLOSED

t CLP 0.1 s t CLP

Output t CLP

Motor restart
t

HIGH THRESHOLD/ LOW THRESHOLD/ HIGH THRESHOLD/ LOW TH. HIGH THRESHOLD/ LOW TH.
BLOCK UNBLOCK BLOCK UNBLOCK BLOCK UNBLOCK

Locked rotor - Second element logic diagram 51LR-S2-diagram.ai

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 143

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 Start ILR>>
&
Enable (ON≡Enable)
ILR>>BLK1 Trip ILR>> & BLK1ILR>>
&

Block1 Logic INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 Block1, Block2

n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF
n.o. Block1
T 0 0 T
Binary input INx & BLK2IN ILR>>
Block1

Block2 input enable (ON≡Enable)

ILR>>BLK2IN
&
ModeBLIN1 BLK2IN-Iph
OFF
BLIN1 ON IPh
Pilot wire input ON IPh/IE

TRIPPING M ATRIX
(LED+REL AYS)
ON IE Iph Block2
FROM PHASE PROTECTIONS tB-K
tB-L
Logic t B-Iph
INx t ON INx t OFF
Block2 IPh
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 t B-Iph
≥1
n.o. T 0 0 T 0 T ≥1 tB timeout
Binary input INx

FROM ANY PROTECTIONS

Logic INx t ON INx t OFF t B-IE

Block2 IPh/IE
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 t B-IE
≥1 BLK2IN-IE
n.o. T 0 0 T 0 T
Binary input INx

FROM EARTH FAULT PROTECTIONS

Logic INx t ON INx t OFF

Block2 IE
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 IE Block2
n.o. T 0 0 T
Binary input INx
Block2 input

Start ILR >>

ILR >> Block2 OUT ST-Iph BLK2 BLK2OUT-Iph
Block2 output & BLK2OUT-IPh-K
ILR>>BLK2OUT
TRIPPING M ATRIX

(ON≡Enable)
(LED+REL AYS)

t F-IPh BLK2OUT-IPh-L
BLK2OUT-IE
t F-IPh BLK2OUT-IE-K
All other BLK2OUT outputs ≥1 t F-IPh/IE
0 T BLK2OUT-IE-L
of phase elements BLK2OUT-Iph/IE
t F-IPh/IE BLK2OUT-IPh/IE-K
(see BLK2OUT chapter) ≥1
0 T BLK2OUT-IPh/IE-L

A = OFF
t F-IE B = ON IPh
ModeBLOUT1 C = ON IPh/IE
All BLK2OUT outputs D = ON IE
t F-IE A
of ground elements ≥1 B BLOUT1
0 T Pilot wire output
(see BLK2OUT chapter) C
ST-IE BLK2 D
Block2 output
51LR-S2_BL-diagram.ai

Locked rotor (second element) - Logic diagram of the blocking signals

144 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
— Voltage controlled/restraint overcurrent - 51V

Preface
The short circuit current of the generator can be detected even if the fault current drops below the
nominal current by means the voltage dependant overcurrent protection.
(case of generators with excitation derived from terminals or, in the case of excitation by a separate
supply, but with voltage regulator faults).
The protection may be employed as an alternative to the Underimpedance protective (21).
Current measurement may be performed with phase CT located on the generator star point side or
line side, but location on the star point side is to be preferred so that protection of the machinery is
achieved even with the machine breaker open; for the same reason the CB side of generator is the
VTs preferred position.
Two operation thresholds, that are modified dynamically on the grounds of the measured voltages
,independently adjustable (I-I/U >, I-I/U >>) with adjustable delay (t I-I/U>, t I-I/U>>).
Operation and settings
The following measures are involved:
• U 12 , U 2 3 , U 2 3 fundamental component of phase-to-phase voltages,
• I L1L , I L 2 L , I L 3L fundamental component of line currents on sile L.

Both the thresholds have definite time characteristic.

TRIP

t -I / U >

t -I / U >>

I -I / U > I -I / U >> IL t-int-F51V.ai

General operation time characteristic for the voltage controlled overcurrent elements - 51V

The current-voltage trip characteristics of the protective device may be selected from two types:
• voltage controlled, where the current threshold of the protective device is changed from an ad-
justable value corresponding to operation under load (I-I/U > def for the first threshold, I-I/U >> def for
the second threshold) to a lower value corresponding to short-circuiting (K∙I-I/U > def for the first
threshold, K∙I-I/U >> def for the second threshold with adjustable reduction factor K common to both
thresholds), when the voltage drops below an adjustable threshold (U-I/U < common to both thresh-
olds). In addition, the corresponding trip times may be adjusted for each of the two thresholds.
The voltage-controlled feature is used when several generators are connected in parallel over the
same bar. Current above the associated pickup value is detected and a start is issued. After expiry
of the associated operate time (t I-I/U >def, t I-I/U >> def), a trip command is issued; if instead the cur-
rent drops below the threshold, the element is restored.
Current threshold Current threshold

I-I/U> I-I/U>>

KI-I/U> KI-I/U>>

U-I/U< Voltage U-I/U< Voltage

Voltage restraint thresholds 51V-VC_char.ai

• voltage restraint, where, for the first threshold, if the voltage exceeds the threshold U-I/U-1< then
the adjustable current threshold I-I/U > def is enabled, if the voltage is less than the threshold U-I/U-2<
then the threshold K∙I-I/U > def with adjustable reduction factor K is enabled, whilst if the voltage lies
between the thresholds U-I/U-1< and U-I/U-2< then the current threshold varies between the values
I-I/U > def and I-I/U > def proportionally to the measured voltage. The same for the second threshold;
the current threshold I-I/U >> def with the relevant reduction K∙I-I/U >> def are adjustable. The voltage
threshold U-I/U-1< and U-I/U-2< and reduction factor K adjustments are common to both the thresh-
olds. Current above the associated pickup value is detected and a start is issued. After expiry of
the associated operate time (t I-I/U > def, t I-I/U >> def), a trip command is issued; if instead the current
drops below the threshold, the element is restored. The voltage restraint feature is used when the

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 145

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 generator is connected to its own step-up transformer.
Current threshold Current threshold
First threshold Second threshold

I-I/U> I-I/U>>

KI-I/U> KI-I/U>>

U-I/U-2< U-I/U-1< Voltage U-I/U-2< U-I/U-1< Voltage

Voltage controlled thresholds 51V-VR_char.ai

All elements can be enabled or disabled by setting ON or OFF the State parameters inside the
Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Voltage controlled-restraint overcurrent 51V \ I-I/U> Element (I-I/U>> Ele-
ment) \ Definite time menus.

The trip of first element may be inhibited by the start of the second element by setting ON the Disable
I-I/U> by start I-I/U>> (I-I/U>disbyI-I/U>>) parameter available inside the Set \Profile A(or B) \
Voltage controlled-restraint overcurrent 51V \ I-I/U>> Element \ Setpoints menu.

Mode 51V> U-I/U < U-I/U-1< U-I/U-2 < K

Voltage controlled
Common configuration
Voltage restraint

State I-I/U>>def t -I/U>>def t -I/U>>RES State I-I/U>def t -I/U>def t -I/U>RES

I-I/U>> Element I-I/U> Element

U 12 , U 2 3 , U 3 1 I-I/U >> Tr ip U 12 , U 2 3 , U 3 1 I-I/U > Tr ip
I L1 , I L 2 , I L 3 I-I/U >> S t ar t I L1 , I L 2 , I L 3 I-I/U > S t ar t
I-I/U > disby I-I/U >> I-I/U >> S t ar t ON=inhibit
& I-I/U > inhibi t ion

Block1 Block1 Block1 Block1

Block 2 Block 2 Block 2 Block 2
Block 3 BF Block 3 BF
General logic diagram of the voltage restraint-voltage controlled overcurrent elements - 51V
An adjustable reset time delay is provided for every threshold (t-I/U>RES, t-I/U>>RES), useful for coor-
dination with electromechanical relays, in order to improve sensitivity against swings between the
generator and the grid, or to reduce intermittent fault elimination times.

INPUT

t-I/U>RES t-I/U>RES t-I/U>RES

START I-I/U>
t-I/U>def t-I/U>def

TRIP I-I/U>

RESET

Voltage controlled-restraint overcurrent elements (51V) - Timers Timers-F51V.ai

Both the protection elements are blocked off whenever the VT supervision function is active, so
that no unwanted trip can arise if any fault on the VTs secondary circuits (break, fuse trip, etc) are
detect;[1]the Block functions enable from 74VT parameter (74VT-BK-EN) is available inside the
Set \ VT supervision -74VT menu.
Each overcurrent element can produce the Breaker Failure output if the I-I/U> BF, and/or I-I/U>
BF, parameters are set to ON. The parameters are available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Voltage
controlled-restraint overcurrent 51V \ I-I/U> Element (I-I/U>> Element) \ Setpoints menus.[2]

Note 1 The exhaustive treatment of the VT supervision function may be found inside the CONTROL AND MONITORING section.
Note 2 The common settings concerning the Breaker failure protection are adjustable inside the Breaker Failure - BF menu.

146 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 For every of the four thresholds the following block criteria are available:
Logical block (Block1)
If the I-I/U>BLK1 e/o I-I/U>>BLK1 enabling parameters are set to ON and a binary input is de-
signed for logical block (Block1), the concerning element is blocked off whenever the given input is
active.[1] The enabling parameters are available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Voltage controlled-
restraint overcurrent 51V \ I-I/U> Element (I-I/U>> Element) \ Setpoints menus, while the Block1
function must be assigned to the selected binary input inside the Set \ Board1(2) inputs \ Binary input
IN1-1...INx-x) menus.

Selective block (Block2)

All along the protective elements the selective block may be set.
The logic selectivity function may be performed by means any combination of the following I/O:
• One committed pilot wire input (BLIN1).
• One or more binary inputs designed for input selective block.
• One committed pilot wire output (BLOUT1).
• One or more output relays designed for output selective block.
Only when the committed pilot wire are used the continuity check of the pilot wire link is active.
Use of committed pilot wire input BLIN1:
• The protection is blocked off according the selectivity block criteria when the input BLIN1 is active.
The information about phase or phase+earth block may be select programming the ModeBLIN1
parameter inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Selective block-BLOCK2 \ Selective block IN menus.

Use of binary inputs:

• If the I-I/U>BLK2IN and/or I-I/U>>BLK2IN parameters are set to ON and a binary input is
designed for selective block (Block2), the protection is blocked off by phase elements (Block2 Iph)
or by any protection element (Block2 Iph/IE) according the selectivity block criteria.[2] The enable
I-I/U>BLK2IN and/or I-I/U>>BLK2IN parameters are available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B)
\ Voltage controlled-restraint overcurrent 51V \ I-I/U> Element (I-I/U>> Element) \ Setpoints menus,
while the Block2 Iph and Block2 Iph/IE functions must be assigned to the selected binary inputs
inside the Set \ Board1(2) inputs \ Binary input IN1-1...INx-x) menus.

Use of committed pilot wire output BLOUT1:

• The information about phase or phase+earth block may be select programming the ModeBLOUT1
parameter (OFF - ON IPh - ON IPh/IE - ON IE) inside Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Selective block-
BLOCK2 \ Selective block OUT menus.

Use of output relay:

• If the I-I/U>BLK2OUT and/or I-I/U>>BLK2OUT enable parameters are set to ON and a out-
put relay is designed for selective block (Block2), the protection issues a block output by phase ele-
ments (BLK2OUT-Iph) or by any protection element (BLK2OUT-Iph/IE), whenever the given element
(Start) becomes active. The enable I-I/U>BLK2OUT and/or I-I/U>>BLK2OUT parameters
(ON or OFF) are available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Voltage controlled-restraint overcurrent
51V \ I-I/U> Element (I-I/U>> Element) \ Setpoints menus, while the BLK2OUT-Iph-K, BLK2OUT-
Iph/IE-K and/or BLK2OUT-IE-K output relays and LEDs (BLK2OUT-Iph-L, BLK2OUT-Iph/
IE-L e/o BLK2OUT-IE-L) must be select inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Selective block-BLOCK2
\ Selective block OUT menu.

Block3
The 51V elements are enabled with sampling frequency equivalent to the nominal frequency fn
when:
• all the phase voltages UL1, UL2 , UL3 are lower than 1% En or
• all the phase currents IL1L , IL2L , IL3L are lower than 15% In.

Note 1 The exhaustive treatment of the logical block (Block 1) function may be found in the “Logic Block” paragraph inside CONTROL AND MONITOR-
ING section
Note 2 The exhaustive treatment of the selective block (Block 2) function may be found in the “Selective Block” paragraph inside CONTROL AND
MONITORING section

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 147

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 F_51V-VC_S1.ai

K
U-I/U <
I-I/U>def KI -I/U> “U ≤ U-I/U<” “U > U-I/U<”
I -I/U>

U12 U12 ≤U-I/U<

I-I/U> Start
IL1L IL1L > threshold &
I-I/U>ST-K

TRIPPING M ATRIX
I-I/U>ST-L

(LED+REL AYS)
U23 t-I/U>RES
U23 ≤U-I/U< t-I/U>def
IL2L IL2L > threshold t-I/U>RES
& ≥1 t-I/U>def
0 T I-I/U>TR-K
T 0 I-I/U>TR-L
RESET

U 31 I-I/U> Trip
U31 ≤U-I/U<

IL3L IL3L > threshold &

from I-51V>> element (ON≡Inhibit)

I-51V> inhibition
≥1

VT fault (74VT)
74VT Block
(=0 without fault)

I-I/U> element (51V) Block diagram

Block1, Block2

I-I/U> Trip
BF Enable (ON≡Enable) & I-I/U>_OUT towards BF logic
BF Element
Voltage controlled overcurrent (51V) - First element logic diagram

148 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 Enable (ON≡Enable)
I-I/U>BLK1
&
Start I-I/U> & BLK1I-I/U>
&
Block1 Logic INx t ON INx t OFF Trip I-I/U>

n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 Block1, Block2

n.o. Block1
T 0 0 T
Binary input INx & BLK2IN I-I/U>
Block1

Block2 input enable (ON≡Enable)

I-I/U>BLK2IN
&
ModeBLIN1
OFF
ON IPh
BLK2IN-Iph
BLIN1
Pilot wire input ON IPh/IE

TRIPPING M ATRIX
(LED+REL AYS)
ON IE Iph Block2
FROM PHASE PROTECTIONS tB-K
tB-L
Logic t B-Iph
INx t ON INx t OFF
Block2 IPh
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 t B-Iph
≥1
n.o. T 0 0 T 0 T ≥1 tB timeout
Binary input INx
FROM ANY PROTECTIONS

Logic INx t ON INx t OFF t B-IE

Block2 IPh/IE
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 t B-IE
≥1 BLK2IN-IE
n.o. T 0 0 T 0 T
Binary input INx
FROM GROUND PROTECTIONS

Logic INx t ON INx t OFF

Block2 IE
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 IE Block2
n.o. T 0 0 T
Binary input INx Block2 input

Start I-I/U>
I-I/U> Block2 OUT ST-Iph BLK2 BLK2OUT-Iph
Block2 output & BLK2OUT-IPh-K
I-I/U>BLK2OUT
TRIPPING M ATRIX

(ON≡Enable)
(LED+REL AYS)

t F-IPh BLK2OUT-IPh-L
BLK2OUT-IE
t F-IPh BLK2OUT-IE-K
All other BLK2OUT outputs ≥1 t F-IPh/IE
0 T BLK2OUT-IE-L
of phase elements BLK2OUT-Iph/IE
t F-IPh/IE BLK2OUT-IPh/IE-K
(see BLK2OUT chapter) ≥1
0 T BLK2OUT-IPh/IE-L
A = OFF
t F-IE B = ON IPh
ModeBLOUT1 C = ON IPh/IE
All BLK2OUT outputs D = ON IE
t F-IE A
of ground elements ≥1 B BLOUT1
0 T Pilot wire output
(see BLK2OUT chapter) C
ST-IE BLK2 D
Block2 output

Voltage dependant overcurrent (51V) - Logic diagram of the blocking signals concerning the first element 50-51S3_BL-diagram.ai

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 149

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 (ON≡Inhibit)
I-I/U> disbyl-I/U>>
& I-51V> inhibition
Start I/51V>>
K
U-I/U <
I-I/U>>def KI -I/U>> “U ≤ U-I/U<” “U > U-I/U<”
I -I/U>>

U12 U12 ≤ U-I/U<

I-I/U>> Start
IL1L IL1L > threshold &
I-I/U>>ST-K

TRIPPING M ATRIX
I-I/U>>ST-L

(LED+REL AYS)
U23 t-I/U>>RES
U23 ≤ U-I/U< t-I/U>>def
IL2L IL2L > threshold tI-51V>RES
& ≥1 t-I/U>>def
0 T I-I/U>>TR-K
T 0 I-I/U>>TR-L
RESET

U 31 I-I/U>> Trip
U31 ≤ U-I/U<

IL3L IL3L > threshold &

VT fault (74VT)
74VT Block
(=0 without fault)

I-I/U>> element (51V) Block diagram

Block1, Block2

I-I/U>> Trip
BF Enable (ON≡Enable) & I-I/U>>_OUT towards BF logic
BF Element

Voltage controlled overcurrent (51V) - Second element logic diagram F_51V-VC_S2.ai

150 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 Enable (ON≡Enable)
I-I/U>>BLK1
&
Start I-I/U>> & BLK1I-I/U>>
&
Block1 Logic INx t ON INx t OFF Trip I-I/U>>

n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 Block1, Block2

n.o. Block1
T 0 0 T
Binary input INx & BLK2IN I-I/U>>
Block1

Block2 input enable (ON≡Enable)

I-I/U>>BLK2IN
&
ModeBLIN1
OFF
ON IPh
BLK2IN-Iph
BLIN1
Pilot wire input ON IPh/IE

TRIPPING M ATRIX
(LED+REL AYS)
ON IE Iph Block2
FROM PHASE PROTECTIONS tB-K
tB-L
Logic t B-Iph
INx t ON INx t OFF
Block2 IPh
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 t B-Iph
≥1
n.o. T 0 0 T 0 T ≥1 tB timeout
Binary input INx
FROM ANY PROTECTIONS

Logic INx t ON INx t OFF t B-IE

Block2 IPh/IE
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 t B-IE
≥1 BLK2IN-IE
n.o. T 0 0 T 0 T
Binary input INx
FROM GROUND PROTECTIONS

Logic INx t ON INx t OFF

Block2 IE
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 IE Block2
n.o. T 0 0 T
Binary input INx Block2 input

Start I-I/U>>
I-I/U> Block2 OUT ST-Iph BLK2 BLK2OUT-Iph
Block2 output & BLK2OUT-IPh-K
I-I/U>>BLK2OUT
TRIPPING M ATRIX

(ON≡Enable)
(LED+REL AYS)

t F-IPh BLK2OUT-IPh-L
BLK2OUT-IE
t F-IPh BLK2OUT-IE-K
All other BLK2OUT outputs ≥1 t F-IPh/IE
0 T BLK2OUT-IE-L
of phase elements BLK2OUT-Iph/IE
t F-IPh/IE BLK2OUT-IPh/IE-K
(see BLK2OUT chapter) ≥1
0 T BLK2OUT-IPh/IE-L
A = OFF
t F-IE B = ON IPh
ModeBLOUT1 C = ON IPh/IE
All BLK2OUT outputs D = ON IE
t F-IE A
of ground elements ≥1 B BLOUT1
0 T Pilot wire output
(see BLK2OUT chapter) C
ST-IE BLK2 D
Block2 output

Voltage dependant overcurrent (51V) - Logic diagram of the blocking signals concerning the second element 51VS2_BL-diagram.ai

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 151

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
— Residual overcurrent - 50N.1/51N.1, 50N.2/51N.2 or high impedance restricted earth fault - 87NHIZ.1, 87NHIZ.2 side 1,2
Preface
The relay can be typically used in radial or meshed MV and LV networks as feeder, power trans-
former protection or motor-generators with neutral connected to ground through an impedance.
Alternatively, by connecting the branch measurement current input to the same CT secondary circuit
measuring the residual current on the generator line side and star point, it is possible to use the
same protective device as a high impedance restricted earth fault to selectively clear all ground
faults within the single area delimited by the measurement CT. This protective element, which re-
quires a suitable stabilization resistor and possibly a non-linear METROSIL resistor in order to limit
over-voltages in the secondary circuit in case of internal faults, is useful when several generators
are connected in parallel on the same busbar, so as to disconnect only the generator with the stator
ground fault.

L1
L2
L3

P2
S2
S1
P1 P2
P2 S2
S2
S1
S1 P1
P1
P2
S2
S1
P1

GS GS
3 ∼ 3 ∼
P1 Rs A7
S1
Ru IE 87NHIZ
S2 A8
P2

87N-sch.ai
Restricted earth fault (87N) for parallel connection of generators with earthing resistor

Three operation thresholds, independently adjustable with adjustable delay are available.
The first one may be programmed with definite or inverse time according the IEC and ANSI/IEEE
standard, as well as with EM curve.
The second and third thresholds with definite time.
For each threshold a reset time can be set useful to reduce the clearing time for intermittent faults.
The first threshold trip may be inhibited by start of the second and/or third threshold.
Similarly the second threshold trip may be inhibited by start of the third threshold.
Operation and settings
The residual fundamental frequency current is compared with the setting value. Current above the
associated pickup value is detected and a start is issued. After expiry of the associated operate time
a trip command is issued; if instead the current drops below the threshold, the element is restored.
The first threshold may be programmed with definite or inverse time according the following char-
acteristic curves[1]:
• Standard Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type A or SIT): t = 0.14 · t E1>inv / [(IE1/IE1>inv)0.02 - 1]
• Very Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type B or VIT): t = 13.5 · t E1>inv / [(IE1/IE1>inv) - 1]
• Very Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type B or LIT): t = 120 · t E1>inv / [(IE1/IE1>inv) - 1]
• Extremely Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type C or EIT): t = 80 · t E1>inv / [(IE1/IE1>inv)2 - 1]
• Moderately Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type MI): t = t E1>inv · {0.01 / [(IE1/IE1>inv)0.02 - 1] + 0.023}
• Very Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type VI): t = t E1>inv · {3.922 / [(IE1/IE1>inv)2 - 1] + 0.098}
• Extremely Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type EI): t = t E1>inv · {5.64 / [(IE1/IE1>inv)2 - 1] + 0.024}
• Electromechanical (EM): = t E1>inv · {0.28 / [-0236 · (IE1/IE1>inv)-1 + 0.339]}
where:
t: operate time
IE1>: pickup value
t E1>inv : operate time setting
Note 1 The formulas concern to the 50N.1/51N.1 protection on the side 1 and similarly for formulas of to the 50N.2/51N.2 protection on the side 2

152 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 t

t E1 >
TRIP

t E1 >>

t E1 >>>

I E1 > I E1 >> I E1 >>> I E1 t-int-F50N-51N.ai

General operation time characteristic for the residual overcurrent elements - 50N.1/51N.1
For all inverse time characteristics, following data applies:
• Asymptotic reference value (minimum pickup value): 1.1 IE1>
• Minimum operate time: 0.1 s
• Range where the equation is valid:[1] 1.1 ≤ IE1/IE1>inv ≤ 20
• If IE1>inv pickup ≥ 2.5 IE1n, the upper limit is 10 IE1n
For all definite time elements the upper limit for measuring is 10 IE1n.

All residual overcurrent elements can be enabled or disabled by setting ON or OFF the IE1> En-
able, IE1>> Enable and/or IE1>>> Enable parameters inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Re-
sidual overcurrent-50N.1/51N.1 \ IE1> Element (IE1>> Element, IE1>>> Element) \ Setpoints menus.
The first overcurrent element can be programmed with definite or inverse time characteristic by
setting the IE1>Curve parameter (DEFINITE, IEC/BS A, IEC/BS B, IEC/BS C, ANSI/IEE MI,
ANSI/IEE VI, ANSI/IEE EI, EM) available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Residual overcurrent-
50N.1/51N.1 \ IE1> Element \ Setpoints menu.
The trip of IE1> element may be inhibited by the start of the second and/or third element (IE1>>,
IE1>>>) by setting ON the Disable IE1> by start IE1>>, Disable IE1> by start IE1>>> (IE1>disbyIE1>>,
IE1>disbyIE1>>>) parameters available inside the Set \Profile A(or B) \ Residual overcurrent-
50N.1/51N.1 \ IE1>> Element (IE1>>> Element) \ Setpoints menus.
Similarly the trip of the IE >> element may be inhibited by start of the third element (IE >>>) by setting
ON the Disable IE>> by start IE>>> (IE>>disbyIE>>>) parameter available inside the Set \ Profile
A(or B) \ Residual overcurrent-50N.1/51N.1 \ IE1>>> Element \ Setpoints menu.

All the named parameters can be set separately for Profile A and Profile B
An adjustable reset time delay is provided for every threshold t E1>RES, t E1>>RES, t E1>>>RES).

INPUT

t E1>RES t E1>RES t E1>RES

IE1> Start
t E1> t E1>

IE1> Trip

RESET
t
IE> element residual overcurrent (50N.1/51N.1) - Timers Timers-F50N-51N.ai

Breaker failure (BF)

Each residual overcurrent element can produce the Breaker Failure output if the IE1> BF, IE1>>
BF and/or IE1>>> BF parameters are set to ON. The parameters are available inside the Set \ Pro-
file A(or B) \ Residual overcurrent-50N.1/51N.1 \ IE1> Element (IE1>> Element, IE1>>> Element) \ Set-
points menus.[2]
Note 1 When the input value is more than 20 times the set point , the operate time is limited to the value corresponding to 20 times the set point
Note 2 The common settings concerning the Breaker failure protection are adjustable inside the Breaker Failure - BF menu.

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 153

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 IE1> Enable IE1>Curve IE1CLP>Mode tE1CLP> tE1>RES IE1> def IE1CLP> def tE1>def IE1>inv IE1CLP> inv tE1>inv

IE1> Element
IE1 Start IE1>
Trip IE1>

≥ IE1> inhibition IE1>2ndh-REST CLPIE1>

IE1>BF
& IE1>BF
Start I2ndh>
Trip IE1> &
IE1>BLK1 Start IE1>
BLK1IE1>
&
&
Block1

IE1>BLK2IN Start IE1>

BLK2INIE>
&
&
Block2
IE1>BLK2OUT
BLK2OUT
IE1>BLK4 Start IE1> &
BLK4OUT
Start IE1> &

IE1>> Enable IE1CLP>>Mode tE1CLP>> tE1>>RES IE1>> def IE1CLP>> def tE1>>def

IE1>> Element Start IE1>>

IE1
Trip IE1>>

IE1>>2ndh-REST IE1> disbyIE>> CLPIE1>>

IE1>> inhibition
& IE1>>BF &
Start I2ndh> Start IE1>>
IE1>>BF
&
IE1>> Trip
IE>>BLK1
Start IE1>> BLK1IE1>>
&
&
Block1

IE1>>BLK2IN
Start IE1>> BLK2INIE>>
&
Block2 &
IE1>>BLK2OUT
BLK2OUT
IE1>>BLK4 Start IE1>> &
BLK4OUT
Start IE1>> &

IE1>>> Enable IE1CLP>>>Mode tE1CLP>>> tE1>>>RES IE1>>> def IE1CLP>>>def tE1>>>def

IE1>>> Element Start IE1>>>

IE1
IE1>>>2ndh-REST Trip IE1>>>
IE> disbyIE>>>
& CLPIE1>>>
Start I2ndh> IE1>> disbyIE>>> &
Start IE>>>
&
IE1>>>BLK1 Start IE1>>> Start IE>>>
BLK1IE1>>>
&
&
Block1
IE1>>>BF
IE1>>>BF
&
IE1>>>BLK2IN Trip IE1>>>
Start IE1>>> BLK2INIE1>>>
&
&
Block2
IE1>>>BLK2OUT
IE1>>>BLK4 BLK2OUT
&
Start IE1>>>
BLK4OUT
&
Start IE1>>>

General logic diagram of the residual overcurrent elements side 1 - 50N.1/51N.1 all-F50N-51N.ai

154 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 Second harmonic restraint
For all overcurrent elements, a block from the second harmonic restraint may be set by setting ON the
IE1>2ndh-REST, IE1>>2ndh-REST, IE1>>>2ndh-REST parameters inside the Set \ Profile
A(or B) \ Residual overcurrent-50N.1/51N.1 \ IE1> Element (IE1>> Element, IE1>>> Element) \ Set-
points menus.

Cold load pickup

If the CLP function (Cold Load Pick-up) is enabled for element blocking, the selected threshold may
be blocked for an adjustable time interval, starting from the circuit breaker closure.
This operating mode may be select by setting ON-Element blocking the IE1CLP> Mode,
IE1CLP>> Mode, IE1CLP>>> Mode parameters.
If the CLP function (Cold Load Pick-up) is enabled for threshold change, the selected threshold may
be changed for an adjustable time interval, starting from the circuit breaker closure.
This operating mode (ON-Change setting = IE1CLP> Mode, IE1CLP>> Mode, IE1CLP>>>
Mode) and the concerning operating time within the CLP (tE1CLP>, tE1CLP>>, tE1CLP>>>)
may be adjusted inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Residual overcurrent-50N.1/51N.1 \ IE> Element
(IE1>> Element, IE1>>> Element) \ Setpoints menus, whereas the operating thresholds within the
CLP ( IE1CLP>def, IE1CLP>inv,....) may be adjusted inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Residual
overcurrent-50N.1/51N.1 \ IE1> Element (IE1>> Element, IE1>>> Element) \ Definite time (Inverse
time) menus.

For every of the four thresholds the following block criteria are available:
Logical block (Block1)
If the IE1>BLK1, IE1>>BLK1 and/or IE1>>>BLK1 enabling parameters are set to ON and a
binary input is designed for logical block (Block1), the concerning element is blocked off whenever
the given input is active.[1] The enabling parameters are available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Re-
sidual overcurrent-50N.1/51N.1 \ IE1> Element (IE1>> Element, IE1>>> Element) \ Setpoints menus,
while the Block1 function must be assigned to the selected binary input inside the Set \ Board1(2)
inputs \ Binary input IN1-1...INx-x) menus.

Selective block (Block2)

All along the protective elements the selective block may be set.
The logic selectivity function may be performed by means any combination of the following I/O:
• One committed pilot wire input (BLIN1).
• One or more binary inputs designed for input selective block.
• One committed pilot wire output (BLOUT1).
• One or more output relays designed for output selective block.
Only when the committed pilot wire are used the continuity check of the pilot wire link is active

Use of committed pilot wire input BLIN1:

• The protection is blocked off according the selectivity block criteria when the input BLIN1 is active.
The information about phase or phase+earth block may be select programming the ModeBLIN1
parameter inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Selective block-BLOCK2 \ Selective block IN menus.

Use of binary inputs:

• If the IE1>BLK2IN, IE1>>BLK2IN and/or IE1>>>BLK2IN parameters are set to ON and
a binary input is designed for selective block (Block2), the protection is blocked off by phase ele-
ments (Block2 Iph) or by any protection element (Block2 Iph/IE) according the selectivity block
criteria.[2] The enable IE1>BLK2IN, IE1>>BLK2IN and/or IE1>>>BLK2IN parameters are
available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Residual overcurrent-50N.1/51N.1 \ IE1> Element (IE1>>
Element, IE1>>> Element) \ Setpoints menus, while the Block2 Iph and Block2 Iph/IE functions
must be assigned to the selected binary inputs inside the Set \ Board1(2) inputs \ Binary input IN1-
1...INx-x) menus.

Use of committed pilot wire output BLOUT1:

• The information about phase or phase+earth block may be select programming the ModeBLOUT1
parameter (OFF - ON IPh - ON IPh/IE - ON IE) inside Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Selective block-
BLOCK2 \ Selective block OUT menus.

Use of output relay:

• If the IE1>BLK2OUT, IE1>>BLK2OUT and/or IE1>>>BLK2OUT enable parameters are
set to ON and a output relay is designed for selective block (Block2), the protection issues a
block output by phase elements (BLK2OUT-Iph) or by any protection element (BLK2OUT-Iph/IE),
whenever the given element (Start IE>, Start IE>>and/or Start IE>>>) becomes active. The enable
IE1>BLK2OUT, IE1>>BLK2OUT, and/or IE1>>>BLK2OUT parameters (ON or OFF) are
available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Residual overcurrent-50N.1/51N.1 \ IE1> Element (IE1>>
Element, IE1>>> Element) \ Setpoints menus, while the BLK2OUT-Iph-K, BLK2OUT-Iph/IE-
K and/or BLK2OUT-IE-K output relays and LEDs (BLK2OUT-Iph-L, BLK2OUT-Iph/IE-L e/o
BLK2OUT-IE-L) must be select inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Selective block-BLOCK2 \ Selec-
tive block OUT menu.

Note 1 The description of the logical block (Block 1) function may be found in the “Logic Block” paragraph inside CONTROL AND MONITORING section
Note 2 The exhaustive treatment of the selective block (Block 2) function may be found in the “Selective Block” paragraph inside CONTROL AND
MONITORING section

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 155

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
Internal selective block (Block4)
As well as to send or transmit a selective block toward other protective relays, each protective
element may be enabled for receive or transmit a selective block from/to other internal protective
elements.[1]
The internal selective block of one or more element concerning the residual overcurrent function
may be enabled/disabled by means the IE1>BLK4, IE1>>BLK4 and/or IE1>>>BLK4 param-
eters (virtual input and output common to all protective thresholds); the following operating modes
are available:
• IN - the element is enabled to receive the selective block from an internal input.
• OUT - the element is enabled to send the selective block to an internal output.
• OFF - the element is disabled to send/receive the internal selective block.
Transmission and reception for the same element is not allowed, so any stall situation due to wrong
setting is avoided.
The internal selective block can work together with an external selective block from other protective
relays (Block2).

Nota 1 The exhaustive treatment of the internal selective block (Block 4) function may be found in the “Internal selective block” paragraph inside
CONTROL AND MONITORING section.

156 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 ON≡Enable IE1> residual overcurrent element
IE1> Enable
ON≡Inhibit
IE1> inhibition
(from IE1>> and/or IE1>>> residual overcurrent element)

Start IE1>
I E1> def State

&
I E1 ≥ I E1> def IE1>ST-K
(Pickup outside CLP) IE1>ST-L

TRIPPING M ATRIX
≥1

(LED+REL AYS)
I E1> inv State t E1>inv
I E1> Curve t E1>RES
I E1 & t E1>def
I E1 ≥ I E1> inv t E1>RES
& t E1>
T 0 0 T IE1>TR-K
I E1C L P >def I E1C L P >inv T 0 IE1>TR-L
RESET
(Pickup within CLP)
I E1 ≥ I E 1 CL P >
Trip IE1>

A =“0 or OFF” A =“1”

≥1 CLP I E1>
t E1C L P >
A = ON - Change setting
A B = OFF
t E1CLP> Output t E1CLP> B
CB-State C = ON - Element blocking
T 0 C

≥1
IE1CLP>Mode

2nd harmonic restraint enable (ON≡Enable)

IE1>2ndh-REST
&
Start I2ndh>

IE1> overcurrent element (50N.1/51N.1) Block diagram

Block1, Block2, Block4

Trip IE1>
BF Enable (ON≡Enable) & IE1> BF towards BF logic
IE1>BF

CB State CB OPEN CB CLOSED CB OPEN

tE1CLP> 0.1 s

Output tE1CLP>

t
HIGH THRESHOLD/ LOW THRESHOLD/ HIGH THRESHOLD/
BLOCK UNBLOCK BLOCK

Residual overcurrent (50N.1/51N.1) - First element logic diagram (IE1>) Fun_50N-51NS1.ai

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 157

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 Start IE1 >
&
Enable (ON≡Enable)
IE1>BLK1 Trip IE1 > & BLK1IE1>
&

& BLK4IN IE1>

Block1 Logic INx t ON INx t OFF Block4

n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 Block1, Block2, Block4

n.o. Block1
T 0 0 T
Binary input INx & BLK2IN IE1>
Block1

Block2 input enable (ON≡Enable)

IE1>BLK2IN
&
ModeBLIN1
OFF BLK2IN-Iph
BLIN1 ON IPh

TRIPPING M ATRIX
Pilot wire input

(LED+REL AYS)
ON IPh/IE Iph Block2
ON IE
tB-K
tB-L
Logic t B-Iph
INx t ON INx t OFF
Block2 IPh
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 t B-Iph
≥1
n.o. T 0 0 T 0 T ≥1 tB timeout
Binary input INx
FROM ANY PROTECTIONS

Logic INx t ON INx t OFF t B-IE

Block2 IPh/IE
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 t B-IE
≥1 BLK2IN-IE
n.o. T 0 0 T 0 T
Binary input INx
FROM EARTH FAULT PROTECTIONS

Logic INx t ON INx t OFF

Block2 IE
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 IE Block2
n.o. T 0 0 T
Binary input INx Block2 input

ST-Iph BLK2 BLK2OUT-Iph

All BLK2OUT outputs
BLK2OUT-IPh-K
TRIPPING M ATRIX

of phase elements ≥1
(LED+REL AYS)
t F-IPh BLK2OUT-IPh-L
(see BLK2OUT chapter) BLK2OUT-IE
t F-IPh BLK2OUT-IE-K
0 T t F-IPh/IE BLK2OUT-IE-L
BLK2OUT-Iph/IE
Start IE1 > t F-IPh/IE BLK2OUT-IPh/IE-K
IE1> Block2 OUT ≥1
Block2 output & 0 T BLK2OUT-IPh/IE-L
IE1>BLK2OUT
(ON≡Enable) A = OFF
t F-IE B = ON IPh
ModeBLOUT1 C = ON IPh/IE
All other BLK2OUT outputs ≥1 A D = ON IE
t F-IE
of ground elements B BLOUT1
0 T Pilot wire output
C
(see BLK2OUT chapter)
ST-IE BLK2 D
Block2 output

A = IN A = IN
IE1>BLK4 B = OFF t FI-Iph B = OFF IE1>BLK4
C = OUT ST-Iph BLK4 C = OUT
“0” A Block4
B IE1> Block4 I/O t FI-Iph IE1> Block4 OUT A
“0”
Start IE > C 0 T “0” B
“0” C
Block4 enable
t FI-IE ≥1
50N-51NS1_BL-diagram.ai

Block4 OUT
All other BLK4 I/O ≥1 All BLK4 I/O
t FI-IE
of ground elements of phase elements ≥1
0 T
(see BLK4 chapter) (see BLK4chapter) ST-IE BLK4
Block4
Residual overcurrent (50N.1/51N.1) - Logic diagram of the blocking signals concerning the first element (IE1>) sheet 2 of 2

158 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 ON≡Enable IE1>> residual overcurrent element (ON≡Inhibit)
IE1>> Enable IE1> disbylE>>
& IE1> inhibition
Start IE1>>
ON≡Inhibit
IE1>> inhibition
(from IE1>>> residual overcurrent element)
Start IE1>>
Start IE1>>

IE1>>ST-K
IE1>>ST-L

TRIPPING M ATRIX
(LED+REL AYS)
I E1>>def State
(Pickup outside CLP)
& t E 1 >>RES
t E 1 >>def
I E1 ≥ I E1>> def
t E 1 >>RES
& t E 1 >>
I E1 0 T IE1>>TR-K
I E1C L P >>def T 0 IE1>>TR-L
RESET
(Pickup within CLP)
Trip IE1>>
I E1 ≥ I E1CL P > > d e f

A =“0 or OFF” A =“1”

≥1 CLP IE1>>

t E1C L P >>
A = ON - Change setting
A B = OFF
t ECLP>> Output t ECLP>> B C = ON - Element blocking
CB-State
T 0 C

≥1
IE1CLP>>Mode

2nd harmonic restraint enable (ON≡Enable)

IE1>>2ndh-REST
&
Start I2ndh>

IE1>> overcurrent element (50N.1/51N.1) Block diagram

Block1, Block2, Block4

Trip IE1>>
BF Enable (ON≡Enable) & IE1>> BF towards BF logic
IE1>>BF

CB State CB OPEN CB CLOSED CB OPEN

tE1CLP>> 0.1 s

Output tE1CLP>>

t
HIGH THRESHOLD/ LOW THRESHOLD/ HIGH THRESHOLD/
BLOCK UNBLOCK BLOCK

Residual overcurrent (50N.1/51N.1) - Second element logic diagram (IE1>>) (Sheet 1 of 2) Fun_50N-51NS2.ai

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 159

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 Start IE1 >>
&
Enable (ON≡Enable)
IE1>>BLK1 Trip IE1 >> & BLK1IE1>>
&

& BLK4IN IE1>>

Block1 Logic INx t ON INx t OFF Block4

n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 Block1, Block2, Block4

n.o. Block1
T 0 0 T
Binary input INx & BLK2IN IE1>>
Block1

Block2 input enable (ON≡Enable)

IE1>>BLK2IN
&
ModeBLIN1
OFF BLK2IN-Iph
BLIN1 ON IPh

TRIPPING M ATRIX
Pilot wire input

(LED+REL AYS)
ON IPh/IE Iph Block2
ON IE
tB-K
tB-L
Logic t B-Iph
INx t ON INx t OFF
Block2 IPh
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 t B-Iph
≥1
n.o. T 0 0 T 0 T ≥1 tB timeout
Binary input INx
FROM ANY PROTECTIONS

Logic INx t ON INx t OFF t B-IE

Block2 IPh/IE
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 t B-IE
≥1 BLK2IN-IE
n.o. T 0 0 T 0 T
Binary input INx
FROM EARTH FAULT PROTECTIONS

Logic INx t ON INx t OFF

Block2 IE
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 IE Block2
n.o. T 0 0 T
Binary input INx Block2 input

All BLK2OUT outputs ST-Iph BLK2 BLK2OUT-Iph

BLK2OUT-IPh-K
≥1
TRIPPING M ATRIX
of phase elements
(LED+REL AYS)
t F-IPh BLK2OUT-IPh-L
(see BLK2OUT chapter) BLK2OUT-IE
t F-IPh BLK2OUT-IE-K
0 T t F-IPh/IE BLK2OUT-IE-L
BLK2OUT-Iph/IE
Start IE1 >> t F-IPh/IE BLK2OUT-IPh/IE-K
IE1>> Block2 ≥1
Block2 output & 0 T BLK2OUT-IPh/IE-L
IE1>>BLK2OUT
(ON≡Enable) A = OFF
t F-IE B = ON IPh
ModeBLOUT1 C = ON IPh/IE
All other BLK2OUT outputs ≥1
t F-IE A D = ON IE
of ground elements B BLOUT1
0 T Pilot wire output
(see BLK2OUT chapter) C
ST-IE BLK2 D
Block2 output

A = IN A = IN
IE1>>BLK4 B = OFF t FI-Iph B = OFF IE1>>BLK4
C = OUT ST-Iph BLK4 C = OUT
“0” A Block4
B IE1>> Block4 I/O t FI-Iph IE1>> Block4 A
“0”
Start IE1 >> C 0 T “0” B
“0” C
Block4 enable
t FI-IE ≥1 Block4 OUT
50N-51NS2_BL-diagram.ai

All other BLK4 I/O ≥1 All BLK4 I/O

t FI-IE
of ground elements of phase elements ≥1
0 T
(see BLK4 chapter) (see BLK4chapter) ST-IE1 BLK4
Block4

Residual overcurrent (50N.1/51N.1) - Logic diagram of the blocking signals concerning the second element (IE>>) Sheet 2 of 2

160 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 (ON≡Inhibit)
IE1>disbylE>>>
& IE1> inhibition
ON≡Enable IE1>>> residual overcurrent element Start IE>>>
IE1>>> Enable

(ON≡Inhibit)
IE1>>disbylE>>>
& IE1>> inhibition
Start IE1>>>

Start IE1>>>

Start IE1>>> IE1>>>ST-K

TRIPPING M ATRIX
I E 1 >>>def State IE1>>>ST-L

(LED+REL AYS)
(Pickup outside CLP)
& t E1>>>RES
t E1>>>def
I E ≥ I E>>> def
t E1>>>RES
& t E1>>>def
I E1 0 T IE1>>>TR-K
I E1C L P >>>def T 0 IE1>>>TR-L
RESET
(Pickup within CLP)
Trip IE1>>>
I E1 ≥ I E1CLP > > > d e f

A =“0 or OFF” A =“1”

≥1 CLP IE>>>
t E1C L P >>>
A = ON - Change setting
A B = OFF
t ECLP>>> Output t ECLP>>> B C = ON - Element blocking
CB-State
T 0 C

≥1
IE1CLP>>>Mode

2nd harmonic restraint enable (ON≡Enable)

IE1>>>2ndh-REST
&
Start I2ndh>

IE1>>> residual overcurrent element (50N.1/51N.1) Block diagram

Block1, Block2, Block4

Trip IE1>>>
BF Enable (ON≡Enable) & IE1>>> BF towards BF logic
IE1>>>BF

CB State CB OPEN CB CLOSED CB OPEN

tE1CLP>>> 0.1 s

Output tE1CLP>>>

t
HIGH THRESHOLD/ LOW THRESHOLD/ HIGH THRESHOLD/
BLOCK UNBLOCK BLOCK

Residual overcurrent (50N/51N) - Third element logic diagram (IE1>>>) Sheet 1 of 2 Fun_50N-51NS3.ai

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 161

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 Start IE1 >>>
&
Enable (ON≡Enable)
IE1>>>BLK1 Trip IE1 >>> & BLK1IE1>>>
&

& BLK4IN IE1>>>

Block1 Logic INx t ON INx t OFF Block4

n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 Block1, Block2, Block4

n.o. Block1
T 0 0 T
Binary input INx & BLK2IN IE1>>>
Block1

Block2 input enable (ON≡Enable)

IE1>>>BLK2IN
&
ModeBLIN1
OFF BLK2IN-Iph
BLIN1 ON IPh

TRIPPING M ATRIX
Pilot wire input

(LED+REL AYS)
ON IPh/IE Iph Block2
ON IE
tB-K
tB-L
Logic t B-Iph
INx t ON INx t OFF
Block2 IPh
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 t B-Iph
≥1
n.o. T 0 0 T 0 T ≥1 tB timeout
Binary input INx
FROM ANY PROTECTIONS

Logic INx t ON INx t OFF t B-IE

Block2 IPh/IE
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 t B-IE
≥1 BLK2IN-IE
n.o. T 0 0 T 0 T
Binary input INx
FROM EARTH FAULT PROTECTIONS

Logic INx t ON INx t OFF

Block2 IE
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 IE Block2
n.o. T 0 0 T
Binary input INx Block2 input

ST-Iph BLK2 BLK2OUT-Iph

All BLK2OUT outputs
BLK2OUT-IPh-K
TRIPPING M ATRIX
of phase elements ≥1
(LED+REL AYS)
t F-IPh BLK2OUT-IPh-L
(see BLK2OUT chapter) BLK2OUT-IE
t F-IPh BLK2OUT-IE-K
0 T t F-IPh/IE BLK2OUT-IE-L
BLK2OUT-Iph/IE
Start IE1 >>> t F-IPh/IE BLK2OUT-IPh/IE-K
IE1>>> Block2 OUT ≥1
Block2 output & 0 T BLK2OUT-IPh/IE-L
IE1>>>BLK2OUT A = OFF
(ON≡Enable)
t F-IE B = ON IPh
ModeBLOUT1 C = ON IPh/IE
All other BLK2OUT outputs ≥1 A D = ON IE
t F-IE
of ground elements B BLOUT1
0 T Pilot wire output
C
(see BLK2OUT chapter)
ST-IE BLK2 D
Block2 output

A = IN A = IN
IE1>>>BLK4 B = OFF t FI-Iph B = OFF IE1>>>BLK4
C = OUT ST-Iph BLK4 C = OUT
“0” A Block4
B IE1>>> Block4 I/O t FI-Iph IE1>>> Block4 OUT A
“0”
Start IE1 >>> C 0 T “0” B
“0” C
Block4 enable
t FI-IE ≥1
50N-51NS3_BL-diagram.ai

Block4 OUT
All other BLK4 I/O ≥1 All BLK4 I/O
t FI-IE
of ground elements of phase elements ≥1
0 T
(see BLK4 chapter) (see BLK4chapter) ST-IE1 BLK4
Block4
Residual overcurrent (50N.1/51N.1) - Logic diagram of the blocking signals concerning the third element (IE1>>>) Sheet 2 of 2

162 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
— Residual overcurrent - 50N(Comp)/51N(Comp) side H or side L[1]
Preface
The protection, which employs the residual current IEC measurement calculated vectorially from
the three phase currents, can be usefully employed in cases in which the residual current measured
directly is not available (for example when the core balance transformer in not available) or when
the high-impedance restricted earth fault differential protection is enabled.
Inside the Set \Profile A(or B) \ Residual overcurrent 50N(Comp)/51N(Comp) / Common configuration
menu, the side (L or H) where he residual current (IECH or IECL) is calculated can be selected.
Setting threshold are in p.u of phase rated current .
Operation and settings
The residual overcurrent protection compares the calculated critical component of residual current,
calculated as the sum of the instantaneous values of the phase currents on the selected side (H,
or L) with the setting thresholds (IEC>, IEC>>, IEC>>>). Current above the associated pickup value is
detected and a start is issued. After expiry of the associated operate time a trip command is issued;
if instead the current drops below the threshold, the element is restored. The first threshold may be
programmed with definite or inverse time according the following characteristic curves[2]:
• Standard Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type A or SIT): t = 0.14 · t EC >inv / [(IEC /IEC >inv)0.02 - 1]
• Very Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type B or VIT): t = 13.5 · t EC >inv / [(IEC /IEC >inv) - 1]
• Very Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type B or LIT): t = 120 · t EC >inv / [(IEC /IEC >inv) - 1]
• Extremely Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type C or EIT): t = 80 · tEC>inv / [(IEC/IEC>inv)2 - 1]
• Moderately Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type MI): t = tEC >inv · {0.01 / [(IEC /IEC >inv)0.02 - 1] + 0.023}
• Very Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type VI): t = t EC >inv · {3.922 / [(IEC /IEC >inv)2 - 1] + 0.098}
• Extremely Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type EI): t = tEC>inv · {5.64 / [(IEC/IEC>inv)2 - 1] + 0.024}
• Electromechanical (EM): t = t EC >inv · {0.28 / [-0236 · (IEC /IEC >inv)-1 + 0.339]}
• where:
t: operate time
IEC : calculated residual current (IECH for side H, IECL for side L)
t EC >inv : pickup value
t EC >inv : operate time setting

t EC > def - t EC > inv TRIP

t EC >> def

t EC >>> def

IEC > def IEC >> def IEC >>> def I EC

IEC > inv
General operation time characteristic for the calculated residual overcurrent elements
For all inverse time characteristics, following data applies:
• Asymptotic reference value (minimum pickup value): 1.1 IEC >inv
• Minimum operate time: 0.1 s
• Range where the equation is valid:[3] 1.1 ≤ IEC /IEC) >inv ≤ 20
• If IEC >inv ≥ 2.5 In(H,L)., the upper limit is 50 In(H,L)
For all definite time elements the upper limit for measuring is 50 In(H,L)
All residual elements can be enabled or disabled by setting ON or OFF the IEC> Enable, IEC>>
Enable e/o IEC>>> Enable parameters inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Calculated residual over-
current-50N(Comp)/51N(Comp) \ IEC> Element (IEC>> Element, IEC>>> Element) \ Setpoints menus.

The first overcurrent element can be programmed with definite or inverse time characteristic by
setting the IEC>Curve parameter (DEFINITE, IEC/BS A, IEC/BS B, IEC/BS C, ANSI/IEE MI,
ANSI/IEE VI, ANSI/IEE EI, EM) available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Calculated residual
overcurrent-50N(Comp)/51N(Comp) \ IEC> Element \ Setpoints menus.
The trip of IEC> element may be inhibited by the start of the second and/or third element (IEC>>, IE(H)>>>)
by setting ON the Disable IEC> by start IEC>>, Disable IEC> by start IEC>>> (IEC>disbyIEC>>,
IEC>disbyIEC>>>) parameters available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Calculated residual
overcurrent-50N(Comp)/51N(Comp) \ IEC>>(IEC>>>) Element \ Setpoints menus.
Similarly the trip of the IE(H)>> element may be inhibited by start of the third element (IE(H)>>>) by
Note 1 Inside diagrams and text the IEC is the current residual current calculated by the vector sum of the currents of the selected side (the H or L side)
Note 2 The formulas concern to the 50N.1/51N.1 protection on the side 1 and similarly for formulas of to the 50N.2/51N.2 protection on the side 2
Note 3 When the input value is more than 20 times the set point , the operate time is limited to the value corresponding to 20 times the set point

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 163

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 setting ON the Disable IE(H)>> by start IE(H)>>> (IE(H)>>disbyIE(H)>>>) parameter available
inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Calculated residual overcurrent-50N(Comp)/51N(Comp) side H \
IE(H)>>> Element \ Setpoints menus for side H element, the IE(L)>>disbyIE(L)>>> parameter
available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Calculated residual overcurrent-50N(Comp)/51N(Comp)
side L \ IE(L)>>> Element \ Setpoints menus for side L element and the IE(T)>>disbyIE(T)>>>
parameter available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Calculated residual overcurrent-50N(Comp)/
51N(Comp) side T \ IE(T)>>> Element \ Setpoints menus for side T element.

All the parameters can be set separately for Profile A and Profile B

E’ regolabile un tempo di ripristino costante per ciascuna delle soglie (t E(H) > RES, t E(H) >> RES,
t E(H) >>> RES per il lato H e t E(L) > RES, t E(L) >> RES, t E(L) >>> RES per il lato L).

INPUT

t EC>RES t EC>RES t EC>RES

IEC> Start

t EC t EC

IEC> Trip

RESET
t
IEC> element residual overcurrent 50N(Calc)/51N(Calc) - Timers

Breaker failure (BF)

Each calculated residual overcurrent element can produce the Breaker Failure output if the IEC>
BF, IEC>> BF e IEC>>> BF. are set to ON. The parameters are available inside the Set \ Profile
A(or B) \ Calculated residual overcurrent-50N(Comp)/51N(Comp) \ IEC> Element (IEC>> Element,
IEC>>> Element) \ Setpoints menus.[1]

Second harmonic restraint

For all elements, a block from the second harmonic restraint may be set by setting ON the IEC>2ndh-
REST, IEC>>2ndh-REST, IEC>>>2ndh-REST.
The parameters are available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Residual overcurrent-50N(Comp)/
51N(Comp) \ IEC> Element (IEC>> Element, IEC>>> Element) \ Setpoints menus.

Cold load pickup (CLP)

If the CLP function (Cold Load Pick-up) is enabled for element blocking, the element may be blocked
for an adjustable time interval, starting from circuit breaker closure.
If the CLP function (Cold Load Pick-up) is enabled for setting change, the selected threshold may be
changed for an adjustable time interval, starting from the circuit breaker closure.
The operating mode may be select by setting ON-Element blocking or ON-Change setting the
IECCLP> Mode, IECCLP>> Mode, IECCLP>>> Mode parameter.

The operating modes and the CLP Activation time parameters (tECCLP>, tECCLP>> e tEC-
CLP>>>) may be adjusted inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Residual overcurrent-50N(Comp)/
51N(Comp) \ IEC> Element (IEC>> Element, IEC>>> Element) \ Setpoints menus.
The threshold inside CLP (IECCLP>def, IECCLP>inv,....) can be set inside the Set \ Profile A(or B)
\ Residual overcurrent-50N(Comp)/51N(Comp) \ IEC> Element (IEC>> Element, IEC>>> Element) \ Def-
inite time (Inverse time) menus.

For every of the four thresholds the following block criteria are available:
Logical block (Block1)
If the IEC>BLK1, IEC>>BLK1 and/or IEC>>>BLK1 enabling parameters are set to ON and a
binary input is designed for logical block (Block1), the concerning element is blocked off whenever
the given input is active.[2] The enabling parameters are available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \
Residual overcurrent-50N(Comp)/51N(Comp) \ IEC> Element (IEC>> Element, IEC>>> Element) \ Set-
points menus, while the Block1 function must be assigned to the selected binary input inside the
Set \ Board1(2) inputs \ Binary input IN1-1...INx-x) menus .

Selective block (Block2)

All along the protective elements the selective block may be set.
The logic selectivity function may be performed by means any combination of the following I/O:
• One committed pilot wire input (BLIN1).
• One or more binary inputs designed for input selective block.
• One committed pilot wire output (BLOUT1).
Note 1 The common settings concerning the Breaker failure protection are adjustable inside the Breaker Failure - BF menu.
Note 2 The description of the logical block (Block 1) function may be found in the “Logic Block” paragraph inside CONTROL AND MONITORING section

164 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 • One or more output relays designed for output selective block.
Only when the committed pilot wire are used the continuity check of the pilot wire link is active

Use of committed pilot wire input BLIN1:

• The protection is blocked off according the selectivity block criteria when the input BLIN1 is active.
The information about phase or phase+earth block may be select programming the ModeBLIN1
parameter inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Selective block-BLOCK2 \ Selective block IN menus.

Use of binary inputs:

• If the (IEC>BLK2IN, IEC>>BLK2IN e/o IEC>>>BLK2IN element are set to ON and a bi-
nary input is designed for selective block (Block2), the protection is blocked off by phase elements
(Block2 Iph) or by any protection element (Block2 Iph/IE) according the selectivity block criteria.[1]
The enable IEC>BLK2IN, IEC>>BLK2IN and/or IEC>>>BLK2IN parameters are available
inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Residual overcurrent-50N(Comp)/51N(Comp) \ IEC> Element (IEC>>
Element, IEC>>> Element) \ Setpoints menus, while the Block2 Iph and Block2 Iph/IE functions
must be assigned to the selected binary inputs inside the Set \ Board1(2) inputs \ Binary input IN1-
1...INx-x) menus.

Use of committed pilot wire output BLOUT1:

• The information about phase or phase+earth block may be select programming the ModeBLOUT1
parameter (OFF - ON IPh - ON IPh/IE - ON IE) inside Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Selective block-
BLOCK2 \ Selective block OUT menus.

Use of output relay:

• If the IEC>BLK2OUT, IEC>>BLK2OUT and/or IEC>>>BLK2OUT enable parameters are set
to ON and a output relay is designed for selective block (Block2), the protection issues a block out-
put by phase elements (BLK2OUT-Iph) or by any protection element (BLK2OUT-Iph/IE), whenever the
given element (Start IE>, Start IE>>and/or Start IE>>>) becomes active. The enable parameters (ON
or OFF) are available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Residual overcurrent-50N(Comp)/51N(Comp)
\ IEC> Element (IEC>> Element, IEC>>> Element) \ Setpoints menus, while the BLK2OUT-Iph-K,
BLK2OUT-Iph/IE-K and/or BLK2OUT-IE-K output relays and LEDs (BLK2OUT-Iph-L, BLK-
2OUT-Iph/IE-L e/o BLK2OUT-IE-L) must be select inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Selective
block-BLOCK2 \ Selective block OUT menu.

Internal selective block (Block4)

As well as to send or transmit a selective block toward other protective relays, each protective
element may be enabled for receive or transmit a selective block from/to other internal protective
elements.[2]
The internal selective block of one or more element concerning the residual overcurrent function
may be enabled/disabled by means the IEC>BLK4, IEC>>BLK4, and/or IEC>>>BLK4 (virtual
input and output common to all protective thresholds); the following operating modes are available:
• IN - the element is enabled to receive the selective block from an internal input.
• OUT - the element is enabled to send the selective block to an internal output.
• OFF - the element is disabled to send/receive the internal selective block.
Transmission and reception for the same element is not allowed, so any stall situation due to wrong
setting is avoided.
The internal selective block can work together with an external selective block from other protective
relays (Block2).

Note 1 The exhaustive treatment of the selective block (Block 2) function may be found in the “Selective Block” paragraph inside CONTROL AND
MONITORING section
Nota 2 The exhaustive treatment of the internal selective block (Block 4) function may be found in the “Internal selective block” paragraph inside
CONTROL AND MONITORING section.

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 165

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 IEC> Enable IEC>Curve IECCLP>Mode tECCLP> tEC>RES IEC>def IECCLP>def tEC>def IEC>inv IECCLP>inv tEC>inv

IEC IEC> Element Start IEC>

Trip IEC>
≥ IEC> inhibition IEC>2ndh-REST
CLPIEC>
& IEC>BF
Start I2ndh>
IEC>BF
&
IEC>BLK1 Trip IEC>
Start IEC> BLK1IEC>
&
&
Block1

IEC>BLK2IN
Start IEC> BLK2INIEC>
&
&
Block2
IEC>BLK2OUT
BLK2OUT
IEC>BLK4 &
Start IEC>
BLK4OUT
&
Start IEC>

IEC>> Enable IECCLP>>Mode tECCLP>> tEC>>RES IEC>> def IECCLP>> def tEC>>def

IEC>> Element Start IEC>>

IEC
Trip IEC>>
IEC>>2ndh-REST IEC> disbyIEC>> CLPIE1>>
IEC>> inhibition
Start I2ndh> & IEC>>BF &
Start IEC>>
IEC>>BF
&
IEC>> Trip
IEC>>BLK1
Start IEC>> BLK1IEC>>
&
&
Block1

IEC>>BLK2IN
Start IEC>> BLK2INIEC>>
&
Block2 &
IEC>>BLK2OUT
BLK2OUT
IEC>>BLK4 Start IEC>> &
BLK4OUT
Start IEC>> &

IEC>>> Enable IECCLP>>>Mode tECCLP>>> tEC>>>RES IEC>>> def IECCLP>>>def tEC>>>def

IEC>>> Element
IEC Start IEC>>
IEC>>>2ndh-REST Trip IEC>>
IEC> disbyIEC>>>
& CLPIE1>>>
Start I2ndh> IEC>> disbyIEC>>> &
Start IEC>>>
&
IEC>>>BLK1 Start IEC>>>
Start IEC>>> BLK1IE1>>>
&
&
Block1
IEC>>>BF
IEC>>>BF
&
IEC>>>BLK2IN Trip IEC>>>
Start IEC>>> BLK2INIEC>>>
&
&
Block2
IEC>>>BLK2OUT
IEC>>>BLK4 BLK2OUT
&
Start IEC>>>
BLK4OUT
&
Start IEC>>>

Note Inside diagrams and text the IEC is the current residual current calculated by the vector sum of the currents
of the selected side (the H or L side)
General logic diagram of the calculated residual current elements - 50N(Comp)/51N(Cmp) all-F50N-51N.ai

166 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 ON≡Enable IEC> residual overcurrent element
IEC> Enable
ON≡Inhibit
IEC> inhibition
(from IEC>> and/or IEC>>> residual overcurrent element)

Start IEC>
I EC > def State

&
I EC ≥ I EC > def IEC>ST-K
(Pickup outside CLP) IEC>ST-L

TRIPPING M ATRIX
≥1

(LED+REL AYS)
I EC > inv State t EC>inv
IEC > Curve t EC>RES
I EC & t EC>def
I EC ≥ I EC > inv t EC>RES
& t EC>
T 0 0 T IEC>TR-K
IECCLP>def IECCLP>inv T 0 IEC>TR-L
RESET
(Pickup within CLP)
I E C ≥ I EC CL P >
Trip IEC>

A =“0 or OFF” A =“1”

≥1 CLPIEC>
t EC C L P >
A = ON - Change setting
A B = OFF
t ECCLP> Output t ECCLP> B
CB-State C = ON - Element blocking
T 0 C

≥1
IECCLP>Mode

2nd harmonic restraint enable (ON≡Enable)

IEC>2ndh-REST
&
Start I2ndh>

IEC> calculated residual overcurrent element Block diagram

Block1, Block2, Block4

Trip IEC>
BF Enable (ON≡Enable) & IEC> BF towards BF logic
IEC>BF

CB State CB OPEN CB CLOSED CB OPEN

tECCLP> 0.1 s

Output tECCLP>

t
HIGH THRESHOLD/ LOW THRESHOLD/ HIGH THRESHOLD/
BLOCK UNBLOCK BLOCK

Note Inside diagrams and text the IEC is the current residual current calculated by the vector sum of the currents
of the selected side (the H or L side)

Calculated residual overcurrent - 50N(Comp)/51N(Comp) - First element logic diagram (IEC>) Sheet 1 of 2

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 167

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 Start IEC>
&
Enable (ON≡Enable)
IEC>BLK1 Trip IEC> & BLK1IEC>
&

& BLK4IN IEC>

Block1 Logic INx t ON INx t OFF Block4

n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 Block1, Block2, Block4

n.o. Block1
T 0 0 T
Binary input INx & BLK2IN IEC>
Block1

Block2 input enable (ON≡Enable)

IEC>BLK2IN
&
ModeBLIN1
OFF BLK2IN-Iph
BLIN1 ON IPh

TRIPPING M ATRIX
Pilot wire input

(LED+REL AYS)
ON IPh/IE Iph Block2
ON IE
tB-K
tB-L
Logic t B-Iph
INx t ON INx t OFF
Block2 IPh
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 t B-Iph
≥1
n.o. T 0 0 T 0 T ≥1 tB timeout
Binary input INx
FROM ANY PROTECTIONS

Logic INx t ON INx t OFF t B-IE

Block2 IPh/IE
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 t B-IE
≥1 BLK2IN-IE
n.o. T 0 0 T 0 T
Binary input INx
FROM EARTH FAULT PROTECTIONS

Logic INx t ON INx t OFF

Block2 IE
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 IE Block2
n.o. T 0 0 T
Binary input INx Block2 input

ST-Iph BLK2 BLK2OUT-Iph

All BLK2OUT outputs
BLK2OUT-IPh-K
TRIPPING M ATRIX

of phase elements ≥1
(LED+REL AYS)
t F-IPh BLK2OUT-IPh-L
(see BLK2OUT chapter) BLK2OUT-IE
t F-IPh BLK2OUT-IE-K
0 T t F-IPh/IE BLK2OUT-IE-L
BLK2OUT-Iph/IE
Start IEC> t F-IPh/IE BLK2OUT-IPh/IE-K
IE1> Block2 OUT ≥1
Block2 output & 0 T BLK2OUT-IPh/IE-L
IEC>BLK2OUT
(ON≡Enable) A = OFF
t F-IE B = ON IPh
ModeBLOUT1 C = ON IPh/IE
All other BLK2OUT outputs ≥1 A D = ON IE
t F-IE
of ground elements B BLOUT1
0 T Pilot wire output
C
(see BLK2OUT chapter)
ST-IE BLK2 D
Block2 output

A = IN A = IN
IEC>BLK4 B = OFF t FI-Iph B = OFF IEC>BLK4
C = OUT ST-Iph BLK4 C = OUT
“0” A Block4
B IEC> Block4 I/O t FI-Iph IE1> Block4 OUT A
“0”
Start IEC> C 0 T “0” B
“0” C
Block4 enable
t FI-IE ≥1
50N-51NS1_BL-diagram.ai

Block4 OUT
All other BLK4 I/O ≥1 All BLK4 I/O
t FI-IE
of ground elements of phase elements ≥1
0 T
(see BLK4 chapter) (see BLK4chapter) ST-IE BLK4
Block4
Calculated residual overcurrent - Logic diagram of the blocking signals concerning the first element (IEC>) Sheet 2 of 2

168 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 ON≡Enable IEC>> residual overcurrent element (ON≡Inhibit)
IEC>> Enable IEC> disbylEC>>
& IEC> inhibition
Start IEC>>
ON≡Inhibit
IEC>> inhibition
(from IEC>>> residual overcurrent element)
Start IEC>>
Start IEC>>

IEC>>ST-K
IEC>>ST-L

TRIPPING M ATRIX
(LED+REL AYS)
IEC>>def State
(Pickup outside CLP)
& t EC>>RES
t EC>>def
IEC ≥ IEC>> def
t EC>>RES
& t EC>>def
I EC 0 T IEC>>TR-K
IECCLP>>def T 0 IEC>>TR-L
RESET
(Pickup within CLP)
Trip IEC>>
IEC ≥ IECCLP>>def

A =“0 or OFF” A =“1”

≥1 CLP IEC>>

t ECCLP>> A = ON - Change setting

A B = OFF
t ECCLP>> Output t ECCLP>> B C = ON - Element blocking
CB-State
T 0 C

≥1
IECCLP>>Mode

2nd harmonic restraint enable (ON≡Enable)

IEC>>2ndh-REST
&
Start I2ndh>

IEC>> calculated residual overcurrent element Block diagram

Block1, Block2, Block4

Trip IEC>>
BF Enable (ON≡Enable) & IEC>> BF towards BF logic
IEC>>BF

CB State CB OPEN CB CLOSED CB OPEN

tECCLP>> 0.1 s

Output tECCLP>>

t
HIGH THRESHOLD/ LOW THRESHOLD/ HIGH THRESHOLD/
BLOCK UNBLOCK BLOCK

Note Inside diagrams and text the IEC is the current residual current calculated by the vector sum of the currents
of the selected side (the H or L side)

Calculated residual overcurrent - 50N(Comp)/51N(Comp) - Second element logic diagram (IEC>>) Sheet 1 of 2

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 169

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 Start IEC>>
&
Enable (ON≡Enable)
IEC>>BLK1 Trip IEC>> & BLK1IEC>>
&

& BLK4IN IEC>>

Block1 Logic INx t ON INx t OFF Block4

n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 Block1, Block2, Block4

n.o. Block1
T 0 0 T
Binary input INx & BLK2IN IEC>>
Block1

Block2 input enable (ON≡Enable)

IEC>>BLK2IN
&
ModeBLIN1
OFF BLK2IN-Iph
BLIN1 ON IPh

TRIPPING M ATRIX
Pilot wire input

(LED+REL AYS)
ON IPh/IE Iph Block2
ON IE
tB-K
tB-L
Logic t B-Iph
INx t ON INx t OFF
Block2 IPh
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 t B-Iph
≥1
n.o. T 0 0 T 0 T ≥1 tB timeout
Binary input INx
FROM ANY PROTECTIONS

Logic INx t ON INx t OFF t B-IE

Block2 IPh/IE
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 t B-IE
≥1 BLK2IN-IE
n.o. T 0 0 T 0 T
Binary input INx
FROM EARTH FAULT PROTECTIONS

Logic INx t ON INx t OFF

Block2 IE
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 IE Block2
n.o. T 0 0 T
Binary input INx Block2 input

All BLK2OUT outputs ST-Iph BLK2 BLK2OUT-Iph

BLK2OUT-IPh-K
≥1
TRIPPING M ATRIX
of phase elements
(LED+REL AYS)
t F-IPh BLK2OUT-IPh-L
(see BLK2OUT chapter) BLK2OUT-IE
t F-IPh BLK2OUT-IE-K
0 T t F-IPh/IE BLK2OUT-IE-L
BLK2OUT-Iph/IE
Start IEC>> t F-IPh/IE BLK2OUT-IPh/IE-K
IEC>> Block2 ≥1
Block2 output & 0 T BLK2OUT-IPh/IE-L
IEC>>BLK2OUT
(ON≡Enable) A = OFF
t F-IE B = ON IPh
ModeBLOUT1 C = ON IPh/IE
All other BLK2OUT outputs ≥1
t F-IE A D = ON IE
of ground elements B BLOUT1
0 T Pilot wire output
(see BLK2OUT chapter) C
ST-IE BLK2 D
Block2 output

A = IN
A = IN
IEC>>BLK4 B = OFF t FI-Iph B = OFF IEC>>BLK4
C = OUT ST-Iph BLK4 C = OUT
“0” A Block4
B IEC>> Block4 I/O t FI-Iph IEC>> Block4 OUT A
“0”
Start IEC>> C 0 T “0” B
“0” C
Block4 enable
t FI-IE ≥1 Block4 OUT
All other BLK4 I/O ≥1 All BLK4 I/O
t FI-IE
of ground elements of phase elements ≥1
0 T
(see BLK4 chapter) (see BLK4chapter) ST-IEC BLK4
Block4

Calculated residual overcurrent - Logic diagram of the blocking signals concerning the second element (IEC>>) Sheet 2 of 2

170 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 (ON≡Inhibit)
IEC>disbylE>>>
& IEC> inhibition
ON≡Enable IEC>>> residual overcurrent element Start IEC>>>
IEC>>> Enable

(ON≡Inhibit)
IEC>>disbylEC>>>
& IEC>> inhibition
Start IEC>>>

Start IEC>>>

Start IEC>>> IEC>>>ST-K

TRIPPING M ATRIX
IEC>>>def State IEC>>>ST-L

(LED+REL AYS)
(Pickup outside CLP)
& t EC>>>RES
t EC>>>def
IEC>>> ≥ IEC>>>def
t EC>>>RES
& t EC>>>def
I EC 0 T IEC>>>TR-K
IECCLP>>>def T 0 IEC>>>TR-L
RESET
(Pickup within CLP)
Trip IEC>>>
IEC ≥ IECCLP>>>def

A =“0 or OFF” A =“1”

≥1 CLP IEC>>>
t ECCLP>>>
A = ON - Change setting
A B = OFF
t ECCLP>>> Output t ECCLP>>> B C = ON - Element blocking
CB-State
T 0 C

≥1
IECCLP>>>Mode

2nd harmonic restraint enable (ON≡Enable)

IEC>>>2ndh-REST
&
Start I2ndh>

IEC>>> calculated residual overcurrent element Block diagram

Block1, Block2, Block4

Trip IEC>>>
BF Enable (ON≡Enable) & IEC>>> BF towards BF logic
IEC>>>BF

CB State CB OPEN CB CLOSED CB OPEN

tECCLP>>> 0.1 s

Output tECCLP>>>

t
HIGH THRESHOLD/ LOW THRESHOLD/ HIGH THRESHOLD/
BLOCK UNBLOCK BLOCK

Note Inside diagrams and text the IEC is the current residual current calculated by the vector sum of the currents
of the selected side (the H or L side)

Calculated residual overcurrent - 50N(Comp)/51N(Comp) - Third element logic diagram (IEC>>>) Sheet 1 of 2

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 171

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 Start IEC>>>
&
Enable (ON≡Enable)
IEC>>>BLK1 Trip IEC>>> & BLK1IEC>>>
&

& BLK4IN IEC>>>

Block1 Logic INx t ON INx t OFF Block4

n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 Block1, Block2, Block4

n.o. Block1
T 0 0 T
Binary input INx & BLK2IN IEC>>>
Block1

Block2 input enable (ON≡Enable)

IEC>>>BLK2IN
&
ModeBLIN1
OFF BLK2IN-Iph
BLIN1 ON IPh

TRIPPING M ATRIX
Pilot wire input

(LED+REL AYS)
ON IPh/IE Iph Block2
ON IE
tB-K
tB-L
Logic t B-Iph
INx t ON INx t OFF
Block2 IPh
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 t B-Iph
≥1
n.o. T 0 0 T 0 T ≥1 tB timeout
Binary input INx
FROM ANY PROTECTIONS

Logic INx t ON INx t OFF t B-IE

Block2 IPh/IE
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 t B-IE
≥1 BLK2IN-IE
n.o. T 0 0 T 0 T
Binary input INx
FROM EARTH FAULT PROTECTIONS

Logic INx t ON INx t OFF

Block2 IE
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 IE Block2
n.o. T 0 0 T
Binary input INx Block2 input

ST-Iph BLK2 BLK2OUT-Iph

All BLK2OUT outputs
BLK2OUT-IPh-K
TRIPPING M ATRIX
of phase elements ≥1
(LED+REL AYS)
t F-IPh BLK2OUT-IPh-L
(see BLK2OUT chapter) BLK2OUT-IE
t F-IPh BLK2OUT-IE-K
0 T t F-IPh/IE BLK2OUT-IE-L
BLK2OUT-Iph/IE
Start IEC>>> t F-IPh/IE BLK2OUT-IPh/IE-K
IEC >>> Block2 OUT ≥1
Block2 output & 0 T BLK2OUT-IPh/IE-L
IEC>>>BLK2OUT A = OFF
(ON≡Enable)
t F-IE B = ON IPh
ModeBLOUT1 C = ON IPh/IE
All other BLK2OUT outputs ≥1 A D = ON IE
t F-IE
of ground elements B BLOUT1
0 T Pilot wire output
C
(see BLK2OUT chapter)
ST-IE BLK2 D
Block2 output

A = IN A = IN
IEC>>>BLK4 B = OFF t FI-Iph B = OFF IEC>>>BLK4
C = OUT ST-Iph BLK4 C = OUT
“0” A Block4
B IE1>>> Block4 I/O t FI-Iph IE1>>> Block4 OUT A
“0”
Start IEC>>> C 0 T “0” B
“0” C
Block4 enable
t FI-IE ≥1 Block4 OUT
All other BLK4 I/O ≥1 All BLK4 I/O
t FI-IE
of ground elements of phase elements ≥1
0 T
(see BLK4 chapter) (see BLK4chapter) ST-IE BLK4
Block4
Calculated residual overcurrent - Logic diagram of the blocking signals concerning the third element (IEC>>>) Sheet 2 of 2

172 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
— Minimum power factor - 55
Preface
Two independent time adjustable thresholds with lag, lead or lag/lead programmable power factor.
For each elements can a consensus for start / trip operation may be set only if the circuit breaker is
closed and after an adjustable enabling time, the closure (tARM-cosphi<) .

Operation and settings

The power factor is computed:
± cos ϕ = ± P / S
where:
• P is the total active power: ± P = UL1 · IL1 · cos ϕL1 + UL2 · IL2 · cos ϕL2 + UL3 · IL3 · cos ϕL3
• S is the total apparent power: S = √P 2 + Q 2

The lag power factor (cos ϕ = P/S with Q ≥ 0) and the lead power factor are compared with the setting
value (cos ϕlag<, cos ϕlead<).

Tripping direction setting: CosPhi Lag/Lead

+Q
cos G

TRIP TRIP
NO TRIP NO TRIP
CPhi1<def CPhi1<def
NO TRIP
TRIP TRIP
CPhi1<def Glead
-P +P Glag
CPhi1<def Q Q/2 Q/2 Q
NO TRIP

TRIP TRIP

-Q
General operation characteristic for the out of step element - 55

Tripping direction setting: CosPhi Lag

+Q cos G

NO TRIP
CPhi1<def
TRIP TRIP
TRIP
Glead Glag
NO TRIP
CPhi1<def Q Q/2 Q/2 Q
-P +P
NO TRIP NO TRIP
-Q

General operation characteristic for the out of step element - 55

Tripping direction setting: CosPhi Lead

+Q cos G
NO TRIP NO TRIP
-P +P NO TRIP
CPhi1<def CPhi1<def
NO TRIP
TRIP
Glead Glag
TRIP TRIP
Q Q/2 Q/2 Q

-Q
General operation characteristic for the out of step element - 55

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 173

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 • If the CB position control is enabled (CB-55 = ON available inside the Set \ Profile A(o B) \ Mini-
mum power factor - 55 \ Cphi< Element \ Setpoints menu) the start is issued when the following
conditions are meet:
1) cos ϕ < cos ϕlag< with Q ≥ 0 or cos ϕ < cos ϕlead< with Q < 0
2) Circuit Breaker closed
3) The tARM-cosϕ< timer (started when CB closes) is elapsed
• If the CB position control is disabled (CB-55 = OFF) the start is issued when the following condi-
tion is meet:
1) cos ϕ < cos ϕlag< with Q ≥ 0 or cos ϕ < cos ϕlead< with Q < 0
After expiry of the associated operate time (t CPhi1< , t CPhi2<) a trip command is issued; if instead the
power factor exceed the threshold, the element is restored.

Common

CB-55
t ARM-CPhi< t ARM-CPhi<
CB Closed &
CB

CPhi1< Enable CPhi1< DIR CPhi1< t CPhi1<

55 Element - first threshold

cosG Start CPhi1<
Trip CPhi1<
CPhi1<BF
CPhi1<BF
&
Trip CPhi1<
CPhi1<BLK1
Trip CPhi1< BLK1 CPhi1<
&
&
Block1

CPhi2< Enable CPhi2< DIR CPhi2< t CPhi2 <

55 Element - second threshold

cosG Start CPhi2<
Trip CPhi2<
CPhi2<BF
CPhi2<BF
&
Trip CPhi2<
CPhi2<BLK1
Trip CPhi2< BLK1 CPhi2<
&
&
Block1

General logic diagram of the minimum power factor element - 55 all-F55.ai

Breaker failure (BF)

The elements can produce the Breaker Failure output if the CPhi1< BF and/or CPhi2< BF param-
eters are set to ON. The parameters are available inside the Set \ Profile A(o B) \ Minimum power
factor - 55 \ Cphi1< Element, Cphi2< Element \ Setpoints menus.[1]

Logical block (Block1)

If the CPhi1<BLK1 and/or CPhi1<BLK1 enabling parameters are set to ON and a binary input is
designed for logical block (Block1), the concerning element is blocked off whenever the given input
is active.[2] The enabling parameter is available inside the Set \ Profile A(o B) \ Minimum power fac-
tor - 55 \ Cphi1< Element, Cphi2< Element \ Setpoints menus, while the Block1 function must be
assigned to the selected binary input inside the Set \ Board 1(2) inputs \ Binary input IN1-1...(IN1-x)
menus.

All the named parameters can be set separately for Profile A and Profile B.

Note 1 The common settings concerning the Breaker failure protection are adjustable inside the Breaker Failure - BF menu.
Note 2 The exhaustive treatment of the logical block (Block 1) function may be found in the “Logic Block” paragraph inside CONTROL AND MONITOR-
ING section

174 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 State = ON ≡ Enable 55 element
CPhi< Enable
StartCPhi1<
CPh i1 <
CPhi1<ST-K

TRIPPING M ATRIX
CPhi1<ST-L

(LED+REL AYS)
( Q > 0)
c o s G < CPh i1 <
( 0 ≤ G ≤ π)
t CPhi1<

CPh i1 <
C Phi1 < DIR t CPhi1< CPhi1<TR-K
&
A T 0 CPhi1<TR-L
( Q < 0)
G B c o s G < CPh i1 <
C
(-π ≤ G ≤ 0) Trip CPhi1<
A = lag
B = lead
C = lag/lead CPh i1 <

( Q q u a l si a si )
c o s G < CPh i1 <
( - π ≤ G ≤ π)

t ARM-CPhi<
Output t ARM-CPhi<
CB-State
t ARM-CPhi<
&
ON ≡ Enable CB acquisition T 0
CB-55 ≥1

Enable (ON≡Enable)
CPhi1<BLK1
&
Start CPhi1< & BLK1CPhi1<
Logic INx t ON INx t OFF &
Block1 Trip CPhi1<
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF
n.o. Block1
T 0 0 T
Binary input INx
Block1

Trip CPhi1<
BF Enable (ON≡Enable) & CPhi1< BF towards BF logic
CPhi1<BF

CB-55

CB State CB OPEN CB CLOSED CB OPEN

t ARM-CPhi< t ARM-CPhi<

Output t ARM-CPhi<

Start enable

t
Minimum power factor - 55 First element 55S1.ai

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 175

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 State = ON ≡ Enable 55 element
CPhi< Enable
StartCPhi2<
CPh i2 <
CPhi2<ST-K

TRIPPING M ATRIX
CPhi2<ST-L

(LED+REL AYS)
( Q > 0)
c o s G < CPh i2 <
( 0 ≤ G ≤ π)
t CPhi2 <

CPh i2 <
C Phi2 < DIR t CPhi2 < CPhi2<TR-K
&
A T 0 CPhi1<TR-L
( Q < 0)
G B c o s G < CPh i2 <
C
(-π ≤ G ≤ 0) Trip CPhi2<
A = lag
B = lead
C = lag/lead CPh i2 <

( Q q u a l si a si )
c o s G < CPh i2 <
( - π ≤ G ≤ π)

t ARM-CPhi<
Output t ARM-CPhi<
CB-State
t ARM-CPhi<
&
ON ≡ Enable CB acquisition T 0
CB-55 ≥1

Enable (ON≡Enable)
CPhi2<BLK1
&
Start CPhi2< & BLK1CPhi2<
Logic INx t ON INx t OFF &
Block1 Trip CPhi2<
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF
n.o. Block1
T 0 0 T
Binary input INx
Block1

Trip CPhi2<
BF Enable (ON≡Enable) & CPhi2< BF towards BF logic
CPhi2<BF

CB-55

CB State CB OPEN CB CLOSED CB OPEN

t ARM-CPhi< t ARM-CPhi<

Output t ARM-CPhi<

Start enable

t
Minimum power factor - 55 Second element 55S2.ai

176 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
— Overvoltage - 59
Preface
Two operation thresholds, independently adjustable (U>, U>>) with adjustable delay (t U >, t U >>).
The first one may be programmed with definite or inverse time, while the second threshold operates
with definite time characteristic.
Each threshold may be separately enabled or disabled.
The first threshold trip (U>) may be inhibited by start of the second threshold (U>>).

Operation and settings

The fundamental frequency of a selectable voltages, phase to ground (UL1, UL2 , UL3) or phase-to-
phase voltages (U12 , U23 , U31) are employed:

U12 =|UL1-UL2|
U23 =|UL2 -UL3|
U31=|UL2 -UL1|

Each of three voltages is compared with the setting values (U>, U>>). The start and trip logic may
be selected OR or AND.
With OR selection, a start is issued when at least one of the three voltages overcomes the adjust-
able threshold (START); after expiry of the associated operate time (t U >, t U >>) a trip command is
issued; if instead the voltages drops below the threshold, the element is restored.
With AND selection, a start is issued when all the three voltages overcomes the adjustable thresh-
old; after expiry of the associated operate time (t U >, t U >>) a trip command is issued; if instead the
voltage drops below the threshold, the element is restored.

The first threshold (U>) may be programmed with definite or inverse time according the following
characteristic curve:
t=0.5 t U >inv / [(U/U>inv) - 1]
Where:
t: operate time
U>inv: threshold setting
t U>inv: operate time setting

For the inverse time characteristic, following data applies:

• The operate time setting is referred to an input voltage equal to 1.5 of the pickup value.
• Asymptotic reference value (minimum pickup value): 1.1 U>inv
• Minimum operate time: 0.1 s
• Range where the equation is valid: 1.1 ≤ U/U>inv ≤ 4
• If U>inv pickup ≥ 0.5 Un, the upper limit is 2 Un.

The first overvoltage element can be programmed with definite or inverse time characteristic by
setting the U>Curve parameter (DEFINITE, INVERSE) available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \
Overvoltage-59 \ U> Element \ Setpoints menu.

Each element can be enabled or disabled by setting ON or OFF the U> Enable parameter inside
the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Overvoltage-59 \ U> Element \ Setpoints menu and/or the State parameter
inside the Set\Profile A(or B) \ Overvoltage-59 \ U>> Element \ Definite time.

t U>
TRIP

t U >>

U> U>> U t-int-F59.ai

General operation time characteristic for the overvoltage elements - 59

The voltage measurement type (Phase-to-phase or phase-to-neutral) and the operating logic (AND
or OR), is adjustable inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Overvoltage-59 \ Common configuration menu
by means the Utype59 parameter; the allowed setting are Uph-ph (phase-to-phase) or Uph-n
(phase-to-neutral).
The corresponding unit are p.u. Un for Uph-ph setting and p.u. En for Uph-n setting.

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 177

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 The first threshold trip (U>) may be inhibited by start of the second threshold (U>>) by setting ON
the U> Disabling by U>> start (U>disbyU>>) parameter available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \
Overvoltage-59 \ U>> Element \ Setpoints menu.

Utype59 Logic59

U12 ,U23,U31 AND

U
UL1,UL2 ,UL3 OR
Common configuration

State U>>def tU>> def U> Enable U> Curve U>def tU> def U> inv tU> inv

U>> Element U> Element

Start U>> Start U>
U U
Trip U>> Trip U>
U>BF
U> disbyU>> U>BF
Trip U> &
& U> inhibition
Start U>>
U>>BLK1 Start U>> U>BLK1 Start U>
BLK1U>> BLK1U>
& &
Block1 & Block1 &

General logic diagram of the overvoltage elements - 59 all-F59.ai

Breaker failure (BF)

Both overvoltage elements can produce the Breaker Failure output if the U> BF and U>>BF pa-
rameters are set to ON.
The parameters are available inside the Set \Profile A(or B) \ Overvoltage - 59 \ U> Element (U>>
Element) \ Setpoints menus.[1].

ON≡Enable U> overvoltage element

U> Enable

U> def State

&
Utype59 U ≥ U> def
UL1 ≥1
Start U>
U12 U> inv State

& U>ST-K

TRIPPING M ATRIX
U>ST-L

(LED+REL AYS)
U ≥ U> inv
U> Curve
UL2 Logic59 t U>def t U>inv
U23 ≥1
& t U>
T 0 U>TR-K
& T 0
UL3 U>TR-L
RESET
U31
(ON≡Inhibit) Trip U>
U> Inhibition
Start U>
Enable (ON≡Enable) &
U>BLK1 Trip U> & BLK1U>
&

Block1 Logic INx t ON INx t OFF

n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF Block1 input (ON≡Block)
n.o. Block1
T 0 0 T
Binary input INx
Trip U>
BF Enable (ON≡Enable) & U> BF towards BF logic
U>BF

Logic diagram concerning the first threshold (U>) of the overvoltage element - 59 Fun-F59_S1.ai

Note 1 The common settings concerning the Breaker failure protection are adjustable inside the Breaker Failure - BF menu.

178 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 Logical block (Block1)
If the U>BLK1 and/or U>>BLK1 enabling parameters are set to ON and a binary input is designed
for logical block (Block1), the protection is blocked off whenever the given input is active.
The trip timer is held in reset condition, so the operate time counting starts when the input block goes
down.[1] The enabling parameters are available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Overvoltage - 59 \
U> Element (U>> Element) \Setpoints menus, while the Block1 function must be assigned to the
selected binary input inside the Set \ Board1(2) inputs \ Binary input IN1-1...INx-x) menus.

(ON≡Inhibit)
U>disbyU>>
& U> Inhibition

Start U>>
U>> def State
Utype59
UL1 & U>>ST-K

TRIPPING M ATRIX
U>>ST-L

(LED+REL AYS)
U12 U ≥ U>> def

UL2 Logic59 t U>>def

U23 ≥1
t U>>
U>>TR-K
& T 0
UL3 U>>TR-L
RESET
U31
Trip U>>
Start U>>
Enable (ON≡Enable) &
U>>BLK1 Trip U>> & BLK1U>
&

Block1 Logic INx t ON INx t OFF

n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF Block1 input (ON≡Block)
n.o. Block1
T 0 0 T
Binary input INx
Trip U>>
BF Enable (ON≡Enable) & U>> BF towards BF logic
U>>BF

Logic diagram concerning the second threshold (U>>) of the overvoltage element - 59 Fun-F59_S2.ai

All the parameters can be set separately for Profile A and Profile B.

Note 1 The exhaustive treatment of the logical block (Block 1) function may be found in the “Logic Block” paragraph inside CONTROL AND MONITOR-
ING section.

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 179

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 t [s]
10000 0.5
t =t U>inv ·
[(U/U> inv) - 1]

1000

100

t U > inv = 100 s

10

t U > inv = 10 s

t U > inv = 1 s

0.1 t U > inv = 0.1 s

0.01 U /U >inv
1.1 1.5 2 3 4

Note: match of operating and setting time takes place when U/U>inv = 1.5

Inverse time operating characteristic concerning the first threshold (U>) of the overvoltage element - 59 F_59-Char.ai

180 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
— Residual overvoltage - 59N
Preface
Two operation thresholds, independently adjustable with adjustable delay.
The first one (UE >) may be programmed with definite or inverse time, while the second threshold
operates with definite time characteristic.
Each threshold may be separately enabled or disabled.
The first threshold trip may be inhibited by start of the second threshold.
Operation and settings
Two measuring criteria of the residual voltage are provided:
• Direct
• Calculated.
For direct measure the fundamental component of the residual voltage input is used (UE ), whereas,
for calculated measure (UEC) the residual voltage comes from a vector sum of three phase voltage
phasors.

UEC =|UL1+UL2 +UL3|

The residual voltage (UE or UEC) is compared with the setting values (UE >, UE >>); a start is issued
when the residual voltage overcomes the adjustable threshold (START); after expiry of the associ-
ated operate time (t UE >, t UE >>) a trip command is issued; if instead the voltage drops below the
threshold, the element is restored.

The first threshold (UE >) may be programmed with definite or inverse time according the following
characteristic curve:
t=0.5 t UE > / [(UE /UE >inv) - 1] (direct meaure of UE for VTs input versions) or
t=0.5 t UE > / [(UEC /UE >inv) - 1] (calculated measure of UEC for VTs input versions or ThySensor)
where:
UE : measured residual voltage
UEC : calculated residual voltage
t: operate time
UE >inv: threshold setting
t UE>inv: operate time setting
For the inverse time characteristic, following data applies:
• The operate time setting is referred to an input voltage equal to 1.5 of the pickup value.
• Asymptotic reference value (minimum pickup value): 1.1 UE >inv
• Minimum operate time: 0.1 s
• Range where the equation is valid: 1.1 ≤ UE /UE >inv ≤ 4
• If UE >inv pickup ≥ 0.5 UEn, the upper limit is 2 UEn.
The first residual overvoltage element can be programmed with definite or inverse time character-
istic by setting the UE> Curve parameter (DEFINITE, INVERSE) available inside the Set \ Profile
A(or B) \ Residual overvoltage-59N \ UE> Element \ Setpoints menu.
Each element can be enabled or disabled by setting ON or OFF the UE> Enable parameter inside
the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Residual overvoltage-59N \ UE> Element \ Setpoints menu and/or the State
parameter inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Residual overvoltage-59N \ UE>> Element \ Definite time.

t UE > TRIP

t UE >>

UE> U E >> UE
General operation time characteristic for the residual overvoltage elements - 59N t-int-F59N.ai

Selection of the measuring criteria of the residual voltage (direct measure or calculated measure) is
available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Residual overvoltage-59N \ Common configuration menu;
The 3Votype59N parameter may be select as UE (direct measure) or UEC (calculated measure).

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 181

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 TV monitoring (74VT)
For both measuring criteria, a block of the UE > and UE >> threshold may be select when the 74VT
function is active (internal and/or external). The blocking enabling parameters 74VTint59N and-
74VText59N are available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Residual overvoltage-59N \ Common
configuration menu.[1]
The first threshold trip (UE >) may be inhibited by start of the second threshold (UE >>) by setting ON
the UE> Disabling by UE>> start (UE>disbyUE>>) parameter available inside the Set \ Profile A(or
B) \ Residual overvoltage-59N \ UE>> Element \ Setpoints menu.

Common configuration
3Votype59 N
UE (misura diretta)
UE
UEC (misura calcolata)

74VTint59 N
74VText59 N
& 74VTint-Block
74VTint
& 74VText-Block
74VText

State tUE>>RES UE>>def tUE>> def UE> Enable UE> Curve tUE>RES UE>def tUE> def UE> inv tUE> inv

UE>> Element UE> Element

UE Start UE>> UE Start UE>
Trip UE>> Trip UE>
74VT & 74VT & UE>BF
UE> disbyUE>> UE>BF
Trip UE> &
& U> inhibition
Start U>>
UE>>BLK1 Start UE>> UE>BLK1 Start UE>
BLK1UE>> BLK1UE>
& &
Block1 & Block1 &

Logic diagram concerning the residual overvoltage element - 59N all-F59N.ai

An adjustable reset time delay is provided for every threshold (t UE>RES, t UE>>RES).

INPUT

t UE>RES t UE>RES t UE>RES

UE> Start
t UE> t UE>

UE> Trip

RESET

t
Timers concerning the first element of residual overvoltage protection- 59N Timers-F59N.ai

Breaker failure (BF)

Both residual overvoltage elements (UE >, UE >>) can produce the Breaker Failure output if the
UE>BF and UE>>BF parameters are set to ON.
The parameters are available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Residual overvoltage - 59N \ UE> Element
(UE>> Element) \ Setpoints menus.[2]

Logical block (Block1)

If the UE>BLK1 and/or UE>>BLK1 enabling parameters are set to ON and a binary input is de-
signed for logical block (Block1), the protection is blocked off whenever the given input is active.
The trip timer is held in reset condition, so the operate time counting starts when the input block goes
down.[3] The enabling parameters are available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Residual overvoltage
- 59N \ UE> Element (UE>> Element) \ Setpoints menus, while the Block1 function must be assigned
to the selected binary input inside the Set \ Board1(2) inputs \ Binary input IN1-1...INx-x) menus.
All the parameters can be set separately for Profile A and Profile B.

Note 1 The operating time must be adjusted to a greater value than the 74VT activation time (internal or binary input)
Note 2 The common settings concerning the Breaker failure protection are adjustable inside the Breaker Failure - BF menu.
Note 3 The exhaustive treatment of the logical block (Block 1) function may be found in the “Logic Block” paragraph inside CONTROL AND MONITOR-
ING section.

182 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 ON≡Enable UE> residual overvoltage element Start U E >
UE> Enable
U E >ST-K

TRIPPING M ATRIX
U E>def State U E >ST-L

(LED+REL AYS)
& U E > Curve t UE>RES
t UE>def t UE>inv
UE ≥ U E>def
t UE>RES
UE ≥1 & t UE>
U E>inv T 0 0 T U E >TR-K
State T 0
U E >TR-L
RESET
&
UE ≥ U E>inv
Trip U E >
(ON≡Inhibit)
U E > Inhibition

Enable (ON≡Enable)
74VTint59N
(ON≡Inhibit) & ≥1
Block 74VT

74VText. Logic INx t ON INx t OFF

n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF
74VT ext.
n.o. T 0 0 T
Binary input INx
Start U E >
Enable (ON≡Enable) &
Block1 Trip U E > & Block1 U E >
&

Block1 Logic INx t ON INx t OFF

n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF Block1 input (ON≡Block)
n.o. Block1
T 0 0 T
Binary input INx
Trip U E >
BF Enable (ON≡Enable) & U E > BF towards BF logic
UE>BF

Logic diagram concerning the first threshold (UE>) of the residual overvoltage element - 59N Fun-F59N_S1.ai

(ON≡Inhibit)
UE>disbyUE>>
& UE> Inhibition

Start U E >>
U E>>def State
U E >>ST-K
UE &
TRIPPING M ATRIX

U E >>ST-L
(LED+REL AYS)

UE ≥ U E>>def
t UE>>RES
t UE>>def
Enable (ON≡Enable)
74VTint59N t UE>>RES
(ON≡Inhibit) & & t UE>>
Block 74VT ≥1 0 T U E >>TR-K
T 0
U E >>TR-L
RESET

Logic Trip U E >>

74VText. INx t ON INx t OFF
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF
74VT ext.
n.o. T 0 0 T
Binary input INx
Start U E >>
Enable (ON≡Enable) &
Block1 Trip U E >> & Block1 U E >>
&

Block1 Logic INx t ON INx t OFF

n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF Block1 input (ON≡Block)
n.o. Block1
T 0 0 T
Binary input INx
Trip U E >>
BF Enable (ON≡Enable) & U E >> BF towards BF logic
UE>>BF

Logic diagram concerning the second threshold (UE>>) of the residual overvoltage element - 59N Fun-F59N_S2.ai

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 183

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 t [s]
10000 t = t UE>inv · 0.5
[(UE /UE>inv) - 1]

t = t UE>inv · 0.5
[(UEC /UE>inv) - 1]

1000

100

t UE >= 100 s

10

t UE >= 10 s

t UE >= 1 s

0.1 t UE >= 0.1 s

UE /UE>inv
0.01
1.5 2 3 4 UEC /UE>inv
1.1

Note: match of operating and setting time takes place when UE /UE>inv = 1.5 or UEC /UE>inv = 1.5

Inverse time operating characteristic concerning the first threshold (UE>) of the residual overvoltage element - 59N F_59N-Char.ai

184 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
— Negative sequence overvoltage - 59V2
Preface
The element has an adjustable threshold with time definite delay.
Enabling or disabling may be performed through ThySette.
Operation and settings
The negative sequence voltage is calculated as:
U2 =(UL1+e-j120°·UL2+e+j120°·UL3)/3

where e-j120°=-1/2-j√3/2, ej120°=-1/2+j√3/2.

The negative sequence voltage is compared with the setting value (U2>def).
Voltages above the associated pickup value are detected and a start is issued. After expiry of the
associated operate time (t U12 > def) a trip command is issued; if instead the voltage drops below the
threshold, the element is restored.
The element can be enabled or disabled by setting ON or OFF the State parameter inside the Set \
Profile A(or B) \ Negative sequence overvoltage-27V2 \ U2> Element \ Setpoints menu.

TRIP

t U2 > def

U 2 > def U2

General operation time characteristic for the positive overvoltage element - 59V2 t-int-F59V2.ai

State U2>def tU2> def

U2> Element Start U2>

Trip U2>
U2

U2>BF
U2>BF
&
Trip U2>
U2>BLK1
Start U2> BLK1U2>
&
&
Block1

General operation time characteristic for the positive overvoltage element - 59V2 all-597V2.ai

Breaker failure (BF)

The 59V2 element can produce the Breaker Failure output if the U2>BF parameter is set to ON.
The parameters are available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \Negative sequence overvoltage-59V2
\ U2> Element \ Setpoints menu.[1]

Logical block (Block1)

If the U2>BLK1 enabling parameter is set to ON and a binary input is designed for logical block
(Block1), the protection is blocked off whenever the given input is active.
The trip timer is held in reset condition, so the operate time counting starts when the input block goes
down.[2] The enabling parameters are available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \Negative sequence
overvoltage-59V2 \ U2> Element \ Setpoints menu, while the Block1 function must be assigned to
the selected binary input inside the Set \ Board1(2) inputs \ Binary input IN1-1...INx-x) menus.

All the parameters can be set separately for Profile A and Profile B.

Note 1 The common settings concerning the Breaker failure protection are adjustable inside the Breaker Failure - BF menu.
Note 2 The exhaustive treatment of the logical block (Block 1) function may be found in the “Logic Block” paragraph inside CONTROL AND MONITOR-
ING section.

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 185

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 Start U2>

U2>ST-K

TRIPPING M ATRIX
U2>ST-L

(LED+REL AYS)
U 2 > def State t U2>def

& t U2>def
U2 U2>TR-K
U 2 ≥ U 2 > def T 0
U2>TR-L
RESET

Trip U2>

Start U2>
&
Enable (ON≡Enable) Trip U2> & BLK1U2>
U1<BLK1
&
Block1 Logic INx t ON INx t OFF
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF Block1 input (ON≡Block)
n.o. Block1
T 0 0 T
Binary input INx
Trip U2>
BF Enable (ON≡Enable) & U2> BF towards BF logic
U1<BF

Logic diagram concerning the negative sequence overvoltage element - 59V2 Fun-F59V2_S1.ai

186 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
— Low impedance restricted ground fault- 64REF
Preface
The restricted earth fault protection is used to detect the ground faults in a three-phase winding
with star point connected to earth in the area between the CTs on side H and the CT on the neutral
earthing.
Operation and settings
In order to avoid nuisance tripping caused by rise of differential current (CT measurement errors in
the presence of high through current, eg, external faults), the tripping is a percentage characteris-
tic.
When there is no earth fault, no starpoint current IE1 flows and the computed residual current
(IECH = IL1H + IL2H + IL3H) is also zero.
I E1 and I ECL are conventionally regarded as positive if coming into their respective amperometric
clamp reference input (A7 per i E1 , C1-C3-C5 per i E CL ), negative if outgoing.
For internal fault to the protected area (IL2(H) in the following example), i E and i E(H) are thus both
positive, ie the phasors IE and IE(H) are in phase (assuming the same system of grounding of the star
point and network).

L1
IECH
L2
L3 IE1 IECH

IE1 IECH = IL1H + IL2H + IL3H

When the fault is outside the protected area I E1 is positive and I ECH is negative ie phasors IE1 e
IECH are opposite in phase.

L1
IECH
L2
L3 IE1 IECH

IE1 IECH = IL1H + IL2H + IL3H

The residual fundamental frequency current, acquired by means of a current transformer installed in
the starpoint connection to ground - side H, is compared with the stabilization current defined as:
IES = 4 · [|pE·IE1 - ME·IECH| - |pE·IE1 + ME·IECH|] if [|pE·IE1 - ME·IECH| - |pE·IE1 + ME·IECH|] > 0
or
IES = 0 if [|pE·IE1 - ME·IECH| - |pE·IE1 + ME·IECH|] ≤ 0
• IE1 is the residual current phasor - side 1,
• IECH is the calculated residual current (fundamental wave of the phase currents sum) side H,
• pE is the amperometric polarity of the residual current so that it can be corrected any possible re-
versal of polarity; if the amperometric polarity is according the schematic connection diagram the
corresponding setting is C7-C8 POL = NORMAL (pE1 = +1), otherwise is INVERSE (pE1 = -1).
The C7-C8 POL parameter is available inside the Set \ Polarity menu.
• ME is an amplitude compensating factor of residual current calculated by the relay as follows from
the InpH, InH, IEn1p, IEn1n, parameters setting inside the Set \ Base menu:
ME = (InpH / InH) / (IEn1p / IEn1)
The ME factor expresses the value that is multiplied by the residual current calculated by the cur-
rent of phase CTs in order to obtain an amplitude equal to that of the residual current measured by
CT on grounding the neutral in case of earth fault outside the protected area. The relay also checks
that the ME value is ≤ 200 and if this condition is not met, the relay displays a warning and requires
the programming of parameters Inp(H), In(H), IEnp, IEn. Being compensated in amplitude the calculated
residual current, the threshold setting of the element is always referred to the rated current of the CT
on grounding connection of neutral (IE1).
The current iE and iE(H) are conventionally regarded as positive if entrants in their respective ref-
erence terminal of the current input, whether negative terminals. Internal fault in the protected
area, iE and iE(H) are thus both positive, and that the phasors are in phase (assuming the same sys-
tem of earthing of the star and the network), while a fault outside the protected area iE is positive
and iE(H) negative and that the phasors are in phase opposition.
To understand how the 64REF element does work, to simplify, consider PE1 = +1 and ME(H)=1, , accord-
ing to the connection diagram and use of CTs with the same ratio on the grounding neutral-side H.
The trip current is the residual current measured directly by the CT on the starpoint grounding con-
nection.
The stabilization current is computed by the relay using the sum and difference method of the cur-
rents on the grounding path (direct measurement) and line currents (calculated as sum of phase
currents).

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 187

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 The current stabilization thus depends on the residual current values as well on the their displace-
ment angle ϕ.

-IECH

ϕ IE1-IECH
IE1 IES /4
IECH

IE1+IECH

Three operating conditions with ideal and matched measurement CTs (pE1 = +1 and ME(H) =1) are
considered:
• Earth fault inside the protected zone, powered only from the starpoint
The trip current is equal to IE1 while, being IE(H) = 0, the stabilization current is: IES = 4 · (IE1 - IE1) = 0
The element trips when the fault current exceeds the minimum threshold set IREF > (maximum sen-
sitivity for internal fault).
• Earth fault inside the protected zone, powered from both sides
The trip current is IE1 while, assuming that IECH has the same module and is in phase (ϕ = 0 °) with
IE1, the stabilizing current is:
IES = 4 · (|IE1 - IE1 | - |IE1 + IE1 |) = - 8 IE1 < 0 => IES = 0
Since IES is zero the element trips when the fault current exceeds the minimum threshold set IREF >
(maximum sensitivity for internal earth fault).
• Earth fault outside the protected zone (external fault)
The trip current is still equal to IE1, while being ideally IECH = -IE1 (residual current on the starpoint
grounding out of phase with the phase side H residual current, i.e ϕ = 180 °), the stabilization cur-
rent is: IES = 4 · (|IE1 + IE1 | - |IE1 - IE1 |) = 8 IE1 that being positive and equal to eight times the trip-
ping current, determines the stabilization external fault protection on increasing to infinity the trip
threshold (maximum stability for external earth fault). If any CT is saturated, a displacement angle
ϕ <180 ° is introduced, so the stabilization current is decreased.
In particular, the maximum stability on external fault is obtained with ϕ ≥ 100 °. Conversely for ϕ ≤
90°, the stabilization current is cleared so the maximum sensitivity is achieved.
For ϕ increasing from 90 ° to 100 ° the sensitivity decreases from IREF > to infinity.
The start of the 64REF threshold becomes active when the following condition are contemporane-
ously active:
A) IES(H) ≤ 4 · IREF(H) >
B) IE1 ≥ IES + [IREF >/[1-(IES /4 · IREF >)20] or in normalized form:
[IE1/IREF >] ≥ [IES /IREF >] + [1 /[1-(IES /(4 · IREF >) 20]
C) 64REF Enable = ON
D) 64REF-BLK1 = OFF
where:
• 64REF Enable is the enabling parameter of the 64REF
• IREF > is the minimum threshold setting (max sensitivity) of the 64REF element
• 64REF-BLK1 is the output logic state for the logic block function of the 64REF element.
After expiry of the associated delay time (t REF >) a trip command is issued ; if instead the A), B), C) and
D) conditions current don’t remain valid, the element it is restored.
The restricted ground fault protection is then stabilized against external faults by increasing the
threshold of residual current measured at the grounding of the neutral current with increasing stabi-
lization in accordance with the following characteristics:

IE/IREF> 10
9
8
7
TRIP
6
5
4
3
NO TRIP
2
1
0 IES/IREF>
0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5

Breaker failure (BF)

The element can produce the Breaker Failure side H output if the 64REF-BF, parameter is set to
ON. The parameters are available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Low impedance restricted ground

188 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 fault-64REF menu.[1]

The following block criteria are available:

Logical block (Block1)
If the 64REF-BLK1 enabling parameter is set to ON and a binary input is designed for logical block
(Block1), the element is blocked off whenever the given input is active.[2] The enabling parameters
are available inside the menu Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Low impedance restricted ground fault - 64REF
menu, while the Block1 function must be assigned to the selected binary input inside the Set \
Board1(2) inputs \ Binary input IN1-1...INx-x) menus.

Selective block (Block2)

For the protective element the output selective block may be set.
The logic selectivity function may be performed by means any combination of the following I/O:
• One committed pilot wire output (BLOUT1).
• One or more output relays designed for output selective block.
Only when the committed pilot wire are used the continuity check of the pilot wire link is active.
Use of committed pilot wire output BLOUT1:
• The information about phase or phase+earth block may be select programming the ModeBLOUT1
parameter (OFF - ON IPh - ON IPh/IE - ON IE) inside Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Selective block-
BLOCK2 \ Selective block OUT menus.

Use of output relay (K1...K6):

• If the 64REF-BLK2OUT enable parameter is set to ON and a output relay is designed for selective
block (Block2), the protection issues a block output by phase elements (BLK2OUT-Iph) or by any pro-
tection element (BLK2OUT-Iph/IE), whenever the given element (Start 64REF) becomes active. The
enable 64REF-BLK2OUT parameter (ON or OFF) is available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Low
impedance restricted ground fault - 64REF, while the BLK2OUT-Iph-K, BLK2OUT-Iph/IE-K
and/or BLK2OUT-IE-K output relays and LEDs (BLK2OUT-Iph-L, BLK2OUT-Iph/IE-L e/o
BLK2OUT-IE-L) must be select inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Selective block-BLOCK2 \ Selec-
tive block OUT menu.
Start 64REF>
Start 64REF> 64REF-ST-K

TRIPPING M ATRIX
64REF-ST-L

(LED+REL AYS)
I REF > ON≡Enable
64REF-Enable t REF>
I E1
& t REF>
I EC H I E1 ≥ I REF> · I ES + [I REF>/[1-(I ES/4 · I REF>)20] 64REF-TК-K
T 0 64REF-TК-L
I E S ≤ 4I RE F > RESET
Trip 64REF>
Start 64REF>
Enable (ON≡Enable) &
64REF-BLK1 Trip 64REF> & BLK1IE>>
&
Block1
Block1 Logic INx t ON INx t OFF
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF
n.o. Block1
T 0 0 T
Binary input INx
Block1

ST-Iph BLK2 BLK2OUT-Iph

BLK2OUT-IPh-K
TRIPPING M ATRIX

All BLK2OUT outputs

(LED+REL AYS)

t F-IPh BLK2OUT-IPh-L
of phase elements ≥1 BLK2OUT-IE
t F-IPh BLK2OUT-IE-K
(see BLK2OUT chapter) t F-IPh/IE
T 0 BLK2OUT-IE-L
BLK2OUT-Iph/IE
Start 64REF t F-IPh/IE BLK2OUT-IPh/IE-K
64REF Block2 OUT ≥1
Block2 output & T 0 BLK2OUT-IPh/IE-L
64REF-BLK2OUT A = OFF
(ON≡Enable)
t F-IE B = ON IPh
ModeBLOUT1
C = ON IPh/IE
All other BLK2OUT outputs ≥1 t F-IE A D = ON IE
B BLOUT1
of ground elements T 0 Pilot wire output
C
(see BLK2OUT chapter)
ST-IE BLK2 D
Block2 output

Restricted earth fault protection - logic diagram (46REF) Fun_49_AL.ai

Note 1 The common settings concerning the Breaker failure protection are adjustable inside the Breaker Failure - BF menu.
Note 2 The exhaustive treatment of the logical block (Block 1) function may be found in the “Logic Block” paragraph inside CONTROL AND MONITOR-
ING section

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 189

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
Maximum number of starts - 66
Preface
The element performs a complementary task with respect to the thermal function: it prevents the mo-
tor restarting when the conditions established by the motor manufacturer may be exceeded.
Two different operating modes may be select:
• Maximum number of starts performed inside an adjustable time control window,
• Maximum starting span (determined by the I> locked rotor threshold overcome) inside an adjust-
able time control window.
The trip of this protection should inhibit the starting of the motor.
The time control window is continuously shifted (step 10 s) to make the protection keeping a con-
stantly updated condition.

Operation and settings

The maximum number of starts performed inside an adjustable time control window or the maximum
starting span is compared with the setting thresholds. if Values above the associated threshold is
detected a trip is issued. The element it is restored after expiry of the associated inhibition time when
counters drop below the threshold.

The element can be enabled or disabled by setting ON or OFF the 66 Enable parameter inside the
Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Maximum number of starts - 66 menu.

The element operating mode:

• Maximum number of starts performed inside an adjustable time control window,
• Maximum starting span (determined by the I> locked rotor threshold overcome) inside an adjust-
able time control window,
may be programmed by setting the Type66 parameter (NTS, TST) and available inside the Set \
Profile A(or B) \ Maximum number of starts - 66 menu.

With NST-mode the motor starts are recognized by the relay when the fixed threshold IRUN = 0.10 IB
is overcome, while in TST-mode the time intervals exceeding the lower of the two enabled thresholds
50S/51LR (48) are added cumulatively.
With TST-mode are then incorporated not only the time intervals to the motor start but also time
intervals in which the motor undergoes temporary overloads beyond the locked rotor protection
threshold. With TST-mode at least one threshold should therefore enabled.

The thresholds:
• Maximum number of starts (NTS),
• Maximum real-time of starts (TST),
• Time control window (tC),
• Inhibition time (tIN),
can be adjusted inside the same menu.

INPUT
(NTS or TST)
Threshold

t IN t IN t IN

66 Trip

TST
TYPE66
NST

t
Maximum number of starts (66) - Inhibition timer Timers-F66.ai

Logical block (Block1)

If the 66BLK1 enabling parameter is set to ON and a binary input is designed for logical block
(Block1), the element is blocked off whenever the given input is active.[1] The enabling parameters
are available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Maximum number of starts - 66 menu, while the
Block1 function must be assigned to the selected binary input inside the Set \ Board 1(2) inputs \
Binary input IN1-1...(IN1-x) menus.

Note 1 The exhaustive treatment of the logical block (Block 1) function may be found in the “Logic Block” paragraph inside CONTROL AND MONITOR-
ING section

190 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 ON≡Enable
66 Enable
Any change of
Type66 setting
S t ar t ing de t ec t ion

I R UN = 0.1IB tC N ST Trip 66

IL1...IL3 tC COUNTER
Ma x [ IL1...IL3] ≥ IRUN T 0 t IN

TRIPPING M ATRIX
RESET Type 66

(LED+REL AYS)
t IN 66TR-K
&
tC T ST 0 T 66TR-L
Type66 = NST
Start ILR> tC Max number of starts
Start I LR
≥1 COUNTER
Start ILR>> T
RESET
Type66 = TST
Max starting span
Maximum number of starts (66) Block diagram
Enable (ON≡Enable)
66BLK1
& BLK1 66

Block1 Logic INx t ON INx t OFF

n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF
n.o. Block1
T 0 0 T
Binary input INx
Block1

Type66 = TST Cumulative time of starts

Max[IL1...IL3]
min[ILR>,ILR>>]

START
ts1 ts2 ts3
TStart = 0
ts4

TStart = ts1 TStart = ts1+ts2 TStart = ts1+ts2+ts4

tC
ts0

TStart = ts0 TStart = ts0+ts2 TStart = ts0+ts2+ts3

tC

Type66 = NST Maximum number of starts

Max[IL1...IL3]
IRUN

Start I LR

NStart = 1 NStart = 2 NStart = 3

tC

NStart = 1 NStart = 2
tC

t
Maximum number of starts - logic diagram (66) 66-diagram.ai

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 191

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
— Ground directional overcurrent - 67N
Preface
Four operation thresholds, independently adjustable with adjustable delay.
Each element can be enabled or disabled.
The first two may be programmed with definite or inverse time according the IEC and ANSI/IEEE
standard, as well as with rectifier, EM curve.
The third and fourth thresholds with independent time.
The residual current is measured at IE2 input, while the residual voltage can be selected as the
value measured UE or calculated UEC .

Operation and settings

The first and second threshold may be programmed with definite or inverse time according the fol-
lowing characteristic curves:
• Standard Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type A or SIT): t = 0.14 · t ED >inv / [(IED/IED >inv)0.02 - 1]
• Very Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type B or VIT): t = 13.5 · t ED >inv / [(IPD/IED >inv) - 1]
• Extremely Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type C or EIT): t = 80 · t PD >inv / [(IED/IED >inv)2 - 1]
• Moderately Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type MI): t = tED>inv · {0.01 / [(IED/IED>inv)0.02 - 1] + 0.023}
• Very Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type VI): t = tED>inv · {3.922 / [(IED/IED>inv)2 - 1] + 0.098}
• Extremely Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type EI): t = tED>inv · {5.64 / [(IED/IED>inv)2 - 1] + 0.024}
• Electromechanical (EM): t = tED>inv · {0.28 / [-0236 · (IED/IED>inv)-1 + 0.339]}
Where:
t: operate time
IED >inv : first and second threshold setting (IED>inv, IED>>inv)
t ED >inv : first and second threshold operate time setting (tPD>inv, t PD>>inv)
Third and fourth threshold (IED>>>def, IED>>>>def ) with definite time.

t ED >
TRIP

t ED >>

t ED >>>

t ED >>>>

I ED > I ED >> I ED >>> I ED >>>> I ED

General operation time characteristic for the ground directional overcurrent elements - 67N

For all inverse time characteristics, following data applies:

• Asymptotic reference value (minimum pickup value): 1.1 IED> or IED>>
• Minimum operate time: 0.1 s
• Range where the equation is valid:[1] 1.1 ≤ IED/IED >inv (or IED>>inv) ≤ 20
• If IED>inv (or IED>>inv) pickup ≥ 0.5 IEn2 , the upper limit is 10 IEn2
• For all definite time elements the upper limit for measuring is 10 IEn2 .

Note 1 When the input value is more than 20 times the set point , the operate time is limited to the value corresponding to 20 times the set point

192 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 The operating mode may be selected by setting the Mode67N parameter, located inside the Set \
Profile A(or B) \ Directional earth fault overcurrent-67N \ Common configuration menu.
The settable operating mode is I (module) or I*cos (projection).

UE
U EC

Trip sector
Half operating sector (toward line)
Characteristic angle
(βE>, βE>>, βE>>>, βE>>>>)
(ΘE>, ΘE>>, ΘE>>>, ΘE>>>>)
Mode67N I ED threshold

I I E2 Characteristic axis
I∙cos I E ≥ I ED threshold Threshold (I ED threshold):
(I ED >, I ED >>, I ED >>>, I ED >>>>) Half operating sector
(M∙I ED >, M∙I ED >>, M∙I ED >>>, M∙I ED >>>>) (βE>, βE>>, βE>>>, βE>>>>)
ΦE o ΦEC
IE
No trip sector
(toward busbar)
BUSBAR NVA100X-D
Operating characteristics of the earth fault overcurrent element - 67N
C7 with module operating mode (I)

I E2 RESIDUAL
IE
CURRENT INPUT
UE
U EC
B9
RESIDUAL Trip sector
UE
VOLTAGE INPUT Half operating sector (toward line) Characteristic angle
(βE>, βE>>, βE>>>, βE>>>>) (ΘE>, ΘE>>, ΘE>>>, ΘE>>>>)

Characteristic axis

Threshold (I ED threshold):
LINE
(I ED >, I ED >>, I ED >>>, I ED >>>>)
(M∙I ED >, M∙I ED >>, M∙I ED >>>, M∙I ED >>>>) Half operating sector
ΦE o ΦEC (βE>, βE>>, βE>>>, βE>>>>)
IE
3Votype67N
No trip sector
UE ΦE o ΦEC I (toward busbar)
ED threshold
Mode67N U EC

I
Operating characteristics of the earth fault overcurrent element - 67N
I E2
I∙cos I E2∙ COS (ϑE-ΦE ) ≥ I ED threshold with projection operating mode ( I∙cos)

Operating characteristics of the ground directional overcurrent elements - 67N char-F67N-mode.ai

For both the operating modes, the polarizing reference used for displacement measure of the re-
sidual current may be selected:
• Direct residual voltage - the measured UE voltage is employed.
• Calculated residual voltage - the calculated UEC voltage is employed, where the fundamental com-
ponent and phase are derived from the instantaneous values of the three input phase-to-neutral
voltages.
Therefore, for both operating mode, the displacement of the residual current phasor IE2 and the
residual voltage phasor (UE or UEC for direct/calculated residual voltage measurement type), positive
for lagging current compared with voltage (ΦE =(∠IE2 - ∠UE , ΦEC =(∠IE2 - ∠UEC).

The residual voltage measurement type may be selected by setting the 3Votype67N parameter,
located inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Directional earth fault overcurrent-67N \ Common configu-
ration menu. The measurement type is UE (direct measure of residual voltage) or UEC (calculated
residual voltage).
For each of the four thresholds (IED >, IED >>, IED >>>, IED >>>>), the characteristic angle (ϑE>, ϑE>>,
ϑE>>>, ϑE>>>>) may be adjusted (setting range 0…359° common for the three phases).
The the characteristic angle setting (positive when clockwise compared the polarizing voltage)
specifies the angular displacement of the characteristic axis standing for the trip bisector of the
tripping zone. For isolated neutral systems with a 90° characteristic angle setting, faults towards
the LINE are detected, while with a 270° characteristic angle setting, faults towards the BUS are
detected. All the named parameters can be set separately for the four thresholds and for definite or
inverse time settings menu.
For each of the four thresholds (IED >, IED >>, IED >>>, IED >>>>), the half operating sector may be ad-
justed (setting range 0…180° simmetrically regarding the characteristic axis).
All the parameters can be set separately for the four thresholds and for definite or inverse time set-
tings menu.

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 193

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 VT supervision
For all the four thresholds (IED>, IED>>, IED>>>, IED>>>>), the operating mode when the 74VT function is
active may be defined:
• OFF: no action are issued by 74VT.
• Block: all the four thresholds are blocked when the 74VT function is active.
• Not directional: all the four thresholds are switched from directional to not directional criteria
when the 74VT function is active.
The 74VT information may issued from internal 74VT function or from an external signal acquired by
means a binary input.
If a binary input is designed for 74VText, for all the four thresholds, the operating mode when the 74VT
function is active may be defined:
• OFF: no action are issued by 74VT.
• Block: all the four thresholds are blocked when the 74VT external signal is active.
• Not directional: all the four thresholds are switched from directional to not directional criteria
when the 74VT external signal is active.

Malfunctioning of the directional overcurrent elements can be avoided when VTs secondary fault
will arise (fuse or MCB tripping) by switching the overcurrent directional to non directional overcur-
rent protection
The 74VTint67N and 74VText67N parameters may be set as OFF, Block, Not directional inside
the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Directional earth fault overcurrent-67N \ Common configuration menu,
while the 74VText function must be assigned to the selected binary inputs inside the Set \ Board
1(2) inputs \ Binary input IN1-1...(IN1-x) menus.

For all the four thresholds (common for all thresholds) an insensibility zone may be enabled in the
voltage-current plane.
If enabled, the insensibility zone is user adjustable by means the M multiplier (common for all thresh-
olds); the rectangle defined by the current and voltage thresholds and the same multiplied by M
becomes a No trip zone.
Such insensibility zone may be useful to avoid unwanted trip in the presence of some fixed residual
current and/or voltage (e.g. CT and or VT errors in the residual measurements).
The Insens-Zone (OFF, ON) and M parameters may be adjusted inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \
Directional earth fault overcurrent-67N \ Common configuration menu.

UE
U EC

TRIP

U ED >, U ED >>, U ED >>>, U ED >>>>

IE2
I ED >, I ED >>, I ED >>>, I ED >>>>
Voltage/current characteristic concerning the earth fault overcurrent element - 67N
with insensibility zone disabled
UE
U EC

TRIP
M∙U ED >, M∙U ED >>, M∙U ED >>>, M∙U ED >>>>

U ED >, U ED >>, U ED >>>, U ED >>>>

IE2
I ED >, I ED >>, I ED >>>, I ED >>>> M∙I ED >, M∙I ED >>, M∙I ED >>>, M∙I ED >>>>

Voltage/current characteristic concerning the ground directional overcurrent - 67N

with insensibility zone enabled char-F67N-IeUe.ai

Module
If the module principle and the operation mode is not switched to “not directional” (by the 74VT
function), the start of any 67N threshold becomes active when the following A) and B) conditions
are contemporaneously active:
A) in the “Insens-Zone=OFF” operating mode:
- The residual current (IE2 ) fundamental component overcomes the threshold (IED>, IED>>, IED>>>,

194 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 IED>>>>)
AND
- The residual voltage (UE or UEC) fundamental component overcomes the threshold (UED>, UED>>,
UED>>>, UED>>>>),
while in the “Insens-Zone=ON” operating mode:
- The residual current (IE2 ) fundamental component overcomes the threshold (IED>, IED>>, IED>>>,
IED>>>>)
AND
- The residual current (IE2 ) fundamental component overcomes the threshold (M∙UED>, M∙UED>>,
M∙UED>>>, M∙UED>>>>)
OR
- The residual current (IE2 ) fundamental component overcomes the threshold (M∙IED>, M∙IED>>,
M∙IED>>>, M∙IED>>>>)
AND
The residual voltage (UE or UEC) fundamental component overcomes the threshold (UED>, UED>>,
UED>>>, UED>>>>).
B) The residual current phasor (IE2 ) is located inside the angular sector defined by own character-
istic angle (βE>, βE>>, βE>>>, βE>>>>) and half operating sector (ΘE>, ΘE>>, ΘE>>>, ΘE>>>>), that is
the -βE ≤ (ΘE-ΦE) ≤ +βE condition is fulfilled.
If the operation mode is switched to “not directional” (by the 74VT function), the start of any 67N
threshold becomes active when the following is complied:
- The residual current (IE ) fundamental component overcomes the threshold (IED>, IED>>, IED>>>,
IED>>>>)
The operating mode (Mode67N), the residual voltage measurement type (Type67N), the insensibil-
ity zone enabling (Insens-Zone), the threshold multiplier for the insensibility zone (M) and the op-
eration from 74VT (74VText67N) may be selected by setting the concerning parameters, located in-
side the Set\Profile A(or B)\Directional earth fault overcurrent-67N \ Common configuration menu.
The settable operating mode is I (module) or I*cos (projection).
Projection
If the projection principle and he operation mode is not switched to “not directional” (by the 74VT
function), the start of any 67N threshold becomes active when the following C) condition is active:

C) in the “Insens-Zone=OFF” operating mode:

- Residual current projection on the characteristic axis IE2∙cos(ΦE-ΘE) > 0
AND
- The residual current projection on the characteristic axis IE2∙cos(ΦE-ΘE) overcomes the threshold
(IED>, IED>>, IED>>>, IED>>>>)
AND
- The residual voltage (UE or UEC) fundamental component overcomes the threshold (UED>, UED>>,
UED>>>, UED>>>>).
AND
The residual current phasor (IE2 ) is located inside the angular sector defined by own characteristic
angle (βE>, βE>>, βE>>>, βE>>>>) and half operating sector (ΘE>, ΘE>>, ΘE>>>, ΘE>>>>), that is the
-βE ≤ (ΘE-ΦE) ≤ +βE condition is fulfilled.[1]

While in the “Insens-Zone=ON” operating mode:

- Residual current projection on the characteristic axis IE2∙cos(ΦE-ΘE) > 0
AND
- The residual current projection on the characteristic axis IE2∙cos(ΦE-ΘE) overcomes the threshold
(IED>, IED>>, IED>>>, IED>>>>)
AND
- The residual voltage (UE or UEC) fundamental component overcomes the threshold (M∙UED>, M∙UED>>,
M∙UED>>>, M∙UED>>>>)
OR
The residual current projection on the characteristic axis IE∙cos(ΦE-ΘE) overcomes the threshold
(M∙IED>, M∙IED>>, M∙IED>>>, M∙IED>>>>)
AND
- The residual voltage (UE or UEC) fundamental component overcomes the threshold (UED>, UED>>,
UED>>>, UED>>>>).
AND
The residual current phasor (IE ) is located inside the angular sector defined by own characteristic
angle (βE>, βE>>, βE>>>, βE>>>>) and half operating sector (ΘE>, ΘE>>, ΘE>>>, ΘE>>>>), that is the
-βE ≤ (ΘE-ΦE) ≤ +βE condition is fulfilled.[2]

Note 1 For each threshold the projection of the residual current phasor on the characteristic axis is: IE2cos(ΘE>-ΦE), IE2cos(ΘE>>-ΦE), IE2cos(ΘE>>>-
ΦE), IE2cos(ΘE>>>>-ΦE) when “direct” residual voltage is selected (UE), or
IE2cos(ΘE>-ΦEC), IE2cos(ΘE>>-ΦEC), IE2cos(ΘE>>>-ΦEC), IE2cos(ΘE>>>>-ΦEC) when “calculated” residual voltage is selected (UEC).
The ΘE , βE and ΦEC symbols are not used inside the Thysetter and MMI menus.
Note 2 For each threshold the projection of the residual current phasor on the characteristic axis is: IE2cos(ΘE>-ΦE), IE2cos(ΘE>>-ΦE), IE2cos(ΘE>>>-
ΦE), IE2cos(ΘE>>>>-ΦE) when “direct” residual voltage is selected (UE), or
IE2cos(ΘE>-ΦEC), IE2cos(ΘE>>-ΦEC), IE2cos(ΘE>>>-ΦEC), IE2cos(ΘE>>>>-ΦEC) when “calculated” residual voltage is selected (UEC).
The ΘE , βE and ΦEC symbols are not used inside the Thysetter and MMI menus.

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 195

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 If the operation mode is switched to “not directional” (by the 74VT function), the start of any 67N
threshold becomes active when the following is complied:
- The residual current (IE ) fundamental component overcomes the threshold (IED>, IED>>, IED>>>,
IED>>>>)
For both the operating mode (module or projection), when the start signal goes ON a concerning
counter starts; after expiry of the associated operate time (t ED>, t ED>>, t ED>>>, t ED>>>>) a trip command
is issued, if instead the above conditions don’t remain valid, the element it is restored.
All the parameters are located inside the menus concerning the four elements, separately for defi-
nite and inverse time characteristics.
Example: the operate time concerning the first threshold with definite time characteristic (IED>def)
is available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Directional earth fault overcurrent-67N \ IED> Element
\ Definite time menu.
All directional earth fault overcurrent elements can be enabled or disabled by setting ON or OFF
the IED> Enable, IED>> Enable, , IED>>> Enable e/o IED>>>> Enable parameters in-
side the Set \ Profile A(or B)\Directional earth fault overcurrent-67N \ IED> Element (IED>> Element,
IED>>> Element, IED>>> Element) \ Setpoints menus.
The first and second overcurrent element can be programmed with definite or inverse time charac-
teristic by setting theIED>Curve and/or IED>>Curve (DEFINITE, IEC/BS A, IEC/BS B, IEC/
BS C, ANSI/IEE MI, ANSI/IEE VI, ANSI/IEE EI, EM) available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \
Directional earth fault overcurrent-67N \ IED> Element (IED>> Element) \ Setpoints menus.
The trip of IED> element may be inhibited by the start of the second, third and/or fourth element (IED>>,
IED>>>, IED>>>>) by setting ON the Disable IED> by start IED>>, Disable IED> by start IED>>>, Dis-
able IED> by start IED>>>> (IED>disbyIED>>, IED>disbyIED>>>, IED>disbyIED>>>>)
parameters available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Directional earth fault overcurrent-67N
\ IED>> Element (IED>>> Element, IED>>>> Element) \ Setpoints menus.
Similarly the trip of the:
• IED>> element may be inhibited by start of the third and/or fourth element (IED>>> and/or IED>>>>)
by setting ON the Disable IED>> by start IED>>>, start IED>>>> (IED>>disbyIED>>>,
IED>>disbyIED>>>>) parameter available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Directional earth
fault overcurrent-67N \ IED>>> Element (IED>>>> Element) \ Setpoints menus.
• IED>>> element may be inhibited by start of the fourth element (IED>>>>) by setting ON the Dis-
able IED>>> by start IED>>>> (IED>>>disbyIED>>>>) parameter available inside the Set \
Profile A(or B) \ Directional earth fault overcurrent-67N \ IED>>>> Element \ Setpoints menu.
All the named parameters can be set separately for Profile A and Profile B.
An adjustable reset time delay is provided for every threshold (tED>RES, tED>>RES, tED>>>RES, tED>>>RES).
.
Timers-F67N.ai

INPUT

t ED>RES t ED>RES t ED>RES

IED> Start
t ED> t ED>

IED> Trip

RESET

t
67N element timers - first element
Breaker failure (BF)
Each directional earth fault element can produce the Breaker Failure output if the IED> BF, IED>>
BF, IED>>> BF and/or IED>>>> BF parameters are set to ON. The parameters are available
inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Directional earth fault overcurrent-67N \ IED> Element (IED>> Ele-
ment, IED>>> Element, IED>>> Element) \ Setpoints menus.[1]

Cold load pickup (CLP)

If the CLP function (Cold Load Pick-up) is enabled for element blocking, the selected threshold may
be blocked for an adjustable time interval, starting from the circuit breaker closure.
This operating mode may be select by setting ON-Element blocking the IEDCLP> Mode, IED-
CLP>> Mode, IEDCLP>>> Mode, IEDCLP>>>> Mode parameters.

If the CLP function (Cold Load Pick-up) is enabled for threshold change, the selected threshold may
be changed for an adjustable time interval, starting from the circuit breaker closure.
This operating mode (ON-Change setting = IEDCLP> Mode, IEDCLP>> Mode, IED-
CLP>>> Mode, IEDCLP>>>> Mode) and the concerning operating time within the CLP (tED-
CLP>, tEDCLP>>, tEDCLP>>>, tEDCLP>>>>) may be adjusted inside the Set \ Profile
A(or B) \ Directional earth fault overcurrent-67N \ IED> Element (IED>> Element, IED>>> Element,
IED>>> Element) \ Setpoints menus, whereas the operating thresholds within the CLP ( IEDCLP>def,
IEDCLP>inv,....) may be adjusted inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Directional earth fault overcur-
rent-67N \ IED> Element (IED>> Element, IED>>> Element, IED>>> Element) \ Definite time (Inverse
time) menus.
Note 1 The common settings concerning the Breaker failure protection are adjustable inside the Breaker Failure - BF menu.

196 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 For every of the four thresholds the following block criteria are available:
Logical block (Block1)
If the IED>BLK1, IED>>BLK1, IED>>>BLK1 and/or IED>>>>BLK1 enabling parameters
are set to ON and a binary input is designed for logical block (Block1), the concerning element
is blocked off whenever the given input is active.[1] The enabling parameters are available inside
the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Directional earth fault overcurrent-67N \ IED> Element (IED>> Element,
IED>>> Element, IED>>> Element) \ Setpoints menus, while the Block1 function must be assigned
to the selected binary input inside the Set \ Board1(2) inputs \ Binary input IN1-1...INx-x) menus.

Selective block (Block2)

All along the protective elements the selective block may be set.
The logic selectivity function may be performed by means any combination of the following I/O:
• One committed pilot wire input (BLIN1).
• One or more binary inputs designed for input selective block.
• One committed pilot wire output (BLOUT1).
• One or more output relays designed for output selective block.
Only when the committed pilot wire are used the continuity check of the pilot wire link is active.

Use of committed pilot wire input BLIN1:

• The protection is blocked off according the selectivity block criteria when the input BLIN1 is active.
The information about phase or phase+earth block may be select programming the ModeBLIN1
parameter inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Selective block-BLOCK2 \ Selective block IN menus.

Use of binary inputs:

• If the IED>BLK2IN, IED>>BLK2IN, IED>>>BLK2IN and/or IED>>>>BLK2IN parameters
are set to ON and a binary input is designed for selective block (Block2), the protection is blocked
off by phase elements (Block2 Iph) or by any protection element (Block2 Iph/IE) according the se-
lectivity block criteria.[2] The enable IED>BLK2IN, IED>>BLK2IN, IED>>>BLK2IN and/or
IED>>>>BLK2IN parameters are available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Directional earth
fault overcurrent-67N \ IED> Element (IED>> Element, IED>>> Element, IED>>>> Element) \ Set-
points menus, while the Block2 Iph and Block2 Iph/IE functions must be assigned to the se-
lected binary inputs inside the Set \ Board 1(2) inputs \ Binary input IN1-1...(IN1-x) menus.

Use of committed pilot wire output BLOUT1:

• The information about phase or phase+earth block may be select programming the ModeBLOUT1
parameter (OFF - ON IPh - ON IPh/IE - ON IE) inside Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Selective block-
BLOCK2 \ Selective block OUT menus.

Use of output relay:

• If the IED>BLK2OUT, IED>>BLK2OUT, IED>>>BLK2OUT and/or IED>>>>BLK2OUT
enable parameters are set to ON and a output relay is designed for selective block (Block2), the
protection issues a block output by phase elements (BLK2OUT-Iph) or by any protection element
(BLK2OUT-Iph/IE), whenever the given element (Start IED>, Start IED>>, Start IED>>> and/or Start
IED>>>>) becomes active. The enable IED>BLK2OUT, IED>>BLK2OUT, IED>>>BLK2OUT
and/or IED>>>>BLK2OUT parameters (ON or OFF) are available inside the Set \ Profile
A(or B) \ Directional earth fault overcurrent-67 \ IED> Element (IED>> Element, IED>>> Element,
IED>>>> Element) \ Setpoints menus, while the BLK2OUT-Iph-K, BLK2OUT-Iph/IE-K and/
or BLK2OUT-IE-K output relays and LEDs (BLK2OUT-Iph-L, BLK2OUT-Iph/IE-L e/o BLK-
2OUT-IE-L) must be select inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Selective block-BLOCK2 \ Selective
block OUT menu.

Internal selective block (Block4)

As well as to send or transmit a selective block toward other protective relays, each protective
element may be enabled for receive or transmit a selective block from/to other internal protective
elements.[3]
The internal selective block of one or more element concerning the directional earth fault overcur-
rent function may be enabled/disabled by means the IED>BLK4, IED>>BLK4, IED>>>BLK4
and/or IED>>>>BLK4 parameters (virtual input and output common to all protective thresholds);
the following operating modes are available:
• IN - the element is enabled to receive the selective block from an internal input.
• OUT - the element is enabled to send the selective block to an internal output.
• OFF - the element is disabled to send/receive the internal selective block.
Transmission and reception for the same element is not allowed, so any stall situation due to wrong
setting is avoided.
The internal selective block can work together with an external selective block from other protective
relays (Block2).

Note 1 The exhaustive treatment of the logical block (Block 1) function may be found in the “Logic Block” paragraph inside CONTROL AND MONITOR-
ING section
Note 2 The exhaustive treatment of the selective block (Block 2) function may be found in the “Selective Block” paragraph inside CONTROL AND
MONITORING section
Nota 3 The exhaustive treatment of the internal selective block (Block 4) function may be found in the “Internal selective block” paragraph inside
CONTROL AND MONITORING section.

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 197

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 IED> Enable IED>Curve IEDCLP>Mode tEDCLP> tED>RES IED> def IEDCLP> def tED> def IED> inv IEDCLP> inv tED> inv
Common configurations
IED> Element Start IED>
IE2 IED>BF Trip IED>
Mode67N 3Votype67N
3Vo IED>BLK1 IED>BF
I UE Trip IED> &
I E2 3Vo Block1 & BLK1IED>
I ∙cos U EC Start IED> &
CLPIED>
IED>BLK2IN Start IED>
M BLK2INIED>
Insens-Zone &
Block2 &
OFF
IED>BLK2OUT
ON ≥ M∙threshold
IED>BLK4 BLK2OUT
Start IED> &
BLK4OUT
≥ IED> inhibition Start IED> &

IED>> Enable IED>>Curve IEDCLP>>Mode tEDCLP>> tED>>RES IED>>def IEDCLP>>def tED>> def IED>>inv IEDCLP>>inv tED>> inv

IE2 IED>> Element Start IED>>

3V o Trip IED>>
IED> disbyIED>>
CLPIED>>
&
IED>>BLK1 Start IED>>
Start IED>> BLK1IED>>
&
&
Block1
IED>>BF
IED>>BF
IED>>BLK2IN Trip IED>> &
Start IED>> BLK2INIED>>
&
Block2 &
IED>>BLK2OUT
BLK2OUT
IED>>BLK4 &
≥ IED>> inhibition Start IED>>
BLK4OUT
&
Start IED>>

IED>>> Enable IEDCLP>>>Mode tEDCLP>>> tED>>>RES IED>>>def IEDCLP>>>def tED>>> def

IED>>> Element Start IED>>>

IE2
Trip IED>>>
3Vo IED> disbyIED>>>
CLPIED>>>
IED>> disbyIED>>> &
Start IED>>>
&
Start IED>>>
IED>>>BLK1
Start IED>>> BLK1IED>>>
&
&
Block1
IED>>>BF
IED>>>BF
IED>>>BLK2IN Trip IED>>> &
Start IED>>> BLK2INIED>>>
&
Block2 &
IED>>>BLK2OUT
BLK2OUT
IED>>>BLK4 &
Start IED>>>
IED>>> inhibition BLK4OUT
&
Start IED>>>

IED>>>> Enable IEDCLP>>>>Mode tEDCLP>>>> tED>>>>RES IED>>>>def IEDCLP>>>>def tED>>>>def

IE2 IED>>>> Element Start IED>>>>

3V o IED> disIED>>>> Trip IED>>>>
IED>> disIED>>>>
Start I2ndh> &
IED>>> disIED>>>> Start IED>>>>
Block1 &
Start IED>>>>
Block2 &
Start IED>>>> CLPIED>>>>, BLK1IED>>>>,
IED>>>>BF, BLK2INIED>>>>,
General logic diagram of the ground directional overcurrent elements - 67N BLK2OUT, BLK4OUT all-F67N.ai

198 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 Common configurations
I ED>def State
Mode67N 3Votype67N
&
I UE
I E2 3Vo ≥ I ED>def
I∙cos U EC
≥1
M I ED>inv State
Insens-Zone CLP
A
&
OFF I E2 A =“OFF” A =“ON”
≥ M∙threshold ≥ I ED>inv
ON A = ON - Change setting within CLP

IEDCLP>def IEDCLP>inv
3V o Insens-Zone OFF

U ED>def State
≥ IEDCLP> TRIP
&
≥ U ED>def Insens-Zone
IE2
O FF
≥1 &
3V o ON M sheet 3
U ED>inv State
3 V o Insens-Zone ON
& Angle Semisector
≥ U ED>inv TRIP
3Vo
I E2 ΦE inside trip sector

IE2
3V o
I E2 ΦE inside trip sector &

I ED>def State

&
≥ I ED>def
≥1
I ED>inv State
CLP
A
&
I E2 A =“OFF” A =“ON” A = ON - Change setting within CLP
≥ I ED>inv
&
≥1
IEDCLP>def IEDCLP>inv
I ED>def State
≥ IEDCLP> &
≥ M∙I ED>def
≥1
U ED>def State
I ED>inv State
& &
≥ M∙U ED>def I E2
≥ M∙I ED>inv
≥1
3V o
U ED>inv State CLP
IEDCLP>def IEDCLP>inv A
& A =“OFF” A =“ON”
A = ON - Change setting within CLP
≥ M∙U ED>inv ≥ M∙IEDCLP> &

U ED>def State

&
≥ U ED>def
≥1
3Vo State
U ED>inv

&
≥ U ED>inv

Ground directional overcurrent (67N) - First element logic diagram (IED>) - Module operating mode (sheet 1 of 4) 67NS1-module.ai

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 199

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 UE
U EC Common configurations

Settore intervento
(direzione linea) I ED>def State Mode67N 3Votype67N
Angolo caratteristico I UE
& CLP I E2 3V o
I∙cos U EC
Semiasse caratteristico I E ∙cosϕ ≥ I ED>def
≥1 M
Semiampiezza settore A =“OFF” Insens-Zone
I ED>inv State
soglia I ED angolare d’intervento
ΦE o ΦEC A O FF
&
IE I E2 ON ≥ M∙threshold
I E ∙cosϕ ≥ I ED>inv A =“ON”

Settore non intervento A = ON - Change setting within CLP

(direzione sbarre) IEDCLP>def IEDCLP>inv

I E ∙cosϕ ≥ I EDCLP> 3Vo

Insens-Zone OFF
U ED>def State
TRIP
& I E2
I E ∙cosϕ ≥ 0 Insens-Zone
≥ U ED>def IE2
& O FF
≥1 P sheet 3
3V o ON
U ED>inv State
3 V o Insens-Zone ON
Angle Semisector
&
≥ U ED>inv 3Vo TRIP
I E2 ΦE inside trip sector

IE2
3Vo
I E2 ΦE inside trip sector

I E2 &
I ED>def State I E2 ∙cosϕ ≥ 0

&
I E2 ∙cosϕ ≥ I ED>def
≥1
I ED>inv State
CLP
A
&
I E2 A =“OFF” A =“ON” A = ON - Change setting within CLP
I E2 ∙cosϕ ≥ I ED>inv
&
≥1
IEDCLP>def IEDCLP>inv
I ED>def State

I E2 ∙cosϕ ≥ I EDCLP> &

I E2 ∙cosϕ ≥M∙I ED>def
≥1
U ED>def State I ED>inv State &
& &
I E2 A
≥ M∙U ED>def I E2 ∙cosϕ ≥M∙I ED>inv A =“OFF” A =“ON”
≥1 A = ON - Change setting within CLP
3V o
U ED>inv State IEDCLP>def IEDCLP>inv
&
≥ M∙U ED>inv I E2 ∙cosϕ ≥ I EDCLP>

U ED>def State

&
≥ U ED>def
≥1
3Vo State
U ED>inv

&
≥ U ED>inv

Ground directional overcurrent (67N) - First element logic diagram (IED>) - Projecting operating mode (sheet 2 of 4) 67NS1-proiezione.ai

200 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 Common configurations

Mode67N 3Votype67N
I UE
I E2 3Vo
I∙cos U EC

M
Insens-Zone
OFF
ON ≥ M∙threshold

ON≡Enable IED> directional earth fault

IED> Enable Start IED>

D =“modulo” IED>ST-K
M IED>ST-L
(sheet 1) Mode67N

TRIPPING M ATRIX
(LED+REL AYS)
D D
C C t ED>inv
D =“modulo” C =“proiezione” I ED> Curve t ED>RES
t ED>def
C =“proiezione”
(sheet 2) t ED>RES
A & t ED>def/inv
T 0 0 T IED>TR-K
B T 0 IE>TR-L
RESET
A
Trip IED>
B
I ED>def State
A = Directional B = Non-directional
&
≥ I ED>def
I E2

IEDCLP>def

≥ I EDCLP >def Non-directional

(from 74VT)

A =“0 or OFF” A =“1”

t E DC L P >
A
A = ON - Change setting within CLP ≥1 CLP IED>
t CLP> B = OFF - CLP disabled
B
CB-State C = ON - Element blocking within CLP
T 0 C

IEDCLP>Mode

IED> overcurrent directional element (67N) block diagram (sheet 4)

Block1, Block2, Block4 ≥1

74VTint/ext67N
Non-directional Block by 74VT (ON≡Block)
Internal or external
74VT
OFF

Trip IED>
BF Enable (ON≡Enable) & I ED> BF towards BF logic
I ED>BF

Ground directional overcurrent (67N) - First element logic diagram (IED>) (sheet 3 of 4) Fun_67NS1-3.ai

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 201

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 Start IED>
&
Enable (ON≡Enable)
IED>BLK1 Trip IED> & BLK1IED>
&

& BLK4IN IED>

Block1 Logic INx t ON INx t OFF Block4

n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 Block1, Block2, Block4

n.o. Block1
T 0 0 T
Binary input INx & BLK2IN IED>
Block1

Block2 input enable (ON≡Enable)

IED>BLK2IN
&
ModeBLIN1
OFF BLK2IN-Iph
BLIN1 ON IPh

TRIPPING M ATRIX
Pilot wire input

(LED+REL AYS)
ON IPh/IE Iph Block2
ON IE
FROM PHASE PROTECTIONS tB-K
tB-L
Logic t B-Iph
INx t ON INx t OFF
Block2 IPh
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 t B-Iph
≥1
n.o. T 0 0 T 0 T ≥1 tB timeout
Binary input INx
FROM ANY PROTECTIONS

Logic INx t ON INx t OFF t B-IE

Block2 IPh/IE
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 t B-IE
≥1 BLK2IN-IE
n.o. T 0 0 T 0 T
Binary input INx
FROM EARTH FAULT PROTECTIONS

Logic INx t ON INx t OFF

Block2 IE
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 IE Block2
n.o. T 0 0 T
Binary input INx Block2 input

All BLK2OUT outputs ST-Iph BLK2 BLK2OUT-Iph

BLK2OUT-IPh-K
≥1
TRIPPING M ATRIX
of phase elements t F-IPh BLK2OUT-IPh-L (LED+REL AYS)
(see BLK2OUT chapter) BLK2OUT-IE
t F-IPh BLK2OUT-IE-K
0 T t F-IPh/IE BLK2OUT-IE-L
BLK2OUT-Iph/IE
Start IED> t F-IPh/IE BLK2OUT-IPh/IE-K
IED> Block2 OUT ≥1
Block2 output & 0 T BLK2OUT-IPh/IE-L
IED>BLK2OUT
(ON≡Enable) A = OFF
t F-IE B = ON IPh
ModeBLOUT1 C = ON IPh/IE
All other BLK2OUT outputs ≥1 D = ON IE
t F-IE A
of ground elements B BLOUT1
0 T Pilot wire output
C
(see BLK2OUT chapter)
ST-IE BLK2 D
Block2 output

A = IN A = IN
IED>BLK4 B = OFF t FI-Iph B = OFF IED>BLK4
C = OUT ST-Iph BLK4 C = OUT
“0” A Block4
B IED> Block4 I/O t FI-Iph IED> Block4 OUT A
“0”
Start IED > C 0 T “0” B
“0” C
Block4 enable
t FI-IE ≥1 Block4 OUT
All other BLK4 I/O ≥1 All BLK4 I/O
t FI-IE
67NS1_BL-diagram.ai

of ground elements of phase elements ≥1

0 T
(see BLK4 chapter) (see BLK4chapter) ST-IE BLK4
Block4

Ground directional overcurrent (67N) - Logic diagram of the blocking signals concerning the first element (IED>) (sheet 4 of 4)

202 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 Common configurations
I ED>>def State
Mode67N 3Votype67N
I UE &
I E2 3Vo ≥ I ED>>def
I∙cos U EC
≥1
M I ED>>inv State
Insens-Zone CLP
A
&
OFF I E2 A =“OFF” A =“ON”
ON ≥ M∙threshold ≥ I ED>>inv
A = ON - Change setting within CLP

IEDCLP>>def IEDCLP>>inv
3V o Insens-Zone OFF
U ED>>def State
≥ IEDCLP>> TRIP
&
≥ U ED>def Insens-Zone
IE2 O FF
≥1 &
3V o ON M sheet 3
U ED>>inv State 3 V o Insens-Zone ON

& Angle Semisector

TRIP
≥ U ED>>inv
3Vo
I E2 ΦE inside trip sector
IE2
3V o
I E2 ΦE inside trip sector &

I ED>>def State

&
≥ I ED>def
≥1
I ED>>inv State
CLP
A
&
I E2 A =“OFF” A =“ON” A = ON - Change setting within CLP
≥ I ED>>inv
&
≥1
IEDCLP>>def IEDCLP>>inv
I ED>>def State
≥ IEDCLP>> &
≥ M∙I ED>def
≥1
U ED>>def State
I ED>>inv State
& &
≥ M∙U ED>def I E2
≥ M∙I ED>>inv
≥1
3V o
U ED>>inv State CLP
IEDCLP>>def IEDCLP>>inv A
& A =“OFF” A =“ON”
A = ON - Change setting within CLP
≥ M∙U ED>>inv ≥ M∙IEDCLP>> &

U ED>>def State

&
≥ U ED>>def
≥1
3Vo State
U ED>>inv

&
≥ U ED>>inv

Ground directional overcurrent (67N) - Second element logic diagram (IED>>) - Module operating mode (sheet 1 of 4) 67NS2-module.ai

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 203

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 UE
U EC Common configurations

Settore intervento
(direzione linea) I ED>>def State Mode67N 3Votype67N
Angolo caratteristico I UE
& CLP I E2 3V o
I∙cos U EC
Semiasse caratteristico I E ∙cosϕ ≥ I ED>>def
≥1
Semiampiezza settore A =“OFF” M
I ED>>inv State Insens-Zone
soglia I ED angolare d’intervento
ΦE o ΦEC & A O FF
IE2 I E2 A =“ON” ON ≥ M∙threshold
I E ∙cosϕ ≥ I ED>>inv

A = ON - Change setting within CLP

Settore non intervento
(direzione sbarre) IEDCLP>>def IEDCLP>>inv

3Vo
I E ∙cosϕ ≥ I EDCLP>> Insens-Zone OFF
U ED>>def State
TRIP
& I E2
I E ∙cosϕ ≥ 0 Insens-Zone
≥ U ED>>def IE2
& O FF
≥1 P sheet 3
3V o ON
U ED>>inv State
3 V o Insens-Zone ON
Angle Semisector
&
≥ U ED>>inv 3Vo TRIP

I E2 ΦE inside trip sector

IE2
3Vo
I E2 ΦE inside trip sector

I E2 &
I ED>>def State I E ∙cosϕ ≥ 0

&
I E ∙cosϕ ≥ I ED>def
≥1
I ED>>inv State
CLP
A
&
I E2 A =“OFF” A =“ON” A = ON - Change setting within CLP
I E ∙cosϕ ≥ I ED>>inv
&
≥1
IEDCLP>>def IEDCLP>>inv
I ED>>def State

I E ∙cosϕ ≥ I EDCLP>> &

I E2 ∙cosϕ ≥M∙I ED>>def
≥1
U ED>>def State I ED>>inv State &
& &
I E2 A
≥ M∙U ED>>def I E2 ∙cosϕ ≥M∙I ED>>inv A =“OFF” A =“ON”
≥1 A = ON - Change setting within CLP
3V o
U ED>>inv State IEDCLP>>def IEDCLP>>inv
&
≥ M∙U ED>>inv I E2 ∙cosϕ ≥ I EDCLP>>

U ED>>def State

&
≥ U ED>>def
≥1
3Vo State
U ED>>inv

&
≥ U ED>>inv
67NS2-proiezione.ai

Ground directional overcurrent (67N) - Second element logic diagram (IED>>) - Projecting operating mode (sheet 2 of 4)

204 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 Common configurations

Mode67N 3Votype67N
I UE
I E2 3Vo
I∙cos U EC

M
Insens-Zone
OFF
ON ≥ M∙threshold

ON≡Enable IED>> directional earth fault

IED>> Enable Start IED>>

D =“modulo” IED>>ST-K
M IED>>ST-L
(sheet 1) Mode67N

TRIPPING M ATRIX
(LED+REL AYS)
D D
C C t ED>>inv
D =“modulo” C =“proiezione” I ED>> Curve t ED>>RES
t ED>>def
C =“proiezione”
(sheet 2) t ED>>RES
A & t ED>>def/inv
T 0 0 T IED>>TR-K
B T 0 IE>>TR-L
RESET
A
Trip IED>>
B
I ED>>def State
A = Directional B = Non-directional
&
≥ I ED>>def
I E2

IEDCLP>>def

≥ I EDCLP >>def Non-directional

(from 74VT)

A =“0 or OFF” A =“1”

t E DC L P >>
A
A = ON - Change setting within CLP ≥1 CLP IED>>
t CLP>> B = OFF - CLP disabled
B
CB-State C = ON - Element blocking within CLP
T 0 C

IEDCLP>>Mode

IED>> overcurrent directional element (67N) block diagram (sheet 4)

Block1, Block2, Block4 ≥1

74VTint/ext67N
Non-directional Block by 74VT (ON≡Block)
Internal or external
74VT
OFF

Trip IED>>
BF Enable (ON≡Enable) & I ED>> BF towards BF logic
I ED>>BF

Ground directional overcurrent (67N) - Second element logic diagram (IED>>) (sheet 3 of 4) Fun_67NS2-3.ai

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 205

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 Start IED>>
&
Enable (ON≡Enable)
IED>>BLK1 Trip IED> > & BLK1IED>>
&

& BLK4IN IED>>

Block1 Logic INx t ON INx t OFF Block4

n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 Block1, Block2, Block4

n.o. Block1
T 0 0 T
Binary input INx & BLK2IN IED>>
Block1

Block2 input enable (ON≡Enable)

IED>>BLK2IN
&
ModeBLIN1
OFF BLK2IN-Iph
BLIN1 ON IPh

TRIPPING M ATRIX
Pilot wire input

(LED+REL AYS)
ON IPh/IE Iph Block2
ON IE
FROM PHASE PROTECTIONS tB-K
tB-L
Logic t B-Iph
INx t ON INx t OFF
Block2 IPh
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 t B-Iph
≥1
n.o. T 0 0 T 0 T ≥1 tB timeout
Binary input INx
FROM ANY PROTECTIONS

Logic INx t ON INx t OFF t B-IE

Block2 IPh/IE
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 t B-IE
≥1 BLK2IN-IE
n.o. T 0 0 T 0 T
Binary input INx
FROM EARTH FAULT PROTECTIONS

Logic INx t ON INx t OFF

Block2 IE
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 IE Block2
n.o. T 0 0 T
Binary input INx Block2 input

All BLK2OUT outputs ST-Iph BLK2 BLK2OUT-Iph

BLK2OUT-IPh-K
≥1
TRIPPING M ATRIX
of phase elements BLK2OUT-IPh-L
(LED+REL AYS)
t F-IPh
(see BLK2OUT chapter) BLK2OUT-IE
t F-IPh BLK2OUT-IE-K
0 T t F-IPh/IE BLK2OUT-IE-L
BLK2OUT-Iph/IE
Start IED>> t F-IPh/IE BLK2OUT-IPh/IE-K
IED>> Block2 OUT ≥1
Block2 output & 0 T BLK2OUT-IPh/IE-L
IED>>BLK2OUT
(ON≡Enable) A = OFF
t F-IE B = ON IPh
ModeBLOUT1 C = ON IPh/IE
All other BLK2OUT outputs ≥1 D = ON IE
t F-IE A
of ground elements B BLOUT1
0 T Pilot wire output
(see BLK2OUT chapter) C
ST-IE BLK2 D
Block2 output

A = IN A = IN
IED>>BLK4 B = OFF t FI-Iph B = OFF IED>>BLK4
C = OUT ST-Iph BLK4 C = OUT
“0” A Block4
B IED>> Block4 I/O t FI-Iph IED>> Block4 OUT A
“0”
Start IED >> C 0 T “0” B
“0” C
Block4 enable
t FI-IE ≥1 Block4 OUT
All other BLK4 I/O ≥1 All BLK4 I/O
t FI-IE
67NS2_BL-diagram.ai

of ground elements of phase elements ≥1

0 T
(see BLK4 chapter) (see BLK4chapter) ST-IE BLK4
Block4

Ground directional overcurrent (67N) - Logic diagram of the blocking signals concerning the second element (IED>>) (sheet 4 of 4)

206 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 Common configurations

Mode67N 3Votype67N I ED>>>def State

I UE
I E2 3Vo &
I∙cos U EC
≥ I ED>>>def

M
Insens-Zone I E2 IEDCLP>>>def CLP
OFF A
ON ≥ M∙threshold A =“OFF” A =“ON”
≥ IEDCLP>>>def A = ON - Change setting within CLP

3V o Insens-Zone OFF

TRIP

U ED>>>def State Insens-Zone

IE2
O FF
& &
3V o ON M sheet 3
≥ U ED>>>def 3 V o Insens-Zone ON

Angle Semisector
TRIP
3Vo
I E2 ΦE inside trip sector
IE2

3V o
I E2 ΦE inside trip sector &

I ED>>>def State

&
≥ I ED>>>def

I E2 IEDCLP>>>def CLP
A
A =“OFF” A =“ON” A = ON - Change setting within CLP
≥ IEDCLP>>>def
&
≥1

U ED>>>def State

&
3V o
≥ M∙U ED>>>def U ED>>>def State

&
3Vo &
≥ M∙U ED>>>def

I ED>>>def State

&
≥ M∙I ED>>>def

IE IEDCLP>>>def CLP
A
A =“OFF” A =“ON”
≥ M∙IEDCLP>>def A = ON - Change setting within CLP

Ground directional overcurrent (67N) - Third element logic diagram (IED>>>) - Module operating mode (sheet 1 of 4) 67NS3-module.ai

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 207

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 UE
U EC
Common configurations
Settore intervento
(direzione linea)
Mode67N 3Votype67N
Angolo caratteristico
I UE
I E2 3Vo Semiasse caratteristico
I∙cos U EC

Semiampiezza settore
M soglia I ED angolare d’intervento
Insens-Zone ΦE o ΦEC
OFF IE2
ON ≥ M∙threshold
Settore non intervento
(direzione sbarre)
I ED>>>def State

&
I E2 ∙cosϕ ≥ I ED>>>def

I E2
IEDCLP>>>def A =“OFF” A =“ON”
A A = ON - Change setting within CLP

I E2 ∙cosϕ ≥ I EDCLP>>>def 3Vo

Insens-Zone OFF

TRIP
I E2 Insens-Zone
U ED>>>def State I E ∙cosϕ ≥ 0
IE2
& O FF
& P sheet 3
3V o ON
≥ U ED>>>def 3 V o Insens-Zone ON
Angle Semisector
TRIP
3Vo
I E2 ΦE inside trip sector
IE2

3Vo
I E2 ΦE inside trip sector

I E2 &
I ED>>>def State I E ∙cosϕ ≥ 0

&
I E2 ∙cosϕ ≥ I ED>>>def

I E2 IEDCLP>>>def CLP
A
A =“OFF” A =“ON” A = ON - Change setting within CLP
I E2 ∙cosϕ ≥ I EDCLP>>>def &
≥1

I ED>>>def State

&
I E2 ∙cosϕ ≥ M∙I ED>>>def

I E2 IEDCLP>>>def &
A
U ED>>>def State
I E2 ∙cosϕ ≥ M∙I EDCLP>>>def A =“OFF” A =“ON”
& A = ON - Change setting within CLP
3V o
≥ M∙U ED>>>def

U ED>>>def State

&
3Vo
≥ U ED>>>def

Ground directional overcurrent (67N) - Third element logic diagram (IED>>>) - Projecting operating mode (sheet 2 of 4)

208 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 Common configurations

Mode67N 3Votype67N
I UE
I E2 3Vo
I∙cos U EC

M Start IED>>>
Insens-Zone
OFF IED>>>ST-K
ON ≥ M∙threshold IED>>>ST-L

TRIPPING M ATRIX
(LED+REL AYS)
t ED>>>RES
t ED>>>def
ON≡Enable IED>>> directional earth fault
IED>>> Enable t ED>>>RES
& t ED>>>def
0 T IED>>>TR-K
T 0 IE>>>TR-L
D =“modulo”
M RESET
(sheet 1)
Trip IED>>>
Mode67N
D D
A A
C C
B B
D =“modulo” C =“proiezione”
A = Directional B = Non-directional
C =“proiezione”
(sheet 2)

I ED>>>def State

&
≥ I ED>>>def
I E2

Non-directional
IEDCLP>>>def (from 74VT)

≥ I EDCLP >>>def

A =“0 or OFF” A =“1”

t E DC L P >>>
A
A = ON - Change setting within CLP ≥1 CLP IED>>>
t CLP>>> B = OFF - CLP disabled
B
CB-State C = ON - Element blocking within CLP
T 0 C

IEDCLP>>>Mode

IED>>> overcurrent directional element (67N) block diagram (sheet 4)

Block1, Block2, Block4 ≥1

74VTint/ext67N
Non-directional Block by 74VT (ON≡Block)
Internal or external
74VT
OFF

Trip IED>>>
BF Enable (ON≡Enable) & I ED>>> BF towards BF logic
I ED>>>BF

Ground directional overcurrent (67N) - Third element logic diagram (IED>>>) (sheet 3 of 4) Fun_67NS3-3.ai

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 209

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 Start IED>>>
&
Enable (ON≡Enable)
IED>>>BLK1 Trip IED> >> & BLK1IED>>>
&

& BLK4IN IED>>>

Block1 Logic INx t ON INx t OFF Block4

n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 Block1, Block2, Block4

n.o. Block1
T 0 0 T
Binary input INx & BLK2IN IED>>>
Block1

Block2 input enable (ON≡Enable)

IED>>>BLK2IN
&
ModeBLIN1
OFF BLK2IN-Iph
BLIN1 ON IPh

TRIPPING M ATRIX
Pilot wire input

(LED+REL AYS)
ON IPh/IE Iph Block2
ON IE
FROM PHASE PROTECTIONS tB-K
tB-L
Logic t B-Iph
INx t ON INx t OFF
Block2 IPh
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 t B-Iph
≥1
n.o. T 0 0 T 0 T ≥1 tB timeout
Binary input INx
FROM ANY PROTECTIONS

Logic INx t ON INx t OFF t B-IE

Block2 IPh/IE
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 t B-IE
≥1 BLK2IN-IE
n.o. T 0 0 T 0 T
Binary input INx
FROM EARTH FAULT PROTECTIONS

Logic INx t ON INx t OFF

Block2 IE
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 IE Block2
n.o. T 0 0 T
Binary input INx Block2 input

All BLK2OUT outputs ST-Iph BLK2 BLK2OUT-Iph

BLK2OUT-IPh-K
≥1
TRIPPING M ATRIX
of phase elements t F-IPh BLK2OUT-IPh-L
(LED+REL AYS)
(see BLK2OUT chapter) BLK2OUT-IE
t F-IPh BLK2OUT-IE-K
0 T t F-IPh/IE BLK2OUT-IE-L
BLK2OUT-Iph/IE
Start IED>>> t F-IPh/IE BLK2OUT-IPh/IE-K
IED>>> Block2 OUT ≥1
Block2 output & 0 T BLK2OUT-IPh/IE-L
IED>>>BLK2OUT
(ON≡Enable) A = OFF
t F-IE B = ON IPh
ModeBLOUT1 C = ON IPh/IE
All other BLK2OUT outputs ≥1 D = ON IE
t F-IE A
of ground elements B BLOUT1
0 T Pilot wire output
(see BLK2OUT chapter) C
ST-IE BLK2 D
Block2 output

A = IN A = IN
IED>>>BLK4 B = OFF t FI-Iph B = OFF IED>>>BLK4
C = OUT ST-Iph BLK4 C = OUT
“0” A Block4
B IED>>> Block4 I/O t FI-Iph IED>>> Block4 OUT A
“0”
Start IED >>> C 0 T “0” B
“0” C
Block4 enable
t FI-IE ≥1 Block4 OUT
All other BLK4 I/O ≥1 All BLK4 I/O
t FI-IE
67NS3_BL-diagram.ai

of ground elements of phase elements ≥1

0 T
(see BLK4 chapter) (see BLK4chapter) ST-IE BLK4
Block4

Ground directional overcurrent(67N) - Logic diagram of the blocking signals concerning the third element (IED>>>) (sheet 4 of 4)

210 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 Common configurations

Mode67N 3Votype67N I ED>>>>def State

I UE &
I E2 3Vo
I∙cos U EC
≥ I ED>>>>def

M
Insens-Zone I E2 IEDCLP>>>>def CLP
OFF A
ON ≥ M∙threshold A =“OFF” A =“ON”
≥ IEDCLP>>>>def A = ON - Change setting within CLP

3V o Insens-Zone OFF

TRIP

U ED>>>>def State Insens-Zone

IE2
O FF
& &
3V o ON M sheet 3
≥ U ED>>>>def 3 V o Insens-Zone ON

Angle Semisector
TRIP
3Vo
I E2 ΦE inside trip sector
IE2

3V o
I E2 ΦE inside trip sector &

I ED>>>>def State

&
≥ I ED>>>>def

I E2 IEDCLP>>>>def CLP
A
A =“OFF” A =“ON” A = ON - Change setting within CLP
≥ IEDCLP>>>>def
&
≥1

U ED>>>>def State

&
3V o
≥ M∙U ED>>>>def U ED>>>>def State

&
3Vo &
≥ U ED>>>>def

I ED>>>>def State

&
≥ M∙I ED>>>>def

I E2 IEDCLP>>>>def CLP
A
A =“OFF” A =“ON”
≥ M∙IEDCLP>>>>def A = ON - Change setting within CLP

Ground directional overcurrent (67N) - Fourth element logic diagram (IED>>>>) - Module operating mode (sheet 1 of 4) 67NS4-module.ai

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 211

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 UE
U EC
Common configurations
Settore intervento
Mode67N 3Votype67N (direzione linea)
Angolo caratteristico
I UE
I E2 3Vo
I∙cos U EC Semiasse caratteristico

M Semiampiezza settore
Insens-Zone soglia I ED angolare d’intervento
ΦE o ΦEC
OFF IE
ON ≥ M∙threshold

Settore non intervento

I ED>>>>def State (direzione sbarre)

&
I E ∙cosϕ ≥ I ED>>>>def

I E2
IEDCLP>>>>def A =“OFF” A =“ON”
A A = ON - Change setting within CLP

I E ∙cosϕ ≥ I EDCLP>>>>def 3Vo

Insens-Zone OFF

TRIP
I E2 Insens-Zone
U ED>>>>def State I E ∙cosϕ ≥ 0
IE2
& O FF
& P sheet 3
3V o ON
≥ U ED>>>>def 3 V o Insens-Zone ON
Angle Semisector
TRIP
3Vo
I E2 ΦE inside trip sector
IE2

3Vo
I E2 ΦE inside trip sector

I E2 &
I ED>>>>def State I E2 ∙cosϕ ≥ 0

&
I E2 ∙cosϕ ≥ I ED>>>>def

I E2 IEDCLP>>>>def CLP
A
A =“OFF” A =“ON” A = ON - Change setting within CLP
I E2 ∙cosϕ ≥ I EDCLP>>>>def &
≥1

I ED>>>>def State

&
I E ∙cosϕ ≥M∙I ED>>>>def

I E2 IEDCLP>>>>def &
A
U ED>>>>def State
I E ∙cosϕ ≥M∙I EDCLP>>>>def A =“OFF” A =“ON”
& A = ON - Change setting within CLP
3V o
≥ M∙U ED>>>>def

U ED>>>>def State

&
3Vo
≥ U ED>>>>def

67NS4-proiezione.ai

Ground directional overcurrent (67N) - Fourth element logic diagram (IED>>>>) - Projecting operating mode (sheet 2 of 4)

212 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 Common configurations

Mode67N 3Votype67N
I UE
I E2 3Vo
I∙cos U EC

M Start IED>>>>
Insens-Zone
OFF IED>>>>ST-K
ON ≥ M∙threshold IED>>>>ST-L

TRIPPING M ATRIX
(LED+REL AYS)
t ED>>>>RES
t ED>>>>def
ON≡Enable IED>>>> directional earth fault
IED>>>> Enable t ED>>>>RES
& t ED>>>>def
0 T IED>>>>TR-K
T 0 IE>>>>TR-L
D =“modulo”
M RESET
(sheet 1)
Trip IED>>>>
Mode67N
D D
A A
C C
B B
D =“modulo” C =“proiezione”
A = Directional B = Non-directional
C =“proiezione”
(sheet 2)

I ED>>>>def State

&
≥ I ED>>>>def
I E2

Non-directional
IEDCLP>>>>def (from 74VT)

≥ I EDCLP >>>>def

A =“0 or OFF” A =“1”

t E DC L P >>>>
A
A = ON - Change setting within CLP ≥1 CLP IED>>>>
t CLP>>> B = OFF - CLP disabled
B
CB-State C = ON - Element blocking within CLP
T 0 C

IEDCLP>>>>Mode

IED>>>> overcurrent directional element (67N) block diagram (sheet 4)

Block1, Block2, Block4 ≥1

74VTint/ext67N
Non-directional Block by 74VT (ON≡Block)
Internal or external
74VT
OFF

Trip IED>>>
BF Enable (ON≡Enable) & I ED>>>> BF towards BF logic
I ED>>>>BF

Ground directional overcurrent (67N) - Fourth element logic diagram (IED>>>>) (sheet 3 of 4) Fun_67NS4-3.ai

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 213

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 Start IED>>>>
&
Enable (ON≡Enable)
IED>>>>BLK1 Trip IED>> >> & BLK1IED>>>>
&

& BLK4IN IED>>>>

Block1 Logic INx t ON INx t OFF Block4

n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 Block1, Block2, Block4

n.o. Block1
T 0 0 T
Binary input INx & BLK2IN IED>>>>
Block1

Block2 input enable (ON≡Enable)

IED>>>>BLK2IN
&
ModeBLIN1
OFF BLK2IN-Iph
BLIN1 ON IPh

TRIPPING M ATRIX
Pilot wire input

(LED+REL AYS)
ON IPh/IE Iph Block2
ON IE
FROM PHASE PROTECTIONS tB-K
tB-L
Logic t B-Iph
INx t ON INx t OFF
Block2 IPh
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 t B-Iph
≥1
n.o. T 0 0 T 0 T ≥1 tB timeout
Binary input INx
FROM ANY PROTECTIONS

Logic INx t ON INx t OFF t B-IE

Block2 IPh/IE
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 t B-IE
≥1 BLK2IN-IE
n.o. T 0 0 T 0 T
Binary input INx
FROM EARTH FAULT PROTECTIONS

Logic INx t ON INx t OFF

Block2 IE
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 IE Block2
n.o. T 0 0 T
Binary input INx Block2 input

All BLK2OUT outputs ST-Iph BLK2 BLK2OUT-Iph

BLK2OUT-IPh-K
≥1
TRIPPING M ATRIX
of phase elements t F-IPh BLK2OUT-IPh-L
(LED+REL AYS)
(see BLK2OUT chapter) BLK2OUT-IE
t F-IPh BLK2OUT-IE-K
0 T t F-IPh/IE BLK2OUT-IE-L
BLK2OUT-Iph/IE
Start IED>>>> t F-IPh/IE BLK2OUT-IPh/IE-K
IED>>>> Block2 OUT ≥1
Block2 output & 0 T BLK2OUT-IPh/IE-L
IED>>>>BLK2OUT
(ON≡Enable) A = OFF
t F-IE B = ON IPh
ModeBLOUT1 C = ON IPh/IE
All other BLK2OUT outputs ≥1 A D = ON IE
t F-IE
of ground elements B BLOUT1
0 T Pilot wire output
C
(see BLK2OUT chapter)
ST-IE BLK2 D
Block2 output

A = IN A = IN
IED>>>>BLK4 B = OFF t FI-Iph B = OFF IED>>>>BLK4
C = OUT ST-Iph BLK4 C = OUT
“0” A
B IED>>>> Block4 I/O t FI-Iph IED>>>> Block4 OUT A Block4
“0”
Start IED >>>> C 0 T “0” B
“0” C
Block4 enable
t FI-IE ≥1 Block4 OUT
All other BLK4 I/O ≥1 All BLK4 I/O
t FI-IE
67NS4_BL-diagram.ai

of ground elements of phase elements ≥1

0 T
(see BLK4 chapter) (see BLK4chapter) ST-IE BLK4
Block4

Ground directional overcurrent (67N) - Logic diagram of the blocking signals concerning the fourth element (IED>>>>) (sheet 4 of 4)

214 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
— Ground directional overcurrent with calculated residual current - 67N(Comp)
Preface
Four adjustable threshold with programmable operate time are available with characteristics similar
to the 67N protection described in the previous paragraph; the main difference is the residual cur-
rent that is vectorially calculated on the sides of H or L currents. The protection sensitivity is lower
compared to that obtainable with a direct measurement of the residual current from the balance
transformer.
All thresholds for residual current are expressed in pu of the nominal currents InH (H side) and InL
(L side).

Operation and settings

Two operating mode may be selected by setting the Mode67N parameter, located inside the Set \
Profile A(or B) \ Directional earth fault overcurrent-67N \ Common configuration menu.
The settable operating modes are I (module) or I*cos (projection)
The first and second threshold (IEDC >, IEDC >>) may be programmed with definite or inverse time ac-
cording the following characteristic curves:
• Standard Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type A or SIT): t = 0.14 · t EDC >inv / [(IEDC /IEDC >inv)0.02 - 1]
• Very Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type B or VIT): t = 13.5 · t EDC >inv / [(IEDC /IECD >inv) - 1]
• Extremely Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type C or EIT): t = 80 · t EDC >inv / [(IEDC /IEDC >inv)2 - 1]
• Moderately Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type MI): t = tEDC>inv · {0.01 / [(IEDC/IEDC>inv)0.02 - 1] + 0.023}
• Very Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type VI): t = tEDC>inv · {3.922 / [(IEDC/IEDC>inv)2 - 1] + 0.098}
• Extremely Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type EI): t = tEDC>inv · {5.64 / [(IEDC/IEDC>inv)2 - 1] + 0.024}
• Electromechanical (EM): t = tEDC>inv · {0.28 / [-0236 · (IEDC/IEDC>inv)-1 + 0.339]}
Where:
t: operate time
IEDC>inv, IEDC>>inv : first and second threshold setting
t EDC >inv, t EDC >>inv : first and second threshold operate time setting

Third and fourth thresholds (IEDC>>>def, IEDC>>>>def ) have definite time characteristic.

t EDC >

TRIP

t EDC >>

t EDC >>>

t EDC >>>>

t-int-F67NC.ai

I EDC > I EDC >> I EDC >>> I EDC >>>> IECH or IECL

General operation time characteristic for the ground directional overcurrent elements - 67N(Comp)

For all inverse time characteristics, following data applies:

• Asymptotic reference value (minimum pickup value): 1.1 IEDC> or IEDC>>
• Minimum operate time: 0.1 s
• Range where the equation is valid:[1] 1.1 ≤ IEDC /IEDC >inv (or IEDC>>inv) ≤ 20
• If IED>inv (or IED>>inv) pickup ≥ 2.5 In, the upper limit is 50 In
• For all definite time elements the upper limit for measuring is 50 In.

Note 1 When the input value is more than 20 times the set point , the operate time is limited to the value corresponding to 20 times the set point

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 215

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 The operating mode may be selected by setting the Mode67N parameter, located inside the Set \
Profile A(or B) \ Directional earth fault overcurrent-67N(Comp) \ Common configuration menu.
The settable operating mode is I (module) or I*cos (projection).

UE
U EC
IL1H, IL2H, IL3H IL1L , IL2L , IL3L
Trip sector
UE UEC Half operating sector
(toward line)
IECH IECL (βE>, βE>>, βE>>>, βE>>>>) Characteristic angle
3Votype67NC IECtype67NC (ΘE>, ΘE>>, ΘE>>>, ΘE>>>>)

Characteristic axis
Mode67NC
Thresholds (I EDC threshold):
I EDC >, I EDC >>, I EDC >>>, I EDC >>>> Half operating sector
3V o [M(C)]∙(I EDC >, I EDC >>, I EDC >>>, I EDC >>>>) (βE>, βE>>, βE>>>, βE>>>>)
I I ∙c o s ΦE o ΦEC
67N(Comp)
I ECH o I ECL
No trip sector
(toward busbar)

Operating characteristics of the earth fault overcurrent element - 67N(Comp)

with module operating mode (I)

UE
IL1H, IL2H, IL3H IL1L , IL2L , IL3L U EC

UE UEC
IECH IECL Trip sector
3Votype67NC IECtype67NC Half operating sector (toward line)
(βE>, βE>>, βE>>>, βE>>>>) Characteristic angle
(ΘE>, ΘE>>, ΘE>>>, ΘE>>>>)
Characteristic axis
Mode67NC
Thresholds (I EDC threshold):
I EDC >, I EDC >>, I EDC >>>, I EDC >>>>
3V o I I ∙c o s [M(C)]∙(I EDC >, I E DC >>, I EDC >>>, I EDC >>>>) Half operating sector
ΦE o ΦEC (βE>, βE>>, βE>>>, βE>>>>)
67N(Comp)
IE

No trip sector
(toward busbar)
Operating characteristics of the earth fault overcurrent element - 67N(Comp)
with projection operating mode ( I∙cos)

Operating characteristics of the ground directional overcurrent elements - 67N(Comp) char-F67NC-mode.ai

For both the operating modes, the polarizing reference used for displacement measure of the re-
sidual current may be selected:
• Direct residual voltage - the measured UE voltage is employed.
• Calculated residual voltage - the calculated UEC voltage is employed, where the fundamental com-
ponent and phase are derived from the instantaneous values of the three input phase-to-neutral
voltages.
Therefore, for both operating mode, the displacement of the residual current phasor IECH or IECL
and the residual voltage phasor (UE or UEC for direct/calculated residual voltage measurement type),
positive for lagging current compared with voltage (ΦE =(∠UE - ∠IEC, ΦEC =(∠UEC - ∠IEC .
The residual voltage measurement type may be selected by setting the 3Votype67N parameter,
located inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Directional earth fault overcurrent-67N(Comp) \ Common
configuration menu. The measurement type is UE (direct measure of residual voltage) or UEC (cal-
culated residual voltage).
For each of the four thresholds (IEDC >, IEDC >>, IEDC >>>, IEDC >>>>), the characteristic angle (ϑE>,
ϑE>>, ϑE>>>, ϑE>>>>) may be adjusted (setting range 0…359° common for the three phases).
Similarly, the calculated residual current measurement is selected from the following two mea-
sures:
• Calculated residual current on side H - the calculated IECH current is employed, where the funda-
mental component and phase are derived from the instantaneous values of the three input phase-
currents.
• Calculated residual current on side L - the calculated IECH current is employed, where the funda-
mental component and phase are derived from the instantaneous values of the three input phase-
currents.
The residual current measurement type may be selected by setting the ECtype67NC parameter,
located inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Directional earth fault overcurrent-67N(Comp) \ Common
configuration menu. The measurement type is IECH (side H) or IECL (side L).

216 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 For each of the four thresholds (IEDC >, IEDC >>, IEDC >>>, IEDC >>>>), the characteristic angle (ϑE>,
ϑE>>, ϑE>>>, ϑE>>>>) may be adjusted (setting range 0…359° common for the three phases).
The the characteristic angle setting (positive when clockwise compared the polarizing voltage)
specifies the angular displacement of the characteristic axis standing for the trip bisector of the
tripping zone. For isolated neutral systems with a 90° characteristic angle setting, faults towards
the LINE are detected, while with a 270° characteristic angle setting, faults towards the BUS are
detected. All the named parameters can be set separately for the four thresholds and for definite or
inverse time settings menu. For each of the four thresholds (IEDC >, IEDC >>, IEDC >>>, IEDC >>>>) the
half operating sector may be adjusted (setting range 0…180° simmetrically regarding the character-
istic axis). All the parameters can be set separately for the four thresholds and for definite or inverse
time settings menu.

VT supervision
For all the four thresholds IEDC>, IEDC>>, IEDC>>>, IEDC>>>>, the operating mode when the 74VT function
is active may be defined:
• OFF: no action are issued by 74VT.
• Block: all the four thresholds are blocked when the 74VT function is active.
• Not directional: all the four thresholds are switched from directional to not directional criteria
when the 74VT function is active.
The 74VT information may issued from internal 74VT function or from an external signal acquired by
means a binary input.
If a binary input is designed for 74VText, for all the four thresholds, the operating mode when the 74VT
function is active may be defined:
• OFF: no action are issued by 74VT.
• Block: all the four thresholds are blocked when the 74VT external signal is active.
• Not directional: all the four thresholds are switched from directional to not directional criteria
when the 74VT external signal is active.
Malfunctioning of the directional overcurrent elements can be avoided when VTs secondary fault
will arise (fuse or MCB tripping) by switching the overcurrent directional to non directional overcur-
rent protection
The 74VTint67NC and 74VText67NC parameters may be set as OFF, Block, Not directional
inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Directional earth fault overcurrent-67N(Comp) \ Common configura-
tion menu, while the 74VText function must be assigned to the selected binary inputs inside the Set
\ Board 1(2) inputs \ Binary input IN1-1...(IN1-x) menus.
For all the four thresholds (common for all thresholds) an insensibility zone may be enabled in the
voltage-current plane.
If enabled, the insensibility zone is user adjustable by means the M multiplier (common for all thresh-
olds); the rectangle defined by the current and voltage thresholds and the same multiplied by M
becomes a No trip zone.
Such insensibility zone may be useful to avoid unwanted trip in the presence of some fixed residual
current and/or voltage (e.g. CT and or VT errors in the residual measurements).
The Insens-Zone(C) (OFF, ON) and M(C) parameters may be adjusted inside the Set \ Profile A(or
B) \ Directional earth fault overcurrent-67N(Comp) \ Common configuration menu.

UE
U EC

TRIP

U ED >, U ED >>, U ED >>>, U ED >>>>

IE2
I EDC >, I EDC >>, I EDC >>>, I EDC >>>>
Voltage/current characteristic concerning the earth fault overcurrent element - 67N(Comp)
with insensibility zone disabled
UE
U EC

TRIP

M∙U ED >, M∙U ED >>, M∙U ED >>>, M∙U ED >>>>

U ED >, U ED >>, U ED >>>, U ED >>>>

IE2
I E DC >, I EDC >>, I EDC >>>, I EDC >>>> M∙I EDC >, M∙I EDC >>, M∙I EDC >>>, M∙I EDC >>>>

Voltage/current characteristic concerning the ground directional overcurrent - 67N(Comp)

with insensibility zone enabled char-F67NC-IeUe.ai

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 217

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 Module
If the module principle and the operation mode is not switched to “not directional” (by the 74VT func-
tion), the start of any 67N(Comp) threshold becomes active when the following A) and B) conditions
are contemporaneously active:
A) in the “Insens-Zone=OFF” operating mode:
- The residual current (IECH or IECL ) fundamental component overcomes the threshold (IEDC>, IEDC>>,
IEDC>>>, IEDC>>>>)
AND
- The residual voltage (UE or UEC) fundamental component overcomes the threshold (UED>, UED>>,
UED>>>, UED>>>>),
while in the “Insens-Zone=ON” operating mode:
- The residual current (IECH or IECL ) fundamental component overcomes the threshold (IED>, IED>>,
IED>>>, IED>>>>)
AND
- The residual current (IECH or IECL ) fundamental component overcomes the threshold (M∙UED>,
M∙UED>>, M∙UED>>>, M∙UED>>>>)
OR
- The residual current (IECH or IECL ) fundamental component overcomes the threshold (M∙IED>,
M∙IED>>, M∙IED>>>, M∙IED>>>>)
AND
The residual voltage (UE or UEC) fundamental component overcomes the threshold (UED>, UED>>,
UED>>>, UED>>>>).
B) The residual current phasor (IECH or IECL ) is located inside the angular sector defined by own char-
acteristic angle (βE>, βE>>, βE>>>, βE>>>>) and half operating sector (ΘE>, ΘE>>, ΘE>>>, ΘE>>>>),
that is the -βE ≤ (ΘE-ΦE) ≤ +βE condition is fulfilled.
If the operation mode is switched to “not directional” (by the 74VT function), the start of any 67N
threshold becomes active when the following is complied:
- The residual current (IECH or IECL ) fundamental component overcomes the threshold (IEDC>, IEDC>>,
IEDC>>>, IEDC>>>>)
The operating mode (Mode67NComp), the residual voltage measurement type (Type67NC), the
insensibility zone enabling (Insens-Zone(C)), the threshold multiplier for the insensibility zone
(M(C)) and the operation from 74VT (74VText67NC) may be selected by setting the concerning
parameters, located inside the Set\Profile A(or B)\Directional earth fault overcurrent-67N \ Common
configuration menu.
The settable operating mode is I (module) or I*cos (projection).
Projection
If the projection principle and he operation mode is not switched to “not directional” (by the 74VT
function), the start of any 67N threshold becomes active when the following C) condition is active:

C) in the “Insens-Zone=OFF” operating mode:

- Residual current projection on the characteristic axis (IECH or IECL )∙cos(ΦE-ΘE) > 0
AND
- The residual current projection on the characteristic axis (IECH or IECL )∙cos(ΦE-ΘE) overcomes the
threshold (IED>, IED>>, IED>>>, IED>>>>)
AND
- The residual voltage (UE or UEC) fundamental component overcomes the threshold (UED>, UED>>,
UED>>>, UED>>>>).
AND
The residual current phasor (IECH or IECL ) is located inside the angular sector defined by own char-
acteristic angle (βE>, βE>>, βE>>>, βE>>>>) and half operating sector (ΘE>, ΘE>>, ΘE>>>, ΘE>>>>),
that is the -βE ≤ (ΘE-ΦE) ≤ +βE condition is fulfilled.[1]

While in the “Insens-Zone=ON” operating mode:

- Residual current projection on the characteristic axis IE2∙cos(ΦE-ΘE) > 0
AND
- The residual current projection on the characteristic axis (IECH or IECL )∙cos(ΦE-ΘE) overcomes the
threshold (IEDC>, IED>>, IEDC>>>, IEDC>>>>)
AND
- The residual voltage (UE or UEC) fundamental component overcomes the threshold (M∙UED>,
M∙UED>>, M∙UED>>>, M∙UED>>>>)
OR
The residual current projection on the characteristic axis (IECH or IECL )∙cos(ΦE-ΘE) overcomes the
threshold (M∙IEDC>, M∙IEDC>>, M∙IEDC>>>, M∙IEDC>>>>)
AND
- The residual voltage (UE or UEC) fundamental component overcomes the threshold (UED>, UED>>,
UED>>>, UED>>>>).
AND
The residual current phasor (IECH or IECL ) is located inside the angular sector defined by own char-
acteristic angle (βE>, βE>>, βE>>>, βE>>>>) and half operating sector (ΘE>, ΘE>>, ΘE>>>, ΘE>>>>),

Note 1 For each threshold the projection of the residual current phasor on the characteristic axis is: (IECH or IECL )cos(ΘE>-ΦE), I (IECH or IECL )cos(ΘE>>-
ΦE), (IECH or IECL )cos(ΘE>>>-ΦE), (IECH or IECL )cos(ΘE>>>>-ΦE) when “direct” residual voltage is selected (UE), or
IECH or IECL )cos(ΘE>-ΦEC), (IECH or IECL )cos(ΘE>>-ΦEC), (IECH or IECL )cos(ΘE>>>-ΦEC), (IECH or IECL )cos(ΘE>>>>-ΦEC) when “calculated”
residual voltage is selected (UEC).
The ΘE , βE and ΦEC symbols are not used inside the Thysetter and MMI menus.

218 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 that is the -βE ≤ (ΘE-ΦE) ≤ +βE condition is fulfilled.[1]

If the operation mode is switched to “not directional” (by the 74VT function), the start of any 67N
threshold becomes active when the following is complied:
- The residual current (IE ) fundamental component overcomes the threshold (IEDC>, IEDC>>, IEDC>>>,
IEDC>>>>)
For both the operating mode (module or projection), when the start signal goes ON a concerning
counter starts; after expiry of the associated operate time (t EDC>, t EDC>>, t EDC>>>, t EDC>>>>) a trip com-
mand is issued, if instead the above conditions don’t remain valid, the element it is restored.
All the parameters are located inside the menus concerning the four elements, separately for defi-
nite and inverse time characteristics.
Example: the operate time concerning the first threshold with definite time characteristic (IEDC>def)
is available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Directional earth fault overcurrent-67N(Comp) \
IEDC> Element \ Definite time menu.
All directional earth fault overcurrent elements can be enabled or disabled by setting ON or OFF the
IEDC> Enable, IEDC>> Enable, , IEDC>>> Enable e/o IEDC>>>> Enable parameters in-
side the Set \ Profile A(or B)\Directional earth fault overcurrent-67N(Comp) \ IEDC> Element (IEDC>>
Element, IEDC>>> Element, IEDC>>> Element) \ Setpoints menus.
The first and second overcurrent element can be programmed with definite or inverse time char-
acteristic by setting theIEDC>Curve and/or IEDC>>Curve (DEFINITE, IEC/BS A, IEC/BS
B, IEC/BS C, ANSI/IEE MI, ANSI/IEE VI, ANSI/IEE EI, EM) available inside the Set \ Profile
A(or B) \ Directional earth fault overcurrent-67N(Comp) \ IEDC> Element (IEDC>> Element) \ Set-
points menus.
The trip of IEDC> element may be inhibited by the start of the second, third and/or fourth element
(IEDC>>, IEDC>>>, IEDC>>>>) by setting ON the Disable IEDC> by start IEDC>>, Disable IEDC> by start
IEDC>>>, Disable IEDC> by start IEDC>>>> (IEDC>disbyIEDC>>, IEDC>disbyIEDC>>>,
IEDC>disbyIEDC>>>>) parameters available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Directional earth
fault overcurrent-67N(Comp) \ IEDC>> Element (IEDC>>> Element, IEDC>>>> Element) \ Setpoints
menus.
Similarly the trip of the:
• IEDC>> element may be inhibited by start of the third and/or fourth element (IEDC>>> and/or IEDC>>>>)
by setting ON the Disable IEDC>> by start IEDC>>>, start IEDC>>>> (IEDC>>disbyIEDC>>>,
IEDC>>disbyIEDC>>>>) parameter available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Directional
earth fault overcurrent-67N(Comp) \ IEDC>>> Element (IEDC>>>> Element) \ Setpoints menus.
• IEDC>>> element may be inhibited by start of the fourth element (IEDC>>>>) by setting ON the Dis-
able IEDC>>> by start IEDC>>>> (IEDC>>>disbyIEDC>>>>) parameter available inside the
Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Directional earth fault overcurrent-67N(Comp) \ IEDC>>>> Element \ Setpoints
menu.
All the named parameters can be set separately for Profile A and Profile B.
An adjustable reset time delay is provided for every threshold
(tEDC>RES, tEDC>>RES, tEDC>>>RES, tEDC>>>>RES).

Timers-F67NC.ai

INPUT

t EDC>RES t EDC>RES t EDC>RES

IEDC> Start
t EDC> t EDC>

IEDC> Trip

RESET

t
67N(Comp) element timers - 67N(Comp) (first element)

Breaker failure (BF)

Each directional earth fault element can produce the Breaker Failure output if the IEDC> BF,
IEDC>> BF, IEDC>>> BF and/or IEDC>>>> BF parameters are set to ON. The param-
eters are available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Directional earth fault overcurrent-67N(Comp) \
IEDC> Element (IEDC>> Element, IEDC>>> Element, IEDC>>> Element) \ Setpoints menus.[2]
Cold load pickup (CLP)
If the CLP function (Cold Load Pick-up) is enabled for element blocking, the selected threshold may
be blocked for an adjustable time interval, starting from the circuit breaker closure.
This operating mode may be select by setting ON-Element blocking the IEDCCLP> Mode,
IECDCLP>> Mode, IEDCCLP>>> Mode, IEDCCLP>>>> Mode parameters.
Note 1 For each threshold the projection of the residual current phasor on the characteristic axis is: (IECH or IECL )cos(ΘE>-ΦE), I (IECH or IECL )cos(ΘE>>-
ΦE), (IECH or IECL )cos(ΘE>>>-ΦE), (IECH or IECL )cos(ΘE>>>>-ΦE) when “direct” residual voltage is selected (UE), or
IECH or IECL )cos(ΘE>-ΦEC), (IECH or IECL )cos(ΘE>>-ΦEC), (IECH or IECL )cos(ΘE>>>-ΦEC), (IECH or IECL )cos(ΘE>>>>-ΦEC) when “calculated”
residual voltage is selected (UEC). The ΘE , βE and ΦEC symbols are not used inside the Thysetter and MMI menus.
Note 2 The common settings concerning the Breaker failure protection are adjustable inside the Breaker Failure - BF menu.

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 219

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 If the CLP function (Cold Load Pick-up) is enabled for threshold change, the selected threshold may
be changed for an adjustable time interval, starting from the circuit breaker closure.
This operating mode (ON-Change setting = IEDCCLP> Mode, IEDCCLP>> Mode, IEDC-
CLP>>> Mode, IEDCCLP>>>> Mode) and the concerning operating time within the CLP
(tEDCLP>, tEDCLP>>, tEDCLP>>>, tEDCLP>>>>) may be adjusted inside the Set \ Pro-
file A(or B) \ Directional earth fault overcurrent-67N(Comp) \ IEDC> Element (IEDC>> Element,
IEDC>>> Element, IEDC>>> Element) \ Setpoints menus, whereas the operating thresholds within
the CLP ( IEDCCLP>def, IEDCCLP>inv,....) may be adjusted inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \
Directional earth fault overcurrent-67N(Comp) \ IEDC> Element (IEDC>> Element, IEDC>>> Element,
IEDC>>> Element) \ Definite time (Inverse time) menus.

For every of the four thresholds the following block criteria are available:
Logical block (Block1)
If the IEDC>BLK1, IEDC>>BLK1, IEDC>>>BLK1 and/or IEDC>>>>BLK1 enabling param-
eters are set to ON and a binary input is designed for logical block (Block1), the concerning element
is blocked off whenever the given input is active.[1] The enabling parameters are available inside the
Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Directional earth fault overcurrent-67N(Comp) \ IEDC> Element (IEDC>> Ele-
ment, IEDC>>> Element, IEDC>>> Element) \ Setpoints menus, while the Block1 function must be
assigned to the selected binary input inside the Set \ Board 1(2) inputs \ Binary input IN1-1...(IN1-x)
menus.

Selective block (Block2)

All along the protective elements the selective block may be set.
The logic selectivity function may be performed by means any combination of the following I/O:
• One committed pilot wire input (BLIN1).
• One or more binary inputs designed for input selective block.
• One committed pilot wire output (BLOUT1).
• One or more output relays designed for output selective block.
Only when the committed pilot wire are used the continuity check of the pilot wire link is active.

Use of committed pilot wire input BLIN1:

• The protection is blocked off according the selectivity block criteria when the input BLIN1 is active.
The information about phase or phase+earth block may be select programming the ModeBLIN1
parameter inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Selective block-BLOCK2 \ Selective block IN menus.

Use of binary inputs:

• If the IEDC>BLK2IN, IEDC>>BLK2IN, IEDC>>>BLK2IN and/or IEDC>>>>BLK2IN
parameters are set to ON and a binary input is designed for selective block (Block2), the pro-
tection is blocked off by phase elements (Block2 Iph) or by any protection element (Block2 Iph/
IE) according the selectivity block criteria.[2] The enable IEDC>BLK2IN, IEDC>>BLK2IN,
IEDC>>>BLK2IN and/or IEDC>>>>BLK2IN parameters are available inside the Set \ Pro-
file A(or B) \ Directional earth fault overcurrent-67N(Comp) \ IEDC> Element (IEDC>> Element,
IEDC>>> Element, IEDC>>>> Element) \ Setpoints menus, while the Block2 Iph and Block2 Iph/
IE functions must be assigned to the selected binary inputs inside the Set \ Board 1(2) inputs \
Binary input IN1-1...(IN1-x) menus.

Use of committed pilot wire output BLOUT1:

• The information about phase or phase+earth block may be select programming the ModeBLOUT1
parameter (OFF - ON IPh - ON IPh/IE - ON IE) inside Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Selective block-
BLOCK2 \ Selective block OUT menus.

Use of output relay:

• If the IEDC>BLK2OUT, IEDC>>BLK2OUT, IEDC>>>BLK2OUT and/or
IEDC>>>>BLK2OUT enable parameters are set to ON and a output relay is designed for
selective block (Block2), the protection issues a block output by phase elements (BLK2OUT-Iph)
or by any protection element (BLK2OUT-Iph/IE), whenever the given element (Start IEDC>, Start
IEDC>>, Start IEDC>>> and/or Start IEDC>>>>) becomes active. The enable IEDC>BLK2OUT,
IEDC>>BLK2OUT, IEDC>>>BLK2OUT and/or IEDC>>>>BLK2OUT parameters (ON or
OFF) are available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Directional earth fault overcurrent-67(Comp) \
IEDC> Element (IEDC>> Element, IEDC>>> Element, IEDC>>>> Element) \ Setpoints menus, while
the BLK2OUT-Iph-K, BLK2OUT-Iph/IE-K and/or BLK2OUT-IE-K output relays and LEDs
(BLK2OUT-Iph-L, BLK2OUT-Iph/IE-L e/o BLK2OUT-IE-L) must be select inside the Set \
Profile A(or B) \ Selective block-BLOCK2 \ Selective block OUT menu.

Note 1 The exhaustive treatment of the logical block (Block 1) function may be found in the “Logic Block” paragraph inside CONTROL AND MONITOR-
ING section
Note 2 The exhaustive treatment of the selective block (Block 2) function may be found in the “Selective Block” paragraph inside CONTROL AND
MONITORING section

220 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
Internal selective block (Block4)
As well as to send or transmit a selective block toward other protective relays, each protective
element may be enabled for receive or transmit a selective block from/to other internal protective
elements.[1]
The internal selective block of one or more element concerning the directional earth fault overcurrent
function may be enabled/disabled by means the IEDC>BLK4, IEDC>>BLK4, IEDC>>>BLK4
and/or IEDC>>>>BLK4 parameters (virtual input and output common to all protective thresh-
olds); the following operating modes are available:
• IN - the element is enabled to receive the selective block from an internal input.
• OUT - the element is enabled to send the selective block to an internal output.
• OFF - the element is disabled to send/receive the internal selective block.
Transmission and reception for the same element is not allowed, so any stall situation due to wrong
setting is avoided.
The internal selective block can work together with an external selective block from other protective
relays (Block2).

Common configurations
The size of the residual current calculated vectorially on the measured currents on the sides of H
(IECH) or L (IECL ), and the residual voltage between the value measured directly (UEC) or the value
calculated from the three phase voltages vectorially (UEC) can be selected.

Common configurations
IL1H, IL2H, IL3H IL1L , IL2L , IL3L

UE UEC
IECH IECL
3Votype67NC IECtype67NC

Mode67NC

3V o I I∙cos

67N(Comp)

M
Insens-Zone
O FF
ON ≥ M∙threshold

Common configurations - 67N(Comp) Common-F67NC.ai

Nota 1 The exhaustive treatment of the internal selective block (Block 4) function may be found in the “Internal selective block” paragraph inside
CONTROL AND MONITORING section.

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 221

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 IEDC> Enable IEDC>Curve IEDCCLP>Mode tEDCCLP> tEDC>RES IEDC> def IEDCCLP> def tEDC>def IEDC> inv IEDCCLP> inv tEDC>inv

IED> Element Start IEDC>

IEC IEDC>BF Trip IEDC>
3Vo IEDC>BLK1 IEDC>BF
Trip IEDC> &
Common configurations Block1 & BLK1IEDC>
Start IEDC> &
CLPIED>
IEDC>BLK2IN Start IEDC>
BLK2INIED>
&
Block2 &
IEDC>BLK2OUT
IEDC>BLK4 BLK2OUT
Start IEDC> &
BLK4OUT
≥ IEDC> inhibition Start IEDC> &

IEDC>> Enable IEDC>>Curve IEDCCLP>>Mode tEDCCLP>> tEDC>>RES IEDC>>def IEDCCLP>>def tEDC>> def IEDC>>inv IEDCCLP>>inv tEDC>> inv

IE IEDC>> Element Start IEDC>>

3V o Trip IEDC>>
IEDC> disbyIED>>
CLPIEDC>>
&
IEDC>>BLK1 Start IEDC>>
Start IEDC>> BLK1IEDC>>
&
&
Block1
IEDC>>BF
IEDC>>BF
IEDC>>BLK2IN Trip IEDC>> &
Start IEDC>> BLK2INIEDC>>
&
Block2 &
IEDC>>BLK2OUT
BLK2OUT
IEDC>>BLK4 &
≥ IEDC>> inhibition Start IEDC>>
BLK4OUT
&
Start IEDC>>

IEDC>>> Enable IEDCCLP>>>Mode tEDCCLP>>> tEDC>>>RES IEDC>>>def IEDCCLP>>>def tEDC>>> def

IEDC>>> Element Start IEDC>>>

IE
IEDC> disbyIED>>> Trip IEDC>>>
3V o
CLPIEDC>>>
IEDC>> disbyIED>>> &
Start IED>>>
&
Start IEDC>>>
IEDC>>>BLK1
Start IEDC>>> BLK1IEDC>>>
&
&
Block1
IEDC>>>BF
IEDC>>>BF
IEDC>>>BLK2IN Trip IEDC>>> &
Start IEDC>>> BLK2INIEDC>>>
&
Block2 &
IEDC>>>BLK2OUT
BLK2OUT
IEDC>>>BLK4 &
Start IEDC>>>
IEDC>>> inhibition BLK4OUT
Start IEDC>>> &

IEDC>>>> Enable IEDCCLP>>>>Mode tEDCCLP>>>> tEDC>>>>RES IEDC>>>>def IEDCCLP>>>>def tEDC>>>>def

IE IEDC>>>> Element Start IEDC>>>>

3V o IEDC> disIED>>>> Trip IEDC>>>>
IEDC>> disIED>>>>
Start I2ndh> &
IEDC>>> disIEDC>>>> Start IEDC>>>>
Block1 &
Start IEDC>>>>
Block2 &
Start IEDC>>>> CLPIEDC>>>>, BLK1IEDC>>>>,
IEDC>>>>BF, BLK2INIEDC>>>>,
General logic diagram of the ground directional overcurrent elements - 67N(Comp) BLK2OUT, BLK4OUT all-F67NC .ai

222 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 Common configurations
IL1H, IL2H, IL3H IL1L , IL2L , IL3L
I EDC>def State
UE UEC &
IECH IECL
3Votype67NC IECtype67NC ≥ I EDC>def
≥1
I EDC>inv State
Mode67NC CLP
A
&
I EC A =“OFF” A =“ON”
3V o I ∙c o s ≥ I EDC>inv
I M A = ON - Change setting within CLP
Insens-Zone
67N(Comp) IEDCCLP>def IEDCCLP>inv
OFF
≥ M∙threshold
ON
≥ IEDCCLP> 3V o Insens-Zone OFF

U ED>def State TRIP

&
IE Insens-Zone
≥ U ED>def
O FF
≥1 &
3V o 3Vo
ON M sheet 3
U ED>inv State

& Angle Semisector TRIP

≥ U ED>inv
3Vo
I EC ΦE inside trip sector
3V o Insens-Zone ON I EC

I EC ΦE inside trip sector &

I EDCD>def State

&
≥ I EDC>def
≥1
I EDC>inv State
A
& CLP
I EC A =“OFF” A =“ON” A = ON - Change setting within CLP
≥ I EDC>inv
&
≥1
IEDCCLP>def IEDCCLP>inv
I EDC>def State

≥ IEDCCLP> &
≥ M∙I EDC>def
≥1
I EDC>inv State

U ED>def State &

IE
≥ M∙I EDC>inv
&
≥ M∙U ED>def CLP
IEDCCLP>def IEDCCLP>inv A
≥1 A =“OFF” A =“ON”
3V o
U ED>inv State
A = ON - Change setting within CLP
≥ M∙IEDCCLP> &
&
≥ M∙U ED>inv
U ED>def State

&
≥ U ED>def
≥1
3Vo State
U ED>inv

&
≥ U ED>inv
67NCS1-module.ai

Ground directional overcurrent (67NComp) - First element logic diagram (IEDC>) - Module operating mode (sheet 1 of 4)

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 223

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 UE
U EC A = ON - Change setting within CLP Common configurations

Settore intervento IL1H, IL2H, IL3H IL1L , IL2L , IL3L

(direzione linea) I EDC>def State CLP

Angolo caratteristico UE UEC

& IECH IECL
3Votype67NC IECtype67NC
I EC∙cosϕ ≥ I EDC>def A =“OFF”
Semiasse caratteristico
≥1
Semiampiezza settore I EDC>inv State Mode67NC
soglia I EDC angolare d’intervento
ΦE o ΦEC A
&
I EC I EC
I EC∙cosϕ ≥ I EDC>inv 3V o I I∙cos M
Insens-Zone
Settore non intervento A =“ON”
67N(Comp)
(direzione sbarre) IEDCLP>def IEDCLP>inv O FF
≥ M∙threshold
ON

I EC∙cosϕ ≥ I EDCCLP> 3Vo

Insens-Zone OFF
U ED>def State
TRIP
& I EC
I E ∙cosϕ ≥ 0 Insens-Zone
≥ U ED>def I EC
& O FF
≥1 P sheet 3
3V o ON
U ED>inv State
Angle Semisector 3 V o Insens-Zone ON
&
≥ U ED>inv 3Vo TRIP
I EC ΦE inside trip sector

I EC

3Vo
I EC ΦE inside trip sector

I EDC>def State
I EC &
I E ∙cosϕ ≥ 0
&
I EC∙cosϕ ≥ I EDC>def
≥1
I EDC>inv State
CLP
A
&
I EC A =“OFF” A =“ON” A = ON - Change setting within CLP
I EC∙cosϕ ≥ I EDC>inv
&
≥1
IEDCCLP>def IEDCCLP>inv
I EDC>def State

I EC∙cosϕ ≥ I EDCCLP> &

I EC∙cosϕ ≥ M∙I EDC>def
≥1
U ED>def State I EDC>inv State &
& &
I EC A
≥ M∙U ED>def I EC∙cosϕ ≥ M∙I EDC>inv A =“OFF” A =“ON”
≥1 A = ON - Change setting within CLP
3V o
U ED>inv State IEDCLP>def IEDCLP>inv
&
≥ M∙U ED>inv I E ∙cosϕ ≥ I EDCLP>

U ED>def State

&
≥ U ED>def
≥1
3Vo State 67NS1-proiezione.ai
U ED>inv

&
≥ U ED>inv

Schema funzionale relativo alla prima soglia (IEDC>) della funzione direzionale di terra 67N(Comp) - Modo proiezione (foglio 2 di 4)

224 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 Common configurations
IL1H, IL2H, IL3H IL1L , IL2L , IL3L

UE UEC
IECH IECL
3Votype67NC IECtype67NC

Mode67NC

3V o I I∙cos M
Insens-Zone
67N(Comp)
OF F
≥ M∙threshold
ON

ON≡Enable IEDC> directional earth fault

IEDC> Enable Start IEDC>

D =“modulo” IEDC>ST-K
M IEDC>ST-L
(sheet 1) Mode67NC

TRIPPING M ATRIX
(LED+REL AYS)
D D
C C t EDC>inv
D =“modulo” C =“proiezione” I EDC> Curve t EDC>RES
t EDC>def
C =“proiezione”
(sheet 2) t ED>RES
A & t EDC>def/inv
T 0 0 T IEDC>TR-K
B T 0 IEC>TR-L
RESET
A
Trip IEDC>
B
I EDC>def State
A = Directional B = Non-directional
&
≥ I EDC>def
I EC

IEDCCLP>def

≥ I EDCCLP >def Non-directional

(from 74VT)

A =“0 or OFF” A =“1”

t E DC C L P >
A
A = ON - Change setting within CLP ≥1 CLP IEDC>
t CLP> B = OFF - CLP disabled
B
CB-State C = ON - Element blocking within CLP
T 0 C

IEDCCLP>Mode

IEDC> overcurrent directional element 67N(Comp) block diagram (sheet 4)

Block1, Block2, Block4 ≥1

74VTint/ext67NC
Non-directional Block by 74VT (ON≡Block)
Internal or external
74VT
OFF

Trip IEDC>
BF Enable (ON≡Enable) & I EDC> BF towards BF logic
I EDC>BF

Ground directional overcurrent (67NC) - First element logic diagram (IEDC>) (sheet 3 of 4) Fun_67NCS1-3.ai

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 225

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 Start IEDC>
&
Enable (ON≡Enable)
IEDC>BLK1 Trip IEDC> & BLK1IEDC>
&

& BLK4IN IEDC>

Block1 Logic INx t ON INx t OFF Block4

n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 Block1, Block2, Block4

n.o. Block1
T 0 0 T
Binary input INx & BLK2IN IEDC>
Block1

Block2 input enable (ON≡Enable)

IEDC>BLK2IN
&
ModeBLIN1
OFF BLK2IN-Iph
BLIN1 ON IPh

TRIPPING M ATRIX
Pilot wire input

(LED+REL AYS)
ON IPh/IE Iph Block2
ON IE
FROM PHASE PROTECTIONS tB-K
tB-L
Logic t B-Iph
INx t ON INx t OFF
Block2 IPh
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 t B-Iph
≥1
n.o. T 0 0 T 0 T ≥1 tB timeout
Binary input INx
FROM ANY PROTECTIONS

Logic INx t ON INx t OFF t B-IE

Block2 IPh/IE
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 t B-IE
≥1 BLK2IN-IE
n.o. T 0 0 T 0 T
Binary input INx
FROM EARTH FAULT PROTECTIONS

Logic INx t ON INx t OFF

Block2 IE
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 IE Block2
n.o. T 0 0 T
Binary input INx Block2 input

All BLK2OUT outputs ST-Iph BLK2 BLK2OUT-Iph

BLK2OUT-IPh-K
≥1
TRIPPING M ATRIX
of phase elements t F-IPh BLK2OUT-IPh-L (LED+REL AYS)
(see BLK2OUT chapter) BLK2OUT-IE
t F-IPh BLK2OUT-IE-K
0 T t F-IPh/IE BLK2OUT-IE-L
BLK2OUT-Iph/IE
Start IEDC> t F-IPh/IE BLK2OUT-IPh/IE-K
IED> Block2 OUT ≥1
Block2 output & 0 T BLK2OUT-IPh/IE-L
IEDC>BLK2OUT
(ON≡Enable) A = OFF
t F-IE B = ON IPh
ModeBLOUT1 C = ON IPh/IE
All other BLK2OUT outputs ≥1 D = ON IE
t F-IE A
of ground elements B BLOUT1
0 T Pilot wire output
C
(see BLK2OUT chapter)
ST-IE BLK2 D
Block2 output

A = IN A = IN
IEDC>BLK4 B = OFF t FI-Iph B = OFF IEDC>BLK4
C = OUT ST-Iph BLK4 C = OUT
“0” A Block4
B IED> Block4 I/O t FI-Iph IED> Block4 OUT A
“0”
Start IEDC > C 0 T “0” B
“0” C
Block4 enable
t FI-IE ≥1 Block4 OUT
All other BLK4 I/O ≥1 All BLK4 I/O
t FI-IE
67NS1_BL-diagram.ai

of ground elements of phase elements ≥1

0 T
(see BLK4 chapter) (see BLK4chapter) ST-IE BLK4
Block4

Ground directional overcurrent (67NComp) - Logic diagram of the blocking signals concerning the first element (IEDC>) (sheet 4 of 4)

226 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
— Overfrequency - 81O
Preface
Two operation thresholds, independently adjustable with adjustable delay are provided.
Each threshold may be separately enabled or disabled.
The first threshold trip may be inhibited by start of the second threshold.
Operation and settings
The frequency, acquired from U12 , U23 , U31 phase-to-phase input voltages[1] is compared with the
setting values; a start is issued when the frequency overcomes the adjustable threshold (START);
after expiry of the associated operate time a trip command is issued; if instead the frequency drops
below the threshold, the element is restored.
When the frequency value is out of the lock range, it is fixed to the upper or lower limit
(20 Hz or 60 Hz).
Both elements operate with definite time characteristic.

TRIP

t fdef>

t fdef>>

f > def f >> def f

General operation time characteristic for the overfrequency elements - 81O
Each element can be enabled or disabled by setting ON or OFF the State parameter inside the Set
\ Profile A(or B) \ Overfrequency-81O \ f> Element (or f>> Element \ Definite time menu.

State f >> def t f>>def State f > def t f>def

2nd Pickup Element 1st Pickup Element

f f >> Start f f > Start
f >> Trip f > Trip

f > disby f >> f >> Start ON=inhibit

& f > inhibi t ion

Block1 Block1 Block1 Block1

BF BF

Logic diagram concerning the overfrequency elements - 81O all-F81O.ai

The overfrequency protection is enabled only when the maximum of the phase-to-neutral input volt-
ages ULMAX =max(UL1, UL2 , UL3) overcomes 0.2 Un for a tfEN adjustable time.
Setting of the tfEN value is available inside the Set \ Base menu with “level 1” session.

Timers-F81.ai

Max (U L1,U L2 ,U L3)

0.20 Un

t fEN

81O-81U Enable 81O-81U disabled 81O-81U enabled 81O-81U disabled

t
Overfrequency & underfrequency enable timer

The first threshold trip (f >) may be inhibited by start of the second threshold (f >>) by setting ON the
f> Disabling by f>> start (f>disbyf>>) parameter available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Overfre-
quency-81O \ f>> Element \ Setpoints menu.

Breaker failure (BF)

Both overfrequency elements (f >, f >>) can produce the Breaker Failure output if the f>BF and
f>>BF parameters are set to ON.
The parameters are available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Overfrequency - 81O \ f> Element (f>>
Element) \ Setpoints menus.[2]

Note 1 The frequency can also be measured on the three phase-to-phase voltages (calculated vectorially)
Note 2 The common settings concerning the Breaker failure protection are adjustable inside the Breaker Failure - BF menu.

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 227

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 For every of the two thresholds the logic block can be set.
Logical block (Block1)
If the f>BLK1 and/or f>>BLK1 enabling parameters are set to ON and a binary input is designed
for logical block (Block1), the protection is blocked off whenever the given input is active.
The trip timer is held in reset condition, so the operate time counting starts when the input block goes
down.[1] The enabling parameters are available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Overfrequency - 81O
\ f> Element (f>> Element) \ Setpoints menus, while the Block1 function must be assigned to the
selected binary input inside the Set \ Board 1(2) inputs \ Binary input IN1-1...(IN1-x) menus.

f> Start
f>ST-K

TRIPPING M ATRIX
f>ST-L

(LED+REL AYS)
f > def

t f>def
f
f ≥ f >> def
UL1,UL2 ,UL3 Max (UL1,UL2 ,UL3) ≥2 0 % U n & t f>def
f>TR-K
(ON≡Inhibit) T 0
f> inhibition f>TR-L
RESET
f> Trip

f> Start
Enable (ON≡Enable) &
f>BLK1 f> Trip & f> Block1
&

Block1 Logic INx t ON INx t OFF

n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF Block1 input (ON≡Block)
n.o. Block1
T 0 0 T
Binary input INx
f> Trip
BF Enable (ON≡Enable) & f> BF towards BF logic
f>BF
Fun-F81O_S1.ai
Logic diagram concerning the first threshold (f>) of the overfrequency element - 81O

(ON≡Inhibit)
f>disbyf>>
& f> inhibition

f>> Start

f>>ST-K
TRIPPING M ATRIX

f>>ST-L
(LED+REL AYS)

f >> def
t f>>def
f
f ≥ f >> def & t f>>def
UL1,UL2 ,UL3 Max (UL1,UL2 ,UL3) ≥2 0 % U n f>>TR-K
T 0
f>>TR-L
RESET
f>> Trip

f>> Start
Enable (ON≡Enable) &
f>>BLK1 f>> Trip & f> Block1
&

Block1 Logic INx t ON INx t OFF

n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF Block1 input (ON≡Block)
n.o. Block1
T 0 0 T
Binary input INx
f> Trip
BF Enable (ON≡Enable) & f>> BF towards BF logic
f>>BF
Fun-F81O_S2.ai
Logic diagram concerning the second threshold (f>>) of the overfrequency element - 81O

Note 1 The exhaustive treatment of the logical block (Block 1) function may be found in the “Logic Block” paragraph inside CONTROL AND MONITOR-
ING section.

228 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
— Underfrequency - 81U
Preface
Four operation thresholds, independently adjustable with adjustable delay are provided.
Each threshold may be separately enabled or disabled.
Operation and settings
The frequency, acquired from U12 , U23 , U31 phase-to-phase input voltages[1] is compared with the
setting values; a start is issued when the frequency goes down the adjustable threshold (START); af-
ter expiry of the associated operate time a trip command is issued; if instead the frequency exceeds
the threshold, the element is restored.
When the frequency value is out of the lock range, it is fixed to the upper or lower limit
(20 Hz or 60 Hz).
All elements operate with definite time characteristic.

TRIP
t fdef <

t fdef <<

t fdef <<<

t fdef <<<<

f<<<< def f<<< def f<< def f< def f

General operation time characteristic for the underfrequency elements - 81U
Each element can be enabled or disabled by setting ON or OFF the State parameter inside the Set \
Profile A(or B) \ Underfrequency-81U \ f< Element (f<< Element, f<<< Element, f<<<< Element) \ Defi-
nite time menu.
The underfrequency protection is enabled only when the maximum of the phase-to-neutral input
voltages ULMAX =max(UL1, UL2 , UL3) overcomes 0.2 Un for a tfEN adjustable time.
Setting of the tfEN value is available inside the Set \ Base menu with “level 1” session.

Timers-F81.ai

Max (U L1,U L2 ,U L3)

0.20 Un

t fEN

81O-81U Enable 81O-81U disabled 81O-81U enabled 81O-81U disabled

t
Overfrequency & underfrequency enable timer

The trip of f< element may be inhibited by the start of the second, third and/or fourth element (f<<,
f<<<, f<<<<) by setting ON the Disable f< by start f<<, Disable f< by start f<<<, Disable f< by start
f<<<< (f<disbyf<<, f<disbyf<<<, f<disbyf<<<<) parameters available inside the Set \ Pro-
file A(or B) \ Underfrequency-81U \ f<< Element (f<<< Element,f<<<< Element) \ Setpoints menus.
Similarly the trip of the:
• f<< element may be inhibited by start of the third and/or fourth element (f<<< and/or f<<<<) by setting
ON the Disable f<< by start f<<<, start f<<<< (f<<disbyf<<<, f<<disbyf<<<<) parameter avail-
able inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Underfrequency-81U \ f<<< Element, (f<<<< Element) \ Setpoints
menus.
• f<<< element may be inhibited by start of the fourth element (f<<<<) by setting ON the Disable f<<<
by start f<<<< (f<<<disbyf<<<<) parameter available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Under-
frequency-81U \ f<<<< Element \ Setpoints menu.

Breaker failure (BF)

All underfrequency elements can produce the Breaker Failure output if the f<BF, f<<BF, f<<<BF,
and f<<<<BF parameters are set to ON.
The parameters are available inside the et \ Profile A(or B) \ Underfrequency-81U
\ f<< Element (f<<< Element,f<<<< Element) \ Setpoints menus.[2]

Note 1 The frequency can also be measured on the three phase-to-phase voltages (calculated vectorially)
Note 2 The common settings concerning the Breaker failure protection are adjustable inside the Breaker Failure - BF menu.

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 229

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 For every of the four thresholds the logic block can be set.
Logical block (Block1)
If the f<BLK1, f<<BLK1, f<<<BLK1 and/or f<<<<BLK1 enabling parameters are set to ON
and a binary input is designed for logical block (Block1), the protection is blocked off whenever the
given input is active.
The trip timer is held in reset condition, so the operate time counting starts when the input block
goes down.[1] The enabling parameters are available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Underfrequency
- 81U \ f< Element (f<< Element, f<<< Element, f<<<< Element) \ Setpoints menus, while the Block1
function must be assigned to the selected binary input inside the Set \ Board 1(2) inputs \ Binary input
IN1-1...(IN1-x) menus.

f< Start
f< def
f<ST-K

TRIPPING M ATRIX
f<ST-L

(LED+REL AYS)
f
f ≤ f< def
UL1,UL2 ,UL3 Max (UL1,UL2 ,UL3) ≥2 0 % U n & t f<def
(ON≡Inhibit)
From 2nd, 3rd and/or 4th element f< inhibition t f<def
f<TR-K
T 0
f<TR-L
RESET
f< Trip
f< Start
Enable (ON≡Enable) &
f<BLK1 f< Trip & Block1
&

Block1 Logic INx t ON INx t OFF

n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF Block1 input (ON≡Block)
n.o. f< Block1
T 0 0 T
Binary input INx
f< Trip
& f< BF towards BF logic
BF Enable (ON≡Enable)
f<BF

Logic diagram concerning the first threshold (f<) of the underfrequency element - 81U Fun-F81U_S1.ai

(ON≡Inhibit)
f<disbyf<<
& f< inhibition

f<< Start
f<< def
f<<ST-K TRIPPING M ATRIX
f<<ST-L
(LED+REL AYS)
f
f ≤ f<< def
UL1,UL2 ,UL3 Max (UL1,UL2 ,UL3) ≥2 0 % U n & t f<<def
(ON≡Inhibit)
From 3rd and/or 4th element f<< inhibition t f<<def
f<<TR-K
T 0
f<<TR-L
RESET
f<< Trip

f<< Start
Enable (ON≡Enable) &
f<<BLK1 f<< Trip & f<< Block1
&

Block1 Logic INx t ON INx t OFF

n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF Block1 input (ON≡Block)
n.o. Block1
T 0 0 T
Binary input INx
f<< Trip
BF Enable (ON≡Enable) & f<< BF towards BF logic
f<<BF

Logic diagram concerning the second threshold (f<<) of the underfrequency element - 81U Fun-F81U_S2.ai

Note 1 The exhaustive treatment of the logical block (Block 1) function may be found in the “Logic Block” paragraph inside CONTROL AND MONITOR-
ING section.

230 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 (ON≡Inhibit)
f<disbyf<<<
& f< inhibition

(ON≡Inhibit)
f<<disbyf<<<
& f<< inhibition

f<<< Start
f<<< def
f<<<ST-K

TRIPPING M ATRIX
f<<<ST-L

(LED+REL AYS)
f
f ≤ f<<< def
UL1,UL2 ,UL3 Max (UL1,UL2 ,UL3) ≥2 0 % U n & t f<<< def
(ON≡Inhibit)
From 4th element f<<< inhibition t f<<< def
f<<<TR-K
T 0
f<<<TR-L
RESET
f<<< Trip
f<<< Start
Enable (ON≡Enable) &
f<<<BLK1 f<<< Trip & f<<< Block1
&

Block1 Logic INx t ON INx t OFF

n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF Block1 input (ON≡Block)
n.o. Block1
T 0 0 T
Binary input INx
f<<< Trip
BF Enable (ON≡Enable) & f<<< BF towards BF logic
f<<<BF

Logic diagram concerning the third threshold (f<<<) of the underfrequency element - 81U Fun-F81U_S3.ai

(ON≡Inhibit)
f<disbyf<<<<
& f< inhibition

(ON≡Inhibit)
f<<disbyf<<<<
& f<< inhibition

(ON≡Inhibit)
f<<<disbyf<<<<
& f<<< inhibition

f<<<< Start

f<<<< def f<<<<ST-K

TRIPPING M ATRIX

f<<<<ST-L
(LED+REL AYS)

f
f ≤ f<<<< def & t f<<<< def
UL1,UL2 ,UL3 Max (UL1,UL2 ,UL3) ≥2 0 % U n
t f<<<< def
f<<<<TR-K
T 0
f<<<<TR-L
RESET
f<<<< Trip
f<<<< Start
Enable (ON≡Enable) &
f<<<<BLK1 f<<<< Trip & f<<<< Block1
&

Block1 Logic INx t ON INx t OFF

n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF Block1 input (ON≡Block)
n.o. Block1
T 0 0 T
Binary input INx
f<<<< Trip
BF Enable (ON≡Enable) & f<<<< BF towards BF logic
f<<<<BF

Logic diagram concerning the fourth threshold (f<<<<) of the underfrequency element - 81U Fun-F81U_S4.ai

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 231

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
Differential protection 87G-87M-87T
Preface
Stabilized Differential for Generator, Motor and two-winding power transformers with dual-slope
percentage characteristic.
Based on the selection of the protected object type is activated (Transformer) or not (Motor-Genera-
tor) the second and fifth harmonic restraint for the differential protection element.

Definitions
• iL1(H) instantaneous value of L1 phase current on side H
• iL2(H) instantaneous value of L2 phase current on side H
• iL3(H) instantaneous value of L3 phase current on side H
• iL1(L) instantaneous value of L1 phase current on side L
• iL2(L) instantaneous value of L2 phase current on side L
• iL3(L) instantaneous value of L3 phase current on side L
These currents are conventionally regarded as positive if incoming in their reference terminal phase
current input of the relay, negative if outgoing.
• iL1C(H) instantaneous value of L1 compensated phase current on side H
• iL2C(H) instantaneous value of L2 compensated phase current on side H
• iL3C(H) instantaneous value of L3 compensated phase current on side H
• iL1C(L) instantaneous value of L1 compensated phase current on side L
• iL2C(L) instantaneous value of L2 compensated phase current on side L
• iL3C(L) instantaneous value of L3 compensated phase current on side L

iL1(H)
iL(H) = iL2(H) vector of instantaneous value of phase currents on side H
iL3(H)

iL1(L)
iL(L) = iL2(L) vector of instantaneous value of phase currents on side L
iL3(L)

iL1c(H)
iLc(H) = iL2c(H) vector of instantaneous value of compensated phase currents on side H
iL3c(H)

iL1c(L)
iLc(L) = iL2c(L) vector of instantaneous value of compensated phase currents on side L
iL3c(L)

With compact notation the previous vectors are referred to the iL (w) and iLC (w), where w = H, L is the
index of the two sides of the differential protection.
In order to correct any amperometric reversal polarity or phase cyclical sequence, and making equal
amplitude and phase currents on the sides of the differential protection and eventually eliminate
the element of homopolar sequence, the amplitude, polarity, phase and cyclic sequence and zero
sequence currents compensation is performed by relay, as follows:
iLC (w) = M(w) ∙ P(w) ∙ C(w) ∙ iL (w) with w = H, L
where:
M(w) is a compensating factor in the current amplitude of the side w.
P(w) is the polarity matrix of the of the amperometric polarities of the side w.
C(w) is the phase compensation matrix and cyclic sequence and zero sequence currents of the
homopolar sequence of the side w.

Magnitude matching
232 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016
FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 M(w) is a compensating factor in the current amplitude of the w side; it expresses the values that are
multiplied by the currents of the w side in order to obtain an amplitude equal to that of the currents
on one side chosen as a reference.
If inside the Set \ Base menu the MatchType=ESTERNAL parameter is set (external compensation
with adapter CTs), then:
M(w) = 1
However, if inside the Set \ Base menu the MatchType=INTERNAL parameter is set then M(w) is
calculated by the relay as follows:
A) Calculation of the rated currents of the sides of the transformer from Snt rating (in MVA) and rated
voltages VntH, VntL in kV programmed in the Set \ Transformer menu:
IntH = 1000 ∙ Snt / [√3 ∙ VntH] rated current of side H of transformer
IntL = 1000 ∙ Snt / [√3 ∙ VntL] rated current of side L of transformer

B) Calculation of the difference (mismatching) between the CT primary rated current and rated cur-
rent of the sides of the transformer, starting from the InpH, InpL, InH, InL programming parameters
inside the Set \ Base menu and from the currents calculated in the preceding paragraph:
mH = InpH /IntH mismatching coefficient on side H of transformer
mL = InpL /IntL mismatching coefficient on side L of transformer
where: InpH, InpL are the CTs rated current on sides H and L
The relay checks that the values of the mismatching coefficients are between 1.0 and 2.5, if the
condition is not met, a warning message is issued and a correction of the Snt , VntH, VntL, InpH, InpL
parameters is required.

C) Choosing the transformer side[1] (RefSide) that the current amplitude compensations are taken
as a reference: the side reference chosen by the relay is the one with the lowest mismatching
coefficient. If the two sides have an equal value of the mismatching coefficient, the reference is
chosen as the side with the index H

D) If H is the reference side for current amplitude compensation, the current amplitude factors M (w)
are calculated as follows:
M(H) = [mH / mH]] / [InH /InH] = 1
M(L) = [mL / mH]] / [InL /InH]

If L is the reference side for current amplitude compensation, the current amplitude factors M (w)
are calculated as follows:
M(H) = [mH / mL]] / [InH /InL]
M(L) = [mL / mL]] / [InL /InL] = 1

Polarity matching
P (w) is the matrix of the amperometric polarity of w side. It allows us to consider each with its own
input current phase angle (coefficient +1 with NORMAL setting) or with opposite phase angle (with
coefficient -1 REVERSE setting), allowing correction of any sw current polarity reversals due to
connection errors.
P(w) is defined as:
pL1(H) 0 0 pL1(L) 0 0
P(H) = 0 pL2(H) 0 P(L) = 0 pL2(L) 0
0 0 pL3(H) 0 0 pL3(L)

The coefficients of amperometric polarity (C1-C2 POL for pL1(H), C3-C4 POL for pL2(H), C5-C6
POL for pL3(H), A1-A2 POL for pL1(L), A3-A4 POL for pL2(L), A5-A6 POL for pL3(L)) can each take
the value +1 (NORMAL) or -1 (REVERSE), based on the programming of the same coefficients in the
Set \ Polarity menu. If the amperometric polarity correspond to those of the corresponding wiring
diagram programming is +1, otherwise -1.

Phase, ciclic sequenze and zero sequenze matching

C (w) is the matrix of phase compensation and cyclic sequence and zero-sequence currents of the
Note 1 settings of the differential protection are referred to the CT’s rated current on the side chosen by the relay as a reference for amplitude compen-
sation in (Inref).
The side chosen as a reference for amplitude compensation (RefSide) and the primary CT rated current of that side (Inref) are displayed in the
Set \ Base menu

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 233

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 w side. It expresses the compensation which the current displacements are corrected so that they
are in-phase (zero phase shift) with currents on the reference side and possibly filtered by the zero
sequence components.
It allows sw correction of the phase currents displacement on the sides of the transformer due to
the transformer vector group, any phases reversal of cyclic sequence and the elimination of any zero
sequence components that may occur on some sides as a result of connection of the windings of the
transformer and its ground against ground faults outside the zone of differential protection.

MatchType=ESTERNAL
If inside the Set \ Base menu the MatchType=ESTERNAL parameter is set (compensation with
external CTs), then C(w) is the identity matrix:

1 0 0 1 0 0
C(H) = 0 1 0 C(L) = 0 1 0
0 0 1 0 0 1

MatchType=INTERNAL
If inside the Set \ Base menu the MatchType=INTERNAL parameter is set then the C(w) matrix is
defined by relay as:

A) Calculation of the displacement of phase currents of each side concerning the H-side, from the
VectGroup(H) e VectGroup(L) programming parameters in the Set \ Transformer menu:
I(H) = VectGroup(H) ∙ 30° = 0 Current displacement on side H
I(L) = [VectGroup(H) - VectGroup(L)] ∙ 30° Current displacement on side L
B) Side of reference choice for the current phase compensation programming parameters from
Conn(H) and Conn(L) parameters inside the Set \ Transformer menu: the delta winding (D or d
programming) or zig-zag (Z or z programming) side is the reference side. If more than one winding
is delta connected or zig-zag, or if no winding is connected delta or zig-zag as the reference is
chosen to side with the index H.

C) The relay calculates the angle of compensation phase for each side )c(H), )c(L) through the
reference side for the phase compensation of point B) above, through the current phase shifts
calculated in paragraph A) above setting and through the setting of the I-sequenceH parameter
for side H and I-sequenceL for side L available inside the Set \ Input sequence menu . The cal-
culation is done as shown in the following table.

Reference side Phase Cyclic sequence Phase compensation angles

for phase compensation (I-sequence) )c(w)
)c(H) = I(H) - I(H) = 0
I-sequenceH L1, L2, L3
)c(L) = I(H) - I(L) = 0
H
)c(H) = I(H) - I(H) = 0
I-sequenceH L1, L3, L2
)c(L) = I(L) - I(H) = 0
)c(H) = I(L) - I(H) = 0
I-sequenceL L1, L2, L3
)c(L) = I(L) - I(L) = 0
L
)c(H) = I(H) - I(L) = 0
I-sequenceL L1, L3, L2
)c(L) = I(L) - I(L) = 0

D) Depending on the compensation angles referred to in paragraph C), on the Gnd(w) parameter
setting available inside the Set \ Transformer menu, the relay considers the phase compensation
matrix C (w) the cyclic sequence mode and zero-sequence current of side w = H, L as shown in
the following tables.

234 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 )c(w) Gnd(w) = Ou Gnd(w) = In
w = H, L w = H, L w = H, L

2/3 -1/3 -1/3

0 1 0 0
C(w) = -1/3 2/3 -1/3
C(w) = 0 1 0
Applied to the reference side w -1/3 -1/3 2/3
for phase compensation or to 0 0 1
Same as Yy0 adapter CTs with transformation ratio 1 /
the w secondary side of power 1 on the side w and connected with the tertiary delta
transformers Yy0, Dd0, Dz0, Zd0 Same as Yy0 adapter CTs with transformation closed in short-circuit with transformation ratio 1 / 3
in which the primary side is the ratio 1 / 1 on the side w. The connection of the that removes the zero-sequence component from the
reference side for the phase secondary phase of the CT-adapters to the
compensation. relay inputs is L1-L1, L2-L2, L3-L3, with the same compensated current for the side w. The connection
polarity. of the secondary phase of the CT-adapters to the relay
inputs is L1-L1, L2-L2, L3-L3, with the same polarity.

1/√3 0 -1/√3 1/√3 0 -1/√3

-30
C(w) = -1/√3 1/√3 0 C(w) = -1/√3 1/√3 0
Applied to the w secondary side 0 -1/√3 1/√3 0 -1/√3 1/√3
of power transformers Dy11,
Zy11 in which the primary side Same as Yd1 adapter CTs with transformation Same as Yd1 adapter CTs with transformation ratio
is the reference side for phase ratio 1 / 3 on the side w. The connection of the 1 / 3 on the side w. The connection of the secondary
compensation. secondary phase of the CT-adapters to the phase of the CT-adapters to the relay inputs is L1-L1,
relay inputs is L1-L1, L2-L2, L3-L3, with the same L2, L2, L3, L3, with the same polarity.
polarity.
1/3 1/3 -2/3
0 0 -1 C(w) = -2/3 1/3 1/3
-60 C(H) = -1 0 0
1/3 -2/3 1/3
Applied to the w secondary side 0 -1 0 Same as Yy0 adapter CTs with transformation ratio
of power transformers Dd10, 1 / 1 on the side we connected with the tertiary delta
Same as Yy0 adapter CTs with transformation
Dz10, Zd10 where the primary closed short-circuit transformation ratio of 1 / 3 that
ratio 1 / 1 on the side w. The connection of the
side is the reference side for removes the component from the zero-sequence
secondary phase of the CT-adapters to the
phase compensation. compensated current for the side w. The connection
relay inputs is L3-L1, L1-L2, L2-L3, with reverse
polarity. of the secondary phase of the CT-adapters to the re-
lay inputs is L3-L1, L1-L2, L2-L3, with reverse polarity.

0 1/√3 -1/√3 0 1/√3 -1/√3

-90
C(w) = -1/√3 0 1/√3 C(w) = -1/√3 0 1/√3
Applied to the w secondary side 1/√3 -1/√3 0
1/√3 -1/√3 0
of power transformers Dy9, Zy9
where the primary side is the Same as Yd3 adapter CTs with transformation ratio Same as Yd3 adapter CTs with transformation ratio
reference side for phase com- 1 / 3 on the side w. The connection of the second- 1 / 3 on the side w. The connection of the secondary
pensation. ary phase of the CT-adapters to the relay inputs is phase of the CT-adapters to the relay inputs is L1-L1,
L1-L1, L2-L2, L3-L3, with the same polarity. L2, L2, L3, L3, with the same polarity.

-1/3 2/3 -1/3

0 1 0 C(w) = -1/3 -1/3 2/3
-120 C(w) = 0 0 1
2/3 -1/3 -1/3
Applied to the w secondary side 1 0 0
Same as Yy0 adapter CTs with transformation ratio 1 / 1
of power transformers Dd8, on the side we connected with the tertiary delta closed
Same as Yy0 adapter CTs with transformation
Dz8, Zd8 where the primary side short-circuit transformation ratio of 1 / 3 that removes
ratio 1/1 on the side w. The connection of the
is the reference side for phase the component from the zero-sequence compensated
secondary phase of the CT-adapters to the
compensation. current for the side w. The connection of the second-
relay inputs is L2-L1, L3-L2, L1-L3, with the same
polarity. ary phase of the CT-adapters to the relay inputs is
L3-L1, L1-L2, L2-L3, with the same polarity.

-1/√3 1/√3 0 -1/√3 1/√3 0

-150
C(w) = 0 -1/√3 1/√3 C(w) = 0 -1/√3 1/√3
Applied to the w secondary side 1/√3 0 -1/√3
1/√3 0 -1/√3
of power transformers Dy7, Zy7
where the primary side is the Same as Yd5 adapter CTs with transformation ratio Same as Yd5 adapter CTs with transformation ratio
reference side for phase com- 1 / 3 on the side w. The connection of the second- 1 / 3 on the side w. The connection of the secondary
pensation. ary phase of the CT-adapters to the relay inputs is phase of the CT-adapters to the relay inputs is L1-L1,
L1-L1, L2-L2, L3-L3, with the same polarity. L2-L2, L3-L3, with the same polarity.

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 235

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 )c(w) Gnd(w) = Out Gnd(w) = In
w = H, L w = H, L w = H, L

2/3 -1/3 -1/3

-1 0 0
C(w) = -1/3 2/3 -1/3
-180 C(w) = 0 -1 0
-1/3 -1/3 2/3
Applied to the w secondary side 0 0 -1
Same as Yy0 adapter CTs with transformation ratio 1 /
of power transformers Yy6, Dd6, 1 on the side w and connected with the tertiary delta
Dz6, Zd6 where the primary side Same as Yy0 adapter CTs with transformation
ratio 1 / 1 on the side w. The connection of the closed in short-circuit with transformation ratio 1 / 3
is the reference side for phase that removes the zero-sequence component from the
compensation. secondary phase of the CT-adapters to the
relay inputs is L1-L1, L2-L2, L3-L3, with reverse compensated current for the side w. The connection
polarity. of the secondary phase of the CT-adapters to the relay
inputs is L1-L1, L2-L2, L3-L3, with reverse polarity.

-1/√3 0 1/√3 -1/√3 0 1/√3

-210
C(w) = 1/√3 -1/√3 0 C(w) = 1/√3 -1/√3 0
Applied to the w secondary side 0 1/√3 -1/√3 0 1/√3 -1/√3
of power transformers Dy5, Zy5
where the primary side is the Same as Yd7 adapter CTs with transformation Same as Yd7 adapter CTs with transformation ratio
reference side for phase com- ratio 1 / 3 on the side w. The connection of the 1 / 3 on the side w. The connection of the secondary
pensation. secondary phase of the CT-adapters to the phase of the CT-adapters to the relay inputs is L1-L1,
relay inputs is L1-L1, L2-L2, L3-L3, with the same L2, L2, L3, L3, with the same polarity.
polarity.
-1/3 -1/3 2/3
0 0 1
C(w) = 2/3 -1/3 -1/3
-240 C(H) = 1 0 0
-1/3 2/3 -1/3
0 1 0
Applied to the w secondary side Same as Yy0 adapter CTs with transformation ratio
of power transformers Dd4, 1 / 1 on the side we connected with the tertiary delta
Dz4, Zd4 where the primary side Same as Yy0 adapter CTs with transformation closed short-circuit transformation ratio of 1 / 3 that
is the reference side for phase ratio 1 / 1 on the side w. The connection of the removes the component from the zero-sequence
compensation. secondary phase of the CT-adapters to the compensated current for the side w. The connection
relay inputs is L3-L1, L1-L2, L2-L3, with the same of the secondary phase of the CT-adapters to the relay
polarity. inputs is L3-L1, L1-L2, L2-L3, with the same polarity.

0 -1/√3 1/√3 0 -1/√3 1/√3

-270
C(w) = 1/√3 0 -1/√3 C(w) = 1/√3 0 -1/√3
Applied to the w secondary side -1/√3 1/√3 0
-1/√3 1/√3 0
of power transformers Dy3, Zy3
where the primary side is the Same as Yd3 adapter CTs with transformation ratio Same as Yd9 adapter CTs with transformation ratio
reference side for phase com- 1 / 3 on the side w. The connection of the second- 1 / 3 on the side w. The connection of the secondary
pensation. ary phase of the CT-adapters to the relay inputs is phase of the CT-adapters to the relay inputs is L1-L1,
L1-L1, L2-L2, L3-L3, with the same polarity. L2, L2, L3, L3, with the same polarity.

1/3 -2/3 1/3

0 -1 0 C(w) = 1/3 1/3 -2/3
-300
C(w) = 0 0 -1 -2/3 1/3 1/3
Applied to the w secondary side Same as Yy0 adapter CTs with transformation ratio 1 / 1
-1 0 0
of power transformers Dd2, on the side we connected with the tertiary delta closed
Dz2, Zd2 where the primary side Same as Yy0 adapter CTs with transformation short-circuit transformation ratio of 1 / 3 that removes
is the reference side for phase ratio 1/1 on the side w. The connection of the the component from the zero-sequence compensated
compensation. secondary phase of the CT-adapters to the relay current for the side w. The connection of the second-
inputs is L2-L1, L3-L2, L1-L3, with reverse polarity. ary phase of the CT-adapters to the relay inputs is
L2-L1, L3-L2, L1-L3, with reverse polarity.

1/√3 -1/√3 0 1/√3 -1/√3 0

-330
C(w) = 0 1/√3 -1/√3 C(w) = 0 1/√3 -1/√3
Applied to the w secondary side -1/√3 0 1/√3
-1/√3 0 1/√3
of power transformers Dy1, Zy1
where the primary side is the Same as Yd11 adapter CTs with transformation Same as Yd11 adapter CTs with transformation ratio
reference side for phase com- ratio 1 / 3 on the side w. The connection of the 1 / 3 on the side w. The connection of the secondary
pensation. secondary phase of the CT-adapters to the relay phase of the CT-adapters to the relay inputs is L1-L1,
inputs is L1-L1, L2-L2, L3-L3, with the same polarity. L2, L2, L3, L3, with the same polarity.

236 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
Calculation of the differential and stabilizing currents

Following calculation is performed by device:

A) Instantaneous value of stabilization currents:
iSL1 = {iL1c(H) + sign[iL1c(L) ∙ iL1c(H)] ∙ iL1c(L)} /2
iSL2 ={iL2c(H)+sign[iL2c(L) ∙ iL2c(H)] ∙ iL2c(L)} /2
iSL3 ={iL3c(H)+sign[iL3c(L) ∙ iL3c(H)] ∙ iL3c(L)} /2
where sign [x ∙ y] is the signum function of the product between the instantaneous values x and y,
defined as:
sign[x ∙ y] = +1 se x ∙ y ≥ 0
sign[x ∙ y] = -1 se x ∙ y < 0

sign[x ∙ y] = +1 ≡ high stabilization

sign[x ∙ y] = -1 ≡ low stabilization

B) Instantaneous value of differential current for each phase:

idL1 = iL1c(H) + iL1c(L)
idL2 = iL2c(H) + iL2c(L)
idL3 = iL3c(H) + iL3c(L)

C) RMS value of fundamental component of the stabilization currents:

ISL1 = DFT1[iSL1]
ISL2 =DFT1[iSL2]
ISL3 =DFT1[iSL3]
where DFT1[x] is the calculus of the rms value of fundamental component of the instantaneous val-
ues x using DFT (Discrete Fourier Transform).
It is noted that the effective values of the fundamental component of the stabilization currents,
whose instantaneous values are calculated as in A) equal to the sum, divided by two, of the modules
concerning the phasors compensated currents of the two sides:

ISL1 = |IL1c(H) + IL1c(L)| / 2

ISL2 = |IL2c(H) + IL2c(L)| / 2
ISL3 = |IL3c(H) + IL3c(L)| / 2

D) RMS value of fundamental component of the differential currents:

IdL1 = DFT1[IdL1]
IdL2 = DFT1[IdL2]
IdL3 = DFT1[IdL3]

It is noted that the RMS values of the fundamental component of the differential currents, whose
instantaneous values are calculated as in B) equal to the module of vector difference between the
compensated current phasors on side H and compensated current phasors on side L:

IdL1 = |IL1c(H) + IL1c(L)|

IdL2 = |IL2c(H) + IL2c(L)|
IdL3 = |IL3c(H) + IL3c(L)|

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 237

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
External fault stabilization by means of operating dual-slope percentage characteristic

The start of the first threshold of the differential protection on L1 phase (ST Id-L1) occurs when all the
following conditions are met:
• 87 Enable = ON
• IdL1 ≥ Id>
• IdL1 ≥ K1/100) ∙ ISL1
• IdL1 ≥ K2/100) ∙ ISL1 - Q
• 87H-REST-L1 = OFF
• 87SatDet-L1 = OFF
• BLK1 87 = OFF
where:
• 87 enable parameter for both the differential protection thresholds,
• Id> adjustment of the minimum threshold (or maximum sensitivity) of the differential protection,
• K1 adjustment as a percentage of the slope of the first segment of the operating characteristic of
differential protection,
• K2 adjustment as a percentage of the slope of the second segment of the operating characteristic
of differential protection,
• Q y-axis intercept of the line of the second segment of the operating characteristic of differential
protection,
• 87H-REST-L1 logic state output of the the second and fi fth harmonic restraint for phase L1,
• 87SatDet-L1 logic state output of the CT’s saturation detector for phase L1,
• BLK1 87 logic state output of the logic block function of the differential protection.
All differential elements can be enabled or disabled by setting ON or OFF the 87T Enable param-
eter inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Differential 87G-87M-87T \ Common configuration menu.
The Id>, K1, K2 and Q parameters are available inside the Input sequence \ Id> Element \ definite
time.
Similarly the start of the first threshold of the differential protection on L2 (ST Id>-L2) or L3 (ST Id>-L3)
phase occurs when all the following conditions are met:
• 87 Enable = ON
• IdL2 ≥ Id>
• IdL2 ≥ K1/100) ∙ ISL2
• IdL2 ≥ K2/100) ∙ ISL2 - Q
• 87H-REST-L2 = OFF
• 87SatDet-L2 = OFF
• BLK1 87 = OFF
• 87 Enable = ON
• IdL3 ≥ Id>
• IdL3 ≥ K3/100) ∙ ISL3
• IdL3 ≥ K2/100) ∙ ISL3 - Q
• 87H-REST-L3 = OFF
• 87SatDet-L3 = OFF
• BLK1 87 = OFF
where 87H-REST-L2 and 87H-REST-L3 are the output state of the second or fifth harmonic restraint
for L2 and L3 phases respectively, 87SatDet-L2 and 87SatDet-L3 are the output state of the saturation
detector for L2 and L3 phases.

The start of the first differential protection element (ST Id>) occurs at the instant of occurrence of
the threshold start in at least one of the L1, L2, L3 phases.

If the three conditions that led to the start of the first threshold of the differential protection on L1,
L2, L3 phases are maintained all for the duration of intentional delay td>, when the time expires the
element trips.

The start of the second threshold of the differential protection on L1 phase (ST Id>>-L1) occurs when
all the following conditions are met:
• 87 Enable = ON
• IdL1 ≥ Id>>
• BLK1 87 = OFF
where Id>> is the setting threshold of the differential protection element.

Similarly the start of the second threshold of the differential protection on L2 (ST Id>>-L2) or L3
(ST Id>>-L3) phase occurs when all the following conditions are met:
• 87 Enable = ON
• IdL2 ≥ Id>>
• BLK1 87 = OFF
• 87 Enable = ON
• IdL3 ≥ Id>>
• BLK1 87 = OFF

The operation of the second differential protection threshold (TR Id>>) occurs at the instant when the
intervention occurs the threshold in at least one of the L1, L2, L3 phases.

238 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 If the three conditions that led to the start of the second threshold of the differential protection on
L1, L2, L3 phases are maintained all for the duration of intentional delay td>, when the time expires
the element trips.

The Id>> parameter is available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Differential 87G-87M-87T \ Id>>
Element \ Definite time menu.

Differential protection is stabilized against external faults by increasing the threshold current dif-
ferential with increasing current passing through the protected area, according to the following
operating characteristic double slope percentage in the Id-IS plan (where the Id value is the funda-
mental component of the differential current in the L1 or L2 or L3 phases and IS is the fundamental
component of stabilization current in the L1 or L2 or L3 phases).

Id=|ILc(H) - ILc(L)|

Id

Id1=(K2/100) ∙ IS -Q

Id>>

TRIP Id1=(K1/100) ∙ IS

NO TRIP
Id>
α1 α2
0 Is
I [|I | + |I |]/2
Breaker failure (BF)
With single enable flag for first or second threshold of differential protection the element can pro-
duce the Breaker Failure side H and/or side L output if the 87T(H)-BF for side H and/or 87T(L)-BF
for side side L, parameter is set to ON. The parameters are available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B)
\ Differential 87G-87M-87T \ Common configuration.[1]

The following block criteria are available:

Logical block (Block1)
If the 87T-BLK1 enabling parameter is set to ON and a binary input is designed for logical block
(Block1), the element is blocked off whenever the given input is active.[2] The enabling parameters
are available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Differential 87G-87M-87T \ Common configuration
menu, while the Block1 function must be assigned to the selected binary input inside the Set \ Board
1(2) inputs \ Binary input IN1-1...(IN2-x) menus.
Selective block (Block2)
With single enable flag for first or second threshold of differential protection the element can pro-
duce the output block (committed pilot wire or output relay) programmed for logic selectivity of side
H and/or side L if the 87T-BLK2OUT parameter is set to ON inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Dif-
ferential 87G-87M-87T \ Common configuration menu.
The logic selectivity function may be performed by means any combination of the following I/O:
• One committed pilot wire output (BLOUT1).
• One or more output relays designed for output selective block.
Only when the committed pilot wire are used the continuity check of the pilot wire link is active.
Use of committed pilot wire output BLOUT1:
• The information about phase or phase+earth block may be select programming the ModeBLOUT1
parameter (OFF - ON IPh - ON IPh/IE - ON IE) inside Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Selective block-
BLOCK2 \ Selective block OUT menus.
Use of output relay (K1...K6):
• If the 87T-BLK2OUT enable parameter is set to ON and a output relay is designed for selec-
tive block (Block2), the protection issues a block output by phase elements (BLK2OUT-Iph) or by
any protection element (BLK2OUT-Iph/IE), whenever the given element (Start 87T) becomes active,
while the BLK2OUT-Iph-K, BLK2OUT-Iph/IE-K and/or BLK2OUT-IE-K output relays and
LEDs (BLK2OUT-Iph-L, BLK2OUT-Iph/IE-L e/o BLK2OUT-IE-L) must be select inside the Set
\ Profile A(or B) \ Selective block-BLOCK2 \ Selective block OUT menu.

Internal selective block (Block4)

As well as to send a selective block toward other protective relays, each protective element may be

Note 1 The common settings concerning the Breaker failure protection are adjustable inside the Breaker Failure - BF menu.
Note 2 The exhaustive treatment of the logical block (Block 1) function may be found in the “Logic Block” paragraph inside CONTROL AND MONITOR-
ING section

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 239

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 enabled for transmit a selective block from/to other internal protective elements.[1]
With single enable flag for first or second threshold of differential protection the element can pro-
duce the output block (committed pilot wire or output relay) programmed for logic selectivity of side
H and/or side L if the 87T-BLK1parameter is set to ON inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Differential
87G-87M-87T \ Common configuration menu.

Stabilization on powering and excitation of the power transformer with second and fifth harmonic restraint
With Transformer (Transf) selection the second and fifth harmonic restraint is enabled: the ProtObj
parameter is available inside the Set \ Base menu.
If Motor or Generator (GEN-MOT-LINE- BAR) is selected the second and fifth harmonic is auto-
matically excluded.[2]
The second harmonic restraint of differential protection allows you to block unwanted operation at
powering of the transformer.
The fifth harmonic restraint of differential protection allows you to block unwanted operation at dur-
ing the operation of the transformer in over-excitation state.
The relay calculates:
A) RMS value of the second harmonic component of differential currents:
Id2L1=DFT2[IdL1]
Id2L2 =DFT2[IdL2]
Id2L3 =DFT2[IdL3]
where DFT2[x] is the calculated rms value of the second harmonic component of differential cur-
rents concerning the x variable obtained by Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT).
B) RMS value of the fifth harmonic component of differential currents:
Id5L1=DFT5[IdL1]
Id5L2 =DFT5[IdL2]
Id5L3 =DFT5[IdL3]
where DFT5[x] is the calculated rms value of the fifth harmonic component of differential currents
concerning the x variable obtained by Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT).
C) Second harmonic component / fundamental component ratio of differential currents:
Id2L1 / IdL1
Id2L2 / IdL2
Id2L3 / IdL3
D) Fifth harmonic component / fundamental component ratio of differential currents:
Id5L1 / IdL1
Id5L2 / IdL2
Id5L3 / IdL3

If at least one ratio Id2L1 / IdL1, Id2L2 / IdL2 , Id2L3 / IdL3 exceeds the second harmonic restraint setting
2nd-REST> the start of the second harmonic restraint in the corresponding phase goes ON (ST 2nd-
REST-L1 or ST 2nd-REST-L2 or ST 2nd-REST-L3).
If at least one ratio Id5L1 / IdL1, Id5L2 / IdL2 , Id5L3 / IdL3 exceeds the fifth harmonic restraint setting 5th-
REST> the start of the second harmonic restraint in the corresponding phase goes ON (ST 5th-REST-
L1 or ST 5th-REST-L2 or ST 5th-REST-L3).
An intentional reset time delay tHREST-RES, common for second-fifth harmonic restraint (with zero
adjustment the second and fifth harmonic restraint is restored at the moment when the relationship
between the effective values of the second or fifth harmonic and fundamental component of differ-
ential current falls below the threshold setting 2nd-REST> or 5th-REST>).

The threshold setting 2ndh-REST> and reset time delay setting tHREST-RES are available inside the
Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Differential 87G-87M-87T \ Harmonic restraint menu.

The start of the element can control an output relay by programming the ST2nd-REST-K and/or
ST5th-REST-K parameter available inside the menu Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Differential 87G-87M-87T
\ Harmonic restraint menu, similarly for LED (ST2nd-REST-L and/or ST5th-REST-L).

The start of the second harmonic restraint threshold at one phase or the fifth harmonic restraint
threshold at the same phase determines the starting of the harmonic restraint element (ST REST-H-
L1, L2 REST-H-ST , ST H-REST-L3) for that phase.

The start of the second harmonic restraint threshold (ST 2nd-REST>) occurs at the instant of occur-
rence of the start of threshold in at least one of the L1, L2, L3 phases.

The start of the fifth harmonic restraint threshold (ST 5th-REST>) occurs at the instant of occurrence
of the start of threshold in at least one of the L1, L2, L3 phases.

The start of the harmonics harmonic restraint is produced from start of the second or fifth harmonic
restraint threshold (ST 2nd-REST>or ST 5th-REST>).

Nota 1 The exhaustive treatment of the internal selective block (Block 4) function may be found in the “Internal selective block” paragraph inside
CONTROL AND MONITORING section.
Note 2 Regardless of the value set all parameters in the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Differential 87G-87M-87T \ Harmonic restraint menu are not significant

240 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 CROSS H-REST parameter
By adjusting OFF the CROSS H-REST parameter, the differential protection can be blocked at one
phase (L1 or L2 or L3) if the harmonic restraint is started for that phase (ST-H-L1 REST or REST-H-ST
H-ST or L2-L3 REST).
By adjusting ON the CROSS H-REST parameter, the differential protection can be blocked in all
three phases (L1 and L2 and L3) if the harmonic restraint is started in at least one phase (ST H-
REST).
The CROSS H-REST parameter is available inside the menu Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Differential 87G-
87M-87T \ harmonic restraint.

The logic state output of harmonic restraint considered for each phase (87 H-REST-L 1, 87 H-REST-L
2, 87 H-REST-L 3) is only enabled if the operating point in the corresponding phase stays over the first
three sections of the operating characteristic and below the second threshold Id>>.

BLOCK
Blocking of differential protection by harmonic restraint covers only the first three sections of the
double slope percentage tripping characteristic; the second threshold Id>> of the differential protec-
tion, which defines the fourth section of the tripping characteristic, it is nevertheless locking by har-
monic restraint so that to have a back-up protection in case of failure inside the zone of differential
protection with CT saturation that activate the second and fifth harmonic restraint.

Additional stabilization on through current by means of saturation detector

To stabilize at current loops with long time constants (eg short circuit outside the differential protec-
tion of generator starting current of motors with direct start), the differential protection (with the
exception of the second threshold Id>>) can be blocked by a CT’s saturation detector as additional
security to the double slope percentage operating characteristic.

In the first quarter of power cycle after the zero crossing of the instantaneous values of stabiliza-
tion current in a phase, the level of instantaneous values of the differential current at that phase is
controlled by the relay.

In the case of internal fault differential current appears along with the stabilization current after
the zero crossing, with the differential current instantaneous value of twice the actual value of the
stabilization current.

In the case of external fault however, the differential current does not appear until the beginning of
the CT saturation.

The saturation condition of in one phase (87SatDet or 87SatDet-L1-L2-L3 or 87SatDet) is detected if

all the following conditions are met:

1) the saturation detector is enabled (SatDet parameter set ON inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Dif-
ferential 87G-87M-87T \ CT saturation detector menu),
2) the value of the differential current, in absolute value, inside the first quarter of each power cycle
after the zero crossing of the stabilization current is, at that phase, less than 1.34 times the ab-
solute value of instantaneous value of the stabilization current in (corresponding to 77 % of the
operating characteristic for internal fault),
3) the operating point at that phase is above the first three sections of the double slope percent
operating characteristic and below the second threshold Id>>.

An adjustable recovery time tSatDet-RES detector saturation is adjustable.

The saturation detector does not block the second threshold of the differential protection Id>>.

The saturation detector can be enabled or disabled by selecting ON or OFF the SatDet parameter,
available, together with the tSatDet-RES recovery time, within the menu Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Dif-
ferential 87G-87M-87T \ CT saturation detector menu.

The start of an output relay can be controlled by programming the STSatDet parameter inside the
Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Differential 87G-87M-87T \ CT saturation detector menu and similarly the pro-
gramming state can be viewed on LED (STSatDet-L).

The differential locking at the saturation detector activation is independent for each of the three
phases.

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 241

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 Harmonic restraint

0 100 200 300

Saturation detector

Biased dual slope

percentage characteristic
Stabilization and
differential current
measurement

iLxc(H)
iLx(H) Magnitude, polarity, isLx IsLx TRIP
SIDE H is DFT
phase and ciclic sequence NO TRIP
iLx(L) and zero sequence currents idLx IdLx
SIDE L compensation iLxc(L) id DFT

General logic diagram of the differential elements 87G-87M-87T all-F87.ai

MatchType MatchType
Inct(H) iLxc(H) Inct(L)
iLx(H) Magnitude, polarity,
PhSeq SIDE H PhSeq
phase and ciclic sequence
pL1(H) iLx(L) and zero sequence currents pL1(L)
SIDE L compensation iLxc(L)
pL2(H) pL2(L)
pL3(H) pL3(L)
ProtObj ProtObj
NumSides NumSides
Sn(H) Sn(L)
Vn(H) Vn(L)
Gnd(H) Gnd(L)
Conn(H) Conn(L)
VectGroup(H) VectGroup(L)
iL1(H) iL1c(H) iL1(L) iL1c(L)
iL2(H) iL2c(H) iL2(L) iL2c(L)
SIDE H M (H )*P (H )*C (H ) SIDE L M (H )*P (H )*C (H )
iL3(H) iL3c(H) iL3(L) iL3c(L)

Magnitude, polarity, phase and ciclic sequence and zero sequence currents compensation 87T-compensation.ai

I SL1...L3
Stabilization and
differential current idL1...L3
measurement

iLxc(H)
isLx IsLx
is DFT1

idLx IdLx
iLxc(L) id DFT1

iL1c(H)
iL2c(H) I SL1...L3 idL1...L3
iL3c(H)
+iL1c(L) se sign[iL1c(L)∙iL1c(H)]≥0,
-iL1c(L) se sign[iL1c(L)∙iL1c(H)]<0 + iSL1 I SL1 =[|I L1c(H)| + |I L1c(L)|]/2
sign[iL1c(L)∙iL1c(H)] + DFT1
+iL2c(L) se sign[iL2c(L)∙iL2c(H)]≥0,
-i se sign[iL2c(L)∙iL2c(H)]<0 + iSL2 I SL2 =[|I L2c(H)| + |I L2c(L)|]/2
sign[iL2c(L)∙iL2c(H)] L2c(L) + DFT1
+iL3c(L) se sign[iL3c(L)∙iL3c(H)]≥0,
+ iSL3 I SL3 =[|I L3c(H)| + |I L3c(L)|]/2
-i se sign[iL3c(L)∙iL3c(H)]<0 DFT1
sign[iL3c(L)∙iL3c(H)] L3c(L) +

iL1c(L) + idL1 I dL1 =[|I L1c(H)| + |I L1c(L)|]/2

+ DFT1

iL2c(L) + idL2 I dL2 =[|I L2c(H)| + |I L2c(L)|]/2

+ DFT1

idL3 I dL3 =[|I L3c(H)| + |I L3c(L)|]/2

iL3c(L) +
+ DFT1

Stabilization and differential current measurement

242 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 5th-REST> tHREST-RES Harmonic restraint
Id5L1 Id5L1/Id1L1
DFT5 / 0 T ST 5th-REST-L1 ST 5th-REST
Id5L1/Id1L1≥ 5th-REST> ≥1
Id5L2 Id5L2/Id1L2 ST 5th-REST-L2
DFT5 / 0 T ST H-REST
Id5L2/Id1L2≥ 5th-REST> ≥1
0 100 200 300
Id5L3 Id5L3/Id1L3 ST 5th-REST-L3 ST 2nd-REST
DFT5 / 0 T ≥1
Id5L3/Id1L3≥ 5th-REST>

2nd-REST> CROSS H-REST

Id2L1 Id2L1/Id1L1 ST H-REST-L1 A
A = OFF” A =“ON”
DFT2 / 0 T ST 2nd-REST-L1 ≥1 87 H-REST-L1
Id2L1/Id1L1≥ 2nd-REST>
B
Id2L2 Id2L2/Id1L2 ST 2nd-REST-L2 ST H-REST-L2 87 H-REST-L2
DFT2 / 0 T ≥1
Id2L2/Id1L2≥ 2nd-REST>
Id2L3 Id2L3/Id1L3 ST 2nd-REST-L3 ≥1 ST H-REST-L2 87 H-REST-L3
DFT2 / 0 T
Id2L3/Id1L3≥ 2nd-REST>

idL1...L3 I dL1...L3 to biased dual slope percentage characteristic

Second and fifth harmonic restraint 87T harmonic-restraint

Saturation detector

1.6∙|iSL1|
IdL1
IdL1 < 1.6∙|iSL1| SatDet=ON
tSatDet-RES
1/4(fn)
1 1 0 T
ISL1
T 0
&
0
zero crossing detector

1.6∙|iSL2|
IdL2
IdL2 < 1.6∙|iSL2|
tSatDet-RES
1/4(fn)
1 1 0 T
ISL2
T 0
&
0
zero crossing detector

1.6∙|iSL3|
IdL3
IdL3 < 1.6∙|iSL3|
tSatDet-RES
1/4(fn)
ISL3 1 1 & 0 T
0 T 0
zero crossing detector

idL1...L3 iSL1...L3
from biased dual slope to biased dual slope
percentage characteristic percentage characteristic
Saturation detector

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 243

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 from saturation detector ≥1 ST Id>

Id>
≥1 ST Id>>
Id1L1 ≥ Id> 87 Enable=ON
td>
K1 &
ST Id>-L1 T 0 TR Id>-L1
&
I SL1
Id1L1 ≥ (K1/100)∙ISL1

K2 Q

Id1L1 ≥ (K2/100)∙ISL1-Q

Id>> td>>
I dL1 ST Id>>-L1 T 0
TR Id>>-L1
Id1L1 ≥ Id>> &

Id>

Id1L2 ≥ Id>
td>
K1 & TR Id>-L2
&
ST Id>-L2 T 0 ≥1 TR Id>
I SL2
Id1L2 ≥ (K1/100)∙ISL2

K2 Q

Id1L2 ≥ (K2/100)∙ISL2-Q

Id>> td>>
I dL2 ST Id>>-L2 TR Id>>-L2
& T 0 ≥1 TR Id>>
Id1L2 ≥ Id>>

Id>

Id1L3 ≥ Id>
td>
K1 &
ST Id>-L3 TR Id>-L3
& T 0
I SL3
Id1L3 ≥ (K1/100)∙ISL3
Biased dual slope
percentage characteristic
K2 Q

Id1L3 ≥ (K2/100)∙ISL3-Q

Id>> td>> TRIP

I dL3 ST Id>>-L3 T 0
TR Id>>-L3 NO TRIP
&
Id1L3 ≥ Id>>

Enable (ON≡Enable)
87T-BLK1 Block1
& BLK1 87T

Block1 Logic INx t ON INx t OFF

Logical block
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 Block1, Block4
n.o. Block1
T 0 0 T
Binary input INx BLK4IN 87T
Block1

Vedere diagramma funzionale alla pagina seguente Block4

Block4-in-out

Vedere diagramma funzionale alla pagina seguente

Block2 output

Biased dual slope percentage characteristic

244 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 ST-Iph BLK2

All BLK2OUT outputs t F-IPh

BLK2OUT-Iph

TRIPPING M ATRIX (LED+REL AYS)

of phase elements t F-IPh BLK2OUT-IPh-K
≥1
(see BLK2OUT chapter) T 0 BLK2OUT-IPh-L

Start 87T
87T Block2 OUT BLK2OUT-IE
Block2 output & BLK2OUT-IE-K
87TBLK2OUT
(ON≡Enable) BLK2OUT-IE-L
t F-IPh/IE
BLK2OUT-Iph/IE
t F-IPh/IE BLK2OUT-IPh/IE-K
≥1
T 0 BLK2OUT-IPh/IE-L
Start xx
&
xxBLK2OUT A = OFF
t F-IE B = ON IPh
ModeBLOUT1 C = ON IPh/IE
All other BLK2OUT outputs
t F-IE D = ON IE
of ground elements ≥1 A
T 0 B BLOUT1
(see BLK2OUT chapter) C
D
ST-IE BLK2 Pilot wire output

Block2out diagram

ST-Iph BLK4

All BLK4 I/O

of phase elements t FI-Iph
(see BLK4chapter)
t FI-Iph xx Block4 OUT
≥1
T 0
A = IN A = IN
87TBLK4 B = OFF B = OFF xxBLK4
C = OUT C = OUT Block4
“0” A A
“0” B 87T Block4 “0” B
Start 87T C “0” C

A = IN ≥1 Block4 OUT
xxBLK4 B = OFF
C = OUT
“0” A
“0” B ST-IE BLK4
Start xx C

Block4 enable
t FI-IE

t FI-IE
All BLK4 I/O ≥1
T 0
of ground elements
(see BLK4chapter)

Logic diagram of the logic blocking signals (Block4) Block4-in-out-diagram

Differential protection (87G-87M-87T) - Logic diagram of the blocking signals

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 245

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
— Breaker failure - BF
Preface
The protection is available in all versions.
When the protection issues a trip command but, because an anomaly, the circuit breaker cannot
open, the breaker failure protection issues a back-up trip command to trip adjacent circuit breakers.
The breaker failure function may be started by internal protective function (if associated with BF) or
by external protections.
Operation and settings
The starting of the timer occurs if both the following conditions are filled:
A) Start and trip of internal protective elements (trip of elements matched with BF protection) or, trip
of external protections acquired by means binary input, if enabled;
B) The CB is closed (the CB state may be acquired by means two binary inputs connected to the
auxiliary contacts 52a and 52b) or the fundamental component of at least one phase current on
side L IL1L , IL2L , IL3L is greater than the IBF> adjustable threshold or the fundamental component of
the residual current IE1 is greater than the IEBF> adjustable threshold.
The breaker failure protection reliability is improved by means of the CB position control or phase
or residuaI current measure; the trip can arise also for wrong auxiliary contacts state (if the current
is greater than the adjustable threshold ) or for trip of external protections (frequency, voltage,..)
without current (with CB closed information supplied from state of auxiliary contacts).
If the information concerning the CB position is not achievable (for instance the auxiliary contacts
are unavailable), such control must be disabled.

If both conditions are held along the set operate time tBF, the BF element trips at deadline, vice versa
the timer is cleared and the function is restored.
To the purpose to restore the BF element as quickly as possible, with start of the same protection
(see A condition), additionally to the trip of some internal protections, their starts are required (start
reset is faster than trip reset).

The element may be enabled or disabled by setting ON the BF Enable parameter available inside
the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Breaker failure-BF menu.

BF Enable I BF > I EBF > t BF

I L1L . . . I L 3L
Tr i p B F
I E1 S tar t BF
52a/52b
Tr i p P r o t E x t

BF-BLK1
Block1
& BL K1 BF
Block1

General logic diagram of the breaker failure element - BF all-FBF.ai

All the IBF>, IEBF and t BF parameters can be set separately for Profile A and Profile B; they are avail-
able inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Breaker failure-BF menu.

BF start from Circuit breaker

If the CB Input parameter (BF Start from circuit breaker) is set to ON, and two binary inputs are
designed for acquire the 52a and 52b auxiliary contacts, the control of the CB position is enabled. If
the information concerning the CB position is not available, such control must be disabled by setting
OFF the CB Input parameter. The parameter is available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Breaker
failure-BF menu, the 52a and 52b function must be assigned to the selected binary inputs inside
Set \ Inputs \ Binary input IN1(x) menus (IN1 or INx matching).
To enable the breaker failure protection to operate with trips coming from external protections, one
binary input must be designed to acquire the relative contacts. The TripProtExt function must be
assigned to the selected binary input inside the Set \ Board 1(2) inputs \ Binary input IN1-1...(IN2-x)
menus.
Logical block (Block1)
If the BF-BLK1 parameter (BF logical block) is set to ON, and a binary input is designed for logical
block (Block1), the breaker failure protection is blocked off whenever the given input is active. The
trip timer is held in reset condition, so the operate time counting starts when the input block goes
down.[1] The enabling parameter is available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Breaker failure-BF
menu, while the Block1 function must be assigned to the selected binary input inside the Set \
Board 1(2) inputs \ Binary input IN1-1...(IN2-x) menus.

Note 1 The exhaustive treatment of the logic block (Block 1) function may be found in the “Logic Block” paragraph inside CONTROL AND MONITORING
section

246 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 I BF >
I L1L
I L2L Start IBF>
I L3L Max I L1L ...I L3L ≥ I BF >

I EBF > Start BF

Start IEBF>
I E1 ≥1 Start BF

TRIPPING M ATRIX
I E ≥ I EBF > &

(LED+REL AYS)
CB Input t BF

Logic INx t ON INx t OFF “0” t BF

52a Trip BF
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF T 0
52a RESET
n.o. T 0 0 T CB Input OFF
Binary input INx Trip BF
ON≡CB Closed CB Input ON
&

52b Logic INx t ON INx t OFF

n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF
n.o. 52b
T 0 0 T
Binary input INx

Trip ProtExt Logic INx t ON INx t OFF

n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF
n.o. T 0 0 T ≥1 Trip Int/Ext
Binary input INx

Trip int-prot
Start BF
Block1 enable (ON≡Enable) &
BF-BLK1 Trip BF & BLK1 BF
&

Block1 Logic INx t ON INx t OFF

n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF Block1 input (ON≡Block)
n.o. Block1
T 0 0 T
Binary input INx

Logic diagram concerning the breaker failure element -BF Fun-BF_Pro-n.ai

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 247

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
— Logical block - BLOCK1
To the purpose to block off the trip of one protection element, the logical block function (Block1) may
be matched with binary inputs.[1]
The binary-matching may be set inside the Set \ Board 1(2) inputs \ Binary input IN1-1...(IN1-x) menus;
to the purpose the Block1 parameter must be selected for INx matching (x=1, 2)
A protective element, where the logical block is enabled, is blocked off whenever the given input is
ON.
For a given protective element, the logical block state is reading available (ThySetter and communi-
cation interfaces); it is ON the following condition are at the same time observed:
• Binary input ON,
• Element start ON,
• Element Trip OFF.

Generic protective element Start

TRIPPING M ATRIX
(LED+REL AYS)
Threshold
Operate time

Input Measure Operate time

Trip
T 0
RESET

Start
&
Customized Block1 info
Trip & BLK1xxx
Enable (ON≡Enable)
xxxBLK1
&

Block1 Logic INx t ON INx t OFF

Block1 info (internal state)
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF Block1 input (ON≡Block)
n.o. Block1
T 0 0 T
Binary input INx

General logic diagram of the logic block - Block1 Blocco_L.ai

The logical block it is not liable for any inhibition time-out, so the protective element is disabled for
the whole time when the input is ON.[2]

Start
Operate time

Trip

Block1 (input)

Block1 (output)
t
Logic block timers - Block1 Timers-Block1.ai

Activation of any binary input assigned to logic block (Block1) function effects a block of all the
CAUTION protective elements where the logic block is enabled

Note 1 In the following treatment, the logical block is defined as “Logical block” or “Block1”
Note 2 The Block 1 signal forces a timer reset

248 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 Z<-BLK1 21 element
Z<<-BLK1 21 element
U<BLK1 27 element
U<<BLK1 27 element
U1<BLK1 27V1 element
P1>BLK1 32P element
P1>>BLK1 32P element
P->BLK1 32R element
I<BLK1
P1>>BLK1 37 element
P1<BLK1 37P element
P1<<BLK1 37P element
40-ALBLK1 40 element
XC1-XD1-BLK1 40 element
XC2-XD2-BLK1 40 element
I2AL>BLK1 46G element
I2>>BLK1 46G element
I2>BLK1 46M element
I2>>BLK1 46M element
47BLK1 47 element
DthAL1BLK1 49MG element
DthAL2BLK1 49MG element
Reset timers DthBLK1 49MG element
(ON≡element inhibition)
I(H)>BLK1 50-51 element side H
I(H)>>BLK1 50-51 element side H

Start I(H)>>>BLK1 50-51 element side H

Enable (ON≡Enable) & Block1 info I(L)>BLK1 50-51 element side L
xxxBLK1 Trip &
& I(L)>>BLK1 50-51 element side L
I(L)>>>BLK1 50-51 element side L
Block1 ILR>BLK1 51LR element
Binary input INx ILR>>BLK1 51LR element
I-I/V>BLK1 51V element
I-I/V>>BLK1 51V element
Block1 info IE1>BLK1 50N.1-51N.1 element
Block1 (internal state)
IE1>>BLK1 50N.1-51N.1 element
IE1>>>BLK1 50N.1-51N.1 element
IE2>BLK1 50N.2-51N.1 element
IE2>>BLK1 50N.2-51N.1 element
IE2>>>BLK1 50N.2-51N.1 element
IEC>BLK1 50N(Comp) element
IEDC>BLK1 67N(Comp) element
IEC>>BLK1 50N(Comp) element
IEDC>>BLK1 67N(Comp) element
IE1>>>BLK1
IEC>>>BLK1 50N(Comp) element
IEDC>>>BLK1 67N(Comp) element
CPhi1>BLK1 55 element
IEDC>>>>BLK1 67N(Comp) element
CPhi2>BLK1 55 element
f>BLK1 81O element
U>BLK1 59 element
f>>BLK1 81O element
U>>BLK1 59 element
f<BLK1 81U element
UE>BLK1 59N element
f<<BLK1 81U element
UE>>BLK1 59N element
f<<<BLK1 81U element
U2>BLK1 59V2 element
f<<<<BLK1 81U element
64REF-BLK1 64REF element
87GMTBLK1 87G-N-T element
66BLK1 66 element
74TCSBLK1 74TCS element
IED>BLK1 67N element
BF-BLK1 BF element
IED>>BLK1 67N element
74VT-BLK1 74VT element
IED>>>BLK1 67N element
S(H)<BLK1 74CT element
IED>>>>BLK1 67N element
S(L)<BLK1 74CT element

Logic block element -Block1

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 249

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
— Selective block -BLOCK2
Preface
The logic selectivity function has been developed to the purpose to reduce the clearing times for
faults closes to the source.
The output blocking circuits of one or several Pro_N relays, shunted together, must be connected
to the input blocking circuit of the protection relay, which is installed upwards in the electric plant.
The output circuit works as a simple contact, whose condition is detected by the input circuit of the
upwards protection relay.
The logic selectivity function can be realized through any combination of the following I/O cir-
cuits:[1]
• One committed pilot wire input BLIN1...ON Iph, ON...Iph/IE, ON...IE.
• One committed pilot wire output BLOUT1...ON Iph, ON...Iph/IE, ON...IE.
• One or more than one independent binary inputs programmed with Block2 Iph, Block2 Iph/IE
or Block2 IE.
• One or more than one independent output relays programmed with BLK2OUT-Iph-K, BLK2OUT-
Iph/IE-K or BLK2OUT-IE-K.
In reference to the following schematic diagram, the some protection functions of the relay placed
on the feeder may be blocked by downstream protective relays.

TRIP
BLOUT1 Pro_N

TRIP TRIP
BLIN1
TRIP
BLIN1 BLOUT1 Pro_N BLIN1 BLOUT1 Pro_N
Pro_N
INx=Blocco selettivo Iph

TRIP
Any device
BLK2OUT-Iph-K
Selettività logica logica_acc.ai

Input selective block

Use of committed pilot wire input BLIN1

The input is a polarized wet type powered by internal isolated supply; it must be drive by an output
block signal coming from a Pro-N device or by a free voltage contact.

WARNING Never connect power to the block input circuit; the electronic circuit can be demaged !

The protection is blocked off according the selectivity block criteria by phase elements (Block2
Iph), by earth elements (Block2 IE) or by any protection element (Block2 Iph/IE) when the input
BLIN1 is active. The information about phase or phase+earth block may be select programming the
ModeBLIN1 parameter inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Selective block-BLOCK2 \ Selective block
IN menus.
Use of binary inputs
If the xxBLK2IN parameters (enable) are set to ON and a binary input is designed for selective
block (Block2), the protection is blocked off by phase elements (Block2 Iph), by earth elements
(Block2 IE) or by any protection element (Block2 Iph/IE), according the selectivity block criteria,
when the input (IN1 and/or INx) is active.
The Block2 Iph, Block2 IE and Block2 Iph/IE matching must be assigned to the selected binary
inputs inside the Set \ Board 1(2) inputs \ Binary input IN1-1...(IN1-x) menus
When a binary input is programmed for selective block input, the IN1 tON, INx tON, IN1 tOFF and
INx tOFF time delays must be reset to zero; the Logic parameters (ON/OFF) must be programmed
in the same way of the related output relay connected with-it.
Operation
For any protective element, three main conditions can arise:
A) Start = OFF: the element is at rest (no trip) regardless of the input/output blocks.
B) Start = ON: the element trips if no selective block input becomes active during the operate time.
C) Start = ON: if the selective block input (BLIN1 and/or binary input) becomes active, the element
goes in selective block state wherein the operate timer is forced to reset, so the element cannot
trip. After an adjustable time t B-Iph (common for phase protection elements) or t B-IE (common for
earth protection elements), the selective block input is disregarded and the operate timer can
start again. Information about t B-Iph and or t B-IE expired is available for reading (tB timeout data
inside Read \ Selective block - BLOCK2 \ Block2 input menu) and can drive an output relay and
Note 1 The selective logic can also be achieved with I/O connected with virtual pilot wires made up messages on the Ethernet network

250 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 or a LED (tB-K and or tB-K parameters inside Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Selective block - BLOCK2 \
Selective block IN submenu.

Start I>
&
Trip I>
Block2 input enable (I> element)
I>BLK2IN & BLK2IN I>
(ON≡Enable) &

Start xx
&
Trip xx
Block2 input enable (I>, I>>, I>>>, IE>, IE>>, IE>>>, elements)
xxBLK2IN & BLK2IN xx
&

PulseBLIN1
Permanently “ON”
Shorted BLIN1
Pilot wire
T 0 Diagnostic No pulses
Breaked BLIN1 BLK2IN-Iph
ModeBLIN1
Pulse BLIN1

TRIPPING M ATRIX
OFF

(LED+REL AYS)
BLIN1 ON IPh
ON IPh/IE
ON IE
Pilot wire input Iph Block2
FROM PHASE PROTECTIONS

Logic t B-Iph
INx t ON INx t OFF
Block2 IPh
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 t B-Iph
≥1
n.o. T 0 0 T 0 T ≥1 tB timeout
Binary input INx

FROM ANY PROTECTIONS

Logic INx t ON INx t OFF t B-IE

Block2 IPh/IE
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 t B-IE
≥1 BLK2IN-IE
n.o. T 0 0 T 0 T
Binary input INx
FROM EARTH FAULT PROTECTIONS

Logic INx t ON INx t OFF

Block2 IE
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF ≥1 IE Block2
n.o. T 0 0 T
Binary input INx

Logic diagram concerning the selective block intput - Block2 input Block2-in-diagram.ai

With a setting other than 0.00 s, the t B-Iph and t B-IE timers may be used to have a backup protection
available against pilot wire short circuit.[1]
The t B-Iph and/or t B-IE timers must be adjusted according the following rule (example for t B-Iph):
t B-Iph = t F v + εt + εs
where t F v is the value of block output timer related to the downstream relay (example t F-Iph), εt is a
chronometric selectivity margin to apply in comparison to the t B-Iph time related to the downstream
relay (does not take into account if such margin has been considered for the t F-Iph setting), εs is a
safety margin. The chronometric selectivity applied among the t B-x times of the relays in accelerated
logic system allows to avoid more the contemporary circuit breaker opening after the clearing of a
fault in a line of concomitant plant to the short-circuit of the pilot wires concerning the same line.

Note 1 In the absence of suitable provisions, a short circuit on a pilot wire causes the block of the receiving relay, so a possible fault (contemporary or
following) inside the protected zone, cannot be cleared that being the case the protective relay blocked.

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 251

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 To enable the selectivity logic input for a generic xx element, the xxBLK2IN parameters mu be set
to ON inside the Set \ Parametri di configurazione A (o B) \ xxx \ Setpoints menus concerning all
element where the selective block is available, eg:
I>BLK2IN inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Phase overcurrent-50/51 \ I> Element \ Setpoints menu.

INPUT BLOCK
(binary input and/or BLIN1)

BLIN2IN-Iph/BLIN2IN-IE

t B-Iph/t B-IE

tB timeout
t
tB timer TB-timer.ai

Output selective block

Use of output relays
If the xxBLK2OUT, xxBLK2OUT and/or xxBLK2OUT enable parameters are set to ON and a
output relay is designed for selective block (Block2), the protection issues a block output by phase
elements (BLK2OUT-Iph), by ground elements (BLK2OUT-IE) or by any protection element (BLK2OUT-
Iph/IE), whenever the given start is active.
The BLK2OUT-Iph-K, BLK2OUT-Iph/IE-K and/or BLK2OUT-IE-K output relays must be set in-
side the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ Selective block-BLOCK2 \ Selective block OUT menu; the same for ad-
dressing the LED indicators (BLK2OUT2-Iph-L, BLK2OUT2-IE-L and BLK2OUT2-Iph/IE_L).
When output relays are programmed for selective block output, the t TR time delays must reset to
zero; the operation mode must be set with self reset (No-latched inside Set \ Relays submenu) and
the Logic parameters (Energized/De-energized) must be programmed in the same way of the
related binary input connected with-it.

Use of committed pilot wire output BLOUT1

The output is a dry static relay.
The information about phase (ON IPh), earth (ON IE), or phase+earth (ON IPh/IE) concerning the
sending block out signal may be select by means of the ModeBLOUT1 parameter inside the Set \
Profile A(or B) \ Selective block-BLOCK2 \ Selective block OUT menu.
The parameters can be set separately for A and B profiles.

Operation
The selective block outputs go ON at the same time of the xx element start; they hold steady (even
if the start reset to zero) for along the t F-IPh, t F-IE and t F-IPh/IE adjustable times for phase, earth and
phase+earth functions.
The timers starts when one or more selective block function goes ON; when a timer expires, the
selective block outputs are disregarded (even if the start holds steady).

The t F-IPh and t F-IE counters start when the output selective block becomes active. When the coun-
ters expire the block selective output is forced off (despite the start xxx remain active).
If the t F-IPh, t F-IE e t F-IPh/IE timers are cleared the selective block output state is freeze up to the start
xxx remain active.
With a setting other than 0.00 s, the t F-IPh, t F-IE e t F-IPh/IE timers may be used to provide a backup
protection against breaker failure inside a selectivity logic system, as well as to hold blocked up-
stream protective relays up after the fault is cleared with CB opening to provide solution against
unwanted trips because of a larger reset time compared with the downstream relay (the selectivity
will be lost).

Start xx
(protezioni interne)

BLK2OUT-Iph
BLK2OUT-IE
BLK2OUT-Iph/IE
t
t F-IPh, t F-IE, t F-IPh/IE t F-IPh, t F-IE, t F-IPh/IE

tF timer (Block2) TF-timer.ai

With traditional selective logic systems, in the absence of suitable cares, the event of a circuit
breaker failure causes the block of the receiving relays situated upstream the circuit breaker, so the
fault cannot be cleared.

252 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 Start I>
I> Block2 OUT ST-Iph BLK2 BLK2OUT-Iph
Block2 output &
I>BLK2OUT BLK2OUT-IPh-K

TRIPPING M ATRIX
(ON≡Enable)

(LED+REL AYS)
t F-IPh BLK2OUT-IPh-L
BLK2OUT-IE
All other BLK2OUT outputs of phase elements t F-IPh BLK2OUT-IE-K
≥1 t F-IPh/IE
0 T BLK2OUT-IE-L
[I2>, I2>> (46M), DthAL1, DthAL2, Dth> (49), BLK2OUT-Iph/IE
I>>, I>>> (50/51), ILR>, ILR>> (51LR), t F-IPh/IE BLK2OUT-IPh/IE-K
≥1
I-I/U>, I-I/U>> (51V)] 0 T BLK2OUT-IPh/IE-L
A = OFF
Start IE1 > t F-IE B = ON IPh
& IE > Block2 OUT ModeBLOUT1 C = ON IPh/IE
Block2 output
IE1>BLK2OUT t F-IE A D = ON IE
(ON≡Enable) BLOUT1
B
0 T Pilot wire output
All other BLK2OUT outputs of ground elements C
≥1 ST-IE BLK2 D
Block2 output
[IE1>>, IE1>>>(50N.1/51N.1), IE2>, IE2>>, IE2>>>(50N.2/51N.2),
IEC>, IEC>>, IEC>>> (50NComp/51NComp),
IED>, IED>>, IED>>>, IED>>>> (67N),
IEDC>, IEDC>>, IEDC>>>, IEDC>>>> (67NComp)]

Logic diagram concerning the selective block output - Block2 output Block2-diagram.ai

When using the Pro-N devices inside the selective logic systems, the answer to the circuit breaker
failure problem can be solved by means of, (as well as the BF-Breaker Failure element) or by
means of a threshold adjusted for time selectivity, through use of the output block reset timer too
with the intent that avoid permanently block of all upstream relays by downstream block signals (the
only one unblocked relays deals to the fault breaker).
The t F-IPh, t F-IE, t F-IPh/IE timers must be adjusted according the following rule (example for t F-Iph):
t F-Iph = t + TAP + trip + εt + εs
where t is the larger phase protection operate time, TAP is the circuit breaker operate time (with arc
extinction), trip is the larger reset time of all protective relays inside the selective logic system, εt is
an potential selectivity margin relative to the t F-x time of the downstream relays, εs is a safety margin
need to include timers errors (tolerances).

Diagnostic
To guarantee maximum fail-safety, the relay performs a run time monitoring for pilot wire continuity
and pilot wire shorting.[1]
Exactly the output blocking circuit periodically produces a pulse, having a small enough width in
order to be ignored as an effective blocking signal by the input blocking circuit of the upstream
protection, but suitable to prove the continuity of the pilot wire.
Furthermore a permanent activation (or better, with a duration longer than a preset time) of the
blocking signal is identified, as a warning for a possible short circuit in the pilot wire or in the output
circuit of the downstream protection.

Permanently “ON”
Pilot wire Shorted BLIN

Pulse BLIN1 T 0 Diagnostic No pulses

Breaked BLIN
TRIPPING M ATRIX
(LED+REL AYS)

BLOUT1 BLIN1
BLOCK OUT Pilot wire output Pilot wire link
≥1 BLOCK IN
Pulse Pulse BLIN1
generator Pilot wire input

Pulse BLOUT1 Pulse BLOUT1

The periodic pulses that are sent by output circuit may be enabled or disabled by means the Pulse-
BLOUT1 parameter available inside the Set \ Pilot wire diagnostic menu; with OFF setting the
pulses are disabled.[2]
If no pulses are received inside an adjustable time window at the selective block input circuit, a
break pilot wire alarm is issued; the information is available for reading (Breaked BLIN1 data inside
Read \ Pilot wire diagnostic submenu) and can drive an output relay and or a LED (PulseBLIN-K
and or a PulseBLIN-L parameters inside Set \ Pilot wire diagnostic submenu).
The control window may be programmed for OFF (no control) - 0.1 -1 - 5 - 10 - 60 - 120 s; the
Pulse BLIN1 parameter is available inside the Set \ Pilot wire diagnostic menu; with OFF setting of
the the PulseBLIN1 parameter the pulse control is disabled.
The same setting must be for input and output (PulseBLIN1 and PulseBLOUT1).

Note 1 Full diagnostic of pilot wires is only available when committed pilot wire input/outputs are employed
Note 2 When several outputs are parallel linked the pulse emission must be enabled inside one device only, sooner inside the outermost device

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 253

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 In the following example the output pulses must be enabled inside the device B only (2nd logic se-
lectivity level) and D (1st logic selectivity level).

Setting example
In reference to the above shown schematic diagram, the logic selectivity is performed by means of
the dedicated I/O for the short circuit elements of A, B and C protective relays, so that if a fault arises
in (2), the open order or circuit breaker CB2 is issued and no trip is issued by A device.
A command must be issued for the main circuit breaker CB1 by the A relay with a fault in (1).

2° level of logic selectivity 1° level of logic selectivity

2

1
TRIP
BLOUT1 B
Pro_N
LOAD

TRIP TRIP
BLIN1
TRIP BLIN1 BLOUT1 C BLIN1 BLOUT1 D
A
Pro_N Pro_N
Pro_N
Logic selectivity logica_acc-esempio.ai

A Protection
I>> element with definite time set to 4.5 In with operate time to 0.10 s blocked by start of B and/or C
protection.
Settings:
• I>> def = 4.5 In
• t >> def = 0.100 s
• PulseBLOUT1 = OFF
• PulseBLIN1 = 1 s
• I>>BLK2IN = ON
• I>>BLK2OUT = OFF
• t B-IPh = 0.30 s

B Protection
I>> element with definite time set to 4.0 In with operate time to 0.10 s with emission of block output
toward A protection relay.
Settings:
• I>> def = 4.0 In
• t >> def = 0.100 s
• I>>BLK2IN = OFF
• I>>BLK2OUT = ON
• PulseBLIN1 = OFF
• PulseBLOUT1 = 1 s
• t F-IPh = 0.25 s

C Protection
I>> element with definite time set to 4.0 In with operate time to 0.10 s with emission of block output
toward A device and block input from D protection relay.
Settings:
• I>> def = 4.0 In
• t >> def = 0.100 s
• I>>BLK2IN = ON
• I>>BLK2OUT = ON
• PulseBLIN1 = 1 s
• PulseBLOUT1 = OFF
• t F-IPh = 0.25 s
• t B-IPh = 0.30 s

254 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
— Internal selective block -BLOCK4
As well as to send or transmit a selective block toward other protective relays, each protective
element may be enabled for receive or transmit a selective block from/to other internal protective
elements.
The internal selective block of one or more element may be enabled/disabled by means the Ixxx-
BLK4 parameters (virtual input and output common to all protective thresholds); the following oper-
ating modes are available:
• IN - the element is enabled to receive the selective block from an internal input.
• OUT - the element is enabled to send the selective block to an internal output.
• OFF - the element is disabled to send/receive the internal selective block.
Transmission and reception for the same element is not allowed, so any stall situation due to wrong
setting is avoided.

The internal selective block can work together with an external selective block from other protective
relays (Block2 input and Block2 output).

For any element the logic state of the internal output block and the trip state are defined by:
• Start threshold
• Internal selective logic block
according to the following table.

START threshold IxxxBK4=IN IxxxBLK4=OUT xxx TRIP threshold SELECTIVE BLOCK

xxx xxx threshold
0 0 0 0 0
0 1 0 0 0
1 0 1 within tFI-Iph 1 after the operate time 0
1 1 1 within tFI-Iph 1 0

• If the xxx threshold is started, regardless of the internal input and output, the element is always
OFF (no trip).
• If the xxx threshold start stay ON within the operating time and the internal input is OFF, when the
timer expires the trip goes ON.
• If the xxx threshold is started and the internal input is ON, the xxx threshold is blocked (the operat-
ing timer is forced to reset); the element is OFF (no trip).

The internal selective block output goes ON when the threshold is started and stays ON (despite the
start goes OFF) along an adjustable time tFI-Iph common for all phase elements 50-51-67 or tFI-IE com-
mon for all earth elements 50N-51N-67N.
The t FI-IPh and t FI-IE counters start when the output selective block becomes active; when the coun-
ters expire the internal block selective output is forced OFF (despite the start xxx remain active).

A = IN
I>BLK4 B = OFF
ST-Iph BLK4
C = OUT
“0” A
“0” B I> Block4 I/O
Start I> C
Block4 enable t FI-Iph A = IN
B = OFF xxBLK4
t FI-Iph xx Block4 OUT C = OUT
≥1 A
Block4
All other BLK4 I/O 0 T
“0” B
of phase elements “0” C

A = IN ≥1 Block4 OUT
I E >BLK4 B = OFF
C = OUT
“0” A
“0” B IE > Block4 I/O
C t FI-IE
Start IE >
t FI-IE
All other BLK4 I/O ≥1
0 T
of ground elements
ST-IE BLK4

Logic diagram concerning the output signals of the internal selective block function - Block4 Block4-in-out-diagram.ai

If the t FI-IPh, t FI-IE e t FI-IPh/IE timers are cleared the selective block output state is freeze up to the
start xxx remain active.
With a setting other than 0.00 s, the t FI-IPh, t FI-IE e t FI-IPh/IE timers may be used to have a backup pro-
tection available against breaker failure inside a selectivity logic system, as well as to hold blocked
upstream protective relay up to your own reset
.

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 255

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 As typical application an internal and external selective block can be used for protection of parallel
power transformers. On occurrence of a fault inside the transformer T2, the directional phase or
ground directional overcurrent element concerning the P2 relay trips to open the CB2. The 50 and
50N elements of both relays should trip if no grading margin is set in order to provide selectivity with
the directional elements. Thanks to internal (Block4) and external selective block (Block2) this grad-
ing margin can be avoided.
• The 50 and 50N element on the P1 relay are blocked by means of external selective block (Block2)
coming from P2.
• The 50 and 50N element on the P2 relay are blocked by means of internal selective block (Block4.

T1 T2

CB1 CB2
NVA100
P1 P2 NVA100

BLIN1 Block2 Iph/IE BLOUT1

TRIP

67 50 50 67

Block4 Block4

67N 50N 50N 67N

BLOUT1 Block2 Iph/IE BLIN1

Logic selectivity example logica_block1.ai

With the following setting for P1 and P2 protection relay:

• I>>BLK4IN IN (I>> Internal selective block input)
• IPD>>BLK4IN OUT (IPD>> Internal selective block output)
• IE>>BLK4IN IN (IE>> Internal selective block input)
• IED>>BLK4IN OUT (IED>> Internal selective block output)
• IPD>>BLK2OUT ON (IPD>> External selective block output)
• IED>>BLK2OUT ON (IED>> External selective block output)
• I>>BLK2IN (I>> External selective block input)
• IE>>BLK2IN (IE>> External selective block input)
• ModeBLIN1 ON Iph/IE (BLIN1 Selective block operating mode)
• ModeBLOUT1 ON Iph/IE (BLOUT1 Selective block operating mode)

the time diagram of internal (Block4) and external (Block2) selective block concerning the phase and
residual overcurrent thresholds (I>> and IE>>) are shown in the following page.

256 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 Start I>> (P2 relay)

Start IPD>> (P2 relay)

t FI-Iph
BLK4OUT (IPD>> internal block output of P2 relay)

BLK4IN I>> (I>> internal block input of P2 relay)

t F-Iph/IE
BLK2OUT-Iph/IE (P2 relay)
t PD>>
Trip IPD>> (P2 relay)

Trip I>> (P2 relay)

Start I>> (P1 relay)

Start IPD>> (P1 relay)

BLK4OUT (IPD>> internal block output of P1 relay)

BLK4IN I>> (I>> internal block input of P1 relay)

Trip IPD>> (P1 relay)

t B-Iph
BLK2IN-Iph (P1 relay)

Trip I>> (P1 relay)

t

Time diagram of internal (Block4) and external (Block2) selective block concerning phase overcurrent element blocking of the example

Start IE>> (P2 relay)

Start IED>> (P2 relay)

t FI-IE
BLK4OUT (IED>> internal block output of P2 relay)

BLK4IN IE>> (IE>> internal block input of P2 relay)

t F-Iph/IE
BLK2OUT-Iph/IE (P2 relay)
t ED>>
Trip IED>> (P2 relay)

Trip IE>> (P2 relay)

Start IE>> (P1 relay)

Start IED>> (P1 relay)

BLK4OUT (IED>> internal block output of P1 relay)

BLK4IN IE>> (IE>> internal block input of P1 relay)

Trip IED>> (P1 relay)

t B-IE
BLK2IN-IE (P1 relay)

Trip IE>> (P1 relay)

t
blk4-F50-51.ai

Time diagram of internal (Block4) and external (Block2) selective block concerning residual overcurrent element blocking of the example

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 257

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
— Logical block summary

Selective block output BLK2OUT

Internal selective block BLK4
Selective block input BLK2IN
Logic block BLK1
PROTECTIVE ELEMENTS
Underimpedance - 21 Z< Element g
Underimpedance - 21 Z< Element g
Undervoltage - 27 U< Element g
Undervoltage - 27 U<< Element g
Positive sequence undervoltage - 27V1 U1< Element g
Directional active overpower - 32P P1> Element g
Directional active overpower - 32P P2> Element g
Undercurrent - 37 I< Element g
Directional active underpower - 37P P1< Element g
Directional active underpower - 37P P2< Element g
Loss of field - 40 - Alarm Element g
Loss of field - 40 - XC1-XD1 Element g
Loss of field - 40 - XC2-XD2 Element g
Negative sequence overcurrent - 46G Alarm Element I2AL> g g g
Negative sequence overcurrent - 46G I2>> Element g g g
Negative sequence overcurrent - 46M I2> Element g g g
Negative sequence overcurrent - 46M I2>> Element g g g
Phase reversal - 47 g
Thermal image - 49MG DthAL1 Element g g g
Thermal image - 49MG DthAL2 Element g g g
Thermal image - 49MG Dth> Element g g g
Phase overcurrent - 50/51 sideH I(H)> Element g g g g
Phase overcurrent - 50/51 I(H)>> side H Element g g g g
Phase overcurrent - 50/51 I(H)>>> side H Element g g g g
Phase overcurrent - 50/51 side L I(L)> Element g g g g
Phase overcurrent - 50/51 side L I(L)>>Element g g g g
Phase overcurrent - 50/51 side L I(L)>>>Element g g g g
Locked rotor - 51LR(14)/14 - ILR> Element g g g
Locked rotor - 51LR(14)/14 - ILR>> Element g g g
Voltage restraint overcurrent - 51V - I51V> Element g g g
Voltage restraint overcurrent - 51V -I51V>> Element g g g
Residual overcurrent - 50N.1/51N.1 IE.1> Element g g g g
Residual overcurrent - 50N.1/51N.1 IE.1>> Element g g g g
Residual overcurrent - 50N.1/51N.1 IE.1>>> Element g g g g
Residual overcurrent - 50N.2/51N.2 IE.2> Element g g g g
Residual overcurrent - 50N.2/51N.2 IE.2>> Element g g g g
Residual overcurrent - 50N.2/51N.2 IE.2>>> Element g g g g
Residual overcurrent - 50N(Comp)/51N(Comp)/ IEC> Element g g g g
Residual overcurrent - 50N(Comp)/51N(Comp)/ IEC>> Element g g g g
Residual overcurrent - 50N(Comp)/51N(Comp)/ IEC>>> Element g g g g
Minimum power factor - 55 CPhi1< Element g
Minimum power factor - 55 CPhi2< Element g
Overvoltage - 59 U> Element g
Overvoltage - 59 U>> Element g
Residual overvoltage - 59N UE> Element g
Residual overvoltage - 59N UE>> Element g
Negative sequence overvoltage - 59V2 U2> Element g
Maximun number of startings - 66 Element g

continue to the next page

258 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 Selective block output BLK2OUT
Internal selective block BLK4
Selective block input BLK2IN
Logic block BLK1
PROTECTIVE ELEMENTS
Directional earth fault overcurrent - 67N IED> Element g g g g
Directional earth fault overcurrent - 67N IED>> Element g g g g
Directional earth fault overcurrent - 67N IED>>> Element g g g g
Directional earth fault overcurrent - 67N IED>>>> Element g g g g
Directional earth fault overcurrent calculated residual current - 67N IEDC> Element g g g g
Directional earth fault overcurrent calculated residual current -67N IEDC>> Element g g g g
Directional earth fault overcurrent calculated residual current - 67N IEDC>>> Element g g g g
Directional earth fault overcurrent calculated residual current - 67N IEDC>>>> Element g g g g
Overfrequency - 81O f> Element g
Overfrequency - 81O f>> Element g
Underfrequency - 81U f< Element g
Underfrequency - 81U f<< Element g
Underfrequency - 81U f<<< Element g
Underfrequency - 81U f<<<< Element g
Differenziale percentuale - 87G-87M-87T Soglia Id> g gg
Differenziale percentuale - 87G-87M-87T Soglia Id>> g gg
Breaker failure - BF g
CONTROL & MONITORING
CTs monitoring side H - 74CT(H) g
CTs monitoring side L - 74CT(L) g
VTs monitoring - 74VT g
Trip circuit supervision - 74TCS g

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 259

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
— Remote tripping
Preface
Some output relays may be programmed for remote trip function resulting from a command coming
from a binary input.
If a binary input is designed for remote trip acquisition, an output relay allocated to the same function
is triggered when the input (IN1 and/or IN2) is active.

Operation and settings

The Remote trip matching must be assigned to the selected binary inputs inside the Set \ Board 1(2)
inputs \ Binary input IN1-1...(IN1-x) menus.
When a binary input is programmed for remote trip acquisition, the IN1 tON, IN2 tON, IN1 tOFF
and IN2 tOFF time delays must be reset to zero; the Logic parameters (ON/OFF) must be pro-
grammed in the same way of the related circuit connected with-it.
The RemTrip-K matching must be assigned to the selected output relays inside the Set \ Remote
tripping submenu; the same for addressing the LED indicators (RemTrip-L).
When output relays are programmed for remote tripping, the t TR time delays must reset to zero;
the operation mode must be set with self reset (No-latched inside Set \ Relays submenu) and the
Logic parameters (Energized/De-energized) must be programmed in the same way of the related
binary input connected with-it.

All the parameters are common for A and B Profiles

+UAUX
Remote trip
Remote trip

TRIPPING M ATRIX
Remote trip Logic INx t O N INx t O F F

(LED+REL AYS)
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF RemTrip-K
n.o. T 0 0 T RemTrip-L
Binary input INx

-UAUX
Remote tripping logic diagram Fun-Remote-trip.ai

260 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
— Frequency tracking
Within the frequency range 20...63 Hz (fn = 50 Hz or 60 Hz) a frequency tracking algorithm adjusts the
currents sampling frequency, so as to keep the number of samples in any given period constant.
With 64 samples for periods the sampling rate is adjusted from 1.28 kHz with f = 20 Hz to 4.032 kHz with
f= 63 Hz.
For a frequency step change the tracking response time is 0.1 Hz/s.
The frequency measure is based on the largest phase voltage; if the largest signal between the input
phase voltages are lower than 1.5% En the frequency measurement is performed on the current
signals IL1L , IL2L , IL3L .

• If the larger phase input current is lower than 25% In and the larger phase input voltage is lower
than 1.5% En the sampling frequency is fixed to fn (50 or 60 Hz).
• If the measured frequency is outside the locking range, the sampling frequency is fixed to the lower
or upper value (20 - 63 Hz).

I L1L
I L2L
I L3L Max I L1...L3 > 0.25 I n
U L1
≥ Sampling frequency
U L2
U L3 Max U L1...L3 > 0.015 E n

Max IL1L...L3L
Max UL1...L3 Rated frequency f n = 50 Hz or 60 Hz

20 Hz 63 Hz Locked frequency

0.25 In - 1.5% En
50 Hz o 60 Hz

20 63 f (Hz)
Max IL1L...L3L
Max UL1...L3 Rated frequency f n = 50 Hz or 60 Hz

16 Hz f measured 90 Hz Displayed value

0.25 In - 1.5% En
0 Hz
16 90 f (Hz)
Frequency tracking IF.ai

All protective elements are always operative; accuracy is guaranteed inside the locked frequency
band.

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 261

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
— Second Harmonic Restraint - 2ndh-REST
Preface
When a power transformer is energized, as well know an inrush current flow in the side that have
been energized with an amount and duration that depend by many factors which:
• Instantaneous value of the supply voltage at the time where the transformer is energized
• Transformer design, magnetization characteristic and size
• Residual flux
The maximum amount of the inrush current is produced by energizing the transformer at the zero
point of the voltage wave, when it increase or decrease with the residual flux respectively positive
or negative. Moreover the ratio between the maximum amount of the inrush current and the nominal
current of the transformer decrease if the size of transformer increase, whereas the duration of the
inrush current increase with the size of transformer.
Some types of instantaneous protections as overcurrent, residually connected ground fault and dif-
ferentials, are affected by this inrush current and their unwanted tripping can occur on transformer
energizing.

The second harmonic restraint is available to restraint any selected threshold of protective relay:
• Negative sequence overcurrent for motor - 46M
• Phase overcurrent - 50/51
• Residual overcurrent - 50N.1/51N.1
• Residual overcurrent - 50N.2/51N.2
• Calculated residual overcurrent - 50N(Comp)/51N(Comp)
Moreover one or more output contacts may be allocated to the 2NDH-REST function in order to block
any external protection relays where second harmonic restraint is not available.

Operation and settings

Each second harmonic component of phase currents (IL1-2nd, IL2-2nd, IL3-2nd) is compared with the
I2ndh> adjustable threshold.
When one or more currents overcome the setting threshold a start is issued.
The start may be employed to block-off one or more of 46M, 50/51, 50N.1/51N.1, 50N.2/51N.2 and
50N(Comp)/51N(Comp) elements or to block-off external protections by means output relays (this
can be usefully used in order to restraint external protection relays where second harmonic restraint
is not available).
For the purpose to keep in block state the selected elements, an adjustable t2ndh>RES reset delay is
provided.

ON≡Enable
I2ndh> Enable
Start I2ndh>

I 2ndh >

I L1-2nd t 2ndh>RES

TRIPPING M ATRIX
(LED+REL AYS)
I L1-2nd ≥ I 2 ndh>
t 2ndh>RES I2ndh>ST-K
I L2-2nd &
≥1 0 T I2ndh>ST-L
I L2-2nd ≥ I 2 ndh>

I L3-2nd
I L3-2nd ≥ I 2 ndh>

Logic diagram concerning the second harmonic restraint function - 2NDH/REST 2NDH-REST-diagram.ai

The setting of I2ndh> and t2ndh>RES parameters are available inside the Set \ Profile A(B) \
Second Harmonic Restraint menu.

The second harmonic element may be enabled or disabled; to enable it, the I2ndh> parameter must
be set to ON inside the Set \ Profile A(B) \ Second Harmonic Restraint-2ndh-REST menus.

All the parameters can be set separately for Profile A and Profile B.

The output may be assigned to the selected I2ndh>-ST-K output relays inside the
Set \ Profile A(B) \ Second Harmonic Restraint-2ndh-REST menu; the same for addressing the LED
indicators (I2ndh>-ST-L).

When output relays are programmed for second harmonic element output, the t TR time delays must
reset to zero; the operation mode must be set with self reset (No-latched inside Set \ Relays sub-
menu) and the Logic parameters (Energized/De-energized) must be programmed in the same
way of the related binary input connected with-it.

262 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
— Cold Load Pickup - CLP
Preface
CLP feature allows selected thresholds to be changed or blocked for an adjustable time in order to
overcome transient overcurrents.
The trigger of the CLP feature is the logical condition of circuit breaker closed, that Pro-N relay de-
tect by means of two digital inputs connected to the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts 52a and 52b.
When the circuit breaker closed condition is detected, the CLP timer set in the submenu of CLP func-
tion is initiated and, throughout the CLP set time:
• The threshold is blocked if CLP is set to ON threshold block.
• The threshold is changed to the value that is set if CLP is set to ON threshold change.
When CLP timer has elapsed, the threshold is unblocked if CLP is set to ON threshold block or the
threshold is revert back to the original value if CLP is set to ON threshold change.
Note that when the circuit breaker is open, the threshold is already blocked if CLP is set to ON
threshold block or the threshold is already changed to the value if CLP is set to ON threshold change:
this is useful in order to avoid unwanted tripping due to unblocked threshold or threshold with his
original value for cases where a delay of the circuit breaker closing happen, i.e. where the three
poles of the CB do not close at the same time or during long CB closing time.
Typical applications where the CLP feature may be useful are for overcurrent protections on feeders
where the circuit breaker closing starts air conditioning/heating loads after a long cooling time, mo-
tors or more generally momentary large loads.
The CLP may be also useful for instantaneous ground fault overcurrent protections on motors start-
ing, because it is likely that incorrect operation of the protection would occur on imbalance transient
secondary current due to asymmetric line CTs saturation.
Depending upon the magnitude and duration of the starting current, it may be necessary to block
operation of thresholds or raising his setting. Also a combination of both blocking some thresholds
and raising others may be adopted.
For each threshold the CLP function may be disabled (OFF), enabled with threshold blocking (ON-
Element blocking) or enabled with threshold change (ON-Change setting) by means the xx-
CLPx Mode parameter.
The operating mode and the relative activation time concerning each threshold of the 49,
50/51, 50N/51N, 67 and 67N elements are adjustable inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ xxx - xx
\ xxx Element \ Setpoints menus.

Generic protec t iv e e le me n t
(Threshold outside CLP) Start Ixx

TRIPPING M ATRIX
I xx

(LED+REL AYS)
Input STEADY STATE THRESHOLD t x x RES
A =“0 or OFF” A =“1” Operate time
t x x RES
t xx
I C L P xx 0 T
T 0
TRANSIENT THRESHOLD ICLPxxMode RESET
A = ON - Change setting Trip Ixx
B = OFF
t C L P xx C = ON - Element blocking
A
t CLPxx B
C
≥1 CLP Ixx
2nd harmonic restraint enable (ON≡Enable) T 0
Ixx2ndh-REST
& ≥1

Block1, Block2
Start I2ndh>

CB OPEN CB OPEN
CB State (52a=OFF) CB CLOSED (52a=ON) (52a=OFF)
CB State
tCLPxx 0.1 s
Output tCLPxx

t
TRANSIENT THRESHOLD/ STEADY STATE TRANSIENT THRESHOLD/
BLOCK THRESHOLD/UNBLOCK BLOCK
Cold Load Pickup logic diagram - CLP

Example: to change the first threshold of the definite time overcurrent element 50/51 within CLP dur-
ing a 0.1 s time interval:
• the ICLP> Mode parameter must be set as ON-Change setting,
• the tCLP> parameter must be adjusted to a wanted value (0.1 s) inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \
Phase overcurrent - 50/51 \ I> Element \ Setpoints menu,
• The threshold within CLP parameter ICLP>def must be adjusted to a wanted value inside the Set
\ Profile A(or B) \ Phase overcurrent - 50/51\ I> Element \ Definite time menu.
CB position can be acquired by means one or two binary inputs; allocation of 52a and 52b func-
tions is available inside the Set \ Board 1(2) inputs \ Binary input IN1-1...(IN1-x) menus.

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 263

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
— Cold Load Pickup - CLP for motor-generator protection
Preface
CLP feature allows selected thresholds to be changed or blocked for an adjustable time in order to
overcome transient overcurrents.
• If the CLP (Cold Load Pick-up) function is set for threshold blocking the selected element is blocked
for an adjustable time according the selected mode for the control of starting (starting from closure
of the circuit breaker or based on the IRUN threshold)[1].
• If the CLP (Cold Load Pick-up) function is set for setting changes the selected element is blocked
for an adjustable time according the selected mode for the control of starting (starting from closure
of the circuit breaker or based on the IRUN threshold)[1].
The operating mode, the CLP activation time and the threshold value within the CLP are available
inside the menu of the elements where the CLP function are available
At the end of the CLP count the threshold is unblocked if CLP is set to ON threshold block or the
threshold is revert back to the original value if CLP is set to ON threshold change.
Starting control
With IRUN setting of the CLP Source parameter and the highest value among the three phase cur-
rents is less than 0.1 IB, the protection is blocked or the threshold is changed depending on the setting
of parameters I2CLP> Mode, I2CLP>> Mode, DthCLP Mode, ICLP>Mode, ICLP>>Mode,
ICLP>>>Mode, IECLP>Mode, IECLP>>, Mode IECLP>>>Mode, IEDCLP>Mode,
IEDCLP>>Mode, IEDCLP>>>Mode, IEDCLP>>>>Mode.
With CB setting of the CLP Source parameter, and the CB is open, the protection is blocked or the
threshold is adjusted depending on the setting of these parameters.
The function requires information on the state of the Circuit Breaker that can be acquired through
logic inputs connected to the auxiliary contacts 52b and 52b.
When the closed CB condition is detected the CLP timer starts and within the counting the element
is blocked or switched to an higher adjusted value.
At the end of the CLP count the lock is removed or the threshold value is switched back to normal.
Note that when the circuit breaker is open, the threshold is already blocked if CLP is set to ON
threshold block or the threshold is already changed to the value if CLP is set to ON threshold change:
this is useful in order to avoid unwanted tripping due to unblocked threshold or threshold with his
original value for cases where a delay of the circuit breaker closing happen, i.e. where the three
poles of the CB do not close at the same time or during long CB closing time.
If CLP is enabled in blocking mode of one or more thresholds, the corresponding threshold is blocked
for an adjustable time, counted from closing of the CB.
If CLP is enabled in change setting of one or more thresholds, the corresponding threshold can be
changed to an adjustable time, counted from closing of the CB.
The CLP Source, parameter, available inside the Set \ Starting control set menu is common for the
A and B profiles.

Re-acceleration
In a re-acceleration phase a current value close to locked rotor is absorbed by the motor but with-
out the current has previously cleared or dropped below the IRUN = 0.1 IB value; in this condition,
the CLP function is inactive so unwanted trip may arise. If a binary input is assigned to the “Motor
restart” function and inside the “Starting control set” menu the reset of the timing of all the CLP
thresholds (MR Enable ON)[2] is enabled, the timer counting is restarted so that the thresholds are
changed or blocked for the time set in order to avoid unwanted tripping.
Operation and settings
For each threshold the CLP function may be disabled (OFF), enabled with threshold blocking (ON-
Element blocking) or enabled with threshold change (ON-Change setting) by means the xx-
CLPx Mode parameter.
The operating mode and the relative activation time concerning each threshold of the 46, 49,
50/51, 50N/51N and 67N/67N elements are adjustable inside the Set \ Profile A(or B)\ xxx - xx
\ xxx Element \ Setpoints menus.

Example: to change the first threshold of the definite time overcurrent element 50/51 within CLP dur-
ing a 0.1 s time interval:
• the ICLP> Mode parameter must be set as ON-Change setting,
• the tCLP> parameter must be adjusted to a wanted value (0.1 s) inside the Set \ Profile A(or B)\
Phase overcurrent - 50/51\ I> Element \ Setpoints menu,
• The threshold within CLP parameter ICLP>def must be adjusted to a wanted value inside the
Set \ Profile A(or B)\ Phase overcurrent - 50/51\ I> Element \ Definite time menu.

CB position can be acquired by means one or two binary inputs; allocation of 52a and 52b functions
is available inside the Set \ Board 1(2) inputs \ Binary input IN1-1...(IN2-x) menu.

Note 1 For generator protection the CB State mode must be used

Note 2 For generator protection the MR Enable parameter must be disabled (OFF)

264 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 Start Ixx
I xx

TRIPPING M ATRIX
(LED+REL AYS)
Input STEADY STATE THRESHOLD
t x x RES
Operate time
t x x RES
t xx
I C L P xx 0 T
T 0
TRANSIENT THRESHOLD RESET
Trip Ixx
A
A = ON - Change setting
B
tCLPxx C

A A
tCLPxx Output tCLPxx B B B = OFF
Starting control C C
T 0
A
B
C C = ON - Element blocking
A = ON - Change setting
B = OFF
C = ON - Element blocking ≥1 ≥1
xxCLP Mode

Block1, Block2

Starting control

I R UN = 0.1IB C L P source

CB-State S t ar t ing de t ec t ion

IL1...IL3
M a x[ IL1...IL3] ≥ IRUN
+UAUX

M R E nable
Motor restart Logic INx t ON INx t OFF
Rese t C L P t imer
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF &
-UAUX n.o. T 0 0
Binary input INx Motor restart

IRUN M a x [ IL1...IL3] ≥ IRUN M a x [ IL1...IL3] < IRUN M a x[ IL1...IL3] ≥ IRUN

S t ar t ing
con t r ol
CB State CB OPEN CB CLOSED CB OPEN CB CLOSED

t CLP 0.1 s t CLP

Output t CLP

Restart
t

HIGH THRESHOLD/ LOW THRESHOLD/ HIGH THRESHOLD/ LOW TH. HIGH THRESHOLD/ LOW TH.
BLOCK UNBLOCK BLOCK UNBLOCK BLOCK UNBLOCK

Cold Load Pickup typical logic diagram - CLP for NVA100X-G versions CLP-diagram-NVA100X-G.ai

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 265

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
— Summary of elements where second harmonic restraint and Cold Load Pickup functions may be enabled

Second harmonic restraint - 2ndh-REST

Cold Load Pickup - CLP
PROTECTIVE ELEMENTS
Negative sequence for Line-Transformer - 46M I2> Element g g
Negative sequence for Line-Transformer - 46M I2>> Element g g
Thermal image for Line-Transformer- 49LT DthAL1 Alarm Element g
Thermal image for Line-Transformer DthAL2 Alarm Element g
Thermal image for Line-Transformer - 49 Dth> Element g
Phase overcurrent side H - 50/51 I(H)> Element g g
Phase overcurrent side H - 50/51 I(H)>> Element g g
Phase overcurrent side H - 50/51 I(H)>>> Element g g
Phase overcurrent side L - 50/51 I(L)> Element g g
Phase overcurrent side L - 50/51 I(L)>> Element g g
Phase overcurrent side L - 50/51 I(H)>>> Element g g
Residual overcurrent - 50N.1/51N.1 IE1> Element g g
Residual overcurrent - 50N.1/51N.1 IE1>> Element g g
Residual overcurrent - 50N.1/51N.1 IE1>>> Element g g
Residual overcurrent - 50N.2/51N.2 IE2> Element g g
Residual overcurrent - 50N.2/51N.2 IE2>> Element g g
Residual overcurrent - 50N.2/51N.2 IE2>>> Element g g
Calculated residual overcurrent - 50N(Comp)/51N(Comp)/ IEC> Element g g
Calculated residual overcurrent - 50N(Comp)/51N(Comp)/ IEC>> Element g g
Calculated residual overcurrent - 50N(Comp)/51N(Comp)/ IEC>>> Element g g
Directional earh fault - 67N IED> Element g
Directional earh fault - 67N IED>> Element g
Directional earh fault - 67N IED>>> Element g
Directional earh fault - 67N IED>>>> Element g
Calculated directional earh fault - 67NC IEDC> Element g
Calculated directional earh fault - 67NC IEDC>> Element g
Calculated directional earh fault - 67NC IEDC>>> Element g
Calculated directional earh fault - 67NC IEDC>>> Element g

266 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
— CT supervision - 74CT
Preface
The CT monitoring function is employed to issue an alarm when secondary phase CTs side H and side
L and/or phase input of the relay failure are detected.
Interruptions are detected by means of a symmetry criterion of the IL1, IL2 , IL3 input currents.
The symmetry factor is calculated comparing the minimum and maximum of the fundamental compo-
nents of the three phase currents ILMIN(H) /ILMAX(H) and ILMIN(L) /ILMAX(L).

Operation and settings

The starting of the timer occurs if both the following conditions are filled:
A) ILMIN(H) /ILMAX(H) < S(H)< for CTs side H or IILMIN(L) /ILMAX(L) < S(L)< for CTs side L;
B) ILMAX(H) > I(H)* for CTs side H and ILMAX(L) > I(L)* for CTs side L
where
I (H)* and I(L)*: maximum phase current threshold
S(H)< and S(L)< : element pickup values
t S(H) < and t S(L) < : operate time
If both conditions are filled over the t S(H) < and t S(L) <adjustable time an alarm is issued.

I LMIN(H)
I LMIN(L) tgα=S(H)<
tgα=S(L)<

NO TRIP

TRIP

α
I (H) * I LMA X(H)
I (L ) * I LMA X(L)
Current asimmetry monitoring - 74CT

I L1 S< Trip S<

I L2
I LMIN
I L3 I LMIN
ts <

TRIPPING M ATRIX
I LMAX

(LED+REL AYS)
I LMIN /I LMAX < S<
t S< S<TR-K
&
I* T 0 S<TR-L
RESET
I LMAX Start I*
I LMAX >I*

Block1 input (ON≡Block)

S<BLK1 & BLK1 S<
&

Block1 Logic INx t ON INx t OFF

n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF Enable (ON≡Enable)
n.o. Block1
T 0 0 T
Binary input INx

CT monitoring logic diagram - 74CT Fun-74CT.ai

The output may be assigned to the selected S(H)<TR-K and S(L)<TR-K output relays inside the
Set \ CT supervision-74CT side H and Set \ CT supervision-74CT side L submenu; the same for ad-
dressing the LED indicators S(H)<TR-L and S(L)<TR-L.
Logical block (Block1)
If the S<-BLK1 parameter is set to ON, and a binary input is designed for logical block (Block1), the
CT supervision function is blocked off whenever the given input is active. The trip timer is held in re-
set condition, so the operate time counting starts when the input block goes down.[1] The S<-BLK1
parameter is available inside the Set \ CT supervision-74CT side H and Set \ CT supervision-74CT
side L submenu.
All the parameters are common for A and B Profiles.

Note 1 The exhaustive treatment of the logic block (Block 1) function may be found in the “Logic Block” paragraph inside CONTROL AND MONITORING
section

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 267

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
— VT supervision - 74VT
Preface
The protection is available in all versions.
The VT monitoring function is employed to issue an alarm when secondary phase VTs and/or phase in-
put failure are detected; typical faults are internal faults, fuse failure, fault on the interconnecting wires
or MCB tripping. The function gives an alarm indication and change automatically all the protection
elements (27, 67 e 67N) that can output misoperations when a voltage failure is detected.
The following VTs anomalies are detected:
• Loss of one or two phase voltages
• Loss of all three phase voltages
• No voltage detected upon energisation.
• Loss of one or two phase voltages
This fault is detected when a negative sequence voltage without presence of negative sequence
current is detected. When the negative sequence voltage exceeds the adjustable threshold (U 2VT>)
and the negative sequence current is lower than an adjustable threshold (I 2VT>), an output relay
and/or LED can be activated.
The negative sequence current is calculated according the following:
I 2 = (I⃗L1+e-j120°⃗
I L2+e+j120°⃗
I L3)/3
Similarly the negative sequence voltage is calculated according the following:
U 2 = (U⃗ L1+e-j120°U⃗ L2+e+j120°U⃗ L3)/3,
where e-j120° = -1/2 - j√3/2 e e+j120° = -1/2 + j√3/2
• Loss of all three phase voltages
If a collapse of the three phase voltage without a corresponding change on the phase current is
detected a VT failure is detected.
When all three voltages drop down the adjustable threshold (UVT<) and the present value of three
phase currents (IL1(k), IL2(k), IL3(k)) and the same currents one cycle previously (IL1(k-1), IL2(k-1), IL3(k-1))
don’t move away from an adjustable threshold (ΔIVT<), an output relay and/or LED can be activated.
• No voltage detected upon energisation
The lack of three phase voltage after line energisation is detected if the circuit breaker is closed and
all the three phase voltages (UL1, UL2, UL3) are lower than an adjustable threshold (UVT<) and all the
three phase currents (IL1, IL2, IL3) are lower than an adjustable threshold (IVT>); the latter must be
adjusted to a value higher than the current at energisation and lower than the short circuit current.
When any of the previous condition is detected, the 74VT function issues a blocking command or
switches to non directional the 67 and 67N protective elements; after an adjustable delay (t VT-AL) an
output alarm is activated.
The MCB state can be acquired by means a binary input; the binary input must be programmed for MCB
VT OPEN inside the Set \ Board 1(2) inputs \ Binary input IN1-1...(IN1-x) menus. and the Logic param-
eters (ON/OFF) must be programmed in the same way of the related circuit connected with-it.
When the MCB opens the 74VT function is activated.

LINE

VTs
UAUX
Pro_N
MCB
MCB VT OPEN
BINARY INPUT
MCB VT OPEN

to PRO_N voltage inputs

Monitoraggio TV - acquisizione stato interruttore automatico MCB-VT.ai

Logical block (Block1)

If the 74VT-BLK1 parameter (74VT logical block) is set to ON, and a binary input is designed for
logical block (Block1), the VT supervision function is blocked off whenever the given input is active.
The trip timer is held in reset condition, so the operate time counting starts when the input block
goes down.[1] The enabling parameter are available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ VT supervision-
74VT menu, while the Block1 function must be assigned to the selected binary input inside the Set
\ Inputs \ Binary input IN1-1 (INx-x) menus.
All the parameters, common for Profile A and Profile B are available inside the Set \ Profile A(or B) \
VT supervision-74VT menu.
After a trip of the 74VT function, when fault goes OFF and at least one phase voltage is higher than
the adjustable threshold (U VT<), a self reset is performed if the 74VT-AR parameter is ON inside
the Set \ Profile A(or B) \ VT supervision -74VT menu. The other way round, ( 74VT-AR parameter is
OFF), a manual reset must be activated (Front key or ThySetter).
A reset command can be send by means a binary input also; the Reset LEDs function must be as-
signed to the selected binary input inside the Set \ Board 1(2) inputs \ Binary input IN1-1...(IN1-x)
menus.
Note 1 The exhaustive treatment of the logic block (Block 1) function may be found in the “Logic Block” paragraph inside CONTROL AND MONITORING
section

268 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 The block output can be enabled or disabled; the 74VT-BK-EN parameter is available inside the Set
\ Profile A(or B) \ VT supervision - 74VT menu.
The alarm output goes ON after an adjustable delay (t VT-AL>); it may be assigned to the selected
74VT-AL-K output relays inside the Set \ Profile A (or B) \ VT supervision - 74VT menu; the same for
addressing the LED indicators 74VT-AL-L.

U 2VT>
ON≡Enable 74VT
U2 74VT Enable
U 2 ≥ U 2VT>

I 2VT>

I2 &
I 2 ≥ I 2VT>

U VT< Alarm 74VT

Max(U L1...U L3)

≤ U VT< & A
S D B t VT-AL
Q & ≥1 S
C E
R
& Q t VT-AL 74VT-AL-K
Min(U L1...U L3) ≥1 &

TRIPPING M ATRIX
& R F G 0 T 74VT-AL-L

(LED+REL AYS)
≥ U VT<
RESET
%I VT<
|I L1(k)-I L1(k-1)|
74VT-BK-K
≤ %I VT< H &
74VT-BK-L
|I L2(k)-I L2(k-1)|
&
≤ %I VT<
|I L3(k)-I L3(k-1)|
I VT>
≤ %I VT<
Max(I L1...I L3)
&
“1”z CB CLOSED ≥ I VT>
CB closed Block 74VT
BLOCK 27/67/67N
(ON=1≡Autoreset enabled)
Self-reset 74VT
(ON=1≡Reset key)
Reset key
(ON=1≡remote reset)
Reset LEDs ≥1

Reset ThySetter
(Remote interface reset)
Remote Reset
“1”z CB TV open
MCB VT open

Block1 input (ON≡Block)

Block1
&

Block1 Logic INx t ON INx t OFF

n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF Enable (ON≡Enable)
n.o. BLK1 74VT
T 0 0 T
Binary input INx

74VT Block out

A Activates 74VT if one or two phase voltages are lost in the absence of negative sequence current (to discriminate asymmetrics hort circuits).
B Activates 74VT if all phase voltages are lost with loaded generator.

C Activates 74VT if all phase voltages are lost during commissioning of the line voltage (TV not connected), checking that no of the three currents exceeds I VT >.
In order to avoid trigger at the closure on polyphase short-circuit, I VT > should be set to a value less than I CC (but higher than the max inrush current).
In any case, the circuit breaker must be closed, otherwise the 74VT function is activated with standing generator.

D Inhibits the 74VT activation of the polyphase short-circuitss, setting the flip-flop when impulsive variation of currentin at least one phase change arises.
Inhibition resets automatically when all three phase voltages goes above threshold and negative sequence voltage goes below the threshold.

E The activation of the 74VT is maintained when at least one of conditions A, B, C is true.
The reset function can be performed manually (as long as the conditions are verified in the automatic reset D) or automatically if user defined.

F The 74VT activation can occur only for circuit breaker opening to protect the VTs secondary circuit.

G The 74VT activation can be inhibited by a 74VT block command applied to a binary input.
H The 74VT activation is always detected. If the user can also be set the voltage-dependent protection blocking.
VT supervision logic diagram - 74VT Fun_74VT.ai

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 269

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
— Trip circuit supervision - 74TCS
Preface
The protection is available in all versions.
The trip circuit can be monitored to signal possible anomalies that would lead to the missing opening
of circuit breaker when trip and/or operator command are issued.
Circuit interruption as well as missing of auxiliary voltage and/or coil faults are detected.
Supervision with one or two binary inputs can be select; depending on association of binary inputs,
the corresponding logic is automatically selected.
For this purpose the TCS1 and TCS2 (if two binary input are used) matching must be assigned
to the selected binary inputs inside the Set \ Inputs \ Binary input IN1-1 and Set \ Inputs \ Binary
input INx-x menus.
When a binary input is programmed for the TCS function, the IN1 tON, INx tON, IN1 tOFF and
INx tOFF time delays must be reset to zero and the Logic parameter must be set to Active-ON
inside the Set \ Board 1(2) inputs \ Binary input IN1-1...(IN1-x) menus.

Operation and settings

The 74TCS element may be enabled or disabled; to enable it, the 74TCS Enable parameter must be
set to ON inside the Set \ Profile A(B) \ Trip circuit supervision-74TCS submenu.

A logic block can be set from une binary input.[1]

If the 74TCS-BLK1 parameter is set to ON, and a binary input is designed for logical block (Block1),
the TCS supervision function is blocked off whenever the given input is active. The trip timer is held
in reset condition, so the operate time counting starts when the input block goes down. The 74TCS-
BLK1 parameter is available inside the Set \ Profile A(B) \ Trip circuit supervision-74TCS submenu.

All the parameters can be set separately for Profile A and Profile B.

Two inputs supervision

With two binary input all malfunctions are detected (inclusive of mechanics faults).
The binary inputs are connected to the trip and to the 52b contacts.
The CB auxiliary voltage must be 36 V at least (twice the minimum threshold for every binary input).

+UAUX
Pro-N
TCS1

Binary input IN1 Towards 74TCS logic

TRIP

TCS2

Binary input IN2 Towards 74TCS logic

52
52a 52b

-UAUX
Trip circuit supervision with two binary inputs - 74TCS TCS2s.ai

The faulty condition is detected occurs if both the following conditions are filled:
A) The TRIP contact is closed (external protection relay tripped);
B) The circuit breaker is closed (52a closed and 52b open).

Because such conditions can arise with healthy circuit too (e.g. a trip command is issued by the
protection relay but the CB opening time is still in progress), to avoid untimely operations the previ-
ous condition are checked every 80 ms and the output is issued after a 2 s delay; outputs are reset
to zero if at least the A or B condition become false after 0.6 s delay.[2]

Note 1 The exhaustive treatment of the logic block (Block 1) function may be found in the “Logic Block” paragraph inside CONTROL AND MONITORING
section
Note 2 Following assumption are considered for the framework:
Logic: ON,
Timers tON and tOFF: reset to zero
TRIP contact of the protection: DE-energized, No latched

270 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 TCS1 Logic INx t ON INx t OFF
Start 74TCS
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF
n.o. T 0 0 TT
Start 74TCS 74TCS-ST-K

TRIPPING M ATRIX
Binary input INx

(LED+REL AYS)
74TCS-ST-L
&
TCS2 Logic INx t ON INx t OFF
n.c. INx t ON 2s 0.6 s 74TCS-TR-K
INx t OFF &
n.o. T 0 0 T 74TCS-TR-L
T 0 0 TT
RESET
Binary input INx
Trip 74TCS
Trip 74TCS
Enable (ON≡Enable)
74TCS Enable
Start 74TCS
Enable (ON≡Enable) &
74TCS-BLK1 Trip 74TCS & BLK1 74TCS
&

Block1 Logic INx t ON INx t OFF

n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF Block1 input (ON≡Block)
n.o. Block1
T 0 0 TT
Binary input INx

Logic diagram concerning the trip circuit supervision with two binary inputs - 74TCS Fun-74TCS2.ai

One input supervision

By means of the right sizing of a resistor, the trip circuit supervision may be performed even with
lower control voltage (e.g. when the control voltage is less than 36 V required for driving of two
binary inputs, typically UAUX = 24V).
The binary input is connected to the trip and an external resistor must be connected the 52b auxiliary
contact.
The fault condition of the trip circuit is detected by binary input power down.
With healthy circuit and TRIP contact closed, the binary input is feed across the 52a path (CB closed)
or across the resistor R and 52b path (CB open).
When the TRIP contact turns ON, the binary input becomes short-circuited; to avoid untimely opera-
tions the previous condition are checked every 80 ms and the output is issued after a 40 s delay in
order to allow the fault clearing and the consequent reset of the TRIP protection.
Outputs are reset to zero after 6 s from the TRIP contact open.[1]

+UAUX

Pro-N
TCS1
TRIP
Binary input INx Towards 74TCS logic

R
52
52a 52b

-UAUX
Trip circuit supervision with one binary inputs - 74TCS TCS1.ai

Note 1 The trip contact (TRIP) of the protection relays must be set with automatic reset (No-latched operating mode).

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 271

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 Start 74TCS

TCS1 Logic INx t ON INx t OFF Start 74TCS 74TCS-ST-K

TRIPPING M ATRIX
(LED+REL AYS)
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF 74TCS-ST-L
n.o. T 0 0 T
Binary input INx
40 s 6s 74TCS-TR-K
Enable (ON≡Enable) &
T 0 0 T 74TCS-TR-L
74TCS Enable
RESET
Trip 74TCS
Trip 74TCS

Start 74TCS
Enable (ON≡Enable) &
74TCS-BLK1 Trip 74TCS & BLK1 74TCS
&

Block1 Logic INx t ON INx t OFF

n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF Block1 input (ON≡Block)
n.o. Block1
T 0 0 T
Binary input INx

Logic diagram concerning the trip circuit supervision with one binary inputs - 74TCS Fun-74TCS1.ai

How to calculate resistor

Both the following conditions must be filled:
1) The circuit breaker coil must no be powered when the CB is open and an open command is is-
sued;
2) The binary input is energized when the trip contact open.

1) If the circuit breaker is just open an unnecessary excitation must be avoided; the most critical
event arises when the TRIP contact is closed (e.g. manual or test command), so with minimal
series resistance. To avoid an unwanted excitation the series resistance must be higher than a
minimum value defined as:
Rmin = R TC · (UAUX - U TCmin) / U TCmin
where:
U TCmin: minimum coil excitation voltage
UAUX : auxiliary voltage
R TC : coil resistance
2) To energize the binary input circuit when the TRIP contact and CB open, the series resistance
must be lowerer than a maximum value defined as:
Rmax = [(UAUX - UDIGmin) / IDIG] - R TC
where:
UDIGmin: minimum binary input excitation voltage (18 V)
UAUX : auxiliary voltage
R TC : coil resistance
IDIG: binary input excitation current (0.003 A)

To satisfy the above requirements, the R value must be chosen between the Rmin and Rmax values;
typically the normalized value nearest the arithmetic mean:
R = (Rmin + Rmax) / 2

The power dissipated by the R resistor is:

P R = R · I 2 = R · [UAUX / (R + R TC)] 2

Example
UAUX = 110 Vcc (auxiliary voltage)
P TC = 50 W (coil power)
R TC = UAUX 2 / P TC = 242 Ω (coil resistance)
U TCmin = 77 V (minimum coil excitation voltage = 70% UAUX )
UDIGmin = 18 V (minimum binary input excitation voltage)
IDIG = 0.003 A (binary input excitation current)

Rmin = R TC · (UAUX - U TCmin) / U TCmin = 242 · (110 - 77) / 77 = 103.7 Ω

Rmax = [(UAUX - UDIGmin) / IDIG] - R TC = [(110 - 18) / 0.003] - 242 = 30425 Ω

R = (Rmin + Rmax) / 2 = (103.7 + 30425) / 2 = 15264 Ω ~ 15 k Ω

P R (Power dissipated by the R resistor) = UAUX 2 /R = 110 2 / 15000 = 0.8 W[1]

Note1 In order to limit the temperature of the resistor it should be oversized (at least double the power - 2 W)

272 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
— Circuit breaker supervision
Preface
Several diagnostic metering and monitoring function are available:
• By means 52a and 52b auxiliary contacts, the CB position is acquired. Depending on such information
the Open and/or Close commands can be safely issued by user.
• An adjustable threshold can be set for a wear estimate of the breaker contacts; the current values
(ΣI or ΣI2) are summed and compared to a user-adjustable threshold. When the threshold or the
number of operations is exceeded the relay can activate an output relay. The function helps to
adjust maintenance planning.
• By means 52a and 52b auxiliary contacts, the opening time is calculated and compared to a user-ad-
justable threshold. If the threshold is exceeded the relay can activate an output relay.

Opening transition Towards CB diagnostic

CB monitoring
+UAUX
52a Logic INx t O N INx t O F F 52a ON/OFF
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF
n.o. T 0 0 T

TRIPPING M ATRIX
Binary input INx
52

(LED)
52a 52b t break

t break
52b Logic INx t O N INx t O F F =1
T 0
n.c. INx t ON INx t OFF
n.o. T 0 0 T
Binary input INx 52b ON/OFF
-UAUX
Logic diagram concerning the circuit breaker diagnostic function Fun-CB-position.ai

Operation and settings

According to the conventional contact position
• 52a is the auxiliary contact that is in the same position as the circuit breaker, (52a open = CB
open),
• 52b is the auxiliary contact that is in the opposite position as the circuit breaker, (52a open = CB
closed).
To acquire the CB position, the 52a and 52b function must be set inside the Set \ Board 1(2) inputs \
Binary input IN1-1...(IN1-x) menus. The IN1 tON, IN2 tON, IN1 tOFF and IN2 tOFF time delays
must be reset to zero and the Logic parameter must be set to Active-ON inside the Set \ Board 1(2)
inputs \ Binary input IN1-1...(IN1-x) menus.

CIRCUIT BREAKER COMMANDS

Two output relays can be set to command CB opening and closing; the CBopen-K and CBclose-K
function must be set inside the Set \ Circuit breaker supervision \ LEDs-relays allocation menu; the
CB position can be visualized by means two LEDs (CBopen-L and CBclosed-L parameters).
All the parameters are common for Profile A and Profile B.

CIRCUIT BREAKER DIAGNOSTIC

Four different criteria can be select.
1) Number of CB trip mode (ModeN.Open ON). When the number of operations (N.Open) is ex-
ceeded, an output relay and/or LED can be activated.
2) Cumulative CB currents mode (ModeSumI ON). When the per-phase value exceeds the thresh-
old, an output relay and/or LED can be activated.
3) Cumulative CB I2t mode (ModeSumI^2t ON). The tripping energy I2t is calculated on the base of
current measure at the time of the open command on the base of the circuit breaker opening time
provided for I2t calculation (tbreak). When the per-phase value exceeds the threshold, an output
relay and/or LED can be activated.
4) CB operating time mode (Mode-tOpen ON). The time interval between the trip command and the
CB open acquisition is calculated on the base of a programmable relay (Ktrig-break). When the
time interval (tbreak>) is exceeded, an output relay and/or LED can be activated.
The four criteria can be contemporaneously or separately set.
All the parameters are available inside the Set \ Circuit Breaker supervision \ CB Diagnostic menu.

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 273

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 State N.Open

TRIPPING M ATRIX
Mode- N .Open

(LED+REL AYS)
N .Open
N.Open-K
&
From CB position Opening transition N.Open-L
≥

CB Diagnostic - Number of trips

State SumI
Mode-SumI

TRIPPING M ATRIX
IL1

(LED+REL AYS)
¥I SumI
SumI-K
IL2 &
¥I Max SumI-L
From CB position Opening transition Max ≥ Sum I
IL3
¥I
SumIL1

SumIL2

SumIL3

CB Diagnostic - Cumulative tripping currents

State SumI^2t

TRIPPING M ATRIX
IL1 Mode-SumI^2t

(LED+REL AYS)
¥ I2t Sum I^2t
SumI^2t-K
IL2 &
¥I2t Max SumI^2t-L
From CB position Opening transition Max ≥ Sum I^2t
IL3
¥I2t

SumIL1^2t

SumIL2^2t

SumIL3^2t

CB Diagnostic - Cumulative tripping energy I2t

TRIPPING M ATRIX

Mode-tOpen
(LED+REL AYS)

State tbreak
Ktrig-break t break
tbreak-K
&
tbreak-L
≥
From CB position Opening transition

CB Diagnostic - CB operating time Fun-CB-diagnostic.ai

274 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
— Virtual I/O
Preface
By ThySetter and ThyVisor software tools the type of operation and links between outputs (Virtual
Output - VOUT1 ... 16) and virtual inputs (Virtual Inputs - VIN1 ... VIN32) may be defined using RPC or
IEC 61850 communication protocols over Ethernet network.
The system allows:[1]
• Availability of sixteen inputs and thirty-two outputs independently programmable by the user
• Simplify wiring using one channel as the Ethernet
• Eliminate the need to install communication devices and / or external conversion
• Significantly reduce costs
• Dynamically change from sw connections and associated functions.

Pro-N & Pro-NX Pro-N & Pro-NX

PROTECTION RELAY freely customizable connections PROTECTION RELAY

IN1 IN1

IN2 IN2

IN3 IN3

IN... IN...

IN32 IN32

OUT1 OUT1

OUT2 OUT2

OUT... OUT...

OUT16 OUT16

Applications
With Pro-N and Pro-XX relay the virtual I / O can be usefully employed for:
• Transmit information between protections installed in significant distance where the traditional
connections are critical in terms of reliability.
• Making OR logic for opening control of multiple DDI (simultaneous control of all DDI operated by
each SPI) in cases of multiple interface protections (Smart Grids)
• Achieve accelerated logic discrimination in which some protection elements can be blocked by the
activation of the downstream protection start; this allows to reduce the clearing time that, in time
logic systems require trip time significantly long in correspondence of the power source.
• Circuit breaker commands
• Selection of setting profiles
• Remote trip
• Include I / O in the programmable logic (PLC)
• etc. ..

Virtual Outputs:
The t V , t F-IPh and t F-IE timers start when the virtual output becomes active; when the counters expire
the virtual outputs are forced OFF; if the t V , t F-IPh and t F-IE timers are cleared the virtual output fol-
lows the state of the input (Start, Trip, IN).
The setting ranges are:
Start dropout time for voltage protections (t V ) 0.00...30.00 s (step 0.01 s)
Start dropout time for phase protections (t F -IPh ) 0.00...30.00 s (step 0.01 s)
Start dropout time for ground protections (t F -IE ) 0.00...30.00 s (step 0.01 s)
Trip reset (t Trip) 0.00...30.00 s (step 0.01 s)
All the parameters are available inside the Set \ Virtual Outputs \ Settings menu.

Virtual Inputs:
LinkLoss timer 3.0...60.0 s (step 0.1 s)
When the Virtual input is set for Remote Trip function, in the event of a network crash, when the
counters expire the remote trip is forced.
The parameter is available inside the Set \ Virtual Inputs \ Settings menu.

Note 1 For a detailed description please refer to the application notes

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 275

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 Each Virtual input may be matched to one of the following functions:
Virtual inputs
FUNCTIONS VIN1 VIN1 VIN1 VIN1 VINx VINx VINx VINx VIN32 VIN32 VIN32 VIN32
Fun A Fun B Fun C -K Fun A Fun B Fun C -K Fun A Fun B Fun C -K
Reset LEDs g g g
Set profile (switching setting A and B) g g g
Fault trigger (fault recording) g g g
Block2 IPh/IE (phase and/or ground elements) g g g
Block2 IPh (phase elements) g g g
Block2 IE (ground elements) g g g
Block1 (logic block) g g g
TCS1 (Trip Circuit Supervision) g g g
TCS2 (Trip Circuit Supervision) g g g
Trip ProtExt (trip from external relays) g g g
Reset counters g g g
Reset CB Monitor g g g
52a (CB auxiliary contact) g g g
52b (CB auxiliary contact) g g g
Open CB g g g
Close CB g g g
Preset DTheta (thermal image preset) g g g
Remote trip g g g
MCB VT OPEN (MCB auxiliary contact or fuse) g g g
Reset on demand measures g g g
Reset energy measures g g g
74VT ext. (74VT from external relays) g g g
I(L)>Bk (Block1 threshold I> side L) g g g
I(L)>>Bk (Block1 threshold I>> side L) g g g
I(L)>>>Bk (Block1 threshold I>>> side L) g g g
I(H)>Bk (Block1 threshold I> side H) g g g
I(H)>>Bk (Block1 threshold I>> side H) g g g
I(H)>>>Bk (Block1 threshold I>>> side H) g g g
IE1>Bk (Block1 threshold IE1>) g g g
IE1>>Bk (Block1 threshold IE1>>) g g g
IE1>>>Bk (Block1 threshold IE1>>>) g g g
IE2>Bk (Block1 threshold IE2>) g g g
IE2>>Bk (Block1 threshold IE2>>) g g g
IE2>>>Bk (Block1 threshold IE2>>>) g g g
IEC>Bk (Block1 threshold IEC>) g g g
IEC>>Bk (Block1 threshold IEC>>) g g g
IEC>>>Bk (Block1 threshold IEC>>>) g g g
IED>Bk (Block1 threshold IED> ) g g g
IED>>Bk (Block1 threshold IED>>) g g g
IED>>>Bk (Block1 threshold IED>>>) g g g
IED>>>>Bk (Block1 threshold IED>>>>) g g g
IEDC>Bk (Block1 threshold IEDC> ) g g g
IEDC>>Bk (Block1 threshold IEDC>>) g g g
IEDC>>>Bk (Block1 threshold IEDC>>>) g g g
IEDC>>>>Bk (Block1 threshold IEDC>>>>) g g g
Speed control g g g
Reset N/T start g g g
Motor restart g g g
Reset P-RMT g g g
Reset T-RMT g g g
KC1-1 g g g
KC1-2 g g g
KC1-3 g g g
KC1-x g g g
KC1-8 g g g
KC2-1 g g g
KC2-2 g g g
KC2-3 g g g
KC2-x g g g
KC2-8 g g g

276 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 Each Virtual output may be matched to one of the following functions:

Virtual outputs VOUT1 Virtual outputs VOUT2...16

FUNCTIONS Start Start Trip Trip Input Input Start Start Trip Trip Input Input
(A) (B) (A) (B) Mask1 Mask2 (A) (B) (A) (B) Mask1 Mask2
U<ST g g
U1<ST g g
UE>>ST g g
U2>ST g g
DthAL1 g g
DthAL2 g g
I(L)>ST g g
I(L)>>ST g g
I(L)>>>ST g g
I(H)>ST g g
I(H)>>ST g g
I(H)>>>ST g g
Id>ST g g
Id>>ST g g
IE1>ST g g
IE1>>ST g g
IE1>>>ST g g
IE2>ST g g
IE2>>ST g g
IE2>>>ST g g
IEC>ST g g
IEC>>ST g g
IEC>>>ST g g
IED>ST g g
IED>>ST g g
IED>>>ST g g
IED>>>>ST g g
IEDC>ST g g
IEDC>>ST g g
IEDC>>>ST g g
IEDC>>>>ST g g
TEST_START g g
U<TR g g
U<<TR g g
U1<TR g g
I(L)>TR g g
I(L)>>TR g g
I(H)>TR g g
I(H)>>TR g g
IE1>TR g g
IE1>>TR g g
IE2>TR g g
IE2>>TR g g
Id>TR g g
Id>>TR g g
IEC>TR g g
IEC>>TR g g
U>TR g g
U>>TR g g
UE>TR g g
UE>>TR g g
U2>TR g g
IED>>TR g g
IED>>>TR g g
IEDC>>TR g g
IEDC>>>TR g g
f>TR g g
f>>TR g g
f<TR g g
f<<TR g g

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 277

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 Each Virtual output may be matched to one of the following functions:

Virtual outputs VOUT1 Virtual outputs VOUT2...16

FUNCTIONS Start Start Trip Trip Input Input Start Start Trip Trip Input Input
(A) (B) (A) (B) Mask1 Mask2 (A) (B) (A) (B) Mask1 Mask2
74TCS-TR g g
BF-TR g g
TEST_TRIP g g
IN1 g g
IN2 g g
IN3 g g
IN4 g g
IN5 g g
IN6 g g
IN7 g g
IN8 g g
IN9 g g
IN10 g g
IN11 g g
IN12 g g
IN13 g g
IN14 g g
IN15 g g
IN16 g g
IN17 g g
IN18 g g
IN19 g g
IN20 g g
IN21 g g
IN22 g g
IN23 g g
IN24 g g
IN25 g g
IN26 g g
IN27 g g
IN28 g g
IN29 g g
IN30 g g
IN31 g g
IN32 g g

278 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
— Demand measures
Demand measures are calculated as:
Fixed demand
Fixed demand IL1FIX , IL2FIX , IL3FIX
Every fixed demand period t FIX an average magnitude is calculated based on samples taken every 1
second. Update is carried out at the end of the same period. The fixed demand measures may be reset
to zero by means the Reset on demand measures command (Thysetter Commands menu).
The tFIX parameter (Fixed demand period) is available inside the Set \ Demand measures menu.
Rolling demand
Rolling demand IL1ROL , IL2ROL , IL3ROL
The average magnitude is calculated inside a mobile window of N·T length where:
• N is the user-defined number of cycles and,
• T is the user-defined sub-period.
An average magnitude is calculated based on samples taken every 1 second; update is carried out
at the end of the every sub-period. The rolling demand measures may be reset to zero by means the
Reset on demand measures command (Thysetter Commands menu).
The tROL (Rolling demand period) and N.Rol (Number of cycles for rolling on demand) parameters are
available inside the Set \ Demand measures menu.
Peak demand
Peak demand IL1MAX , IL2MAX , IL3MAX
Every sub-period t ROL the maximum value of the average magnitude is calculated based on samples
taken every 1 second. Update is carried out at the end of the same period. The peak demand mea-
sures may be reset to zero by means the Reset on demand measures command (Thysetter Commands
menu).
The tROL (Rolling demand period) parameter is the same for rolling demand setting.
Minimum demand
Minimum demand IL1MIN, IL2MIN, IL3MIN
Every sub-period t ROL the minimum value of the average magnitude is calculated based on samples
taken every 1 second. Update is carried out at the end of the same period. The peak demand mea-
sures may be reset to zero by means the Reset on demand measures command (Thysetter Commands
menu).
The tROL (Rolling demand period) parameter is the same for rolling demand setting.
— Oscillography
Trigger Setup
Following parameters, available inside the Set \ Oscillography \ Trigger Setup menu, are user-pro-
grammable:
• Pre-trigger time and Post-trigger time.
Trigger

pre-trigger post-trigger Time

Oscillography trigger trigger.ai

• Element pickup trigger; the information recording starts when a state transition on any protec-
tive element occurs if the parameter is set to ON.
• Trigger from outputs; the information recording starts when a state transition on the selected
output relay occurs if the parameter is set (KC1-1...Kxy-z).
• Binary input trigger; the information recording starts when a state transition on the selected
binary input occurs if the parameter is set to ON.
• Trigger from inputs; the information recording starts when a state transition on the selected
binary input occurs if the parameter is set (IN1-1, INx-y).
• 80% Buffer alarm; when the 80% of the buffer space is reached an alarm may be issued if the
parameter is set to ON.
Set sampled channels
The desired sampled quantities may be select inside the Set \ Oscillography \ Set sampled channels
menu (i L1-H, i L2-H, i L3-H, i L1-L, i L2-L, i L3-L, i E1, i E2, u L1, u L2, u L3, u 12, u 23, u 31, u E, I L1cH , I L 2cH , I L 3cH , I L1cL ,
I L 2cL , I L 3cL , I SL1, I SL 2 , I SL 3 , I DL1, I DL 2 , I DL 3 ).
Set analog channels
The desired sampled quantities may be select inside the Set \ Oscillography \ Set analog channels
menu.
Everyone of twelve analog channel may be associated to one of the selected measures (f U12 , f U23 ,
f U31, IL1H, IL2H, IL3H, IL1L , IL2L , IL3L , IE1, IE2, UL1, UL2 , UL3 , U12 , U23 , U31, UE,UEC, DTheta, IECH, IECL, IESH,
IL1cL , IL2cL , IL3cL , IL1cH, IL2cH, IL3cH, ISL1, ISL2 , ISL3 , IDL1, ID2L1, ID5L1, IDL2 , ID2L2 , ID5L2 , IDL3 , ID2L3 , ID5L3 ,
PhiL1, PhiL2 , PhiL3 , PhiE , PhiEC, PhiE_C, PhiEC_C, I1, I2, I2/ I1, U1, U2,P, Q, S, CosPhi, P L1, P L 2 , P L 3 , Q L1,
Q L 2 , Q L 3 , CosPhiL1, CosPhiL2 , CosPhiL3 , I L1-2nd , I L 2-2nd , I L 3-2nd , I -2nd /I L , R L1, X L1, Z L1, Z 12 , Z 23 , Z 31,
T1...T8 ).
Set digital channels
The desired digital quantities may be select inside the Set \ Oscillography \ Set digital channels
menu.
Everyone of twelve digital channel may be associated to one of the selected I/O signal (KC1-1... KC1-
8, KC2-1...KC2-8, KS1-1... KS1-16, IN1-1... IN1-16, IN2-1... IN2-16) .
The output signals (Id>-L1 ST....SatDet ST) may be select inside the Set \ Oscillography \ Set digital
channels from 87G-87M-87T states menu (Binary 17...Binary 32.

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 279

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
 5 ME ASURES, L OGIC S TAT ES A ND COUNTERS
— Measures
Measure Parameter Symbol

Direct
Lock frequency fl
U 12 Phase-to-phase frequency f U12
U 23 Phase-to-phase frequency f U23
U 31 Phase-to-phase frequency f U31
RMS value of fundamental component for phase currents side H I L1H , I L 2H , I L 3H
RMS value of fundamental component for phase currents side L I L1L , I L 2L , I L 3L
RMS value for phase currents side L I L1L...3Lrms
RMS value of fundamental component for phase voltages U L1, U L 2 , U L 3
RMS value of fundamental component for residual current side 1 I E1
RMS value of fundamental component for residual current side 2 I E2
RMS value of fundamental component for residual voltage UE
Calculated
Compensated currents side H I L1cH , I L 2cH , I L 3cH
Compensated currents side L I L1cL , I L 2cL , I L 3cL
Stabilization currents I SL1, I SL 2 , I SL 3
Differential currents I DL1, I DL 2 , I DL 3
Second harmonic of differential currents I DL1-2nd, I DL2-2nd, I DL3-2nd
Fifth harmonic of differential currents I DL1-5th, I DL2-5th, I DL3-5th
Thermal image DTheta
Phase-to-phase voltages U 12 , U 23 , U 31
Calculated residual voltage U EC
Calculated residual current side H and side L I ECH , I ECL
Maximum current between I L1L-I L2L-I L3L I LmaxL
Minimum current between I L1L-I L2L-I L3L I LminL
Average current between I L1L-I L2L-I L3L I LL
RMS maximum current between IL1Lrms-IL2Lrms-IL3Lrms I LmaxL-rms
RMS minimum current between IL1Lrms-IL2Lrms-IL3Lrms I LminL-rms
RMS average current between IL1Lrms-IL2Lrms-IL3Lrms I LL-rms
Maximum voltage between U L1-U L2-U L3 U Lmax
Minimum voltage between U L1-U L2-U L3 U Lmin
Average voltage between U L1-U L2-U L3 UL
Maximum voltage between U 12-U 23-U 31 U max
Minimum voltage between U 12-U 23-U 31 U min
Average voltage between U 12-U 23-U 31 U
Displacement
Displacement angle of IL1 respect to UL1 PhiL1
Displacement angle of IL2 respect to UL2 PhiL2
Displacement angle of IL3 respect to UL3 PhiL3
Displacement angle of UE respect to IE PhiE
Displacement angle of UEC respect to IE PhiEC
Displacement angle of UE respect to IEC PhiE-IEC(L/H)
Displacement angle of UEC respect to IEC PhiEC-IEC(L/H)
Sequence
Positive sequence current side L I1
Negative sequence current side L I2
Negative sequence current/positive sequence current ratio side L I2/I1
Positive sequence voltage U1
Negative sequence voltage U2

280 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

 Measure Parameter Symbol

Power
Total active power P
Total reactive power Q
Total apparent power S
Power factor CosPhi
Phase active power side L P L1, P L 2 , P L 3
Phase reactive power side L Q L1, Q L 2 , Q L 3
Phase L1 power factor side L CosPhiL1
Phase L2 power factor side L CosPhiL2
Phase L3 power factor side L CosPhiL3
Impedance
Impedance resistive component L1 side L RL1
Impedance reactive component L1 side L XL1
L1 phase impedance side L ZL1
Impedance side L Z12, Z23, Z31
Harmonics
Phase currents second harmonic I L1L-2nd, I L2L-2nd,I L3L-2nd
Maximum of the second harmonic phase currents/Fundamental
I -2nd /I L
component percentage ratio
Third harmonic of phase currents I L1L-3rd , I L2L-3rd ,I L3L-3rd
Third harmonic of residual current I E1-3rd
Third harmonic of residual voltage U E-3rd
Fourth harmonic phase currents I L1L-4th , I L2L-4th ,I L3L-4th
Fifth harmonic phase currents I L1L-5th , I L2L-5th ,I L3L-5th
Motor starts
Starts number N Start
Total start time TStart
Demand phase
Phase fixed currents demand side L I L1...3FIX
Phase rolling currents demand side L I L1...3ROL
Phase maximum currents demand side L I L1...3MA X
Phase minimum currents demand side L I L1...3MIN
Active power fixed demand side L P FIX
Reactive power fixed demand side L Q FIX
Active power rolling demand side L P ROL
Reactive power rolling demand side L Q ROL
Active power maximum demand side L P MA X
Reactive power maximum demand side L Q MA X
Active power minimum demand side L P MIN
Reactive power minimum demand side L Q MIN
Energy
Positive active energy side L EA+
Negative active energy side L EA-
Total active energy side L EA
Positive reactive energy side L EQ+
Negative reactive energy side L EQ-
Total reactive energy side L EQ
Temperature
Temperature Pt1...Pt8 T1...T8
Motor state
Running motor time P-RMT
Total running motor time T-RMT
IRUN start state Start-IRUN

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 281

— Protection states
For each protection threshold, the following data are available:
• Start ON/OFF
• Trip ON/OFF
• Logic block (Block1) ON/OFF
• Selective block (Block2) ON/OFF
• Cold Load Pickup ON/OFF

— Delayed inputs
The binary input states, acquired downstream the delay timers are available:
• IN1-1 ON/OFF
• IN1-2 ON/OFF
• INx-x ON/OFF

— Internal states
The state of the functions assigned to binary inputs are available
Reset LEDs ON/OFF
Profile selection ON/OFF
Fault trigger ON/OFF
IE /IPh Block2 ON/OFF
IPh Block2 ON/OFF
IE Block2 ON/OFF
Logic block side H-L and 87GMT ON/OFF
Logic block side H ON/OFF
Logic block side L ON/OFF
Blocco logico 87GMT ON/OFF
TCS1 (Trip Circuit Supervision) ON/OFF
TCS2 (Trip Circuit Supervision) ON/OFF
Trip External protections ON/OFF
Reset partial counters ON/OFF
Reset CB Monitor data ON/OFF
52a ON/OFF
52b ON/OFF
Open CB ON/OFF
CloseCB ON/OFF
Init DTheta (Thermal image presetting) ON/OFF
Remote trip ON/OFF
MCB VT OPEN ON/OFF
MCB VT2 OPEN) ON/OFF
Reset on demand measures ON/OFF
Reset energy measures ON/OFF
74VT ext. ON/OFF
Block I(L)> (Logic block side L, active with virtual I/O) BlockI(L)> ON/OFF
Block I(L)>> (Logic block side L, active with virtual I/O) BlockI(L)>> ON/OFF
Block I(L)>>> (Logic block side L, active with virtual I/O) BlockI(L)>>> ON/OFF
Block I(H)> (Logic block side H, active with virtual I/O) BlockI(H)> ON/OFF
Block I(H)>> (Logic block side H, active with virtual I/O) BlockI(H)>> ON/OFF
Block I(H)>>> (Logic block side H, active with virtual I/O) BlockI(H)>>> ON/OFF
Block IE1> (Logic block side 1, active with virtual I/O) BlockIE1> ON/OFF
Block IE1>> (Logic block side 1, active with virtual I/O) BlockIE1>> ON/OFF
Block IE1>>> (Logic block side 1, active with virtual I/O) BlockIE1>>> ON/OFF
Block IE2> (Logic block side 2, active with virtual I/O) BlockIE2> ON/OFF
Block IE2>> (Logic block side 2, active with virtual I/O) BlockIE2>> ON/OFF
Block IE2>>>(Logic block side 2, active with virtual I/O) BlockIE2>>> ON/OFF
IEC>Bk (Logic block IEC>, active with virtual I/O) BlockIEC> ON/OFF
IEC>>Bk ((Logic block IEC>, active with virtual I/O) BlockIEC>> ON/OFF
IEC>>>Bk (Logic block IEC>>>, active with virtual I/O) BlockIEC>>> ON/OFF
IED>Bk (Logic block IED>, active with virtual I/O) BlockIED> ON/OFF
IED>>Bk (Logic block IED>, active with virtual I/O) BlockIED>> ON/OFF
IED>>>Bk (Logic block IED>, active with virtual I/O) BlockIED>>> ON/OFF
Speed control ON/OFF
Reset N/T starts (reset timer counter motor start) ON/OFF
Motor re-acceleration ON/OFF
Reset running motor time (Partial) ON/OFF
Reset running motor time (Total) ON/OFF

282 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

— Relays
• KC1-2 Diagnostic OK/NOT OK
• KS1-1 State ON/OFF
• KS1-2 Diagnostic OK/NOT OK
• ...
• KS1-16 State ON/OFF
• KS1-16 Diagnostic OK/NOT OK
— Counters
For every element two set of counters are available (Partial counters and Total counters); the partial
counters can be cleared by the user level, while the Total counter reset can be achieved with pass-
word (Session Level 1).
Every partial counter is reset to zero when ten thousand count is passed.
All partial counters can be cleared by means a single command; for this purpose the Reset partial
counters command must be issued (Commands \ Reset submenu).:
• 21 Counters
• 27 Counters
• 27V1 Counters
• 32P Counters
• 37 Counters
• 37P Counters
• 40 Counters
• 46G Counters
• 46M Counters
• 47 Counters
• 49MG Counters
• 50/51 side H Counters
• 50/51 side L Counters
• 51LR(48)/14 Counters
• 51V Counters
• 50N.1/51N.1 Counters
• 50N.2/51N.2 Counters
• 50N(Comp)/51N(Comp) Counters
• 55 Counters
• 59 Counters
• 59N Counters
• 59V2 Counters
• 66 Counters
• 67N Counters
• 67N(Comp) Counters
• 81O Counters
• 81U Counters
• 87G-87M-87T Counters
• 2ndh-REST Counters
• 74TCS Counters
• CB Counters
• 74VT Counters
• 74CT side H Counters
• 74CT side L Counters
• BF Counters
Partial counters
• xx Start partial counter (xx = I>, I>>,...) 0...9999
• xx Trip partial counter (xx = I>, I>>,...) 0...9999
• xx Block1 partial counter (xx = I>, I>>,...) 0...9999
• xx Block2 partial counter (xx = I>, I>>,...) 0...9999
Total counters
• xx Start total counter (xx = I>, I>>,...) 0...9999
• xx Trip total counter (xx = I>, I>>,...) 0...9999
• xx Block1 total counter (xx = I>, I>>,...) 0...9999
• xx Block2 total counter (xx = I>, I>>,...) 0...9999
— Self test
Proper management (programming and remote monitoring) of the self-diagnosis function ensures
the fast detection of most of the protection system failures and significantly reduces the need for
periodic testing.
Following anomalies (MINOR) are not relevant (the protective elements continue to work):
• Oscillography run-time OK/NOT OK
• Data Bus minor OK/NOT OK
• Protection I/O assigned run-time minor OK/NOT OK
• PLC I/O not-matching run-time minor OK/NOT OK
Lower level diagnostic (MINOR) can be output or ignored; for this purpose the MINOR Fail alarm
parameter can be set ON or OFF inside the Set \ Self test relay submenu.
All remaining anomalies disables all protective functions[1]
The self test information are:
• Protection and controls ON SERVICE/OUT OF SERVICE
Note 1 The relays are being switched in rest position (ON if set with Energized logic - OFF if set with De-energized logic)

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 283

MEASURES, LOGIC STATES AND COUNTERS
 • System diagnostic OK/NOT OK
• Device diagnostic OK/NOT OK
• Program diagnostic OK/NOT OK
• Data-base boot OK/NOT OK
• Data-base runtime OK/NOT OK
• DSP boot OK/NOT OK
• DSP run-time OK/NOT OK
• Memory boot OK/NOT OK
• Memory run-time OK/NOT OK
• Data Bus heavy OK/NOT OK
• PLC boot OK/NOT OK
• PLC run-time OK/NOT OK
• Protection I/O assigned verify startup OK/NOT OK
• Protection I/O assigned verify run-time major OK/NOT OK
• Total protection I/O assigned not-matching 0
• Protection I/O assigned not-matching
• PLC I/O assigned not-matching OK/NOT OK
• PLC I/O assigned not-matching run-time major OK/NOT OK
• Total PLC I/O assigned not-matching 0
• PLC I/O assigned not-matching
When a higher level anomaly is recognized all protective functions are disabled and the output relays
switch in no-trip state:
• rest state if the output relay are set in De-energized mode (contacts as shown in the diagrams)
• active state if the output relay are set in Energized mode (opposite to what is shown in the dia-
grams).
The connections of the trip and diagnostic relays must be performed according to the application:
when the output relay must be normally energized and the circuit breaker must be open in case of
failure of the protection system, the self-test function must be enabled and assigned to the normally
energized relay selected for tripping.
The diagnostic alarms can be allocated to an output relay; for this purpose the Self-test relay pa-
rameter can be set inside the Set \ Self-test Relay submenu.
— Pilot wire diagnostic
Detailed diagnostic information about the pilot wire are available.
(Read \ Pilot wire diagnostic).
• BLIN1 pilot wire breaking diagnostic state ON/OFF
• Pilot wire BLIN1 shorted ON/OFF
— Selective Block - BLOCK2
The input and output state concerning the selective block are available (Read \ Selective block-
BLOCK2).
Block2 input
• Phase protections input selective block state BLK2IN-Iph ON/OFF
• Ground protections input selective block state BLK2IN-IE ON/OFF
• tB-Iph/IE Elapsed state tB timeout ON/OFF
Block2 output
• Starting state of phase protections enabled
for external selective block on output ST-Iph-BLK2 ON/OFF
• Starting state of ground protections enabled
for external selective block on output ST-IE-BLK2 ON/OFF
• Phase protections output
selective block state BLK2-OUT-Iph ON/OFF
• Ground protections
output selective block state BLK2-OUT-IE ON/OFF
• Phase and ground protections
• output selective block state BLK2-OUT-Iph/IE ON/OFF
— Fault recording - SFR
Recording is triggered by one or more causes (up to 8 simultaneous):
Fault counter
Date and time
Fault cause
Maximum current between IL1Lrms-IL2Lrms-IL3Lrms I LmaxL-rms-r
Phase RMS currents side L I L1Lr, I L 2Lr, I L 3Lr
Phase RMS currents side H I L1Hr, I L 2Hr, I L 3Hr
Phase voltages U L1r, U L 2r, U L 3r
Phase-to-phase voltages U 12r, U 23r, U 31r
Residual current side 1 I E1r
Calculated residual current side L I ECLr
Residual current side 2 I E2r
Calculated residual current side H I ECHr
Stabilization current side H I ESHr
Residual voltage U Er

284 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

MEASURES, LOGIC STATES AND COUNTERS
 Calculated residual voltage U ECr
Displacement angle of I L1(L) respect to U L1 PhiL1Lr
Displacement angle of I L 2(L) respect to U L 2 PhiL2Lr
Displacement angle of I L 3(L) respect to U L 3 PhiL3Lr
Displacement angle of U E respect to I E2 PhiEr
Displacement angle of U EC respect to I E2 PhiECr
Displacement angle of U E respect to I ECL /I ECH PhiE-IEC(L/H)r
Displacement angle of U EC respect to I ECL /I ECH PhiEC-IEC(L/H)r
Differential phase currents I DL1r, I DL 2r, I DL 3r
Stabilization phase currents I SL1r, I SL 2r, I SL 3r
Negative sequence current I 2r
Positive sequence voltage U 1r
Negative sequence voltage U 2r
Thermal image DTheta-r
Total active power Pr
Total reactive power Qr
Power factor CosPhi r
Resistive component of the L1 phase impedance RL1r
Reactive component of the L1 phase impedance XL1r
Minimum impedance Zminr
Number of starts N Start-r
Real-time of starts TStart-r
Input frequency U 12 f U12r
Input frequency U 23 f U23r
Input frequency U 31 f U31r
Inputs IN1-1...IN1-16, IN2-1...IN2-16
Outputs KC1-1... KC1-8, KC2-1...KC2-8
Fault info
— Event recording - SER
Recording is triggered by one or more causes:
• Start and/or trip of any enabled protection or control element
• Binary input activation (OFF-ON or ON-OFF transition)
• Power-on or power-down (Auxiliary power supply)
• Setting change.
Three hundred events are recorded into a circular FIFO (First In, First Out) buffer.[2][1]
Following information are stored in every record:
• Event counter[2]
• Date and time
• Event cause (binary input/element trip/setting change)
— Oscillography - DFR
Upon programmable trigger, the fault records are recorded in COMTRADE format; the sampled mea-
sures (24 sample per cycle) are stored in a circular shift memory buffer.
The fault record are self-triggered; they are stored in sequential order up the allocated memory is
used up after which the oldest memory is overwritten. An operating procedure example for the digi-
tal fault recording is illustrated inside the ThySetter section.
Following parameters are user-programmable:
• Pre-trigger and post-trigger time
• Selected sampled quantities.
• Analog channels (Analog 1...Analog 16) allocation.
• Digital channels (Binary 1...Binary 16) allocation (output relay KC1-1...KC2-8 and/or binary inputs
IN1-1...IN2-16).
• Digital channels (Binary 17...Binary 32) allocation for 87T state ((Id>-L1 ST....SatDet ST).
• Trigger setup; the information storage starts when a state transition on the selected signal occurs.
(protective element start and/or trip, output relay and/or binary input switching).
• Alarm: when the 80% of the buffer space is reached an alarm may be issued. The system being of
linear type, the records are back-to-back recorded to the end of available memory; the alarm out-
put is a warning in order that the user may download data[3] to clear memory for new records

Trigger

pre-trigger post-trigger Time

Note 1 Event 0 is the newest event, while the Event 299 is the oldest event
Note 2 Counter is updated at any new record; it may be cleared by means ThySetter
Note 3 Data are stored into non-volatile memory; they are retained once power is turned off

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 285

MEASURES, LOGIC STATES AND COUNTERS
 COMTRADE
Records are recorded in COMTRADE format; (Common Format for Transient Data); This is a standard
for the data exchange for various types of tests or simulation datas, etc, for power system applica-
tions. The measurements are recorded in ASCII or BINARY format. COMTRADE files always come
by pairs:
• The “.CFG”-file describing the configuration: number of analog and digital channels, sampling rate,
scale factors, etc.
• The “.DAT”-file containing the data
The COMTRADE is part of IEC 60255-24 standard.
The recording can be analyzed by mean of ThySetter sw or any other standard compliant viewer.
Sample channels
Side H phase currents i L1H , iL 2H , i L 3H
Side L phase currents i L1L , i L 2L , i L 3L
Phase voltages u L1, u L 2 , u L 3
Phase-to-phase voltages u 12 , u 23 , u 31
Side 1 residual current i E1
Side 2 residual current i E2
Residual voltage uE
Side H compensated currents i L1cH , i L 2cH , i L 3cH
Side L compensated currents i L1cL , i L 2cL , i L 3cL
Stabilization currents i SL1, i SL 2 , i SL 3
Differential currents i DL1, i DL 2 , i DL 3
Analog channels
Frequency U 12 f U12
Frequency U 23 f U23
Frequency U 31 f U31
Side H RMS value of fundamental of phase currents I L1H , I L 2H , I L 3H
Side L RMS value of fundamental of phase currents I L1L , I L 2L , I L 3L
RMS value of fundamental of phase voltages U L1, U L 2 , U L 3
Side 1 RMS value of fundamental of residual current I E1
Side 2 RMS value of fundamental of residual current I E2
RMS value of fundamental of residual voltage UE
Side H compensated currents I L1cH , I L 2cH , I L 3cH
Side L compensated currents I L1cL , I L 2cL , I L 3cL
Stabilization currents I SL1, I SL 2 , I SL 3
Differential currents I DL1, I DL 2 , I DL 3
Second harmonic of differential currents I D2L1, I D2L2, I D2L3
Fifth harmonic of differential currents I D5L1, I D5L2, I D5L3
Thermal image DTheta
Phase voltages U L1, U L 2 , U L 3
Phase-to-phase voltages U 12 , U 23 , U 31
Calculated residual voltage U EC
Side H and side L Calculated residual currents I ECH , I ECL
Side H stabilization currents I ESH
I L1(L) to U L1 displacement PhiL1
I L 2(L) to U L 2 displacement PhiL2
I L 3(L) to U L 3 displacement PhiL3
U E to I E2 displacement PhiE
U EC to I E2 displacement PhiEC
U E to I ECL /I ECH displacement PhiE-C
U EC to I ECL /I ECH displacement PhiEC-C
Side L positive and negative sequence I 1, I 2
Positive / negative sequence current ratio I2/I1
Positive sequence voltage U1
Negative sequence voltage U2
Total active power P
Total reactive power Q
Total apparent power S
Power factor CosPhi
Side L active power P L1, P L 2 , P L 3
Side L reactive power Q L1, Q L 2 , Q L 3
Side L, L1 power factor CosPhiL1
Side L, L2 power factor CosPhiL2

286 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

MEASURES, LOGIC STATES AND COUNTERS
 Side L, L3 power factor CosPhiL3
Side L resistive component of phase impedance L1 RL1
Side L reactive component of phase impedance L1 XL1
Side L phase impedance L1 ZL1
Side L Impedance Z12, Z23, Z31
Side L second harmonic of phase currents I L1L...3L-2nd
Ratio of max 2nd harmonic of phase currents/comp. fond. side L I -2nd /I L
Temperature T1...T8
The record quantity is depending on settings of following parameters:
• Pre-trigger and post-trigger times
• Number of allocated channels.
By means of the following formula the record quantity may be evaluated:

12000 50 (Hz)
N = int ·
(34 + 20 v i + 4 v RMS + nB)· (tpre + tpost )(s) f (Hz)
where:
•N record quantity
• vi sampled measures
• v RMS analog measures (RMS)
• nB logic variables (2 up to 16 variables)
• tpre pre-trigger time interval
• tpost post-trigger time interval
•f frequency

Example 1
With the following setting:
• Pre-trigger: 0.25 s
• Post-trigger: 0.25 s
• Sampled measures: i L1H, i L2H, i L3H, i L1L, i L2L, i L3L, i dL1, i dL2 , i dL3 , i E1, i E2
• Analog measures: I L1H , I L2H , I L3H , I L1L , I L2L , I L3L , I dL1, I dL2 , I dL3 , I E1, I E2
• Logic variables: KC1-1, KC1-2, KC1-3, KC1-4, KC1-5, KC1-6, IN1-1, IN1-2

up to 80 record can be stored if f = 50 Hz, since

12000 50 (Hz)
N = int · = 80
(34 + 20 · 11 + 4 · 11 + 2) · (0.25 + 0.25) 50 (Hz)

Example 2
With following setting:

• Pre-trigger: 0.5 s
• Post-trigger: 0.5 s
• Sampled data: i L1H, i L2H, i L3H, i L1L, i L2L, i L3L, i dL1, i dL2 , i dL3 , i E1, i E2
• Analog channels: I L1H , I L2H , I L3H , I L1L , I L2L , I L3L , I dL1, I dL2 , I dL3 , I E1, I E2
• Digital channels: KC1-1, KC1-2, KC1-3, KC1-4, KC1-5, KC1-6, IN1-1, IN1-2

up to 33 records can be stored if f = 60 Hz, since

12000 50 (Hz)
N = int · = 33
(34 + 20 · 11 + 4 · 11 + 2) · (0.50 + 0.50) 60 (Hz)

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 287

MEASURES, LOGIC STATES AND COUNTERS
 6 INS TA L L AT ION
6.1 PACKAGING
Packaging consists of a paperboard packaging guaranteeing adequate protection for transport and
storage under normal environmental conditions.
The Pro-NX protection relays must be stored within the required temperature limits; the relative
humidity should not cause condensation or formation of frost.
It is recommended that the devices are stored in their packaging; in the case of long storage, espe-
cially in extreme climatic conditions.
It is recommended that the packaging not be disposed of into the environment, but kept in case the
relay should be moved at some later time

6.2 MOUNTING
The Pro-NX protection relays are housed inside metal cases suitable for various kinds of assembly:
• Flush mounting
• Rack
Flush mounting
The fixed case, fitted with special fastening brackets, is mounted on the front of electric control
board, previously drilled as indicated in the drawing.
In case of side-by-side mounting of several relays the minimum drilling distance is determined by
the front dimensions indicated in the overall dimensions drawing, increased by 3 mm, to ensure an
adequate tolerance and gasket space between adjacent relays.
The depth dimension, as indicated in the drawing, must be increased by as much as needed to allow
room for the wiring.

FRONT VIEW REAR VIEW

215
252 207
189

In 5A 1A 5A U En 100V

IN2D IN1C OC2F OC1E

I En 1A 1A 5A Un 100V
UAUX 110-230 Vac/dc

NVA100-DX#MM00
177

164.4
177

156

N.4 holes ø 4.2

SIDE VIEW FLUSH MOUNTING CUTOUT

210 ±0.3
189
225 20 94.5
158.0 ±0.3
164.4

N.4 holes ø 4.2

Flush mounting (CTs-VTs inputs example)

288 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

INSTALLATION
 • Remove the two vertical frames for access the holes for the fixing screws; the frames are snapped

• Insert the device into the slot.

• Fit the device to the panel with four screws.

• Replace the vertical frames

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 289

INSTALLATION
 Rack mounting
For mounting inside a standardized 19-inch system (EIA 310-D, IEC 60297 and DIN 41494 SC48D), the
MAR adapter is required (available on request).

482.6
465
177 (4U)
101.6

Rack mounting Rack-mount.ai

290 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

INSTALLATION
6.3 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
Electrical connections should be made by referring to the connection diagram; in cases where cer-
tain of the circuits (communication, block, or others) are not used, the relevant connections must
remain open. Examples of connection diagrams are reported on Appendix to this manual.

Devices must be installed by qualified personnel only.

CAUTION No liability is accepted from Thytronic due to improper use.

For the A1...A8, B1...B10 and C1...C8 screw terminals with following characteristics are available:
• Nominal cross section: 0.2 a 4 mm2 (AWG 24...10) for single conductor
0.2 a 1.5 mm2 for two conductors with same cross section
• Tightening torque: 0.5-0.6 Nm
• Stripping length: 7 mm

For the IN1C-1...16, IN2D-1...16, OC1E-1...16 and OC2F-1...16 connections, screw terminals with fol-
lowing characteristics are available:
• Nominal cross section: 0.14 a 2.5 mm2 (AWG 26...16) for single conductor
0.14 a 0.75 mm2 for two conductors with same cross section
• Tightening torque: 0.5-0.6 Nm
• Stripping length: 8 mm

For the X1...X6 (RS485 and blocks) connections, screw terminals with following characteristics are
available:
• Nominal cross section: 0.2 a 2.5 mm2 (AWG 24...12) for single conductor
0.2 a 1.5 mm2 for two conductors with same cross section
• Tightening torque: 0.5-0.6 Nm
• Stripping length: 10 mm

Optional modules
Ground connection screw

In 5A 1A 5A U En 100V

IN2D IN1C OC2F OC1E

I En 1A 1A 5A Un 100V
UAUX 110-230 Vac/dc

NVA100-DX#MM00

Auxiliary power supply

Voltage inputs

Side L mperometric inputs

Side H mperometric inputs

X1...X4 Block2 Output relays
binary inputs

Amperometric inputs
1/5 A CTs
The amperometric input circuits are mounted on the input module (terminals A1...8 for L side and
C1...8 for H side).
In case of replacement of the relay or checks on the amperometric circuits is essential to provide
appropriate support to achieve the secondary circuit shorting. For security reasons it is advisable to
operate in the absence of line current.

If the secondary of a CT carrying primary current is open circuited, a high voltage can be developed
CAUTION across the CT terminals.

When making the current connections, attention must be paid to not exceeding the performance of
the line current transformers. To be exact, the total load, the protective relay, any other protective
relays or measuring instruments and the resistance of the connections, must not exceed the line CT
performance.

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 291

INSTALLATION
 In particular, consumption of the relay input circuit must not exceed 0.2 VA while the load (expressed
in VA) constituted by the conductors is given by:

0.018 × L × In 2 / S
where:
L the overall length, expressed in m, of the two conductors in relation to each phase;
In nominal current of the line CT expressed in A;
S cross sectional area of the current conductors expressed in mm2.
It is recommended that cabling of a suitable thickness be used in order to limit wear of the CT sec-
ondary circuits.

Earth connection
A protective ground connection is required: the section of the cable shall be not less than 2.5 mm2.

Earth connection

In 5A 1A 5A U En 100V

IN2D IN1C OC2F OC1E

I En 1A 1A 5A Un 100V
UAUX 110-230 Vac/dc

NVA100-DX#MM00

≥ 2.5 mm2

292 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

INSTALLATION
 Core balanced CT
The current balance transformer, when used for measuring residual current, must be crossed in the
same direction by all active conductors and hence, also by the neutral conductor if distributed, with
the exception of the ground connection protective conductor. The drawing below shows cases of
assembly of the toroid on unscreened and screened cables; prior to proceeding with assembly, it is
necessary to check that there are no screen-to-ground connections upstream of the sensor..

Source Source

Insulated cables

Shielded cables

Armoring Armoring

Load Load
Fig. 1a Fig. 1b
Current balanced transformer Toroide.ai

In order to ensure a linear response from the sensor, the cables must be positioned in the centre
of the transformer so that the magnetic effect of the three cables is perfectly compensated in the
absence of residual current (Fig.2a).
Hence, the assembly indicated in the drawing of fig.2b, in which phase L3 causes local magnetic
saturation whereby the vectorial sum of the three currents would be non-null, should be avoided.
The same considerations also apply when the sensor is positioned near bends in the cabling.
It is recommended that the transformer be placed away from bends in the conductors (fig 2c).

L1 L1

L2 L3 L2 L3

Fig. 2a Fig. 2b Fig. 2c

Installazione toroide sommatore Toroide.ai

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 293

INSTALLATION
 Binary inputs
The input circuits are voltage-free; activation requires the application of a power source, preferably
the same auxiliary voltage present in the switchboard.
The inputs are dimensioned for a wide range of operation and does not require any hw and / or sw
programming.
AUX-IN external modules allow the thresholds setting for the binary inputs activation.
The digital inputs switching threshold can be set during installation so that the command voltage is
comparable to the supply voltage.

+UAUX

IN1C IN2D
A B 1
1
IN1-1 IN2-1
2
2
IN1-2 IN2-2

-UAUX 3 3
AUX-IN IN1-3 IN2-3

4 4
IN1 IN1-4 IN2-4
1 5 5
7 7
IN2 IN1-5 IN2-5
2
24 V
8 8
IN3 IN1-6 IN2-6
3
IN1
110 V 9 9
IN4 IN1-7 IN2-7
4
5 10 10
IN5

BINARY INPUTS

BINARY INPUTS
230 V IN1-8 IN2-8
7 6 6
11 11
IN6 IN1-9 IN2-9
8
12 12
IN7 IN1-10 IN2-10
9
13 13
IN8 IN1-11 IN2-11
10
6 14 14
IN9 IN1-12 IN2-12
11 15 15
17 17
IN10 IN1-13 IN2-13
12
18 18
IN11 IN1-14 IN2-14
13
19 19
IN12 IN1-15 IN2-15
14
15 20 20
IN13 IN1-16 IN2-16
17 16 16

IN14
18

IN15
19

IN16
20
16

Binary inputs

The inputs are immune to transitory interferences, however the following recommendation must be
considered in high disturbed environments:
• Position input wiring away from high energy sources.
• Set a debounce timer (tON and/or tOFF) to alloy the transient to decay.
• Use shielded cables with ground connection on only one end (preferably at the relay side.

294 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

INSTALLATION
 Output relays
The the base configuration includes 16 logic inputs (IN1-1. .. IN1-16) and 8 output relays (KC1-1. ..
KC1-8) and can be expanded with:
• One board (OC2F) with eight relays KC2-1...KC2-8 and one board (IN2D) with with sixteen binary
inputs (IN2-1...IN2-16)
• One board (OC2F) with eight relays KC2-1...KC2-8 and one board with a IRIG-B port
It is advisable to verify that the technical characteristic of the contacts be suitable for the applied
load (about current, nominal voltage, make and break current , etc..).
All contacts are shown in de-energized state for standard reference.

OC1E OC2F
1 1
KC1-1 3 KC2-1 3
2 2 IN2D IN1C OC2F OC1E
4 4
KC1-2 6 KC2-2 6
5 5
7 7
KC1-3 KC2-3
8 8
9 9
KC1-4 KC2-4
OUTPUT RELAYS

10
OUTPUT RELAYS

10
11 11
KC1-5 KC2-5
12 12
13 13
KC1-6 KC2-6
14 14
15 15
KC1-7 17 KC2-7 17
16 16
18 18
KC1-8 20 KC2-8 20
19 19

Output relays

IRIG-B
The following time synchronization methods are available:
• SNTP protocol (Simple Network Time Protocol) over Ethernet network
• IRIG-B (Inter-Range Instrumentation Group – Time Code Format B)

Local port
A cross cable must be employed.
When used the local port takes priority over the Ethernet port

RJ45

serial1-sch.ai

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 295

INSTALLATION
 Ethernet ports
Pro_NX relays are supplied with two Ethernet ports with TX (RJ45) or FX (fiber optic) connection, and
ModBus / TCP or IEC 61850 protocol.
The following options are available:
• TX + FX ports [1]
• TX + TX ports [1]
• FX + FX ports [1]
• FX + FX + RSTP [2]
Connections to TX ports (RJ45) must be made with shielded cable FTP Cat.5e category or higher.

NETWORK NETWORK NETWORK Ethernet

TX TX
TX connector (RJ45 copper)
FTP Cat.5e shielded cable

TX FX FX
RX
FX (optical fiber)
TX
3V3 3V3 3V3
LINK1 LINK1 LINK1
LINK2 LINK2 LINK2

1 1 1
2 2 2
3 3 3
4 4 4
5 5 5
6 6 6

x x x

In 5A 1A 5A UE 100V

IN2D IN1C OC2F OC1E

I E 1A 1A 5A Un 100V
UAUX 110-230 Vac/dc

NVA100-DX#MM00

ethernet-wiring.ai

For testing a PC may be directly connect to the NVA100X Ethernet port on the rear side.
With TX interface a cross cable must be employed, while an Ethernet-optical fiber converter, suit-
able for 100 Mb data rate must be employed if an FX port is implemented.
The link must be enabled by means ThySetter sw and local connection:
• Set the IP address (Host IP address e IP net mask) in order that the NVA100X and PC param-
eters are matched; the parameters are inside the Communication \ Ethernet submenu.
• Set to OFF the Autonegotiation parameter of device (Autonegotiation parameter inside Com-
munication \ Ethernet submenu).

Note 1 The TX (RJ45) and FX (fibra ottica) Ethernet port are multiplexed (single IP address)
Under normal conditions, the primary port is active, while the secondary port is activated in the event of failure of the primary port or by means
of hw-sw switching command
Note 2 Two simultaneously active Ethernet ports with RSTP protocol

296 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

INSTALLATION
 Any change of the Ethernet communication parameters become active only after an hw reset
RS485 port
RS485 communication circuit connections must be made using screened twisted pair cable observ-
ing the polarities; screening must only be connected to the end terminating at the RS485 interface
circuit pertaining to the monitoring unit.
It is recommended to terminate the line at the extremities of the same; this must be performed on the
RS485 line control unit and on the NA80 device placed at the furthest point connecting the specially
provided resistor; termination can be made by means a jumper between the F2-F3 terminals.
Termination resistors allow adjusting the impedance of the line, reducing the influence of the induc-
tive components of the same, which might compromise good communication.

NETWORK
TX

FX

3V3
LINK1
LINK2

1
2
3
4
RS485
B-
5
A+
6

NVA100X NVA100X

X5 X5 120 Ω
B- B-
RS485

RS485

A+ A+
X6 X6

SUPERVISION UNIT
ETH-1 ETH-1
ETHERNET

ETHERNET

RS485 B- ETH-2 ETH-2

120 Ω
A+

1 - DTR RS232 1 - DTR RS232

≅ 2 - GND ≅ 2 - GND
UAUX UAUX
3 - RX 3 - RX
4 - TX 4 - TX

RS485-wiring.ai

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 297

INSTALLATION
 Block circuits
Block circuits may be connected to equipment located in a different switchboard: For the aim of
reliability, it is recommended to use conductors having a cross sectional thickness of at least 1 mm2
and to not exceed 5 km in length. For connections that are particularly critical in terms of electro-
magnetic pollution, it is recommended to use BFO adaptor modules with fibre optic connection.

TRIP I>>
BLIN1
BLOUT1

BLIN1
TRIP I>> Block2 IPh TRIP I>>
BLIN1
BLOUT1

TRIP I>>
Any device

Logic selectivity with BFO Block-sch.ai

When devices without committed pilot wire circuits must be embedded (devices other than Pro-N
or Pro-NX), or in the event that further I/O circuits are need, output relays and binary inputs can be
customized to work in the logic selectivity system together with the committed pilot wire circuits.

TRIP I>>

S1
Uaux
Pro_NX
20
16 IN1-16

X X
BLOCK IN

3
BLOCK OUT

BLOUT-
1
4
BLOUT+ 2
BLIN1

S2 S3
BLOUT1

TRIP I>> TRIP I>> Pro_N

START I>>
BLOCK OUT

A15
BLOCK IN

BLOUT-
A17
BLOUT+ A16
A18

A19
BINARY INPUTS

A20
A21
A22

Block-misto.ai

Example for accelerated protection system with joint use of binary input and pilot wire links

298 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

INSTALLATION
6.4 RATED I N AND I EN SETTINGS
The values of the relay rated current can be set to 1 A or 5 A via ThySetter sw; parameters are avail-
able in the Set \ Base menu.

6.5 LED COMMISSIONING

Following indicator LEDs are available on the front panel:

• LED ON (green): if no diagnostic anomalies are detected, the green LED is turned ON while any
fault is highlighted by flashing.
• LED START (yellow) committed for start information of any protective functions.
• LED TRIP (red) committed for trip information of any protective functions LED 1...13 (red) are freely
assignable from the user to any protective and/or control functions.

Input board 1 LEDs

LED1-1...LED1-8
ON & Diagnostic
user-programmable
Start and Trip

MMI board LEDs

user-programmable

LEDs Label_LED

6.6 FINAL OPERATIONS

Before energizing the electric board, it is advisable to check that::
• The auxiliary voltage in the panel falls within the operative range of Pro_NX relays.
• The rated current (1 A or 5 A) of the line CT’s corresponds to the setting of Pro_NX relays.
• All wirings are correct.
• All screws are tightly screwed.

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 299

INSTALLATION
 7 PROGRAMMING AND SETTINGS
All relay programming and adjustment operations may be performed through
• MMI (keyboard and display)
• a Personal Computer with the aid of the ThySetter software

For safety reasons, a change of the rated values (Set \ Base menu) parameters become active
only after an hw reset.

WARNING

Note: The above parameters are highlighted in italics font inside the ThySetter menu

7.1 SW THYSETTER
The ThySetter sw is a “browser” of data (setting, measure, etc..); it implements an engine that is
afford to rebuild the menu set up and the relationships to data concerning all Thytronic protective
relays by means of XML files..
ThySetter setup
The latest release of ThySetter can be downloaded free of charge from the www.thytronic.it site
(Products - Software).[1]

— ThySetter use
Please refer to ThySetter user manual for detailed instructions.
The document is available on www.thytronic.it (Product / Software / ThySetter - Download area).
Note 1 Starting from the 3.5.9 release it is necessary to download and install not only the application setup but the Template setup also. In case off
updating download and install only the new release.

300 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

SETTING AND COMMISSIONING
7.2 MMI (MAN MACHINE INTERFACE)
On the front panel there are eight buttons which allow the user to perform all the settings, reading
and modification operations.[1]

Input 1 board LEDs

L1-1...L1-8 ON & Diagnostic
user programmable Start
Itrip

OPEN CB
CLOSE CB

MMI board LEDs

LEDs user programmable

The adjustment of the settings and the operation mode of the output relays must be performed while
the unit is electrically powered; the alphanumeric display shows the necessary information with ref-
erence to the operations performed through the keyboard. The display backlight switches automati-
cally to OFF after a one minute time-out. All preset values are permanently stored in the nonvolatile
memory. The buttons take the following operations:
- (Up) move the cursor upwards to the preceding menu options
- (Down) move the cursor downwards to the subsequent menu options
- (Left) move the cursor upwards to the preceding menu options
- (Right) move the cursor downwards to the subsequent menu options
- (Enter) access to the selected menu with the option of modifying any given parameter
- (Reset) abort the current changes and/or accessing the previous menu
- Circuit breaker Open command
- Circuit breaker Close command
At power-up, the display shows the text:
“THYTRONIC
PRO-NVA100X-DM00-a serial number
date and time: (01/01/2000 00:00”
The ON green Led points out the auxiliary power supply voltage (permanent) and possible diagnostic
faults (blink). The display backlight is automatically activated when any key switch is set.
By means of the (Up) or (Down) buttons, it is possible to cyclically browse through the menu op-
tions: READ, SET, COMMUNICATION, TEST
Having identified the sub-menu of interest, it is possible to gain access by using the (Right) button
and then analogously, run through the relevant options by using the (Up) or (Down) buttons.
The full menu tree and some examples are showed in the following pages (numerical values and
settings are pointed out as examples and does not agree with real situations).
— Reading variables (READ)
All data (measure, settings, parameters, etc...) can be displayed; they are arranged in functional
group submenus:
SELF TEST >>”
“SERIAL NUMBER >>”
“INFO >>”
“MEASURES >>”
“ACTIVE PROFILE >>”
“PROTECTIONS >>”
“VIN >>”
“VOUT >>”
“RPC >>”
“CIRCUIT BREAKER SUPERVISION >>”
“DELAYED INPUTS IN1-1...IN1-16 >>”
“INTERNAL STATES >>”
“RELAYS KC1-1...KC1-8 >>”
“PARTIAL COUNTERS >>”
“TOTAL COUNTERS >>”
“SELF-TEST >>”
“PILOT WIRE DIAGNOSTIC >>”
“SELECTIVE BLOCK BLOCK2 >>”
“INTERNAL ELECTIVE BLOCK BLOCK4 >>”
“FAULT RECORDING >>”
“EVENTS RECORDING >>”
Note 1 Setting changes are enabled when the Enabling setting by MMI parameter is set

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 301

SETTING AND COMMISSIONING
 The full structure of the menu is shown on the following pages.
— Setting modifying (SET)
All changes in the setting parameters are carried out through MMI only if the Enable setting by MMI
parameter is ON. (ENABLE SETTING BY MMI submenu inside the SET menu).
To effect a change, having identified the parameter intended for change, the following procedure
must be performed:
• Select the parameter going through the menus by means the , and keys.
• Press the (Enter) button for a few seconds; the modification in progress status is highlighted by
flashing of the START and TRIP LEDs and by appearance of the pointer on the bottom.
• Move the cursor over the parameter intended for change using the (Enter) button,
• Change the parameters by means the (increment) or (decrement) buttons,
• Press the (Enter) button to move the cursor over the last parameter in the display,
• Press the (Enter) button once again; the cursor and the LED TRIP turn off (the LED START keeps
flashing),
• Press the (Enter) button for a few seconds; new message appears: “Confirm settings?”
• Answer to the message ENTER: YES to confirm changes or RESET: NO to abort.
The end of the START LED blinking points out the end of procedure; the changes become right now
active.
The abort command may be used to abandon changes (prior to use of the ENTER: YES); the same
effect is achieved by removing the auxiliary power supply to the NA80 relay.

As example, to set the operating mode of the K1 output relay as ENERGIZED, LATCHED, the following
procedure must be issued:
• By means (Down) button select the Set menu “SET >>”,
• Press the (Right) button to enter; the following submenu title i displayed: “BASE >>”
• Scroll menus by means (Down) button
“TRANSFORMER >>”
“INPUT SEQUENCE >>”
“POLARITY >>”
“LINE >>”
“INPUTS IN1-1...IN1-16 >>”
“RELAYS KC1-1...KC1-8 >>”
“LEDs ON MMI >>”
“LEDs LED1-1...LED1-8 >>”
“SELF-TEST RELAY >>”
“MMI >>”
“START CONTROL >>”
“PROFILE SELECTION >>”
“PROFILE A >>”
“PROFILE B >>”
“CIRCUIT BREAKER SUPERVISION 52 >>”
“VT SUPERVISION 74VT >>”
“CT SUPERVISION 74CT SIDE H >>”
“CT SUPERVISION 74CT SIDE L >>”
“REMOTE TRIPPING >>”
“PILOT WIRE DIAGNOSTIC >>”
“DEMAND MEASURES >>”
• Select the Set menu “RELAYS KC1-1...KC1-8 >>”, the “K1 relay Setpoints >>”
message is displayed,
• Press the (Right) button to enter; the following messages are displayed:
“Logic DE-ENERGIZED Mode NO LATCHED”
• Press the (Enter) button for a few seconds; the modification in progress status is highlighted by
the both START and TRIP flashing.
• Move the cursor over the parameter intended for change using the (Enter) button, (in our case
on the message “Logic DE-ENERGIZED”,
• Change the parameters by means the (increment) or (decrement) buttons, “Logic ENER-
GIZED”,
• Press the (Enter) button to move the cursor over the last parameter in the display, “Mode NO
LATCHED”,
• Change the parameters by means the (increment) or (decrement) buttons, “Mode
LATCHED”,
• Press the (Enter) button once again; the cursor and the LED TRIP turn off (the LED START keeps
flashing),
• Press the (Enter) button for a few seconds; new message appears: “Confirm settings?”
• Answer to the message ENTER: YES to confirm changes or RESET: NO to abort.

302 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

SETTING AND COMMISSIONING
 The end of the LED blinking points out the end of procedure.
Answer to the message ENTER: YES to confirm changes or RESET: NO to abort.
The end of the LED blinking points out the end of procedure.
— TEST
The operational tests with command of the selected output relays may be activated.
By means of (Up) or (Down) buttons it is possible to browse the main menu till the “TEST”
message; to enter you must press the (Right) button.[1]
The display message “Test state: OFF” shows the test state (OFF or test in progress).
• Stop test
• Start test
• Test KC1-1
• Test KC1-2
• Test KC1-3
• Test K...
As example, to start the test of K1, the following procedure must be issued:
• Select the Start test menu “Start test >>”.
• Press the (Right) button to start; the test in progress status is highlighted by activation of all
LEDs,
• Come back by pressing the (Left) button and select the relay to be tested by means the or
buttons until the message “Test K1 >>” is displayed.
• Press the (Right) button to start the test.
• To terminate the test, it is necessary to select the “Stop test >>” message and press the
(Right) button to end the test. In any case the test will be automatically terminated after a delay of
one minute.

— COMMUNICATION
Inside the COMMUNICATION menu it is possible to read/modify the setting data of the RS485 Proto-
col parameters.
By means of (Up) or (Down) buttons it is possible to browse the main menu till the “RS485
Protocol >>” or “Ethernet parameters >>” message; to enter you must press the
(Right) button.
As example, to select the address 12 for the ModBus protocol, the following procedure must be
issued:
• Select the Communication menu “COMMUNICATION >>”.
• By means (Down) button select the “RS485 Protocol >>”.
• Press the (Right) button to enter; the following message is displayed:
“Protocol MODBUS”
“Address 1”
“9600 baud”
• Start the procedure to effect a change explained in the Setting modifying (SET) paragraph:
• Press the (Enter) button for a few seconds; the modification in progress status is highlighted by
the both START and TRIP flashing.
• Move the cursor over the parameter intended for change using the (Enter) button, (in the ex-
ample on the 1 address),
• Change the parameters by means the (increment) button (up to 12 address),
• Press the (Enter) button to move the cursor over the last parameter in the display,
• Press the (Enter) button once again; the cursor and the LED TRIP turn off (the LED START keeps
flashing),
• Press the (Enter) button for a few seconds; new message appears: “Confirm settings?”
• Answer to the message ENTER: YES to confirm changes or RESET: NO to abort.
The end of the LED blinking points out the end of procedure.

— Circuit breaker commands

By means of the (Open) and (Close) keys, the circuit breaker commands may be issued.
The committed output relays must be enabled inside the Circuit Breaker supervision \
LEDs-relays allocation menu.

Note 1 Instantly all the relays are switched in rest state, including relays programmed as “normally energized”

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 303

SETTING AND COMMISSIONING
— Enable / block changes via keyboard - Password

All parameters (measurements and settings) are available for reading from the operator panel (MMI),
while the setting changes are enabled or disabled depending on possible operation modes:
• Enable without password (factory setting)
• Enable with password
• Disabled
The choice of operation modes is possible only through ThySetter operating at the session level 1:
• Connect the PC serial port to the relay socket on the RJ10 front panel
• Run the ThySetter sw (the latest version latest version available on the site is recommended).
• Select the Preference - Session menu; when you start the session level is set to 0 as shown in
the bottom of the window
• Select the level 1. Prompted for a password (the default level1) to move to level 1. Confirm twice
with “OK”. (Level 1, as shown in the bottom of the window).
• Open the communication session by executing the menu command Communication - Open.
Verify that inside the modality box Serial and Automatic are selected
• Thysetter will search automatically the relay from the template, regardless of what is selected in
the device family.
• Inside the Serial Configuration panel select the COM port (eg COM1, COM4 etc), give the Start
command and wait for the opening of the new window
• Save the file. Choose the location to save the file and give the Save command. The configuration
data of the relay are transferred to the PC (the progress bar is displayed from 0 ... 100%). A folder
on a yellow background with the name of the file is highlighted on the left side of the windows.
The serial connection is operative, at the bottom of the screen the word ON-LINE is highlighted
in green field.

• Select the Set \ MMI folder (MMI stands for Man-Machine-Interface = keyboard). On the right side
of the window (first row) select Parameter setting enable; with a “click” on the column value 3
options are available:
- OFF = keyboard enabled only for reading
- By password = keyboard enabled for reading and setting by means of password
- ON = keyboard enabled for reading and setting without password

304 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

SETTING AND COMMISSIONING
 To modify any parameter the calibration session must be open by means of Start setting command
from the menu or directly by clicking on the icon placed on the top bar, the opening of the session
setting is highlighted by its Programming state:Open on yellow field on the bottom bar.

Operation with Password

If the By password mode is selected a new menu password is inserted at the top of the display
menu.
• Press the key the: password not ok >> message is displayed and any changes of pa-
rameters is disabled
• Press the key; you can enter the password page enter password where you are
prompted to enter the 4 characters password (the default password is 0000)
• Press the (Enter) button for a few seconds; the modification in progress status is highlighted by
flashing of the START and TRIP LEDs and by appearance of the pointer on the bottom
• Change the parameters by means the (increment) or (decrement) buttons, using the and
keys to move to the previous or next character
• Press the (Enter) button; the cursor and the LED TRIP turn off (the LED START keeps flashing),
• Press the (Enter) button for a few seconds; new message appears:
Confirm settings?
• Answer to the message ENTER: YES to confirm changes or RESET: NO to abort.
• The message: password ok >> is displayed
• To exit from password menu use or keys: if you press the button you go back in the
password menu and the password must be entered. The parameter changes are enabled from the
keyboard. After any confirming with (Enter) or abandoning the change (reset button) the password
must be entered again.
• The possibility of modifying the parameters from the keyboard is automatically disabled after about
3 minutes elapsed without pressing any button. If you do not want to wait three minutes of waiting,
it must go back to the password menu and come out without input any data ( and until the
the message password not ok >> is displayed.
Changing the password
Changing the password is possible only after entering the correct password (password ok
>> message); press the key, a new menu is displayed change password that you ac-
cess with the key. Inside this menu the password can be changed.
• Press the (Enter) button for a few seconds; the modification in progress status is highlighted by
flashing of the START and TRIP LEDs and by appearance of the pointer on the bottom
• Change the parameters by means the (increment) or (decrement) buttons, using the and
keys to move to the previous or next character
• Press the (Enter) button; the cursor and the LED TRIP turn off (the LED START keeps flashing),
• Press the (Enter) button for a few seconds; new message appears:
Confirm settings?
• Answer to the message ENTER: YES to confirm changes or RESET: NO to abort.
Lost password
If password is lost the data base of the device must be restored, proceed with the following steps:
• Activate the session level 1
• Send Set default settings command available inside the Command \ Default settings menu.
The command Set default settings restores the factory settings, all user- defined adjustments are cleared.
Be carefully to enter the correct parameter !
WARNING The device serial number should be set to avoid IP address conflicts for devices connected to the
Ethernet network.

Following the Set default settings command the password is reset to 0000.

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 305

SETTING AND COMMISSIONING
7.3 MENU TREE

THYTRONIC
fl 50.000 Hz ILmaxL-rms0.000 InL
PRO-NVA100X-DM00-a ILminL-rms0.000 InL
fU12 50.000 Hz
DATE: 01/01/2014 fU23 50.000 Hz ILL-rms 0.000 InL
TIME: 17:29:59 fU31 50.000 Hz ULmax 0.000 En
IL1L 0.000 InL ULmin 0.000 En
Enter Password IL2L 0.000 InL UL 0.000 Un
PASSWORD >> IL3L 0.000 InL U 0.000 Un
<< MMI board ON IL1rms 0.000 InL PhiL1 0 deg
SING1 board ON IL2rms 0.000 InL PhiL2 0 deg
MODULES >> SING2 board OFF IL3rms 0.000 InL PhiL3 0 deg IL2L-5th 0.000 In
SRC1 board ON IL1H 0.000 InH PhiE 0 deg IL3L-5th 0.000 In
DISABLE Disable ------------------ IL2H 0.000 InH PhiEC 0 deg Nstart 0
27-27V1-27V1 IL3H 0.000 InH PhiE-IEC 0 deg Tstart 0 s
21-27-37-81 37-37P PhiEC-IEC 0 deg
UL1 0.000 En IL1LFIX 0.000 InL
FUNCTIONS 81=-81U ? UL2 0.000 En I1 0.000 In IL2LFIX 0.000 InL
BY OPERATOR >> << No Yes >> UL3 0.000 En I2 0.000 In IL3LFIX 0.000 InL
IE1 0.000 IE1n I2/I1 0.000 In IL1LROL 0.000 InL
DAY: 11 HOUR: 14 IE2 0.000 IE2n U1 0.000 En IL2LROL 0.000 InL
MONTH: 7 MINUTE: 25 UE 0.000 UEn U2 0.000 En IL3LROL 0.000 InL
CLOCK ADJUST >> YEAR: 2013 SECONDS: 0 P 0.000 Pn
IL1cH 0.000 Inref IL1LMAX 0.000 InL
<< Confirm >> << Confirm >> IL1cL 0.000 Inref Q 0.000 Qn IL2LMAX 0.000 InL
ISL1 0.000 Inref S 0.000 An IL3LMAX 0.000 InL
Protection IDL1 0.000 Inref CosPhi 1.000 IL1LMIN 0.000 InL
ON SERVICE IDL1-2nd0.00 Inref PL1 0.000 Pn IL2LMIN 0.000 InL
Global self-test IDL1-5th0.00 Inref QL1 0.000 Qn IL3LMIN 0.000 InL
OK IL2cH 0.000 Inref CosPhiL1 1.000 IL1HFIX 0.000 InL
System OK IL2cL 0.000 Inref PL2 0.000 Pn IL2HFIX 0.000 InH
Data-base: ISL2 0.000 Inref QL2 0.000 Qn IL3HFIX 0.000 InH
SELF TEST >> boot OK IDL2 0.000 Inref CosPhiL2 1.000 IL1HROL 0.000 InH
run-time OK IDL2-2nd0.00 Inref PL3 0.000 Pn IL2HROL 0.000 InH
Data BUS: IDL2-5th0.00 Inref QL3 0.000 Qn IL3HROL 0.000 InH
heavy OK IL3cH 0.000 Inref CosPhiL3 1.000 IL1HMAX 0.000 InH
minor OK IL3cL 0.000 Inref RL1 1.000 Znf IL2HMAX 0.000 InH
DSP: ISL3 0.000 Inref XL1 1.000 Znf IL3HMAX 0.000 InH
.................. IDL3 0.000 Inref ZL1 1.000 Znf IL1HMIN 0.000 InH
IDL3-2nd0.00 Inref Z12 1.000 Znf IL2HMIN 0.000 InH
Serial number IDL3-5th0.00 Inref Z23 1.000 Znf IL3HMIN 0.000 InH
SERIAL NUMBER >> 237 U12 0.000 Un Z31 1.000 Znf PFIX 0.000 Pn
U23 0.000 Un IL1L-2nd 0.000 InL QFIX 0.000 Qn
Code NVA100X-DM00-a U31 0.000 Un IL2L-2nd 0.000 InL PROL 0.000 Pn
INFO >> Ver.sw 1.00 UEC 0.000 UECn IL3L-2nd 0.000 InL QROL 0.000 Qn
DSP fw Rel 1.00 IECL 0.000 InL I-2nd/IL 0.000 PMAX 0.000 Pn
IECH 0.000 InH IL1L-3rd 0.000 InL QMAX 0.000 Qn
Code NVA100X-DM00-a IESH 0.000 IE1n IL2L-3rd 0.000 InL PMIN 0.000 Pn
IEC61850 >> Sw Release 1.30 DTheta 0 DThetaB IL3L-3rd 0.000 InL QMIN 0.000 Qn
ILmaxL 0.000 InL IE-3rd 0.000 IEn EA+ 0 kWh
ILminL 0.000 InL UE-3rd 0.000 UEn EA- 0 kWh
ILL 0.000 InL IL1L-4th 0.000 InL EQ+ 0 kvarh
ILmaxH 0.000 InH IL2L-4th 0.000 InL EQ- 0 kvarh
ILminH 0.000 InH IL3L-4th 0.000 InL EA 0 kWh
ILH 0.000 InH IL1L-5th 0.000 In EQ 0 kvarh
MEASURES >>
P-RMT 0 min
MOTOR STATE >> T-RMT 0 min
Start IRun OFF

ACTIVE PROFILE >> Profile A

PROTECTIONS >> SEE NEXT PAGES

User SW name: xxx

Ver.:
DATE: 01/08/2007 LEDs reset OFF
READ
PLC state: OFF Prof. switch OFF
PLC >> Block1H-L-87GMT: OFF
PLC version: 01.40
Error: none Block1H: OFF
PLC State 1: 0 Block1L: OFF
Warning: none PLC State 2: 0 Block1 87GMT: OFF
PLC States >> PLC State x: 0 Block2 Generic OFF
.................. Block2 50 OFF
VIN01 Status OFF PLC State 32: 0 Block2 50N OFF
VIN01 Timeout ON Fault trig OFF
VIN02 Status OFF TCS1 OFF
VIN >> VIN02 Timeout ON TCS2 OFF
.................. Ext.trip BF OFF
Reset count. OFF
VIN032 Status OFF CB Monitor OFF
VIN032 Timeout ON Remote trip OFF
VOUT01: OFF
VOUT02: OFF 52a OFF
CLIENT01: OFF 52b OFF
VOUT >> VOUT03: OFF CLIENT02: OFF
.................. CB OPEN Cmd OFF
CLIENT03: OFF CB CLOSE Cmd OFF
VOUT16: OFF .................. Thermal image init
TCP >> CLIENT08: OFF OFF
MCB VT OPEN OFF
RPC >> MULTICAST >> CLIENT01: OFF Reset Demand OFF
CLIENT02: OFF Reset Energy OFF
SERVER >> CON. TCP: 0 CLIENT03: OFF
CON. MCAST: 0 74VT ext. OFF
.................. Block I> OFF
CLIENT08: OFF Block I>> OFF
Block I>>> OFF
State N.Open OFF Block IE1> OFF
CB-OPEN Cmd OFF State SumI OFF Block IE1>> OFF
CB-CLOSE Cmd OFF State SumI^2t OFF Block IE1>>> OFF
CIRCUIT BREAKER CB COMMANDS >> State tbreak OFF Block IE2> OFF
CB POSITION >> CB state ? SumIL1 0 In Block IE2>> OFF
SUPERVISION >>
CB DIAGNOSTIC >> SumIL2 0 In Block IE2>>> OFF
SumIL3 0 In Block IEC> OFF
Binary IN1-1 OFF SumIL1^2t 0 In^2s Block IEC>> OFF
Binary IN1-2 OFF SumIL2^2t 0 In^2s Block IEC>>> OFF
DELAYED INPUTS Binary IN1-3 OFF Block IED> OFF
IN1-1...IN1-16 >> SumIL3^2t 0 In^2s
.................. Block IED>> OFF
Binary IN1-16 OFF Block IED>>> OFF
Binary IN2-1 OFF Block IED>>>> OFF
Binary IN2-2 OFF Block IEDC> OFF
DELAYED INPUTS Binary IN2-3 OFF
IN2-1...IN2-16 >> Block IEDC>> OFF
.................. Block IEDC>>> OFF
Binary IN2-16 OFF Block IEDC>>>> OFF
Speed ctrl OFF
INTERNAL STATES Reset N/T St OFF
>> Motor reacc. OFF
Hours oper. OFF
Tot. Hours oper.OFF
PROCEED READ MENU’
NVA100X-D_menuread1.ai

306 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

SETTING AND COMMISSIONING
 StartZ< OFF
Trip Z< OFF
BLK1 Z< OFF
BLK2IN Z< OFF
21 >> StartZ<< OFF
Trip Z<< OFF
BLK1 Z<< OFF
BLK2IN Z<< OFF Start U< OFF
Trip U< OFF
27 >> BLK1 U< OFF
Start U<< OFF
Start U1< OFF Trip U<< OFF
Trip U1< OFF BLK1 U<< OFF
27V1 >>
BLK1 U1< OFF Start P1> OFF
Trip P1> OFF
BLK1 P1> OFF
32P >> Start P2> OFF
Trip P2> OFF
Start I< OFF BLK1 P2> OFF
37 >> Trip I< OFF
BLK1 I< OFF
Start P1< OFF
Trip P1< OFF
BLK1 P1< OFF
37P >> Start P2< OFF
Trip P2< OFF
BLK1 P1< OFF
Start USUP< OFF
Start 40AL OFF
Trip 40AL OFF
BLK1 40AL OFF
Start XC1XD1 OFF
40 >> Trip XC1XD1 OFF
BLK1 XC1XD1 OFF
Start XC2XD2 OFF
Trip XC2XD2 OFF
BLK1 XC2XD2 OFF Start I2AL> OFF
Trip I2AL> OFF
BLK1 I2AL> OFF
46G >> Start I2>> OFF
Trip I2>> OFF Start I2> OFF
BLK1 I2>> OFF Trip I2> OFF
CLP I2> OFF
BLK1 I2> OFF
BLK2IN I2> OFF
46M >> Start I2>> OFF
Trip I2>> OFF
Start US1< OFF CLP I2>> OFF
Start US> OFF BLK1 I2>> OFF
47 >> Trip 47 OFF BLK2IN I2>> OFF
BLK1 47 OFF
Alarm DThAL OFF
BLK1 DThAL OFF
49MG >> BLK2IN DThAL OFF
Trip DTh> OFF
BLK1 DTh> OFF
Start I(H)> OFF BLK2IN DTh> OFF
Trip I(H)> OFF
CLP I(H)> OFF
BLK1 I(H)> OFF
PROTECTIONS BLK2IN I(H)> OFF
BLK4IN I(H)> OFF Start I(L)> OFF
Start I(H)>> OFF Trip I(L)> OFF
Trip I(H)>> OFF CLP I(L)> OFF
CLP I(H)>> OFF BLK1 I(L)> OFF
50/51 side H >> BLK1 I(H)>> OFF BLK2IN I(L)> OFF
BLK2IN I(H)>> OFF BLK4IN I(L)> OFF
BLK4IN I(H)>> OFF Start I(L)>> OFF
Start I(H)>>> OFF Trip I(L)>> OFF
Trip I(H)>>> OFF CLP I(L)>> OFF
CLP I(H)>>> OFF BLK1 I(L)>> OFF
BLK1 I(H)>>> OFF BLK2IN I(L)>> OFF
BLK2IN I(H)>>> OFF BLK4IN I(L)>> OFF
BLK4IN I(H)>>> OFF Start I(L)>>> OFF
Trip I(L)>>> OFF
50/51 side L >> CLP I(L)>>> OFF
BLK1 I(L)>>> OFF
BLK2IN I(L)>>> OFF
BLK4IN I(H)>>> OFF
Start ILR> OFF
Trip ILR> OFF
51LR(48/14 >> BLK1 ILR> OFF
BLK2IN ILR> OFF
Start I-I/U> OFF Start ILR>> OFF
Trip I-I/U> OFF Trip ILR>> OFF
BLK1 I-I/U> OFF BLK1 ILR>> OFF
BLK2IN I-I/U> OFF BLK2IN ILR>> OFF
51V >>
Start I-I/U>> OFF
Trip I-I/U>> OFF
BLK1 I-I/U>> OFF
BLK2IN I-I/U>> OFF
50N.1/51N.1 Start IE1> OFF
87NHIZ >> Trip IE1> OFF
CLP IE1> OFF
Start IE2> OFF BLK1 IE1> OFF
Trip IE2> OFF BLK2IN IE1> OFF
CLP IE2> OFF BLK4IN IE1> OFF
BLK1 IE2> OFF Start IE1>> OFF
BLK2IN IE2> OFF Trip IE1>> OFF
BLK4IN IE2> OFF CLP IE1>> OFF
Start IE2>> OFF BLK1 IE1>> OFF
Trip IE2>> OFF BLK2IN IE1>> OFF Start IEC> OFF
50N.2/51N.2 CLP IE2>> OFF BLK4IN IE1>> OFF Trip IEC> OFF
87NHIZ >> BLK1 IE2>> OFF Start IE1>>> OFF CLP IEC> OFF
BLK2IN IE2>> OFF Trip IE1>>> OFF BLK1 IEC> OFF
BLK4IN IE2>> OFF CLP IE1>>> OFF BLK2IN IEC> OFF
Start IE2>>> OFF BLK1 IE1>>> OFF BLK4IN IEC> OFF
Trip IE2>>> OFF BLK2IN IE1>>> OFF Start IEC>> OFF
CLP IE2>>> OFF BLK4IN IE1>>> OFF Trip IEC>> OFF
BLK1 IE2>>> OFF CLP IEC>> OFF
BLK2IN IE2>>> OFF BLK1 IEC>> OFF
BLK4IN IE2>>> OFF BLK2IN IEC>> OFF
BLK4IN IEC>> OFF
50N(C)/51N(C) >> Start IEC>>> OFF
Start CPhi1< OFF Trip IEC>>> OFF
Trip CPhi1< OFF CLP IEC>>> OFF
BLK1 CPhi1< OFF BLK1 IEC>>> OFF
55 >> BLK2IN IEC>>> OFF
Start CPhi2< OFF
PROCEED READ MENU’ Trip CPhi2< OFF BLK4IN IEC>>> OFF
BLK1 CPhi2< OFF
NVA100X-D_menuread1a.ai

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 307

SETTING AND COMMISSIONING
 Start U> OFF
Trip U> OFF
59 >> BLK1 U> OFF
Start U>> OFF
Trip U>> OFF
PREVIOUS READ MENU’ BLK1 U>> OFF
Start UE> OFF
Trip UE> OFF
59N >> BLK1 UE> OFF
Start UE>> OFF
Trip UE>> OFF
Start U2> OFF BLK1 UE>> OFF
59V2 >> Trip U2> OFF
BLK1 U2> OFF

Start 64REF OFF

64REF >> Trip 64REF OFF
BLK1 64REF OFF
Start IED> OFF
Trip IED> OFF
CLP IED> OFF
Trip 66 OFF BLK1 IED> OFF
BLK1 66 OFF BLK2IN IED> OFF
66 >> ATST 0 s BLK4IN IED> OFF
ANST 0 Start IED>> OFF
AtIN 0 s Trip IED>> OFF
CLP IED>> OFF
BLK1 IED>> OFF
67N >> BLK2IN IED>> OFF
BLK4IN IED>> OFF
Start IED>>> OFF
Trip IED>>> OFF
Start IEDC> OFF CLP IED>>> OFF
Trip IEDC> OFF BLK1 IED>>> OFF
CLP IEDC> OFF BLK2IN IED>>> OFF
BLK1 IEDC> OFF BLK4IN IED>>> OFF
BLK2IN IEDC> OFF Start IED>>>> OFF
BLK4IN IEDC> OFF Trip IED>>>> OFF
Start IEDC>> OFF CLP IED>>>> OFF
Trip IEDC>> OFF BLK1 IED>>>> OFF
CLP IEDC>> OFF BLK2IN IED>>>> OFF
BLK1 IEDC>> OFF BLK4IN IED>>>> OFF
67N(C) >> BLK2IN IEDC>> OFF
BLK4I IEDC>> OFF
Start IEDC>>> OFF
Trip IEDC>>> OFF
CLP IEDC>>> OFF
BLK1 IEDC>>> OFF
BLK2IN IEDC>>> OFF
BLK4IN IEDC>>> OFF
Start IEDC>>>> OFF
Trip IEDC>>>> OFF
CLP IEDC>>>> OFF
BLK1 IEDC>>>> OFF
BLK2INIEDC>>>> OFF
BLK4INIEDC>>>> OFF

Start f> OFF

PROTECTIONS Trip f> OFF
BLK1 f> OFF
81O >> Start f>> OFF
Trip f>> OFF
BLK1 f>> OFF
Start f< OFF
Trip f< OFF
BLK1 f< OFF
Start f<< OFF
Trip f<< OFF Start Id>-L1 OFF
BLK1 f<< OFF Trip Id>-L1 OFF
81U >> Start f<<< OFF Start Id>-L2 OFF
Trip f<<< OFF Trip Id>-L2 OFF
BLK1 f<<< OFF Start Id>-L3 OFF
Start f<<<< OFF Trip Id>-L3 OFF
Trip f<<<< OFF Start Id> OFF
BLK1 f<<<< OFF Trip Id> OFF
BLK1 Id> OFF
Start Id>>-L1 OFF
Trip Id>>-L1 OFF
87G-87M-87T >> Start Id>>-L2 OFF
Trip Id>>-L2 OFF
Start Id>>-L3 OFF
Trip Id>>-L3 OFF
Start Id>> OFF
2ndh-REST >> Start I2ndh> OFF Trip Id>> OFF
BLK1 Id>> OFF
ST H-REST-L1 OFF
ST H-REST-L2 OFF
Start 74TCS OFF ST H-REST-L3 OFF
74TCS >> Trip 74TCS OFF ST 2nd-REST OFF
BLK1 74TCS OFF ST 5th-REST OFF
ST SatDec OFF

Trip Int/Ext OFF

Start IBF> OFF
Start IEBF> OFF
BF >> Start BF OFF
Trip BF OFF
BLK1 BF OFF

Block 74VT OFF

74VT >> Alarm 74VT OFF
BLK1 74VT OFF

Start I(H)* OFF

74CT side H >> Trip S(H)< OFF
BLK1 S(H)< OFF

Start I(L)* OFF

74CT side L >> Trip S(L)< OFF
BLK1 S(L)< OFF

PROCEED READ MENU’

NVA100X-D_menuread1b.ai

308 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

SETTING AND COMMISSIONING
 KC1-1 relay OFF
KC1-1 coil OK
KC1-2 relay OFF
KC1-2 coil OK
KC1-3 relay OFF
KC1-3 coil OK
PREVIOUS READ MENU’ KC1-4 relay OFF
RELAYS KC1-4 coil OK
KC1-1...KC1-8 KC1-5 relay OFF
KC1-5 coil OK
KC1-6 relay OFF
KC1-6 coil OK
KC1-7 relay OFF
KC1-7 coil OK
KC1-8 relay OFF
KC1-8 coil OK

PARTIAL COUNTERS SEE NEXT PAGES

TOTAL COUNTERS SEE NEXT PAGES

PILOT WIRE BreakedBLIN1 OFF

DIAGNOSTIC >> ShortedBLIN1 OFF
BLOCK2IN-IPh OFF
BLOCK2IN-IE OFF
tb timeout OFF ST-IPh-BLK2 OFF
SELECTIVE BLOCK BLOCK2 INPUT >> ST-IE-BLK2 OFF
BLOCK2 BLOCK2 OUTPUT >> BLK2OUT-IPh OFF
BLK2OUT-IE OFF
Fault 0 Cause: - BLK2OUT-IPh/IE OFF
Operating phase:-
INTERNAL ST-IPh-BLK4 OFF Date:
SELECTIVE BLOCK ST-IE-BLK4 OFF Time:
READ BLK4OUT OFF ILmaxL-rms-r:
BLOCK4 >>
0.000 In
IL1Lr: 0.000 InL
IL2Lr: 0.000 InL
Fault 0 IL3Lr: 0.000 InL
(last) >> IL1Hr: 0.000 InH
IL2Hr: 0.000 InH
IL3Hr: 0.000 InH
UL1r: 0.000 Un
Fault 1
>> UL2r: 0.000 Un
UL3r: 0.000 Un
FAULTS RECORDING
U12r: 0.000 Un
>> U23r: 0.000 Un
Fault ... U31r: 0.000 Un
>> IE1r: 0.000 IEn1
IECLr: 0.000 InL
IE2r: 0.000 IEn2
Fault 10 IECHr: 0.000 InH
>> IESHr: 0.000 IEn1
UEr: 0.000 UEn
UECr: 0.000 UECn
PhiL1r: 0 deg
PhiL2r: 0 deg
PhiL3r: 0 deg
PhiEr: 0 deg
PhiECr: 0 deg
PhiE-IECr: 0 deg
PhiEC-IECr: 0 deg
Event 0 (last) DTheta-r:
Power up 0.000 DThetaB
17/06/2013 IDL1r:0.000 Inref
06:48:27:254 ISL1r:0.000 Inref
IDL2r:0.000 Inref
ISL2r:0.000 Inref
Event 1 IDL3r:0.000 Inref
Settings ISL3r:0.000 Inref
18/06/2013 I2r: 0.000 In
06:48:27:254 U1r: 0.000 En
U2r: 0.000 En
Pr: 0.000 Pn
Event 2
EVENTS RECORDING Power down Qr: 0.000 Qn
18/06/2013 CosPhir: 0.000
>> RL1r: 0 Znf
08:00:27:137
XL1r: 0 Znf
Rminr: 0 Zn
Event ... NStart-r: 0
Settings TStart-r: 0 s
18/06/2013 fU12r: 50.000 Hz
06:48:27:254 fU23r: 50.000 Hz
fU31r: 50.000 Hz
Binary inputs
Event 299 IN1-16...IN1-1:
Settings 0000000000000000
18/06/2013 IN2-16...IN2-1:
06:48:27:254 0000000000000000
Relay
KC1-8...KC1-1:
00000000
KC2-8...KC2-1:
00000000
PROCEED READ MENU’

NVA100X-D_menuread2.ai

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 309

SETTING AND COMMISSIONING
 ParStZ<cnt 0
ParTrZ<cnt 0
ParBk1Z<cnt 0
21 Counters >> ParBk2Z<cnt 0
ParStZ<<cnt 0 ParStU<cnt 0
ParTrZ<<cnt 0 ParTrU<cnt 0
ParBk1Z<<cnt 0 ParBk1U<cnt 0
ParBk2Z<<cnt 0 ParStU<<cnt 0
ParRtU<<cnt 0
27 Counters >> ParBk1U<<cnt 0
ParStU1<cnt 0 ParSt-P1>cnt 0
27V1 Counters >> ParTrU1<cnt 0 ParTr-P1>cnt 0
ParBk1U1<cnt 0 ParBk1-P1>cnt 0
32P Counters >> ParSt-P2>cnt 0
ParSt-P1<cnt 0 ParRt-P2>cnt 0
ParTr-P1<cnt 0 ParBk1-P2>cnt 0
ParStI<cnt 0
37 Counters >> ParTrI<cnt 0 ParBk1-P1<cnt 0 ParSt40ALcnt 0
ParBk1I<cnt 0 ParSt-P2<cnt 0 ParTr40ALcnt 0
ParRt-P2<cnt 0 ParBk140ALcnt 0
37P Counters >> ParBk1-P2<cnt 0 ParStXC1XD1cnt 0
40 Counters >> ParTrXC1XD1cnt 0
ParStI2AL>cnt 0 ParBk1XC1XD1cnt 0
ParTrI2AL>cnt 0 ParStXC2XD1cnt 0
46G Counters >> ParTrXC2XD1cnt 0
ParBk1I2AL>cnt 0
ParStI2>cnt 0 ParStI2>>cnt 0 ParBk1XC2XD2cnt 0
ParTrI2>cnt 0 ParTrI2>>cnt 0
ParBk1I2>cnt 0 ParBk1I2>>cnt 0 ParStI(H)>cnt 0
ParBk2I2>cnt 0 ParTrI(H)>cnt 0
46M Counters >>
ParStI2>>cnt 0 ParAlDthAL1cnt 0 ParBk1I(H)>cnt 0
ParTrI2>>cnt 0 ParBk1DthAL1cnt 0 ParBk2I(H)>cnt 0
ParBk1I2>>cnt 0 ParBk2DthAL1cnt 0 ParStI(H)>>cnt 0
ParBk2I2>>cnt 0 ParAlDthAL2cnt 0 ParTrI(H)>>cnt 0
ParBk1DthAL2cnt 0 ParBk1I(H)>>cnt 0
47 Counters >>
ParTr-47cnt 0 ParBk2DthAL2cnt 0 ParBk2I(H)>>cnt 0
ParBk1-47cnt 0 ParTrDth>cnt 0 ParStI(H)>>>cnt 0
49MG Counters >> ParBk1Dth>cnt 0 ParTrI(H)>>>cnt 0
ParBk2Dth>cnt 0 ParBk1I(H)>>>cnt 0
50/51(H) Counters >> ParBk2I(H)>>>cnt 0
ParStI(L)>cnt 0
50/51(L) Counters >> ParTrI(L)>cnt 0
ParBk1I(L)>cnt 0
51LR(48)/14 ParStILR>cnt 0 ParBk2I(L)>cnt 0
Counters >> ParTrILR>cnt 0 ParStI(L)>>cnt 0
ParStI-I/U>cnt 0 ParBk1ILR>cnt 0 ParTrI(L)>>cnt 0
ParTrI-I/U>cnt 0 ParBk2ILR>cnt 0 ParBk1I(L)>>cnt 0
ParBk1I-I/U>cnt 0 ParStILR>>cnt 0 ParBk2I(L)>>cnt 0
ParBk2I-I/U>cnt 0 ParTrILR>>cnt 0 ParStI(L)>>>cnt 0
51V Counters >> ParBk1ILR>>cnt 0
ParStI-I/U>>cnt 0 ParTrI(L)>>>cnt 0
ParTrI-I/U>>cnt 0 ParBk2ILR>>cnt 0 ParBk1I(L)>>>cnt 0
ParBk1I-I/U>>cnt 0 ParBk2I(L)>>>cnt 0
ParBk2I-I/U>>cnt 0
50N.1/51N.1 ParStIE1>cnt 0
Counters >> ParTrIE1>cnt 0
ParBk1IE1>cnt 0
ParStIE2>cnt 0 ParBk2IE1>cnt 0
50N.2/51N.2 ParTrIE2>cnt 0
Counters >> ParStIE1>>cnt 0
ParStIEC>cnt 0 ParBk1IE2>cnt 0 ParTrIE1>>cnt 0
ParTrIEC>cnt 0 ParBk2IE2>cnt 0 ParBk1IE1>>cnt 0
ParBk1IEC>cnt 0 ParStIE2>>cnt 0 ParBk2IE1>>cnt 0
PARTIAL COUNTERS ParTrIE2>>cnt 0
ParBk2IEC>cnt 0 ParStIE1>>>cnt 0
ParStIEC>>cnt 0 ParBk1IE2>>cnt 0 ParTrIE1>>>cnt 0
50N(C)/51N(C ParTrIEC>>cnt 0 ParBk2IE2>>cnt 0 ParBk1IE1>>>cnt 0
Counters >> ParBk1IEC>>cnt 0 ParStIE2>>>cnt 0 ParBk2IE1>>>cnt 0
ParBk2IEC>>cnt 0 ParTrIE2>>>cnt 0
ParStIEC>>>cnt 0 ParBk1IE2>>>cnt 0
ParBk2IE2>>>cnt 0 ParSt-CPhi1<cnt 0
ParTrIEC>>>cnt 0 ParTr-CPhi1<cnt 0
ParBk1IEC>>>cnt 0 ParBk1-CPhi1<cnt 0
ParBk2IEC>>>cnt 0 ParSt-CPhi2<cnt 0
55 Counters >> ParTr-CPhi2<cnt 0
ParBk1-CPhi2<cnt 0
ParStIED>cnt 0
ParStU2>cnt 0 ParStUE>cnt 0 ParTrIED>cnt 0
59V2 Counters >> ParTrU2>cnt 0 ParTrUE>cnt 0 ParBk1IED>cnt 0
ParBk1U2>cnt 0 ParBk1UE>cnt 0 ParBk2IED>cnt 0
59N Counters >> ParStUE>>cnt 0 ParStIED>>cnt 0
ParStU>cnt 0 ParRtUE>>cnt 0 ParTrIED>>cnt 0
ParTrU>cnt 0 ParBk1UE>>cnt 0 ParBk1IED>>cnt 0
ParBk1U>cnt 0 ParBk2IED>>cnt 0
59 Counters >> ParStU>>cnt 0 ParStIED>>>cnt 0
ParRtU>>cnt 0 ParTrIED>>>cnt 0
ParBk1U>>cnt 0 ParSt-64REFcnt 0 ParBk1IED>>>cnt 0
64REF Counters >> ParTr-64REFcnt 0 ParBk2IED>>>cnt 0
ParTr66cnt 0 ParBk1-64REFcnt 0 ParStIED>>>>cnt 0
66 Counters >> ParBk1-66cnt 0 ParTrIED>>>>cnt 0
ParBk1IED>>>>cnt 0
67N Counters >> ParBk2IED>>>>cnt 0

67N(C) Counters >> ParStIEDC>cnt 0

ParTrIEDC>cnt 0
ParSt-f>cnt 0 ParBk1IEDC>cnt 0
ParTr-f>cnt 0 ParSt-f<cnt 0 ParBk2IEDC>cnt 0
ParBk1-f>cnt 0 ParTr-f<cnt 0 ParStIEDC>>cnt 0
81O Counters >> ParBk1-f<cnt 0
ParSt-f>>cnt 0 ParTrIEDC>>cnt 0
ParTr-f>>cnt 0 ParSt-f<<cnt 0 ParBk1IEDC>>cnt 0
ParBk1-f>>cnt 0 ParTr-f<<cnt 0 ParBk2IEDC>>cnt 0
ParBk1-f<<cnt 0 ParStIEDC>>>cnt 0
81U Counters >> ParSt-f<<<cnt 0 ParTrIEDC>>>cnt 0
ParStId>cnt 0 ParTr-f<<<cnt 0 ParBk1IEDC>>>cnt 0
ParTrId>cnt 0 ParBk1-f<<<cnt 0 ParBk2IEDC>>>cnt 0
ParBk1Id>cnt 0 ParSt-f<<<<cnt 0 ParStIEDC>>>>cnt 0
87GMT Counters >> ParStId>>cnt 0 ParTr-f<<<<cnt 0 ParTrIEDC>>>>cnt 0
ParTrId>>cnt 0 ParBk1-f<<<<cnt 0 ParBk1IEDC>>>>cnt0
ParBk1Id>>cnt 0 ParBk2IEDC>>>>cnt0
ParSt2ndRESTcnt 0
ParSt5thRESTcnt 0
2ndh-REST
Counters >> ParStI2ndh>cnt 0
ParTr74TCScnt 0
74TCS Counters >> ParBk1-74TCScnt 0
CB Counters >> N.OpenCBcnt 0
ParTr74VTcnt 0
74VT Counters >>
ParBk1-74VTcnt 0
74CT side H ParTr74CTHcnt 0
Counters >> ParBk1-74CTHcnt 0

ParTr74CTLcnt 0 ParStBFcnt 0
74CT Counters >> ParBk1-74CTLcnt 0 ParTrTrcnt 0
BF Counters >> ParBk1BFcnt 0
NVA100X-D_menuread3.ai

310 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

SETTING AND COMMISSIONING
 TotStZ<cnt 0
TotTrZ<cnt 0
TotBk1Z<cnt 0
21 Counters >> TotBk2Z<cnt 0
TotStZ<<cnt 0 TotStU<cnt 0
TotTrZ<<cnt 0 TotTrU<cnt 0
TotBk1Z<<cnt 0 TotBk1U<cnt 0
TotBk2Z<<cnt 0 TotStU<<cnt 0
TotRtU<<cnt 0
27 Counters >> TotBk1U<<cnt 0
TotStU1<cnt 0 TotSt-P1>cnt 0
27V1 Counters >> TotTrU1<cnt 0 TotTr-P1>cnt 0
TotBk1U1<cnt 0 TotBk1-P1>cnt 0
32P Counters >> TotSt-P2>cnt 0
TotSt-P1<cnt 0 TotRt-P2>cnt 0
TotTr-P1<cnt 0 TotBk1-P2>cnt 0
TotStI<cnt 0
37 Counters >> TotTrI<cnt 0 TotBk1-P1<cnt 0 TotSt40ALcnt 0
TotBk1I<cnt 0 TotSt-P2<cnt 0 TotTr40ALcnt 0
TotRt-P2<cnt 0 TotBk140ALcnt 0
37P Counters >> TotBk1-P2<cnt 0 TotStXC1XD1cnt 0
40 Counters >> TotTrXC1XD1cnt 0
TotStI2AL>cnt 0 TotBk1XC1XD1cnt 0
TotTrI2AL>cnt 0 TotStXC2XD1cnt 0
46G Counters >> TotTrXC2XD1cnt 0
TotBk1I2AL>cnt 0
TotStI2>cnt 0 TotStI2>>cnt 0 TotBk1XC2XD2cnt 0
TotTrI2>cnt 0 TotTrI2>>cnt 0
TotBk1I2>cnt 0 TotBk1I2>>cnt 0 TotStI(H)>cnt 0
TotBk2I2>cnt 0 TotTrI(H)>cnt 0
46M Counters >>
TotStI2>>cnt 0 TotAlDthAL1cnt 0 TotBk1I(H)>cnt 0
TotTrI2>>cnt 0 TotBk1DthAL1cnt 0 TotBk2I(H)>cnt 0
TotBk1I2>>cnt 0 TotBk2DthAL1cnt 0 TotStI(H)>>cnt 0
TotBk2I2>>cnt 0 TotAlDthAL2cnt 0 TotTrI(H)>>cnt 0
TotBk1DthAL2cnt 0 TotBk1I(H)>>cnt 0
47 Counters >>
TotTr-47cnt 0 TotBk2DthAL2cnt 0 TotBk2I(H)>>cnt 0
TotBk1-47cnt 0 TotTrDth>cnt 0 TotStI(H)>>>cnt 0
49MG Counters >> TotBk1Dth>cnt 0 TotTrI(H)>>>cnt 0
TotBk2Dth>cnt 0 TotBk1I(H)>>>cnt 0
50/51(H) Counters >> TotBk2I(H)>>>cnt 0
TotStI(L)>cnt 0
50/51(L) Counters >> TotTrI(L)>cnt 0
TotBk1I(L)>cnt 0
51LR(48)/14 TotStILR>cnt 0 TotBk2I(L)>cnt 0
Counters >> TotTrILR>cnt 0 TotStI(L)>>cnt 0
TotStI-I/U>cnt 0 TotBk1ILR>cnt 0 TotTrI(L)>>cnt 0
TotTrI-I/U>cnt 0 TotBk2ILR>cnt 0 TotBk1I(L)>>cnt 0
TotBk1I-I/U>cnt 0 TotStILR>>cnt 0 TotBk2I(L)>>cnt 0
TotBk2I-I/U>cnt 0 TotTrILR>>cnt 0 TotStI(L)>>>cnt 0
51V Counters >> TotBk1ILR>>cnt 0
TotStI-I/U>>cnt 0 TotTrI(L)>>>cnt 0
TotTrI-I/U>>cnt 0 TotBk2ILR>>cnt 0 TotBk1I(L)>>>cnt 0
TotBk1I-I/U>>cnt 0 TotBk2I(L)>>>cnt 0
TotBk2I-I/U>>cnt 0
50N.1/51N.1 TotStIE1>cnt 0
Counters >> TotTrIE1>cnt 0
TotBk1IE1>cnt 0
TotStIE2>cnt 0 TotBk2IE1>cnt 0
50N.2/51N.2 TotTrIE2>cnt 0
Counters >> TotStIE1>>cnt 0
TotStIEC>cnt 0 TotBk1IE2>cnt 0 TotTrIE1>>cnt 0
TotTrIEC>cnt 0 TotBk2IE2>cnt 0 TotBk1IE1>>cnt 0
TotBk1IEC>cnt 0 TotStIE2>>cnt 0 TotBk2IE1>>cnt 0
TOTAL COUNTERS TotTrIE2>>cnt 0
TotBk2IEC>cnt 0 TotStIE1>>>cnt 0
TotStIEC>>cnt 0 TotBk1IE2>>cnt 0 TotTrIE1>>>cnt 0
50N(C)/51N(C TotTrIEC>>cnt 0 TotBk2IE2>>cnt 0 TotBk1IE1>>>cnt 0
Counters >> TotBk1IEC>>cnt 0 TotStIE2>>>cnt 0 TotBk2IE1>>>cnt 0
TotBk2IEC>>cnt 0 TotTrIE2>>>cnt 0
TotStIEC>>>cnt 0 TotBk1IE2>>>cnt 0
TotBk2IE2>>>cnt 0 TotSt-CPhi1<cnt 0
TotTrIEC>>>cnt 0 TotTr-CPhi1<cnt 0
TotBk1IEC>>>cnt 0 TotBk1-CPhi1<cnt 0
TotBk2IEC>>>cnt 0 TotSt-CPhi2<cnt 0
55 Counters >> TotTr-CPhi2<cnt 0
TotBk1-CPhi2<cnt 0
TotStIED>cnt 0
TotStU2>cnt 0 TotStUE>cnt 0 TotTrIED>cnt 0
59V2 Counters >> TotTrU2>cnt 0 TotTrUE>cnt 0 TotBk1IED>cnt 0
TotBk1U2>cnt 0 TotBk1UE>cnt 0 TotBk2IED>cnt 0
59N Counters >> TotStUE>>cnt 0 TotStIED>>cnt 0
TotStU>cnt 0 TotRtUE>>cnt 0 TotTrIED>>cnt 0
TotTrU>cnt 0 TotBk1UE>>cnt 0 TotBk1IED>>cnt 0
TotBk1U>cnt 0 TotBk2IED>>cnt 0
59 Counters >> TotStU>>cnt 0 TotStIED>>>cnt 0
TotRtU>>cnt 0 TotTrIED>>>cnt 0
TotBk1U>>cnt 0 TotSt-64REFcnt 0 TotBk1IED>>>cnt 0
64REF Counters >> TotTr-64REFcnt 0 TotBk2IED>>>cnt 0
TotTr66cnt 0 TotBk1-64REFcnt 0 TotStIED>>>>cnt 0
66 Counters >> TotBk1-66cnt 0 TotTrIED>>>>cnt 0
TotBk1IED>>>>cnt 0
67N Counters >> TotBk2IED>>>>cnt 0

67N(C) Counters >> TotStIEDC>cnt 0

TotTrIEDC>cnt 0
TotSt-f>cnt 0 TotBk1IEDC>cnt 0
TotTr-f>cnt 0 TotSt-f<cnt 0 TotBk2IEDC>cnt 0
TotBk1-f>cnt 0 TotTr-f<cnt 0 TotStIEDC>>cnt 0
81O Counters >> TotBk1-f<cnt 0
TotSt-f>>cnt 0 TotTrIEDC>>cnt 0
TotTr-f>>cnt 0 TotSt-f<<cnt 0 TotBk1IEDC>>cnt 0
TotBk1-f>>cnt 0 TotTr-f<<cnt 0 TotBk2IEDC>>cnt 0
TotBk1-f<<cnt 0 TotStIEDC>>>cnt 0
81U Counters >> TotSt-f<<<cnt 0 TotTrIEDC>>>cnt 0
TotStId>cnt 0 TotTr-f<<<cnt 0 TotBk1IEDC>>>cnt 0
TotTrId>cnt 0 TotBk1-f<<<cnt 0 TotBk2IEDC>>>cnt 0
TotBk1Id>cnt 0 TotSt-f<<<<cnt 0 TotStIEDC>>>>cnt 0
87GMT Counters >> TotStId>>cnt 0 TotTr-f<<<<cnt 0 TotTrIEDC>>>>cnt 0
TotTrId>>cnt 0 TotBk1-f<<<<cnt 0 TotBk1IEDC>>>>cnt0
TotBk1Id>>cnt 0 TotBk2IEDC>>>>cnt0
TotSt2ndRESTcnt 0
TotSt5thRESTcnt 0
2ndh-REST
Counters >> TotStI2ndh>cnt 0
TotTr74TCScnt 0
74TCS Counters >> TotBk1-74TCScnt 0
CB Counters >> N.OpenCBcnt 0
TotTr74VTcnt 0
74VT Counters >>
TotBk1-74VTcnt 0
74CT side H TotTr74CTHcnt 0
Counters >> TotBk1-74CTHcnt 0

TotTr74CTLcnt 0 TotStBFcnt 0
74CT Counters >> TotBk1-74CTLcnt 0 TotTrTrcnt 0
BF Counters >> TotBk1BFcnt 0 NVA100X-D_menuread3-t.ai

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 311

SETTING AND COMMISSIONING
 BASE >> Plant
..................
Snt 6.93 MVA Reading RELATIVE
VntH 8.0 kW Un 100 V
IntH 0 A Unp 20000 V
mH 0.00 A1-A2 NORMAL UEn 100 V
GndH Out A3-A4 NORMAL UEnp 20000 V
ConnH D A5-A6 NORMAL InH 5 A
TRANSFORMER >> VectorGroup 0 A7-A8 NORMAL InpH 100 A
VntL 8.0 kW B3-B4 NORMAL InHL 5 A
IntL 0 A B5-B6 NORMAL InpL 100 A
I-Sequence mL 0.00 B7-B8 NORMAL IEn1 1 A
IL1-IL2-IL3 Def. GndL Out B9-B10 NORMAL IEn1p 1000 A
INPUT SEQUENCE >> V-Sequence ConnH y C1-C2 NORMAL IEn2 1 A
UL1-UL2-UL3 Def. VectorGroup 0 C3-C4 NORMAL IEn2p 1000 A
C5-C6 NORMAL Ing 100 A
POLARITY >> C7-AC NORMAL Inref 0 A
NumSides 2
Logic Active-ON RefSide H
ON Delay Logic Active-ON MatchType INTERNAL
IN1-1 tON 0 s ON Delay Magnitude matching
OFF Delay IN1-2 tON 0 s factor M(H)
Binary input IN1-1 IN1-1 tOFF 0 s OFF Delay Magnitude matching
Setpoints >> IN1-1 matching None IN1-2 tOFF 0 s factor M(L)
INPUTS Binary input IN1-2 IN1-2 matching None 64REF Wrong nominal
IN1-1...IN1-16 >> Setpoints >> settings ME(H)
Binary input IN1-x Logic Active-ON fn 50 Hz
Setpoints >> ON Delay LANGUAGE English
IN1-x tON 0 s
OFF Delay
Logic ENERGIZED IN1-x tOFF 0 s
OPERATION MODE IN1-2 matching None
LATCHED
KC1-1 relay Minimum pulse width
Setpoints >> KC1-1 tTR 150 ms
KC1-2 relay Logic ENERGIZED
RELAYS Setpoints >> OPERATION MODE
KC1-1...KC1-8 >> ........ LATCHED
KCx-x relay Logic ENERGIZED Minimum pulse width Start LED logic
Setpoints >> OPERATION MODE KC1-2 tTR 150 ms NO LATCHED
LATCHED Trip LED logic
Minimum pulse width NO LATCHED
KCx-x tTR 150 ms LED 1 logic
NO LATCHED
LEDS LED 2 logic
ON MMI >> NO LATCHED
LED 3 logic
LED1-1 logic NO LATCHED
LEDS NO LATCHED LED 4 logic
LED1-1...LED1-8 >> LED1-2 logic NO LATCHED
NO LATCHED LED 5 logic
Minor failure LED1-3 logic NO LATCHED
SELF-TEST RELAY >> alarm NO NO LATCHED
Self-test relay - LED1-4 logic
Param. setting NO LATCHED
enable ON LED1-x logic
MMI >> Modules data NO LATCHED
visualization LED1-8 logic
CLP Source IRUN ASSIGNED MODULES NO LATCHED
START CONTROL >> IRUN 0.10 IB
MR Enable OFF tZ<RES 0.10 s
Z<def OFF
PROFILE Active Profile A 1.00 Zn
SELECTION >> tZ<def 1.00 s
Z<BLK1 OFF
Z<BLK2IN OFF
IB >> IB 1.00 In Z<BLK2OUT OFF
SET Z<BF OFF
Relays Z<
Z< Element >> Z<ST-K -
Z<TR-K -
LEDs Z<
tZ<<RES 0.10 s Z<ST-L -
Z<<def OFF Z<TR-L -
1.00 Zn
tZ<<def 1.00
21 >> Z<< Element >> Z<<TR-K - (U/f)AL Enable OFF
LEDs Z<< t(U/f)>RES 0.10 s
Z<<ST-L - (U/f)ALdef enable OFF
Z<<TR-L - (U/f)ALdef 1.00 Un/fn
t(U/f)ALdef 1.00 s
(U/f)ALBLK1 OFF
(U/f)AL Element (U/f)>BF OFF
Relays (U/f)AL
(U/f)ALST-K -
(U/f)ALTR-K -
LEDs (U/f)AL
(U/f)ALST-L -
(U/f)ALTR-L -

U< Enable OFF

PROFILE A Type Characteristic
>> Common >> Utype27 Uph-ph
Rof>SYNC 0 Hz U<Curve
DEFINITE
U<def OFF
0.5 Un
U< Element >> tU<def 1 s
U<inv OFF
27 >> U<<def OFF 0.5 Un
0.5 Un tU<inv 10 s
tU<<def 1 s U<BF OFF
U<<BLK1 OFF Relays U<
U<disbyU<< OFF U<ST-K -
U<< Element >> U<<BF OFF U<TR-K -
Relays U<< LEDs U<
U<<ST-K - U<ST-L -
U<<TR-K - U<TR-L -
LEDs U<<
U<<ST-L -
U<<TR-L -

U1<def enable OFF

0.5 En
tU1<def 1 s
U1<BLK1 OFF
U1<BF OFF
27V1 >> U1< Element >> Relays U1<
U1<ST-K -
U1<TR-K -
LEDs U1<
U1<ST-L -
U1<TR-L -

PROCEED SET MENU’ PROCEED PROFILE A MENU’ NVA100X-D_menuset1.ai

312 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

SETTING AND COMMISSIONING
 P1>DIR P Forward
P1>RES 0.00 s
P1>def enable OFF
P1> Element >> P1>def 0.50 Pn
FROM PROFILE A MENU’ tP1>def 1.00 s
P1>BLK1 OFF
P2>DIR P Forward P1>BF OFF
P2>RES 0.00 s Relays P1>
32P >> P2>def enable OFF P1>ST-K -
P2>def 0.50 Pn P1>TR-K -
tP2>def 1.00 s LEDs P1>
P2>BLK1 OFF P1>ST-L -
P2> Element >> P2>BF OFF P1>TR-L -
Relays P2>
P2>ST-K -
P2>TR-K - Logic37 OR
LEDs P2> I<def OFF
P2>ST-L - 0.50 In
P2>TR-L - t<def 1.00 s
I<BLK1 OFF
I<BF OFF
37 >> I< Element >> Relays I<
I<ST-K -
I<TR-K -
LEDs I<
I<ST-L -
I<TR-L -
Common >> CB-37P Enable OFF
tARM-P< 1.00 s P1<DIR P Forward
P1< Element >> P1<RES 0.00 s
P1<def enable OFF
P2<DIR P Forward P1<def 0.50 Pn
37P >> P2<RES 0.00 s tP1<def 1.00 s
P2<def enable OFF P1<BLK1 OFF
P2<def 0.50 Pn Relays P1<
tP2<def 1.00 s P1<ST-K -
P2< Element >>
P2<BLK1 OFF P1<TR-K -
Relays P2< LEDs P1<
P2<ST-K - P1<ST-L -
P2<TR-K - P1<TR-L -
LEDs P2<
P2<ST-L -
P2<TR-L -

Mode 40 Generator 40AL Enable OFF

Common >> USUP< Enable OFF Alpha40AL 45 gr.
USUP< 0.50 Un t40AL 1.00 s
40AL Element >> 40ALBLK1 OFF
XC1XD1 Enable OFF Relays 40AL
XC1 1.00 Znf 40ALST-K -
XD1 1.00 Znf 40ALTR-K -
tXC1XD1 1.00 s LEDs 40AL
tXC1XD1-RES 0.0 s 40ALST-L -
40 >> XC1XD1-BLK1 OFF 40ALTR-L -
40ALdisbyXC1XD1 OFF
XC1XD1-BF OFF XC1XD1 Enable OFF
Relays XC1XD1 XC1 1.00 Znf
XC1XD1ST-K - XD1 1.00 Znf
XC1XD1TR-K - tXC1XD1 1.00 s
XC1XD1 Element >> tXC1XD1-RES 0.0 s
LEDs XC1XD1
XC1XD1ST-L - XC1XD1-BLK1 OFF
XC1XD1TR-L - 40ALdisbyXC1XD1 OFF
XC1XD1-BF OFF
Relays XC1XD1
XC2XD2 Element >>
SET XC1XD1ST-K -
XC1XD1TR-K -
LEDs XC1XD1
XC1XD1ST-L -
XC1XD1TR-L -

I2AL> Enable OFF

I2AL> Element >>
I2AL>def 0.10 IB
I2>> Enable OFF tI2AL>def 1.00 s
I2>>inv 0.50 IB I2AL>BLK1 OFF
Kheat 1.0 s Relays I2AL>
46G >> Kcool 1.0 s I2AL>ST-K -
T2MIN 1.00 s I2Al>TR-K -
T2MAX 500 s LEDs I2AL>
I2>>BLK1 OFF I2AL>ST-L -
I2>> Element >> I2AL>disbyI2>> OFF I2AL>TR-L -
I2>>BF OFF
I2>disbyI2>> OFF
Relays I2>>
I2>>ST-K -
I2>>TR-K -
LEDs I2>> I2> Enable OFF
I2>>ST-L - Type Characteristic
PROFILE A I2>>TR-L - I2Curve
I2> Element >> DEFINITE
I2CLP> Mode OFF
I2>> Enable OFF t2CLP> 0.10 s
I2CLP> Mode OFF t2>RES 0.00 s
t2CLP>> 0.10 s I2>def OFF
46M >> t2>>RES 0.00 s 1.00 IB
I2>>def OFF I2CLP>def 2.00 IB
1.00 IB t2>def 1.00 s
I2CLP>>def 2.00 IB I2>inv 1.00 IB
Q2< Element >> t2>>def 1.00 s I2CLP>inv 2.00 IB
I2>>BLK1 OFF t2>inv 10.0 s
I2>>BLK2IN OFF I2>BLK1 OFF
I2>>BLK2OUT OFF I2>BLK2IN OFF
I2>>2ndh-REST OFF I2>BLK2OUT OFF
I2>>BF OFF I2>2ndh-REST OFF
I2>disbyI2>> OFF I2>BF OFF
Relays I2>> Relays I2>
I2>>ST-K - I2>ST-K -
I2>>TR-K - I2>TR-K -
LEDs I2>> LEDs I2>
I2>>ST-L - I2>ST-L -
I2>>TR-L - I2>TR-L -
47 Enable OFF
Us1< Enable OFF
Us1< 0.20 En
47 >> 47 Element >> Us> Enable ON
Us> 0.80 En
47BLK1 OFF
Relays 47
47TR-K -
LEDs 47
47TR-L -

PROCEED SET MENU’ PROCEED PROFILE A MENU’

NVA100X-D_menuset2.ai

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 313

SETTING AND COMMISSIONING
 DthIN 0.0 DThetaB
PREVIOUS PROFILE A MENU’ KST 2.0 DthAL1 Enable OFF
K2 0 DthAL1 0.5 DThetaB
Common >> T+ 10 min DthAL1BLK1 OFF
PREVIOUS SET MENU’ T- 1.0 T+ DthAL1BLK2IN OFF
DthCLP Mode OFF DthAL1BLK2OUT OFF
tDthCLP 0.10 s DthAL1BLK4 OFF
DthAL1 Element >> Relays DthAL1
DthAL1-K -
DthAL2 Enable OFF LEDs DthAL1
DthAL2 1.0 DThetaB DthAL1-L -
DthAL2BLK1 OFF
49MG >> DthAL2BLK2IN OFF Dth> Enable OFF
DthAL2BLK2OUT OFF Dth> 1.200 DThetaB
DthAL2 Element >> DthAL2BLK4 OFF Dth>BLK1 OFF
Relays DthAL2 Dth>BLK2IN OFF
DthAL2-K - Dth>BLK2OUT OFF
LEDs DthAL2 Dth>BLK4 OFF
DthAL2-L - Dth>BF OFF
Dth> Element >> Dth>disby50-51 OFF
Relays Dth>
Dth>-K -
LEDs Dth>
I> Enable OFF Dth>-L -
Type
Characteristic:
I>Curve DEFINITE I>> Enable OFF
I> Element >> ICLP> Mode OFF Type
tCLP> 0.10 s Characteristic:
t>RES 0.00 s I>>Curve DEFINITE
I>def OFF ICLP>> Mode OFF
1.00 In tCLP>> 0.10 s
ICLP>def 2.00 In t>>RES 0.00 s
t>def 1.00 s I>>def OFF
I>inv OFF 1.00 In
1.00 In ICLP>>def 2.00 In
ICLP>inv 2.00 In t>>def 1.00 s
t>inv 10.0 s I>>inv OFF
I>BLK1 OFF 1.00 In
I>BLK2IN OFF ICLP>inv 2.00 In
I>BLK2OUT OFF t>>inv 5 s
50/51 >> I>BLK4 OFF I>>BLK1 OFF
I>2ndh-REST OFF I>>BLK2IN OFF
I>BF OFF I>>BLK2OUT OFF
Relays I> I>>BLK4 OFF
I>ST-K - I>>2ndh-REST OFF
I>TR-K - I>>BF OFF
LEDs I> I>disbyI>> OFF
I>ST-L - Relays I>>
I>TR-L - I>>ST-K -
I>> Element >> I>>TR-K -
I>>> Enable OFF LEDs I>>
ST-I>>>&ST-U<< OFF I>>ST-L -
ICLP>>> Mode OFF I>>TR-L -
tCLP>>> 0.10 s
t>>>RES 0.00 s
I>>>def OFF
1.00 In
ICLP>>>def 2.00 In
t>>>def 1.00 s
I>>>BLK1 OFF
I>>>BLK2IN OFF
I>>> Element >> I>>>BLK2OUT OFF
I>>>BLK4 OFF
I>>>2ndh-REST OFF
I>>>BF OFF
SET I>disbyI>>> OFF
I>>disbyI>>> OFF
Relays I>>>
I>>>ST-K -
I>>>TR-K -
LEDs I>>>
I>>>ST-L -
I>>>TR-L -

ILR> Enable OFF

Mode51LR> ILR>> Enable OFF
No speed crt1 Mode51LR>>
ILR>inv 0.80 IB No speed crt1
I-MOT-ST 1.00 IB tLRCLP>> 0.10 s
ILR> Element >> tLR>inv 10.0 s
ILR>BLK1 OFF ILR>>def 1.00 IB
ILR>BLK2IN OFF tLR>>def 1.00 s
ILR>BLK2OUT OFF ILR>BLK1 OFF
ILR>BF OFF ILR>>BLK2IN OFF
PROFILE A Relays ILR> ILR>>BLK2OUT OFF
ILR>ST-K - ILR>>BF OFF
51LR(48)/14 >> Relays ILR>>
ILR>TR-K -
LEDs ILR> ILR>>ST-K -
ILR>ST-L - ILR>>TR-K -
ILR>TR-L - LEDs ILR>>
ILR>>ST-L -
ILR>> Element >> ILR>>TR-L -
Mode51V
Voltage controlled t-I/U>RES 0 s
Common >> U-I/U< 0.50 Un I-I/U>def enable
U-I/U-1< 0.80 Un OFF
U-I/U-2< 0.50 Un I-I/U>def 1.00 In
K 1.00 t-I/U>def 1.00 s
I-I/U> Element >> I-I/U>BLK1 OFF
I-I/U>BLK2IN OFF
t-I/U>>RES 0.00 s I-I/U>BLK2OUT OFF
I-I/U>>def enable I-I/U>BF OFF
51V >> OFF Relays I-I/U>
I-I/U>>def 1.00 In I-I/U>ST-K -
t-I/U>>def 1.00 s I-I/U>TR-K -
I-I/U>>BLK1 OFF LEDs I-I/U>
I-I/U>>BLK2IN OFF I-I/U>ST-L -
I-I/U>>BLK2OUT OFF I-I/U>TR-L -
I-I/U>> Element >> I-I/U>BF OFF
I-I/U>disbyI-I/U>>
OFF
Relays I-I/U>>
I-I/U>>ST-K -
I-I/U>>TR-K -
LEDs I-I/U>>
I-I/U>>ST-L -
I-I/U>>TR-L -

PROCEED SET MENU’ PROCEED PROFILE A MENU’ NVA100X-D_menuset3.ai

314 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

SETTING AND COMMISSIONING
 IE1> Element >> IE1> Enable OFF
Type
PREVIOUS PROFILE A MENU’ IE1>> Enable OFF Characteristic:
Type IE1>Curve DEFINITE
IE1CLP>> Mode OFF IE1CLP> Mode OFF
PREVIOUS SET MENU’ tE1CLP>> 0.10 s tE1CLP> 0.10 s
tE1>>RES 0.00 s tE1>RES 0.00 s
IE1>>def OFF IE1>def OFF
1.00 IEn1 1.00 IEn1
IE1CLP>>def 2.00IEn1 IE1CLP> def2.00IEn1
tE1>>def 1.00 s tE1>def 1.00 s
IE1>>BLK1 OFF IE1>inv OFF
IE1>>BLK2IN OFF 1.00 In
IE1>> Element >> IE1>>BLK2OUT OFF IE1CLP>inv 2.00 In
IE1>>BLK4 OFF tE1>inv 10.0 s
IE1>>2ndh-REST OFF IE1>BLK1 OFF
IE1>>BF OFF IE1>BLK2IN OFF
50N.1/51N.1 IE1>disbyIE1>> OFF IE>BLK2OUT OFF
87NHIZ.1 >> Relays IE1>> IE1>BLK4 OFF
IE1>>ST-K - IE1>2ndh-REST OFF
IE1>>TR-K - IE1>BF OFF
LEDs IE1>> Relays IE1>
IE1>>ST-L - IE1>ST-K -
IE1>>TR-L - IE1>TR-K -
LEDs IE1>
IE1>>> Enable OFF IE1>ST-L -
IE1CLP>>> Mode OFF IE1>TR-L -
tE1CLP>>> 0.10 s
tE1>>>RES 0.00 s
IE1>>>def OFF
1.00 IEn1
IE1CLP>>>def2.00IEn1
tE1>>>def 1.00 s
IE1>>>BLK1 OFF
IE1>>>BLK2IN OFF
IE1>>>BLK2OUT OFF
IE1>>> Element >> IE1>>>BLK4 OFF
IE1>>>2ndh-REST OFF
IE1>>>BF OFF
IE1>disbyIE1>>> OFF
IE1>>disbyIE1>>>OFF
Relays IE1>>>
IE1>>>ST-K -
IE1>>>TR-K -
LEDs IE1>>>
IE1>>>ST-L -
IE1>>>TR-L -

IE2> Enable OFF

Type
Characteristic:
IE2>Curve DEFINITE
IE2CLP> Mode OFF IE2>> Enable OFF
tE2CLP> 0.10 s Type
tE2>RES 0.00 s IE2CLP>> Mode OFF
IE2>def OFF tE2CLP>> 0.10 s
IE2> Element >> 1.00 IEn2 tE2>>RES 0.00 s
IE21CLP>def 2.00IEn2 IE2>>def OFF
............... 1.00 IEn1
Relays IE1> IE2CLP>>def 2.00IEn2
IE2>ST-K - tE2>>def 1.00 s
IE2>TR-K - .............
LEDs IE2> Relays IE2>>
IE2>ST-L - IE2>>ST-K -
IE2>TR-L - IE2>>TR-K -
SET LEDs IE2>>
IE2>> Element >> IE2>>ST-L -
50N.2/51N.2 IE2>>TR-L -
87NHIZ.2 >>
IE2>>> Enable OFF
IE2CLP>>> Mode OFF IEC> Enable OFF
tE2CLP>>> 0.10 s Type
tE2>>>RES 0.00 s Characteristic:
IE2>>>def OFF IEC>Curve DEFINITE
1.00 IEn2 IECCLP> Mode OFF
IE2CLP>>>def2.00IEn2 tECCLP> 0.1 s
IE2>>> Element >> tE2>>>def 1.00 s tEC>RES 0 s
.......... IEC>def OFF
Relays IE1>>> 1 IEn
IE1>>>ST-K - IECCLP>def 2 IEn
IE1>>>TR-K - tEC>def 1 s
LEDs IE1>>> IEC>inv OFF
IE1>>>ST-L - 1 In
IE1>>>TR-L - IECCLP>inv 2 In
tEC>inv 10 s
IEC>BLK1 OFF
PROFILE A IEC>BLK2IN OFF
Common >> IECType51NC IECL IEC>BLK2OUT OFF
IEC>BLK4 OFF
IEC> Element >> IEC>2ndh-REST OFF
IEC>BF OFF
IEC>> Enable OFF Relays IEC>
Type IEC>ST-K -
IECCLP>> Mode OFF IEC>TR-K -
tECCLP>> 0.1 s LEDs IEC>
tEC>>RES 0 s IEC>ST-L -
IEC>>def OFF IEC>TR-L -
1 In
IECCLP>>def 2 In IEC>>> Enable OFF
tEC>>def 1 s IECCLP>>> Mode OFF
IEC>>BLK1 OFF tECCLP>>> 0.1 s
IEC>> Element >>
IEC>>BLK2IN OFF tEC>>>RES 0 s
50N(C)/51N(C) >> IEC>>BLK2OUT OFF IEC>>>def OFF
IEC>>BLK4 OFF 1 In
IEC>>2ndh-REST OFF IECCLP>>>def 2 In
IEC>>BF OFF tEC>>>def 1 s
IEC>disbyIEC>> OFF IEC>>>BLK1 OFF
Relays IEC>> IEC>>>BLK2IN OFF
IEC>>ST-K - IEC>>>BLK2OUT OFF
IEC>>TR-K - IEC>>>BLK4 OFF
LEDs IEC>> IEC>>>2ndh-REST OFF
IEC>>ST-L - IEC>>>BF OFF
IEC>>TR-L - IEC>disbyIE>>> OFF
IEC>>> Element >> IEC>>disbyIE>>> OFF
Relays IEC>>>
IEC>>>ST-K -
IEC>>>TR-K -
LEDs IEC>>>
IEC>>>ST-L -
IEC>>>TR-L -
PROCEED SET MENU’ PROCEED PROFILE A MENU’ NVA100X-D _menuset3a.ai

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 315

SETTING AND COMMISSIONING
 PREVIOUS PROFILE A MENU’

PREVIOUS SET MENU’

CB-55 Enable OFF CPhi1<DIR

Common >> CosPhi Lag
tARM-CPhi< 1.00 s
CPh1< Element >> CPhi1<def enableOFF
CPhi1<def 0.90
CPhi2< DIR tCPhi1<def 1.00 s
55 >>
CosPhi Lag CPhi1<BLK1 OFF
CPhi1<def enableOFF CPhi1<BF OFF
CPhi2<def 0.90 Relays CPhi1<
tCPhi2<def 1.00 s CPhi1<ST-K -
CPhi2<BLK1 OFF CPhi1<TR-K -
CPh2< Element >> CPhi2<BF OFF LEDs CPhi1<
Relays CPhi2< CPhi1<ST-L -
CPhi2<ST-K - CPhi1<TR-L -
CPhi2<TR-K -
LEDs CPhi2<
CPhi2<ST-L -
CPhi2<TR-L -

U> Enable OFF

Type Characteristic
U>Curve DEFINITE
U>def enable OFF
Utype59 Uph-ph U>def 1.00 Un
Common >> tU>def 1.00 s
Logic59 OR
U>inv enable OFF
U> Element >> U>inv 1.00 Un
tU>inv 10.0 s
U>>def Enable OFF U>BLK1 OFF
59 >> U>>def 1.00 Un U>BF OFF
tU>>def 1.00 s Relays U>
U>>BLK1 OFF U>ST-K -
U>disbyU>> OFF U>TR-K -
U>>BF OFF LEDs U>
U>> Element >> Relays U>> U>ST-L -
U>>ST-K - U>TR-L -
U>>TR-K -
LEDs U>>
U>>ST-L -
U>>TR-L -

U> Enable OFF

Type Characteristic
UE>Curve DEFINITE
3VoType59N UE tUE>RES 0.00 s
Common >> 74VTint59N OFF UE>def OFF
74VText59N OFF 0.10 UEn
tUE>def 1.00 s
UE> Element >> UE>inv OFF
0.10 UEn
tUE>>RES 0.00 s tUE>inv 10.0 s
59N >> UE>>def OFF UE>BLK1 OFF
0.10 UEn UE>BF OFF
tUE>>def 1.00 s Relays UE>
UE>>BLK1 OFF UE>ST-K -
SET U>>BF OFF
U>> Element >> UE>TR-K -
UE>disbyUE>> OFF LEDs UE>
Relays UE>> UE>ST-L -
UE>>ST-K - UE>TR-L -
UE>>TR-K -
LEDs UE>>
UE>>ST-L -
UE>>TR-L -

U2>def OFF
0.10 En
tU2>def 1.00 s
U2>BLK1 OFF
U2>BF OFF
59V2 >> U2> Element >> Relays U2>
U2>ST-K -
U2>TR-K -
LEDs U2>
U2>ST-L -
PROFILE A U2>TR-L -
64REF Enable OFF
IREF> OFF
1.00 IEn1
tREF> 1.00 s
64REF-BLK1 OFF
64REF-BLK2OUT OFF
6REF >> 64REF-BF OFF
Relays 64REF
64REF-ST-K -
64REF-TR-K -
LEDs 64REF
64REF-ST-L -
64REF-TR-L -

66 Enable OFF
Type66 NST
tC 1 min
NST 10
TST 30 s
66 >> TIN 0 min
66BLK1 OFF
Relays 66
66-TR-K -
LEDs 66
66-TR-L -

PROCEED SET MENU’ PROCEED PROFILE A MENU’

NVA100X-D_menuset4.ai

316 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

SETTING AND COMMISSIONING
 PREVIOUS PROFILE A MENU’

PREVIOUS SET MENU’

Mode67N I IED> Enable OFF

3VoType67N UE Type
Insens-Zone OFF Characteristic:
Common >>
M 1.5 IED>Curve DEFINITE
74VTint67N OFF IEDCLP> Mode OFF
74VText67N OFF tEDCLP> 0.10 s
IED> Element >> tED>RES 0.00 s
IED>def OFF
IED>> Enable OFF 1.00 IEn2
Type UED>def 0.100 UEn
Characteristic: ThetaE>def 60 gr
IED>>Curve DEFINITE BetaE>def 45 gr
IEDCLP>> Mode OFF IEDCLP>def1.50 IEn2
tEDCLP>> 0.10 s tED>def 1.00 s
tED>>RES 0.00 s IED>inv OFF
IED>>def OFF 1.00 IEn2
1.00 IEn2 UED>inv 0.100 UEn
UED>>def 0.100 UEn ThetaE>inv 60 gr
ThetaE>>def 60 gr BetaE>inv 45 gr
BetaE>>def 45 gr IEDCLP>inv1.50 IEn2
IEDCLP>>def1.5 IEn2 tED>inv 10.0 s
tED>>def 1.00 s IED>BLK1 OFF
IED>>inv OFF IED>BLK2IN OFF
IED>> Element >> 1.00 IEn IED>BLK2OUT OFF
UED>>inv 0.100 UEn IED>BLK4 OFF
ThetaE>>inv 60 gr IED>BF OFF
BetaE>>inv 45 gr Relays IED>
IEDCLP>>inv1.5 IEn2 IED>ST-K -
tED>>inv 10.0 s IED>TR-K -
IED>>BLK1 OFF LEDs IED>
IED>>BLK2IN OFF IED>ST-L -
IED>>BLK2OUT OFF IED>TR-L -
IED>>BLK4 OFF
IED>>BF OFF IED>>> Enable OFF
IED>disbyIED>> OFF IEDCLP>>> Mode OFF
Relays IED>> tEDCLP>>> 0.10 s
IED>>ST-K -
67N >> IED>>TR-K - tED>>>RES 0.00 s
LEDs IED>> IED>>>def OFF
IED>>ST-L - 1.00 IEn2
IED>>TR-L - UED>>>def 0.100 UEn
ThetaE>>>def 60 gr
SET PROFILE A IED>>> Element >> BetaE>>>def 45 gr
IED>>>> Enable OFF IEDCLP>>>def1.5 IEn2
tED>>>def 1.00 s
IEDCLP>>>> Mode OFF IED>>>BLK1 OFF
tEDCLP>>>> 0.10 s IED>>>BLK2IN OFF
tED>>>>RES 0.00 s IED>>>BLK2OUT OFF
IED>>>>def OFF IED>>>BLK4 OFF
1.00 IEn2 IED>>>BF OFF
UED>>>>def0.100 UEn IED>disIED>>> OFF
ThetaE>>>>def 60 gr IED>>disIED>>> OFF
BetaE>>>>def 45 gr Relays IED>>>
IEDCLP>>>>def1.5 IEn2 IED>>>ST-K -
tED>>>>def 1.00 s IED>>>TR-K -
IED>>>>BLK1 OFF LEDs IED>>>
IED>>>> Element >> IED>>>>BLK2IN OFF IED>>>ST-L -
IED>>>>BLK2OUT OFF IED>>>TR-L -
IED>>>>BLK4 OFF
IED>>>>BF OFF
IED>disIED>>>> OFF
IED>>disIED>>>> OFF
IED>>>disIED>>>>OFF
Relays IED>>>>
IED>>>>ST-K -
IED>>>>TR-K -
LEDs IED>>>>
IED>>>>ST-L -
IED>>>>TR-L -

PROCEED SET MENU’ PROCEED PROFILE A MENU’

NVA100X-D_menuset5.ai

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 317

SETTING AND COMMISSIONING
 PREVIOUS PROFILE A MENU’ IEDC> Enable OFF
Type
Mode67NC I Characteristic:
3VoType67NC UE IEDC>Curve DEFINITE
PREVIOUS SET MENU’ IECType67NC UE IEDCCLP> Mode OFF
Common >> tEDCCLP> 0.10 s
Insens-Zone OFF
M(C) 1.5 tEDC>RES 0.00 s
74VTint67N OFF IEDC>def OFF
74VText67N OFF 1.00 In
UEDC>def 0.100 UEn
ThetaEC>def 60 gr
IEDC> Element >> BetaEC>def 45 gr
IEDCCLP>def 1.50 In
IEDC>> Enable OFF tEDC>def 1.00 s
Type IEDC>inv OFF
Characteristic: 1.00 In
IEDC>>CurveDEFINITE UEDC>inv 0.100 UEn
IEDCCLP>> Mode OFF ThetaEC>inv 60 gr
tEDCCLP>> 0.10 s BetaE>inv 45 gr
tEDC>>RES 0.00 s IEDCCLP>inv 1.50 In
IEDC>>def OFF tEDC>inv 10.0 s
1.00 In IEDC>BLK1 OFF
UEDC>>def 0.100 UEn IEDC>BLK2IN OFF
ThetaEC>>def 60 gr IED>BLK2OUT OFF
BetaEC>>def 45 gr IEDC>BLK4 OFF
IEDCCLP>>def 1.5 In IEDC>BF OFF
tEDC>>def 1.00 s Relays IEDC>
IEDC>>inv OFF IEDC>ST-K -
IEDC>> Element >> 1.00 In IEDC>TR-K -
UEDC>>inv 0.100 UEn LEDs IEDC>
ThetaEC>>inv 60 gr IEDC>ST-L -
BetaEC>>inv 45 gr IEDC>TR-L -
IEDCCLP>>inv 1.5 In
tEDC>>inv 10.0 s IEDC>>> Enable OFF
IEDC>>BLK1 OFF IEDCCLP>>> Mode OFF
IEDC>>BLK2IN OFF tEDCCLP>>> 0.10 s
IEDC>>BLK2OUT OFF tEDC>>>RES 0.00 s
IEDC>>BLK4 OFF IEDC>>>def OFF
IEDC>>BF OFF 1.00 In
IEDC>disbyIEDC>>OFF UEDC>>>def0.100 UEn
Relays IEDC>> ThetaEC>>>def 60 gr
IEDC>>ST-K - BetaEC>>>def 45 gr
IEDC>>TR-K - IEDCLP>>>def 1.5 In
LEDs IEDC>> tEDC>>>def 1.00 s
IEDC>>ST-L - IEDC>>>BLK1 OFF
IEDC>>TR-L - IEDC>>>BLK2IN OFF
IEDC>>> Element >> IEDC>>>BLK2OUT OFF
67N(C) >> IEDC>>>BLK4 OFF
IEDC>>>> Enable OFF IEDC>>>BF OFF
IEDCCLP>>>> ModeOFF IEDC>disIEDC>>> OFF
tEDCCLP>>>> 0.10 s IEDC>>disIEDC>>>OFF
tEDC>>>>RES 0.00 s Relays IEDC>>>
IEDC>>>>def OFF IEDC>>>ST-K -
1.00 In IEDC>>>TR-K -
UEDC>>>>def0.100 UEn LEDs IEDC>>>
ThetaEC>>>>def60 gr IEDC>>>ST-L -
BetaEC>>>>def 45 gr IEDC>>>TR-L -
IEDCCLP>>>>def1.5 In
tEDC>>>>def 1.00 s
IEDC>>>>BLK1 OFF
IEDC>>>> Element >> IEDC>>>>BLK2IN OFF
IEDC>>>>BLK2OUT OFF
SET PROFILE A IEDC>>>>BLK4 OFF
IEDC>>>>BF OFF
IEDC>disIEDC>>>>OFF
IEDC>>disIEDC>>>>OFF
IEDC>>>disIEDC>>>>OFF
Relays IEDC>>>>
IEDC>>>>ST-K -
IEDC>>>>TR-K -
LEDs IEDC>>>>
IEDC>>>>ST-L -
IEDC>>>>TR-L -

f>def OFF
1.000 fn f>>def OFF
f> Element >> tf>def 1.00 s 1.000 fn
f>BLK1 OFF tf>>def 1.00 s
f>BF OFF f>>BLK1 OFF
Relays f> f>>BF OFF
f>ST-K - f>disbyf>> OFF
81O >> f>TR-K - Relays f>>
LEDs f> f>>ST-K -
f>ST-L - f>>TR-K -
f>TR-L - LEDs f>>
f>>ST-L -
f>> Element >> f>>TR-L -

f<def OFF
1.000 fn f<<def OFF
f< Element >> tf<def 1.00 s 1.000 fn
f<BLK1 OFF tf<def 1.00 s
f<BF OFF f<<BLK1 OFF
Relays f< f<<BF OFF
f<ST-K - f<disbyf<< OFF
f<TR-K - Relays f<<
LEDs f< f<<ST-K -
f<ST-L - f<<TR-K -
f<TR-L - LEDs f<<
f<<ST-L -
f<< Element >> f<<TR-L -
f<<<def OFF
1.000 fn
81U >> tf<<<def 1.00 s
f<<<BLK1 OFF f<<<<def OFF
f<<<BF OFF 1.000 fn
f<disbyf<<< OFF tf<<<<def 1.00 s
f<<disbyf<<< OFF f<<<<BLK1 OFF
f<<< Element >> Relays f<<< f<<<<BF OFF
f<<<ST-K - f<disbyf<<<< OFF
f<<<TR-K - f<<disbyf<<<< OFF
LEDs f<<< f<<<disbyf<<<< OFF
f<<<ST-L - Relays f<<<<
f<<<TR-L - f<<<<ST-K -
f<<<<TR-K -
f<<<< Element >> LEDs f<<<<
f<<<<ST-L -
f<<<<TR-L -

PROCEED SET MENU’ PROCEED PROFILE A MENU’ NVA100X-D_menuset5a.ai

318 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

SETTING AND COMMISSIONING
 87T Enable OFF
87T-BLK1 OFF
87T-BLK2OUT OFF
Common >> 87T-BLK4 OFF
PREVIOUS PROFILE A MENU’ 2nd-REST> 50%Id
87T(H)-BF OFF
87T(L)-BF OFF 5thd-REST> 50%Id
tdf>>def 1 s
PREVIOUS SET MENU’ tHREST> 0.10 s
Harmonic CROSS H-REST OFF
restraint >> ST2nd-REST-K -
ST5th-REST-K -
ST2nd-REST-L -
CT saturation SatDet OFF ST5th-REST-L -
detector >> tSatDet-RES 0.10 s

Id> 0.10 Inref

K1 20 %
K2 50 %
87G-87M-87T >>
Q 0.05 Inref
td> 0.04 s
Id> Element >> Relays Id>
Id>ST-K -
Id>TR-K -
LEDs Id>
Id>ST-L - Id>> 1.00 Inref
Id>TR-L - td>> 0.03 s
Relays Id>>
Id>>ST-K -
Id>> Element >> Id>>TR-K -
LEDs Id>>
Id>>ST-L -
Id>>TR-L -
I2ndh> Enable OFF
I2ndh> 10 %
t2ndh>RES 0.1 s
2ndh-REST >> Relays I2ndh>
I2ndh>ST-K -
LEDs I2ndh>
I2ndh>ST-L -

74TCS Enable OFF

74TCS-BLK1 OFF
Relays 74TCS
74TCS >> 74TCS-ST-K -
74TCS-TR-K -
LEDs 74TCS
74TCS-ST-L -
74TCS-TR-L -
ModeBLIN1 OFF
tB-IPh 2.00 s
tB-IE 2.00 s
Relays BLOCK2IN
PROFILE A >> tB-K -
LEDs BLOCK2IN
BLOCK2 INPUT >> tB-L -

ModeBLOUT1 OFF
tF-IPh 1.00 s
BLOCK2 >> tF-IE 1.00 s
tF-IPh/IE 1.00 s
Relays BLOCK2OUT
BLOCK2OUT-IPh-K -
BLOCK2 OUTPUT >> BLOCK2OUT-IE-K -
SET BLOCK2OUT-IPh/IE-K-
LEDs BLOCK2OUT
BLOCK2OUT-IPh-L -
tFI-IPh 1.00 s BLOCK2OUT-IE-L -
BLOCK4 >>
tFI-IE 1.00 s BLOCK2OUT-IPh/IE-L-

BF Enable OFF
IBF> ON
0.10 In
IEBF> ON
0.10 IEn
tBF 1.00 s
BF-BLK1 OFF
BF >> CB Input ON
Relays BF
BF-ST-K -
BF-TR-K -
LEDs BF
BF-ST-L -
BF-TR-L -

PROFILE B >> SAME FOR PROFILE A

ModeN.Open OFF
N.Open 10000
ModeSumI OFF
SumI 5000 In
ModeSumI^2t OFF
CBopen-K - tbreak 0.05 s
CBclose-K - SumI 5000 In^2s
LEDs-Relays CBclose-L -
allocation >> Mode-tOpen OFF
CIRCUIT BREAKER CBopen-L - Ktrig-break -
SUPERVISION >> CBdiag-K - tbreak> 1 s
CB Diagnostic >> Relays
N.Open-K -
SumI-K -
SumI^2t-K -
tbreak-K -
LEDs
N.Open-L -
SumI-L -
SumI^2t-L -
tbreak-L -

PROCEED SET MENU’ NVA100X-D_menuset6.ai

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 319

SETTING AND COMMISSIONING
 74VT Enable OFF
U2VT> ON
0.10 En
I2VT> ON
PREVIOUS SET MENU’ 0.10 In
UVT< ON
0.10 En
DIVT< ON
0.10 In
IVT< ON
VT SUPERVISION 0.100 In
74VT >> 74VT-AR ON
74VT-BK-EN ON
tVT-AL 1.0 s
74VT-BLK1 OFF
Relays 74VT
74VT-BK-K -
74VT-AL-K -
LEDs 74VT
74VT-BK-L -
74VT-AL-L -

74CT(H) Enable OFF

S(H)< 0.50
I(H)* ON
0.10 InH
CT SUPERVISION tS(H)< 1.00 s
74CT SIDE H >> S(H)<BLK1 OFF
Relays S(H)<
S(H)<TR-K -
LEDs S(H)<
S(H)<TR-L -

74CT(L) Enable OFF

S(L)< 0.50
SET I(L)* ON
0.10 InL
CT SUPERVISION tS(L)< 1.00 s
74CT SIDE L >> S(L)<BLK1 OFF
Relays S(L)<
S(L)<TR-K -
LEDs S(L)<
S(L)<TR-L -

RemTrBF OFF
Relays
REMOTE RemTrip-K -
TRIPPING >>
LEDs
RemTrip-L -

PulseBLOUT1 OFF
PulseBLIN1 OFF
PILOTE WIRE Relays
DIAGNOSTIC >> PulseBLIN1-K -
LEDs
PulseBLIN1-L -

Periods
DEMAND tFIX 15 min
MEASURES >> tROL 5 min
N.ROL 12

Protocol MODBUS
RS485 Address 1
Protocol >>
9600 bauds

Ethernet Local Local IP Address

Parameters >> 200.1.2.206
Local Subnet Mask
255.255.255.0
Local IP Gateway Remote IP Address
COMMUNICATION >> 127.0.0.1 127.0.0.1
Local DHCP Enable Remote Subnet Mask
OFF 255.255.255.0
Local State Remote IP Gateway
RUN 127.0.0.1
Port 1+2 Redundant
Ethernet Remote Port 1
Parameters >> Muxed: 0
Automa START
Link 1 TX: On
Link 2 FX: Off
Remote DHCP Enable
OFF
Startup Time: 5 s

Test state: OFF

Stop test? Yes >>
Start test? Yes >>
Test KC1-1? Yes >>
Test KC1-2? Yes >>
Test KC1-3? Yes >>
TEST >> Test KC1-x? Yes >>
Test KC1-8? Yes >>
Test KC2-1? Yes >>
Test KC2-2? Yes >>
Test KC2-3? Yes >>
Test KC2-x? Yes >>
Test KC2-8? Yes >>
NVA100X-D_menuset7.ai

320 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

SETTING AND COMMISSIONING
7.4 MAINTENANCE
The Pro-NX relays do not require any particular maintenance; all circuits use high quality static
components, the subassembly products undergo dynamic checks on their functioning before the
final assembling of the complete equipment. The dedicated circuits and the firmware for the self-test
function continuously check the relay operation; the continuously operating auto-zeroing function
dynamically corrects the measuring errors due to offset, heat dependent drifts, aging of components,
etc. The processor is equipped with a watch-dog circuit which restores the correct operation of the
firmware in case of fault.
If the following criteria are properly implemented:
• comprehensive functional tests at commissioning,
• absence of significant modification on the protection system,
• activation and permanent remote control of self-test alarms through supervision,
• control of self-test undetectable failures (comparing of measures with the external instruments,
auxiliary voltage control, etc ..)
• analysis of the stored information (faults and events, and oscillographic records),
periodic checks can be avoided. In the absence of some of the criteria listed above, it is advisable to
perform periodic checks every five years.

7.5 REPAIR
No repair of possible faults by the client is foreseen; if following to any irregularity of operation, the
above tests confirm the presence of a fault, it will be necessary to send the relay to the factory for
the repair and the consequent settings and checks.

7.6 PACKAGING
The Pro-N devices must be stored within the required temperature limits; the relative humidity should
not cause condensation or formation of frost.
It is recommended that the devices are stored in their packaging; in the case of long storage, espe-
cially in extreme climatic conditions, it is recommended that the device is supplied with power for
some hours before the commissioning, in order to bring the circuits to the rating conditions and to
stabilize the operation of the components.

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 321

SETTING AND COMMISSIONING
 8 APPENDIX
8.1 APPENDIX A1 - Inverse time curves
The operate characteristic of the protective elements is shown in the table:

IEC IEC IEC IEC IEEE IEEE IEEE

ANSI code Element DEFINITE CUSTOM type A type B type C type B type type type RECTIFIER I2t EM
SI VI EI LIT MI VI EI
21 Underimpedance „
27 Undervoltage „ „U<[1]
27V1 Positive sequence undervoltage „
32P Directional active overpower „
37 Undercurrent „
37P Directional active underpower „
40 Loss of field „
46M Negative sequence overcurrent for Motor „ „ „ „ „ „ „ „ „
46G Negative seq. overcurrent for Generator „ I2>>[2]
47 Phase reversal „
49MG Thermal image for Motor / Generator „
50/51 Phase overcurrent side H „ „ „ „ „ „ „ „ „I>[3] „ „
50/51 Phase overcurrent side L „ „ „ „ „ „ „ „ „I>[3] „ „
50N.1/51.1N Residual overcurrent side 1 „ „ „ „ „ „ „ „ „
50N.2/51.2N Residual overcurrent side 2 „ „ „ „ „ „ „ „ „
50N/51N(Comp) Calculated residual overcurrent „ „ „ „ „ „ „ „ „
51LR(48)/14 Locked rotor „ „ILR>[5]
51V Voltage restraint overcurrent „
55 Minimum power factor „
59 Overvoltage „ „U>[6]
59N Residual overvoltage „ „UE>[6]
59V2 Negative sequence overvoltage „
64REF Low impedance restricted earth fault „
66 Maximum number of startings „
67N Ground directional overcurrent „ „ „ „ „ „ „ „
Ground directional overcurrent -
67N(Comp)
(calculated residual current) „ „ „ „ „ „ „ „
67N(Comp) Ground directional overcurrent „ „ „ „ „ „ „ „
87NHIZ.1 High impedance restricted earth fault „ „ „ „ „ „ „ „
87NHIZ.2 High impedance restricted earth fault „ „ „ „ „ „ „ „
81O Overfrequency „
81U Underfrequency „
87G-87M-87T Differential for Generator-Motor-Transformer „
BF Circuit breaker failure „
74CT(H) CT monitoring - side H „
74CT(L) CT monitoring - side L „
74VT VT monitoring „
74TCS Trip circuit supervision „

Note 1 First element: t = 0.75 t U<inv / [1-(U/U<inv)]

Note 2 Second element, I2t: t =Kheat/(I2/IB)2 (con I2 ≥ I2>> and t 2min ≤ t ≤ t 2max)

Note 3 First element: 50/51, t = 2351 · t> inv / [(I/I> inv)5.6 - 1], first and second element 67, t = 2351 · t PD > inv / [(I/IPD > inv)5.6 - 1]

Note 4 First element, CAPACITOR: t = t>inv · {50000 / [1.1 · (IRMS/I>inv)17 -1]} + 0.1

Note 5 First element, t = (IMOT-ST / I)2 ∙ t LR>inv with I greater than ILR > inv

Note 6 First element 59, t = 0.5 t U >inv / [(U/U>inv) - 1] and First element 59N, t = 0.5 t UE > / [(UE /UE >inv) - 1]

322 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

APPENDIX
8.2 APPENDIX A1 - Inverse time IEC curves
— Mathematical formula
The mathematical formula, according the IEC 60255-3/BS142 standards is:[1]

K
t = t> inv ·
[(I/I> inv)α-1]

Where:
• t = operate time (in seconds)
• t I>inv = setting time multiplier (in seconds)
• I = input current
• I>inv = threshold setting

K = coefficient:
• K = 0.14 for IEC-A curve (Normal Inverse)
• K = 13.5 for IEC-B curve (Very Inverse)
• K = 120 for IEC-B curve (Long Inverse Time)
• K = 80 for IEC-C curve (Extremely Inverse)

α = curve shape constant:

• α = 0.02 for IEC-A curve (Normal Inverse)
• α = 1 for IEC-B curve (Very Inverse)
• α = 1 for IEC-B curve (Long Inverse Time)
• α = 2 for IEC-C curve (Extremely Inverse)

For all inverse time characteristics, following data applies:

• Asymptotic reference value (minimum pickup value): 1.1 I>inv
• Minimum operate time: 0.1 s
• Range where the equation is valid:[2][3] 1.1 ≤ I /I>inv ≤ 20
• If I> pickup ≥ 2.5 In, the upper limit is 50 In

Note 1 Symbols are concerning the overcurrent element. The comprehensive overview of the inverse time characteristics concerning the 50/51 and
50N/51N elements is dealt within the PROTECTIVE ELEMENTS section
Note 2 When the input value is more than 20 times the set point , the operate time is limited to the value corresponding to 20 times the set point
Nota 3 With setting more than 2.5 In for the 50/51 elements and 0.5 IEn for the 50N/51N elements, the upper limit of the measuring range is limited to 50
In and 10 IEn respectively.

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 323

APPENDIX
— 46M - First element - Standard inverse time curve (type A)

t [s]
10000 0.14
t =t2> inv ·
[(I2/I2> inv)0.02-1]

1000

t 2> inv

60 s
100

10 s

5s
10

1s

0.5 s
1

0.2 s

0.1 s

0.1 0.02 s

0.01
I2 /I2>inv
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20
1.1

Note: match of operating and setting time takes place when I2 /I2 >inv = 700
F_46M-IECA-Char.ai

324 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

APPENDIX
— 46M - First element - Very inverse time curve (IEC 60255-3/BS142 type B)

t [s]
10000
t =t2> inv · 13.5
[(I2/I2> inv) -1]

1000

100

t 2> inv

60 s

10
10 s

5s

1
1s

0.5 s
t> inv = 0.1 s

0.2 s

0.1 t> inv = 0.02 s

0.01
I2 /I2>inv
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20
1.1
Note: match of operating and setting time takes place when I2 /I2 >inv = 14.5
F_46B-IECB-Char.ai

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 325

APPENDIX
— 46M - First element - Extremely inverse time curve (IEC 60255-3/BS142 type C)

t [s]
100000
t =t> inv · 80
[(I/I> inv)2-1]

10000

1000

100

t 2> inv

60 s
10

10 s

1 5s

1s

0.1
t 2> inv = 0.02 s t 2> inv = 0.1 s t 2> inv = 0.2 s t 2> inv = 0.5 s

0.01 I2 /I2 >inv

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20
1.1

Note: match of operating and setting time takes place when I2 /I2 >inv = 9
F_46M-IECC-Char.ai

326 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

APPENDIX
— Phase overcurrent 50/51 side H and side L - Standard inverse time curve (IEC 60255-3/BS142 type A)

t [s]
10000 0.14
t =t (H)> inv ·
[(I/I(H)> inv)0.02-1]

t =t (L)> inv · 0.14

[(I/I(L)> inv)0.02-1]

1000

t (H)> inv

60 s
100

10 s

5s
10

1s

0.5 s
1

0.2 s

0.1 s

0.1 0.02 s

0.01 I /I(H)>inv
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 I /I(L)>inv
1.1

Nota: il tempo d’intervento impostato è riferito ad un valore di corrente pari a I/I(H)>inv o I/I(L)>inv= 700
F_51-IECA-Char.ai

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 327

APPENDIX
— Phase overcurrent 50/51 side H and side L - Very inverse time curve (IEC 60255-3/BS142 type B)

t [s]
10000
t =t (H)> inv · 13.5
[(I/I(H)> inv) -1]

t =t (L)> inv · 13.5

[(I/I(L)> inv) -1]

1000

100
t (H)> inv
t (L)> inv

60 s

10
10 s

5s

1
1s

0.5 s
0.1 s

0.2 s

0.1 0.02 s

I /I(H)>inv
0.01
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 I /I(L)>inv
1.1
Nota: il tempo d’intervento impostato è riferito ad un valore di corrente pari a I/I(H)>inv o I/I(L)>inv = 14.5
F_51-IECB-Char.ai

328 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

APPENDIX
— Phase overcurrent 50/51 side H and side L - Long Time Inverse curve (IEC 60255-3/BS142 type B)

t [s]
10000
t =t (H)> inv · 120
[(I/I(H)> inv) -1]

t =t (L)> inv · 120

[(I/I(L)> inv) -1]

1000

t (H)> inv
t (L)> inv
60 s

100

10 s

5s

10

1s

0.5 s

0.2 s
1

0.1 s

0.1 0.02 s

I /I(H)>inv
0.01
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 I /I(L)>inv
1.1

Nota: il tempo d’intervento impostato è riferito ad un valore di corrente pari a I/I(H)>inv o I/I(L)>inv = 121
F_51N-IEC-LITB-Char.ai

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 329

APPENDIX
— Phase overcurrent 50/51 side H and side L - Extremely inverse time curve (IEC 60255-3/BS142 type C)

t [s]
100000
t =t (H)> inv · 80
[(I/I(H)> inv)2-1]

t =t (L)> inv · 80
[(I/I(L)> inv)2-1]

10000

1000

100

t (H)> inv
t (L)> inv

60 s
10

10 s

1 5s

1s

0.1
0.02 s 0.1 s 0.2 s 0.5 s

I /I (H)>inv
0.01
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20
I /I (L)>inv
1.1

Nota: il tempo d’intervento impostato è riferito ad un valore di corrente pari a I/I(H)>inv o I/I(L)>inv = 9
F_51-IECC-Char.ai

330 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

APPENDIX
— Residual overcurrent 50N.1/51N.1, 50N.2/51N.2 and 50N(Comp)/51N(Comp) - Standard inverse time curve
(IEC 60255-3/BS142 type A)

t [s]
10000 0.14
t =t E1> inv ·
[(IE1/IE1> inv)0.02-1]

t =t E2> inv · 0.14

[(IE2/IE2> inv)0.02-1]

t =t EC> inv · 0.14

[(IEC/IEC> inv)0.02 -1]

1000

t E1>inv
t E1>inv
t EC>inv
60 s
100

10 s

5s
10

1s

0.5 s
1

0.2 s

0.1 s

0.1 0.02 s

IE1 /IE1>inv
0.01 IE2 /IE2 >inv
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 I /I >inv
1.1 EC EC

Note: match of operating and setting time takes place when IE1/IE1>inv, IE2 /IE2 >inv o IEC/IEC>inv = 700
F_51N-IECA-Char.ai

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 331

APPENDIX
— Residual overcurrent 50N.1/51N.1, 50N.2/51N.2 and 50N(Comp)/51N(Comp) -Very inverse time curve
(IEC 60255-3/BS142 type B)

t [s]
10000
t =t E1> inv · 13.5
[(IE1/IE1> inv) -1]

t =t E2> inv · 13.5

[(IE2/IE2> inv) -1]

t =t EC> inv · 13.5

[(IEC/IEC> inv) -1]

1000

100
t E1>inv
t E2>inv
t EC>inv
60 s

10
10 s

5s

1
1s

0.5 s
0.1 s

0.2 s

0.1 0.02 s

IE1 /IE1>inv
0.01 IE2 /IE2 >inv
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 IEC /IEC >inv
1.1

Note: match of operating and setting time takes place when IIE1/IE1>inv, IE2 /IE2 >inv o IEC/IEC>inv = 14.5
F_51N-IECB-Char.ai

332 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

APPENDIX
— Residual overcurrent 50N.1/51N.1, 50N.2/51N.2 and 50N(Comp)/51N(Comp) - Long Time Inverse curve
(IEC 60255-3/BS142 type B)

t [s]
10000
t =t E1> inv · 120
[(IE1/IE1> inv) -1]

t =t E2> inv · 120

[(IE2/IE2> inv) -1]

t =t EC> inv · 120

[(IEC/IEC> inv) -1]

1000

t E1>inv
t E2>inv
t EC>inv
60 s

100

10 s

5s

10

1s

0.5 s

1 0.2 s

0.1 s

0.1 0.02 s

I E1/IE1>inv
0.01 I E2 /IE2 >inv
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 I EC /IEC >inv
1.1

Note: match of operating and setting time takes place when IE1/IE1>inv, IE2 /IE2 >inv o IEC/IEC>inv = 121
F_51N-IEC-LITB-Char.ai

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 333

APPENDIX
— Residual overcurrent 50N.1/51N.1, 50N.2/51N.2 and 50N(Comp)/51N(Comp) - Extremely inverse time curve
(IEC 60255-3/BS142 type C)

t [s]
100000 80
t =t E1> inv ·
[(IE1/IE1> inv)2-1]

t =t E2> inv · 80
[(IE2/IE2> inv)2-1]

t =t EC> inv · 80
[(IEC/IEC> inv)2 -1]
10000

1000

100

t E1>inv
t E2>inv
t EC>inv

60 s
10

10 s

1 5s

1s

0.1
0.02 s 0.1 s 0.2 s 0.5 s

I E1/IE1>inv
0.01 I E2 /IE2 >inv
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 I EC /IEC >inv
1.1

Note: match of operating and setting time takes place when IE1/IE1>inv, IE2 /IE2 >inv o IEC/IEC>inv = 9
F_51-IECC-Char.ai

334 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

APPENDIX
— Ground directional overcurrent - 67N - Standard inverse time curve (IEC 60255-3/BS142 type A)

t [s]
10000 0.14
t =t ED> inv ·
[(IED/IED> inv)0.02-1]

t =t ED>> inv · 0.14

[(IED/IED>> inv)0.02-1]

1000

t ED> inv = 60 s
t ED>> inv = 60 s
100

t ED> inv = 10 s
t ED>> inv = 10 s

t PD> inv = 5 s
10 t ED>> inv = 5 s

t ED> inv = 1 s
t ED>> inv = 1 s

t ED> inv = 0.5 s

1 t ED>> inv = 0.5 s

t ED> inv = 0.2 s

t ED>> inv = 0.2 s

t ED> inv = 0.1 s

t ED>> inv = 0.1 s

t ED> inv = 0.02 s

0.1
t ED>> inv = 0.02 s

0.01 IED/IED>
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 IED/IED>>
1.1

Note: match of operating and setting time takes place when IED/IED>inv = 700 or IED/IED>>inv = 700
F_67N-IECA-Char.ai

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 335

APPENDIX
— Ground directional overcurrent - 67N - Very inverse time curve (IEC 60255-3/BS142 type B)

t [s]
10000
t =t ED> inv · 13.5
[(IED/IED> inv)-1]

t =t ED>> inv · 13.5

[(IED/IED>> inv)-1]

1000

100

t ED> inv = 60 s
t ED>> inv = 60 s

10
t ED> inv = 10 s
t ED>> inv = 10 s

t ED> inv = 5 s
t ED>> inv = 5 s

1
t ED> inv = 1 s
t ED>> inv = 1 s

t ED> inv = 0.5 s

t ED>> inv = 0.5 s

t ED> inv = 0.1 s

t ED>> inv = 0.1 s t ED> inv = 0.2 s
t ED>> inv = 0.2 s
0.1 t ED> inv = 0.02 s
t ED>> inv = 0.02 s

0.01 IED /IED>inv

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 IED /IED>inv
1.1
Note: match of operating and setting time takes place when IED/IED>inv = 14.5 or IED/IED>>inv = 14.5
F_67N-IECB-Char.ai

336 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

APPENDIX
— Ground directional overcurrent - 67N - Extremely inverse time curve (IEC 60255-3/BS142 type C)

t [s]
100000
t =t ED> inv · 80
[(IED/IED> inv)2-1]

t =t ED>> inv · 80
[(IED/IED>> inv)2-1]

10000

1000

100

t ED> inv = 60 s
10 t ED>> inv = 60 s

t ED> inv = 10 s
t ED> inv = 10 s

t ED> inv = 5 s
1
t ED> inv = 5 s

t ED> inv = 1 s
t ED> inv = 1 s

0.1
t ED> inv = 0.02 s t ED> inv = 0.1 s t ED> inv = 0.2 s t ED> inv = 0.5 s
t ED>> inv = 0.02 s t ED>> inv = 0.1 s t ED>> inv = 0.2 s t ED>> inv = 0.5 s

IED /IED>inv
0.01
IED /IED>>inv
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20
1.1

Note: match of operating and setting time takes place when IED/IED>inv = 9 o IED/IED>>inv = 9
F_67N-IECC-Char.ai

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 337

APPENDIX
— Ground directional overcurrent 67N(Comp) - Standard inverse time curve (IEC 60255-3/BS142 type A)

t [s]
10000

t = t EDC> inv · 0.14

[(IECL/IEDC> inv)0.02-1]

t = t EDC> inv · 0.14

[(IECH/IEDC> inv)0.02-1]

1000

t EDC> inv

60 s
100

10 s

5s
10

1s

0.5 s
1

0.2 s

0.1 s

0.1 0.02 s

0.01 IECH/IEDC> inv

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 IECL/IEDC> inv
1.1

Note: match of operating and setting time takes place when IECL/IEDC> inv o IECH/IEDC> inv = 700
F_51-IECA-Char.ai

338 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

APPENDIX
— Ground directional overcurrent 67N(Comp) - Very inverse time curve (IEC 60255-3/BS142 type B)

t [s]
10000

t = t EDC> inv · 13.5

[(IECL/IEDC> inv)-1]

t = t EDC> inv · 13.5

[(IECH/IEDC> inv)-1]
1000

100

t EDC> inv
60 s

10
10 s

5s

1
1s

0.5 s
0.1 s

0.2 s

0.1 0.02 s

0.01 IECL /IEDC> inv

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 IECH /IEDC> inv
1.1
Note: match of operating and setting time takes place when IECL/IEDC> inv o IECH/IEDC> inv = 14.5
F_67N(Comp)-IECB-Char.ai

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 339

APPENDIX
— Ground directional overcurrent 67N(Comp) - Extremely inverse time curve (IEC 60255-3/BS142 type C)

t [s]
100000

t = t EDC> inv · 80
[(IECH/IEDC> inv)2-1]

t = t EDC> inv · 80
[(IECL/IEDC> inv)2-1]

10000

1000

100

t EDC> inv

60 s
10

10 s

1 5s

1s

0.1
0.02 s 0.1 s 0.2 s 0.5 s

0.01 IECH/IEDC> inv

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 IECL/IEDC> inv
1.1

Nota: il tempo d’intervento impostato è riferito ad un valore di corrente pari a IECL/IEDC> inv o IECH/IEDC> inv = 9
F_67N(Comp)-IECBC-Char.ai

340 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

APPENDIX
8.3 APPENDIX A3 - Inverse time ANSI/IEEE curves
— Mathematical formula
The mathematical formula, according the ANSI/IEEE standards is:[1]

K
t = t> inv · +L
[(I/I> inv)α-1]

Where:
• t = operate time (in seconds)
• t I>inv = setting time multiplier (in seconds)
• I = input current
• I>inv = threshold setting

K = coefficient:
• K = 0.01 for ANSI/IEEE Moderately inverse curve
• K = 3.922 for ANSI/IEEE Very inverse curve
• K = 5.64 for ANSI/IEEE Extremely inverse curve

α = curve shape constant:

• α = 0.02 for ANSI/IEEE Moderately inverse curve
• α = 2 for ANSI/IEEE Very inverse curve
• α = 2 for ANSI/IEEE Extremely inverse curve

L = coefficient:
• L = 0.023 for ANSI/IEEE Moderately inverse curve
• L = 0.098 for ANSI/IEEE Very inverse curve
• L = 0.024 for ANSI/IEEE Extremely inverse curve

For all inverse time characteristics, following data applies:

• Asymptotic reference value (minimum pickup value): 1.1 I>inv
• Minimum operate time: 0.1 s
• Range where the equation is valid:[2][3] 1.1 ≤ I /I>inv ≤ 20
• If I> pickup ≥ 2.5 In, the upper limit is 50 In

Note 1 Symbols are concerning the overcurrent element. The comprehensive overview of the inverse time characteristics concerning the 50/51 and
50N/51N elements is dealt within the PROTECTIVE ELEMENTS section
Note 2 When the input value is more than 20 times the set point , the operate time is limited to the value corresponding to 20 times the set point
Nota 3 With setting more than 2.5 In for the 50/51 elements and 0.5 IEn for the 50N/51N elements, the upper limit of the measuring range is limited to 50
In and 10 IEn respectively.

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 341

APPENDIX
— Negative sequence overcurrent 46M - Moderately inverse time curve (ANSI/IEEE type MI)

t [s]
10000
t =t 2> inv · 0.01
+ 0.023
[(I2/I2> inv)0.02 -1]

1000

100

t 2> inv

60 s
10

10 s

1 5s

t 2> inv = 0.1 s 1s

t 2> inv = 0.5 s
t 2> inv = 0.2 s
0.1
t 2> inv = 0.02 s

0.01
I2 /I2 >inv
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20
1.1

Note: match of operating and setting time takes place when I2 /I2 >inv = 1.664
F_46LT-ANSIMI-Char.ai

342 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

APPENDIX
— Negative sequence overcurrent 46M - Very inverse time curve (ANSI/IEEE type VI)

t [s]
10000
t =t 2> inv · 3.922
+ 0.092
[(I2/I2> inv)2 -1]

1000

100

10 t 2> inv

60 s

10 s
1
t 2> inv = 0.02 s

t 2> inv = 0.1 s 5s

t 2> inv = 0.2 s

t 2> inv = 0.5 s

1s
0.1

0.01
I2 /I2 >inv
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20
1.1

Note: match of operating and setting time takes place when I2 /I2 >inv = 2.306
F_46LT-ANSIVI-Char.ai

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 343

APPENDIX
— Negative sequence overcurrent 46M - Extremely inverse time curve (ANSI/IEEE type EI)

t [s]
10000
t =t 2> inv · 5.64
+ 0.024
[(I2/I2> inv)2 -1]

1000

100

10

t 2> inv
60 s

1
t 2> inv = 0.02 s

t 2> inv = 0.1 s

t 2> inv = 0.2 s 10 s

t 2> inv = 0.5 s

5s
t 2> inv = 1 s

0.1

0.01
I2 /I2 >inv
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20
1.1

Note: match of operating and setting time takes place when I2 /I2 >inv = 2.789
F_46LT-ANSIEI-Char.ai

344 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

APPENDIX
— Phase overcurrent 50/51 side H and side L - Moderately inverse time curve (ANSI/IEEE type MI)

t [s]
10000
t =t (H)> inv · 0.01
+ 0.023
[(I/I(H)> inv)0.02 -1]

t =t (L)> inv · 0.01

+ 0.023
[(I/I(L)> inv)0.02 -1]

1000

100

t (H)> inv
t (L)> inv
60 s
10

10 s

1 5s

0.1 s 1s
0.5 s
0.2 s
0.1
0.02 s

I /I (H) >inv
0.01 I /I (L) >inv
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20
1.1

Note: match of operating and setting time takes place when I/I(H)>inv or I/I(L)>inv = 1.664
F_51-ANSIMI-Char.ai

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 345

APPENDIX
— Phase overcurrent 50/51 side H and side L - Very inverse time curve (ANSI/IEEE type VI)

t [s]
10000
t =t (H)> inv · 3.922
+ 0.092
[(I/I(H)> inv)2 -1]

t =t (L)> inv · 3.922

+ 0.092
[(I/I(L)> inv)2 -1]

1000

100

t (H)> inv
10 t (L)> inv

60 s

10 s
1
0.02 s

0.1 s 5s

0.2 s

0.5 s

1s
0.1

I /I (H) >inv
0.01
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 I /I (L) >inv
1.1

Note: match of operating and setting time takes place when I/I(H)>inv or I/I(L)>inv = 2.306
F_51-ANSIVI-Char.ai

346 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

APPENDIX
— Phase overcurrent 50/51 side H and side L - Extremely inverse time curve (ANSI/IEEE type EI)

t [s]
10000
t =t (H)> inv · 5.64
+ 0.024
[(I/I(H)> inv)2 -1]

t =t (L)> inv · 5.64

+ 0.024
[(I/I(L)> inv)2 -1]

1000

100

10

t (H)> inv
t (L)> inv
60 s

1
0.02 s

0.1 s

0.2 s 10 s

0.5 s
5s
1s

0.1

I /I (H) >inv
0.01
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 I /I (L) >inv
1.1

Note: match of operating and setting time takes place when I/I(H)>inv or I/I(L)>inv= 2.789
F_51-ANSIEI-Char.ai

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 347

APPENDIX
— Residual overcurrent 50N.1/51N.1, 50N.2/51N.2 e 50N(Comp)/51N(Comp) - Moderately inverse time curve
(ANSI/IEEE type MI)

t [s]
10000 0.01
t =t E1> inv · + 0.023
[(IE1/IE1> inv)0.02 -1]

t =t E2> inv · 0.01

+ 0.023
[(IE2/IE2> inv)0.02 -1]

t =t EC> inv · 0.01

+ 0.023
[(IEC/IEC> inv)0.02 -1]
1000

100

t E1>inv
t E2>inv
t EC>inv

60 s
10

10 s

1 5s

0.1 s 1s
0.5 s
0.2 s

0.1

0.02 s

IE1/IE1>inv
0.01 IE2 /IE2 >inv
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 IEC /IEC >inv
1.1

Note: match of operating and setting time takes place when IE1/IE1>inv, IE2 /IE2 >inv or IEC /IEC>inv = 1.664
F_51N-ANSIMI-Char.ai

348 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

APPENDIX
— Residual overcurrent 50N.1/51N.1, 50N.2/51N.2 and 50N(Comp)/51N(Comp) - Very inverse time curve
(ANSI/IEEE type VI)

t [s]
10000
t =tE1> inv · 3.922
+ 0.092
[(IE1/IE1> inv)2 -1]

t =tE2 > inv · 3.922

+ 0.092
[(IE2 /IE2 > inv)2 -1]

t =tEC> inv · 3.922

+ 0.092
[(IEC /IEC> inv)2 -1]

1000

100

t E1>inv
10 t E2>inv
t EC>inv
60 s

10 s
1
0.02 s

0.1 s 5s

0.2 s

0.5 s

1s
0.1

IE1/IE1>inv
0.01 IE2 /IE2 >inv
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 IEC /IEC >inv
1.1

Note: match of operating and setting time takes place when IE1/IE1>inv, IE2 /IE2 >inv or IEC /IEC>inv = 2.306
F_51N-ANSIVI-Char.ai

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 349

APPENDIX
— Residual overcurrent 50N.1/51N.1, 50N.2/51N.2 and 50N(Comp)/51N(Comp) - Extremely inverse time curve (EI)

t [s]
10000
t =t E1> inv · 5.64
+ 0.024
[(IE1/IE1> inv)2 -1]

t =t E2> inv · 5.64

+ 0.024
[(IE2/IE2> inv)2 -1]

t =t EC> inv · 5.64

+ 0.024
[(IEC/IEC> inv)2 -1]
1000

100

10

t E1>inv
t E2>inv
t EC>inv
60 s

1
0.02 s

0.1 s

0.2 s 10 s

0.5 s
5s
1s

0.1

IE1/IE1>inv
0.01 IE2 /IE2 >inv
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 IEC /IEC >inv
1.1
Note: match of operating and setting time takes place when IE1/IE1>inv, IE2 /IE2 >inv or IEC /IEC>inv = 2.789
F_51N-ANSIEI-Char.ai

350 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

APPENDIX
— Directional ground overcurrent 67N - Moderately inverse time curve (ANSI/IEEE type MI)

t [s]
10000
t =tED> inv · 0.01
+ 0.023
[(IED/IED> inv)0.02 -1]

1000

100

t ED> inv

60 s
10

10 s

1 5s

t ED> inv = 0.1 s t ED> inv = 0.5 s 1s

t ED> inv = 0.2 s

0.1

t ED> inv = 0.02 s

0.01
IED/IED>inv
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20
1.1
Note: match of operating and setting time takes place when IED/IED>inv = 1.664
F_67N-ANSIMI-Char.ai

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 351

APPENDIX
— Directional ground overcurrent 67N - Very inverse time curve (ANSI/IEEE type VI)

t [s]
10000
t =tED> inv · 3.922
+ 0.092
[(IED/IED> inv)2 -1]

1000

100

10 t ED> inv
60 s

10 s
1
t ED> inv = 0.02 s

t ED> inv = 0.1 s 5s

t ED> inv = 0.2 s

t ED> inv = 0.5 s

1s
0.1

0.01
IED/IED>inv
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20
1.1

Note: match of operating and setting time takes place when IED/IED>inv = 2.306
F_67N-ANSIVI-Char.ai

352 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

APPENDIX
— Directional ground overcurrent 67N - Extremely inverse time curve (ANSI/IEEE type EI)

t [s]
10000
t =tED> inv · 5.64
+ 0.024
[(IED/IED> inv)2 -1]

1000

100

10

t ED> inv
60 s

1
t ED> inv = 0.02 s

t ED> inv = 0.1 s

t ED> inv = 0.2 s 10 s

t ED> inv = 0.5 s

5s
t ED> inv = 1 s

0.1

0.01
IED/IED>inv
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20
1.1

Note: match of operating and setting time takes place when IED/IED>inv = 2.789
F_67N-ANSIEI-Char.ai

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 353

APPENDIX
— Directional ground overcurrent 67N(Comp) - Moderately inverse time curve (ANSI/IEEE type MI)

t [s]
10000 0.01
t =tEDC> inv · + 0.023
[(IEDH /IEDC> inv)0.02 -1]

t =tEDC> inv · 0.01

+ 0.023
[(IEDL /IEDC> inv)0.02 -1]

1000

100

tEDC> inv

60 s
10

10 s

1 5s

0.1 s 1s

0.1

0.02 s 0.2 s 0.5 s

IEDH /IEDC >inv

0.01 IEDL /IEDC >inv
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20
1.1

Note: match of operating and setting time takes place when IEDH /IEDC>inv or IEDL /IEDC>inv = 1.664
F_67NC-ANSIMI-Char.ai

354 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

APPENDIX
— Directional ground overcurrent 67N(Comp) - Very inverse time curve (ANSI/IEEE type VI)

t [s]
10000

t =tEDC> inv · 3.922

+ 0.092
[(IEDH /IEDC> inv)2 -1]

t =tEDC> inv · 3.922

+ 0.092
[(IEDL /IEDC> inv)2 -1]

1000

100

tEDC> inv
10

60 s

1 10 s
0.02 s

0.1 s 5s

0.2 s

0.5 s

0.1 1s

IEDH /IEDC >inv

0.01
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 IEDL /IEDC >inv
1.1

Note: match of operating and setting time takes place when IEDH /IEDC>inv or IEDL /IEDC>inv = 2.306
F_67N(Comp)-ANSIVI-Char.ai

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 355

APPENDIX
— Directional ground overcurrent 67N(Comp) - Extremely inverse time curve (ANSI/IEEE type EI)

t [s]
10000

t =tEDC> inv · 5.64

+ 0.024
[(IEDH /IEDC> inv)2 -1]

t =tEDC> inv · 5.64

+ 0.024
[(IEDL /IEDC> inv)2 -1]

1000

100

10

tEDC> inv

60 s

0.02 s

0.1 s 10 s

0.2 s
5s
1s

0.1
0.5 s

IPD/IPD>inv
0.01
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20
IPD/IPD>>inv
1.1

Note: match of operating and setting time takes place when IEDH /IEDC>inv or IEDL /IEDC>inv = 2.789
F_67N(Comp)-ANSIEI-Char.ai

356 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

APPENDIX
8.4 APPENDIX A3 - Inverse time - RECTIFIER, I2t and EM curves

— Mathematical formula
The mathematical formula for RECTIFIER, I-squared-t (I2t) and Electromechanical curves (EM) is:[1]

K
t = t>inv ·
A·(I/I> inv)α-B]

Where:

• t = operate time (in seconds)

• t I>inv = setting time multiplier (in seconds)
• I = input current
• I>inv = threshold setting

K = coefficient:
• K = 2351 for RECTIFIER curve (RI)
• K = 16 for I2t curve
• K = 0.28 for Electromechanical curve (EM)

α = curve shape constant:

• α = 5.6 for RECTIFIER curve (RI)
• α = 2 for I-squared-t (I2t) curve
• α = -1 for Electromechanical curve (EM)

A = coefficient:
• A = 1 for RECTIFIER curve (RI)
• A = 1 for I-squared-t (I2t) curve
• A = -0.236 for Electromechanical curve (EM)

B = coefficient:
• B = 1 for RECTIFIER curve (RI)
• B = 0 for I-squared-t (I2t) curve
• B = -0.339 for Electromechanical curve (EM)

For all inverse time characteristics, following data applies:

• Asymptotic reference value (minimum pickup value): 1.1 I>inv
• Minimum operate time: 0.1 s
• Range where the equation is valid:[2][3] 1.1 ≤ I/I>inv ≤ 20
• If I> pickup ≥ 2.5 In, the upper limit is 50 In

Note 1 Symbols are concerning the overcurrent element. The comprehensive overview of the inverse time characteristics concerning the 50/51 and
50N/51N elements is dealt within the PROTECTIVE ELEMENTS section
Note 2 When the input value is more than 20 times the set point , the operate time is limited to the value corresponding to 20 times the set point
Nota 3 With setting more than 2.5 In for the 50/51 elements and 0.5 IEn for the 50N/51N elements, the upper limit of the measuring range is limited to 50
In and 10 IEn respectively.

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 357

APPENDIX
— Phase overcurrent 50/51 side H and side L - Rectifier curves

t [s]
1000 000 2351
t =t (H)> inv ·
[(I/I(H)> inv)5.6 -1]

t =t (L)> inv · 2351

[(I/I(L)> inv)5.6 -1]

100 000

10 000

t (H)> inv
t (L)> inv

1000

100 60 s

10 s

5s
10

1s

0.5 s

1
0.1 s

0.1 0.02 s

0.1 s

I /I (H) >inv
0.01
I /I (L) >inv
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20
1.1

Note: match of operating and setting time takes place when I/I(H)>inv or I/I(L)>inv = 4
F_51-RI-Char.ai

358 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

APPENDIX
— Negative sequence overcurrent 46M - I2 t inverse curves (I2t=K)

t [s]
10000
16
t = t 2 >inv ·
[(I2 /I2 > inv)2]

1000

100

10

t2>inv = 60 s

t 2 >inv = 1 s
1
t 2 >inv = 0.5 s

t 2 >inv = 0.2 s t2>inv = 10 s

t2>inv = 10 s

t2>inv = 5 s
t 2 >inv = 0.02 s
t2>inv = 5 s

0.1
t 2 >inv = 0.1 s

0.01 I2 /I2 > inv

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20
1.1

Note: match of operating and setting time takes place when I2/I2>inv = 4
F_46M-I2t-Char.ai

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 359

APPENDIX
— Phase overcurrent 50/51 side H and side L - I2 t inverse curves (I2t=K)

t [s]
10000
t =t (H)> inv · 16
[(I/I(H)> inv)2]

t =t (L)> inv · 16
[(I/I(L)> inv)2]

t =t (H)>> inv · 16
[(I/I(H)>> inv)2]
1000
t =t (L)>> inv · 16
[(I/I(L)>> inv)2]

100

10 t (H)> inv
t (L)> inv
t (H)>> inv
t (L)>> inv

60 s

1s

1
0.5 s

0.2 s 10 s
10 s

5s
t>inv = 0.02 s 5s

0.1
t>inv = 0.1 s

I /I (H)>inv I /I (L)>inv
0.01
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 I /I (H)>>inv I /I (L)>>inv
1.1

Note: match of operating and setting time takes place when I/I(H)>inv or I/I(L)>inv = 4
F_51-I2t-Char.ai

360 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

APPENDIX
— Phase overcurrent 50/51 side H and side L - I2 t inverse curves (I2t=K)

t [s]
10000
t =tPD> inv · 16
[(IPD/IPD> inv)2]

t =tPD>> inv · 16
[(IPD/IPD>> inv)2]

1000

100

10

t PD> inv = 1 s
t PD> inv = 60 s
t PD>> inv = 1 s
t PD>> inv = 60 s
t PD> inv = 0.5 s
t PD>> inv = 0.5 s
1 t PD> inv = 0.2 s
t PD>> inv = 0.2 s

t PD> inv = 0.1 s

t PD>> inv = 0.1 s t PD> inv = 10 s
t PD>> inv = 10 s

t PD> inv = 5 s
t PD>> inv = 5 s

0.1

t PD> inv = 0.02 s

t PD>> inv = 0.02 s

0.01
IPD/IPD>inv
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 IPD/IPD>>inv
1.1
Note: match of operating and setting time takes place when IPD/IPD>inv = 4 or IPD/IPD>>inv = 4
F_67-I2t-Char.ai

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 361

APPENDIX
— Negative sequence overcurrent 46M - Electromechanical inverse curves (EM)

t [s]
10000
t =t2> inv · 0.28
[-0.236 · (I2/I2> inv)-1+0.339]

1000

100
t2> inv

60 s

10 10 s

5s

1
1s

0.5 s

t2> inv = 0.02 s 0.2 s

t2> inv = 0.1 s

0.1

0.01
2 3 4 5 6
I2 /I2>inv
7 8 9 10 20
1.1

Note: match of operating and setting time takes place when I2/I>inv = 4
F_46LT-EM-Char.ai

362 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

APPENDIX
— Phase overcurrent 50/51 side H and side L - Electromechanical inverse curves (EM)

t [s]
10000
t =t (H)> inv · 0.28
[-0.236 · (I/I(H)> inv)-1+0.339]

t =t (L)> inv · 0.28

[-0.236 · (I/I(L)> inv)-1+0.339]

1000

100
t (H)>> inv
t (L)>> inv
60 s

10 10 s

5s

1
1s

0.5 s

0.02 s 0.2 s
0.1 s

0.1

I /I(H)>inv
0.01
2 3 4 5 6
I /I(L)>inv
7 8 9 10 20
1.1

Note: match of operating and setting time takes place when I/I(H)>inv or I/I(L)>inv = 4
F_51-EM-Char.ai

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 363

APPENDIX
— Residual overcurrent 50N.1/51N.1, 50N.2/51N.2 and 50N(Comp)/51N(Comp) - Electromechanical inverse curves (EM)

t [s]
10000
t =tE > inv · 0.28
[-0.236 · (IE /IE > inv)-1+ 0.339]
0.28
t = tEC> inv ·
[-0.236 · (IEC /IEC> inv)-1+ 0.339]

1000

100 t E>inv
t EC>inv

60 s

10 10 s

5s

1
1s

0.5 s

0.02 s 0.2 s
0.1 s

0.1

IE /IE >inv
0.01
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
IEC /IEC >inv
20
1.1
Note: match of operating and setting time takes place when IE /IE >inv or IEC /IEC>inv = 4
F_51N-EM-Char.ai

364 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

APPENDIX
— Ground directional overcurrent 67N - Electromechanical inverse curves (EM)

t [s]
10000
t =tED> inv · 0.28
[-0.236 · (IED/IED> inv)-1+ 0.339]

t =tED>> inv · 0.28

[-0.236 · (IED/IED>> inv)-1+ 0.339]

1000

t ED> inv
100
t ED>> inv

60 s

10
10 s

5s

1
1s

0.5 s

0.2 s
0.1 s

0.1

0.02 s

IED/IED>inv
0.01
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
IED/IED>>inv
20
1.1

Note: match of operating and setting time takes place when IED/IED>inv = 4 or IED/IED>>inv = 4
F_67N-EM-Char.ai

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 365

APPENDIX
— Ground directional overcurrent 67N(Comp) - Electromechanical inverse curves (EM)

t [s]
10000
t =tEDC> inv · 0.28
[-0.236 · (IEDC /IEDH> inv)-1+ 0.339]

t =tEDC> inv · 0.28

[-0.236 · (IEDC /IEDL > inv)-1+ 0.339]

t =tEDC>> inv · 0.28

[-0.236 · (IEDC /IEDH>> inv)-1+ 0.339]
1000
t =tEDC>> inv · 0.28
[-0.236 · (IEDC /IEDL >> inv)-1+ 0.339]

tEDC> inv
100 tEDC>> inv

60 s

10
10 s

5s

1
1s

0.5 s

0.2 s
0.1 s

0.1

0.02 s

IEDC /IEDH>inv IEDC /IEDL >inv

0.01
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
IEDC /IEDH>>inv IEDC /IEDL >>inv
20
1.1

Note: match of operating and setting time takes place when IEDC /IEDH>inv = 4 or IEDC /IEDH>>inv = 4
F_67N-EM-Char.ai

366 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

APPENDIX
8.5 APPENDIX B1 - I/O Diagram

NVA100X-D
4-20 mA OC1E
A1 A 1
I L1-L
A2 + KC1-1 3
Mis.1 # / ∩ - 1

SIDE L CURRENT INPUTS

2
A3 STANDARD 2
4
I L2-L 3
A4 KC1-2 6
4
A5 5
I L3-L + 5 7
OPTIONS Mis.2 # / ∩ -
A6 6 KC1-3
7 8
A7 8 9

OUTPUT RELAYS
I E-1 B1 ≅ B KC1-4
A8 UAUX + 9
B2 Mis.3 # / ∩ - 10
10
11
C1 C B3 KC1-5
I L1-H U L1 12
C2 B4 + 11 13
SIDE H CURRENT INPUTS

C3 B5 Mis.4 # / ∩ - KC1-6

VOLTAGE INPUTS
12
I L2-H U L2 14
13
C4 B6
14 15
C5 B7 KC1-7
I L3-H + 17
U L3 15
C6 B8 Mis.5 # / ∩ - 16
16
17 18
B9 KC1-8
C7 18 20
UE
I E-2 19
B10 +
C8 19
Mis.6 # / ∩ -
20
AUX-IN Pt100
IN1C
IN2D PT1
1
IN1 1 T1 MPT1
1 1 2
IN1-1 IN2-1 OC2F GND1
1 3
IN2 2
2 2 KC2-1 3 PT2
IN1-2 IN2-2 T2
4
2 MPT2
5
IN3 3 4 GND2
3 3 6
IN1-3 IN2-3 KC2-2 6 PT3
IN4 5 T3
7
4 MPT3
4 4 8
IN1-4 IN2-4 7 GND3
5 5 5 KC2-3 9
IN5 7
7 7 8 PT4
10
IN1-5 IN2-5 T4 MPT4
9 11
IN6 8 KC2-4 GND4
8 8 12
IN1-6 IN2-6 10 PT5
13
IN7 9 11 T5 MPT5
9 9 KC2-5 14
IN1-7 IN2-7 GND5
12 15
IN8 10 PT6
10 10 13 16
BINARY INPUTS

IN2-8
BINARY INPUTS

IN1-8 T6 MPT6
6 6 6 KC2-6 17
14 GND6
IN9 11 18
11 11
IN1-9 IN2-9 15 PT7
KC2-7 T7
19
IN10 12 17 MPT7
20
12 12
IN1-10 IN2-10 16 GND7
21
IN11 18 PT8
13 13 13 KC2-8 22
IN1-11 IN2-11 20 T8 MPT8
23
19 GND8
IN12 14 14 24
14
IN1-12 IN2-12
15 15 15 IRIG-B
17
IN13
17 17 X
IN2-13
BLOCK OUT

IN1-13
BLOUT-
AM IRIG-B IN X1
IN14 18
18 18 BLOUT+ X2
IN1-14 IN2-14
IRIG-B/1PPS IN
IN15 19
19 19 B-
RS485

IN1-15 IN2-15 X5
1PPS OUT A+
IN16 X6
20 20 20
IN1-16 IN2-16 IRIG-B OUT
16 16 16
Ethernet locale TX [1]
ETHERNET

External X Note [1] TX [1]

BLOCK IN

module X3 two redundant ports with hw-sw switching

FX [1]
X4 selectable from TX (RJ45) + FX (optical fiber), TX + TX or FX + FX
A version with two simultaneously active Ethernet ports
FX [1]
with RSTP protocol is available

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 367

APPENDIX
8.6 APPENDIX B2 - Interfaces

X B- 5
Supervision
RS485

A+ 6
unit

TX [1]
ETHERNET

TX [1]

Note [1]
TX [1]
ETHERNET

two redundant ports with hw-sw switching

selectable from TX (RJ45) + FX (optical fiber), TX + TX or FX + FX
A version with two simultaneously active Ethernet ports with RSTP protocol is available
FX [1]

FX [1]
ETHERNET

FX [1]

FRONT PANEL

Interfaces.ai

368 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

APPENDIX
8.7 APPENDIX B3 - Protective elements

- Protective & control elements

NVA100X-D 21 Underimpedance
I L1-H, I L2-H, I L3-H
26 Thermal with Pt100 probes
I E-2
50N.2/51N.2 74CT 27 Undervoltage
52 27V1 Positive sequence undervoltage
50/51
32P Directional active overpower
37 Undercurrent
37P Directional active underpower
40 Loss of field
87G 87T
46M-46G Negative sequence overcurrent
U L1, U L2 , U L3 47 Phase reversal
UE 74TCS 49MG Thermal image
U EC U E U EC U E U EC
I ECH I ECL 50/51 Phase overcurrent side H and side L
21 74VT
51LR(48)/14 Locked rotor
37 27 51V Voltage restraint overcurrent
59N 67N 67N(Comp)
37P 27V1
50N1-2/51N1-2/87NHIZ* Residual overcurrent (sides1-2)/
I ECH I ECL High impedance restricted earth fault
40 47
50N(Comp)/51N(Comp) Calculated residual overcurrent
26 46 59 55 Minimum power factor
G 50N/51N(Comp)
49 59V2 59 Overvoltage
I ECH 59N Residual overvoltage
50/51 81O
64REF 59V2 Negative sequence overvoltage
51V 81U 64REF Low impedance restricted earth fault
* 87NHIZ 50N.1/51N.1 * 66 Maximum number of startings (Restart inhibition)
I E-1
67N Ground directional overcurrent
I L1-L , I L2-L , I L3-L
74CT BF 67N(Comp) Ground directional overcurrent with calculated
residual current
81O/81U Overfrequency and underfrequency
87G-87M-87T Double slope biased differential for
generator/motor/transformer
BF Circuit breaker failure
74CT-74VT CT-VT supervision
74TCS Trip circuit supervision

NVA100X-D
I L1-L , I L2-L , I L3-L
74CT
74TCS Note *: when 87NHIZ is enabled, the 50N/51N/67N functions
I E2
50N.2/51N.2 * 87NHIZ
BF can not be used with residual current (IE) measured directly
U L1, U L2 , U L3
UE
32P
U E U EC U E U EC I ECH I ECL
UE U EC
37 27

37P 27V1
52 59N 67N 67N(Comp)
40 55
METERING SYNCHRONIZING
46 59

I ECH I ECL
66 59V2 - I L1..I L3,I E,.... - SNTP
26
- Oscillography - IRIG-B
49 81O
M 50/51 81U
- Events & Faults log

50N/51N(Comp)
I ECH I ECL 51LR 74VT
CONTROL & MONITORING COMMUNICATION
87M - Modbus RS485
- TCS
I L1-H, I L2-H, I L3-H - Modbus TCP/IP
74CT 50/51 - CB MONITORING,..
- IEC61850
- IEC 870-5-103/DNP3

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 369

APPENDIX
8.8 APPENDIX B4 - Connection diagrams
Note: All diagram must be considered just as example; they cannot be comprehensive for real applications.
For all diagrams the output contacts are shown in de-energized state for standard reference.

L1 L2 L3 NVA100X-D
P2 C1
S2
IL1H
S1 C2
P1 C3 74TCS
IL1H, IL2H, IL3H
IL2H
C4
C5
IL3H
C6
74CT
P1 C7
S1
IE2 50N.1/51N.2
S2 C8
P2

A N n a B3
B N n b UL1
B4
C N n c UL1, UL2 , UL3
B5
UL2
B6
B7 87G
UL3
B8
21 74VT
UE UEC
dn da IECH IECL
37 27
dn db B9
(*) UE UEC UE UEC
dn dc
B10 37P 27V1
(*) Antiferrorisonance 67N(Comp)
40 47
26 IECH IECL
G 59N 67N
46 59

49 59V2
IL1L 50N/51N(Comp)
P1 A2
S1
A3 50/51 81O
S2
P2 IL2L
A4 51V 81U
A5 IL1L , IL2L , IL3L
74CT BF
IL3L
A6
IECH
87NHIZ * 64REF
A7

P1 IE1 50N.1/51N.1
A8
S1
S2
P2 Note *: when 87NHIZ is enabled, the 50N/51N/67N functions
can not be used with residual current (IE) measured directly

NOTE
- To current with incoming direction in the protected component must match incoming current in the reference terminals of of the relay current inputs ,
while to current having a outgoing direction from the protected component must match output current in the reference terminals of the current inputs
of the relay.
- The input current in the reference terminals of of the relay current inputs of the are considered positive, negative for outgoing ones.
- This Convention applies: the CTs polarity P1 to the protected component.

Differential protection of generator

370 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

APPENDIX
 L1 L2 L3
NVA100X-D

P2 A1
S2
IL1L
S1 A2
74TCS
P1 A3
IL1L , IL2L , IL3L
IL2L
A4
A5 74CT
IL3L
A6
BF

85NHIZ
P1 C7
*
32P 27
S1
C8
IE2 50N.2/51N.2
S2
P2 37 27V1
dn da
dn db B9 37P 55
(*) UEC UE UEC UE UEC IECH IECL
dn dc
B10
UE
40 59

(*) Antiferrorisonance 46 59V2

B3
59N 67N 67N(Comp) 66 81O
A N n a
B N n b UL1
B4 49 81U
C N n c UEC
B5
UL2 IECH IECL 50/51 74VT
B6
B7 IECH IECL 51LR
UL3
B8

50N/51N(Comp) 87M

UL1, UL2 , UL3

26

M
C1
74CT
IL1H
P1 C2
S1
C3
S2 IL1H, IL2H, IL3H
P2 IL2H
C4
C5
IL3H
C6

Note *: when 87NHIZ is enabled, the 50N/51N/67N functions can not be

used with residual current (IE) measured directly

NOTE
- Incoming currents to the protected transformer must match to the the reference current inputs of the relay, with current direction leaving the
protected transformer must match current output from the current inputs of the relay.
- Incoming currents in the reference terminals of of the relay current inputs are considered positive, the outgoing negative.
- This convention applies to indicate the P1 CTs polarity toward the protected transformer.

Differential protection for motor

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 371

APPENDIX
 L1 L2 L3 NVA100X-D
P2 C1
S2
IL1H
S1 C2
P1 C3
74TCS
IL1H, IL2H, IL3H
IL2H
C4
C5
IL3H
C6
P1 C7 74CT
S1
IE2 50N.1/51N.2
S2 C8
P2

n a B3
n b UL1
B4
n c
B5 UL1, UL2 , UL3
UL2
B6
B7
87T
UL3
B8
A N
B N 21 74VT
UE UEC
C N IECH IECL
37 27
dn da
dn db B9
UE UEC UE UEC 37P 27V1
dn dc (*)
B10 67N(Comp)
(*) Antiferrorisonance 40 47
IECH IECL
26
46 59
G 59N 67N
59V2
49
50N/51N(Comp)
IL1L 81O
P1 A2 50/51
S1
A3
S2
P2 IL2L 51V 81U
A4 IL1L , IL2L , IL3L
A5 74CT BF
IL3L
A6 IECH
87NHIZ * 64REF
A7
IE1 50N.1/51N.1
P1 A8
S1
S2
P2 Note *: when 87NHIZ is enabled, the 50N/51N/67N functions
can not be used with residual current (IE) measured directly

NOTE
- To current with incoming direction in the protected component must match incoming current in the reference terminals of of the relay current inputs ,
while to current having a outgoing direction from the protected component must match output current in the reference terminals of the current inputs
of the relay.
- The input current in the reference terminals of of the relay current inputs of the are considered positive, negative for outgoing ones.
- This Convention applies: the CTs polarity P1 to the protected component.

Differential protection of Transformer/generator

372 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

APPENDIX
 L1 L2 L3 NVA100X-D

P2 C1
S2
IL1H
S1 C2
P1 C3 74TCS
IL1H, IL2H, IL3H
IL2H
C4
C5 74CT
IL3H
C6
C7
50/51
P1
S1 IECH
IE2 50N.2/51N.2 50N/51N(Comp)
S2 C8
P2
87NHIZ.2 *

26

A7 IECL
87T
A8
IE1 50N.1/51N.1 64REF 50N/51N(Comp)
P1
S1
S2 87NHIZ.1 *
P2

A N n a B3
B N n b UL1
B4
C N n c 27
B5
UL2 UL1, UL2 , UL3
B6 27V1
B7

B8
UL3 37 47

dn da 46 59
dn db B9
(*) UE UEC 49 59V2
dn dc
B10
(*) Antiferrorisonance 81O
50/51
IL1L
P1 A2
S1 59N BF 81U
A3
S2 IL1L , IL2L , IL3L
P2 IL2L 74CT
A4 74VT
A5
IL3L
A6
Note *: when 87NHIZ is enabled, the 50N/51N/67N functions can not be
used with residual current (IE) measured directly

NOTE
- Incoming currents to the protected transformer must match to the the reference current inputs of the relay, with current direction leaving the
protected transformer must match current output from the current inputs of the relay.
- Incoming currents in the reference terminals of of the relay current inputs are considered positive, the outgoing negative.
- This convention applies to indicate the P1 CTs polarity toward the protected transformer.

Differential protection for tho winding transformers

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 373

APPENDIX
8.9 APPENDIX C1 - Pro-NX Dimensions

FRONT VIEW SIDE VIEW

215 222 20
177

REAR VIEW FLUSH MOUNTING CUTOUT

215 210 ±0.3
207 189
189 94.5

In 5A 1A 5A U En 100V

IN2D IN1C OC2F OC1E

I En 1A 1A 5A Un 100V
UAUX 110-230 Vac/dc

NVA100-DX#MM00
158.0 ±0.3
164.4
177

156

164.4

N.4 holes ø 4.2

N.4 holes ø 4.2

RACK MOUNTING
482.6
465
177 (4U)
101.6

374 NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016

APPENDIX
8.10 APPENDIX E - Revisions history

DSP CPU
Firmware Firmware Documentation Communication Date Description
Release Release

1.00 1.00 NVA100X-D-Manual-01-2014 ThySetter 3.6.9 First edition

1.00 1.00 NVA100X-D-Manual-03-2014 ThySetter 3.6.9 04-2014 24 element and PLC removed
1.10 1.20 NVA100X-D-Manual-04-2014 ThySetter 3.6.9 06-2014 Correction on par. 4 (Convenctions), description of
50N/51N(Comp) element , EC conformity, details
1.10 1.40 NVA100X-D-Manual-01-2015 ThySetter 3.6.11 01-2015 Correct description of 27, 27V1, 37, 37P, 55, 81U elements, added
Level A specification for IEC61850 protocol and reference values
for operate time (section 3)
1.10 1.40 NVA100X-D-Manual-02-2015 ThySetter 3.6.11 02-2015 Added references to external module for selection of digital
inputs activation threshold
1.10 1.40 NVA100X-D-Manual-02-2015 ThySetter 3.6.13 03-2016 Deleted note at pag. 246 concerning a wrong fw revision
1.10 1.40 NVA100X-D-Manual-02-2016 ThySetter 3.6.13 04-2016 Tables Virtual I/O (sect.4), self-test (sect.5), maintenance (sect.7)

NVA100X-D - Manual - 02 - 2016 375

APPENDIX
8.11 APPENDIX F - EC Declaration of conformity

Manufacturer: THYTRONIC S.p.A.

Address: Piazza Mistral 7 - 20139 MILANO

The undersigned manufacturer herewith declares that the product

Protection relay - NVA100X-Dxxx

is in conformity with the previsions of the following EC directives (including all applicable amendments) when installed in accordance
with the installation instructions:
Reference n° title
2014/35/EC Low Voltage Directive
2014/30/EC EMC Directive

Reference of standards and/or technical specifications applied for this declaration of conformity or parts thereof:

- harmonized standards:

Reference n° issue title

EN 61010-1 2010 Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement, control and laboratory use

EN 50263 2000 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)

Product standard for measuring relays and protection equipments

EN 61000-6-4 2007-2011 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)

Emission standard for industrial environments

EN 61000-6-2 2005 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)

Immunity standard for industrial environments

- other standards and/or technical specifications:

Reference n° issue title

EN 60255-1 2011 Electrical relays

Part 6: General requirements for measuring relays and protection equipment

Year of CE marking: 2014

Signature .............................................

Name FIORE Mattia

Title Managing director
Date 01-2014

Headquarters: 20139 Milano - Piazza Mistral, 7 - Tel. +39 02 574 957 01 ra - Fax +39 02 574 037 63
Factory: 35127 Padova - Z.I. Sud - Via dell’Artigianato, 48 - Tel. +39 049 894 770 1 ra - Fax +39 049 870 139 0

www.thytronic.it www.thytronic.com [email protected]